Acts of the dispute and conference holden at Paris, in the moneths of Iuly and August. 1566. Betweene two doctors of Sorbon, and two ministers of the Reformed Church A most excellent tract, wherein the learned may take pleasure, and the ignorant reape knowledge. Translated out of French by Iohn Golburne, and diuided according to the daies.
         Actes de la dispute & conference tenue à Paris. English.
      
       
         
           1602
        
      
       Approx. 590 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 136 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2009-10 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A14408
         STC 24727
         ESTC S119134
         99854341
         99854341
         19757
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A14408)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 19757)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 368:3)
      
       
         
           
             Acts of the dispute and conference holden at Paris, in the moneths of Iuly and August. 1566. Betweene two doctors of Sorbon, and two ministers of the Reformed Church A most excellent tract, wherein the learned may take pleasure, and the ignorant reape knowledge. Translated out of French by Iohn Golburne, and diuided according to the daies.
             Actes de la dispute & conference tenue à Paris. English.
             Golburne, John.
             Vigor, Simon, d. 1575.
             Sainctes, Claude de, 1525-1591.
             Du Rosier, Hugues Sureau.
             L'Espine, Jean de, ca. 1506-1597.
          
           [8], 263, [5] p.
           
             Printed by Thomas Creede,
             London :
             1602.
          
           
             A translation of: Actes de la dispute & conference tenue à Paris.
             The disputants, named in the preface, were Simon Vigor and Claude de Sainctes of the Sorbonne, and Hugues Sureau Du Rosier and Jean de L'Espine of the Reformed Church.
             The first leaf is blank except for signature-mark "A.".
             With a final errata leaf.
             Reproduction of the original in the Henry E. Huntington Library and Art Gallery.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Catholic Church -- Controversial literature -- Early works to 1800.
           Protestantism -- Apologetic works -- Early works to 1800.
           Religious disputations -- France -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2006-10 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2006-10 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2008-11 John Latta
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2008-11 John Latta
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2009-02 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           Acts
           of
           the
           Dispute
           and
           Conference
           holden
           at
           Paris
           ,
           in
           the
           Moneths
           of
           Iuly
           and
           August
           .
           1566.
           
           Betweene
           two
           Doctors
           of
           Sorbon
           ,
           and
           two
           Ministers
           of
           the
           Reformed
           Church
           .
        
         
           A
           most
           excellent
           Tract
           ,
           wherein
           the
           learned
           may
           take
           pleasure
           ,
           and
           the
           ignorant
           reape
           knowledge
           .
        
         
           Translated
           out
           of
           French
           by
           
             Iohn
             Golburne
          
           ,
           and
           diuided
           according
           to
           the
           daies
           .
        
         
           
             Magna
             est
             veritas
             &
             praeualet
             .
          
           
             Ecclesiasticus
             .
             33.
             16.
             
          
        
         
           
             Behold
             how
             I
             haue
             not
             laboured
             only
             for
             my selfe
             ,
             but
             for
             all
             them
             also
             that
             seeke
             knowledge
             .
          
        
         
           LONDON
           Printed
           by
           Thomas
           Creede
           .
        
         
           1602.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           RIGHT
           Honorable
           Sir
           
             Thomas
             Egerton
          
           Knight
           :
           Lord
           Keeper
           of
           the
           great
           Seale
           of
           England
           :
           Chamberlaine
           of
           the
           Countie
           Palatine
           of
           Chester
           :
           and
           of
           
             her
             Maiesties
             most
             Honorable
             priuie
             Counsaile
             .
          
        
         
           
             I.
             G.
          
           wisheth
           all
           health
           ,
           honour
           ,
           and
           euerlasting
           happinesse
           .
        
         
           RIght
           Honourable
           ,
           my
           good
           Lorde
           :
           If
           affectionate
           dutie
           shall
           be
           held
           presumption
           ,
           or
           any
           taxe
           me
           of
           rashnesse
           ,
           for
           still
           troubling
           your
           Lordship
           with
           my
           rude
           labors
           ;
           I
           plead
           mine
           excuse
           ,
           with
           the
           Poet
           Affranius
           :
           who
           (
           blamed
           for
           guilt
           of
           like
           crime
           to
           Traian
           )
           yet
           dared
           to
           present
           him
           ,
           with
           homely
           Poems
           :
           excusing
           himselfe
           still
           ,
           with
           the
           curtesie
           of
           the
           Emperour
           ,
           which
           as
           Princely
           accepted
           ,
           as
           the
           other
           poorely
           offered
           :
           And
           so
           shrowded
           with
           the
           shelter
           of
           your
           honorable
           curtesie
           ,
           I
           shall
           be
           shielded
           from
           the
           stormes
           of
           
           idle
           imputations
           ,
           stop
           (
           as
           did
           Affranius
           )
           the
           mouthes
           of
           my
           Taxors
           ▪
           and
           aduenture
           once
           more
           to
           present
           vnto
           your
           Lordship
           ,
           my
           prison-night-watches
           ,
           as
           a
           simple
           token
           of
           my
           thankfulnesse
           ,
           and
           pledge
           of
           further
           dutie
           :
           then
           deeming
           my selfe
           happie
           ,
           when
           I
           may
           acknowledge
           your
           honourable
           goodnesse
           ,
           with
           any
           performance
           of
           dutie
           ,
           or
           acceptable
           seruice
           to
           your
           Lordship
           ,
           to
           whom
           ,
           both
           my self
           ,
           and
           poore
           endeuours
           ,
           are
           wholy
           deuoted
           .
           The
           worthy
           and
           necessary
           vse
           of
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           I
           leaue
           to
           the
           graue
           iudgment
           of
           learned
           Censors
           :
           and
           in
           all
           dutie
           and
           zeale
           ,
           do
           offer
           it
           to
           your
           Lordships
           Patronage
           ,
           &
           assure
           me
           of
           your
           like
           good
           (
           as
           former
           )
           acceptance
           .
           For
           a
           good
           vine
           yeeldes
           grapes
           ,
           still
           answerable
           to
           it
           nature
           ▪
           and
           an
           honourable
           mind
           ,
           the
           fruits
           of
           an
           honorable
           disposition
           .
           Long
           liue
           ,
           and
           prosper
           (
           ho.
           Lord
           )
           .
           
             Pater
             sis
             Patriae
             ,
             &
             Ecclesiae
             ,
             &
             Reipublicae
             charus
             .
          
           So
           in
           all
           humilitie
           ,
           I
           take
           leaue
           .
           Fleete
           this
           25.
           of
           March.
           1602.
           
        
         
           
             Your
             Lordships
             most
             bounden
             
             in
             all
             dutifull
             affection
             ;
             
             
               Iohn
               Golburne
            
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Translator
           to
           the
           Christian
           Reader
           .
        
         
           AMongst
           all
           the
           meanes
           ,
           prescribed
           by
           wisedome
           ,
           to
           attaine
           the
           perfection
           of
           true
           knowledge
           ,
           there
           is
           none
           (
           good
           Reader
           )
           in
           my
           poore
           conceit
           ,
           more
           necessarie
           for
           the
           ignorant
           ,
           next
           to
           the
           fountaine
           of
           life
           ,
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           then
           the
           reading
           of
           Controuersies
           ;
           wherein
           the
           truth
           is
           debated
           ,
           the
           reasons
           on
           both
           sides
           deduced
           ,
           and
           laid
           open
           to
           the
           view
           ,
           and
           Readers
           iudgement
           .
           For
           ,
           as
           by
           striking
           together
           of
           the
           steele
           &
           flint
           ,
           the
           fire
           is
           out
           forced
           :
           euen
           so
           by
           disputation
           and
           conference
           ,
           the
           truth
           is
           boulted
           out
           ,
           and
           decyded
           .
           But
           because
           it
           is
           hard
           for
           a
           blinde
           man
           to
           iudge
           of
           colours
           ,
           and
           we
           being
           all
           blinde
           by
           nature
           ,
           and
           ignorant
           of
           God
           and
           goodnesse
           ,
           are
           of
           our selues
           vncapable
           of
           right
           iudgement
           in
           matters
           of
           faith
           :
           for
           flesh
           and
           bloud
           cannot
           attaine
           vnto
           it
           ;
           neither
           can
           the
           naturall
           man
           discerne
           the
           things
           of
           God
           :
           we
           must
           therefore
           vse
           the
           appointed
           meanes
           of
           our
           saluation
           ;
           namely
           ,
           hearing
           ,
           reading
           ,
           and
           meditating
           of
           Gods
           sacred
           word
           :
           which
           is
           onely
           able
           to
           make
           vs
           wise
           vnto
           saluation
           ,
           and
           to
           enlighten
           the
           eyes
           of
           the
           simple
           .
           So
           that
           by
           this
           touchstone
           ,
           and
           faithfull
           inuocation
           of
           God
           ,
           in
           the
           name
           and
           sole
           mediation
           of
           Christ
           Iesus
           ,
           for
           the
           direction
           of
           his
           holy
           spirit
           ;
           wee
           shal
           be
           enabled
           to
           know
           all
           things
           ,
           and
           to
           trye
           the
           true
           and
           pure
           Gold
           from
           the
           false
           and
           counterfeit
           :
           and
           then
           (
           comparing
           the
           sayings
           
           and
           assertions
           of
           both
           sides
           ,
           with
           the
           sincere
           &
           vndeceiueable
           milke
           of
           Gods
           word
           )
           we
           shal
           be
           likewise
           able
           to
           discerne
           the
           spirit
           of
           God
           ,
           from
           the
           spirit
           of
           Error
           :
           and
           discerning
           ,
           shall
           perceiue
           the
           incomparable
           beautie
           of
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           the
           vgly
           deformitie
           of
           the
           other
           .
           Which
           thing
           waighing
           with
           my selfe
           ,
           and
           finding
           in
           this
           Treatise
           ,
           both
           the
           deepnesse
           of
           Sathan
           ,
           and
           the
           inuincible
           force
           of
           truth
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           power
           of
           God
           vnto
           saluation
           of
           all
           true
           beleeuers
           ,
           I
           resolued
           at
           the
           speciall
           instance
           of
           a
           religious
           friend
           ,
           who
           had
           begun
           the
           Translation
           ,
           to
           attempt
           ,
           effect
           ,
           and
           finish
           the
           same
           :
           which
           by
           diuine
           assistance
           ,
           I
           haue
           faithfully
           performed
           ,
           and
           here
           present
           it
           to
           thy
           view
           .
           Read
           it
           with
           consideration
           ,
           consider
           thereof
           with
           iudgement
           ,
           and
           iudge
           with
           discretion
           ;
           so
           shalt
           thou
           finde
           not
           onely
           pleasure
           ,
           but
           much
           profit
           ,
           in
           matters
           discussed
           of
           greatest
           moment
           .
           For
           which
           ,
           and
           all
           things
           else
           ,
           giue
           God
           the
           glory
           ,
           make
           vse
           for
           thine
           instruction
           ,
           and
           accept
           my
           poore
           endeuour
           ;
           whose
           desire
           was
           to
           do
           thee
           good
           .
           Farewell
           .
        
         
           
             Thine
             in
             the
             Lord
             ,
             
             
               I.
               G.
            
             
          
        
      
       
         
         
           The
           Preface
           containing
           the
           occasions
           
             of
             the
             Dispute
             following
          
           .
        
         
           FOr
           that
           I
           doubt
           not
           ,
           but
           many
           persons
           (
           filled
           with
           the
           commō
           brute
           of
           the
           conference
           should
           bee
           made
           at
           the
           house
           of
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ,
           betweene
           the
           Doctors
           of
           the
           one
           part
           ,
           and
           the
           Ministers
           of
           the
           other
           ,
           appointed
           for
           that
           purpose
           )
           desire
           to
           know
           the
           truth
           :
           and
           that
           others
           speake
           thereof
           diuersly
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           reports
           thereof
           made
           vnto
           them
           ,
           or
           their
           conceiued
           imaginations
           concerning
           the
           same
           :
           Me
           seemeth
           ,
           that
           to
           satisfie
           the
           one
           ,
           and
           take
           from
           the
           other
           all
           occasion
           of
           lying
           or
           giuing
           credit
           to
           lies
           :
           it
           should
           bee
           good
           to
           put
           briefly
           in
           writing
           all
           the
           matter
           as
           it
           passed
           :
           and
           likewise
           to
           declare
           ,
           what
           was
           the
           motiue
           ,
           &
           first
           occasion
           of
           the
           same
           .
        
         
           My
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Montpensier
           ,
           who
           (
           as
           each
           one
           knoweth
           )
           is
           very
           zealous
           of
           his
           Religion
           ,
           and
           dearely
           loueth
           his
           children
           ;
           seeing
           that
           his
           daughter
           the
           Duchesse
           of
           Buillon
           was
           departed
           from
           the
           Komish
           Religion
           ,
           thenceforth
           to
           follow
           that
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           :
           and
           that
           without
           chilling
           ,
           shee
           still
           perseuered
           ,
           and
           more
           and
           more
           increased
           in
           the
           knowledge
           and
           feare
           of
           God
           :
           in
           zeale
           ,
           godlinesse
           ,
           and
           all
           other
           
           good
           and
           commendable
           vertues
           ;
           (
           his
           speech
           he
           had
           in
           the
           beginning
           with
           her
           ,
           and
           other
           meanes
           he
           had
           since
           assaied
           ,
           to
           reduce
           and
           call
           her
           backe
           from
           the
           way
           wherein
           shee
           was
           ,
           nought
           preuailing
           )
           :
           willed
           for
           a
           last
           remedie
           ,
           to
           attempt
           if
           he
           could
           ,
           to
           winne
           her
           by
           the
           meanes
           and
           remonstrance
           of
           a
           Doctor
           named
           Vigor
           ,
           whom
           he
           much
           esteemed
           .
           And
           to
           the
           end
           that
           the
           said
           Lady
           should
           remaine
           more
           satisfied
           ,
           hauing
           called
           my
           Lord
           of
           Buillon
           her
           husband
           ,
           hee
           declared
           vnto
           him
           his
           minde
           ,
           and
           said
           ;
           hee
           was
           contented
           that
           the
           said
           remonstrance
           should
           bee
           made
           to
           his
           daughter
           ,
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           some
           Ministers
           ;
           as
           namely
           of
           Spina
           ,
           &
           such
           others
           as
           she
           should
           please
           to
           choose
           :
           to
           the
           ende
           that
           had
           they
           any
           thing
           to
           say
           against
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           saide
           Vigor
           ,
           they
           should
           alleadge
           it
           ;
           And
           if
           after
           they
           had
           conferred
           together
           ,
           they
           were
           not
           confuted
           by
           him
           ,
           and
           wholly
           vanquished
           ,
           that
           his
           daughter
           should
           then
           abide
           in
           her
           opinion
           ;
           without
           that
           hee
           ,
           or
           some
           others
           of
           his
           side
           would
           euer
           assay
           ought
           to
           diuert
           her
           .
        
         
           My
           Lord
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           promised
           to
           accomplish
           his
           commaund
           therein
           :
           and
           to
           shewe
           his
           obedience
           to
           him
           .
           Shortly
           after
           hee
           imparted
           the
           same
           to
           my
           Lord
           the
           Admirall
           ;
           by
           whose
           aduice
           ,
           and
           other
           Lords
           which
           hee
           spake
           too
           ,
           
             De
             Spina
          
           was
           suddenly
           sent
           for
           ;
           who
           beeing
           come
           vnto
           them
           ,
           and
           hauing
           vnderstood
           all
           that
           aforesaid
           ,
           said
           ;
           that
           hee
           hoped
           for
           little
           fruite
           of
           all
           this
           Conference
           ;
           considering
           the
           qualitie
           and
           humour
           of
           the
           man
           with
           whom
           hee
           was
           to
           deale
           :
           because
           hee
           is
           much
           more
           partiall
           
           for
           the
           Pope
           and
           his
           traditions
           ,
           then
           zealous
           for
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           truth
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           .
           Which
           thing
           ,
           those
           that
           were
           present
           did
           well
           approoue
           .
           Neuerthelesse
           ,
           hee
           was
           purposed
           for
           two
           considerations
           ,
           to
           present
           himselfe
           at
           the
           said
           Conference
           :
           the
           one
           ,
           to
           support
           and
           stablish
           my
           said
           Lady
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           ,
           against
           the
           Sophismes
           ,
           and
           cauillations
           of
           the
           said
           Vigor
           :
           the
           other
           ,
           to
           take
           from
           him
           the
           occasion
           to
           boast
           (
           as
           his
           custome
           is
           )
           that
           the
           Ministers
           durst
           not
           appeare
           before
           him
           .
        
         
           And
           then
           was
           the
           proceeding
           and
           order
           aduised
           of
           ,
           which
           they
           should
           hold
           in
           the
           said
           Conference
           .
           And
           that
           the
           said
           
             De
             Spina
          
           should
           first
           require
           ,
           that
           it
           might
           be
           authorized
           by
           the
           Kings
           permission
           :
           Afterwards
           ,
           that
           to
           auoyd
           all
           confusion
           ,
           it
           should
           bee
           made
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           a
           fewe
           persons
           ;
           Thirdly
           ,
           that
           there
           should
           bee
           some
           certaine
           theame
           and
           subiect
           proposed
           ,
           wherof
           they
           should
           conferre
           :
           Fourthly
           ,
           that
           there
           should
           be
           two
           Moderators
           of
           the
           whole
           Action
           ,
           and
           two
           others
           deputed
           ,
           faithfully
           to
           collect
           all
           the
           reasons
           and
           arguments
           which
           should
           bee
           brought
           forth
           by
           the
           parties
           .
        
         
           All
           which
           things
           hauing
           beene
           proposed
           to
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buillon
           ,
           as
           well
           by
           Monsieur
           the
           Admirall
           :
           as
           by
           the
           said
           
             De
             Spina
          
           ,
           hee
           found
           them
           very
           reasonable
           ,
           and
           promised
           to
           giue
           the
           best
           order
           he
           could
           to
           all
           the
           businesse
           :
           admonishing
           
             De
             Spina
          
           to
           be
           readie
           the
           first
           day
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           1566.
           for
           after
           dinner
           hee
           should
           make
           the
           said
           Conference
           .
           By
           meanes
           whereof
           ,
           the
           same
           
             De
             Spina
          
           to
           prepare
           himselfe
           ,
           went
           to
           finde
           out
           
             Monsieur
             Barbaste
          
           ,
           Minister
           
           to
           the
           Queene
           of
           Nauarre
           ,
           whom
           hee
           prayed
           to
           vouchsafe
           to
           accompany
           ,
           and
           second
           him
           in
           the
           said
           conference
           .
           Which
           he
           graunting
           ,
           both
           two
           ,
           together
           with
           three
           other
           Gentlemen
           ,
           left
           by
           my
           said
           Lord
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           to
           conduct
           them
           ;
           went
           after
           dinner
           ,
           the
           day
           and
           yeare
           aboue
           said
           ,
           to
           the
           house
           of
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ;
           where
           when
           they
           were
           arriued
           ,
           the
           Duke
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           aduertised
           thereof
           by
           one
           of
           the
           said
           Gentlemen
           ,
           came
           vnto
           them
           in
           the
           Hall
           where
           they
           were
           .
           And
           speaking
           to
           
             De
             Spina
          
           ,
           demaunded
           of
           him
           (
           induced
           as
           is
           likely
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           assembled
           in
           the
           chamber
           whence
           hee
           came
           )
           if
           he
           were
           purposed
           and
           resolued
           to
           pray
           ,
           after
           the
           custome
           of
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           before
           they
           began
           the
           said
           conference
           .
           He
           answered
           yea
           :
           and
           that
           neither
           he
           ,
           nor
           his
           companion
           ,
           could
           not
           ,
           nor
           ought
           to
           attempt
           a
           thing
           of
           such
           importance
           ,
           as
           to
           handle
           the
           Mysteries
           of
           Christian
           Religion
           ;
           without
           first
           being
           prepared
           therevnto
           by
           the
           inuocation
           of
           Gods
           name
           .
           That
           heard
           ,
           hee
           entred
           the
           chamber
           where
           the
           Doctors
           were
           assembled
           :
           and
           hauing
           communicated
           to
           them
           the
           answere
           of
           the
           said
           Ministers
           ,
           they
           appointed
           Doctor
           Ruze
           ,
           to
           declare
           vnto
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           would
           not
           be
           present
           at
           their
           prayers
           ,
           and
           that
           no
           more
           reasonable
           it
           was
           ,
           that
           they
           should
           bee
           there
           ,
           then
           they
           at
           their
           Masse
           .
           The
           Ministers
           answered
           :
           that
           they
           could
           not
           with
           good
           conscience
           begin
           the
           conference
           ,
           before
           they
           had
           prayed
           vnto
           God
           :
           and
           that
           it
           was
           in
           the
           Doctors
           choise
           &
           pleasure
           to
           be
           present
           ,
           or
           absent
           at
           their
           praiers
           ;
           And
           they
           for
           their
           part
           would
           content
           themselues
           to
           pray
           in
           the
           place
           &
           assembly
           ,
           wherin
           the
           conference
           should
           
           be
           made
           .
           But
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           that
           their
           prayers
           ,
           which
           are
           (
           as
           they
           themselues
           confesse
           )
           conformable
           to
           the
           pure
           word
           of
           God
           ;
           and
           their
           Masse
           ,
           wherin
           are
           many
           things
           contrary
           therevnto
           ,
           (
           as
           they
           may
           easily
           know
           and
           iudge
           that
           will
           trie
           and
           examine
           it
           by
           the
           rule
           of
           the
           scripture
           )
           were
           not
           like
           things
           ;
           And
           so
           ,
           by
           meanes
           of
           the
           impietie
           and
           Idolatrie
           which
           is
           in
           their
           Masse
           ,
           they
           could
           not
           any
           way
           communicate
           thereat
           ,
           without
           offence
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           making
           themselues
           highly
           culpable
           before
           him
           :
           but
           that
           he
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Doctors
           his
           companions
           could
           not
           be
           letted
           by
           any
           such
           difficulties
           to
           be
           present
           at
           their
           prayers
           :
           For
           as
           much
           as
           there
           was
           no
           article
           which
           (
           by
           their
           owne
           confession
           )
           〈◊〉
           not
           holy
           ,
           and
           according
           to
           God.
           Herevpon
           replied
           Doctor
           Ruze
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           staied
           on
           a
           thing
           of
           small
           moment
           .
           And
           they
           answered
           ,
           that
           the
           principall
           exercise
           of
           Christian
           Religion
           ,
           was
           prayer
           :
           and
           that
           it
           is
           a
           necessarie
           mean
           to
           obtaine
           the
           fauour
           and
           grace
           of
           God
           ;
           without
           which
           ,
           men
           cannot
           attaine
           successe
           ,
           nor
           any
           good
           speed
           in
           all
           their
           workes
           :
           and
           that
           therfore
           the
           omission
           thereof
           was
           verie
           pernitious
           .
           And
           that
           they
           for
           their
           part
           were
           abashed
           ,
           that
           he
           ,
           which
           called
           himselfe
           a
           Doctor
           ,
           and
           Diuine
           ,
           should
           make
           so
           litle
           account
           of
           praier
           ;
           which
           is
           the
           true
           practise
           ,
           fruite
           ,
           and
           vse
           ,
           of
           all
           the
           knowledge
           which
           can
           be
           had
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           his
           word
           :
           and
           that
           therein
           one
           may
           know
           what
           was
           the
           iudgement
           of
           them
           ,
           which
           measure
           diuinitie
           by
           Idle
           and
           vaine
           speculations
           .
           Then
           said
           he
           vn-them
           :
           that
           the
           Duke
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ,
           would
           neuer
           suffer
           ,
           he
           should
           so
           be
           braued
           in
           his
           owne
           house
           :
           nor
           that
           it
           should
           bee
           said
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           had
           made
           
           their
           prayers
           .
           Wherevnto
           answered
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           that
           to
           braue
           ,
           was
           a
           thing
           contrarie
           to
           their
           profession
           .
           And
           that
           so
           farre
           off
           were
           they
           from
           brauing
           of
           Princes
           ,
           (
           to
           whom
           they
           owed
           all
           honour
           ,
           feare
           ,
           and
           obedience
           )
           that
           they
           would
           condemne
           themselues
           if
           so
           be
           they
           had
           vsed
           it
           ,
           to
           a
           man
           of
           the
           basest
           qualitie
           in
           the
           world
           .
           And
           added
           moreouer
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           and
           such
           others
           ,
           which
           charged
           them
           with
           such
           slaunders
           towards
           Princes
           ,
           to
           stirre
           vp
           ,
           and
           moue
           them
           against
           them
           ,
           should
           be
           assured
           they
           should
           once
           answere
           before
           God
           for
           the
           same
           .
           Herevpon
           spake
           Doctor
           Ruze
           ,
           and
           demaunded
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           why
           they
           stood
           so
           stifly
           vppon
           that
           point
           of
           prayer
           .
           They
           f●●
           answere
           proposed
           vnto
           him
           ;
           first
           ,
           that
           the
           end
           of
           the
           Conference
           ,
           was
           to
           manifest
           the
           true
           meaning
           of
           the
           scripture
           ,
           and
           make
           the
           hearers
           vnderstand
           it
           :
           which
           thing
           could
           not
           be
           done
           ,
           without
           the
           spirit
           of
           God
           ;
           who
           enlightneth
           the
           minde
           and
           vnderstanding
           to
           comprehend
           it
           ;
           and
           openeth
           the
           mouthes
           to
           expresse
           the
           same
           :
           And
           therefore
           it
           behoueth
           to
           implore
           and
           obtaine
           his
           grace
           by
           prayers
           .
           Afterwards
           ,
           that
           God
           commaunded
           all
           those
           that
           want
           wisedome
           ,
           to
           aske
           it
           of
           him
           ;
           and
           to
           seeke
           what
           they
           would
           finde
           ;
           and
           to
           knocke
           ,
           if
           they
           would
           haue
           him
           to
           open
           vnto
           them
           .
           All
           which
           things
           cannot
           otherwise
           bee
           obtained
           ,
           then
           by
           prayers
           .
           And
           therefore
           concluded
           ,
           that
           for
           this
           cause
           they
           were
           necessary
           .
           They
           alledged
           further
           ,
           that
           all
           things
           ought
           to
           be
           reduced
           to
           the
           glory
           of
           God
           :
           and
           that
           inuocation
           was
           therefore
           requisite
           in
           the
           beginning
           ,
           and
           thankesgiuing
           at
           the
           ending
           and
           consummation
           of
           all
           our
           workes
           ,
           nor
           more
           ,
           nor
           lesse
           ,
           
           then
           wee
           beginne
           and
           finish
           our
           repast
           ,
           in
           blessing
           and
           praising
           the
           name
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           Then
           said
           Doctor
           Ruze
           vnto
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           would
           not
           hinder
           them
           to
           pray
           vnto
           God
           :
           but
           that
           they
           should
           do
           it
           in
           their
           hearts
           .
           And
           they
           answered
           :
           that
           it
           was
           not
           sufficient
           ;
           but
           that
           it
           behoued
           to
           pray
           also
           with
           the
           mouth
           ,
           as
           S.
           Paul
           commandeth
           :
           withdraw
           your selues
           then
           into
           some
           place
           apart
           (
           said
           hee
           )
           and
           make
           your
           praiers
           all
           alone
           .
           They
           answered
           :
           that
           in
           such
           an
           act
           ,
           it
           ought
           not
           so
           to
           be
           done
           :
           and
           that
           they
           were
           bound
           by
           the
           cōmandement
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           make
           their
           light
           to
           shine
           before
           men
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           seeing
           their
           good
           works
           ,
           they
           might
           haue
           means
           to
           glorifie
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           therby
           edified
           .
           Also
           that
           in
           so
           doing
           ,
           they
           might
           giue
           occasion
           of
           scandall
           to
           their
           neighbours
           ,
           confirming
           the
           euil
           opiniō
           imprinted
           by
           their
           aduersaries
           in
           some
           of
           their
           doctrine
           and
           exercises
           :
           to
           wit
           :
           that
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           errors
           and
           blasphemies
           which
           were
           therein
           ;
           they
           dared
           not
           to
           publish
           the
           same
           :
           and
           that
           to
           quite
           them
           of
           this
           slaunder
           ,
           meet
           it
           was
           ,
           that
           as
           they
           spake
           in
           publike
           ,
           their
           praiers
           should
           be
           also
           in
           publike
           .
           To
           be
           briefe
           ,
           that
           they
           ought
           not
           ,
           neither
           could
           they
           with
           reason
           refuse
           that
           which
           the
           King
           had
           graunted
           vnto
           them
           in
           the
           Conference
           of
           Poissy
           :
           where
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           assemblies
           there
           made
           ,
           they
           were
           alwayes
           permitted
           to
           pray
           to
           GOD
           publikely
           ,
           before
           they
           spake
           of
           any
           matter
           .
           And
           added
           for
           their
           last
           reason
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           verie
           needefull
           to
           comprehend
           in
           theyr
           prayers
           them
           ,
           and
           all
           those
           that
           should
           be
           present
           at
           the
           said
           conference
           :
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           God
           might
           grant
           grace
           both
           to
           them
           and
           others
           ,
           to
           dispoile
           them
           wholly
           of
           all
           
           their
           passions
           :
           and
           that
           there
           should
           bee
           nothing
           which
           might
           hinder
           them
           ,
           to
           iudge
           rightly
           of
           whatsoeuer
           should
           be
           proposed
           on
           the
           one
           side
           ,
           &
           on
           the
           other
           :
           And
           that
           he
           would
           also
           make
           the
           hearers
           docible
           and
           attentiue
           to
           gather
           to
           themselues
           some
           profit
           thereof
           .
           I
           shame
           here
           to
           recite
           one
           word
           which
           scaped
           from
           Doctor
           Ruze
           in
           this
           behalfe
           :
           who
           in
           contempt
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           his
           seruice
           ,
           said
           :
           that
           if
           the
           Ministers
           would
           goe
           pray
           ,
           he
           would
           go
           pisse
           during
           the
           time
           of
           prayer
           .
           Wherevpon
           the
           Ministers
           cryed
           out
           ,
           saying
           :
           What
           resolution
           ?
           what
           counsell
           ?
           what
           good
           word
           can
           be
           hoped
           for
           ,
           of
           a
           heart
           filled
           with
           so
           an
           apparant
           contempt
           of
           God
           ?
        
         
           My
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buillon
           ,
           and
           the
           said
           Doctor
           Ruze
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Ministers
           setled
           ,
           and
           firme
           in
           this
           ,
           not
           to
           enter
           into
           any
           conference
           before
           prayers
           were
           made
           ,
           in
           the
           presence
           of
           the
           assembly
           ,
           where
           the
           same
           should
           be
           made
           :
           after
           they
           had
           reported
           the
           same
           to
           my
           Lord
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Doctors
           which
           were
           with
           him
           ;
           they
           purposed
           to
           send
           them
           backe
           ;
           and
           that
           on
           this
           condition
           they
           should
           not
           conferre
           with
           them
           .
        
         
           Herevpon
           they
           departed
           :
           and
           as
           they
           were
           now
           arriued
           at
           the
           little
           Bridge
           of
           our
           Lady
           ,
           they
           called
           them
           backe
           ,
           and
           they
           forth
           with
           returned
           ;
           supposing
           they
           would
           graunt
           them
           what
           they
           requested
           .
           But
           herein
           were
           they
           deceiued
           .
           For
           Doctor
           Ruze
           came
           towards
           them
           to
           the
           gate
           ,
           and
           for
           a
           finall
           resolution
           ,
           said
           vnto
           them
           :
           that
           if
           they
           would
           pray
           ,
           they
           would
           giue
           them
           a
           house
           neare
           at
           hand
           :
           but
           that
           my
           Lord
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           would
           not
           permit
           ,
           they
           should
           make
           them
           in
           his
           house
           ;
           nor
           that
           any
           of
           his
           family
           should
           
           be
           present
           thereat
           .
           Wherevnto
           they
           answered
           ,
           that
           they
           now
           yeelded
           lesse
           vnto
           them
           ,
           then
           in
           the
           beginning
           they
           had
           done
           :
           and
           therefore
           they
           could
           not
           answere
           otherwise
           then
           they
           had
           answered
           .
        
         
           Thē
           Doctor
           Ruze
           addressed
           particularly
           his
           speech
           to
           the
           Minister
           
             De
             Spina
          
           ;
           to
           whom
           in
           scoffing
           maner
           ,
           he
           said
           two
           things
           :
           that
           he
           well
           saw
           ,
           he
           had
           no
           great
           desire
           to
           enter
           disputations
           :
           and
           that
           in
           times
           past
           he
           had
           bene
           of
           their
           company
           ;
           but
           that
           he
           was
           now
           cut
           off
           from
           them
           .
           Wherevnto
           answered
           
             De
             Spina
          
           ,
           that
           had
           he
           fled
           the
           conference
           ,
           he
           would
           not
           in
           that
           great
           heate
           ,
           haue
           come
           eight
           long
           miles
           ,
           nor
           left
           his
           Church
           ,
           which
           was
           to
           him
           more
           deare
           and
           acceptable
           then
           any
           other
           thing
           ,
           to
           finde
           them
           in
           their
           owne
           houses
           .
           And
           as
           touching
           his
           departing
           from
           them
           ,
           that
           hee
           thanked
           God
           hee
           had
           withdrawne
           himselfe
           from
           them
           :
           and
           that
           it
           was
           the
           greatest
           good
           ,
           that
           euer
           happened
           to
           him
           .
           And
           to
           the
           end
           that
           hee
           and
           his
           companions
           should
           no
           way
           doubt
           but
           that
           hee
           was
           readie
           to
           conferre
           with
           them
           ,
           he
           shewed
           them
           a
           way
           ,
           by
           which
           both
           parties
           might
           be
           satisfied
           :
           to
           wit
           ;
           that
           they
           should
           confer
           together
           by
           writing
           :
           shewing
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           be
           much
           more
           profitable
           ;
           for
           as
           much
           as
           by
           that
           meane
           ,
           they
           should
           withstand
           all
           contentions
           :
           that
           the
           arguments
           and
           answeres
           should
           better
           be
           meditated
           and
           digested
           :
           that
           many
           should
           thereby
           be
           edified
           ,
           and
           in
           so
           dooing
           ,
           there
           should
           be
           no
           daunger
           ,
           that
           by
           adding
           or
           diminishing
           ,
           they
           should
           bee
           any
           way
           altered
           .
        
         
           Ruze
           answered
           ,
           that
           they
           could
           write
           nothing
           which
           hath
           not
           beene
           written
           .
           And
           
             De
             Spina
          
           
           replied
           ;
           that
           they
           could
           not
           also
           speake
           ought
           ,
           which
           hath
           not
           bene
           spoken
           .
           This
           was
           the
           end
           and
           conclusion
           of
           al
           their
           speeches
           .
           Wherby
           may
           be
           seene
           ,
           what
           will
           the
           Doctors
           had
           to
           conferre
           with
           the
           Ministers
           :
           to
           whom
           ,
           at
           their
           arriuall
           (
           to
           stop
           their
           passage
           )
           they
           proposed
           such
           a
           condition
           ,
           as
           they
           were
           well
           assured
           ,
           should
           neuer
           be
           accepted
           of
           them
           :
           namely
           to
           enter
           into
           publike
           conference
           of
           the
           scripture
           ,
           before
           they
           had
           publikely
           prayed
           to
           God
           in
           the
           place
           and
           assembly
           where
           it
           should
           be
           made
           .
        
         
           Moreouer
           one
           may
           also
           iudge
           ,
           what
           was
           their
           intention
           ,
           by
           the
           order
           they
           had
           giuen
           ,
           to
           direct
           their
           conference
           .
           For
           in
           stead
           of
           procuring
           some
           place
           and
           rest
           to
           the
           said
           Ministers
           ,
           which
           were
           come
           vnto
           them
           ;
           there
           were
           at
           the
           least
           ,
           a
           hundred
           persons
           of
           all
           qualities
           about
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           to
           astonish
           them
           :
           some
           by
           scoffes
           :
           others
           by
           iniuries
           :
           others
           by
           threats
           :
           So
           that
           ,
           had
           it
           not
           bene
           the
           care
           which
           the
           three
           gentlemen
           of
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buillon
           had
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           to
           driue
           them
           often
           back
           ,
           which
           approached
           too
           neare
           them
           ;
           they
           had
           bene
           in
           danger
           to
           haue
           suffered
           outrage
           .
           One
           may
           also
           imagine
           ,
           how
           the
           Doctors
           do
           endeuour
           to
           serue
           God
           ,
           and
           pray
           vnto
           him
           :
           seeing
           they
           cannot
           endure
           him
           to
           be
           prayed
           vnto
           in
           their
           presence
           .
           And
           for
           conclusion
           ,
           what
           vnderstanding
           can
           they
           haue
           of
           the
           scripture
           ?
           with
           what
           faithfulnesse
           can
           they
           handle
           it
           ?
           And
           what
           dexteritie
           and
           facultie
           can
           they
           haue
           to
           preach
           it
           ,
           considering
           they
           disdaine
           ,
           and
           thinke
           it
           straunge
           ,
           that
           for
           the
           obtaining
           of
           all
           these
           things
           ,
           God
           should
           be
           prayed
           vnto
           in
           their
           presence
           ?
           As
           though
           their
           sufficiencie
           were
           in
           themselues
           ,
           and
           that
           it
           came
           not
           from
           him
           who
           is
           
           the
           wel-spring
           and
           author
           of
           all
           light
           .
        
         
           
             It
             followeth
             :
             of
             the
             occasions
             declared
             in
             the
             precedent
             Preface
             ,
             and
             first
             of
             the
             Dispute
             on
             Wednesday
             the
             ninth
             of
             Iuly
             ,
             1566.
             
          
        
         
           Albeit
           the
           Doctors
           by
           the
           meanes
           heere
           before
           declared
           ,
           had
           sought
           occasion
           to
           hinder
           the
           conference
           which
           was
           to
           be
           made
           betweene
           them
           and
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           in
           the
           house
           of
           my
           Lord
           
             De
             Montpensier
          
           :
           Neuerthelesse
           ,
           to
           auoyd
           the
           euil
           opinion
           that
           might
           be
           conceiued
           of
           them
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           their
           refusall
           ,
           to
           enter
           into
           the
           said
           conference
           ,
           they
           raised
           a
           rumour
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           perceiuing
           themselues
           weake
           ,
           and
           that
           their
           doctrine
           was
           vncertaine
           ,
           had
           fled
           the
           combat
           .
           Which
           thing
           beeing
           come
           to
           the
           eares
           of
           the
           King
           and
           Queene
           ,
           Mounsieur
           the
           Admirall
           ,
           seeing
           it
           might
           bring
           some
           scandall
           and
           damage
           to
           the
           reformed
           Churches
           ,
           if
           it
           were
           not
           presently
           met
           with
           :
           knowing
           also
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           a
           false
           reproach
           which
           they
           had
           put
           vpon
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           began
           to
           excuse
           them
           :
           assuring
           the
           King
           and
           the
           Queene
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           would
           alwaies
           be
           readie
           to
           conferre
           with
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           and
           to
           defend
           by
           the
           scripture
           ,
           the
           confession
           of
           their
           Churches
           ,
           in
           what
           place
           soeuer
           ,
           and
           before
           such
           persons
           ,
           as
           they
           would
           it
           should
           bee
           .
           So
           that
           they
           were
           permitted
           to
           pray
           vnto
           God
           (
           as
           they
           had
           required
           )
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           their
           conference
           ,
           and
           that
           they
           should
           there
           obserue
           the
           order
           and
           meanes
           which
           they
           had
           proposed
           ,
           or
           other
           better
           ,
           as
           they
           should
           thinke
           good
           :
           to
           the
           end
           to
           auoyd
           all
           wranglings
           ,
           and
           the
           confusion
           of
           voyce
           and
           cries
           ,
           as
           is
           ordinarily
           
           seene
           in
           schooles
           ,
           and
           disputes
           of
           Sophisters
           ,
           and
           contentious
           persons
           .
        
         
           My
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           hauing
           vnderstood
           these
           words
           of
           my
           Lord
           the
           Admirall
           ,
           found
           them
           verie
           reasonable
           ;
           and
           perswaded
           (
           as
           it
           is
           certaine
           )
           first
           by
           the
           spirit
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           by
           a
           haughtinesse
           and
           generositie
           of
           heart
           ;
           which
           thrust
           him
           forward
           ,
           with
           a
           will
           to
           vnderstand
           the
           truth
           of
           each
           thing
           ,
           sollicited
           the
           King
           and
           Queene
           ,
           that
           by
           theyr
           commission
           ,
           and
           vnder
           their
           authoritie
           ,
           the
           said
           Conference
           might
           bee
           established
           :
           And
           so
           wrought
           he
           ,
           that
           hee
           obtained
           of
           their
           Maiesties
           what
           hee
           demaunded
           .
           By
           meanes
           whereof
           ,
           hauing
           aduertised
           my
           Lord
           the
           Admirall
           of
           theyr
           pleasures
           ,
           they
           consulted
           together
           ,
           of
           the
           order
           should
           bee
           held
           in
           the
           same
           conference
           .
           And
           resolued
           in
           the
           end
           ,
           that
           my
           Lord
           
             De
             Neuers
          
           ,
           and
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Buillon
           ,
           should
           bee
           the
           chiefe
           Iudges
           therein
           ;
           and
           that
           of
           the
           one
           side
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           ,
           should
           some
           Gentlemen
           be
           present
           ,
           to
           bee
           witnesses
           and
           beholders
           ,
           of
           whatsoeuer
           should
           bee
           done
           in
           the
           same
           .
           And
           further
           ,
           that
           there
           should
           be
           two
           Notaries
           of
           both
           sides
           ,
           of
           the
           litle
           fort
           at
           Paris
           ,
           which
           should
           put
           in
           writing
           ,
           and
           signe
           whatsoeuer
           should
           be
           alleadged
           ,
           and
           proposed
           by
           the
           parties
           .
        
         
           These
           conditions
           thus
           conceiued
           ,
           and
           agreed
           of
           among
           the
           said
           Lords
           ;
           were
           also
           accepted
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           Vigor
           and
           
             De
             Sanctes
          
           of
           the
           one
           partie
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           Ministers
           
             De
             Spina
             ,
             &
             Sureau
          
           ,
           of
           the
           other
           partie
           :
           Who
           began
           to
           assemble
           themselues
           together
           on
           Tuesday
           the
           ninth
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           1566.
           in
           the
           house
           of
           my
           said
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           :
           where
           in
           his
           presence
           ,
           and
           of
           
           other
           Lords
           which
           were
           with
           him
           ,
           (
           after
           prayers
           made
           by
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           in
           the
           absence
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           who
           because
           they
           would
           not
           be
           present
           ,
           had
           withdrawn
           themselues
           apart
           )
           Doctor
           Vigor
           spake
           ,
           and
           began
           by
           protestation
           :
           That
           the
           cause
           why
           hee
           and
           his
           companion
           were
           entred
           into
           Conference
           with
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           was
           not
           to
           be
           instructed
           in
           any
           point
           of
           Religion
           :
           nor
           any
           way
           to
           withstand
           the
           Constitutions
           of
           the
           Councels
           ,
           and
           chiefly
           that
           of
           Trent
           ,
           by
           which
           they
           are
           forbidden
           to
           dispute
           with
           heretikes
           :
           And
           that
           they
           for
           their
           part
           ,
           were
           wholly
           resolued
           to
           abide
           in
           the
           faith
           of
           the
           Romish
           Church
           :
           but
           that
           at
           the
           request
           and
           pursuite
           of
           the
           Lord
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ,
           (
           who
           for
           the
           reducing
           of
           his
           daughter
           Madame
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           ,
           had
           required
           the
           said
           Conference
           )
           they
           were
           come
           thither
           to
           the
           end
           ,
           to
           satisfie
           him
           ,
           &
           declare
           the
           holy
           zeale
           they
           haue
           to
           seeke
           and
           bring
           backe
           to
           the
           flocke
           ,
           those
           which
           are
           thence
           departed
           .
        
         
           Wherevpon
           (
           their
           speeches
           ended
           )
           the
           Ministers
           speaking
           ,
           protested
           likewise
           ,
           that
           ,
           that
           which
           had
           led
           thē
           to
           conference
           with
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           was
           not
           ,
           because
           they
           doubted
           of
           any
           article
           conteined
           in
           their
           confession
           ,
           which
           they
           knew
           to
           bee
           drawne
           frō
           the
           pure
           word
           of
           God
           :
           but
           that
           it
           was
           to
           maintaine
           the
           same
           ,
           against
           the
           Sophistries
           and
           cauillations
           of
           thē
           which
           would
           impugne
           it
           ,
           and
           to
           retaine
           Madame
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           ,
           in
           the
           good
           and
           holy
           institution
           ,
           which
           shee
           had
           receiued
           by
           the
           grace
           which
           God
           had
           giuen
           her
           .
        
         
           Thus
           the
           protestations
           on
           both
           sides
           made
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           supposed
           that
           the
           Doctors
           (
           thē
           following
           the
           intention
           of
           my
           Lord
           
             de
             Montpensier
          
           ,
           and
           the
           desire
           of
           Madame
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           )
           should
           haue
           begunne
           
           the
           Conference
           by
           the
           Dispute
           of
           two
           points
           ,
           the
           Supper
           ,
           and
           the
           Masse
           .
           But
           as
           they
           that
           will
           besiege
           and
           batter
           a
           Towne
           ,
           begin
           a
           farre
           off
           to
           make
           their
           Trenches
           ,
           and
           approaches
           :
           to
           prepare
           themselues
           to
           the
           deciding
           and
           conference
           of
           the
           said
           two
           points
           ,
           they
           began
           to
           lay
           their
           foundation
           ,
           by
           the
           authoritie
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           wherevpon
           they
           would
           establish
           the
           certaintie
           of
           the
           Articles
           of
           faith
           ,
           and
           generally
           of
           all
           the
           holy
           Scripture
           .
           And
           therefore
           the
           demaunds
           and
           objections
           were
           proposed
           by
           the
           Doctors
           .
           And
           the
           answeres
           giuen
           by
           the
           Ministers
           ;
           
             De
             Sainctes
          
           beginning
           ,
           and
           
             De
             Spina
          
           answering
           ;
           as
           followeth
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           Actes
           of
           the
           Dispute
           and
           Conference
           holden
           at
           Paris
           .
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             WHerevpon
             doo
             you
             ground
             your
             Religion
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             What
             do
             you
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Doo
             you
             receiue
             for
             their
             writings
             all
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             olde
             ,
             as
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             attributing
             vnto
             all
             ,
             one
             like
             authoritie
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             No
             :
             but
             following
             antiquitie
             ,
             wee
             distinguish
             betweene
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             ,
             and
             the
             Apocripha
             :
             calling
             those
             Canonicall
             ,
             vpon
             whose
             doctrine
             ,
             the
             faith
             and
             all
             Christian
             religion
             is
             builded
             :
             And
             those
             Apocripha
             ,
             which
             haue
             not
             such
             authoritie
             that
             wee
             may
             build
             or
             establish
             vpon
             them
             any
             Article
             of
             faith
             ;
             but
             are
             proper
             to
             teach
             and
             well
             gouerne
             the
             estate
             of
             life
             ,
             and
             manners
             of
             Christians
             :
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             goodly
             ,
             and
             notable
             sentences
             which
             are
             comprised
             in
             them
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             By
             what
             meanes
             doo
             you
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             is
             Canonicall
             ,
             
             the
             other
             Apocripha
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             spirit
             of
             discretion
             ,
             and
             enlightneth
             all
             those
             vnto
             whom
             it
             is
             communicated
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             capable
             ,
             to
             bee
             able
             to
             iudge
             ,
             and
             discerne
             things
             spirituall
             ,
             and
             to
             know
             and
             apprehend
             the
             truth
             (
             when
             to
             them
             it
             is
             proposed
             )
             by
             the
             witnesse
             and
             assurance
             ,
             which
             thereof
             it
             giueth
             them
             in
             their
             hearts
             .
             And
             as
             wee
             discerne
             the
             light
             from
             darkenesse
             by
             the
             facultie
             of
             seeing
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             eye
             :
             euen
             so
             may
             wee
             easily
             seperate
             and
             acknowledge
             the
             truth
             from
             vntruth
             ,
             and
             from
             all
             things
             in
             generall
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             false
             ,
             absurd
             ,
             doubtfull
             ,
             or
             indifferent
             ,
             when
             as
             we
             are
             furnished
             with
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             guided
             by
             the
             light
             ,
             which
             it
             lightneth
             in
             our
             hearts
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Yea
             :
             but
             some
             man
             may
             boast
             to
             haue
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             hath
             it
             not
             .
             And
             we
             see
             by
             Histories
             ,
             that
             all
             heretikes
             haue
             euer
             thought
             to
             haue
             the
             truth
             on
             their
             side
             ,
             and
             endeuoured
             to
             authorise
             their
             doctrine
             by
             inward
             ●euelations
             ,
             which
             they
             feigne
             to
             haue
             receiued
             of
             Gods
             spirit
             :
             Whereby
             it
             may
             appeare
             what
             daunger
             there
             should
             bee
             to
             referre
             the
             censure
             of
             a
             booke
             ,
             or
             doctrine
             ,
             to
             the
             witnesse
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             one
             particular
             man
             shal
             imagine
             or
             feigne
             to
             haue
             receiued
             in
             his
             heart
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Very
             easie
             it
             is
             to
             auoyd
             such
             daunger
             ,
             in
             following
             the
             counsell
             which
             Saint
             Iohn
             doth
             giue
             vs
             in
             his
             first
             Catholike
             Epistle
             ;
             not
             to
             beleeue
             indifferently
             all
             spirits
             ,
             but
             to
             proue
             and
             diligently
             to
             examine
             them
             ,
             before
             wee
             receiue
             or
             approue
             what
             they
             propose
             .
             And
             the
             triall
             to
             be
             made
             in
             such
             a
             case
             is
             ,
             first
             to
             regard
             the
             ende
             wherevnto
             a
             doctrine
             tendeth
             ,
             which
             shall
             be
             declared
             vnto
             vs
             :
             or
             a
             booke
             that
             shall
             be
             presented
             vnto
             vs
             :
             For
             if
             it
             tend
             to
             establish
             and
             aduance
             the
             glory
             of
             God
             ;
             it
             is
             true
             :
             as
             Iesus
             Christ
             saieth
             in
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             That
             he
             which
             seeketh
             the
             glory
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             truth
             ,
             and
             there
             is
             no
             vnrighteousnesse
             in
             him
             .
          
           
           
             Afterwards
             we
             must
             consider
             whether
             being
             reduced
             to
             the
             proportion
             ,
             and
             the
             analogie
             of
             faith
             ,
             (
             as
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             )
             it
             
             well
             agreeth
             and
             accordeth
             with
             the
             principles
             and
             foundations
             of
             Religion
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             All
             say
             ,
             and
             may
             say
             as
             much
             thereof
             :
             and
             therefore
             this
             reason
             is
             no
             sufficient
             argument
             (
             as
             I
             conceiue
             by
             effect
             and
             other
             proofes
             )
             how
             I
             ought
             to
             stay
             my selfe
             thereupon
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             this
             answer
             passeth
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             proposition
             :
             For
             it
             presupposeth
             the
             Scripture
             to
             be
             the
             knowne
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             .
             And
             the
             proposition
             was
             to
             know
             the
             reason
             which
             should
             assure
             me
             ,
             that
             the
             Scripture
             was
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             behooueth
             to
             distinguish
             betweene
             the
             Bookes
             thereof
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             easie
             to
             iudge
             ,
             if
             the
             end
             of
             the
             doctrine
             proposed
             ,
             tendeth
             to
             establish
             and
             aduance
             the
             honour
             and
             glorie
             of
             God.
             As
             if
             men
             were
             exhorted
             thereby
             to
             withdraw
             wholly
             their
             trust
             from
             creatures
             ,
             wholly
             to
             settle
             and
             repose
             themselues
             in
             God
             ;
             to
             resort
             to
             him
             in
             all
             their
             necessities
             ,
             and
             to
             depend
             vpon
             his
             prouidence
             in
             all
             their
             affaires
             ,
             to
             praise
             and
             thanke
             him
             for
             all
             the
             goodnes
             they
             haue
             .
             This
             presupposed
             ,
             no
             man
             could
             doubt
             ,
             that
             the
             doctrine
             which
             tendeth
             to
             such
             an
             end
             ,
             should
             not
             be
             good
             and
             receiuable
             .
             And
             to
             that
             which
             hath
             bene
             proposed
             :
             that
             the
             former
             Answere
             was
             out
             of
             the
             limits
             of
             the
             first
             proposition
             it
             seemeth
             not
             :
             for
             that
             the
             first
             thing
             proposed
             ,
             was
             :
             
               What
               is
               the
               foundation
               of
               our
               Religion
               ?
            
             Wherunto
             it
             was
             answered
             :
             
               That
               it
               is
               the
               writings
               of
               the
               Prophets
               and
               Apostles
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             This
             answer
             is
             common
             to
             the
             Lutherans
             and
             Anabaptists
             ,
             yea
             also
             to
             the
             Deistes
             ,
             which
             say
             more
             then
             all
             others
             ,
             that
             they
             seeke
             the
             glorie
             of
             God
             :
             and
             all
             that
             which
             in
             the
             answere
             is
             written
             .
             And
             generally
             each
             man
             that
             should
             vse
             the
             like
             saying
             ,
             should
             not
             cease
             to
             erre
             in
             all
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             the
             first
             excepted
             .
             But
             to
             returne
             to
             the
             point
             
             without
             so
             much
             wandering
             it
             seemeth
             to
             vs
             not
             lawfull
             to
             vse
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             before
             it
             bee
             notorious
             and
             certaine
             that
             it
             is
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             difference
             amongst
             the
             bookes
             thereof
             .
             And
             before
             it
             bee
             known
             that
             I
             haue
             particular
             inspiration
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ;
             and
             that
             such
             a
             particular
             inspiration
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             be
             a
             sufficient
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Deistes
             ,
             and
             other
             here●iques
             cannot
             bee
             holpen
             (
             by
             the
             foresayd
             answere
             )
             for
             confirmation
             of
             their
             errors
             :
             Forasmuch
             as
             the
             Desties
             ,
             denying
             Jesus
             Christ
             ,
             cannot
             glorifie
             God
             :
             seeing
             that
             to
             glorifie
             the
             Father
             ,
             it
             behooueth
             first
             to
             know
             and
             to
             glorifie
             the
             Sonne
             ;
             no
             more
             also
             other
             heretiques
             :
             For
             that
             ,
             not
             knowing
             the
             trueth
             ,
             nor
             consequently
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             which
             is
             the
             way
             ,
             the
             life
             ,
             and
             the
             trueth
             )
             they
             cannot
             know
             nor
             glorifie
             God.
             And
             touching
             that
             obiected
             ,
             that
             the
             answere
             was
             from
             the
             purpose
             ;
             that
             may
             be
             iudged
             by
             the
             conference
             of
             the
             demand
             and
             answere
             .
             And
             for
             the
             latter
             point
             of
             the
             obiection
             ,
             wherein
             it
             is
             sayde
             :
             that
             the
             reuelation
             which
             each
             particular
             man
             sayth
             hee
             hath
             of
             the
             Spirite
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             to
             him
             the
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             :
             that
             was
             not
             answered
             ;
             But
             that
             the
             foundation
             of
             all
             true
             Religion
             ,
             is
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             .
             Of
             the
             trueth
             of
             which
             ,
             all
             the
             Church
             in
             generall
             ,
             and
             the
             members
             thereof
             in
             particular
             ,
             are
             assured
             ,
             by
             the
             witnes●e
             and
             inward
             reuelation
             of
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Then
             it
             behooued
             to
             adde
             whatsoeuer
             is
             heere
             sayde
             to
             the
             other
             answere
             before
             it
             were
             good
             :
             and
             it
             seemeth
             ,
             that
             the
             answere
             doeth
             containe
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             a
             mockerie
             .
             For
             it
             is
             certaine
             :
             that
             when
             all
             trueth
             is
             in
             the
             doctrine
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             that
             man
             is
             no
             more
             euill
             ,
             nor
             an
             heretique
             .
             But
             wee
             search
             out
             the
             beginning
             of
             trueth
             ,
             what
             it
             shou'd
             bee
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             reply
             ,
             which
             denieth
             that
             the
             particular
             reuelation
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             .
             There
             is
             no
             
             great
             difference
             :
             For
             if
             the
             particular
             reuelation
             bee
             a
             sufficient
             foundation
             for
             euery
             one
             to
             know
             what
             is
             of
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Prophets
             ,
             that
             particular
             reuelation
             by
             consequence
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             Religion
             .
             For
             that
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             knowledge
             ,
             whereupon
             euery
             particular
             man
             knoweth
             ,
             and
             sayeth
             his
             Religion
             is
             founded
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             answeres
             haue
             bene
             made
             according
             as
             the
             demaundes
             haue
             beene
             propounded
             :
             and
             it
             will
             not
             appeare
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             them
             that
             they
             are
             willing
             to
             mocke
             :
             For
             in
             such
             a
             Conference
             as
             this
             ,
             where
             the
             matter
             is
             to
             seeke
             out
             the
             honour
             and
             glory
             of
             God
             :
             Mockerie
             should
             bee
             ioyned
             with
             impietie
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             reuelation
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             equall
             to
             the
             Scripture
             (
             which
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             Religon
             )
             wee
             denie
             it
             ,
             and
             say
             :
             they
             bee
             things
             different
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             conioyned
             together
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             doo
             follow
             the
             one
             the
             other
             ,
             euen
             as
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             is
             written
             in
             Esay
             :
             Behold
             my
             couenant
             with
             them
             (
             sayth
             the
             
             Lord
             )
             my
             Spirit
             that
             is
             in
             thee
             ,
             and
             my
             wordes
             which
             I
             haue
             put
             in
             thy
             mouth
             ,
             shall
             not
             depart
             out
             of
             thy
             mouth
             ,
             nor
             out
             of
             the
             mouth
             of
             thy
             seede
             .
             And
             that
             which
             followeth
             :
             From
             whence
             a
             man
             may
             iudge
             the
             distinction
             which
             the
             Prophet
             putteth
             between
             the
             reuelation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             and
             the
             word
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             For
             conclusion
             of
             this
             Conference
             ,
             I
             leaue
             each
             man
             to
             iudge
             of
             the
             agreement
             of
             the
             answerers
             and
             obiections
             .
             And
             for
             that
             which
             is
             alledged
             of
             the
             vnion
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             text
             of
             Esay
             :
             they
             are
             things
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             and
             new
             matter
             .
             And
             we
             must
             not
             compare
             the
             reuelation
             of
             euery
             particular
             person
             (
             whereof
             was
             the
             question
             )
             vnto
             that
             of
             the
             Prophet
             Esay
             :
             who
             had
             other
             proofes
             that
             the
             Spi●●t
             spake
             by
             him
             ,
             and
             had
             oft
             times
             made
             demonstration
             thereof
             ▪
             And
             of
             all
             that
             aboue
             said
             ,
             I
             leaue
             the
             iudgement
             to
             euery
             Christian
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             We
             leaue
             also
             the
             iudgement
             of
             what
             hath
             beene
             spoken
             
             of
             the
             one
             part
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             to
             the
             hearers
             and
             readers
             .
             And
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             Esay
             produced
             ,
             the
             question
             is
             not
             of
             the
             reuelation
             of
             the
             Prophet
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             spirit
             ,
             communicated
             vnto
             him
             :
             but
             of
             the
             spirit
             ,
             and
             the
             words
             which
             God
             promised
             to
             all
             his
             people
             :
             with
             whom
             he
             made
             his
             couenant
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             other
             pretended
             proofes
             which
             the
             Prophet
             had
             of
             his
             vocation
             ;
             we
             make
             no
             doubt
             thereof
             .
             But
             we
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             principall
             and
             most
             assured
             was
             ,
             that
             ,
             which
             he
             had
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             God
             his
             Spirit
             ,
             as
             appeareth
             by
             the
             sixt
             Chapter
             of
             his
             Prophecie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Be
             it
             so
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             person
             of
             Esay
             be
             spake
             to
             his
             people
             ,
             it
             followeth
             not
             that
             he
             spake
             not
             to
             Esay
             first
             .
             And
             I
             allow
             that
             he
             promised
             indeed
             his
             spirit
             to
             his
             people
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             his
             Church
             vniuersal
             .
             Not
             that
             he
             wil
             that
             euery
             one
             ,
             yea
             ,
             being
             in
             this
             Church
             ,
             may
             brag
             and
             vsurpe
             to
             haue
             this
             spirit
             particularly
             promised
             vnto
             him
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             particular
             inspiration
             of
             Esay
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             founded
             on
             his
             onely
             fancie
             ,
             and
             presumption
             :
             but
             on
             the
             assurance
             that
             God
             gaue
             him
             by
             a
             worke
             supernaturall
             :
             as
             is
             said
             in
             the
             6.
             
             Chapter
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             yet
             sufficiently
             founded
             to
             bee
             beleeued
             ,
             as
             hauing
             inspiration
             ,
             had
             he
             not
             shewed
             the
             same
             by
             other
             effects
             ,
             and
             by
             other
             Prophesies
             already
             come
             to
             
             passe
             .
             As
             it
             behooueth
             euery
             Prophet
             should
             doo
             ,
             before
             he
             were
             beleeued
             :
             But
             leauing
             all
             those
             things
             as
             farre
             fetched
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             first
             proposition
             ,
             I
             referre
             the
             iudgement
             as
             before
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             not
             one
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             if
             he
             be
             a
             ture
             member
             therof
             ,
             vnto
             whom
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             is
             not
             communicated
             :
             
             As
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             and
             S.
             Iohn
             in
             his
             first
             Catholique
             Epistle
             teacheth
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             pretended
             presumption
             ,
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             betweene
             the
             presumption
             and
             imaginations
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             man
             (
             which
             is
             but
             darkenesse
             ,
             and
             of
             it selfe
             knoweth
             nothing
             of
             the
             thing
             of
             God
             )
             and
             the
             reuelations
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             which
             are
             certaine
             and
             assured
             .
             And
             
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             answeres
             are
             farre
             off
             from
             the
             first
             proposition
             ;
             if
             it
             be
             so
             ,
             the
             dema●nds
             are
             so
             also
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             conclusion
             is
             ,
             if
             each
             one
             ought
             to
             be
             beleeued
             in
             saying
             hee
             hath
             a
             particular
             reuelation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             without
             otherwise
             shewing
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             holy
             Scriptures
             :
             and
             that
             there
             is
             difference
             amongst
             them
             ,
             let
             euery
             one
             iudge
             if
             the
             demands
             and
             answeres
             be
             pertinent
             to
             this
             difficultie
             ,
             or
             no.
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             some
             of
             the
             newe
             doctrine
             doo
             shew
             no
             proofe
             ,
             more
             then
             others
             ,
             of
             their
             particular
             inspirations
             ,
             whether
             the
             one
             ought
             to
             be
             more
             beleeued
             then
             the
             other
             concerning
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             former
             answeres
             it
             hath
             beene
             declared
             ,
             how
             the
             reuelations
             pretended
             by
             particular
             persons
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             examined
             by
             the
             meanes
             ,
             by
             which
             men
             may
             iudge
             whether
             they
             be
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             no.
             
          
           
             Then
             spake
             Doctor
             Vigor
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             in
             the
             discourse
             aforesaid
             ,
             he
             had
             vnderstood
             many
             sayings
             contained
             in
             the
             answers
             of
             the
             Minister
             ,
             which
             were
             against
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             as
             when
             he
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             behooueth
             first
             to
             honour
             the
             Sonne
             before
             the
             father
             :
             Which
             the
             said
             Vigor
             reproouing
             ,
             the
             said
             Spyna
             maintained
             that
             thing
             to
             bee
             true
             :
             affirming
             ,
             such
             proposition
             to
             be
             grounded
             and
             contained
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             and
             first
             Catholique
             Epistle
             of
             
             S.
             Iohn
             .
          
           
             Vnto
             which
             Vigor
             replyed
             ;
             that
             in
             the
             said
             places
             ,
             the
             word
             
               (
               First
            
             )
             is
             not
             found
             .
             Neuertheles
             ,
             least
             he
             fall
             on
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             put
             forth
             and
             proposed
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             conference
             ,
             he
             wil
             not
             now
             enter
             into
             the
             confutation
             of
             that
             saying
             :
             reseruing
             it
             to
             the
             end
             of
             all
             the
             conferences
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             said
             Spyna
             required
             that
             Vigor
             should
             quote
             the
             places
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             hee
             pretended
             to
             bee
             contrarie
             to
             that
             was
             contained
             in
             his
             answere
             .
             And
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             first
             behoueth
             to
             glorifie
             the
             Sonne
             before
             the
             
             Father
             (
             according
             as
             it
             is
             written
             in
             the
             places
             aboue
             noted
             )
             for
             confirmation
             of
             his
             saying
             ,
             hee
             proposeth
             this
             reason
             ,
             founded
             on
             the
             Scripture
             .
             We
             cannot
             know
             the
             Father
             ,
             if
             we
             haue
             not
             knowne
             the
             Sonne
             .
             Wee
             cannot
             glorifie
             the
             Father
             ,
             if
             we
             haue
             not
             knowne
             him
             .
             Therefore
             it
             followeth
             ;
             that
             the
             knowledge
             and
             glory
             of
             the
             Sonne
             ,
             is
             a
             degree
             to
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             and
             glory
             of
             the
             father
             :
             which
             being
             referred
             by
             the
             said
             Vigor
             ,
             to
             be
             more
             amply
             handled
             in
             the
             end
             and
             conclusion
             of
             all
             the
             conference
             ,
             the
             said
             Spyna
             is
             so
             contented
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             sayd
             Vigor
             (
             without
             wading
             further
             in
             this
             dispute
             )
             obiecteth
             :
             that
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             alledged
             by
             the
             said
             
               De
               Spyna
            
             ,
             It
             followeth
             :
             that
             it
             first
             behooueth
             to
             honour
             the
             Father
             ,
             before
             the
             Sonne
             :
             for
             by
             the
             Father
             wee
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Sonne
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             our
             Lord
             sayd
             to
             Saint
             
               Peter
               :
               Caro
               &
               sanguis
               non
               reuelauit
               tibi
               :
               sed
               pater
               meus
               qui
               in
               Coelis
               est
               .
            
             Flesh
             and
             blood
             hath
             not
             reuealed
             this
             vnto
             thee
             ,
             but
             my
             Father
             which
             is
             in
             the
             heauens
             .
             Where
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             that
             the
             heanenly
             Father
             did
             reueale
             to
             Saint
             Peter
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             was
             the
             Sonne
             of
             the
             liuing
             God.
             Whereupon
             the
             sayd
             Vigor
             doeth
             thus
             argue
             .
             If
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             sayd
             
               De
               Spyna
            
             bee
             good
             :
             by
             the
             Father
             wee
             know
             the
             Sonne
             :
             it
             behooueth
             then
             to
             honour
             the
             Father
             before
             the
             Sonne
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             To
             follow
             the
             order
             of
             the
             knowledge
             we
             may
             haue
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             Father
             proposed
             vnto
             vs
             in
             S.
             Iohn
             :
             It
             behooueth
             to
             beginne
             by
             the
             Sonne
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Sonne
             to
             come
             to
             the
             Father
             .
             For
             Saint
             Phillip
             ,
             hauing
             once
             required
             that
             hee
             would
             shew
             vnto
             him
             ▪
             and
             his
             other
             companions
             ,
             
             his
             Father
             ,
             hee
             said
             vnto
             him
             :
             Phillip
             ,
             hee
             that
             hath
             seene
             me
             ,
             he
             hath
             seene
             my
             Father
             .
             To
             teach
             them
             ,
             that
             the
             meane
             to
             come
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             is
             the
             precedent
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Sonne
             :
             which
             may
             bee
             also
             confirmed
             by
             that
             which
             is
             else
             where
             written
             :
             where
             Iesus
             
             Christ
             saieth
             :
             That
             no
             man
             knoweth
             the
             Father
             but
             the
             
             Sonne
             onely
             ,
             and
             hee
             to
             whom
             the
             Sonne
             will
             reueale
             him
             .
             And
             to
             answere
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Saint
             Matthew
             ,
             alledged
             by
             the
             sayd
             Vigor
             ,
             the
             sayd
             
               De
               Spyna
            
             sayeth
             :
             that
             in
             the
             text
             by
             him
             produced
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             mention
             made
             of
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             nor
             of
             the
             meane
             to
             come
             vnto
             it
             .
             But
             onely
             of
             the
             reuelation
             made
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             GOD
             ,
             and
             his
             holy
             Spirite
             vnto
             Saint
             Peter
             ,
             and
             his
             other
             fellowes
             ,
             to
             know
             IESVS
             CHRIST
             ,
             and
             the
             Father
             in
             him
             .
             Whereupon
             Vigor
             sayde
             :
             hee
             referred
             himselfe
             to
             the
             hearer
             and
             reader
             ,
             that
             his
             obiection
             is
             not
             answere
             ,
             dreseruing
             for
             another
             Conference
             ,
             to
             treat
             more
             amply
             of
             that
             point
             (
             if
             hee
             will
             maintaine
             it
             )
             least
             hee
             should
             fall
             vpon
             that
             which
             hath
             beene
             formerly
             proposed
             ;
             whereunto
             the
             sayd
             
               De
               Spyna
            
             answered
             ,
             that
             hee
             so
             agreed
             .
          
           
             The
             sayde
             Vigor
             (
             vpon
             an
             answere
             made
             by
             the
             sayde
             
               De
               Spina
            
             :
             where
             hee
             putteth
             difference
             betweene
             the
             certaine
             reuelation
             made
             by
             the
             Lord
             to
             a
             particular
             person
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             )
             addeth
             :
             that
             hee
             is
             abashed
             of
             the
             same
             answere
             ,
             considering
             that
             men
             beleeue
             not
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             :
             But
             in
             that
             they
             are
             acertained
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             is
             authour
             thereof
             ,
             who
             cannot
             lye
             .
             Then
             likewise
             ,
             that
             if
             a
             particular
             man
             haue
             assurance
             ,
             that
             the
             reuelation
             is
             made
             vnto
             him
             by
             the
             Lorde
             :
             or
             else
             ,
             that
             one
             is
             assured
             of
             the
             reuelation
             ,
             made
             to
             another
             :
             as
             much
             is
             hee
             bound
             to
             giue
             faith
             to
             the
             reuelation
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Scripture
             .
             The
             which
             saying
             also
             ,
             hee
             will
             not
             (
             as
             hee
             may
             )
             handle
             and
             declare
             at
             large
             :
             but
             come
             presently
             to
             the
             first
             question
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             yet
             resolued
             .
             And
             prayeth
             the
             sayd
             
               De
               Spina
            
             to
             set
             forward
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             sayde
             Vigor
             is
             abashed
             ,
             that
             the
             sayde
             
               De
               Spina
            
             should
             say
             in
             one
             of
             his
             answeres
             ,
             That
             the
             reuelation
             of
             the
             Lord
             and
             the
             word
             ,
             were
             things
             different
             ,
             the
             same
             is
             befalne
             him
             for
             not
             well
             conceiuing
             the
             sence
             of
             the
             saying
             :
             For
             
               De
               Spina
            
             will
             not
             put
             difference
             touching
             the
             certainty
             ,
             
             betweene
             the
             true
             reuelations
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             the
             Word
             :
             which
             (
             proceeding
             from
             him
             )
             is
             as
             true
             ,
             as
             the
             reuelation
             ;
             And
             the
             reuelation
             reciprocally
             ,
             as
             true
             ,
             as
             the
             Word
             .
             Yet
             doth
             it
             not
             therefore
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             the
             reuelations
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             the
             Lord
             (
             by
             the
             which
             we
             may
             be
             conducted
             to
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             word
             )
             are
             not
             things
             different
             :
             and
             that
             the
             one
             doth
             not
             go
             before
             the
             other
             .
             And
             where
             the
             said
             Vigor
             prayeth
             the
             said
             
               De
               Spina
            
             to
             hasten
             to
             the
             point
             ,
             he
             answereth
             :
             That
             he
             cannot
             else
             where
             ground
             his
             answeres
             ,
             then
             vpon
             the
             demaundes
             which
             be
             made
             vnto
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             Reply
             .
          
           
             Whereunto
             the
             said
             Vigor
             replyed
             :
             that
             hee
             referred
             himselfe
             touching
             the
             sence
             ,
             to
             that
             which
             is
             touched
             in
             the
             answere
             of
             the
             said
             
               De
               Spina
            
             .
             And
             where
             he
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             goeth
             before
             the
             reuelation
             :
             that
             is
             of
             no
             value
             to
             make
             difference
             vpon
             the
             question
             proposed
             .
             And
             to
             come
             to
             the
             point
             :
             the
             said
             Vigor
             demaundeth
             ,
             whether
             a
             man
             may
             be
             assured
             that
             he
             hath
             reuelation
             from
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             a
             booke
             ,
             is
             a
             booke
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ?
             and
             when
             he
             may
             iudge
             assuredly
             of
             his
             inward
             inspiration
             ?
             Also
             ,
             how
             he
             can
             assure
             any
             of
             this
             inspiration
             giuen
             him
             of
             the
             Lord
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             first
             Article
             of
             the
             last
             demaund
             :
             It
             is
             not
             a
             thing
             impertinent
             to
             distinguish
             the
             scripture
             from
             the
             interpretation
             thereof
             :
             ina●much
             as
             they
             bee
             things
             diuers
             ,
             and
             diuers
             gifts
             of
             the
             Lord.
             And
             to
             answer
             to
             the
             question
             proposed
             ,
             how
             a
             particular
             man
             before
             the
             reuelation
             and
             inward
             testimonie
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             in
             his
             heart
             ,
             may
             acknowledge
             that
             it
             is
             Canonicall
             .
             The
             spirit
             of
             God
             varieth
             not
             from
             himselfe
             .
             And
             abiding
             in
             one
             particular
             man
             ,
             he
             wil
             acknowledge
             the
             Scripture
             which
             is
             come
             from
             him
             ▪
             and
             beareth
             his
             markes
             .
             And
             for
             answere
             to
             the
             second
             demand
             ,
             hee
             also
             saith
             :
             that
             the
             selfe
             same
             spirit
             ,
             beeing
             likewise
             in
             a
             third
             person
             ,
             will
             acknowledge
             both
             that
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             the
             reuelation
             are
             of
             him
             ,
             for
             the
             reasons
             alledged
             :
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             in
             diuers
             persons
             is
             alwayes
             equall
             
             and
             like
             vnto
             himselfe
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             no
             full
             satisfaction
             to
             the
             first
             question
             proposed
             :
             by
             the
             which
             it
             was
             demaunded
             ,
             how
             some
             man
             may
             iudge
             in
             himselfe
             that
             hee
             hath
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             to
             discerne
             one
             Booke
             to
             be
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             and
             another
             not
             ,
             but
             Apocrypha
             :
             and
             how
             he
             may
             declare
             vnto
             another
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             his
             inspiration
             from
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             
             The
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             called
             a
             seale
             in
             the
             scripture
             :
             therefore
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             effect
             which
             it
             produceth
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             him
             vnto
             whom
             it
             is
             communicated
             ,
             is
             to
             assure
             him
             of
             his
             presence
             .
             As
             for
             assuring
             a
             secōd
             person
             of
             the
             reuelation
             that
             one
             hath
             receiued
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             it
             is
             easie
             :
             Forasmuch
             as
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             which
             openeth
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             one
             to
             speake
             ,
             doth
             also
             open
             the
             eares
             of
             the
             other
             to
             listen
             to
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             the
             heart
             to
             beleeue
             it
             ,
             &
             to
             be
             perswaded
             thereof
             ▪
             So
             that
             betweene
             the
             maister
             ,
             and
             the
             scholler
             ,
             between
             the
             teacher
             and
             the
             hearer
             ,
             when
             they
             be
             both
             furnished
             and
             enlightened
             by
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             there
             is
             alwayes
             one
             mutuall
             consent
             to
             acknowledge
             one
             another
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Such
             certaintie
             ,
             is
             a
             great
             incertaintie
             .
             And
             there
             is
             not
             any
             of
             what
             sect
             soeuer
             ,
             which
             doeth
             not
             assure
             himselfe
             to
             haue
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             and
             the
             trueth
             on
             his
             side
             :
             which
             is
             a
             foolish
             presumption
             .
             How
             can
             a
             man
             distinguish
             a
             presumption
             ,
             from
             a
             true
             inspiration
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             S.
             
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             saith
             :
             that
             in
             vaine
             a
             man
             boasteth
             of
             the
             spirit
             ,
             without
             the
             word
             :
             which
             is
             a
             meane
             to
             represse
             sectes
             and
             heresies
             ,
             and
             to
             iudge
             of
             all
             things
             ,
             which
             heretiques
             &
             others
             would
             propose
             ,
             vnder
             the
             authoritie
             &
             tytle
             of
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God.
             For
             as
             by
             the
             spirit
             we
             know
             the
             true
             sence
             of
             the
             word
             :
             so
             do
             we
             also
             mutually
             acknowledge
             by
             the
             word
             ,
             who
             those
             be
             ,
             which
             haue
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             or
             no.
             
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             no
             answere
             to
             the
             question
             ;
             For
             the
             question
             
             is
             not
             ,
             to
             examine
             the
             doctrine
             by
             the
             word
             :
             but
             the
             question
             is
             to
             know
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             by
             which
             a
             man
             will
             examine
             and
             approoue
             a
             doctrine
             .
             And
             how
             a
             man
             shall
             iudge
             assuredly
             that
             hee
             hath
             a
             reuelation
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             that
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             If
             he
             be
             faithfull
             ,
             therefore
             shall
             he
             iudge
             by
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             him
             :
             as
             in
             him
             ,
             which
             telleth
             the
             same
             vnto
             him
             .
             And
             if
             he
             be
             vnfaithfull
             ,
             as
             impossible
             it
             is
             that
             he
             should
             iudge
             thereof
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             to
             a
             blinde
             man
             to
             iudge
             and
             discerne
             of
             colours
             presented
             vnto
             him
             :
             Forasmuch
             saieth
             
             S.
             Paul.
             )
             as
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             is
             he
             ,
             by
             whom
             wee
             know
             ,
             and
             iudge
             the
             things
             that
             are
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Yet
             is
             not
             this
             an
             answere
             to
             the
             question
             proposed
             ,
             let
             the
             iudgement
             thereof
             be
             left
             to
             the
             readers
             and
             hearers
             .
             Now
             make
             they
             another
             demaund
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             :
             Whether
             we
             be
             not
             very
             certaine
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             the
             Lord
             doeth
             assist
             his
             Church
             ,
             and
             will
             assist
             it
             ,
             vnto
             the
             end
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             whether
             it
             be
             not
             a
             more
             assured
             thing
             to
             stay
             on
             the
             consent
             and
             iudgement
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             touching
             the
             determination
             of
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             &
             the
             distinction
             of
             them
             ,
             from
             the
             Apocrypha
             :
             then
             to
             leane
             vpon
             his
             owne
             iudgement
             :
             esteeming
             it
             to
             bee
             an
             inward
             inspiration
             ;
             whereof
             a
             man
             can
             make
             no
             proofe
             :
             but
             supposeth
             that
             he
             hath
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             doo
             confound
             the
             opinions
             which
             fantasticke
             men
             may
             haue
             ,
             with
             the
             witnesses
             and
             reuelations
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             although
             betweene
             those
             two
             ,
             there
             is
             as
             much
             distance
             ,
             as
             is
             from
             heauen
             to
             earth
             :
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             consent
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             suppose
             that
             it
             proceedeth
             from
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             :
             Infallable
             it
             is
             ,
             &
             also
             certaine
             ,
             that
             particular
             reuelations
             may
             be
             ,
             as
             of
             Esay
             and
             other
             Prophets
             .
             And
             forasmuch
             as
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             do
             proceed
             from
             one selfe
             same
             Authour
             (
             which
             is
             the
             Spirit
             of
             trueth
             )
             The
             certaintie
             of
             the
             reuelations
             of
             God
             his
             Spirit
             ,
             made
             
             vnto
             all
             the
             Church
             in
             generall
             ,
             and
             to
             euery
             member
             of
             it
             in
             particular
             ,
             is
             of
             one selfe
             same
             moment
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Minsters
             cannot
             shew
             to
             the
             Catholiques
             ,
             nor
             to
             any
             others
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             not
             fantasticall
             :
             for
             asmuch
             as
             they
             make
             no
             proofe
             (
             more
             then
             do
             other
             sects
             )
             of
             the
             reuelation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             made
             vnto
             them
             :
             and
             as
             touching
             that
             is
             said
             :
             suppose
             that
             it
             proceedeth
             frō
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God.
             They
             doubt
             it
             seemeth
             of
             the
             assistance
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             :
             which
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             )
             is
             
               Columna
               &
               firmamētū
            
             
             veritatis
             ,
             the
             pillar
             &
             ground
             of
             truth
             .
             And
             a
             thing
             it
             is
             to
             be
             wel
             considered
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             more
             certain
             of
             the
             assistāce
             of
             the
             Lord
             in
             one
             particular
             person
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             Church
             vniuersal
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             :
             that
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             ,
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             assisteth
             as
             well
             euery
             member
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             as
             the
             whole
             church
             :
             By
             that
             might
             a
             man
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             particular
             faithful
             could
             neuer
             erre
             :
             &
             that
             ,
             the
             particular
             faithfull
             man
             should
             be
             aswell
             the
             pillar
             of
             truth
             ,
             as
             the
             vniuersal
             church
             .
             Moreouer
             in
             making
             of
             particular
             reuelatiō
             ,
             of
             like
             waight
             with
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             church
             ;
             they
             plainly
             contradict
             the
             4.
             article
             of
             their
             confession
             of
             faith
             :
             where
             it
             is
             thus
             written
             .
             We
             acknowledge
             those
             bookes
             to
             be
             canonicall
             ,
             and
             very
             certaine
             rules
             of
             our
             faith
             ,
             not
             so
             much
             by
             the
             common
             consent
             and
             agreement
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             as
             by
             the
             testimonie
             and
             inward
             perswasion
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             which
             maketh
             vs
             to
             discerne
             them
             ,
             frō
             other
             Ecclesiasticall
             bookes
             .
             By
             the
             said
             article
             men
             may
             see
             ,
             how
             much
             more
             they
             attribute
             to
             themselues
             ,
             then
             to
             all
             the
             vniuersall
             church
             .
             Which
             article
             ,
             they
             now
             contradict
             :
             attributing
             as
             much
             to
             the
             one
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             other
             .
             And
             also
             in
             their
             confessiō
             of
             faith
             lastly
             printed
             ,
             the
             said
             article
             hath
             been
             taken
             away
             ,
             as
             is
             seene
             by
             that
             which
             
               De
               Spina
            
             ,
             hath
             now
             brought
             hither
             ,
             imprinted
             at
             Geneua
             ,
             1564.
             
             Whereby
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             they
             be
             retracted
             :
             as
             confessing
             that
             it
             behoueth
             to
             rest
             more
             vpon
             the
             common
             cōsent
             of
             the
             church
             ,
             thē
             vpon
             any
             particular
             mās
             iudgemēt
             .
             Which
             thing
             is
             very
             reasonable
             :
             seeing
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             promised
             to
             the
             church
             vniuersall
             ,
             &
             not
             to
             euery
             particular
             person
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             If
             men
             may
             esteeme
             the
             Ministers
             fantasticke
             ,
             although
             they
             haue
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             more
             shall
             the
             Doctors
             bee
             holden
             for
             such
             ,
             in
             things
             they
             maintaine
             and
             defend
             without
             and
             contrarie
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             Touching
             the
             second
             point
             ,
             where
             the
             Doctors
             reproach
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             doo
             doubt
             (
             as
             it
             seemeth
             by
             their
             answere
             )
             of
             the
             assistance
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             to
             the
             church
             .
             The
             answer
             is
             :
             that
             that
             is
             not
             the
             doubt
             :
             but
             to
             know
             which
             is
             the
             true
             Church
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             third
             point
             ,
             whereof
             (
             say
             the
             Doctors
             )
             might
             bee
             inferred
             ,
             that
             particular
             persons
             could
             not
             erre
             .
             The
             consequence
             is
             naught
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             spirite
             of
             God
             may
             sometimes
             depart
             from
             particular
             persons
             ,
             and
             in
             
             this
             case
             they
             may
             faile
             and
             erre
             :
             as
             Dauid
             confesseth
             to
             haue
             happened
             to
             him
             .
             To
             the
             fourth
             point
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             :
             that
             they
             no
             way
             contradict
             the
             alledged
             Article
             of
             their
             confession
             :
             for
             that
             comparison
             is
             made
             in
             the
             answere
             ,
             of
             two
             reuelations
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             the
             one
             made
             to
             the
             bodie
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             to
             the
             members
             :
             which
             they
             maintaine
             to
             bee
             of
             like
             waight
             ,
             touching
             the
             certaintie
             thereof
             .
             And
             in
             the
             confession
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             reuelation
             of
             GOD
             his
             spirite
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             Churches
             consent
             ,
             which
             doth
             follow
             as
             the
             effect
             thereof
             .
             Now
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             cause
             being
             preferred
             before
             his
             effect
             :
             there
             is
             great
             reason
             ,
             that
             the
             reuelation
             of
             God
             his
             spirit
             ,
             compared
             with
             the
             consent
             of
             his
             Church
             ,
             be
             preferred
             vnto
             it
             :
             as
             the
             cause
             ,
             to
             the
             effect
             which
             it
             produceth
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             contrarietie
             which
             they
             pretend
             to
             happen
             in
             the
             confessions
             ,
             printed
             at
             diuers
             times
             ,
             and
             by
             diuers
             Printers
             ;
             they
             shall
             bee
             answered
             ,
             when
             it
             shall
             please
             them
             to
             debate
             the
             Articles
             particularly
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Where
             they
             set
             foorth
             the
             doubt
             they
             haue
             of
             the
             true
             Church
             :
             as
             much
             men
             may
             say
             of
             pretended
             reuelations
             of
             God
             his
             spirit
             vnto
             particular
             persons
             .
             Of
             whom
             likewise
             it
             may
             bee
             doubted
             ,
             whether
             they
             bee
             members
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             For
             the
             other
             point
             ,
             where
             they
             denie
             that
             they
             
             contradict
             the
             fourth
             article
             of
             their
             confession
             ,
             it
             seemeth
             in
             shew
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             contradiction
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             they
             compare
             the
             particular
             reuelatiō
             ,
             with
             the
             consent
             of
             the
             church
             :
             as
             by
             their
             answere
             appeareth
             .
             Also
             that
             which
             is
             alledged
             ,
             that
             reuelation
             is
             cause
             of
             consent
             ;
             to
             preferre
             it
             to
             that
             ,
             as
             the
             cause
             to
             the
             effect
             ,
             seemeth
             to
             serue
             to
             small
             purpose
             :
             for
             it
             is
             ,
             as
             if
             one
             shuld
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reuelation
             is
             to
             be
             preferred
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             scripture
             .
             For
             very
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             reuelation
             goeth
             before
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             scripture
             .
             And
             as
             it
             appeareth
             in
             the
             text
             of
             the
             Confession
             ,
             (
             as
             euery
             one
             may
             easily
             iudge
             )
             the
             authors
             thereof
             ,
             speake
             of
             the
             certaintie
             and
             infallibilitie
             of
             two
             reuelations
             :
             as
             holding
             themselues
             more
             assured
             of
             that
             they
             haue
             in
             their
             owne
             spirit
             ,
             then
             that
             which
             is
             of
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             And
             touching
             an
             other
             point
             ;
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             particular
             persons
             may
             sometimes
             faile
             ,
             when
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             doth
             leaue
             them
             ;
             By
             that
             wee
             may
             conclude
             ,
             that
             wee
             must
             not
             infallibly
             rest
             on
             the
             pretended
             inspirations
             of
             particular
             persons
             :
             because
             we
             may
             doubt
             of
             them
             ,
             whether
             they
             be
             destitute
             of
             God
             his
             spirit
             ,
             or
             no
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             done
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             Wherefore
             more
             sure
             it
             is
             ,
             to
             stay
             vpon
             the
             Church
             ,
             (
             infallably
             gouerned
             by
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             )
             then
             vpon
             priuate
             pretended
             inspirations
             .
             And
             so
             do
             the
             Catholikes
             therein
             ,
             neuer
             following
             their
             priuate
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             therefore
             cannot
             be
             esteemed
             phantasticke
             .
             But
             rather
             those
             ,
             which
             preferre
             their
             proper
             iudgement
             ,
             which
             they
             shrowde
             with
             the
             title
             of
             particular
             inspiration
             .
             The
             Doctors
             require
             one
             text
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             ,
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             promised
             vnto
             euery
             one
             in
             particular
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             to
             the
             Church
             vniuersall
             ,
             to
             know
             ,
             and
             iudge
             ,
             and
             discerne
             which
             are
             the
             scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             first
             point
             .
             As
             indeed
             they
             approue
             not
             all
             Churches
             to
             be
             true
             Churches
             which
             say
             they
             be
             so
             :
             So
             do
             they
             not
             also
             approue
             them
             all
             faithful
             ,
             who
             boast
             themselues
             to
             be
             so
             .
             For
             the
             second
             point
             :
             the
             comparison
             of
             the
             Doctors
             is
             not
             proper
             ,
             which
             thus
             they
             haue
             made
             :
             as
             who
             
             should
             say
             ,
             that
             reuelation
             is
             to
             bee
             preferred
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             &c.
             
             Forasmuch
             as
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             &
             all
             the
             writings
             aswell
             of
             the
             Prophets
             as
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             are
             as
             much
             of
             the
             reuelations
             of
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             &
             that
             no
             more
             difference
             there
             is
             betweene
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             then
             is
             betweene
             Genus
             and
             Species
             .
             And
             touching
             that
             which
             is
             added
             in
             this
             article
             ,
             that
             the
             reuelation
             precedeth
             the
             Scripture
             .
             It
             behooueth
             to
             distinguish
             betweene
             the
             reuelations
             made
             to
             the
             Prophets
             before
             they
             put
             them
             in
             writing
             ;
             and
             those
             which
             haue
             beene
             made
             to
             them
             that
             read
             their
             writings
             :
             for
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             them
             .
             Touching
             the
             first
             ,
             we
             confesse
             they
             goe
             before
             the
             Scripture
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             second
             ,
             wee
             say
             :
             that
             they
             follow
             the
             same
             .
             For
             the
             third
             article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             answere
             :
             that
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             iudge
             whether
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             assist
             a
             particular
             person
             ,
             or
             whether
             it
             bee
             withdrawne
             ,
             by
             the
             things
             which
             he
             proposeth
             ,
             when
             they
             bee
             reduced
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             censured
             by
             the
             rules
             which
             are
             there
             proposed
             vnto
             vs
             as
             is
             sayde
             .
             Touching
             the
             demand
             ,
             it
             should
             bee
             too
             tedious
             a
             thing
             to
             alledge
             all
             the
             places
             where
             it
             is
             written
             .
             That
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             is
             communicated
             to
             the
             particular
             members
             of
             the
             Church
             onely
             :
             let
             them
             see
             in
             the
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.
             where
             expresly
             it
             is
             said
             :
             that
             the
             Spirite
             of
             God
             is
             communicated
             to
             the
             chosen
             ,
             to
             know
             and
             discerne
             the
             things
             which
             bee
             of
             God.
             And
             in
             Esay
             55.
             the
             Lord
             doth
             promise
             to
             shed
             his
             Spirite
             vpon
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             as
             water
             vpon
             the
             earth
             .
             And
             in
             Ioel
             likewise
             the
             second
             ,
             and
             Ieremie
             34.
             
             And
             the
             1.
             
             Epistle
             of
             Saint
             Iohn
             2.
             vnder
             the
             name
             of
             Oyntment
             ,
             and
             in
             many
             other
             places
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             places
             heere-aboue
             alledged
             ,
             make
             nothing
             to
             prooue
             that
             the
             Spirite
             was
             promised
             to
             all
             ,
             to
             iudge
             of
             the
             doctrine
             :
             otherwise
             ,
             euen
             women
             ,
             and
             all
             faithfull
             Artificers
             should
             iudge
             of
             the
             doctrine
             ,
             as
             the
             Prophets
             ▪
             and
             Apostles
             .
             To
             the
             contrary
             whereof
             Saint
             Paul
             sayeth
             :
             
               Nunquid
               omnes
               Prophetae
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Are
             all
             Prophets
             ?
             hee
             putteth
             downe
             expresly
             :
             that
             the
             discerning
             of
             Spirites
             ,
             is
             to
             haue
             
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             :
             and
             are
             gifts
             which
             are
             not
             common
             to
             all
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             but
             particular
             to
             some
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             consequence
             which
             the
             Doctors
             gather
             ,
             is
             nothing
             worth
             :
             forasmuch
             as
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             is
             more
             abundantly
             oft
             times
             comunicated
             to
             some
             then
             to
             others
             .
             And
             some
             also
             are
             better
             exercised
             in
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             then
             others
             .
             Touching
             the
             place
             of
             Saint
             Paul
             ,
             1.
             
             Cor.
             12.
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             It
             maketh
             nothing
             against
             them
             :
             forasmuch
             as
             the
             Spirit
             of
             prophec●e
             ,
             and
             the
             spirit
             of
             discretion
             are
             different
             gifts
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             declaration
             which
             the
             Apostle
             maketh
             in
             the
             same
             Chapter
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           second
           dayes
           Dispute
           ,
           beeing
           Wednesday
           ,
           the
           tenth
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           THE
           Doctors
           required
           ,
           that
           their
           protestations
           the
           day
           before
           made
           ,
           might
           be
           registred
           ,
           which
           was
           such
           ;
           That
           they
           protested
           they
           would
           not
           enter
           into
           any
           Dispute
           of
           things
           receiued
           in
           the
           vniuersall
           Church
           ,
           from
           the
           Apostles
           time
           hitherto
           :
           decided
           and
           determined
           by
           holy
           E●umenicall
           and
           generall
           Councells
           :
           holding
           them
           for
           certaine
           and
           indubitable
           :
           and
           that
           all
           doctrine
           to
           the
           contrary
           was
           false
           .
           But
           following
           the
           good
           and
           holy
           desire
           of
           the
           Lorde
           Montpensier
           ,
           and
           
             Madam
             de
             Buillon
          
           his
           daughter
           ,
           they
           were
           ready
           to
           make
           knowne
           by
           the
           verey
           ex●resse
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           interpreted
           by
           the
           sayd
           vniuersall
           Church
           and
           Councells
           ,
           that
           their
           doctrine
           ,
           wherein
           the
           sayd
           Ladie
           was
           formerly
           instructed
           ,
           is
           sound
           and
           wholesome
           .
           And
           that
           the
           instruction
           which
           hath
           beene
           giuen
           her
           to
           the
           contrarie
           ▪
           is
           perni●ious
           and
           damnable
           .
           And
           that
           this
           Conference
           is
           by
           way
           of
           instruction
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           Dispute
           .
        
         
           The
           Ministers
           likewise
           protested
           ,
           that
           they
           assembled
           not
           with
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           for
           any
           doubt
           they
           had
           ,
           that
           whatsoeuer
           
           is
           conteined
           in
           their
           confessiō
           of
           faith
           ,
           is
           not
           certain
           and
           true
           ,
           and
           founded
           vpon
           the
           word
           of
           God
           :
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           places
           of
           scripture
           quoted
           in
           the
           margeant
           of
           the
           said
           confession
           .
           And
           doo
           beleeue
           ,
           that
           whatsoeuer
           is
           contrarie
           and
           opposite
           therevnto
           ,
           is
           damnable
           ,
           and
           to
           be
           reiected
           :
           yea
           though
           an
           Angell
           from
           heauen
           should
           propose
           it
           .
           And
           as
           touching
           themselues
           ,
           they
           were
           not
           come
           thither
           to
           be
           instructed
           in
           other
           doctrine
           ,
           then
           such
           as
           they
           follow
           ,
           and
           haue
           learned
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           :
           whom
           they
           acknowledge
           to
           be
           the
           onely
           maister
           and
           instructor
           of
           the
           Church
           .
        
         
           It
           was
           declared
           by
           my
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           that
           he
           desired
           (
           after
           the
           obiections
           and
           answeres
           )
           there
           should
           bee
           giuen
           a
           short
           resolution
           both
           of
           the
           one
           side
           and
           the
           other
           ,
           of
           that
           was
           conferred
           of
           the
           day
           before
           .
           Following
           which
           remonstrance
           the
           Doctors
           say
           :
           that
           to
           iudge
           of
           a
           booke
           whether
           it
           be
           the
           writing
           of
           holy
           scripture
           ,
           or
           not
           :
           and
           likewise
           to
           discerne
           a
           booke
           Canonicall
           ,
           from
           one
           Apocrypha
           ,
           or
           Ecclesiasticall
           ,
           a
           man
           must
           not
           rest
           on
           his
           owne
           priuate
           opinion
           ,
           or
           priuate
           and
           particular
           inspiration
           :
           for
           as
           much
           as
           none
           haue
           ordinarie
           assurance
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           a
           true
           reuelation
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           without
           reducing
           himselfe
           to
           the
           common
           consent
           and
           agreement
           of
           the
           Church
           vniuersall
           .
           And
           also
           that
           God
           ,
           albeit
           hee
           had
           power
           to
           reueale
           and
           imprint
           in
           each
           one
           the
           true
           knowledge
           necessarie
           to
           saluation
           :
           yet
           hath
           he
           ordained
           a
           certaine
           meane
           ,
           whereby
           faith
           is
           obtained
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           reuealed
           truth
           :
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           by
           hearing
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           preached
           by
           lawfull
           Ministers
           ,
           sent
           by
           the
           Pastors
           of
           the
           true
           Church
           :
           as
           by
           the
           text
           of
           Saint
           Paul
           to
           the
           Rom.
           10.
           and
           Ephes
           .
           4.
           appeareth
           .
           If
           then
           the
           meane
           to
           haue
           faith
           and
           inward
           reuelation
           of
           the
           knowledge
           of
           saluation
           bee
           ,
           by
           the
           hearing
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           lawfully
           preached
           by
           the
           Ministers
           of
           the
           same
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           ordinary
           meane
           ,
           to
           be
           assured
           that
           a
           man
           hath
           inward
           reuelation
           It
           behoueth
           necessarily
           to
           bee
           assured
           ,
           that
           the
           word
           by
           which
           faith
           is
           obtained
           ,
           hath
           bene
           preached
           by
           the
           lawfull
           Ministers
           of
           the
           true
           Church
           .
           And
           by
           consequence
           ,
           to
           be
           first
           assured
           of
           the
           church
           ,
           before
           his
           own
           inward
           reuelation
           ,
           
           following
           the
           meane
           which
           Iesus
           Christ
           hath
           followed
           .
           They
           say
           further
           ,
           that
           the
           true
           and
           certaine
           marke
           of
           a
           true
           inward
           reuelation
           is
           ,
           when
           as
           it
           is
           reduced
           to
           the
           common
           consent
           of
           the
           Church
           .
           And
           contrariwise
           ,
           that
           euery
           pretended
           inward
           inspiration
           ,
           particular
           and
           priuate
           ,
           is
           a
           false
           perswasion
           ,
           if
           it
           bee
           different
           from
           the
           common
           consent
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           For
           the
           spirite
           of
           God
           is
           not
           particular
           ,
           but
           common
           .
           And
           say
           moreouer
           ,
           that
           to
           finde
           out
           a
           false
           doctrine
           ,
           it
           behoueth
           to
           examine
           the
           same
           ,
           to
           knowe
           whether
           it
           bee
           priuate
           or
           common
           ,
           euen
           as
           our
           Lord
           hath
           giuen
           the
           true
           marke
           in
           Saint
           Iohn
           .
           8.
           saying
           :
           
             Qui
             de
             se
             loquitur
             ,
             mendacium
             loquitur
             .
          
           Hee
           that
           saieth
           any
           thing
           of
           himselfe
           ,
           and
           of
           his
           owne
           proper
           inspiration
           ,
           is
           a
           lyer
           .
           And
           likewise
           as
           it
           is
           written
           in
           Ezechiel
           ;
           Sonne
           of
           man
           ,
           prophesie
           
           against
           the
           Prophets
           of
           Israel
           ,
           that
           prophesie
           :
           and
           say
           vnto
           them
           that
           prophesie
           out
           of
           their
           owne
           heart
           ,
           heare
           the
           word
           of
           the
           Lord.
           Thus
           saith
           the
           Lord
           God
           :
           Woe
           to
           the
           foolish
           Prophets
           which
           follow
           their
           owne
           spirit
           ,
           and
           haue
           seene
           nothing
           .
           And
           afterward
           ,
           they
           haue
           seene
           vanitie
           ,
           and
           lying
           diuination
           ,
           saying
           :
           The
           Lord
           saieth
           it
           :
           and
           the
           Lord
           hath
           not
           sent
           them
           :
           and
           they
           haue
           made
           others
           to
           hope
           that
           they
           would
           confirme
           the
           word
           of
           their
           prophesie
           .
           And
           the
           verses
           following
           doo
           serue
           to
           the
           purpose
           .
           Which
           false
           Prophets
           said
           ,
           they
           had
           an
           inward
           reuelation
           ,
           and
           the
           word
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           They
           say
           also
           ,
           and
           let
           it
           be
           well
           wayed
           ,
           that
           the
           proppe
           of
           Religion
           ,
           grounded
           and
           assured
           vpon
           an
           inward
           inspiration
           ,
           is
           the
           foundation
           of
           many
           Sects
           in
           our
           time
           ,
           as
           of
           Anabaptists
           ,
           and
           Suencfildians
           :
           who
           stay
           their
           doctrines
           vpon
           priuate
           reuelations
           ,
           and
           alledge
           the
           same
           texts
           ,
           to
           serue
           them
           for
           foundation
           of
           their
           doctrine
           ,
           which
           the
           Ministers
           yesterday
           alledged
           :
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           Ieremy
           in
           the
           third
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           Ioel.
           2.
           and
           Saint
           Paul.
           1.
           
           Cor.
           2.
           which
           Brentius
           and
           Bucer
           considering
           ,
           haue
           confessed
           :
           that
           by
           the
           onely
           tradition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           wee
           are
           acertained
           of
           the
           bookes
           of
           the
           holy
           scripture
           ,
           in
           following
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           ,
           as
           Saint
           Ierome
           ,
           who
           confesseth
           hee
           receiued
           
           by
           the
           tradition
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           by
           the
           same
           did
           knowe
           ,
           that
           there
           bee
           foure
           Gospels
           .
           As
           much
           thereof
           saith
           Origen
           ,
           recyting
           the
           Canonicall
           bookes
           of
           the
           new
           Testament
           ,
           saying
           :
           I
           haue
           learned
           by
           tradition
           ,
           that
           there
           bee
           foure
           Gospels
           .
           And
           you
           shall
           not
           finde
           any
           auncient
           Catholicke
           ,
           which
           hath
           stayed
           his
           faith
           to
           discerne
           and
           iudge
           of
           bookes
           vpon
           his
           onely
           priuate
           and
           particular
           inspiration
           .
           And
           Saint
           
             Augustine
             ,
             Liber
             Confess
             .
             cap.
          
           25.
           vseth
           these
           wordes
           :
           
             Veritas
             tua
             domine
             ,
             non
             mea
             ;
             nec
             illius
             aut
             illius
             ,
             sed
             omnium
             nostrum
             ,
             quos
             ad
             communionem
             aduocas
             :
             terribiliter
             admonens
             ne
             priuatam
             veritatem
             habeamus
             ,
             ne
             priuemur
             ea
             .
          
           Thy
           truth
           ô
           Lord
           ,
           not
           mine
           ,
           nor
           of
           him
           or
           him
           ,
           but
           of
           all
           vs
           ,
           whom
           thou
           callest
           to
           communion
           :
           terribly
           admonishing
           that
           wee
           haue
           not
           the
           truth
           priuate
           ,
           least
           wee
           be
           depriued
           thereof
           .
        
         
           And
           touching
           the
           bookes
           of
           the
           old
           Testament
           ,
           which
           the
           Ministers
           will
           not
           receiue
           for
           Canonicall
           by
           the
           iudgement
           of
           their
           inward
           reuelation
           ;
           the
           Doctors
           doo
           shewe
           ,
           that
           before
           Saint
           Augustines
           time
           ,
           or
           (
           at
           leastwise
           )
           in
           his
           time
           ,
           in
           the
           Church
           vniuersall
           ,
           all
           the
           bookes
           which
           are
           contained
           in
           the
           holy
           Bible
           without
           distinction
           ,
           were
           holden
           and
           receiued
           for
           Canonicall
           :
           as
           witnesseth
           the
           Councell
           of
           Carthage
           ,
           where
           S.
           Augustine
           was
           ▪
           And
           also
           the
           Councell
           of
           Laodicia
           .
           Now
           thus
           say
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           the
           Fathers
           which
           were
           present
           in
           these
           Councels
           ,
           (
           if
           by
           inward
           inspiration
           wee
           must
           iudge
           of
           bookes
           )
           they
           had
           it
           ,
           or
           at
           least
           they
           might
           perswade
           themselues
           to
           haue
           it
           more
           assuredly
           then
           many
           others
           .
        
         
           The
           Ministers
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           iudge
           by
           their
           inward
           reuelation
           ,
           that
           they
           be
           not
           Canonicall
           .
           The
           Doctors
           leaue
           it
           to
           iudgement
           ,
           which
           men
           ought
           rather
           beleeue
           :
           whether
           the
           inspiration
           of
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           ,
           receiued
           by
           the
           Church
           for
           so
           many
           hundred
           yeares
           vntill
           now
           :
           or
           else
           the
           priuate
           and
           particular
           inspiration
           of
           the
           new
           Ministers
           .
           They
           adde
           further
           :
           that
           they
           submit
           themselues
           to
           proue
           ,
           that
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           ,
           yea
           neare
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Apostles
           (
           as
           Ireneus
           ,
           S.
           
             Ciprian
             ,
             Origen
          
           ,
           S.
           Ierome
           ,
           S.
           
             Augustine
             ▪
          
           
           and
           others
           )
           doo
           vse
           the
           testimonies
           of
           the
           bookes
           reiected
           by
           the
           Ministers
           :
           yea
           for
           proofe
           of
           the
           doctrine
           against
           the
           heretikes
           .
           And
           Saint
           Augustine
           himselfe
           in
           the
           2.
           booke
           of
           Christian
           doctrine
           ,
           Cap.
           2.
           dooth
           put
           all
           those
           bookes
           by
           name
           among
           the
           bookes
           Canonicall
           .
           And
           Damascen
           likewise
           in
           his
           fourth
           booke
           
             de
             Orthodoxa
             fide
             .
             Cap.
          
           18.
           
        
         
           To
           know
           then
           ,
           whether
           a
           man
           haue
           the
           spirit
           of
           God
           ,
           to
           discerne
           and
           iudge
           of
           the
           bookes
           of
           the
           scripture
           ,
           he
           must
           bee
           reduced
           to
           the
           common
           consent
           and
           agreement
           of
           the
           Church
           :
           for
           this
           is
           the
           ordinarie
           meanes
           left
           by
           God
           to
           that
           effect
           :
           and
           the
           experience
           may
           bee
           made
           ,
           is
           an
           argument
           sufficient
           to
           conuince
           ,
           that
           the
           faithfull
           by
           inward
           inspiration
           ,
           cannot
           discerne
           the
           Canonicall
           bookes
           ,
           from
           the
           pretended
           Apocrypha
           .
           Which
           might
           easily
           bee
           verified
           ,
           would
           the
           cause
           to
           come
           at
           this
           present
           ,
           some
           of
           the
           same
           pretended
           reformed
           Religion
           ,
           which
           haue
           not
           yet
           bene
           instructed
           in
           the
           diuision
           of
           the
           bookes
           ;
           vnto
           whom
           should
           one
           propose
           the
           bookes
           which
           the
           Ministers
           hold
           for
           Apocrypha
           ;
           they
           would
           in
           no
           wise
           distinguish
           them
           from
           other
           bookes
           of
           the
           holy
           Byble
           .
           And
           vpon
           the
           whole
           they
           conclude
           ,
           that
           if
           one
           person
           hath
           the
           spirite
           of
           God
           ,
           &c.
           
             vt
             supra
          
           .
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             first
             Article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             neuer
             said
             (
             as
             may
             appeare
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             all
             the
             former
             answeres
             )
             that
             their
             religion
             is
             founded
             on
             their
             particular
             reuelations
             ;
             but
             vpon
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             is
             proposed
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             .
             Of
             the
             truth
             whereof
             ,
             they
             haue
             said
             to
             be
             principally
             assured
             by
             the
             ●estimoni●
             and
             reuelation
             of
             the
             holy
             spirit
             .
             They
             also
             say
             ,
             that
             faith
             is
             not
             the
             truth
             (
             to
             speake
             properly
             )
             :
             but
             the
             perswasion
             of
             the
             truth
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             scripture
             ●s
             ●aught
             vs.
             Moreouer
             ,
             that
             this
             faith
             is
             not
             of
             our
             owne
             getting
             ▪
             but
             a
             pure
             gi●t
             of
             God
             :
             adding
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             to
             make
             them
             lawfull●
             ,
             ought
             to
             bee
             sent
             not
             from
             the
             pretended
             Pastors
             ,
             which
             haue
             not
             but
             the
             ●y●le
             ,
             and
             onely
             name
             of
             Pastors
             :
             but
             ought
             to
             be
             sent
             from
             God
             ,
             a
             it
             appeareth
             in
             Ieremy
             :
             where
             this
             marke
             is
             proposed
             ,
             
             to
             knowe
             and
             marke
             a
             false
             Pastor
             or
             Shepheard
             when
             hee
             thrusteth
             in
             himselfe
             ,
             or
             is
             sent
             of
             an
             other
             then
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Touching
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             they
             adde
             that
             the
             true
             marke
             whereby
             one
             may
             certainly
             iudge
             of
             the
             reuelation
             ,
             is
             rather
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             then
             the
             consent
             of
             many
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             oft
             times
             happeneth
             ,
             that
             the
             multitude
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             declining
             from
             the
             word
             doo
             altogether
             erre
             :
             as
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Micheas
             ,
             the
             time
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             afterward
             also
             of
             Constance
             the
             Emperour
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             which
             doo
             follow
             they●
             owne
             spirite
             (
             as
             bee
             those
             which
             leaue
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             depend
             vppon
             the
             commaundements
             and
             traditions
             of
             men
             ,
             or
             on
             the
             vanitie
             of
             their
             owne
             sence
             )
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             but
             they
             are
             false
             Prophets
             ;
             and
             that
             such
             persons
             are
             to
             bee
             shunned
             and
             reiected
             .
             But
             great
             difference
             must
             bee
             put
             betweene
             the
             reuelations
             and
             testimonies
             of
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             vaine
             imaginations
             of
             the
             hearts
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             Touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             set
             foorth
             ,
             that
             heretikes
             (
             as
             Anabaptists
             and
             others
             )
             doo
             vse
             for
             confirmation
             of
             their
             errors
             ,
             the
             texts
             of
             scripture
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             .
             It
             may
             so
             bee
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             scripture
             beeing
             common
             ,
             may
             bee
             produced
             and
             alledged
             of
             eue●ie
             one
             .
             And
             yet
             men
             must
             not
             stay
             vpon
             that
             which
             is
             alledged
             :
             but
             weigh
             and
             examine
             how
             and
             to
             what
             end
             and
             purpose
             it
             is
             alledged
             :
             and
             in
             so
             dooing
             ,
             men
             shall
             knowe
             the
             difference
             betweene
             the
             Ministers
             and
             heretikes
             .
          
           
             And
             concerning
             that
             produced
             of
             Brentius
             and
             Bucer
             ,
             namely
             ,
             wherein
             they
             affirmed
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             onely
             tradition
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             may
             be
             discerned
             from
             the
             Apocrypha
             .
             This
             it
             seemeth
             cannot
             well
             serue
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             seeing
             they
             maintaine
             all
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Bible
             to
             bee
             Canonicall
             :
             and
             neuerthelesse
             by
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             of
             Brentius
             and
             Bucer
             ,
             it
             appeareth
             that
             the
             
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             following
             the
             tradition
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             put
             a
             distinction
             therein
             :
             calling
             the
             one
             Canonicall
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Apocrypha
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Article
             following
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             certaine
             textes
             of
             the
             auntient
             Fathers
             ,
             to
             take
             away
             the
             difference
             betweene
             the
             bookes
             Canonicall
             and
             Apocrypha
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answer
             ,
             that
             as
             they
             haue
             alledged
             some
             to
             proue
             the
             same
             ;
             so
             can
             they
             also
             for
             their
             part
             alledge
             some
             to
             that
             purpose
             :
             as
             Saint
             Ierome
             in
             his
             Prologue
             called
             Galeatus
             ;
             and
             in
             an
             other
             which
             beginneth
             
               Frater
               Ambrosius
            
             :
             vnto
             whom
             ,
             writing
             the
             summe
             of
             euery
             booke
             of
             the
             Bible
             ,
             hee
             mentioneth
             those
             onely
             which
             the
             Ministers
             call
             Canonicall
             .
          
           
             They
             may
             alledge
             also
             two
             or
             three
             Catalogues
             recyted
             in
             Eusebius
             :
             which
             they
             receiue
             not
             for
             Canonicall
             bookes
             ;
             but
             those
             which
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             approue
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Councell
             of
             Laodicia
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             alledged
             ,
             is
             for
             the
             Ministers
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             comprehendeth
             not
             the
             bookes
             in
             question
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             experience
             ,
             they
             answere
             :
             that
             it
             is
             a
             question
             of
             fact
             :
             and
             that
             it
             may
             be
             alledged
             ,
             rather
             against
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             then
             the
             Ministers
             .
             And
             finally
             ,
             that
             they
             loose
             not
             more
             time
             in
             often
             repeating
             of
             one
             selfe-same
             thing
             ,
             but
             hasten
             to
             conferre
             of
             the
             points
             of
             the
             confession
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             will
             debate
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             shewe
             ,
             that
             the
             24.
             bookes
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             the
             Canon
             of
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             be
             on
             both
             sides
             approued
             Canonicall
             .
             And
             they
             are
             wholly
             sufficient
             to
             decide
             all
             the
             points
             of
             their
             confession
             ,
             &
             all
             that
             in
             generall
             which
             appertaineth
             to
             true
             religion
             .
             And
             by
             meanes
             thereof
             ,
             they
             haue
             no
             cause
             at
             all
             to
             drawe
             backe
             from
             the
             Conference
             ,
             for
             the
             difference
             betweene
             both
             parties
             ,
             touching
             the
             distinction
             of
             the
             bookes
             Canonicall
             and
             Apocrypha
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             Although
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             affirme
             ,
             that
             they
             build
             their
             Religion
             vpon
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             yet
             build
             they
             Gods
             
             word
             vpon
             their
             inward
             reuelation
             .
             So
             that
             such
             a
             reuelation
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Word
             ,
             and
             consequently
             of
             their
             religion
             .
             For
             they
             receiue
             not
             for
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             they
             thinke
             to
             bee
             particularly
             reuealed
             to
             them
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             other
             Article
             ,
             wherein
             they
             finde
             fault
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             faith
             is
             obtained
             by
             hearing
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             it
             seemeth
             they
             will
             stay
             vpon
             small
             things
             ,
             because
             they
             will
             not
             goe
             to
             the
             principall
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             faith
             is
             the
             gift
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             therefore
             is
             not
             gotten
             ▪
             it
             is
             too
             plaine
             by
             manifold
             texts
             of
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             one
             selfe-same
             thing
             to
             be
             giuen
             and
             obtained
             ,
             is
             not
             repugnant
             .
             As
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             ,
             which
             is
             giuen
             to
             the
             blessed
             ,
             and
             notwithstanding
             men
             obtaine
             it
             by
             true
             faith
             ,
             working
             by
             charitie
             .
             And
             the
             scripture
             it selfe
             dooth
             
             call
             it
             a
             reward
             ,
             and
             recompence
             of
             good
             workes
             .
             And
             Saint
             Paul
             saith
             :
             that
             by
             liberalitie
             and
             almesdeeds
             ,
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             is
             gained
             .
             Yea
             that
             which
             Saint
             Paul
             saith
             ,
             
               Fides
               ex
               auditu
            
             :
             Faith
             commeth
             by
             hearing
             ,
             cannot
             otherwise
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             that
             faith
             commeth
             by
             hearing
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             obtaining
             thereof
             ,
             by
             the
             meane
             of
             hearing
             the
             word
             preached
             ;
             although
             it
             be
             a
             gift
             of
             God.
             The
             like
             subtiltie
             they
             vse
             ,
             willing
             to
             reproue
             that
             which
             hath
             bene
             spoken
             ,
             that
             faith
             is
             the
             truth
             reuealed
             :
             as
             putting
             great
             difference
             betweene
             the
             truth
             reuealed
             ,
             and
             the
             reuelation
             of
             truth
             .
             Meet
             it
             were
             ,
             that
             the
             subtiltie
             were
             vaileable
             
             against
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             who
             saith
             :
             
               Panis
               quem
               frangimus
               nonne
               communicatio
               corporis
               Domini
               est
               ?
            
             The
             bread
             which
             wee
             breake
             ,
             is
             it
             not
             the
             communion
             of
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Lord
             ?
             Which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             
               Panis
               fractio
               nonne
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             breaking
             of
             the
             bread
             ,
             is
             it
             not
             ,
             &c.
             
             And
             therefore
             to
             speake
             properly
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             that
             the
             text
             of
             S.
             Paul
             bee
             subiect
             to
             such
             reprehensions
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             this
             article
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             enter
             thereinto
             ,
             albeit
             the
             Ministers
             do
             reply
             ;
             the
             Doctors
             will
             say
             no
             more
             of
             it
             :
             as
             beeing
             a
             thing
             too
             much
             impertinent
             .
             For
             in
             the
             end
             ,
             should
             we
             speake
             of
             Merit
             ,
             and
             from
             that
             matter
             fall
             into
             an
             other
             .
          
           
           
             It
             troubleth
             them
             to
             deale
             with
             the
             vocation
             of
             lawfull
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Church
             ;
             and
             to
             eschew
             that
             matter
             ,
             would
             not
             alledge
             (
             what
             they
             might
             without
             straying
             )
             that
             first
             before
             we
             receiue
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             it
             was
             meete
             to
             examine
             ,
             whether
             they
             were
             Ministers
             lawfully
             sent
             from
             the
             true
             Church
             ,
             to
             preach
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             preachings
             to
             be
             heard
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             text
             of
             S.
             Paul
             
             aboue
             alledged
             .
             Which
             thing
             ,
             had
             they
             of
             the
             new
             Religion
             well
             considered
             ,
             a
             very
             sufficient
             argument
             should
             they
             haue
             had
             for
             not
             receiuing
             of
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             more
             cleare
             then
             the
             day
             ,
             that
             they
             be
             not
             Ministers
             sent
             by
             the
             Pastors
             of
             the
             Church
             but
             thrust
             in
             themselues
             to
             preach
             ,
             vnable
             to
             shewe
             any
             signe
             of
             their
             calling
             from
             men
             ,
             and
             much
             lesse
             from
             God.
             And
             were
             it
             lawfull
             for
             euery
             one
             to
             preach
             the
             word
             ,
             which
             saith
             he
             is
             sent
             ,
             there
             would
             be
             infinite
             Sects
             :
             as
             we
             see
             at
             this
             time
             haue
             happened
             .
             And
             they
             say
             no
             more
             of
             this
             matter
             ,
             for
             feare
             to
             aggrauate
             these
             things
             any
             further
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Article
             ,
             where
             mention
             is
             made
             ,
             how
             a
             man
             may
             knowe
             that
             a
             reuelation
             is
             of
             Ood
             :
             where
             it
             is
             said
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             men
             should
             rather
             know
             it
             by
             the
             word
             ,
             then
             by
             the
             consent
             of
             many
             :
             that
             maketh
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
             For
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             how
             a
             man
             should
             iudge
             a
             booke
             to
             containe
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             iudge
             of
             the
             doctrine
             ,
             by
             the
             word
             alreadie
             receiued
             .
             The
             Doctors
             would
             willingly
             desire
             ,
             and
             doo
             pray
             the
             Ministers
             to
             answere
             directly
             to
             the
             very
             point
             .
             Touching
             that
             they
             haue
             saide
             ,
             
               Of
               the
               consent
               of
               many
            
             .
             The
             Doctors
             said
             not
             so
             ,
             but
             spake
             of
             the
             consent
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             is
             also
             as
             infallible
             ,
             as
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             For
             as
             it
             is
             certaine
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             author
             of
             the
             Word
             ;
             so
             also
             is
             it
             certaine
             ,
             that
             hee
             is
             the
             soule
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             by
             whose
             conduct
             she
             can
             neuer
             erre
             :
             witnesse
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             who
             calleth
             her
             
               Columnam
               &
               firmamentum
               veritatis
            
             .
             The
             ground
             and
             pillar
             of
             truth
             .
             But
             they
             will
             not
             enter
             into
             this
             question
             ,
             whether
             the
             multitude
             of
             the
             Church
             may
             erre
             or
             not
             .
          
           
           
             Neuerthelesse
             it
             will
             not
             be
             found
             ●ithens
             the
             Church
             was
             planted
             after
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             that
             shee
             hath
             bene
             of
             lesse
             number
             ,
             then
             the
             Sects
             of
             heretikes
             .
             And
             that
             alledged
             of
             Constance
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             time
             of
             the
             olde
             Testament
             seru●th
             nothing
             to
             that
             purpose
             :
             for
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             betweene
             the
             Synagogue
             of
             the
             Iewes
             and
             the
             Church
             :
             which
             is
             the
             congregation
             of
             all
             Nations
             beleeuing
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             which
             cannot
             be
             or
             consist
             ,
             but
             in
             a
             most
             great
             multitude
             :
             otherwise
             the
             promises
             made
             to
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             should
             be
             vaine
             :
             for
             it
             is
             said
             to
             Abraham
             that
             his
             ●eed
             (
             this
             must
             not
             bee
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             carnall
             )
             should
             be
             multiplied
             as
             the
             starres
             of
             heauen
             ,
             and
             the
             sand
             of
             the
             sea
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Article
             which
             beginneth
             ,
             
               Touching
               the
               Prophets
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Doctors
             do
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             confesse
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             betweene
             phantasticall
             imaginations
             ,
             and
             the
             reuelation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             but
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             not
             answere
             how
             they
             would
             proue
             their
             particular
             perswasions
             ,
             to
             be
             reuelations
             ,
             rather
             then
             the
             vaine
             and
             foolish
             imaginations
             of
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             which
             Ezechiel
             spake
             of
             .
             The
             which
             notwithstanding
             they
             called
             inspirations
             :
             and
             what
             they
             said
             ,
             and
             preached
             ,
             they
             called
             also
             the
             Word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Article
             which
             beginneth
             ,
             
               Touching
               the
               Anabaptists
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             to
             one
             selfe-same
             end
             ,
             doo
             the
             Ministers
             and
             Anabaptists
             wholly
             produce
             the
             selfe-same
             places
             ,
             of
             which
             mention
             is
             made
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             stay
             and
             assure
             their
             doctrine
             to
             be
             of
             God
             ,
             because
             therof
             they
             haue
             particular
             reuelation
             ,
             as
             God
             hath
             promised
             them
             by
             the
             Prophets
             .
             And
             for
             this
             selfe-same
             cause
             ,
             haue
             the
             Ministers
             produced
             the
             said
             testimonies
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             to
             proue
             that
             euery
             faithfull
             man
             may
             indge
             by
             his
             particular
             inspiration
             ,
             if
             a
             booke
             do
             containe
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             and
             distinguish
             a
             booke
             Canonicall
             from
             Apocrypha
             :
             to
             iudge
             and
             discerne
             the
             true
             doctrine
             from
             the
             false
             :
             which
             is
             the
             selfe-same
             foundation
             of
             the
             Anabaptists
             and
             other
             heretikes
             .
          
           
           
             To
             that
             Article
             which
             beginneth
             ,
             
               touching
               that
               which
               is
               produced
               of
            
             Brentius
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             Doctors
             say
             :
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             not
             well
             conceiued
             their
             meaning
             .
             For
             they
             bring
             not
             the
             saying
             of
             Brentius
             and
             Bucer
             ,
             but
             onely
             because
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             know
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             by
             the
             tradition
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             particular
             inspiration
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Article
             following
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             say
             :
             there
             was
             a
             time
             when
             some
             made
             doubt
             of
             certaine
             bookes
             of
             the
             Scripture
             :
             as
             of
             the
             Apocalips
             ,
             the
             Canonicall
             Epistle
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             and
             others
             .
             But
             in
             time
             the
             Church
             guided
             by
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             with
             common
             consent
             receiued
             indifferently
             for
             Canonicall
             ,
             all
             the
             bookes
             that
             bee
             in
             the
             Bible
             ;
             which
             consent
             (
             continued
             by
             so
             many
             hundred
             yeares
             )
             hath
             more
             authoritie
             then
             the
             sayings
             of
             one
             or
             two
             :
             the
             which
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             spake
             not
             but
             of
             their
             owne
             time
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             comparison
             betweene
             the
             sayings
             of
             one
             or
             two
             particular
             men
             ,
             &
             the
             determinations
             of
             Councels
             ,
             and
             consent
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             as
             hath
             already
             beene
             sayd
             .
             And
             it
             will
             be
             found
             ,
             that
             S.
             Ierom
             hath
             approoued
             these
             bookes
             as
             Canonicall
             .
             And
             for
             the
             same
             ,
             will
             referre
             themselues
             to
             the
             Prologue
             which
             hee
             made
             vpon
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Macabees
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             :
             Touching
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             they
             are
             not
             Canonicall
             histories
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             or
             other
             wordes
             to
             the
             like
             effect
             .
             For
             the
             Councell
             of
             Laodicia
             ,
             they
             referre
             
             them
             to
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             therein
             .
             It
             may
             bee
             ,
             they
             are
             deceiued
             ,
             in
             cyting
             one
             Councell
             for
             another
             .
             For
             the
             Article
             beginning
             ,
             
               Touching
               the
               experience
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Although
             it
             be
             a
             question
             of
             fact
             :
             yet
             it
             ceaseth
             not
             to
             be
             much
             auailable
             .
             And
             if
             it
             be
             found
             as
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             proposed
             ,
             (
             of
             which
             they
             doubt
             nothing
             )
             the
             foundation
             of
             their
             particular
             reuelation
             is
             ouerthrowne
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Ministers
             conclusion
             :
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             shew
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             oft
             times
             complained
             ,
             they
             fell
             into
             by-matters
             .
             They
             referre
             themselues
             to
             the
             iudgement
             of
             all
             men
             ,
             that
             their
             last
             resolution
             was
             deducted
             all
             of
             one
             thread
             ,
             continuing
             without
             straying
             ,
             in
             the
             same
             matter
             :
             
             In
             which
             ,
             albeit
             they
             had
             found
             something
             wherein
             difficultie
             had
             beene
             ,
             had
             the
             Ministers
             so
             much
             desired
             to
             proceed
             to
             the
             conference
             of
             the
             chiefe
             pointes
             ;
             they
             might
             briefely
             haue
             admonished
             them
             of
             the
             said
             difficultie
             .
             The
             Doctors
             vpon
             these
             articles
             had
             verily
             said
             something
             :
             but
             to
             hasten
             the
             busines
             for
             the
             which
             they
             bee
             called
             ,
             they
             do
             forbeare
             to
             multiply
             words
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             shew
             ,
             that
             they
             receiue
             the
             24.
             bookes
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Newe
             .
             The
             Doctors
             say
             :
             that
             that
             is
             not
             the
             point
             .
             For
             all
             the
             conference
             they
             haue
             made
             hitherto
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             :
             by
             what
             rules
             men
             might
             discerne
             some
             bookes
             from
             other
             some
             ,
             and
             iudge
             whether
             they
             were
             of
             the
             Scripture
             or
             not
             ,
             was
             to
             raunge
             them
             in
             this
             point
             ,
             that
             they
             receiued
             them
             by
             the
             tradition
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             which
             is
             iudge
             of
             the
             number
             of
             the
             bookes
             :
             and
             by
             the
             same
             meanes
             ,
             when
             the
             question
             should
             bee
             ,
             of
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             (
             euen
             in
             the
             conference
             of
             the
             places
             of
             the
             same
             Scripture
             )
             the
             Ministers
             and
             Doctors
             should
             haue
             such
             reuerence
             to
             the
             Catholique
             Church
             ,
             that
             she
             should
             be
             of
             both
             parts
             accepted
             for
             iudge
             ,
             of
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             which
             they
             acknowledg
             to
             haue
             receiued
             of
             the
             same
             :
             wherof
             she
             is
             an
             infallible
             iudge
             ,
             and
             more
             certaine
             ,
             then
             the
             one
             or
             the
             other
             .
             And
             notwithstanding
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             make
             offer
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             not
             vse
             at
             this
             time
             against
             them
             ,
             but
             those
             bookes
             onely
             ,
             which
             they
             receiue
             for
             Canonicall
             .
             But
             when
             they
             shall
             fall
             into
             difficultie
             of
             the
             interpretation
             of
             some
             text
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             conference
             of
             many
             :
             the
             Doctors
             esteeme
             it
             more
             reasonable
             to
             haue
             recourse
             to
             the
             Catholique
             Church
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             then
             to
             their
             proper
             sence
             ,
             or
             that
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             For
             conclusion
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             accept
             of
             the
             offer
             made
             them
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             to
             decyde
             the
             pointes
             and
             articles
             of
             their
             Confession
             ,
             by
             the
             bookes
             Canonicall
             ,
             whereof
             they
             are
             agreed
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             24.
             bookes
             of
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             :
             
             protesting
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             last
             writtings
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             there
             bee
             many
             things
             which
             they
             no
             wayes
             approoue
             ,
             and
             doo
             hope
             to
             confute
             as
             occasions
             shall
             bee
             offered
             :
             and
             would
             presently
             haue
             done
             it
             ,
             had
             it
             not
             beene
             that
             they
             will
             shew
             (
             against
             that
             imputed
             to
             them
             by
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             they
             will
             not
             stray
             ,
             nor
             any
             way
             retyre
             from
             the
             conference
             of
             the
             points
             of
             their
             Confession
             .
          
        
         
           
             Reply
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             reciprocally
             do
             agree
             to
             the
             Ministers
             in
             the
             said
             offer
             :
             with
             this
             moderation
             ,
             to
             ad
             the
             authoritie
             of
             the
             vniuersall
             Church
             ,
             and
             the
             auncient
             Doctors
             ,
             for
             the
             interpretation
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             ,
             when
             they
             cannot
             agree
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           third
           dayes
           Dispute
           ,
           on
           Thursday
           ,
           the
           eleuenth
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           THE
           Ministers
           haue
           shewed
           what
           are
           the
           protestations
           which
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           made
           ,
           not
           for
           other
           ende
           to
           appeare
           in
           this
           Conference
           ,
           but
           to
           satisfie
           
             Madam
             de
             Buillon
          
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           bee
           instructed
           ,
           and
           otherwise
           informed
           of
           the
           pointes
           of
           Religion
           then
           they
           be
           .
           And
           those
           which
           the
           Ministers
           haue
           on
           their
           part
           made
           also
           ,
           not
           to
           conferre
           with
           them
           for
           any
           doubt
           they
           haue
           of
           the
           pointes
           of
           their
           Confession
           ,
           whereof
           they
           bee
           wholely
           resolued
           :
           By
           reason
           of
           which
           protestations
           ,
           they
           haue
           required
           that
           the
           first
           point
           ,
           whereof
           they
           shall
           conferre
           ,
           may
           bee
           that
           which
           
             Madam
             de
             Buillon
          
           hath
           publiquely
           required
           to
           bee
           decyded
           :
           that
           is
           of
           the
           Supper
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           Masse
           :
           that
           they
           may
           bee
           discharged
           of
           that
           also
           which
           hath
           beene
           imputed
           vnto
           them
           by
           the
           Doctors
           :
           that
           they
           wandered
           and
           would
           not
           come
           to
           the
           principall
           point
           ,
           which
           is
           ,
           that
           aforesaid
           of
           the
           Masse
           :
           but
           cōtrariwise
           that
           they
           fled
           away
           &
           drew
           backe
           
           from
           the
           conference
           .
           Finally
           ,
           that
           it
           may
           bee
           knowne
           who
           doo
           flye
           the
           decyding
           thereof
           :
           They
           offer
           ,
           after
           they
           haue
           cleared
           that
           point
           ,
           to
           conferre
           with
           them
           (
           if
           they
           please
           )
           of
           all
           the
           other
           points
           which
           be
           in
           controuersie
           ,
           as
           leisure
           and
           time
           shall
           therfore
           be
           granted
           .
           And
           doo
           also
           require
           ,
           to
           avoyd
           all
           confusion
           (
           and
           such
           as
           happened
           in
           the
           Conference
           the
           day
           before
           )
           that
           the
           Doctors
           may
           propose
           their
           arguments
           particularly
           each
           one
           apart
           :
           and
           that
           the
           answers
           also
           may
           bee
           made
           vnto
           them
           particularly
           by
           the
           Ministers
           .
           Ir
           els
           ,
           if
           they
           will
           propose
           all
           their
           arguments
           and
           reasons
           together
           ,
           that
           one
           whole
           day
           may
           bee
           graunted
           vnto
           them
           ,
           wherein
           they
           may
           doo
           that
           without
           any
           interruption
           :
           conditionally
           that
           the
           Ministers
           may
           haue
           the
           day
           following
           to
           answere
           by
           order
           to
           all
           their
           arguments
           .
        
         
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           by
           that
           which
           is
           aboue
           written
           in
           the
           behalfe
           of
           the
           Ministers
           :
           That
           it
           is
           easie
           to
           know
           ,
           they
           haue
           alwayes
           recoyled
           ,
           and
           yet
           do
           recoyle
           from
           conference
           of
           the
           things
           which
           they
           haue
           put
           in
           controuersie
           :
           and
           they
           are
           maruellously
           abashed
           ,
           that
           they
           will
           not
           now
           permit
           the
           articles
           of
           their
           confession
           to
           be
           examined
           by
           order
           :
           as
           the
           day
           of
           the
           first
           Conference
           they
           had
           required
           (
           my
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           my
           Lord
           and
           Lady
           of
           Buillion
           ,
           and
           other
           Lords
           and
           Gentlemen
           being
           present
           )
           in
           presenting
           their
           said
           confessions
           ,
           contained
           in
           a
           little
           guilded
           booke
           ,
           making
           offer
           to
           the
           Doctors
           to
           examine
           them
           in
           order
           (
           if
           they
           pleased
           )
           which
           they
           found
           very
           reasonable
           .
           And
           indeed
           the
           Ministers
           themselues
           hauing
           demanded
           of
           the
           Doctors
           whereof
           they
           would
           intreate
           ,
           departed
           yesterday
           ,
           contented
           to
           begin
           this
           day
           to
           examine
           the
           Articles
           of
           the
           Creed
           .
           And
           as
           touching
           their
           speeche
           of
           the
           protestation
           that
           the
           assembly
           was
           made
           for
           the
           instruction
           of
           my
           Lady
           ,
           who
           desireth
           (
           as
           they
           say
           in
           her
           absence
           )
           to
           bee
           first
           instructed
           concerning
           the
           Masse
           :
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ;
           that
           the
           Ministers
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           ,
           haue
           instructed
           the
           said
           Lady
           ,
           not
           onely
           in
           the
           error
           which
           concerneth
           their
           Supper
           :
           but
           also
           in
           many
           others
           ,
           as
           they
           will
           make
           it
           appeare
           ,
           when
           they
           shall
           handle
           the
           articles
           of
           the
           Confession
           by
           them
           exhibited
           .
           Then
           willing
           
           to
           instruct
           the
           Lady
           by
           order
           in
           the
           Catholique
           Religion
           :
           they
           purpose
           to
           follow
           the
           order
           held
           by
           the
           Fathers
           of
           the
           Church
           ;
           that
           is
           to
           say
           :
           to
           shew
           vnto
           her
           ,
           how
           many
           errors
           against
           the
           Articles
           of
           the
           faith
           ,
           are
           contained
           in
           the
           Catechisme
           of
           their
           Ghurch
           :
           although
           they
           shew
           to
           them
           of
           their
           religion
           ,
           that
           they
           differ
           in
           these
           articles
           nothing
           from
           the
           Catholiques
           .
           And
           because
           to
           catechise
           and
           instruct
           one
           ,
           it
           behooueth
           to
           beginne
           at
           the
           foundation
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           certaine
           articles
           of
           the
           Creed
           (
           in
           which
           the
           Ministers
           &
           their
           like
           do
           erre
           )
           dependeth
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           proofe
           of
           the
           reall
           presence
           of
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Aultar
           :
           they
           will
           holde
           the
           order
           which
           all
           good
           teachers
           or
           instructors
           doo
           keepe
           in
           all
           discipline
           ,
           and
           the
           Ministers
           themselues
           do
           obserue
           ,
           following
           in
           their
           Catechisme
           this
           method
           .
           And
           rightly
           were
           the
           Doctors
           to
           bee
           mocked
           (
           whom
           men
           doo
           take
           for
           instructors
           )
           if
           they
           should
           beginne
           (
           for
           the
           Ministers
           pleasure
           )
           to
           instruct
           one
           in
           that
           point
           ,
           wherein
           they
           ought
           to
           ende
           :
           as
           endeth
           the
           same
           Catechisme
           of
           the
           Ministers
           vpon
           the
           matter
           of
           the
           Supper
           .
        
         
           Moreouer
           ,
           seeing
           the
           Ministers
           are
           content
           (
           as
           they
           say
           )
           that
           all
           the
           articles
           of
           their
           confession
           bee
           examined
           :
           no
           priuiledge
           haue
           they
           ,
           but
           that
           one
           begin
           at
           the
           first
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           all
           order
           so
           requireth
           :
           and
           it
           is
           alwayes
           at
           the
           choice
           of
           the
           Apponent
           to
           propound
           (
           in
           such
           order
           as
           seemeth
           best
           to
           him
           )
           the
           questions
           for
           the
           Dispute
           ,
           were
           there
           any
           .
           And
           for
           as
           much
           as
           they
           are
           bound
           to
           giue
           a
           reason
           of
           their
           faith
           ,
           as
           often
           as
           they
           be
           therof
           required
           :
           expedient
           it
           were
           for
           the
           good
           of
           the
           Lady
           ,
           &
           for
           the
           instruction
           of
           those
           that
           shall
           read
           the
           Conference
           ,
           to
           follow
           this
           method
           .
           And
           if
           they
           refuse
           what
           the
           Doctors
           doo
           offer
           ,
           they
           cannot
           auoyd
           it
           ,
           but
           all
           the
           world
           will
           iudge
           (
           by
           the
           eye
           )
           that
           distrusting
           their
           owne
           doctrine
           (
           which
           they
           dare
           not
           vphold
           )
           they
           confound
           the
           Conference
           .
        
         
           Whereas
           they
           require
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           in
           the
           Conference
           ,
           put
           foorth
           but
           one
           reason
           at
           once
           :
           wherevnto
           they
           may
           answere
           without
           confusion
           :
           or
           else
           ,
           that
           in
           one
           day
           the
           
           Doctors
           put
           forth
           all
           their
           reasons
           ,
           and
           on
           an
           other
           day
           the
           Ministers
           may
           come
           to
           answere
           .
           The
           Doctors
           do
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           first
           offer
           is
           reasonable
           ;
           and
           to
           auoyd
           length
           of
           speech
           ,
           they
           accept
           it
           :
           but
           they
           neuer
           heard
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           second
           maner
           hath
           bene
           practised
           :
           and
           no
           need
           it
           were
           to
           assemble
           together
           in
           one
           place
           for
           that
           purpose
           ,
           but
           to
           send
           their
           writings
           the
           one
           to
           the
           other
           .
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             exhibiting
             of
             the
             confession
             ,
             and
             the
             offers
             which
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             to
             haue
             beene
             made
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             report
             themselues
             to
             the
             Registers
             .
             And
             do
             adde
             moreouer
             ,
             that
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             Doctors
             last
             proposition
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             vpon
             the
             confession
             which
             the
             Doctors
             say
             was
             exhibited
             vnto
             them
             ,
             but
             vpon
             the
             Catechisme
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             ground
             their
             Dispute
             .
             For
             conclusion
             ,
             the
             Miuisters
             do
             eftsoones
             protest
             as
             abouesaid
             ,
             that
             men
             may
             know
             who
             they
             be
             that
             doo
             flye
             the
             Lists
             ,
             and
             require
             that
             henceforth
             the
             order
             of
             arguing
             and
             answering
             ,
             may
             be
             by
             course
             ,
             betweene
             them
             and
             the
             Doctors
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             it
             behoueth
             that
             things
             be
             equall
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             is
             reasonable
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             as
             well
             do
             render
             a
             reason
             of
             their
             faith
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
        
         
           
             Reply
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             do
             referre
             them
             to
             what
             hath
             bene
             put
             in
             writing
             in
             the
             two
             first
             Conferences
             :
             where
             speech
             was
             alwaies
             of
             examining
             the
             articles
             of
             their
             confession
             ,
             without
             making
             any
             mention
             of
             the
             Masse
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             that
             it
             seemeth
             the
             Doctors
             would
             examine
             the
             Catechisme
             ,
             and
             not
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             confession
             :
             the
             Doctors
             are
             content
             to
             examine
             the
             said
             articles
             ,
             by
             conferring
             them
             with
             the
             Catechisme
             .
             This
             considered
             ,
             that
             these
             two
             ought
             to
             agree
             together
             :
             they
             make
             all
             men
             iudges
             that
             shal
             read
             these
             writings
             ,
             in
             whom
             is
             the
             let
             ,
             that
             they
             begin
             not
             the
             Conference
             .
             And
             for
             the
             order
             which
             the
             Ministers
             will
             now
             change
             ,
             a
             new
             fashion
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             also
             a
             new
             trouble
             ▪
             cōsidering
             that
             hitherto
             they
             haue
             holden
             the
             place
             of
             respondent
             ,
             and
             haue
             presented
             to
             be
             examined
             ,
             the
             articles
             of
             their
             confession
             .
             As
             for
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             they
             haue
             bene
             alwaies
             arguers
             ,
             and
             
             haue
             not
             for
             their
             part
             proposed
             ought
             to
             be
             examined
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             they
             are
             contented
             after
             examination
             of
             the
             said
             confession
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             propound
             the
             difficulties
             they
             shall
             haue
             against
             the
             Catholike
             doctrine
             :
             wherevnto
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             will
             answere
             .
          
        
         
           
             Demaund
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Ministers
             do
             beleeue
             the
             Creed
             ,
             called
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             to
             haue
             bene
             made
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ?
             and
             whether
             they
             do
             beleeue
             all
             that
             is
             contained
             therein
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             in
             difference
             ,
             whether
             the
             Apostles
             being
             together
             ,
             themselues
             did
             write
             it
             ,
             each
             one
             of
             them
             bringing
             his
             sentence
             (
             as
             some
             do
             hold
             )
             :
             or
             whether
             it
             hath
             bene
             gathered
             out
             of
             diuers
             places
             of
             their
             writings
             .
             But
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             reformed
             Church
             ,
             men
             beleeue
             euery
             point
             to
             bee
             drawne
             from
             the
             pure
             Propheticall
             and
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             contained
             in
             their
             writings
             :
             as
             if
             one
             should
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             Summarie
             of
             the
             doctrine
             which
             the
             Apostles
             haue
             preached
             ,
             because
             it
             beareth
             and
             containeth
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Leauing
             (
             to
             auoyd
             tediousnesse
             )
             whether
             it
             bee
             a
             thing
             indifferent
             for
             a
             Christian
             to
             beleeue
             ,
             that
             a
             doctrine
             hath
             bene
             written
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             no
             :
             if
             it
             be
             conformable
             to
             that
             which
             shal
             be
             found
             in
             holy
             writ
             :
             they
             demaund
             whether
             all
             doctrine
             conformable
             to
             the
             said
             Letters
             ,
             may
             take
             indifferently
             the
             title
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             other
             authors
             of
             the
             scripture
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             No
             man
             can
             faile
             to
             call
             it
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             :
             but
             in
             naming
             it
             Apostolike
             writing
             ,
             one
             might
             giue
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             written
             by
             their
             owne
             hands
             ▪
             or
             spoken
             by
             them
             .
             But
             howsoeuer
             it
             be
             ,
             where
             we
             shall
             acknowledge
             any
             doctrine
             to
             sauour
             of
             the
             spirit
             ,
             wherwith
             the
             holy
             men
             of
             God
             haue
             bin
             moued
             ,
             that
             call
             we
             Propheticall
             and
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             demaund
             was
             not
             ,
             whether
             the
             doctrine
             be
             Apostolike
             ,
             for
             any
             such
             conformitie
             :
             but
             whether
             for
             this
             reason
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             attributed
             to
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             of
             like
             authoritie
             
             as
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             vnto
             which
             it
             is
             conformable
             :
             forasmuch
             as
             it
             proceedeth
             from
             one selfe
             same
             spirit
             ,
             as
             is
             sayd
             in
             the
             answere
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Answere
             thereto
             is
             made
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             writing
             doth
             containe
             Apostolique
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             in
             some
             sence
             it
             may
             be
             said
             to
             be
             the
             Apostles
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Answere
             (
             vnder
             correction
             )
             nought
             pertaineth
             to
             the
             question
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             demaunded
             ,
             whether
             men
             may
             esteeme
             it
             Apostolique
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             conformitie
             ,
             but
             whether
             for
             this
             conformitie
             ,
             men
             may
             attribute
             it
             to
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             giue
             vnto
             it
             the
             tytle
             and
             name
             of
             the
             Apostles
             :
             and
             whether
             for
             the
             said
             conformitie
             ,
             it
             be
             of
             like
             authoritie
             with
             the
             proper
             writtings
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             question
             was
             ,
             whether
             the
             Creed
             were
             made
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ?
             Whereunto
             hath
             beene
             rendred
             sufficient
             answere
             .
             After
             which
             it
             is
             lawfull
             to
             make
             the
             second
             demand
             ,
             which
             is
             diuers
             from
             that
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             second
             ,
             dependeth
             on
             the
             first
             ,
             and
             so
             hath
             it
             been
             made
             .
             Whether
             it
             bee
             thought
             sufficiently
             answered
             ,
             let
             the
             iudgement
             thereof
             be
             referred
             to
             the
             reader
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Because
             it
             dependeth
             thereupon
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             therefore
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Whether
             they
             approoue
             the
             Creed
             onely
             ,
             because
             they
             know
             it
             to
             be
             conformable
             to
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ?
             Or
             whether
             there
             any
             other
             cause
             ,
             which
             incyteth
             them
             to
             beleeue
             it
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             not
             onely
             conformable
             ,
             but
             the
             doctrine
             it selfe
             :
             and
             for
             that
             cause
             doo
             they
             beleeue
             it
             ,
             and
             approoue
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Whether
             a
             man
             be
             not
             bound
             to
             receiue
             it
             ,
             but
             for
             so
             much
             as
             hee
             knoweth
             it
             to
             bee
             the
             same
             writing
             ,
             or
             conformable
             
             to
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             as
             is
             aforesaid
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             principall
             cause
             that
             may
             moue
             him
             that
             beleeueth
             it
             ,
             to
             beleeue
             it
             ,
             is
             the
             knowledge
             afore
             spoken
             of
             .
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             Although
             this
             be
             the
             principall
             cause
             ,
             they
             require
             an
             absolute
             answere
             ,
             whether
             there
             be
             not
             other
             sufficient
             cause
             to
             beleeue
             it
             ,
             in
             such
             wise
             as
             this
             first
             is
             necessarie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             Creed
             ,
             and
             euery
             other
             thing
             we
             beleeue
             ,
             the
             principall
             cause
             is
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             we
             haue
             that
             the
             same
             hath
             bene
             left
             in
             writing
             ,
             or
             collected
             of
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             .
             And
             we
             for
             our
             part
             seeke
             no
             other
             reason
             but
             that
             of
             the
             faith
             which
             we
             haue
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             They
             answere
             not
             (
             vnder
             correction
             )
             to
             the
             question
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             whether
             to
             receiue
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             this
             cause
             be
             necessary
             ,
             to
             know
             the
             cōformitie
             of
             the
             said
             Creed
             ,
             with
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Apostles
             :
             and
             that
             without
             the
             same
             ,
             none
             can
             or
             ought
             to
             receiue
             it
             .
             The
             Doctors
             pray
             them
             to
             auoyd
             circumlocution
             ,
             and
             answere
             absolutely
             the
             one
             or
             the
             other
             .
             And
             more
             simply
             to
             explane
             the
             question
             ,
             this
             it
             is
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             one
             ought
             not
             to
             receiue
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             but
             because
             he
             knoweth
             that
             it
             is
             conformable
             to
             the
             Apostles
             writings
             ?
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             matter
             considered
             after
             the
             doctrine
             of
             S.
             Paul
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             true
             faith
             without
             knowledge
             and
             assurance
             of
             the
             word
             :
             to
             beleeue
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             to
             know
             that
             it
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Question
             .
          
           
             It
             would
             be
             knowne
             ,
             whether
             they
             vnderstand
             this
             word
             to
             be
             written
             ,
             or
             not
             written
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             word
             written
             and
             reuealed
             by
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Christian
             faith
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             doo
             then
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             before
             the
             beleeuing
             
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             or
             proposing
             it
             to
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             to
             be
             instructed
             ,
             or
             to
             instruct
             an
             other
             ,
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Prophets
             .
             Now
             that
             is
             contrary
             to
             all
             the
             order
             euer
             holden
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             contrary
             to
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             forme
             ,
             prescribed
             for
             administration
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             in
             the
             Church
             at
             Geneua
             ,
             made
             by
             Caluin
             ,
             and
             inserted
             amongst
             his
             workes
             ;
             which
             beareth
             these
             words
             ,
             addressed
             to
             them
             that
             haue
             charge
             of
             the
             childe
             they
             baptise
             :
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             matter
             wee
             haue
             in
             hand
             ,
             is
             to
             receiue
             this
             childe
             into
             the
             fellowship
             of
             the
             Christian
             Church
             ,
             yea
             do
             promise
             whē
             it
             shal
             come
             to
             yeares
             of
             discretion
             ,
             to
             instruct
             it
             in
             the
             doctrine
             which
             is
             receiued
             and
             approued
             of
             Gods
             people
             .
             And
             after
             these
             words
             ,
             is
             inserted
             the
             Creed
             :
             after
             which
             ,
             it
             is
             said
             they
             shall
             proceed
             to
             the
             instruction
             of
             the
             childe
             in
             all
             the
             doctrine
             contained
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             of
             the
             olde
             and
             new
             Testament
             :
             so
             that
             before
             they
             propose
             the
             Creed
             to
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             they
             propose
             not
             to
             be
             beleeued
             that
             there
             is
             any
             word
             of
             God
             written
             ,
             nor
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             nor
             that
             therein
             contained
             ,
             to
             know
             the
             conformitie
             of
             the
             Creed
             with
             the
             same
             .
             Also
             they
             place
             not
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             beleeuing
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             vpon
             the
             knowledge
             and
             conformitie
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             but
             vpon
             the
             doctrine
             receiued
             and
             approued
             by
             the
             people
             of
             God.
             As
             the
             auncient
             Church
             ,
             yea
             before
             the
             scriptures
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             were
             written
             ,
             did
             wontedly
             propose
             both
             to
             great
             and
             small
             ,
             the
             beliefe
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             before
             they
             proposed
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             by
             Christian
             antiquities
             appeareth
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             beliefe
             of
             a
             Christian
             touching
             the
             Creed
             ,
             dependeth
             not
             on
             the
             written
             word
             ,
             but
             vpon
             the
             word
             reuealed
             to
             the
             people
             and
             church
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             first
             article
             ,
             it
             is
             very
             necessarie
             that
             in
             teaching
             a
             childe
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             ignorant
             person
             ,
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             they
             also
             forthwith
             teach
             him
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Prophets
             ,
             seeing
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             
             in
             the
             Creed
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             but
             the
             selfe-same
             doctrine
             :
             and
             that
             they
             are
             things
             not
             onely
             conioyned
             ,
             but
             also
             like
             ,
             if
             not
             in
             words
             ,
             yet
             at
             least
             in
             sence
             and
             substance
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             second
             article
             ,
             they
             denie
             that
             that
             abouesaid
             ,
             is
             any
             way
             cōtrary
             to
             the
             established
             order
             in
             the
             church
             of
             Geneua
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             well
             gouerned
             Church
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             reason
             drawne
             frō
             the
             forme
             of
             the
             Baptisme
             vsed
             in
             the
             said
             Churches
             ,
             it
             followeth
             not
             ,
             by
             the
             alledged
             words
             and
             sayings
             thereof
             ,
             that
             Caluin
             proposed
             thē
             to
             exclude
             the
             Creed
             ,
             and
             to
             seperate
             the
             same
             from
             the
             writings
             and
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Prophets
             &
             Apostles
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             impossible
             )
             but
             plainly
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             when
             he
             added
             that
             word
             ,
             hee
             meant
             therin
             to
             comprehend
             it
             ,
             and
             generally
             (
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             omitted
             in
             their
             allegation
             )
             to
             comprehend
             that
             which
             remaineth
             in
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             ,
             after
             the
             deduction
             he
             had
             made
             of
             the
             points
             of
             doctrine
             ,
             particularly
             comprised
             in
             the
             Creed
             .
             And
             for
             the
             other
             reason
             added
             ,
             that
             the
             Creed
             was
             proposed
             to
             those
             that
             were
             catechised
             ,
             before
             any
             booke
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             was
             written
             ,
             they
             grant
             it
             .
             But
             it
             followeth
             not
             therefore
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             founded
             on
             the
             word
             and
             doctrine
             which
             the
             Apostles
             did
             preach
             :
             (
             although
             then
             not
             put
             in
             writing
             )
             And
             likewise
             on
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             wherevpon
             is
             founded
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Apostles
             .
             For
             conclusion
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             put
             no
             difference
             as
             touching
             the
             sence
             betweene
             the
             word
             of
             God
             preached
             and
             written
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             (
             it
             seemeth
             )
             haue
             not
             well
             conceiued
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
             For
             the
             question
             is
             not
             whether
             the
             Creed
             bee
             conformable
             in
             it selfe
             ,
             to
             the
             writings
             Apostolike
             ;
             but
             whether
             it
             first
             behoueth
             to
             beleeue
             and
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Prophets
             haue
             put
             a
             doctrine
             in
             writing
             ,
             vnto
             which
             the
             Creed
             is
             conformable
             :
             and
             that
             otherwise
             ,
             the
             Creed
             cannot
             bee
             beleeued
             .
             And
             for
             more
             easie
             explanation
             ,
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             not
             possible
             for
             a
             childe
             ,
             (
             being
             come
             to
             yeares
             of
             discretion
             )
             or
             any
             other
             ,
             by
             the
             instruction
             of
             the
             father
             and
             mother
             ,
             
             or
             others
             ,
             to
             beleeue
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             without
             being
             first
             instructed
             by
             them
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             certaine
             Apostolike
             writings
             ,
             vnto
             which
             ,
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             are
             conformable
             .
             And
             whether
             to
             moue
             them
             so
             to
             beleeue
             ,
             it
             be
             necessary
             to
             know
             that
             conformitie
             ;
             Let
             the
             Ministers
             absolutely
             answere
             therevnto
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             Faith
             is
             by
             hearing
             ,
             and
             hearing
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             
             wherevnto
             agreeth
             ,
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             saith
             :
             putting
             the
             hearing
             of
             the
             word
             before
             the
             faith
             thereof
             ,
             saying
             :
             He
             
             
               that
               heareth
               my
               word
               ,
               and
               beleeueth
               in
               him
               that
               sent
               me
               ,
            
             &c.
             
             Also
             that
             which
             hee
             commaunded
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             first
             to
             preach
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             that
             the
             hearers
             might
             by
             preaching
             ,
             be
             disposed
             and
             brought
             to
             the
             faith
             .
             For
             these
             reasons
             ,
             knowledge
             that
             the
             doctrine
             which
             is
             taught
             ,
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             necessarie
             to
             beleeue
             :
             And
             without
             that
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             for
             a
             man
             to
             haue
             faith
             ,
             or
             beleeue
             in
             God
             ,
             except
             he
             be
             first
             assured
             ,
             that
             what
             is
             taught
             him
             ,
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             And
             for
             the
             demaund
             made
             touching
             the
             instruction
             of
             children
             growne
             to
             yeares
             of
             discretion
             ,
             or
             others
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             requisite
             they
             should
             know
             the
             word
             ,
             before
             they
             beleeue
             it
             .
             The
             answere
             is
             ,
             yea
             .
             And
             Thomas
             himselfe
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             expounded
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             cleared
             :
             which
             cannot
             be
             done
             without
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             word
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             In
             such
             an
             answere
             there
             is
             multiplying
             of
             words
             ,
             without
             ought
             touching
             the
             point
             proposed
             :
             for
             they
             doubt
             not
             but
             that
             they
             ought
             to
             Catechise
             children
             and
             others
             ,
             and
             to
             expound
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             vnto
             them
             :
             but
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             whether
             they
             must
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             this
             Word
             is
             written
             in
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             :
             so
             that
             without
             the
             knowledge
             of
             those
             writings
             ,
             they
             cannot
             haue
             the
             knowledge
             and
             beliefe
             of
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             faith
             contained
             in
             the
             said
             Creed
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             pray
             the
             Ministers
             to
             answere
             yea
             or
             no
             :
             
             and
             after
             their
             answere
             ,
             to
             adde
             what
             reasons
             they
             will.
             Which
             thing
             if
             they
             will
             not
             do
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             will
             proceed
             to
             an
             other
             article
             ;
             after
             notwithstanding
             (
             for
             conclusion
             of
             all
             )
             they
             haue
             shewed
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             if
             this
             knowledge
             of
             the
             scriptures
             were
             necessarie
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             in
             examining
             them
             according
             to
             the
             conformitie
             of
             the
             same
             scriptures
             ,
             that
             it
             behooueth
             (
             sith
             the
             foundation
             is
             so
             necessarie
             )
             to
             place
             this
             among
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             :
             [
             I
             beleeue
             that
             there
             be
             holy
             scriptures
             .
             ]
             And
             it
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             mention
             made
             in
             the
             said
             Creed
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             holy
             scriptures
             .
             So
             that
             a
             man
             may
             be
             truly
             a
             Christian
             ,
             before
             he
             vnderstand
             that
             there
             is
             any
             Christian
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             word
             of
             God
             written
             .
             And
             therfore
             to
             beleeue
             and
             vnderstand
             the
             Creed
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             necessary
             to
             knowe
             the
             word
             of
             God
             to
             be
             written
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             do
             protest
             that
             they
             will
             speake
             no
             more
             of
             this
             article
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             By
             conference
             of
             the
             demaunds
             and
             answeres
             ,
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             iudge
             ,
             who
             more
             abound
             in
             speech
             ,
             they
             which
             propound
             ,
             or
             they
             that
             answere
             .
             Touching
             the
             second
             article
             ,
             the
             answere
             is
             as
             before
             ;
             that
             to
             beleeue
             ,
             and
             be
             a
             Christian
             ,
             the
             knowledge
             of
             Gods
             word
             is
             necessarie
             ,
             whether
             the
             said
             word
             be
             written
             or
             reuealed
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             remonstrance
             made
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             they
             for
             their
             part
             will
             in
             no
             wise
             allow
             men
             should
             ought
             adde
             to
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God.
             And
             they
             beleeue
             that
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             is
             nothing
             else
             but
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             proposed
             vnto
             vs
             by
             his
             spirit
             ,
             saying
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             bee
             a
             breach
             against
             his
             commandement
             to
             adde
             therevnto
             new
             articles
             .
             And
             they
             do
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             had
             there
             bene
             other
             articles
             which
             had
             bene
             necessary
             to
             saluation
             ,
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             would
             not
             haue
             omitted
             nor
             forgotten
             them
             .
             For
             conclusion
             ,
             albeit
             no
             expresse
             mention
             bee
             made
             of
             the
             holy
             scripture
             in
             the
             Creed
             ,
             yet
             so
             much
             is
             there
             couertly
             vnderstood
             ,
             that
             the
             Church
             (
             which
             cannot
             stand
             if
             shee
             be
             not
             built
             and
             founded
             vpon
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             )
             is
             there
             proposed
             for
             an
             article
             to
             beleeue
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Reply
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             answere
             is
             impertinent
             ,
             and
             no
             more
             to
             the
             purpose
             then
             the
             former
             .
             And
             although
             the
             Prophets
             and
             Apostles
             had
             not
             written
             ,
             yet
             had
             the
             Church
             bin
             built
             vpon
             their
             foundation
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Abrahā
             ,
             and
             before
             there
             was
             any
             scripture
             :
             which
             ,
             were
             it
             necessary
             to
             saluation
             ,
             it
             had
             bene
             put
             amongst
             the
             articles
             of
             faith
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             reply
             is
             yet
             more
             impertiment
             :
             and
             for
             the
             reason
             thereto
             added
             ,
             that
             the
             faith
             was
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Abraham
             ,
             although
             there
             were
             no
             word
             written
             :
             they
             do
             agree
             therevnto
             .
             But
             it
             is
             ill
             inferred
             :
             there
             is
             no
             written
             word
             .
             There
             is
             therefore
             no
             word
             .
             And
             it
             is
             a
             fallacie
             in
             argument
             ,
             which
             the
             Logicians
             doo
             call
             ,
             
               A
               dicto
               secundum
               quid
               ad
               dictū
               simpliciter
               .
            
             From
             a
             qualified
             saying
             ,
             to
             a
             saying
             simple
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           fourth
           dayes
           .
           Dispute
           on
           Fryday
           the
           12.
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           THe
           Ministers
           do
           shewe
           ,
           that
           they
           still
           continue
           their
           former
           requests
           ,
           considering
           the
           protestations
           aforesaid
           made
           by
           the
           Doctors
           :
           who
           haue
           twise
           declared
           ,
           that
           they
           were
           not
           assembled
           ,
           but
           onely
           to
           satisfie
           the
           Lord
           Montpensier
           ,
           and
           my
           Lady
           of
           Buillon
           :
           considering
           also
           the
           request
           publikely
           made
           by
           the
           said
           Lady
           in
           the
           assembly
           ,
           to
           bee
           instructed
           in
           the
           point
           of
           the
           Supper
           ,
           and
           not
           vpon
           the
           others
           ,
           whereof
           she
           thinketh
           her selfe
           sufficiently
           instructed
           ,
           and
           not
           to
           need
           therein
           any
           further
           teaching
           .
           And
           for
           these
           causes
           do
           the
           Ministers
           request
           ,
           as
           before
           they
           haue
           done
           ,
           that
           the
           first
           thing
           ,
           whereof
           they
           shall
           conferre
           ,
           be
           that
           of
           the
           Supper
           ▪
           and
           of
           the
           Masse
           .
           And
           the
           rather
           ,
           for
           that
           they
           vnderstood
           by
           some
           worthy
           of
           credit
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           intend
           not
           to
           enter
           into
           conference
           vpon
           that
           point
           .
        
         
           Vpon
           this
           declaration
           ,
           the
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           
           ashamed
           to
           heare
           so
           often
           protestations
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Ministers
           (
           it
           seemeth
           )
           will
           thus
           spend
           the
           time
           ,
           to
           flee
           eftsoones
           the
           Conference
           of
           the
           articles
           of
           their
           confession
           :
           which
           neuerthelesse
           they
           haue
           oftentimes
           set
           forth
           to
           be
           examined
           .
           And
           where
           they
           say
           ,
           that
           Madame
           
             de
             Buillon
          
           (
           for
           instruction
           of
           whom
           the
           company
           is
           assembled
           )
           hath
           required
           publikely
           to
           bee
           instructed
           in
           the
           articles
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           and
           in
           no
           other
           .
           They
           say
           ,
           that
           some
           mention
           shee
           made
           for
           Conference
           of
           the
           Masse
           :
           but
           they
           neuer
           heard
           say
           that
           she
           held
           her selfe
           sufficiently
           instructed
           concerning
           the
           other
           articles
           .
           The
           Doctors
           do
           offer
           ,
           that
           if
           the
           said
           Lady
           will
           confesse
           that
           she
           beleeueth
           all
           the
           other
           articles
           proposed
           by
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           and
           their
           like
           against
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Catholike
           Church
           ,
           to
           be
           e●ronious
           ,
           they
           are
           presently
           readie
           to
           enter
           into
           Conference
           of
           the
           Masse
           .
           But
           contrariwise
           ,
           if
           she
           be
           seduced
           with
           errors
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Church
           Catholike
           ,
           to
           keepe
           the
           order
           which
           appertaineth
           to
           instructors
           ,
           and
           to
           lay
           the
           foundatiō
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           determined
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           good
           &
           holy
           des●e
           of
           my
           lord
           Montpensier
           ,
           to
           car●chife
           &
           teach
           the
           Lady
           his
           daughter
           cōcerning
           euery
           article
           ,
           &
           by
           order
           .
           And
           they
           further
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           do
           what
           they
           of
           their
           Church
           are
           accustomed
           ;
           which
           is
           ,
           alwaies
           to
           flie
           back
           frō
           the
           Confere●ence
           with
           the
           Catholikes
           ,
           and
           be
           for●the
           point
           proposed
           by
           them
           be
           decided
           ,
           they
           put
           an
           other
           in
           Dispute
           :
           as
           did
           Be●a
           and
           the
           Ministers
           with
           him
           at
           Poissy
           :
           who
           seeing
           the
           Supper
           was
           to
           be
           handled
           against
           thē
           in
           the
           chamber
           of
           the
           Prior
           of
           Poissy
           in
           the
           pre●●ce
           of
           the
           Queen
           ,
           of
           the
           Prinoes
           of
           bloud
           ,
           &
           of
           the
           Lords
           of
           the
           Councell
           ,
           they
           often
           requested
           to
           leaue
           that
           point
           vndecided
           ,
           hand
           to
           enter
           into
           some
           other
           which
           should
           be
           more
           euident
           against
           the
           Catholikes
           as
           of
           Images
           and
           other
           things
           .
           And
           contrariwise
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           to
           auoyd
           now
           the
           great
           〈◊〉
           which
           be
           in
           their
           interpretation
           of
           the
           Creed
           ,
           would
           set
           forth
           the
           point
           of
           the
           Supper
           .
           The
           Doctors
           beseech
           ,
           as
           they
           haue
           〈◊〉
           that
           there
           be
           no
           confusion
           in
           their
           doing
           ;
           and
           〈◊〉
           their
           religio●e
           examined
           by
           order
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           be
           no●
           thought
           that
           the
           Doctors
           doo
           refuse
           ●o
           enter
           
           into
           the
           Conference
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           and
           the
           Supper
           ,
           as
           they
           haue
           alwaies
           determined
           and
           neuer
           said
           (
           vnder
           correction
           of
           all
           persons
           )
           that
           they
           would
           not
           conferre
           theerof
           :
           for
           my
           Ladies
           briefe
           instruction
           ,
           they
           are
           readie
           to
           dispute
           thereof
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           ,
           and
           plainly
           to
           shewe
           by
           the
           expresse
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           instituted
           ,
           and
           said
           Masse
           ,
           and
           his
           Apostles
           also
           .
           They
           do
           also
           offer
           ,
           that
           whatsoeuer
           shall
           be
           said
           by
           word
           of
           mouth
           vpon
           this
           matter
           ,
           be
           put
           in
           writing
           the
           next
           day
           after
           ,
           to
           be
           placed
           in
           it
           order
           :
           as
           the
           instruction
           of
           my
           Lady
           doth
           require
           .
           And
           do
           referre
           them
           for
           the
           day
           ,
           to
           the
           said
           Ladies
           opportunitie
           .
        
         
           The
           Ministers
           do
           answere
           ,
           that
           all
           these
           answeres
           are
           superfluous
           ,
           and
           vnprofitable
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           all
           such
           Conferences
           are
           nothing
           but
           debates
           and
           al●rications
           ,
           which
           do●
           offend
           and
           scandalize
           more
           then
           they
           edifie
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Resolution
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             ensuing
             the
             order
             alreadie
             begun
             ,
             and
             their
             charge
             which
             is
             to
             conferre
             with
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             to
             giue
             a
             resolution
             for
             the
             instruction
             of
             my
             Lady
             of
             Buillon
             ,
             vpon
             the
             two
             points
             proposed
             yesterday
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             the
             Apostles
             were
             authors
             of
             the
             Creed
             .
             And
             why
             we
             ought
             to
             beleeue
             it
             .
             They
             say
             ,
             that
             to
             know
             whether
             the
             Apostles
             did
             make
             and
             erect
             the
             Creed
             ,
             ought
             no
             more
             to
             be
             esteemed
             a
             thing
             indifferent
             ,
             then
             to
             know
             whether
             the
             Apostles
             be
             authors
             of
             their
             owne
             writings
             .
             For
             much
             more
             is
             the
             authoritie
             of
             them
             ,
             when
             a
             man
             is
             assured
             that
             they
             are
             certainly
             proceeded
             from
             the
             Apostles
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             far
             lesse
             ,
             if
             men
             did
             doubt
             therof
             ,
             or
             esteem
             it
             a
             thing
             indifferent
             .
             Moreouer
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             no
             sufficient
             reason
             to
             call
             this
             Creed
             Apostolike
             ,
             and
             to
             intitle
             it
             ,
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             :
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             conformitie
             it
             hath
             with
             their
             writings
             .
             For
             by
             this
             reason
             ,
             the
             other
             Creeds
             (
             as
             that
             of
             Nice
             ,
             of
             Ath●n●sius
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             the
             like
             writings
             )
             may
             as
             well
             be
             named
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ;
             because
             they
             containe
             a
             doctrine
             agreeable
             to
             the
             Apostles
             
             writings
             .
             Therefore
             say
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             did
             make
             it
             ,
             and
             gaue
             the
             same
             Creed
             vnto
             Christians
             ▪
             and
             that
             it
             must
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             as
             being
             a
             writing
             composed
             by
             the
             Apostles
             .
             And
             their
             proofe
             thereof
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             alwayes
             finde
             since
             the
             Apostles
             time
             vntil
             now
             ,
             that
             this
             Creed
             hath
             bene
             proposed
             in
             Baptisme
             and
             Catechisme
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             authors
             which
             haue
             beene
             from
             the
             Apostles
             vnto
             vs.
             And
             also
             that
             no
             man
             can
             name
             ,
             or
             note
             any
             Author
             or
             Councell
             (
             but
             euen
             before
             that
             Author
             ,
             or
             Councell
             ,
             immediately
             to
             the
             Apostles
             time
             )
             that
             Creed
             hath
             beene
             proposed
             in
             Baptisme
             and
             Cat
             chisme
             ,
             and
             called
             among
             Christians
             ,
             the
             rule
             of
             faith
             .
             And
             the
             like
             argument
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             many
             places
             against
             the
             Donatists
             ,
             doth
             esteeme
             to
             be
             firme
             and
             in●incible
             ,
             to
             proue
             and
             shew
             ,
             that
             something
             is
             from
             the
             Apostles
             .
          
           
             They
             willingly
             omit
             to
             auoyd
             ●ediousnesse
             ,
             the
             auncient
             writers
             :
             as
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             &
             others
             ,
             who
             acknowledge
             this
             Creed
             to
             haue
             bene
             made
             and
             receiued
             ,
             namely
             of
             the
             Apostles
             .
             For
             the
             second
             point
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             do
             affirme
             ,
             that
             the
             bond
             and
             necessitie
             to
             beleeue
             this
             Creed
             ,
             doth
             not
             depend
             o●
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             Apostolike
             or
             Prophetica●●
             scriptures
             ,
             nor
             on
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             conformitie
             with
             them
             .
             For
             it
             was
             made
             and
             co●●ained
             among
             the
             Christians
             in
             Baptisme
             ,
             before
             there
             was
             any
             Apostolike
             writing
             .
             And
             in
             Baptisme
             they
             proposed
             the
             said
             Creed
             to
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             before
             they
             ent●ed
             into
             the
             scripture
             ,
             or
             to
             speake
             thereof
             .
             And
             in
             the
             Primatiue
             Church
             ,
             they
             examined
             the
             scriptures
             whether
             they
             were
             to
             be
             receiued
             or
             nor
             ,
             and
             the
             vnde●standing
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             whether
             a
             doctrine
             were
             true
             or
             false
             by
             this
             Creed
             and
             rule
             of
             faith
             ;
             and
             by
             it
             likenesse
             or
             conformitie
             with
             the
             same
             .
             
               Ireneus
               ,
               Tertullian
            
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             do
             teach
             it
             .
             And
             although
             it
             should
             so
             happen
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             had
             neuer
             heard
             but
             the
             Creed
             ,
             without
             knowing
             whether
             there
             be
             holy
             scriptures
             or
             not
             ,
             hee
             might
             beleeue
             the
             said
             Creed
             ,
             and
             be
             a
             true
             Christian
             :
             so
             that
             hee
             were
             voyd
             of
             other
             particular
             false
             opinion
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             if
             the
             beliefe
             of
             the
             Creed
             did
             depend
             vpon
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             
             Propheticall
             o●
             Apostolike
             scriptures
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             to
             be
             assured
             of
             the
             conformitie
             that
             is
             therein
             ,
             as
             〈◊〉
             as
             to
             beleeue
             it
             〈◊〉
             none
             but
             the
             learned
             and
             well
             exercised
             in
             the
             scriptures
             (
             who
             should
             bee
             assured
             of
             the
             said
             conformitie
             )
             should
             be
             bound
             to
             beleeue
             the
             Creed
             ,
             or
             should
             at
             least
             be
             assured
             of
             the
             truth
             thereof
             .
             And
             so
             should
             there
             he
             very
             fewe
             Christians
             ,
             Therfore
             the
             belle●ing
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             doth
             not
             depend
             vpon
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             scriptures
             .
          
           
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             the
             Doctors
             do
             hold
             by
             tradition
             of
             the
             Church
             〈◊〉
             by
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             that
             the
             Creed
             is
             the
             Apostle
             and
             that
             none
             ought
             to
             doubt
             therof
             .
             And
             by
             the
             same
             tradition
             it
             must
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             as
             〈…〉
             of
             the
             Apostles
             of
             like
             authoritie
             with
             that
             in
             their
             writings
             ,
             although
             they
             had
             no
             knowledge
             of
             the
             other
             scriptures
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             are
             sory
             that
             they
             haue
             so
             much
             declined
             from
             answering
             pertinently
             and
             absolutely
             to
             these
             two
             points
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             onely
             proposed
             to
             shew
             ,
             what
             faith
             and
             authoritie
             men
             ought
             to
             giue
             to
             this
             Creed
             ,
             and
             to
             all
             other
             doctrine
             receiued
             by
             tradition
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             (
             without
             Canonicall
             scripture
             )
             which
             they
             will
             proue
             to
             haue
             bene
             left
             by
             them
             ;
             by
             the
             same
             meane
             and
             reason
             by
             which
             is
             shewed
             ,
             the
             Creed
             to
             haue
             bin
             deliuered
             to
             the
             Christians
             by
             the
             Apostles
             without
             that
             they
             put
             the
             same
             in
             writing
             .
             Finally
             the
             Doctors
             do
             admonish
             such
             as
             read
             this
             Conference
             ,
             not
             to
             be
             astonished
             ,
             nor
             ma●uell
             at
             so
             many
             perplexed
             declinings
             from
             the
             true
             end
             of
             the
             said
             points
             proposed
             .
             And
             do
             pray
             them
             to
             remember
             the
             conferences
             made
             by
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             with
             the
             Donatists
             and
             Pellagians
             :
             wherin
             they
             shall
             finde
             like
             maner
             of
             dealing
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             with
             whom
             they
             do
             conferre
             .
             And
             for
             the
             present
             Conference
             ,
             referre
             themselues
             to
             the
             readers
             iudgement
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Resolution
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             THe
             Ministers
             following
             that
             which
             before
             hath
             bene
             proposed
             ,
             and
             alwaies
             by
             them
             maintained
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             confirmation
             also
             of
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             Lady
             of
             Buillon
             ,
             say
             
             that
             it
             is
             vncertaine
             (
             as
             S.
             Ciprien
             hath
             written
             )
             whether
             the
             Creed
             ,
             called
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             was
             made
             &
             composed
             by
             them
             :
             or
             else
             drawne
             or
             gathered
             out
             of
             their
             doctrine
             :
             and
             why
             also
             it
             is
             called
             the
             Apostles
             Creed
             :
             or
             whether
             it
             is
             because
             each
             of
             them
             added
             his
             part
             and
             portion
             therevnto
             :
             or
             else
             whether
             it
             be
             because
             it
             is
             a
             marke
             and
             certaine
             ensigne
             of
             Christian
             Religion
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             same
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             indifferent
             to
             saluation
             :
             in
             as
             much
             as
             it
             hath
             alwaies
             one
             waight
             and
             authoritie
             ,
             be
             it
             that
             the
             Apostles
             haue
             written
             it
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             hath
             beene
             faithfully
             gathered
             out
             of
             theyr
             writings
             .
             So
             haue
             also
             the
             Creeds
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             Nice
             ,
             as
             of
             Athanasius
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Church
             hath
             neuer
             doubted
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             containe
             a
             pure
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             ,
             as
             shee
             hath
             euidently
             declared
             ,
             in
             ordaining
             that
             the
             said
             Nicen
             Creede
             should
             bee
             publikely
             proposed
             and
             published
             to
             the
             people
             ,
             on
             the
             dayes
             of
             theyr
             assembly
             to
             communicate
             ,
             which
             at
             this
             day
             is
             yet
             obserued
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             :
             where
             that
             Creed
             is
             read
             or
             sung
             euery
             Sabaoth
             in
             their
             Churches
             .
             And
             did
             it
             not
             containe
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             ,
             it
             should
             withstand
             the
             59.
             
             Article
             of
             the
             Councell
             of
             Laodicia
             :
             in
             which
             it
             is
             forbidden
             to
             read
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             any
             thing
             proposed
             of
             priuate
             inuention
             ,
             but
             onely
             the
             doctrine
             comprised
             in
             the
             Canonicall
             bookes
             of
             the
             old
             and
             new
             Testament
             ,
             the
             number
             whereof
             is
             there
             made
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             say
             further
             ,
             that
             the
             reason
             and
             principall
             motiue
             of
             the
             faith
             which
             Christians
             giue
             to
             the
             Creed
             ,
             is
             the
             knowledge
             they
             haue
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             him
             that
             teacheth
             it
             ,
             do
             they
             also
             maintaine
             ,
             to
             bee
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             as
             may
             appeare
             by
             that
             which
             S.
             Paul
             writeth
             :
             who
             after
             he
             had
             proposed
             to
             the
             Corinthians
             ,
             the
             
             death
             ,
             buriall
             ,
             and
             resurrection
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             be
             the
             chiefe
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             and
             those
             vpon
             which
             principally
             iustification
             is
             grounded
             ,
             addeth
             these
             words
             .
             That
             hee
             deliuered
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             which
             he
             receiued
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             Christ
             died
             for
             our
             sinnes
             according
             to
             the
             scriptures
             ;
             and
             that
             he
             was
             afterwards
             buried
             :
             and
             that
             he
             arose
             againe
             the
             third
             day
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             scriptures
             .
          
           
           
             Iesus
             Christ
             also
             proposing
             his
             death
             and
             resurrection
             to
             the
             two
             Disciples
             ,
             alledged
             to
             them
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             thereby
             
             to
             assure
             them
             ,
             saying
             :
             O
             fooles
             and
             slowe
             of
             heart
             to
             beleeue
             all
             that
             the
             Prophets
             haue
             spoken
             ,
             ought
             not
             Christ
             to
             haue
             suffered
             these
             things
             ,
             and
             to
             enter
             into
             his
             glorie
             ?
             And
             hee
             began
             at
             Moyses
             and
             the
             Prophets
             ,
             and
             interpreted
             vnto
             them
             in
             all
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             the
             things
             that
             were
             written
             of
             him
             .
             In
             the
             selfe-same
             Chapter
             ,
             appearing
             after
             his
             resurrection
             ,
             euen
             before
             the
             Creed
             was
             made
             ,
             proposing
             vnto
             them
             his
             death
             and
             resurrection
             ;
             to
             assure
             them
             thereof
             ,
             hee
             alledged
             vnto
             them
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             saying
             :
             It
             is
             thus
             written
             ,
             and
             thus
             it
             behoued
             Christ
             to
             suffer
             and
             rise
             againe
             from
             the
             dead
             the
             third
             day
             .
             Whence
             may
             be
             inferred
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             foundation
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             assurance
             of
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             better
             means
             then
             to
             propose
             the
             scriptures
             .
             And
             although
             in
             the
             time
             of
             the
             birth
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             Creed
             was
             proposed
             to
             those
             that
             were
             Catechised
             ,
             before
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Euangelists
             had
             put
             any
             thing
             in
             writing
             :
             it
             followeth
             not
             therefore
             that
             there
             were
             no
             other
             scriptures
             ,
             wherevpon
             euery
             article
             of
             the
             faith
             might
             be
             builded
             .
             And
             
             to
             decsare
             the
             same
             particularly
             ,
             The
             article
             of
             the
             creation
             
             hath
             it
             foundation
             vpon
             the
             beginning
             of
             Genesis
             .
             The
             article
             of
             the
             almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             hath
             it
             foundation
             vpon
             the
             40.
             
             Chapter
             of
             Esay
             ,
             and
             diuers
             other
             places
             of
             the
             scripture
             .
             
             The
             article
             of
             the
             conception
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             vpon
             the
             7.
             
             Chapter
             of
             Esay
             :
             For
             the
             place
             of
             his
             birth
             ,
             vpon
             the
             5.
             of
             Micheas
             :
             and
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             time
             ,
             vpon
             the
             49.
             of
             Genesis
             ,
             
             and
             the
             9.
             of
             Daniel
             .
             The
             article
             of
             the
             death
             and
             of
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             vpon
             the
             22.
             
             Psalme
             ,
             53.
             
             Chapter
             of
             Esay
             ,
             and
             9.
             
             of
             Daniel
             .
             The
             article
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             vpon
             the
             16.
             
             
             Psalme
             .
             The
             article
             of
             the
             Ascention
             ,
             vpon
             the
             68.
             
             Psalme
             .
             
             The
             article
             of
             the
             iudgement
             ,
             in
             Daniel
             ,
             12.
             
             The
             article
             of
             
             the
             sending
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             in
             Ioel
             2.
             
             The
             article
             of
             the
             
             Church
             ,
             Esay
             .
             2.
             and
             Micheas
             .
             4.
             
             The
             article
             of
             the
             remissiof
             
             sinnes
             ,
             vpon
             the
             32.
             
             Psalme
             ,
             and
             37.
             of
             Ezec.
             The
             article
             
             of
             the
             resurrecton
             of
             the
             flesh
             ,
             and
             life
             eternall
             ,
             in
             Daniel
             the
             12.
             
          
           
           
             By
             this
             discourse
             ,
             and
             places
             of
             scripture
             quoted
             ,
             it
             may
             appeare
             to
             euery
             man
             ,
             that
             there
             were
             cleare
             and
             euident
             scriptures
             to
             ground
             all
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             faith
             vpon
             ,
             before
             the
             Creed
             was
             put
             in
             writing
             :
             and
             that
             men
             might
             &
             ought
             to
             alledge
             them
             to
             those
             that
             were
             catechised
             ,
             to
             assure
             them
             of
             that
             which
             was
             proposed
             vnto
             them
             to
             be
             beleeued
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             that
             a
             man
             can
             beleeue
             ,
             that
             hath
             not
             first
             heard
             and
             vnderstood
             the
             Word
             :
             and
             that
             is
             not
             assured
             thereof
             ,
             and
             holdeth
             it
             as
             certaine
             ,
             and
             more
             also
             (
             were
             it
             possible
             )
             then
             things
             conceiued
             and
             comprised
             by
             Mathematicall
             demonstration
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             definition
             of
             faith
             ,
             when
             the
             Apostle
             calleth
             it
             
               Hypostasin
               ,
               &
               elenchon
            
             .
             
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             euidence
             of
             things
             which
             are
             not
             seene
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             it
             implyeth
             a
             contradiction
             ,
             to
             call
             the
             Creed
             a
             doctrine
             not
             written
             ▪
             and
             yet
             to
             affirme
             that
             the
             Apostles
             haue
             written
             it
             .
             And
             they
             cannot
             shewe
             how
             long
             it
             was
             an
             vnwritten
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             at
             what
             time
             it
             began
             to
             be
             written
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             are
             much
             displeased
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             which
             conferre
             with
             them
             ,
             doo
             not
             more
             propose
             the
             edification
             as
             well
             of
             those
             that
             bee
             present
             at
             this
             Conference
             ,
             as
             of
             others
             which
             may
             see
             and
             read
             the
             Acts
             thereof
             .
             For
             where
             as
             they
             might
             handle
             and
             decide
             points
             tending
             to
             edification
             of
             the
             simple
             ,
             they
             stay
             on
             proposing
             and
             handling
             some
             things
             whereof
             they
             no
             way
             doubt
             :
             which
             is
             as
             much
             ,
             as
             to
             proue
             a
             thing
             confessed
             ,
             and
             resolued
             on
             ,
             and
             to
             light
             a
             candle
             at
             noone-day
             .
             And
             they
             assure
             themselues
             ,
             that
             they
             which
             shal
             read
             the
             acts
             of
             this
             Conference
             ,
             will
             not
             at
             all
             bee
             abashed
             ,
             because
             they
             decline
             to
             treat
             of
             that
             point
             ,
             whereof
             they
             be
             so
             oft
             required
             :
             for
             that
             (
             as
             Iesus
             Christ
             saith
             )
             he
             that
             doth
             euill
             ,
             fleeth
             the
             light
             .
          
           
             For
             conclusion
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             protest
             to
             confesse
             and
             beleeue
             ,
             that
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             in
             euery
             article
             therof
             ,
             is
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             faith
             wherof
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             euery
             faithfull
             man
             to
             stay
             and
             petseuere
             vnto
             the
             end
             .
             So
             that
             they
             would
             no
             way
             receiue
             nor
             approue
             the
             man
             in
             their
             Churches
             ,
             that
             should
             denie
             ,
             or
             ought
             doubted
             of
             the
             said
             articles
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Reply
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             will
             proue
             ,
             that
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Ministers
             containeth
             points
             contrarie
             to
             the
             principall
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             .
             The
             first
             is
             against
             the
             article
             of
             the
             Almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             when
             as
             they
             say
             and
             teach
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             .
             The
             second
             is
             against
             the
             article
             of
             the
             creation
             ,
             when
             as
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             not
             onely
             permitteth
             euil
             and
             sinne
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             but
             also
             himselfe
             doth
             it
             .
             The
             third
             is
             ,
             that
             one
             while
             they
             denie
             ,
             and
             an
             other
             while
             they
             confesse
             for
             an
             article
             of
             faith
             ,
             that
             the
             Virgin
             Marie
             remaineth
             a
             Virgin
             after
             her
             childe-birth
             .
             The
             fourth
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             descended
             not
             into
             hell
             ,
             but
             by
             imagination
             ,
             and
             not
             really
             .
             Also
             say
             the
             Ministers
             against
             the
             said
             article
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             dispaired
             of
             his
             saluation
             vppon
             the
             tree
             of
             the
             Crosse
             :
             that
             hee
             was
             troubled
             in
             conscience
             ,
             fearing
             to
             bee
             damned
             :
             and
             many
             other
             errors
             contained
             in
             this
             Article
             .
             Vpon
             which
             obiections
             ,
             they
             warne
             the
             Ministers
             to
             be
             readie
             to
             answere
             therevnto
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             will
             bee
             readie
             to
             answere
             to
             the
             slaunders
             aforesaid
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           fift
           dayes
           Dispute
           on
           Monday
           the
           fifteenth
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           THe
           Ministers
           doo
           require
           ,
           that
           the
           request
           fomerly
           made
           ,
           and
           now
           againe
           repeated
           by
           the
           Lady
           of
           Buillon
           ,
           namely
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           should
           speedily
           conferre
           with
           them
           concerning
           the
           points
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           may
           be
           registred
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           the
           occasion
           may
           be
           knowne
           why
           the
           Doctors
           do
           delay
           and
           go
           back
           from
           the
           said
           Conference
           .
        
         
           The
           Doctors
           vnwilling
           to
           loose
           time
           ,
           and
           willing
           to
           pursue
           the
           last
           dayes
           agreement
           ,
           according
           wherevnto
           the
           
           Ministers
           ought
           to
           answere
           ,
           touching
           the
           errors
           contained
           in
           the
           doctrine
           by
           them
           preached
           ,
           against
           the
           articles
           of
           the
           Creed
           :
           as
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           noted
           and
           proposed
           the
           same
           .
           And
           to
           enter
           forthwith
           into
           the
           matter
           ,
           they
           shewe
           that
           the
           said
           Ministers
           haue
           euilly
           alledged
           Saint
           Ciprian
           for
           them
           ,
           to
           denie
           the
           Creed
           to
           be
           the
           Apostles
           .
           For
           S.
           Ciprian
           doubteth
           not
           ,
           nor
           putteth
           in
           doubt
           as
           a
           thing
           indifferent
           ,
           whether
           it
           bee
           the
           Apostles
           or
           no
           ;
           but
           sheweth
           expresly
           ,
           that
           before
           they
           departed
           asunder
           ,
           they
           composed
           the
           said
           Creed
           :
           as
           in
           the
           Preface
           of
           his
           exposition
           may
           appeare
           .
        
         
           The
           Doctors
           demaund
           further
           vpon
           the
           article
           of
           the
           omnipotencie
           ,
           (
           which
           is
           the
           foundation
           of
           the
           Supper
           ,
           and
           the
           holy
           Sacrament
           )
           why
           the
           article
           of
           omnipotencie
           ,
           being
           the
           first
           and
           principall
           article
           of
           faith
           ,
           is
           not
           contained
           in
           the
           confession
           ,
           proposed
           by
           the
           mouth
           of
           Beza
           at
           Poissy
           ,
           before
           the
           King
           ,
           and
           many
           times
           since
           ,
           and
           inserted
           in
           many
           bookes
           ?
        
         
           And
           why
           they
           haue
           made
           so
           many
           different
           confessions
           of
           faith
           ,
           taking
           out
           of
           one
           what
           they
           haue
           put
           in
           :
           and
           adding
           (
           contrariwise
           )
           to
           others
           that
           they
           haue
           omitted
           .
           And
           how
           it
           happeneth
           ,
           that
           the
           article
           of
           the
           Trinitie
           ,
           is
           not
           expresly
           in
           the
           first
           confession
           of
           the
           1564.
           yeare
           ?
           which
           yet
           they
           do
           confesse
           in
           all
           obscuritie
           .
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             It
             shall
             appeare
             by
             the
             last
             dayes
             acts
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             required
             what
             they
             yet
             require
             for
             the
             present
             :
             namely
             ,
             that
             the
             point
             of
             the
             Masse
             bee
             first
             put
             forth
             to
             be
             decided
             :
             because
             it
             is
             the
             chiefe
             occasion
             ,
             for
             which
             the
             Conference
             was
             appointed
             .
          
           
             And
             concerning
             that
             they
             propose
             touching
             the
             Creed
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             neuer
             doubted
             ,
             nor
             yet
             do
             they
             doubt
             but
             that
             it
             is
             a
             pure
             Apostolike
             doctrine
             .
             Which
             to
             euery
             man
             that
             shall
             read
             the
             acts
             of
             the
             last
             day
             aforesaid
             may
             appeare
             :
             where
             (
             at
             least
             )
             in
             halfe
             a
             dozen
             places
             ,
             they
             haue
             alwaies
             confessed
             and
             repeated
             the
             same
             .
          
           
           
             And
             that
             which
             they
             haue
             maintained
             to
             be
             doubtfull
             ,
             is
             onely
             ,
             whether
             the
             Creed
             were
             written
             by
             the
             Apostles
             themselues
             ,
             or
             not
             :
             whereof
             nothing
             can
             appeare
             to
             be
             verified
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
             And
             S.
             Ciprian
             himselfe
             ,
             whom
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             produced
             ,
             in
             his
             Preface
             doth
             aduertise
             the
             readers
             of
             the
             great
             varietie
             there
             is
             touching
             the
             said
             Creed
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             diuers
             Churches
             haue
             added
             therevnto
             diuers
             articles
             :
             He
             doth
             also
             aduertise
             them
             ,
             that
             he
             followeth
             in
             his
             explication
             ,
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Aquilea
             .
             Yea
             and
             expounding
             the
             article
             of
             the
             discention
             into
             hell
             ,
             (
             of
             which
             the
             Doctors
             make
             so
             much
             adoo
             )
             he
             specially
             saith
             :
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             the
             Creed
             of
             the
             Romane
             Church
             ,
             nor
             yet
             of
             the
             Easterne
             Churches
             .
             Whence
             may
             bee
             gathered
             the
             incertaintie
             of
             that
             aboue
             said
             :
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             article
             of
             which
             men
             may
             reasonably
             doubt
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             of
             the
             number
             of
             those
             which
             the
             Apostles
             haue
             written
             ,
             or
             whether
             some
             Church
             hath
             added
             the
             same
             :
             or
             else
             it
             must
             bee
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             had
             written
             diuers
             Creeds
             .
             And
             for
             the
             difference
             which
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             pretend
             to
             be
             in
             the
             confessions
             of
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             ,
             printed
             and
             published
             at
             sundry
             times
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             denie
             them
             ,
             as
             touching
             the
             sence
             ,
             to
             differ
             one
             from
             the
             other
             :
             although
             for
             more
             ample
             declaration
             thereof
             ,
             some
             tearmes
             haue
             possibly
             bene
             chaunged
             .
             And
             where
             they
             propose
             that
             in
             some
             of
             them
             the
             article
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             was
             omitted
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             denie
             it
             ,
             and
             require
             the
             Doctors
             to
             bring
             forth
             a
             copie
             of
             the
             confession
             ,
             in
             which
             they
             maintaine
             the
             same
             to
             haue
             bene
             omitted
             :
             for
             were
             it
             so
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             falsified
             and
             corrupted
             .
             Adding
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             their
             confession
             ,
             doubtfull
             or
             obscure
             :
             which
             some
             of
             the
             said
             Doctors
             haue
             well
             declared
             ,
             when
             they
             made
             a
             forme
             of
             confession
             by
             the
             patterne
             of
             that
             of
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             ,
             vsing
             the
             proper
             tearmes
             and
             sentences
             :
             vnto
             which
             they
             added
             nothing
             to
             make
             it
             varie
             ,
             that
             excepted
             for
             which
             they
             are
             in
             difference
             with
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             which
             they
             would
             hardly
             ground
             vpon
             the
             scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             by
             their
             deniall
             that
             S.
             Ciprian
             holdeth
             the
             Apostles
             were
             Authors
             ,
             makers
             ,
             and
             composers
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             do
             sufficiently
             shewe
             ,
             how
             bolde
             they
             are
             to
             denie
             things
             manifest
             .
             All
             which
             ,
             they
             referre
             to
             the
             auditory
             present
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             readers
             of
             this
             writing
             .
             For
             ground
             of
             which
             deniall
             ,
             they
             rest
             vpon
             a
             simple
             reason
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             vpon
             the
             article
             of
             the
             discention
             into
             hell
             ,
             whether
             it
             were
             inserted
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             added
             by
             others
             to
             make
             it
             doubtfull
             ,
             whether
             they
             are
             Authors
             of
             all
             the
             other
             Articles
             .
             For
             it
             is
             ,
             as
             if
             a
             man
             should
             say
             ,
             it
             is
             vncertaine
             whether
             Saint
             Iohn
             composed
             his
             Gospell
             ,
             because
             there
             bee
             
             that
             doubt
             whether
             the
             Historie
             of
             the
             Adulteresse
             bee
             of
             him
             .
             But
             leauing
             that
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             demaund
             ,
             whether
             they
             confesse
             not
             by
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             that
             God
             by
             his
             almightinesse
             ,
             cannot
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             place
             ?
             Thirdly
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             cause
             a
             body
             to
             be
             inuisible
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             one
             place
             without
             holding
             place
             equall
             to
             it
             greatnesse
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             All
             these
             questions
             are
             impertinent
             and
             enstranged
             from
             the
             confession
             of
             the
             Churches
             :
             which
             neuerthelesse
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             chosen
             for
             foundation
             of
             all
             the
             Conference
             .
             Wherfore
             the
             Ministers
             require
             ,
             that
             they
             dispute
             to
             the
             purpose
             ,
             and
             choose
             one
             article
             or
             many
             of
             the
             said
             confession
             ,
             whervpon
             they
             pretend
             to
             build
             their
             said
             questions
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             These
             questions
             are
             very
             pertinent
             to
             impugne
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Ministers
             confession
             .
             For
             the
             question
             is
             not
             ,
             of
             the
             proper
             words
             contained
             in
             the
             said
             confession
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             but
             a
             Summary
             of
             the
             faith
             :
             but
             the
             Doctors
             will
             impugne
             the
             sence
             of
             the
             Articles
             which
             they
             doo
             knowe
             by
             their
             proper
             writings
             .
             By
             which
             they
             openly
             witnesse
             ,
             touching
             the
             article
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             doo
             the
             things
             aforesaid
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             do
             shewe
             ,
             that
             it
             well
             and
             fitly
             serueth
             to
             impugne
             the
             doctrine
             of
             heretickes
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             true
             meanes
             to
             proue
             against
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             receiue
             
             not
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             when
             they
             proue
             that
             they
             receiue
             not
             the
             true
             sence
             thereof
             .
          
           
             They
             say
             also
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             hauing
             desired
             conference
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             are
             the
             cause
             of
             such
             questions
             :
             and
             the
             Doctors
             by
             this
             meane
             will
             draw
             them
             therevnto
             .
             For
             this
             article
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             is
             the
             chiefe
             foundation
             to
             proue
             and
             maintaine
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Aultar
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             are
             abashed
             at
             so
             many
             declinings
             :
             for
             when
             their
             confession
             is
             spoken
             of
             ,
             they
             demand
             the
             Masse
             :
             and
             when
             they
             come
             to
             the
             Masse
             ,
             they
             demaund
             their
             confession
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             do
             abash
             at
             so
             many
             superfluous
             things
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             that
             albeit
             they
             oppugne
             not
             the
             words
             of
             the
             said
             confession
             ,
             yet
             doo
             they
             oppugne
             the
             sence
             thereof
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             :
             that
             the
             sence
             cannot
             be
             knowne
             but
             by
             the
             words
             .
             And
             for
             this
             reason
             they
             wrap
             themselues
             in
             a
             contradictiō
             ,
             when
             as
             leauing
             the
             tearmes
             thereof
             ,
             they
             say
             they
             will
             confute
             the
             sence
             .
             And
             as
             for
             the
             conclusion
             which
             they
             will
             drawe
             from
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             ,
             affirming
             that
             one
             body
             is
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             denie
             that
             that
             by
             good
             consequence
             ,
             can
             be
             inferred
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             doth
             well
             follow
             ,
             God
             cannot
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             .
             God
             therefore
             is
             not
             almightie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             denie
             the
             consequence
             aforesaid
             ,
             and
             alledge
             
             reason
             ;
             because
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             denie
             himselfe
             :
             and
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             that
             he
             should
             lye
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             it
             were
             blasphemie
             to
             inferre
             and
             
             conclude
             therevpon
             ,
             that
             he
             were
             not
             almightie
             .
             For
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             measured
             according
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             things
             agreeable
             to
             his
             nature
             ;
             as
             teacheth
             
             the
             Mr.
             of
             the
             sentences
             ,
             saying
             :
             In
             that
             is
             God
             omnipotent
             ,
             wherein
             his
             power
             is
             of
             might
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             infirmitie
             .
             S.
             Ierome
             writing
             to
             Eustochius
             ,
             and
             confirming
             that
             aboue
             said
             ,
             saith
             as
             followeth
             .
             I
             will
             boldly
             say
             ,
             although
             God
             can
             do
             all
             things
             ,
             yet
             can
             he
             not
             restore
             and
             reestablish
             a
             virgin
             after
             her
             fall
             .
             Saint
             Augustine
             likewise
             writeth
             in
             the
             fift
             booke
             of
             the
             Citie
             of
             God
             ,
             cap.
             10.
             in
             these
             words
             .
             The
             power
             of
             God
             is
             in
             nothing
             lessened
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             he
             cannot
             die
             ,
             nor
             be
             beguiled
             .
             And
             a
             litle
             after
             ,
             God
             is
             almightie
             ,
             because
             there
             be
             things
             which
             he
             cannot
             do
             .
             The
             same
             Author
             in
             the
             26.
             of
             the
             same
             worke
             ,
             cap.
             8.
             thus
             saith
             :
             He
             that
             saith
             ,
             if
             God
             be
             almightie
             ,
             let
             him
             cause
             the
             things
             which
             be
             made
             ,
             that
             they
             be
             not
             made
             .
             Perceiueth
             not
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             as
             much
             as
             if
             he
             said
             :
             if
             hee
             be
             almightie
             ,
             let
             him
             make
             the
             things
             which
             are
             true
             ,
             in
             as
             much
             as
             they
             be
             true
             ,
             to
             be
             false
             .
             Teodoret
             also
             in
             his
             third
             Dialogue
             ,
             conformable
             to
             that
             aboue
             said
             ,
             saith
             :
             We
             must
             not
             without
             determination
             ,
             say
             that
             all
             things
             generally
             ,
             are
             possible
             to
             God.
             For
             hee
             that
             so
             saieth
             ,
             absolutely
             comprehendeth
             things
             good
             and
             euill
             ,
             which
             are
             contrary
             in
             themselues
             .
             And
             a
             little
             after
             ,
             hee
             affirmeth
             :
             that
             God
             cannot
             sinne
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             contrary
             to
             his
             nature
             .
             Wherevpon
             hee
             concludeth
             ,
             that
             although
             many
             things
             there
             be
             which
             he
             cannot
             do
             (
             for
             as
             much
             as
             there
             bee
             many
             sinnes
             )
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             doth
             he
             not
             cease
             to
             be
             almightie
             .
          
        
         
           
             Obiection
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reasons
             formerly
             brought
             ,
             do
             auaile
             and
             serue
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             confesse
             the
             antecedent
             ,
             which
             seemed
             onely
             to
             be
             supposed
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             God
             cannot
             cause
             one
             body
             at
             one selfe
             instant
             to
             bee
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             no
             more
             then
             hee
             can
             make
             the
             things
             by
             them
             alledged
             .
             For
             to
             this
             end
             doo
             they
             alledge
             them
             ,
             to
             declare
             that
             something
             there
             is
             which
             God
             cannot
             doo
             .
             And
             to
             the
             present
             question
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             cannot
             be
             in
             two
             places
             )
             can
             they
             not
             apply
             them
             ,
             but
             to
             shew
             that
             the
             same
             is
             impossible
             to
             God.
             
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             reasons
             alledged
             out
             of
             the
             holy
             
             scriptures
             :
             God
             cannot
             lye
             ,
             nor
             denie
             himselfe
             :
             these
             places
             (
             vnder
             correction
             )
             serue
             nought
             to
             this
             purpose
             .
             For
             ,
             as
             they
             haue
             brought
             out
             of
             the
             Mr.
             of
             the
             sentences
             ,
             power
             to
             lye
             ,
             power
             to
             sinne
             ,
             is
             not
             power
             ,
             but
             impotencie
             :
             contrariwise
             rather
             ,
             if
             God
             could
             sinne
             ,
             he
             should
             be
             impotent
             and
             weake
             :
             and
             such
             thing
             also
             God
             cannot
             do
             ,
             for
             then
             should
             he
             repugne
             and
             destroy
             himselfe
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             examples
             brought
             out
             of
             S.
             Ierome
             and
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             make
             a
             virgin
             deflowred
             to
             bee
             yet
             a
             virgin
             ,
             or
             a
             thing
             done
             ,
             not
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             that
             vnderstood
             as
             the
             Logitians
             say
             ,
             
               In
               sensu
               Composito
            
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             the
             things
             beeing
             such
             ,
             and
             so
             made
             )
             is
             true
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             would
             otherwise
             imply
             a
             contradiction
             .
             But
             in
             the
             question
             proposed
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             like
             therevnto
             :
             for
             the
             question
             onely
             demandeth
             ,
             whether
             God
             by
             his
             power
             ,
             can
             alter
             &
             change
             the
             nature
             and
             qualitie
             of
             things
             created
             :
             as
             whether
             he
             can
             make
             a
             thing
             heauie
             and
             masly
             ,
             abiding
             in
             it
             qualitie
             of
             waight
             and
             massinesse
             (
             which
             naturally
             tendeth
             downeward
             )
             by
             the
             onely
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             hang
             in
             the
             ayre
             :
             as
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             we
             read
             ,
             that
             the
             fire
             which
             naturally
             ascendeth
             ,
             doth
             descend
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             Also
             that
             the
             fire
             naturally
             hot
             ,
             and
             burning
             ,
             cooleth
             ,
             the
             qualitie
             thereof
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             the
             heate
             )
             remaining
             in
             the
             substance
             .
             As
             also
             that
             two
             bodies
             bee
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             :
             as
             appeared
             when
             our
             Lord
             did
             enter
             where
             the
             Apostles
             were
             ,
             the
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             :
             or
             that
             a
             grosse
             and
             large
             body
             ,
             remaining
             in
             it
             grossenesse
             and
             largenesse
             ,
             do
             passe
             through
             a
             place
             vnproportionable
             to
             it
             greatnesse
             and
             largenesse
             ,
             as
             a
             cable
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             All
             these
             examples
             are
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             holy
             scripture
             .
             And
             if
             it
             must
             be
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             once
             ,
             no
             more
             should
             he
             be
             able
             to
             do
             the
             things
             aforesaid
             :
             for
             ,
             the
             reasons
             to
             this
             purpose
             they
             will
             afterwards
             declare
             .
             And
             it
             will
             not
             be
             found
             ,
             that
             it
             hath
             euer
             entered
             into
             the
             braine
             of
             any
             Interpreter
             ,
             to
             denie
             such
             a
             power
             :
             And
             the
             first
             that
             euer
             did
             openly
             denie
             it
             ,
             was
             first
             
               Peter
               Marter
            
             :
             and
             after
             him
             ,
             Beza
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Doctors
             further
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             forme
             of
             the
             argument
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             vse
             ,
             doth
             withstand
             and
             destroy
             that
             which
             God
             vseth
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             and
             the
             Angell
             speaking
             to
             the
             virgin
             .
             For
             God
             ordinarily
             when
             he
             will
             assure
             something
             impossible
             to
             nature
             ,
             and
             which
             men
             cannot
             comprehend
             ,
             he
             generally
             alledgeth
             his
             power
             .
             And
             the
             Angell
             willing
             to
             make
             a
             ground
             of
             the
             incarnation
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             doth
             alledge
             in
             generall
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             impossible
             to
             God
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             creatures
             ,
             as
             the
             Angell
             speaketh
             .
             Now
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             generalitie
             of
             an
             argument
             is
             destroyed
             by
             particular
             exceptions
             ,
             and
             is
             made
             by
             this
             meane
             vnprofitable
             and
             forcelesse
             .
             When
             God
             then
             alledgeth
             in
             generall
             ,
             that
             his
             power
             can
             do
             it
             ,
             one
             may
             doubt
             thereof
             ,
             and
             esteeme
             the
             thing
             proposed
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             bee
             of
             those
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             him
             impossible
             ,
             as
             wel
             as
             the
             exceptions
             by
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             .
             And
             that
             should
             be
             false
             which
             the
             Angell
             saith
             :
             That
             there
             is
             nothing
             impossible
             to
             God
             :
             because
             men
             do
             alledge
             &
             propose
             many
             things
             to
             the
             contrary
             .
             To
             the
             end
             therefore
             ,
             that
             God
             and
             his
             Angels
             bee
             maintained
             true
             in
             their
             words
             ,
             it
             must
             not
             be
             doubted
             ,
             but
             God
             can
             much
             more
             easily
             change
             and
             alter
             his
             creatures
             ,
             and
             all
             their
             qualities
             ,
             then
             a
             Potter
             can
             play
             with
             his
             clay
             ,
             and
             forme
             at
             his
             pleasure
             some
             vessell
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             there
             is
             daunger
             ,
             that
             if
             we
             limit
             Gods
             power
             towards
             his
             creatures
             ,
             wee
             fall
             to
             denie
             him
             his
             Lordship
             and
             dominion
             ouer
             them
             .
             For
             no
             other
             thing
             is
             it
             to
             be
             Lord
             of
             a
             creature
             ,
             then
             to
             haue
             power
             to
             change
             ,
             alter
             ,
             and
             giue
             it
             such
             a
             nature
             and
             qualitie
             ,
             best
             pleasing
             to
             him
             :
             as
             hauing
             the
             same
             in
             his
             owne
             power
             .
             And
             therefore
             God
             in
             Ieremy
             ,
             
             to
             shewe
             that
             hee
             had
             power
             to
             destroy
             and
             ruinate
             ,
             or
             to
             maintaine
             Ierusalem
             ,
             as
             seemed
             him
             good
             ,
             saith
             :
             I
             am
             the
             Lord
             of
             all
             flesh
             :
             is
             there
             any
             thing
             too
             hard
             for
             me
             ?
             Therefore
             the
             Doctors
             do
             conclude
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             daunger
             (
             if
             this
             question
             bee
             maintained
             ,
             as
             impossible
             to
             God
             )
             that
             each
             one
             therein
             will
             dare
             as
             much
             :
             alledging
             the
             same
             examples
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             ,
             to
             exempt
             from
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             euery
             thing
             shall
             displease
             him
             .
             And
             when
             men
             shall
             produce
             
             vnto
             him
             such
             things
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             he
             may
             interpret
             the
             scripture
             in
             an
             other
             sence
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             such
             a
             thing
             shall
             be
             impossible
             to
             God
             by
             the
             naturall
             sence
             of
             the
             words
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             Euen
             as
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             change
             and
             alter
             the
             scripture
             ,
             which
             saith
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             in
             two
             places
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             compared
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Ascention
             :
             and
             say
             ,
             that
             that
             of
             the
             Supper
             ought
             not
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             litterally
             :
             for
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             should
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             is
             impossible
             to
             God.
             So
             say
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             each
             one
             wil
             corrupt
             the
             litterall
             sence
             of
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             the
             thing
             is
             impossible
             vnto
             God.
             And
             therefore
             must
             the
             scriptures
             be
             otherwise
             vnderstood
             .
             And
             notwithstanding
             it
             may
             bee
             because
             it
             displeaseth
             him
             :
             and
             yet
             will
             hee
             bring
             forth
             the
             selfe-same
             reasons
             and
             allegations
             as
             do
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             all
             things
             are
             not
             possible
             to
             God.
             The
             Doctors
             do
             againe
             conclude
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             better
             to
             maintaine
             the
             scripture
             in
             the
             truth
             thereof
             ,
             (
             albeit
             it
             propose
             in
             our
             iudgements
             incomprehensible
             and
             impossible
             things
             ,
             then
             to
             open
             a
             gap
             for
             euery
             one
             ,
             to
             depraue
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             raunge
             and
             subiect
             it
             to
             his
             will
             and
             iudgement
             ,
             vnder
             shadow
             of
             saying
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             to
             God
             :
             and
             alledging
             for
             the
             same
             some
             examples
             .
             They
             will
             not
             omit
             that
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             haue
             often
             protested
             to
             relye
             vpon
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             do
             alledge
             only
             auncient
             Doctors
             against
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             flying
             for
             aide
             to
             them
             ,
             against
             Gods
             expresse
             word
             ,
             which
             importeth
             ,
             that
             generally
             without
             exception
             there
             is
             nothing
             impossible
             to
             him
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Minister
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             proue
             not
             their
             consequence
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             leaue
             it
             for
             some
             distrust
             they
             haue
             (
             as
             is
             likely
             )
             that
             they
             are
             not
             able
             to
             proue
             it
             .
             They
             mentiō
             but
             the
             antecedent
             of
             their
             said
             consequence
             :
             to
             the
             confession
             whereof
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             possible
             for
             them
             to
             lead
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             by
             their
             reasons
             and
             authorities
             alledged
             to
             weaken
             their
             said
             consequence
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             of
             one
             particular
             ,
             they
             inferre
             a
             generall
             :
             which
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             rules
             of
             Logicke
             .
             
             And
             where
             they
             say
             that
             the
             authorities
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             nothing
             serue
             to
             reproue
             their
             consequence
             ,
             and
             to
             shew
             that
             God
             leaueth
             not
             to
             be
             almightie
             ,
             although
             he
             cannot
             do
             any
             thing
             which
             doth
             derogate
             to
             his
             nature
             ,
             they
             referre
             themserues
             therein
             to
             the
             said
             auncient
             authors
             ;
             which
             for
             the
             same
             end
             and
             reasons
             as
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             doo
             alledge
             and
             propose
             the
             aboue
             said
             exceptions
             .
          
           
             Where
             they
             pretend
             that
             the
             authorities
             and
             sentences
             alledged
             out
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             do
             nought
             appertaine
             to
             the
             present
             question
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             they
             denie
             that
             they
             should
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             other
             things
             ,
             but
             those
             only
             which
             do
             containe
             in
             themselues
             contradiction
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             so
             also
             doth
             that
             which
             they
             propose
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             that
             at
             on
             selfe
             instant
             ,
             it
             may
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             For
             as
             much
             is
             it
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             should
             say
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             is
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             ,
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             time
             :
             and
             that
             a
             body
             is
             one
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             one
             .
             Also
             that
             a
             creature
             is
             incircumscriptible
             ,
             and
             not
             inclosed
             within
             certaine
             limits
             :
             which
             happening
             ,
             it
             should
             no
             more
             be
             a
             creature
             ,
             but
             God.
             As
             may
             bee
             gathered
             of
             that
             which
             S.
             Basil
             writeth
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             Chapter
             22.
             saying
             thus
             :
             The
             Angell
             that
             appeared
             to
             Cornelius
             ,
             was
             not
             in
             the
             same
             place
             where
             Phillip
             was
             .
             And
             he
             that
             spake
             to
             Zacharie
             from
             the
             Aultar
             ,
             filled
             not
             whiles
             hee
             spake
             vnto
             him
             ,
             his
             seate
             and
             place
             in
             heauen
             .
             But
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             in
             Habacuck
             ,
             and
             Daniel
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             and
             in
             Ezeehiel
             vpon
             the
             floud
             of
             Chobar
             ,
             for
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             doth
             fill
             the
             earth
             .
             And
             the
             Prophet
             writing
             thereof
             ,
             saith
             :
             Where
             shall
             I
             hide
             me
             from
             thy
             spirit
             ?
             or
             whither
             shall
             I
             flye
             from
             thy
             presence
             ?
             Didymus
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             confirming
             that
             aboue
             said
             ,
             saith
             thus
             :
             Were
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             a
             creature
             ,
             his
             substance
             should
             he
             haue
             circumscript
             and
             limitted
             ,
             as
             haue
             all
             things
             made
             and
             created
             .
             As
             then
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             doth
             fill
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             circumscript
             ,
             nor
             in
             any
             place
             limitted
             :
             therof
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             God.
             Vigilius
             in
             the
             disputation
             hee
             wrote
             betweene
             
               Sabellius
               ,
               Photius
               ,
               Arrius
            
             ,
             and
             Athanasius
             ,
             vnder
             the
             person
             of
             Athanasius
             ,
             thus
             writeth
             .
          
           
           
             Thereby
             may
             it
             chiefly
             appeare
             ,
             that
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             is
             God
             :
             that
             he
             is
             euerie
             where
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             contained
             in
             any
             one
             place
             ,
             as
             the
             Prophet
             writeth
             :
             Whither
             shall
             I
             flye
             to
             hide
             me
             from
             thy
             spirit
             ?
             Of
             these
             places
             may
             we
             conclude
             ,
             that
             if
             a
             body
             bee
             not
             circumscript
             ,
             finished
             and
             closed
             in
             certaine
             limits
             ,
             it
             is
             not
             a
             creature
             :
             which
             ought
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             ,
             not
             onely
             of
             other
             bodies
             ,
             but
             of
             that
             also
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             :
             as
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             Theodoret
             writeth
             in
             his
             second
             Dialogue
             ,
             where
             hee
             thus
             saith
             :
             Then
             is
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             risen
             ,
             exempted
             from
             all
             corruption
             ,
             impassible
             and
             immortall
             ,
             adorned
             with
             diuine
             glory
             ,
             adored
             and
             worshipped
             of
             the
             heauenly
             powers
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             albeit
             it
             be
             in
             such
             sort
             qualified
             ,
             yet
             ceaseth
             it
             not
             therefore
             to
             be
             circumscript
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             before
             it
             was
             glorified
             :
             whereof
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             being
             a
             true
             body
             ,
             and
             a
             creature
             ,
             it
             cannot
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instance
             .
          
           
             Whereas
             they
             alledge
             that
             the
             foresaid
             examples
             do
             nothing
             pertaine
             to
             the
             question
             proposed
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             in
             it
             ,
             the
             question
             is
             onely
             to
             know
             ,
             whether
             God
             can
             chaunge
             the
             qualities
             in
             a
             substance
             ,
             the
             substance
             remaining
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             denie
             it
             ,
             because
             in
             the
             question
             there
             is
             mentiō
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             without
             hs
             measure
             .
             Now
             the
             measures
             and
             demensions
             are
             not
             as
             qualities
             and
             accidents
             which
             may
             happen
             to
             a
             body
             ,
             and
             depart
             from
             it
             without
             corrupting
             thereof
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             the
             nature
             and
             condition
             of
             accidents
             )
             but
             are
             of
             it
             proper
             essence
             .
             So
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             that
             a
             body
             should
             bee
             a
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             measured
             and
             circumscript
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             example
             they
             produce
             for
             confirmation
             of
             their
             saying
             is
             ,
             that
             a
             massie
             thing
             (
             which
             naturally
             for
             the
             waight
             thereof
             declineth
             downward
             )
             may
             be
             lifted
             on
             high
             .
             Wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             done
             ,
             and
             that
             by
             violent
             motion
             .
             But
             that
             this
             example
             nought
             serueth
             to
             ouerthrow
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             such
             things
             in
             themselues
             containe
             no
             contradiction
             ;
             and
             that
             they
             are
             not
             contrary
             to
             the
             essence
             of
             the
             thing
             where
             they
             happen
             .
             For
             a
             stone
             which
             a
             man
             throweth
             vpward
             ,
             doth
             
             not
             therefore
             cease
             to
             be
             a
             stone
             ,
             neither
             by
             such
             a
             mouing
             ,
             is
             it
             not
             depriued
             of
             the
             waightinesse
             thereof
             .
             To
             the
             example
             of
             the
             fire
             ,
             they
             answere
             :
             that
             it
             is
             one
             selfesame
             reason
             of
             light
             ,
             as
             of
             heauie
             things
             :
             and
             that
             without
             any
             corruption
             of
             their
             essence
             ,
             their
             naturall
             mouings
             may
             be
             changed
             by
             some
             force
             and
             violence
             done
             vnto
             them
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             that
             they
             alledge
             of
             fire
             ,
             which
             (
             contrary
             to
             it
             nature
             ,
             namely
             to
             heat
             and
             burne
             )
             refreshed
             the
             three
             Iewes
             in
             the
             Babilonian
             furnace
             :
             they
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             fire
             therefore
             was
             nothing
             altered
             in
             the
             essence
             nor
             qualiries
             thereof
             :
             which
             may
             easily
             appeare
             ,
             in
             that
             it
             spared
             the
             three
             Iewes
             ,
             and
             burned
             and
             consumed
             those
             which
             kindled
             the
             same
             .
             Whereof
             may
             be
             inferred
             ,
             that
             the
             cause
             why
             it
             did
             not
             offend
             them
             ,
             proceeded
             not
             because
             the
             nature
             or
             qualities
             thereof
             were
             any
             way
             changed
             ,
             but
             onely
             because
             the
             action
             thereof
             was
             suspended
             .
          
           
             And
             where
             they
             alledge
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             may
             be
             at
             one
             instant
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             together
             :
             and
             for
             proofe
             therof
             ,
             propose
             that
             which
             is
             written
             in
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             did
             enter
             where
             his
             Disciples
             were
             ,
             the
             doores
             beeing
             shut
             :
             the
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             so
             in
             the
             text
             :
             but
             the
             text
             sheweth
             that
             the
             Disciples
             beeing
             assembled
             in
             a
             place
             ,
             Iesus
             Christ
             stood
             &
             appeared
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             them
             .
             Whereof
             can
             be
             no
             way
             inferred
             ,
             that
             hee
             entred
             into
             the
             place
             where
             they
             were
             ,
             without
             opening
             of
             the
             doores
             ,
             nor
             that
             hee
             pierced
             them
             to
             enter
             therein
             .
             And
             very
             like
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             opened
             and
             shut
             againe
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             
             which
             the
             Angell
             did
             open
             and
             shut
             againe
             ,
             when
             hee
             was
             sent
             to
             deliuer
             S.
             Peter
             out
             of
             prison
             :
             and
             when
             likewise
             hee
             was
             sent
             for
             the
             Apostles
             deliuerance
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             that
             they
             propose
             of
             a
             grosse
             body
             passing
             through
             a
             straight
             place
             ,
             alledging
             the
             example
             of
             a
             Cable
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             ill
             to
             the
             purpose
             alledged
             ,
             and
             is
             an
             argument
             grounded
             vpon
             a
             thing
             impossible
             .
             They
             say
             moreouer
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             all
             vnderstood
             the
             word
             Camilos
             :
             vsurped
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             not
             for
             a
             Cable
             ,
             but
             for
             a
             Camell
             :
             as
             
             to
             them
             it
             is
             manifest
             ,
             which
             are
             but
             meanely
             seene
             in
             the
             antiquities
             of
             the
             Hebrewes
             .
             And
             as
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             
               Angelius
               Caninius
            
             writeth
             in
             the
             end
             of
             his
             Caldean
             Grammer
             .
             And
             for
             the
             conclusion
             which
             the
             Doctors
             drawe
             from
             the
             precedent
             examples
             ,
             it
             is
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             and
             founded
             vppon
             presupposed
             antecedents
             and
             premisses
             by
             them
             brought
             ;
             which
             in
             the
             sence
             they
             alledge
             them
             for
             the
             reasons
             aboue
             declared
             ,
             they
             neither
             haue
             ,
             nor
             will
             confesse
             vnto
             them
             .
          
           
             Where
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             what
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             said
             touching
             a
             body
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             were
             it
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             it selfe
             ,
             was
             neuer
             written
             by
             any
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             nor
             proposed
             before
             the
             comming
             of
             
               Peter
               Martyr
            
             ,
             and
             
               Theodoret
               Beza
            
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             maintaine
             that
             it
             was
             .
             And
             that
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             his
             Epistle
             to
             Dardanus
             ,
             saith
             the
             same
             in
             these
             tearmes
             :
             According
             to
             this
             forme
             (
             meaning
             the
             corporall
             forme
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             )
             we
             must
             not
             thinke
             that
             it
             is
             euery
             where
             .
             And
             wee
             must
             beware
             least
             in
             establishing
             in
             him
             his
             diuinitie
             ,
             we
             take
             not
             frō
             him
             the
             veritie
             of
             his
             body
             .
             And
             else-where
             hee
             saith
             :
             That
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             nature
             and
             measure
             of
             a
             true
             body
             ,
             hee
             is
             in
             one
             place
             in
             heauen
             .
             The
             selfe-same
             thing
             saith
             Therdoret
             in
             his
             second
             Dialogue
             ,
             as
             hath
             bene
             before
             alledged
             .
             And
             so
             doth
             Vigilius
             in
             his
             fourth
             booke
             against
             Eutiches
             :
             where
             hee
             writeth
             as
             followeth
             .
             If
             the
             word
             and
             flesh
             be
             but
             of
             one
             nature
             ,
             how
             commeth
             it
             to
             passe
             that
             the
             flesh
             is
             not
             found
             euery
             where
             as
             the
             word
             (
             of
             which
             word
             it
             was
             taken
             ,
             to
             constitute
             one
             selfe-same
             person
             and
             Hypostaly
             )
             is
             euery
             where
             ?
             for
             when
             it
             was
             on
             the
             earth
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             in
             heauen
             :
             and
             now
             that
             it
             is
             in
             heauen
             ,
             surely
             it
             is
             not
             on
             the
             earth
             .
             And
             so
             farre
             off
             is
             it
             that
             he
             is
             there
             ,
             that
             we
             attend
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             come
             according
             to
             his
             flesh
             :
             whom
             neuerthelesse
             we
             beleeue
             as
             he
             is
             the
             word
             ,
             to
             be
             here
             on
             earth
             with
             vs.
             
          
           
             By
             these
             and
             other
             like
             authorities
             ,
             often
             found
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             men
             may
             know
             that
             
               Peter
               Martyr
            
             and
             
               Theodoret
               Beza
            
             are
             not
             the
             first
             authors
             of
             this
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             
             that
             it
             is
             falsly
             imputed
             to
             them
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             they
             haue
             but
             drawne
             ,
             and
             word
             by
             word
             ,
             copied
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             the
             same
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             ,
             that
             the
             forme
             of
             arguing
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             vsed
             ,
             affirming
             some
             things
             to
             be
             impossible
             to
             God
             ,
             doth
             not
             derogate
             his
             omnipotēcie
             :
             ouerthroweth
             the
             forme
             of
             the
             argument
             which
             the
             Angell
             speaking
             to
             the
             virgin
             ,
             vseth
             for
             cōfirmatiō
             of
             that
             which
             he
             declared
             vnto
             her
             :
             that
             is
             ,
             that
             nothing
             is
             impossible
             to
             God.
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             question
             is
             neither
             of
             a
             thing
             which
             containeth
             in
             it self
             any
             contradiction
             ,
             nor
             that
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             truth
             of
             God
             :
             which
             be
             the
             two
             matters
             they
             haue
             alledged
             ,
             and
             yet
             do
             alledge
             for
             the
             expositiō
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             And
             touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             change
             the
             nature
             and
             qualitie
             of
             things
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             man
             doubteth
             the
             same
             .
             But
             whē
             that
             is
             done
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             also
             to
             auow
             ,
             that
             the
             things
             be
             changed
             ,
             &
             that
             they
             remain
             not
             in
             their
             first
             nature
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             all
             one
             with
             the
             thing
             here
             proposed
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Doctors
             wil
             haue
             a
             thing
             to
             remain
             in
             it
             essence
             and
             nature
             ,
             although
             the
             essentiall
             parts
             therof
             be
             changed
             ,
             &
             altogether
             extinct
             and
             abolished
             .
             Touching
             the
             limitation
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             towards
             his
             creatures
             ,
             there
             is
             none
             so
             presumptuous
             to
             attempt
             to
             limit
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             whatsoeuer
             he
             wil
             :
             and
             which
             confesseth
             not
             ,
             that
             he
             may
             ordaine
             &
             dispose
             of
             all
             his
             creatures
             in
             generall
             ,
             as
             it
             pleaseth
             him
             ,
             &
             as
             a
             Potter
             doth
             of
             his
             earth
             .
             And
             thervnto
             (
             say
             they
             )
             ought
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Ieremy
             to
             be
             referred
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             very
             clearly
             by
             these
             Hebrew
             words
             .
             
               L●
               gippale
               Mimmecha
               col-dauar
            
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             nothing
             shal
             be
             hard
             to
             thee
             ô
             Lord.
             Concerning
             the
             danger
             which
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             may
             come
             of
             the
             abouesaid
             answeres
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             they
             answer
             ,
             that
             men
             of
             sound
             and
             good
             judgement
             wil
             neuer
             drawe
             thereof
             any
             euill
             consequence
             ,
             seeing
             that
             all
             this
             doctrine
             is
             true
             ,
             and
             doth
             containe
             no
             manner
             of
             obscuritie
             .
             And
             if
             any
             peraduenture
             take
             harme
             thereby
             ,
             it
             must
             bee
             imputed
             to
             themselues
             ,
             and
             their
             euill
             vnderstanding
             ;
             
             whereby
             not
             onely
             some
             doctrine
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             word
             of
             God
             it selfe
             ,
             may
             be
             sometimes
             peruerted
             and
             corrupted
             .
             To
             be
             
             short
             ,
             all
             things
             (
             as
             saith
             the
             Apostle
             )
             be
             cleane
             to
             those
             that
             be
             cleane
             ,
             and
             polluted
             to
             those
             that
             be
             polluted
             ,
             and
             haue
             an
             euill
             conscience
             .
             And
             where
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             that
             one
             may
             take
             occasion
             by
             the
             doctrine
             abouesaid
             ,
             to
             interpret
             the
             scriptures
             according
             to
             his
             owne
             sence
             and
             fantasie
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             no.
             And
             where
             some
             one
             would
             attempt
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             say
             it
             shall
             be
             easie
             to
             reiect
             his
             interpretation
             ,
             as
             not
             answerable
             to
             the
             rules
             and
             analogie
             of
             faith
             :
             as
             the
             foresaid
             doctrine
             and
             interpretation
             of
             the
             Ministers
             is
             answerable
             therevnto
             .
             Where
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             change
             and
             alter
             the
             scriptures
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             slaunder
             ,
             which
             can
             no
             way
             bee
             proued
             against
             them
             :
             neither
             by
             their
             writings
             ,
             nor
             by
             their
             speeches
             ,
             nor
             by
             any
             thing
             they
             euer
             said
             or
             thought
             .
             Concerning
             what
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             scripture
             saith
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             denie
             it
             ,
             and
             do
             say
             ,
             that
             contrariwise
             the
             scriptures
             do
             establish
             it
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             nor
             else-where
             :
             according
             as
             it
             is
             written
             .
             The
             heauens
             
             must
             containe
             him
             vntill
             the
             time
             that
             all
             things
             bee
             restored
             which
             God
             hath
             spoken
             by
             the
             mouth
             of
             all
             his
             holy
             Prophers
             since
             the
             world
             began
             .
             And
             where
             they
             alledge
             that
             the
             scripture
             ought
             not
             to
             bee
             interpreted
             according
             to
             euery
             mans
             sence
             and
             phantasie
             ;
             the
             Ministers
             do
             confesse
             it
             ,
             adding
             that
             all
             interpretations
             ought
             to
             bee
             examined
             ,
             as
             S.
             Paul
             saith
             :
             but
             that
             such
             examination
             must
             bee
             done
             by
             conference
             of
             the
             scriptures
             .
             And
             where
             the
             Doctors
             accuse
             the
             Ministers
             not
             to
             haue
             alledged
             any
             passages
             of
             the
             scripture
             for
             confirmation
             of
             the
             foresaid
             doctrine
             ,
             before
             they
             produced
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             false
             accusation
             :
             and
             that
             they
             should
             well
             haue
             remembred
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             their
             discourse
             ,
             that
             they
             alledged
             to
             this
             end
             ,
             S.
             Paul.
             2.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             
             Where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             denie
             himselfe
             .
             And
             that
             which
             is
             written
             Hebr.
             6.
             
             It
             is
             impossible
             that
             God
             can
             lye
             .
             Which
             places
             ,
             with
             those
             they
             produced
             out
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             were
             
             not
             alledged
             to
             diminish
             ought
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             But
             rather
             to
             establish
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             cut
             off
             the
             way
             to
             many
             impieties
             and
             blasphemies
             :
             which
             they
             would
             falsly
             propose
             and
             shrowde
             them
             vnder
             pretext
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             without
             hauing
             regard
             to
             his
             reuealed
             will
             ,
             wherevnto
             we
             must
             referre
             the
             Omnipotencie
             .
          
        
      
       
         
           The
           sixt
           dayes
           Dispute
           on
           Tuesday
           ,
           the
           16.
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           THe
           Doctors
           obiect
           ,
           that
           they
           haue
           made
           such
           an
           argument
           ,
           God
           cannot
           cause
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           .
           God
           is
           not
           therfore
           Omnipotent
           .
           That
           this
           cōsequence
           is
           necessarie
           it
           is
           most
           manifest
           :
           without
           other
           proofe
           ,
           by
           the
           lawe
           of
           contradiction
           .
           For
           according
           to
           the
           rule
           holden
           in
           all
           schooles
           of
           Philosophie
           ,
           two
           contradictions
           cannot
           be
           true
           :
           To
           haue
           power
           to
           do
           all
           things
           ,
           and
           to
           haue
           no
           power
           in
           certain
           particular
           things
           ,
           be
           contradictions
           .
           For
           this
           particular
           thing
           ,
           is
           a
           part
           of
           all
           .
           If
           thē
           the
           Antecedent
           be
           true
           ,
           of
           necessitie
           the
           consequence
           must
           be
           false
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           lawe
           of
           contradiction
           :
           for
           they
           two
           as
           contradictories
           cannot
           be
           true
           together
           .
           And
           notwithstanding
           ,
           albeit
           that
           by
           the
           knowledge
           of
           the
           termes
           thēselues
           ,
           a
           man
           might
           iudge
           the
           consequence
           to
           be
           good
           :
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           it
           is
           plainly
           knowne
           by
           the
           deduction
           of
           the
           obiectiō
           against
           the
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           proued
           the
           consequence
           .
           The
           reason
           of
           the
           Ministers
           was
           thus
           :
           God
           cannot
           lye
           :
           hee
           cannot
           sinne
           :
           hee
           cannot
           cause
           that
           things
           made
           ,
           be
           not
           made
           .
           Therfore
           it
           either
           repugneth
           his
           nature
           ,
           or
           there
           is
           repugnancie
           on
           the
           behalf
           of
           the
           creatures
           :
           bicause
           there
           is
           a
           folded
           contradiction
           .
           Now
           the
           Doctors
           in
           their
           obiection
           haue
           said
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           nothing
           like
           in
           the
           question
           proposed
           :
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           whether
           one
           bodie
           may
           be
           in
           two
           places
           .
           Whervpon
           they
           make
           such
           an
           argument
           ,
           taken
           from
           their
           obiection
           ,
           God
           can
           do
           all
           things
           which
           are
           not
           repugnant
           to
           his
           nature
           ,
           or
           where
           there
           is
           no
           repugnancie
           in
           the
           
           behalfe
           of
           things
           created
           :
           and
           that
           no
           contradiction
           is
           therin
           implyed
           .
           But
           to
           affirme
           one
           body
           ,
           may
           be
           in
           two
           places
           ,
           at
           one
           selfe-same
           instant
           ,
           is
           not
           a
           thing
           repugnant
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           on
           the
           behalfe
           of
           the
           body
           ,
           implyeth
           no
           contradiction
           :
           God
           therefore
           can
           do
           it
           .
           Or
           else
           thus
           .
           God
           cannot
           do
           it
           :
           It
           followeth
           therefore
           ,
           that
           God
           is
           not
           Omnipotent
           .
           And
           so
           is
           proposed
           the
           reason
           and
           deduction
           of
           the
           antecedent
           and
           consequent
           .
           Yea
           and
           the
           proofe
           of
           the
           assumptiō
           or
           second
           proposition
           :
           For
           they
           haue
           proued
           there
           is
           no
           contradiction
           in
           saying
           that
           one
           body
           might
           be
           in
           two
           places
           ;
           and
           that
           it
           doth
           not
           repugne
           the
           nature
           of
           GOD
           ,
           whereof
           the
           probation
           hath
           bene
           made
           ,
           by
           example
           of
           like
           things
           .
           As
           God
           can
           cause
           two
           bodies
           to
           be
           in
           one
           place
           ,
           and
           other
           like
           reasons
           deducted
           in
           the
           Obiection
           .
        
         
           And
           where
           the
           Doctors
           (
           say
           they
           )
           preposterously
           argue
           from
           a
           particular
           to
           a
           generall
           ,
           It
           seemeth
           (
           vnder
           correction
           )
           they
           haue
           forgotten
           the
           rules
           of
           Lodgicke
           .
           For
           very
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           this
           rule
           hath
           place
           in
           affirming
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           denying
           .
           But
           contrariwise
           ,
           when
           there
           is
           some
           thing
           affirmed
           in
           generall
           ,
           and
           the
           default
           in
           particular
           proued
           ,
           (
           as
           say
           Logitians
           )
           
             Ad
             negationem
             particularis
             ,
             sequitur
             negatio
             eius
             quod
             vniuersaliter
             affirmatuum
             est
             .
          
           Likewise
           when
           there
           is
           some
           of
           a
           whole
           thing
           which
           hath
           many
           parts
           affirmed
           :
           and
           default
           is
           proued
           in
           one
           part
           ,
           the
           destruction
           of
           the
           whole
           followeth
           .
           As
           if
           one
           should
           say
           :
           All
           the
           bodie
           is
           sound
           .
           Hee
           that
           should
           proue
           one
           part
           of
           the
           bodie
           diseased
           ,
           should
           proue
           this
           proposition
           
             [
             All
             the
             bodie
             is
             sound
             ]
          
           to
           be
           false
           .
        
         
           Such
           is
           the
           argument
           which
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           made
           (
           to
           wit
           )
           :
           If
           God
           cannot
           do
           one
           particular
           thing
           (
           as
           to
           cause
           one
           bodie
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           )
           then
           he
           cannot
           do
           all
           things
           .
           Or
           if
           he
           can
           do
           all
           things
           ,
           he
           can
           do
           that
           also
           .
        
         
           They
           are
           agrieued
           to
           be
           sent
           backe
           to
           their
           Logicke
           .
           For
           they
           regarded
           no
           other
           ende
           ,
           but
           to
           make
           the
           antecent
           to
           be
           graunted
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           God
           cannot
           make
           one
           bodie
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           .
           And
           are
           verie
           glad
           ,
           to
           haue
           vnderstood
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Ministers
           vpon
           this
           Article
           :
           that
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           That
           God
           cannot
           cause
           ,
           nor
           will
           one
           bodie
           to
           bee
           in
           two
           
           places
           :
           for
           as
           much
           as
           it
           implyeth
           contradiction
           .
           And
           where
           the
           Ministers
           doo
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Doctors
           by
           their
           reasons
           ,
           could
           not
           thereof
           inferre
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           antecedent
           :
           The
           Doctors
           confesse
           the
           same
           .
           And
           thereby
           doo
           the
           Ministers
           also
           sufficiently
           perceiue
           ,
           that
           the
           reasons
           they
           haue
           brought
           ,
           are
           nothing
           worth
           to
           the
           confirmation
           of
           the
           antecedent
           ,
           which
           is
           their
           resolution
           .
           But
           the
           Doctors
           say
           :
           that
           these
           reasons
           ,
           albeit
           they
           be
           nought
           ,
           were
           to
           this
           end
           neuerthelesse
           produced
           by
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           to
           proue
           ,
           that
           it
           was
           impossible
           to
           God
           ,
           to
           make
           one
           bodie
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           this
           Article
           ,
           which
           beginneth
           
             [
             Touching
             that
             which
             they
             say
             that
             the
             authorities
             ,
          
           &c.
           ]
           The
           Doctors
           obiect
           that
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           neuer
           thought
           to
           make
           exception
           of
           any
           thing
           ,
           which
           is
           not
           subiect
           to
           the
           power
           of
           God.
           For
           (
           as
           it
           is
           manifest
           )
           hee
           that
           saith
           all
           ,
           excepteth
           nothing
           .
           Therefore
           ,
           when
           the
           Scripture
           saith
           ,
           that
           God
           is
           almightie
           ,
           it
           giueth
           sufficiently
           to
           vnderstand
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           no
           exception
           .
           And
           to
           giue
           exception
           therein
           ,
           should
           be
           to
           contradict
           to
           many
           places
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           to
           blaspheme
           against
           his
           power
           .
           But
           well
           say
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           that
           the
           Fathers
           haue
           interpreted
           the
           Omnipoteucie
           of
           God
           :
           not
           to
           comprehend
           that
           which
           toucheth
           the
           perfection
           of
           his
           nature
           ,
           but
           that
           only
           which
           concerneth
           the
           Creatures
           :
           So
           that
           there
           were
           not
           on
           their
           part
           too
           apparant
           contradiction
           ,
           and
           repugnancie
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           present
           question
           importeth
           not
           ,
           that
           there
           is
           contradiction
           for
           a
           bodie
           to
           be
           a
           bodie
           ,
           and
           in
           diuers
           places
           at
           one
           selfe-same
           instant
           .
           For
           concerning
           the
           essence
           of
           bodies
           ,
           in
           speaking
           of
           a
           bodie
           hauing
           it
           dimensions
           ,
           as
           speake
           the
           Philosophers
           ,
           
             De
             praedicamento
             quantitatis
          
           :
           Certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           the
           dimensions
           are
           of
           the
           essence
           of
           a
           bodie
           ;
           but
           to
           be
           circumscript
           and
           inclosed
           in
           a
           place
           ,
           that
           is
           an
           accident
           .
           Which
           thing
           is
           shewed
           by
           Philosophie
           it selfe
           :
           For
           the
           most
           high
           heauen
           ,
           according
           to
           all
           ,
           is
           a
           bodie
           ,
           and
           neuerthelesse
           is
           it
           not
           in
           place
           according
           to
           it
           all
           .
           Therefore
           is
           it
           not
           an
           essentiall
           thing
           ,
           for
           a
           bodie
           to
           be
           enclosed
           in
           one
           place
           .
        
         
         
           And
           to
           speake
           of
           the
           present
           matter
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           should
           be
           very
           much
           troubled
           to
           prooue
           ,
           that
           the
           bodie
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           is
           in
           one
           place
           in
           heauen
           :
           seeing
           it
           is
           written
           in
           the
           4.
           
           Chapter
           to
           the
           Ephesians
           ,
           he
           is
           mounted
           aboue
           all
           the
           heauens
           :
           out
           of
           which
           ,
           there
           is
           no
           place
           ,
           as
           they
           speak
           of
           places
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           bodies
           ,
           according
           to
           nature
           .
           And
           were
           it
           so
           ,
           that
           it
           should
           be
           essential
           to
           a
           body
           ,
           to
           be
           in
           one
           place
           (
           according
           to
           the
           rule
           which
           the
           Ministers
           deliuer
           )
           an
           other
           blasphemy
           would
           follow
           against
           the
           Omniporencie
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           God
           could
           not
           make
           a
           body
           ,
           and
           place
           the
           same
           aboue
           all
           heauens
           .
           And
           to
           speake
           more
           vniuersally
           ,
           that
           God
           could
           not
           make
           a
           bodie
           without
           place
           ,
           and
           roomth
           equall
           to
           it
           greatnes
           .
        
         
           Touching
           the
           Allegations
           proposed
           by
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           of
           certaine
           auncient
           Authors
           ,
           The
           Doctors
           do
           obiect
           ,
           that
           the
           said
           Allegations
           are
           against
           themselues
           :
           For
           as
           much
           as
           to
           be
           inclosed
           in
           a
           place
           ,
           doth
           not
           depend
           of
           the
           essence
           of
           a
           bodie
           ,
           nor
           of
           it
           measures
           :
           as
           appeareth
           by
           the
           authorities
           produced
           ,
           wherein
           there
           is
           mentiō
           made
           of
           Angels
           ,
           which
           haue
           not
           bodies
           .
           It
           is
           not
           therefore
           an
           essentiall
           reason
           for
           the
           demensions
           of
           a
           body
           to
           be
           contained
           in
           a
           place
           .
           And
           all
           this
           furniture
           of
           authorities
           maketh
           nothing
           to
           the
           purpose
           :
           For
           they
           tend
           but
           to
           shewe
           ,
           that
           the
           naturall
           proprietie
           of
           creatures
           ,
           is
           different
           from
           the
           diuine
           nature
           ,
           as
           S.
           Basil
           saith
           expresly
           in
           the
           place
           by
           the
           Ministers
           alledged
           .
           And
           S.
           Ambrose
           in
           his
           first
           booke
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           Cap.
           7.
           where
           the
           same
           Authors
           doo
           declare
           ,
           that
           God
           by
           his
           nature
           may
           be
           euery
           where
           :
           and
           the
           creatures
           by
           their
           natures
           ,
           not
           so
           .
           But
           the
           said
           Authors
           pretend
           not
           ,
           that
           God
           by
           his
           Omnipotencie
           cannot
           make
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           diuers
           places
           :
           For
           the
           same
           Authors
           (
           or
           their
           like
           )
           when
           they
           come
           to
           speak
           of
           the
           power
           of
           God
           in
           the
           holy
           Sacrament
           ,
           they
           affirme
           ,
           that
           the
           bodie
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           is
           in
           heauen
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           holy
           Sacrament
           .
           And
           affirme
           ,
           that
           the
           Angels
           and
           spirits
           of
           the
           blessed
           ,
           may
           by
           the
           same
           power
           ,
           be
           in
           many
           places
           .
           As
           the
           Doctors
           will
           shew
           in
           their
           resolution
           .
        
         
           Where
           the
           Ministers
           say
           ,
           that
           a
           body
           must
           be
           circumscript
           without
           place
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           essentiall
           proprietie
           :
           that
           
           hath
           bene
           formerly
           shewed
           to
           be
           false
           .
           And
           the
           Ministers
           do
           confound
           the
           name
           of
           body
           :
           which
           sometimes
           doth
           signifie
           substance
           ,
           sometimes
           quantitie
           ,
           hauing
           it
           dimensions
           ,
           breadth
           ,
           length
           ,
           and
           deepnesse
           :
           which
           dimensions
           be
           essentiall
           in
           a
           body
           ,
           taking
           the
           body
           for
           a
           kinde
           of
           quantitie
           :
           and
           not
           in
           a
           substantiall
           body
           :
           for
           it
           is
           an
           accident
           .
           Now
           certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           God
           can
           seperate
           the
           accidents
           from
           a
           body
           ,
           and
           make
           a
           substance
           without
           accidents
           :
           otherwise
           there
           would
           follow
           an
           other
           blasphemie
           :
           that
           God
           could
           not
           seperate
           the
           accident
           ,
           from
           a
           subiect
           and
           substance
           .
           And
           where
           the
           Ministers
           say
           ,
           that
           a
           stone
           by
           a
           violent
           mouing
           ,
           may
           bee
           cast
           on
           high
           ,
           that
           is
           no
           answere
           to
           the
           question
           .
           For
           the
           Doctors
           doo
           demaund
           (
           for
           as
           much
           as
           it
           is
           essentiall
           and
           naturall
           to
           a
           massy
           and
           terrestriall
           body
           ,
           in
           regard
           of
           the
           massinesse
           and
           waight
           thereof
           tending
           downeward
           )
           whether
           God
           by
           his
           onely
           power
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           naturall
           proprietie
           of
           a
           massy
           and
           waightie
           body
           ,
           cannot
           hold
           and
           hang
           it
           vp
           on
           high
           ?
        
         
           And
           as
           touching
           the
           euasion
           which
           the
           Ministers
           make
           from
           a
           very
           strong
           and
           mightie
           argument
           against
           their
           doctrine
           ,
           that
           two
           bodies
           may
           be
           in
           one
           place
           ,
           by
           the
           proofe
           that
           is
           made
           ,
           taken
           from
           the
           scripture
           ,
           (
           not
           onely
           to
           proue
           that
           God
           can
           cause
           two
           bodies
           to
           be
           in
           one
           place
           ,
           but
           euen
           that
           he
           hath
           done
           it
           )
           serueth
           nothing
           to
           couer
           their
           error
           ,
           in
           saying
           that
           it
           is
           not
           said
           in
           S.
           Iohn
           ,
           that
           our
           Lord
           did
           enter
           by
           
           the
           shut
           doores
           :
           but
           that
           he
           was
           found
           standing
           in
           the
           midst
           of
           them
           :
           where
           the
           said
           Ministers
           haue
           concealed
           and
           omitted
           this
           verbe
           venit
           :
           and
           do
           stay
           onely
           vpon
           the
           verbe
           stetit
           .
           For
           the
           expresse
           text
           in
           S.
           
             Iohn
             .
             cap.
          
           21.
           19.
           saieth
           :
           That
           the
           doores
           being
           shut
           ,
           Iesus
           came
           into
           the
           place
           where
           the
           Disciples
           were
           assembled
           ,
           and
           was
           there
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           them
           .
           They
           demaund
           of
           them
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           the
           scripture
           saith
           ,
           that
           he
           came
           thither
           ,
           the
           doores
           beeing
           shut
           ,
           and
           that
           hee
           was
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           them
           :
           whether
           hee
           were
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           them
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           said
           place
           ,
           without
           entring
           thereinto
           :
           or
           whether
           hee
           there
           entered
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           the
           text
           saith
           ;
           that
           the
           doores
           were
           shut
           
           when
           he
           came
           ;
           How
           they
           will
           proue
           by
           the
           scripture
           that
           he
           entred
           ,
           if
           not
           by
           the
           shut
           doores
           ?
           For
           a
           much
           greater
           myracle
           should
           it
           be
           ,
           to
           be
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           his
           Disciples
           ,
           without
           being
           entred
           into
           the
           place
           where
           they
           were
           .
           Too
           light
           is
           that
           shift
           ,
           to
           say
           it
           is
           not
           written
           that
           he
           entred
           .
           For
           S.
           Augustine
           in
           his
           booke
           
             De
             agone
             Christiano
             ,
             cap.
          
           24.
           saieth
           thus
           .
           
             Nec
             nos
             moueat
             quod
             clausis
             hostijs
             subitò
             eum
             apparuisse
             Dicipulis
             scriptum
             est
             :
             vt
             propterea
             negemus
             illud
             fuisse
             corpus
             humanum
             ,
             quia
             contra
             naturam
             huius
             corporis
             videmus
             illudper
             clausa
             hostia
             intrare
             .
             Omnia
             enim
             possibilia
             sunt
             Deo
             ,
             Nam
             &
             ambulare
             super
             aquas
             contra
             naturam
             huius
             corporis
             esse
             manifestum
             est
             ,
             &
             tamen
             non
             solum
             ipse
             Dominus
             ante
             passionem
             ambulauit
             ,
             sed
             etiam
             Petrum
             ambulare
             fecit
             .
          
           Let
           it
           not
           moue
           vs
           ,
           because
           it
           is
           written
           ,
           that
           the
           doores
           being
           shut
           ,
           he
           suddenly
           appeared
           to
           his
           Disciples
           ;
           that
           we
           therefore
           denie
           that
           body
           to
           haue
           bene
           humane
           ,
           because
           wee
           see
           it
           against
           the
           nature
           of
           this
           body
           ,
           to
           enter
           by
           the
           closed
           doores
           .
           For
           to
           God
           are
           all
           things
           possible
           .
           For
           to
           walke
           also
           vpon
           the
           waters
           ,
           is
           manifestly
           against
           the
           nature
           of
           this
           body
           :
           And
           yet
           the
           Lord
           himselfe
           not
           onely
           walked
           before
           his
           passion
           ,
           but
           also
           caused
           Peter
           to
           walke
           .
        
         
           Where
           it
           appeareth
           ,
           that
           S.
           Augustine
           saith
           plainly
           ,
           that
           our
           Lord
           did
           enter
           by
           the
           shut
           doores
           :
           and
           referreth
           all
           to
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           Moreouer
           ,
           the
           text
           of
           S.
           Luke
           ,
           ioyned
           with
           that
           of
           Saint
           Iohn
           ,
           doth
           shewe
           that
           he
           entred
           through
           the
           doores
           .
           For
           no
           reasonable
           occasion
           had
           the
           Apostles
           had
           ,
           to
           thinke
           it
           was
           a
           spirit
           ,
           and
           not
           a
           body
           ,
           seeeing
           him
           before
           them
           in
           the
           likenesse
           of
           a
           man
           :
           but
           for
           that
           he
           was
           entred
           otherwise
           then
           a
           true
           body
           ,
           and
           very
           man
           could
           enter
           .
           That
           is
           ,
           for
           that
           he
           was
           entred
           by
           the
           closed
           doores
           :
           which
           thing
           a
           true
           man
           ,
           and
           a
           true
           body
           in
           no
           wise
           can
           doo
           .
           To
           say
           that
           the
           doores
           were
           opened
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           shut
           again
           by
           myracle
           ,
           or
           otherwise
           ,
           should
           nothing
           auaile
           .
           For
           so
           may
           a
           true
           man
           ,
           and
           a
           true
           body
           be
           there
           :
           and
           therefore
           no
           cause
           can
           a
           man
           haue
           to
           think
           it
           a
           spirit
           ,
           or
           vaine
           vision
           .
        
         
           The
           Doctors
           say
           moreouer
           ,
           that
           all
           the
           auncient
           heretikes
           
           and
           Christians
           ,
           did
           commonly
           agree
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           passed
           through
           :
           but
           such
           was
           their
           difference
           ,
           as
           now
           it
           is
           between
           the
           Ministers
           &
           Doctors
           .
           The
           auncient
           heretikes
           said
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           after
           his
           resurrection
           ,
           had
           not
           a
           true
           body
           ,
           because
           he
           did
           workes
           contrary
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           body
           ,
           which
           implied
           contradiction
           to
           a
           naturall
           body
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           at
           one selfe
           instant
           ,
           he
           was
           in
           one
           selfe-same
           place
           with
           an
           other
           body
           :
           as
           when
           he
           passed
           through
           the
           doores
           .
           The
           auncient
           Catholike
           Christians
           answered
           ,
           that
           such
           indeed
           was
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           body
           ,
           that
           it
           could
           not
           passe
           through
           the
           doores
           :
           through
           the
           body
           of
           the
           virgin
           in
           his
           birth
           ,
           without
           fracture
           :
           through
           the
           stone
           of
           the
           Sepulchre
           in
           it
           resurrection
           :
           but
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           that
           two
           bodies
           should
           be
           together
           ,
           by
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           ,
           implied
           no
           contradiction
           :
           for
           as
           much
           as
           it
           so
           hapned
           in
           the
           three
           cases
           done
           and
           recited
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           that
           speaketh
           therof
           ,
           is
           
             Iustine
             Martir
          
           ,
           in
           the
           117.
           question
           against
           the
           Gentiles
           :
           where
           hee
           saith
           .
           If
           a
           thicke
           body
           be
           hindred
           to
           passe
           through
           the
           doores
           ,
           how
           did
           our
           Lord
           after
           his
           resurrection
           enter
           the
           shut
           doores
           ?
           And
           if
           it
           bee
           so
           ,
           why
           was
           the
           stone
           remoued
           by
           the
           Angell
           from
           off
           the
           Sepulchre
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           his
           body
           might
           rise
           againe
           ?
           He
           answereth
           thus
           .
           That
           euen
           as
           our
           Lord
           without
           changing
           his
           body
           into
           a
           spirit
           ,
           walked
           vpon
           the
           sea
           ▪
           but
           by
           his
           diuine
           power
           he
           made
           the
           sea
           solide
           to
           walke
           vpon
           ;
           not
           onely
           for
           his
           owne
           body
           ,
           but
           for
           that
           of
           S.
           Peter
           .
           So
           by
           his
           diuine
           power
           he
           came
           forth
           of
           the
           sepulchre
           ,
           the
           stone
           remaining
           thervpon
           ,
           and
           entered
           to
           his
           Disciples
           ,
           the
           doores
           beeing
           shut
           .
           Hereby
           we
           vnderstand
           ,
           that
           the
           things
           which
           proceed
           of
           diuers
           vertues
           ,
           ought
           to
           haue
           the
           same
           faith
           .
           And
           we
           must
           know
           ,
           that
           the
           things
           which
           surpasse
           nature
           ,
           whē
           they
           are
           wrought
           in
           it
           by
           diuine
           power
           ,
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           measured
           according
           to
           the
           reason
           &
           proprietie
           of
           nature
           .
           For
           this
           cause
           ,
           our
           Lord
           seeing
           his
           Disciples
           troubled
           at
           such
           an
           entry
           ,
           did
           propose
           vnto
           them
           the
           parts
           of
           his
           body
           ,
           and
           the
           places
           and
           markes
           of
           his
           wounds
           ,
           to
           be
           touched
           ,
           to
           shew
           he
           was
           not
           entred
           by
           change
           of
           his
           body
           into
           a
           spirite
           :
           but
           with
           his
           body
           composed
           of
           it
           dimensions
           and
           thicknesse
           :
           and
           by
           his
           diuine
           almightinesse
           ,
           
           which
           made
           all
           things
           that
           surpasse
           the
           strength
           of
           nature
           .
        
         
           Saint
           Hillary
           in
           his
           third
           booke
           of
           the
           Trinitie
           :
           But
           thou
           (
           saith
           hee
           )
           which
           wilt
           search
           into
           the
           things
           insearchable
           ,
           and
           wil●
           be
           Iudge
           of
           the
           secrets
           of
           God
           ▪
           and
           his
           power
           :
           I
           aske
           counsell
           of
           thee
           ,
           giue
           onely
           a
           reason
           and
           solution
           of
           this
           fact
           ,
           to
           mee
           that
           〈◊〉
           and
           do
           simply
           beleeue
           in
           God
           concerning
           all
           things
           ,
           euen
           as
           hee
           hath
           said
           and
           pronounced
           them
           ?
           I
           vnderstand
           that
           the
           Lord
           was
           often
           present
           after
           his
           resurrectio●
           to
           he
           seene
           and
           knowne
           of
           them
           which
           beleeued
           him
           not
           .
           The
           self-same
           Lord
           ,
           applying
           himselfe
           to
           the
           weaknesse
           of
           out
           vnderstanding
           ,
           and
           to
           satisfie
           the
           doubts
           of
           the
           〈◊〉
           doth
           shewe
           a
           secret
           and
           a
           worke
           of
           his
           almightinesse
           ▪
           Expound
           to
           me
           the●
           ,
           whosoeuer
           thou
           art
           ,
           which
           wilt
           beeade
           archer
           of
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           reason
           of
           this
           dee●●t
           The
           Disciples
           being
           shut
           vp
           and
           withdrawne
           together
           in
           secret
           ,
           the
           Lord
           is
           proposed
           to
           Thomas
           ,
           to
           confirme
           his
           faith
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           conditions
           he
           desired
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           he
           might
           touch
           his
           body
           ,
           and
           proue
           his
           wounds
           ,
           And
           for
           this
           cau●ent
           behoued
           him
           to
           bring
           the
           true
           body
           with
           him
           ,
           wherein
           he
           had
           receiued
           such
           wounds
           .
           I
           demaund
           then
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           he
           was
           corporall
           ,
           by
           what
           part
           of
           the
           house
           entred
           hee
           in
           ?
           For
           I
           see
           that
           the
           Eu●ngelist
           diligently
           expresseth
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           came
           when
           the
           doores
           were
           shut
           ,
           and
           was
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           his
           Disciples
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           whether
           he
           pierced
           the
           thicke
           walles
           ,
           and
           the
           great
           lettes
           of
           timber
           betweene
           both
           ?
           Certaine
           it
           is
           ,
           that
           without
           fiction
           or
           guile
           hee
           there
           entered
           .
           Let
           thy
           conceit
           followe
           and
           consider
           his
           entrie
           ,
           and
           thy
           vnderstanding
           enter
           into
           the
           house
           shut
           within
           .
           All
           thou
           seest
           ,
           is
           whole
           and
           fast
           locked
           ;
           and
           yet
           is
           l●ee
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           his
           Disciples
           :
           but
           it
           is
           ,
           because
           all
           things
           by
           his
           almightinesse
           are
           open
           to
           him
           .
           Thou
           slaunderest
           things
           inuisible
           .
           I
           aske
           thee
           againe
           the
           reason
           of
           this
           thing
           there
           visible
           ?
           Nothing
           of
           the
           wall
           or
           solide
           doores
           gaue
           backe
           ,
           or
           made
           way
           .
           Contrariwise
           I
           see
           that
           wood
           and
           stones
           by
           their
           nature
           cannot
           receiue
           such
           an
           entrie
           .
        
         
         
           The
           body
           of
           our
           Lord
           was
           not
           quite
           vanished
           ,
           to
           bee
           eftsoones
           taken
           and
           made
           of
           nothing
           .
           Whence
           then
           commeth
           it
           ,
           that
           he
           is
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           them
           without
           opening
           ?
           Sence
           and
           speech
           do
           herein
           faile
           ,
           and
           the
           truth
           of
           the
           deed
           ,
           is
           beyond
           humane
           reason
           .
           As
           then
           we
           are
           abused
           ,
           concerning
           the
           birth
           of
           the
           sonne
           of
           God
           ,
           we
           lye
           also
           concerning
           such
           an
           entry
           .
           The
           deed
           is
           false
           say
           we
           ,
           it
           so
           happened
           not
           ,
           because
           we
           cannot
           vnderstand
           the
           reason
           thereof
           :
           and
           for
           that
           our
           sence
           and
           iudgemenr
           faileth
           ,
           we
           say
           there
           is
           no
           such
           deed
           .
           But
           the
           faith
           and
           beliefe
           of
           the
           deed
           ,
           doth
           conuince
           our
           lying
           .
           The
           Lord
           (
           the
           doores
           being
           shut
           )
           is
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           the
           sonne
           of
           God
           is
           borne
           of
           his
           Father
           .
           Denie
           not
           that
           hee
           thus
           entred
           ,
           because
           by
           the
           infirmitie
           of
           thy
           spirit
           ,
           thou
           canst
           not
           comprehend
           such
           an
           entrie
           .
        
         
           I
           could
           amplifie
           like
           deeds
           in
           all
           the
           creatures
           :
           but
           the
           Lord
           hath
           well
           prouided
           for
           himselfe
           ,
           to
           haue
           contained
           vs
           in
           necessitie
           and
           modestie
           ,
           by
           the
           nature
           of
           our
           bodies
           .
           Sufficiently
           we
           shewe
           ,
           that
           we
           would
           make
           our selues
           an
           other
           God
           ,
           had
           we
           power
           so
           to
           do
           .
           For
           as
           much
           as
           wee
           cannot
           by
           the
           boldnesse
           of
           our
           wicked
           will
           ,
           ruinate
           the
           nature
           of
           truth
           ,
           we
           gainsay
           it
           at
           least
           ,
           and
           contend
           with
           the
           word
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           S.
           Ambrose
           in
           his
           tenth
           booke
           vpon
           S.
           
             Luke
             ,
             cap.
          
           24.
           saith
           ,
           through
           the
           doores
           .
           S.
           Chrysostome
           vpon
           S.
           Iohn
           ,
           proueth
           by
           such
           ane
           ntrie
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           was
           so
           borne
           of
           the
           Virgin
           ,
           that
           she
           remained
           a
           Virgin
           in
           her
           child-birth
           ,
           and
           after
           ,
           without
           any
           manner
           of
           fraction
           .
           And
           concludeth
           ,
           that
           the
           one
           and
           the
           other
           deed
           proceedeth
           from
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God.
           The
           said
           Chrysostome
           in
           his
           second
           Homily
           vpon
           the
           Apostles
           Creed
           ,
           saith
           these
           words
           :
           How
           is
           it
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           entred
           the
           closed
           doores
           ?
           &c.
           because
           such
           things
           are
           aboue
           our
           reach
           ,
           and
           we
           cannot
           render
           a
           reason
           of
           that
           myracle
           ,
           we
           hold
           it
           by
           faith
           .
        
         
           S.
           Ierome
           in
           his
           first
           booke
           against
           Iouinian
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           Epistle
           to
           Pamachiuns
           ,
           against
           the
           errors
           of
           Iohn
           of
           Ierusalem
           ,
           who
           said
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           after
           his
           resurrection
           ,
           had
           not
           a
           
           true
           body
           ,
           because
           it
           was
           impossible
           that
           a
           true
           body
           should
           passe
           through
           the
           doores
           :
           and
           that
           it
           should
           be
           in
           one
           self-same
           place
           with
           an
           other
           body
           )
           answereth
           :
           It
           hindereth
           not
           ,
           but
           that
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           body
           remaineth
           ,
           for
           as
           much
           as
           this
           act
           proceedeth
           from
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God.
           And
           thus
           saith
           :
           Tell
           me
           ,
           thou
           subtill
           disputer
           ,
           which
           is
           greater
           ,
           to
           hang
           the
           huge
           greatnesse
           of
           the
           earth
           vpon
           nothing
           ,
           and
           to
           ballance
           it
           aboue
           the
           bricklenesse
           of
           the
           waters
           :
           or
           for
           God
           to
           passe
           through
           a
           shut
           doore
           ,
           &
           a
           creature
           to
           obey
           his
           Creator
           ?
           To
           that
           which
           is
           the
           greater
           thou
           easily
           agreest
           ,
           and
           slaunderest
           that
           which
           is
           lesser
           .
           S.
           Augustine
           in
           his
           13.
           
           Epistle
           ,
           for
           an
           example
           of
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           ,
           reciteth
           also
           this
           deed
           :
           to
           shewe
           that
           our
           Lord
           was
           borne
           of
           the
           Virgin
           without
           any
           rupture
           of
           her
           body
           :
           and
           to
           declare
           that
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           is
           greater
           then
           we
           can
           comprehend
           .
           Againct
           the
           Valentinians
           and
           others
           ,
           which
           denied
           the
           true
           substance
           of
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           for
           that
           contrary
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           body
           ,
           he
           so
           passed
           .
           S.
           Augustine
           in
           his
           booke
           called
           
             De
             agone
             Christiano
          
           ,
           alledgeth
           the
           same
           deed
           .
           Amphilochius
           and
           Theodoret
           in
           the
           2.
           
           Dialogue
           ,
           disputing
           of
           this
           deed
           against
           Eutiches
           ,
           who
           said
           also
           ,
           that
           after
           the
           resurrection
           ,
           the
           humanitie
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           was
           changed
           into
           his
           diuinitie
           :
           because
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           body
           ,
           he
           so
           passed
           through
           the
           shut
           doores
           ,
           do
           answere
           as
           the
           others
           .
           That
           such
           an
           effect
           importeth
           not
           contradiction
           to
           the
           nature
           of
           a
           body
           :
           for
           as
           much
           as
           it
           proceeded
           of
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           ,
           and
           not
           of
           the
           nature
           of
           the
           body
           .
           Cirell
           in
           his
           12.
           booke
           vpon
           S.
           Iohn
           ,
           reprehendeth
           those
           also
           which
           will
           measure
           the
           myracles
           and
           works
           of
           God
           according
           to
           their
           owne
           iudgement
           ,
           and
           the
           proprietie
           of
           creatures
           :
           and
           very
           sharply
           speaketh
           against
           them
           .
           S.
           Augustine
           in
           his
           first
           booke
           against
           
             Iulian
             ,
             cap.
          
           2.
           recyteth
           ,
           That
           Iouinian
           was
           an
           heretike
           ,
           because
           he
           said
           ,
           that
           there
           was
           fraction
           in
           the
           virgin
           in
           her
           childbirth
           .
           And
           so
           said
           he
           ,
           for
           feare
           of
           falling
           into
           the
           heresie
           of
           the
           Manachees
           ,
           who
           thought
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           had
           not
           a
           true
           body
           ,
           because
           he
           was
           borne
           without
           fraction
           of
           his
           mother
           .
           To
           auoyd
           then
           this
           heresie
           ,
           hee
           rather
           denied
           that
           the
           ●rgin
           remained
           
           a
           Virgin.
           The
           like
           heresie
           is
           imputed
           to
           Origen
           ,
           and
           some
           also
           alledge
           that
           the
           Fathers
           (
           as
           Tertullian
           )
           had
           such
           an
           opinion
           .
           By
           these
           testimonies
           do
           the
           Doctors
           conclude
           ,
           that
           two
           bodies
           to
           pierce
           themselues
           ,
           and
           be
           in
           one
           self-same
           place
           ,
           by
           diuine
           power
           doth
           not
           imply
           any
           contradiction
           .
           Which
           places
           were
           they
           wel
           considered
           ,
           they
           would
           not
           receiue
           a
           new
           interpretation
           against
           the
           very
           expresse
           word
           of
           God
           :
           seeing
           the
           text
           without
           contradiction
           doth
           beare
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           came
           to
           his
           Disciples
           ,
           the
           doores
           being
           shut
           .
        
         
           
           How
           Caluin
           in
           his
           Institution
           hath
           deptaued
           the
           sence
           of
           that
           place
           of
           S.
           Iohn
           ,
           with
           other
           like
           ,
           may
           plainly
           appeare
           ,
           where
           he
           saith
           thus
           .
           That
           which
           they
           eftsoones
           alledge
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           came
           out
           of
           the
           Sepulchre
           without
           opening
           the
           same
           ,
           and
           that
           hee
           entred
           in
           to
           his
           Disciples
           the
           doores
           of
           the
           chamber
           beeing
           shut
           ,
           is
           of
           no
           value
           ,
           further
           to
           maintaine
           their
           error
           .
           For
           as
           the
           water
           serued
           Iesus
           Christ
           for
           a
           firme
           pauement
           ,
           to
           walke
           vpon
           the
           lake
           :
           so
           also
           ought
           it
           not
           seeme
           straunge
           ,
           if
           the
           hardnesse
           of
           the
           stone
           were
           softned
           to
           giue
           him
           passage
           .
           And
           Beza
           in
           his
           second
           Dialogue
           against
           Heshusius
           saith
           ,
           that
           the
           stone
           was
           vanished
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           that
           our
           Lord
           might
           passe
           in
           his
           resurrection
           :
           and
           God
           did
           afterwards
           reforme
           it
           .
           It
           followeth
           in
           the
           text
           of
           Caluin
           :
           As
           also
           to
           enter
           into
           a
           chamber
           the
           doores
           shut
           ,
           is
           not
           to
           say
           that
           hee
           pierced
           the
           wood
           ,
           but
           onely
           that
           he
           made
           an
           opening
           by
           his
           diuine
           power
           :
           so
           that
           by
           a
           myraculous
           fashion
           ,
           he
           was
           found
           in
           the
           middest
           of
           his
           Disciples
           ,
           although
           the
           doores
           were
           were
           shut
           .
           Moreouer
           he
           saith
           :
           That
           which
           they
           bring
           of
           S.
           Luke
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           hee
           vanished
           suddenly
           from
           his
           Disciples
           which
           went
           to
           Emaus
           ,
           serueth
           nought
           for
           them
           ,
           and
           maketh
           for
           our
           aduantage
           .
           For
           he
           was
           not
           made
           inuisible
           by
           taking
           away
           the
           sight
           of
           his
           body
           :
           but
           he
           onely
           vanished
           .
           As
           also
           witnesseth
           the
           same
           Euangelist
           :
           In
           walking
           he
           was
           not
           transfigured
           nor
           disguised
           ,
           to
           be
           made
           inuisible
           ,
           but
           their
           eyes
           were
           holden
           .
           Such
           ridiculous
           and
           friuolous
           expositions
           are
           brought
           by
           Caluin
           and
           his
           like
           ,
           to
           auoyd
           confessing
           ,
           that
           God
           can
           make
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           diuers
           places
           .
        
         
         
           And
           neuerthelesse
           ,
           the
           proper
           text
           of
           the
           scripture
           doth
           witnesse
           that
           two
           bodies
           may
           be
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           ,
           in
           one
           selfesame
           place
           .
           As
           also
           it
           witnesseth
           that
           a
           body
           hauing
           colour
           ,
           and
           before
           visible
           ,
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           ,
           was
           made
           inuisible
           ,
           without
           any
           let
           to
           their
           sight
           that
           could
           see
           .
           As
           S.
           Luke
           doth
           confirme
           ,
           saying
           :
           
             Aphantos
             Egeneto
             Ap'auton
             ,
             Inuisibilis
             factus
             est
             ab
             ipsis
             .
          
           Although
           there
           was
           no
           defect
           on
           the
           behalfe
           of
           the
           Disciples
           .
           For
           it
           is
           said
           before
           ,
           that
           their
           eyes
           were
           opened
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           know
           him
           :
           and
           herevpon
           agreeth
           all
           antiquitie
           .
           An
           other
           act
           do
           the
           Doctors
           adde
           ,
           for
           confirmation
           of
           the
           penitration
           of
           dimensions
           .
           Which
           is
           ,
           that
           our
           Lord
           ascended
           into
           the
           heauens
           ,
           which
           he
           neither
           diuided
           ,
           nor
           claue
           asunder
           .
           Therefore
           of
           necessitie
           did
           hee
           pierce
           them
           :
           as
           the
           scripture
           it selfe
           in
           proper
           termes
           importeth
           .
        
         
           The
           Doctors
           shewe
           also
           to
           the
           said
           Ministers
           ,
           that
           they
           cannot
           produce
           one
           only
           renowned
           Father
           ,
           hauing
           expounded
           these
           places
           ,
           from
           whom
           they
           might
           learne
           their
           so
           diuers
           interpretations
           .
           And
           that
           which
           they
           bring
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           where
           mention
           is
           made
           ,
           that
           S.
           Peter
           came
           forth
           of
           prison
           ,
           nought
           serueth
           to
           colour
           their
           exposition
           .
           In
           which
           text
           ,
           there
           is
           nothing
           spoken
           of
           the
           opening
           of
           the
           prison
           doores
           .
           And
           it
           is
           not
           said
           (
           as
           in
           S.
           Iohn
           )
           that
           the
           doores
           of
           the
           prison
           being
           shut
           ,
           S.
           Peter
           came
           forth
           :
           but
           that
           the
           Angell
           came
           thither
           ,
           when
           the
           keepers
           before
           the
           doore
           kept
           the
           prison
           .
           Where
           if
           they
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           doores
           were
           opened
           to
           S.
           Peter
           ,
           that
           agreeth
           not
           with
           the
           saying
           of
           Saint
           Iohn
           ,
           that
           the
           doores
           were
           shut
           when
           as
           our
           Lord
           entered
           .
           The
           like
           reason
           brought
           by
           the
           Ministers
           out
           of
           the
           fift
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           the
           Apostles
           ,
           and
           for
           the
           same
           cause
           ,
           is
           as
           vnprofitable
           for
           this
           purpose
           ,
           as
           the
           former
           .
        
         
           And
           to
           shewe
           clearely
           and
           euidently
           ,
           that
           God
           (
           contrary
           to
           the
           naturall
           proprietie
           of
           a
           body
           )
           can
           make
           a
           great
           and
           thicke
           body
           to
           passe
           in
           a
           space
           and
           place
           vnequall
           to
           it
           greatnesse
           ,
           largenesse
           ,
           and
           thicknesse
           .
           The
           Doctors
           cyted
           what
           our
           Lord
           saith
           in
           the
           19.
           of
           S.
           Mathew
           :
           It
           is
           easier
           for
           a
           Cable
           to
           goe
           through
           the
           eye
           of
           a
           needle
           ,
           then
           for
           a
           
           rich
           man
           to
           enter
           into
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heauen
           .
        
         
           Two
           things
           haue
           the
           Ministers
           answered
           vnto
           :
           the
           one
           ,
           that
           in
           the
           translation
           wee
           must
           not
           vse
           Cable
           ,
           but
           rather
           Camel
           :
           although
           neuertheles
           their
           own
           French
           Bible
           of
           
             Anthony
             Rebulls
          
           impression
           ,
           which
           they
           haue
           brought
           ,
           containeth
           the
           translation
           of
           this
           word
           Cable
           .
           And
           Caluin
           himself
           likewise
           in
           his
           Hermony
           of
           the
           foure
           Euangelists
           ,
           saith
           that
           to
           bee
           better
           .
           But
           here
           in
           appeareth
           to
           be
           truth
           what
           Tertullian
           against
           the
           Valentinians
           ;
           and
           before
           him
           ,
           Ireneus
           in
           his
           first
           booke
           and
           14.
           
           Chapter
           against
           the
           Valentinians
           doo
           say
           :
           That
           they
           which
           seperate
           themselues
           from
           vs
           to
           go
           to
           an
           other
           schoole
           ,
           do
           alwaies
           inuent
           some
           new
           thing
           ,
           that
           the
           disciples
           may
           bee
           found
           more
           cunning
           then
           their
           Maisters
           .
           But
           well
           ,
           this
           word
           
             [
             Camell
          
           ]
           beeing
           yeelded
           vnto
           them
           ,
           (
           as
           the
           Doctors
           doubt
           not
           to
           haue
           bene
           expounded
           by
           Saint
           Hillary
           ,
           S.
           Ierom
           ,
           and
           others
           )
           the
           reason
           thereof
           is
           yet
           more
           strong
           .
           For
           it
           is
           yet
           more
           repugnant
           that
           a
           crooked
           ,
           grosse
           ,
           and
           great
           Camell
           (
           then
           a
           Cable
           )
           should
           enter
           through
           the
           eye
           of
           a
           needle
           .
           The
           other
           reason
           giuen
           by
           the
           Ministers
           is
           ,
           that
           God
           cannot
           make
           a
           Camel
           or
           Cable
           to
           enter
           throgh
           the
           eye
           of
           a
           needle
           :
           which
           is
           notwithstanding
           ,
           against
           the
           pure
           word
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           who
           saith
           not
           ,
           it
           is
           is
           impossible
           to
           God
           ,
           but
           rather
           easie
           to
           do
           that
           ,
           and
           by
           comparison
           ,
           more
           easie
           vnto
           God
           ,
           then
           to
           make
           a
           rich
           man
           to
           enter
           into
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heauen
           :
           which
           neuerthelesse
           is
           said
           by
           our
           Lord
           to
           be
           possible
           :
           not
           vnto
           men
           ,
           but
           vnto
           God
           :
           to
           whom
           there
           is
           nothing
           vnpossible
           .
           Whervpō
           the
           Doctors
           say
           thus
           ,
           If
           God
           can
           do
           that
           which
           is
           more
           difficult
           ,
           he
           can
           doo
           that
           which
           is
           more
           easie
           .
           Now
           by
           the
           text
           of
           the
           scripture
           ,
           it
           is
           said
           that
           God
           can
           make
           a
           rich
           man
           enter
           into
           the
           kingdome
           of
           heauen
           ,
           which
           is
           the
           more
           difficult
           ;
           he
           can
           therfore
           make
           a
           Camell
           (
           or
           Cable
           )
           to
           enter
           through
           the
           eye
           of
           a
           needle
           ,
           which
           is
           more
           easie
           .
        
         
           The
           answeres
           of
           the
           Ministers
           here
           aboue
           confuted
           ,
           tend
           to
           such
           absurdities
           and
           blasphemies
           ,
           that
           Iesus
           Christ
           by
           his
           almightinesse
           ,
           could
           not
           enter
           through
           the
           closed
           doores
           :
           that
           hee
           could
           not
           come
           forth
           of
           the
           belly
           of
           his
           mother
           ,
           
           through
           her
           body
           without
           fraction
           :
           that
           he
           could
           not
           make
           a
           visible
           body
           ,
           to
           be
           inuisible
           :
           that
           a
           grosse
           and
           great
           body
           might
           be
           in
           a
           place
           vnequall
           to
           it
           :
           that
           hee
           could
           not
           by
           his
           diuine
           power
           make
           penetration
           of
           dimensions
           :
           and
           that
           he
           could
           not
           make
           by
           the
           same
           diuine
           power
           ,
           one
           body
           to
           bee
           in
           two
           places
           (
           for
           it
           is
           like
           reason
           ,
           of
           the
           last
           article
           and
           of
           the
           others
           )
           albeit
           such
           things
           are
           declared
           in
           the
           scriptures
           ,
           not
           onely
           to
           be
           possible
           ,
           but
           euen
           the
           most
           part
           of
           them
           to
           haue
           bene
           done
           .
           And
           the
           Doctors
           do
           wonder
           how
           the
           Ministers
           dare
           denie
           such
           things
           ,
           seeing
           themselues
           must
           necessarily
           confesse
           (
           if
           their
           doctrine
           of
           the
           Supper
           be
           true
           )
           that
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           is
           in
           diuers
           places
           :
           which
           they
           proue
           thus
           .
           The
           faithfull
           really
           receiue
           in
           their
           soules
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           by
           the
           working
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           ,
           and
           not
           the
           bread
           and
           the
           wine
           onely
           :
           or
           else
           (
           as
           saith
           Caluin
           in
           the
           4
           booke
           ,
           17.
           
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           11.
           section
           of
           his
           Institution
           )
           the
           effect
           and
           vertue
           of
           the
           same
           Sacrament
           .
        
         
           Now
           the
           Doctors
           conclude
           thus
           .
           It
           is
           impossible
           for
           a
           man
           to
           receiue
           into
           him
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           but
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           is
           in
           him
           .
           But
           all
           the
           faithfull
           in
           the
           Supper
           do
           receiue
           the
           same
           into
           their
           soules
           ,
           therefore
           must
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           be
           in
           them
           :
           and
           by
           consequent
           in
           diuers
           places
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           in
           all
           places
           where
           their
           Supper
           is
           made
           :
           and
           likewise
           in
           heauen
           .
           They
           say
           further
           ,
           that
           Caluin
           in
           his
           Institution
           ,
           the
           fourtth
           booke
           ,
           17.
           
           Chapter
           ,
           and
           24.
           sect
           .
           saith
           :
           That
           in
           the
           Supper
           ,
           the
           power
           of
           God
           is
           required
           :
           to
           the
           ende
           that
           the
           flesh
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           may
           pierce
           euen
           vnto
           vs
           :
           and
           that
           humane
           nature
           cannot
           comprehend
           the
           same
           .
           But
           it
           behoueth
           that
           the
           power
           of
           God
           doo
           worke
           therein
           .
           And
           by
           this
           meane
           ,
           Caluin
           doth
           admit
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           ,
           the
           flesh
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           in
           many
           places
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           in
           heauen
           ,
           and
           in
           vs
           ,
           into
           whom
           it
           must
           pierce
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God.
           And
           in
           the
           tenth
           number
           he
           saith
           :
           That
           the
           truth
           signified
           ,
           and
           represented
           by
           the
           signes
           ,
           must
           bee
           represented
           and
           exhibited
           in
           the
           same
           place
           where
           the
           signes
           be
           .
           Which
           hee
           proueth
           by
           reason
           
           in
           many
           places
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           the
           signes
           must
           no
           more
           bee
           voyd
           ,
           then
           the
           Doue
           was
           voyd
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           .
           But
           as
           the
           essence
           and
           substance
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           was
           conioyned
           and
           present
           with
           the
           Doue
           :
           so
           the
           flesh
           and
           bloud
           of
           our
           Lord
           ,
           before
           there
           be
           a
           true
           Sacrament
           ,
           must
           be
           conioyned
           and
           vnited
           with
           the
           signes
           .
           The
           passages
           are
           against
           Heshusius
           ,
           and
           in
           his
           booke
           of
           the
           Supper
           :
           and
           vpon
           the
           first
           of
           the
           11.
           
           Chapter
           to
           the
           Corinthians
           .
           And
           although
           the
           Ministers
           will
           answere
           :
           the
           Doctors
           beseech
           them
           well
           to
           weigh
           and
           consider
           the
           text
           of
           Caluin
           ,
           and
           of
           the
           reason
           he
           giueth
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           .
           They
           doo
           obiect
           further
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           in
           their
           Supper
           doo
           attribute
           more
           to
           the
           humane
           power
           ,
           then
           to
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God
           :
           yea
           they
           do
           more
           then
           God
           can
           do
           :
           which
           is
           ,
           that
           they
           brag
           to
           do
           a
           thing
           by
           their
           faith
           ,
           which
           implyeth
           contradiction
           :
           saying
           in
           their
           confession
           of
           faith
           exhibited
           to
           the
           Bishops
           in
           the
           congregatiō
           at
           Poissy
           ;
           That
           faith
           maketh
           things
           absent
           ,
           to
           be
           present
           ,
           in
           one
           selfe-same
           instant
           and
           place
           .
           That
           is
           to
           say
           ,
           in
           the
           soules
           of
           the
           faithfull
           ,
           when
           they
           celebrate
           their
           Supper
           :
           which
           is
           as
           much
           to
           say
           ,
           as
           faith
           maketh
           things
           not
           present
           ,
           present
           at
           one
           selfe-same
           instant
           and
           place
           .
           So
           that
           to
           euery
           faithfull
           in
           the
           Supper
           ,
           comming
           worthily
           therevnto
           ,
           is
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           there
           present
           by
           the
           power
           of
           faith
           .
           And
           neuerthelesse
           it
           is
           not
           there
           present
           ;
           for
           they
           say
           so
           :
           and
           that
           it
           is
           onely
           in
           heauen
           .
           Wherein
           appeareth
           that
           there
           is
           implication
           of
           contradiction
           :
           to
           wit
           ,
           present
           ,
           &
           not
           really
           present
           .
           And
           the
           small
           starting
           hole
           they
           told
           vs
           of
           ,
           that
           the
           body
           is
           aboue
           corporally
           ,
           and
           spiritually
           in
           the
           Supper
           in
           the
           harts
           of
           the
           faithfull
           ,
           can
           serue
           for
           nothing
           .
           For
           the
           spiritualtie
           cannot
           take
           away
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           thing
           :
           and
           their
           faith
           cannot
           make
           a
           body
           ,
           not
           to
           be
           a
           body
           :
           and
           that
           a
           body
           haue
           not
           it
           dimensions
           ,
           as
           heretofore
           they
           haue
           said
           .
        
         
           Therefore
           howsoeuer
           they
           confesse
           ,
           that
           the
           faithfull
           in
           the
           Supper
           receiue
           into
           their
           soules
           the
           substance
           of
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           will
           they
           or
           nill
           they
           ,
           must
           they
           necessarily
           confesse
           ,
           that
           either
           their
           faith
           is
           more
           mightie
           then
           the
           infinite
           vertue
           and
           power
           of
           God
           :
           or
           else
           that
           God
           can
           
           make
           his
           body
           to
           be
           locally
           in
           heauen
           ;
           and
           Sacramentally
           (
           really
           neuerthelesse
           and
           substantially
           )
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Aultar
           .
           Thus
           would
           the
           Doctors
           desire
           to
           heare
           the
           Ministers
           vpon
           this
           point
           :
           and
           then
           afterwards
           to
           put
           their
           answere
           in
           writing
           .
           And
           the
           Ministers
           shall
           neuer
           be
           able
           to
           shewe
           by
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           that
           their
           faith
           can
           make
           at
           one
           instant
           ,
           and
           one
           selfe-same
           place
           ,
           a
           thing
           to
           be
           present
           ,
           and
           not
           present
           .
           And
           one
           thing
           present
           ,
           and
           not
           present
           by
           faith
           :
           is
           as
           much
           to
           say
           ,
           as
           that
           the
           body
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           is
           in
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           a
           faithfull
           person
           .
           And
           no
           Coduit
           pipe
           of
           the
           power
           of
           the
           holy
           Ghost
           should
           there
           also
           be
           needfull
           ,
           to
           conuey
           the
           flesh
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           hither
           vnto
           vs
           from
           heauen
           ,
           were
           not
           the
           said
           flesh
           but
           in
           heauen
           ,
           and
           notwithstanding
           came
           vnto
           vs.
           
        
         
           And
           as
           touching
           the
           points
           obiected
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           that
           
             Peter
             Martyr
          
           and
           
             Theodoret
             Beza
          
           were
           the
           first
           which
           said
           ,
           that
           God
           could
           not
           make
           one
           body
           to
           bee
           in
           two
           places
           :
           and
           the
           Ministers
           haue
           willed
           to
           confirme
           by
           antiquitie
           this
           new
           doctrine
           ,
           which
           they
           cannot
           name
           otherwise
           then
           blasphemie
           .
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           they
           haue
           often
           prayed
           the
           Ministers
           (
           that
           time
           might
           be
           spared
           ,
           things
           better
           cleared
           )
           to
           speake
           nothing
           from
           the
           purpose
           .
           Notwithstanding
           they
           bring
           forthwith
           the
           testimonies
           of
           Fathers
           ,
           to
           shewe
           that
           a
           body
           by
           nature
           is
           circumscript
           ,
           and
           cannot
           be
           naturally
           in
           many
           places
           :
           but
           those
           Authors
           say
           not
           that
           God
           cannot
           do
           it
           .
           But
           S.
           Augustine
           ,
           and
           others
           ,
           in
           the
           places
           cyted
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           touching
           the
           article
           of
           the
           closed
           doores
           ,
           do
           rather
           witnesse
           ,
           that
           two
           bodies
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           ,
           may
           occupie
           one
           selfe-same
           place
           ,
           which
           is
           of
           like
           difficultie
           .
           And
           when
           they
           shall
           come
           to
           the
           proofe
           of
           the
           reall
           presence
           of
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           they
           will
           euidently
           shewe
           ,
           that
           wholly
           all
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           which
           haue
           spoken
           of
           that
           Sacrament
           ,
           haue
           not
           onely
           confessed
           that
           hee
           could
           make
           his
           body
           to
           bee
           aboue
           in
           heauen
           ,
           and
           here
           belowe
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           :
           but
           all
           with
           one
           accord
           ,
           haue
           declared
           that
           they
           beleeue
           according
           to
           the
           word
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ,
           that
           he
           is
           in
           heauen
           ,
           and
           here
           in
           
           the
           Sacrament
           .
           The
           Doctors
           demaund
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           whether
           they
           haue
           any
           ,
           that
           before
           
             Peter
             Martyr
          
           and
           
             Theodor
             Beza
          
           ,
           denied
           such
           power
           of
           God.
           And
           let
           them
           no
           more
           set
           foorth
           the
           authorities
           of
           the
           Fathers
           ,
           to
           prooue
           that
           one
           body
           is
           not
           naturally
           in
           two
           places
           .
           The
           Doctors
           doo
           not
           maruell
           if
           the
           Ministers
           do
           magnifie
           
             Peter
             Martyr
          
           ,
           from
           whom
           they
           haue
           taken
           all
           the
           places
           they
           haue
           brought
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           the
           Article
           which
           beginneth
           
             (
             Touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             ,
             that
             the
             forme
          
           &c.
           )
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           that
           this
           forme
           is
           common
           ,
           as
           often
           as
           men
           will
           debate
           of
           the
           power
           of
           God.
           And
           they
           cannot
           be
           better
           guided
           to
           proue
           it
           ,
           then
           to
           follow
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Angel
           :
           
             That
             there
             is
             nothing
             impossible
             to
             God.
          
           From
           the
           which
           ,
           when
           a
           man
           will
           except
           something
           ,
           hee
           will
           alwaies
           bring
           ,
           what
           the
           Ministers
           do
           bring
           :
           that
           there
           is
           some
           repugnancy
           of
           things
           ,
           whereof
           ensueth
           some
           implication
           of
           contradiction
           .
           As
           did
           the
           olde
           heretiques
           against
           the
           flesh
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           ;
           who
           brought
           alwayes
           some
           impossibilitie
           according
           to
           nature
           .
           And
           as
           much
           did
           they
           against
           the
           Article
           of
           the
           Resurrection
           ,
           and
           incarnation
           :
           as
           though
           there
           had
           bene
           contradiction
           ,
           that
           God
           should
           be
           man
           ,
           and
           man
           should
           be
           God.
           And
           it
           shall
           be
           alwayes
           easie
           for
           an
           euil
           spirit
           ,
           to
           forge
           some
           contradiction
           in
           his
           conceit
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           proprieties
           of
           nature
           .
           And
           concerning
           the
           Article
           beginning
           
             (
             As
             touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             change
             ,
          
           &c.
           )
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           haue
           not
           wel
           conceiued
           their
           meaning
           :
           for
           they
           take
           for
           an
           absurd
           thing
           ,
           that
           a
           substance
           remaining
           affected
           of
           his
           qualities
           ,
           can
           by
           the
           power
           of
           God
           haue
           effects
           ,
           contrary
           to
           his
           qualities
           .
           As
           if
           God
           by
           his
           omnipotencie
           could
           not
           make
           the
           fire
           ,
           hauing
           his
           naturall
           heate
           ,
           to
           coole
           ,
           in
           stead
           of
           burning
           ,
           which
           none
           of
           sound
           and
           Christian
           iudgement
           will
           deny
           .
        
         
           Concerning
           the
           Article
           beginning
           
             (
             Touching
             the
             limitation
             of
             the
             power
             ,
          
           &c.
           )
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ;
           that
           it
           seemeth
           by
           the
           Ministers
           answere
           ,
           that
           the
           power
           of
           God
           is
           limited
           according
           to
           his
           will
           :
           as
           much
           to
           say
           ,
           as
           God
           cannot
           doo
           but
           what
           he
           will
           :
           which
           is
           notoriously
           false
           .
           For
           the
           Hebrew
           
           alledged
           ,
           the
           Ministers
           (
           it
           seemeth
           )
           are
           willing
           to
           shew
           they
           are
           skilfull
           therin
           .
           For
           such
           summoning
           is
           not
           to
           the
           purpose
           ,
           when
           as
           they
           stay
           chiefly
           vpon
           the
           word
           Dauar
           :
           which
           is
           as
           much
           to
           say
           ,
           as
           one
           thing
           .
           But
           it
           ought
           not
           to
           bee
           vnderstood
           of
           a
           thing
           done
           :
           they
           said
           ,
           to
           be
           done
           .
           And
           such
           is
           the
           sence
           of
           the
           place
           
             ad
             verbum
          
           .
           Shall
           there
           be
           any
           thing
           hidden
           from
           me
           ?
           And
           because
           hard
           things
           are
           hidden
           ,
           &
           things
           impossible
           also
           are
           yet
           more
           hidden
           ;
           Behold
           why
           they
           haue
           translated
           ,
           Is
           there
           any
           thing
           hard
           (
           or
           impossible
           )
           to
           mee
           ▪
           Which
           holy
           Pagninus
           ,
           and
           other
           Interpreters
           of
           the
           Hebrew
           tongue
           ,
           do
           wel
           declare
           ,
           that
           the
           verbe
           
             [
             Pala
          
           ]
           signifieth
           to
           hide
           .
           The
           Doctors
           had
           no
           desire
           to
           answer
           herevnto
           ,
           but
           to
           make
           it
           bee
           vnderstood
           that
           an
           Hebrew
           word
           doth
           not
           appaule
           them
           .
           Cōcerning
           the
           article
           beginning
           ,
           
             Touching
             the
             danger
          
           ,
           &c.
           
           The
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           words
           superfluous
           ;
           and
           whatsoeuer
           the
           Ministers
           can
           bring
           ,
           the
           same
           may
           other
           vse
           ,
           and
           retort
           against
           the
           said
           Ministers
           .
           And
           where
           they
           say
           it
           is
           a
           slaunder
           ,
           in
           that
           they
           obiect
           vnto
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           corrupt
           the
           scripture
           ,
           the
           Doctors
           say
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           cannot
           denie
           but
           they
           change
           the
           sence
           &
           glose
           the
           words
           of
           the
           Supper
           .
           
             This
             is
             my
             body
             .
             This
             is
             my
             bloud
             .
          
           And
           with
           like
           authoritie
           ,
           as
           they
           (
           vnder
           pretence
           of
           I
           know
           not
           what
           reasons
           )
           may
           each
           one
           pretend
           to
           corrupt
           the
           other
           scriptures
           ,
           &
           alledge
           some
           impossibilities
           ,
           &
           contradictiōs
           of
           nature
           .
           As
           touching
           the
           article
           beginning
           ,
           
             To
             that
             which
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             scripture
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             body
          
           &c.
           
           The
           Doctors
           do
           say
           ,
           that
           in
           time
           and
           place
           they
           will
           shewe
           what
           they
           haue
           obiected
           ,
           when
           as
           they
           shall
           treate
           more
           amply
           of
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Aultar
           .
        
         
           Where
           the
           Doctors
           haue
           obiected
           that
           the
           Ministers
           do
           not
           ground
           their
           affirmation
           ;
           to
           wit
           ,
           that
           God
           cannot
           make
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           ,
           vpon
           the
           expresse
           testimonie
           of
           the
           scripture
           :
           or
           can
           thereof
           deduct
           the
           same
           .
           The
           Ministers
           for
           all
           places
           haue
           onely
           brought
           but
           these
           :
           that
           God
           cannot
           lye
           :
           God
           cannot
           denie
           himselfe
           .
           But
           the
           Doctors
           say
           that
           this
           consequence
           is
           nought
           worth
           .
           God
           cannot
           lye
           :
           God
           cannot
           therefore
           make
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           :
           which
           neuerthelesse
           the
           Ministers
           should
           haue
           made
           such
           had
           the
           
           places
           produced
           serued
           to
           that
           purpose
           .
           Ioyned
           ,
           that
           when
           it
           is
           said
           God
           cannot
           lye
           ,
           as
           the
           Ministers
           themselues
           haue
           cyted
           ,
           to
           be
           able
           to
           lye
           :
           is
           not
           power
           ,
           but
           infirmitie
           .
           So
           that
           according
           to
           the
           true
           sense
           ,
           it
           was
           meet
           so
           to
           say
           ;
           God
           is
           not
           weake
           that
           he
           can
           lye
           .
           Therfore
           God
           cannot
           make
           one
           bodie
           to
           be
           in
           two
           places
           :
           which
           consequence
           should
           be
           ridiculous
           .
        
         
           And
           where
           the
           Ministers
           haue
           brought
           certaine
           authorities
           of
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           ,
           to
           proue
           there
           is
           diuersitie
           betweene
           the
           creatures
           ,
           and
           Creator
           :
           and
           that
           the
           Creator
           by
           nature
           is
           euery
           where
           ,
           and
           naturally
           the
           creatures
           be
           not
           in
           diuers
           places
           :
           the
           Doctors
           reuerently
           imbrace
           the
           authoritie
           of
           the
           holy
           Fathers
           :
           But
           to
           produce
           the
           said
           places
           for
           cōfirmation
           of
           a
           thing
           so
           well
           knowne
           ,
           and
           not
           doubted
           of
           ,
           their
           trauell
           was
           now
           needlesse
           .
           But
           the
           Doctors
           yet
           attend
           one
           sole
           place
           of
           the
           scripture
           ;
           or
           one
           sole
           testimony
           of
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           ,
           which
           saith
           :
           That
           God
           cannot
           make
           one
           body
           to
           be
           in
           diuers
           places
           .
           The
           Doctors
           pray
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           that
           with
           like
           reuerence
           ,
           they
           receiue
           the
           auncient
           Fathers
           :
           chiefly
           touching
           the
           interpretation
           of
           holy
           scriptures
           :
           whose
           exposition
           (
           as
           are
           the
           places
           aboue
           cyted
           )
           shal
           be
           agreed
           vpon
           betweene
           them
           and
           the
           Ministers
           .
        
         
           Vpon
           request
           made
           to
           the
           Lord
           Neuers
           on
           the
           behalfe
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           that
           hee
           would
           please
           to
           assigne
           a
           day
           for
           answere
           ,
           particularly
           to
           all
           and
           euery
           article
           and
           slaunders
           here
           aboue
           proposed
           by
           the
           Doctors
           in
           their
           obiection
           :
           The
           said
           Lord
           ordained
           ,
           that
           the
           Ministers
           should
           carry
           with
           them
           that
           euening
           ,
           one
           of
           the
           Copies
           of
           the
           Doctors
           obiections
           against
           them
           ;
           to
           be
           ready
           the
           next
           morrow
           by
           noone
           ,
           to
           answer
           thervnto
           :
           which
           the
           Doctors
           agreed
           vnto
           .
           And
           made
           likewise
           request
           to
           the
           said
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           to
           haue
           leaue
           (
           if
           it
           so
           seemed
           them
           good
           )
           to
           reply
           to
           the
           answers
           that
           the
           Ministers
           should
           make
           .
           And
           therwith
           to
           deliuer
           their
           resolution
           ,
           touching
           this
           article
           of
           the
           omnipotency
           of
           God.
           To
           th'
           end
           to
           proceed
           ,
           and
           examine
           the
           reall
           truth
           of
           the
           bodie
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           in
           the
           Sacrament
           of
           the
           Aultar
           .
           Whervnto
           the
           Ministers
           added
           :
           that
           they
           also
           for
           their
           parts
           ,
           would
           deliuer
           a
           briefe
           resolution
           of
           all
           that
           which
           shall
           be
           deduced
           by
           them
           .
        
         
         
           The
           company
           assembled
           on
           the
           morrow
           beeing
           Wednesday
           ,
           the
           17.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           My
           Lord
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           considering
           that
           the
           Doctors
           the
           day
           before
           had
           imployed
           all
           the
           time
           ,
           without
           any
           left
           for
           the
           Ministers
           to
           make
           present
           answere
           to
           them
           :
           supposed
           no
           lesse
           time
           would
           be
           needfull
           for
           the
           Ministers
           to
           answerefully
           ,
           which
           had
           bene
           a
           thing
           tedious
           and
           irksome
           .
           For
           this
           cause
           ,
           and
           others
           by
           him
           declared
           :
           he
           ordained
           ,
           they
           should
           thenceforth
           speake
           by
           writing
           .
           And
           that
           the
           Ministers
           should
           carry
           with
           them
           the
           Copie
           which
           was
           giuen
           them
           ,
           to
           make
           answere
           therevnto
           :
           and
           to
           send
           it
           vnto
           him
           ,
           signed
           by
           them
           ,
           and
           two
           Notaries
           .
           Of
           which
           he
           would
           cause
           a
           Copie
           to
           be
           written
           by
           his
           Secretary
           ,
           to
           giue
           it
           to
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           reseruing
           the
           Originall
           to
           himselfe
           .
           And
           in
           like
           sort
           would
           he
           keepe
           for
           the
           Ministers
           the
           Copie
           of
           that
           which
           the
           Doctors
           should
           send
           him
           .
           Wherevnto
           both
           parts
           submitting
           themselues
           ,
           they
           disputed
           afterwards
           by
           writing
           as
           followeth
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             to
             the
             Obiections
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             giuen
             on
             Tuesday
             the
             16.
             of
             Iuly
             ,
             1566.
             
          
           
             THe
             Ministers
             deny
             ,
             that
             the
             consequence
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             (
             to
             wit
             :
             God
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             .
             Therfore
             ●e
             is
             not
             omnipotent
             )
             is
             necessary
             :
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             measured
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             things
             only
             ,
             which
             be
             agreeable
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             derogate
             ,
             either
             to
             his
             nature
             ,
             or
             to
             his
             wisdome
             ,
             or
             to
             his
             truth
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             order
             he
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Vnto
             which
             ,
             that
             directly
             repugneth
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             set
             forth
             :
             that
             one selfe
             same
             body
             ,
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             may
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             For
             it
             would
             follow
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             should
             be
             a
             body
             ,
             without
             being
             limitted
             :
             And
             by
             consequence
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             be
             ,
             and
             not
             be
             ,
             altogither
             .
             For
             the
             measures
             (
             as
             to
             be
             long
             ,
             large
             ,
             thicke
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             bounded
             &
             limitted
             with
             certaine
             bounds
             )
             are
             so
             essentiall
             to
             a
             body
             ,
             that
             without
             that
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             more
             a
             body
             .
             And
             so
             farre
             of
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             in
             so
             saying
             ,
             do
             
             diminish
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             :
             that
             contrariwise
             they
             establish
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             will
             not
             attribute
             to
             him
             any
             mutabilitie
             ,
             and
             chaunge
             in
             his
             counsaile
             :
             nor
             any
             contradiction
             in
             his
             will
             ,
             for
             feare
             to
             make
             him
             lye
             :
             which
             by
             the
             scripture
             is
             impossible
             to
             him
             .
          
           
             And
             where
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             frō
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             not
             denied
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             ,
             The
             Ministers
             haue
             heretofore
             shewed
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             :
             and
             in
             what
             case
             it
             may
             happen
             .
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             booke
             written
             against
             Praxeas
             ,
             speaking
             of
             this
             matter
             ,
             saith
             as
             followeth
             :
             Surely
             nothing
             is
             hard
             vnto
             God.
             But
             if
             without
             iudgemēt
             we
             wil
             vse
             this
             sentence
             ,
             and
             interpret
             it
             according
             to
             our
             foolish
             fantasie
             ,
             we
             may
             faine
             all
             things
             to
             be
             of
             God
             :
             and
             say
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             done
             them
             :
             because
             he
             can
             do
             them
             .
             Now
             must
             it
             not
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             because
             he
             can
             do
             all
             things
             ,
             that
             therfore
             he
             hath
             done
             ,
             what
             he
             hath
             not
             done
             :
             but
             enquired
             whether
             he
             hath
             done
             it
             ?
             And
             finally
             concludeth
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             his
             wil
             :
             and
             his
             inhabilitie
             ,
             likewise
             his
             vnwillingnesse
             .
             The
             Doctors
             then
             ,
             to
             shew
             that
             he
             can
             do
             it
             ,
             should
             declare
             that
             God
             hath
             willed
             to
             make
             a
             body
             ,
             which
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             hath
             bin
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             And
             a
             maruellous
             thing
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             impute
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             derogate
             from
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             ,
             when
             as
             they
             do
             except
             frō
             the
             same
             ,
             what
             is
             contrary
             to
             his
             wil
             :
             seeing
             they
             themselues
             do
             confesse
             it
             ,
             and
             except
             the
             same
             things
             .
             And
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             difference
             between
             thē
             &
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             maketh
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             at
             one selfe
             instāt
             :
             because
             he
             can
             do
             it
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             he
             doth
             it
             not
             ,
             and
             cannot
             do
             it
             :
             because
             he
             wil
             not
             do
             it
             .
             For
             as
             much
             (
             as
             is
             said
             according
             to
             Tertullian
             )
             the
             power
             of
             god
             is
             his
             wil.
             
          
           
             Touching
             the
             reason
             that
             the
             Doctors
             do
             alledge
             in
             Phisosophie
             ,
             to
             proue
             ,
             that
             a
             bodie
             ,
             for
             being
             a
             bodie
             ,
             doth
             not
             therfore
             leaue
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             they
             suppose
             a
             falshood
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             that
             quantitie
             is
             accidentall
             ,
             and
             not
             essentiall
             to
             a
             body
             .
             For
             that
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             is
             measured
             ,
             bounded
             and
             circumscript
             )
             is
             in
             such
             sort
             of
             it
             essence
             ,
             that
             without
             that
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             more
             a
             bodie
             .
             As
             S.
             Augustine
             him
             
             selfe
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             glorified
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             saith
             :
             That
             if
             space
             be
             taken
             away
             from
             a
             body
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             more
             place
             where
             it
             might
             be
             :
             and
             by
             consequence
             ,
             being
             no
             part
             ,
             is
             no
             more
             at
             all
             .
             The
             reaso
             of
             Philosophie
             they
             propose
             ,
             touching
             the
             first
             heauen
             ;
             as
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             any
             place
             :
             The
             Ministers
             do
             denie
             it
             :
             for
             to
             speake
             according
             to
             the
             language
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             confessed
             that
             there
             is
             place
             e●en
             
             aboue
             the
             heauens
             .
             As
             Iesus
             Christ
             said
             vnto
             his
             Disciples
             ;
             I
             go
             to
             prepare
             a
             place
             for
             you
             .
             And
             in
             the
             same
             place
             ;
             In
             my
             Fathers
             house
             there
             are
             many
             mansions
             .
             And
             else
             where
             :
             
             Where
             I
             am
             (
             taking
             the
             present
             time
             for
             the
             future
             )
             there
             shal
             my
             seruants
             be
             In
             the
             which
             sentence
             must
             be
             obserued
             ,
             that
             there
             be
             aduerbes
             of
             place
             .
             And
             S.
             Augustine
             writing
             to
             Dardanus
             ,
             expresly
             saith
             :
             That
             it
             behoueth
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             be
             in
             some
             place
             in
             heauē
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             a
             true
             body
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             in
             numbring
             of
             the
             errors
             sometimes
             cōdemned
             by
             the
             facultie
             of
             Paris
             ,
             it
             is
             expresly
             said
             :
             That
             the
             heauen
             by
             them
             called
             Empyreum
             ,
             is
             the
             place
             of
             Angels
             ,
             of
             blessed
             spirits
             ,
             and
             glorified
             humane
             bodies
             .
             Where
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             doctrine
             (
             which
             the
             Ministers
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             cannot
             be
             without
             place
             ,
             nor
             in
             many
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             )
             may
             be
             inferred
             ,
             that
             they
             blaspheme
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             The
             Ministers
             contrariwise
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             blaspheme
             his
             Maiestie
             ,
             and
             diminish
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             attributing
             to
             the
             creature
             that
             which
             appertaineth
             to
             him
             alone
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             to
             be
             vncircumscript
             .
             As
             it
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             Didimus
             saith
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             where
             he
             proueth
             ,
             that
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             is
             God
             ,
             &
             not
             a
             creature
             ,
             because
             he
             is
             incircumscript
             :
             and
             that
             al
             creatures
             necessarily
             be
             circumscript
             ,
             and
             limited
             .
             As
             much
             thereof
             also
             say
             S.
             Basil
             ,
             and
             Vigilius
             ,
             and
             the
             Mr.
             of
             the
             sentences
             in
             his
             first
             booke
             .
             Where
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             the
             Angels
             and
             blessed
             spirits
             be
             circumscript
             ,
             although
             they
             be
             not
             corporall
             .
             This
             reason
             is
             against
             themselues
             ,
             and
             proper
             to
             proue
             what
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             here
             aboue
             maintained
             of
             bodies
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             but
             that
             they
             be
             circumscript
             in
             some
             place
             .
             For
             by
             an
             argument
             frō
             the
             lesse
             to
             the
             more
             :
             If
             the
             Angels
             which
             want
             dimension
             and
             measure
             ,
             (
             by
             their
             own
             confession
             )
             in
             as
             much
             
             as
             they
             be
             creatures
             ,
             be
             necessarily
             circumscript
             :
             by
             a
             more
             strong
             reason
             ,
             the
             bodies
             of
             men
             ,
             which
             be
             creatures
             ,
             and
             measured
             ,
             shall
             be
             so
             likewise
             .
          
           
             And
             where
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             haue
             not
             said
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             could
             not
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             That
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             saying
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             in
             his
             30.
             tract
             vpon
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             which
             is
             recited
             
               De
               consec
               :
               distinct
               ▪
            
             2.
             
             
               C.
               Prima
               quidē
            
             .
             Where
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             he
             saith
             :
             namely
             ;
             It
             behooueth
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             wherin
             he
             rose
             again
             ,
             be
             in
             one
             place
             :
             teaching
             therby
             ,
             that
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             time
             ,
             it
             cannot
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             reason
             they
             adde
             ,
             taken
             frō
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             to
             proue
             their
             assertiō
             :
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             fathers
             neuer
             vnderstood
             ,
             nor
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             in
             one selfe
             same
             sort
             &
             maner
             :
             nor
             do
             they
             teach
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             otherwise
             then
             Sacramentally
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
          
           
             And
             wheras
             in
             their
             resolutiō
             they
             pretend
             to
             proue
             ,
             that
             the
             Angels
             may
             at
             one self
             instant
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             when
             the
             Ministers
             shall
             haue
             vnderstood
             their
             reasons
             ,
             then
             they
             wil
             answere
             therevnto
             .
             That
             which
             they
             say
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             it
             being
             dispoiled
             of
             it
             dimensions
             ,
             ceaseth
             not
             to
             be
             a
             body
             notwithstanding
             :
             is
             a
             very
             absurd
             thing
             .
             For
             did
             it
             happen
             ,
             that
             a
             corporal
             substance
             were
             wholly
             dispoiled
             of
             it
             dimensions
             ,
             it
             should
             no
             more
             be
             a
             body
             ,
             but
             an
             incorporeall
             substance
             :
             &
             of
             like
             nature
             as
             the
             Angels
             &
             spirits
             .
             And
             although
             God
             by
             his
             power
             can
             seperate
             the
             dimensiōs
             of
             a
             substance
             ,
             without
             corrupting
             it
             :
             yet
             can
             it
             not
             be
             ,
             that
             they
             be
             seperated
             frō
             a
             body
             ,
             without
             the
             corruptiō
             of
             the
             same
             .
             Because
             the
             quantitie
             &
             dimensions
             are
             accidents
             of
             the
             substance
             ,
             but
             not
             of
             the
             body
             :
             which
             cannot
             subsist
             without
             them
             ,
             in
             as
             much
             as
             they
             be
             of
             it
             proper
             essence
             .
          
           
             Whereas
             the
             Doctors
             say
             afterwards
             in
             their
             obiection
             ,
             that
             the
             waight
             in
             a
             body
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             essentiall
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             deny
             it
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             that
             were
             it
             of
             the
             essence
             of
             a
             bodie
             ,
             and
             the
             same
             wanting
             ,
             the
             bodie
             should
             cease
             to
             bee
             :
             Neuerthelesse
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             the
             glorified
             bodie
             
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             (
             wherevnto
             the
             bodies
             of
             all
             the
             elect
             shall
             be
             like
             after
             the
             resurrection
             )
             doth
             not
             leaue
             to
             be
             &
             subsist
             ,
             although
             it
             be
             now
             exempted
             from
             all
             waight
             .
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             their
             alledged
             very
             strong
             and
             mightie
             argument
             :
             That
             if
             two
             bodies
             may
             be
             in
             one selfe
             place
             togither
             ,
             one
             body
             ,
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             may
             be
             also
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             The
             Ministers
             not
             graunting
             the
             antecedent
             (
             vnder
             correction
             )
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             consequence
             is
             not
             good
             :
             and
             that
             the
             argument
             is
             very
             weake
             .
             Adding
             therto
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             nor
             prooued
             ,
             and
             neuer
             can
             prooue
             by
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             nor
             by
             any
             authoritie
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             nor
             by
             any
             sufficient
             reason
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             propose
             in
             their
             antecedent
             ,
             or
             the
             consequent
             which
             they
             inferre
             thereof
             to
             be
             true
             .
          
           
             Wheras
             the
             Doctors
             to
             proue
             that
             two
             bodies
             may
             be
             together
             in
             one selfe
             place
             ,
             alledge
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             entred
             into
             the
             house
             where
             his
             Disciples
             were
             ,
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             :
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answere
             :
             that
             it
             is
             not
             written
             ,
             that
             he
             entred
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             but
             only
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             :
             which
             the
             auncient
             Interpreter
             hath
             well
             giuen
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             expounding
             in
             one
             of
             the
             places
             of
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             (
             where
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             that
             aboue
             said
             )
             
               Cuum
               fores
               essent
               clausae
            
             .
             Then
             when
             the
             doores
             were
             shut
             ,
             Iesus
             came
             ,
             &c.
             
             Neuertheles
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             they
             verily
             belieue
             ,
             and
             are
             assured
             ,
             of
             that
             which
             the
             scripture
             doth
             clearly
             say
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             ,
             he
             came
             and
             stood
             in
             the
             midst
             of
             his
             Disciples
             .
             But
             they
             cannot
             certainly
             define
             ,
             nor
             determine
             ,
             which
             way
             he
             entered
             :
             whether
             it
             were
             through
             the
             walles
             ,
             or
             doores
             of
             wood
             ;
             which
             Hillary
             himselfe
             maketh
             doubt
             of
             in
             that
             place
             of
             his
             writings
             ,
             alledged
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
             Howsoeuer
             it
             be
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             say
             :
             that
             in
             entering
             ,
             he
             miraculously
             made
             way
             .
             And
             that
             a
             body
             (
             be
             it
             the
             wood
             or
             wall
             )
             did
             yeeld
             and
             giue
             place
             to
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             entering
             :
             or
             that
             an
             opening
             was
             made
             vnto
             him
             by
             the
             Angell
             ,
             which
             opened
             and
             afterward
             shut
             againe
             the
             doores
             in
             a
             moment
             ;
             as
             before
             hath
             b●ne
             said
             .
             And
             that
             howsoeuer
             it
             was
             done
             ,
             two
             bodies
             were
             neuer
             found
             in
             one selfe
             same
             place
             together
             .
          
           
           
             Touching
             that
             they
             alledge
             out
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             in
             his
             booke
             
               de
               agone
               Christiano
            
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             entered
             through
             the
             doores
             :
             The
             Ministers
             deny
             not
             ,
             that
             he
             entred
             through
             the
             doores
             :
             but
             that
             two
             bodies
             onely
             were
             neuer
             in
             one selfe
             same
             place
             together
             .
             But
             if
             Iesus
             Christ
             entered
             through
             the
             doores
             ,
             that
             the
             doores
             at
             his
             entire
             gaue
             him
             place
             ,
             as
             is
             said
             .
          
           
             For
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             touching
             the
             Apostles
             suspition
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             a
             vaine
             vision
             ,
             it
             nought
             appertaineth
             to
             the
             present
             matter
             ;
             nor
             that
             also
             that
             they
             maruelled
             at
             the
             maner
             of
             his
             entry
             ,
             which
             was
             miraculous
             :
             as
             they
             euer
             confessed
             .
          
           
             And
             touching
             that
             which
             they
             adde
             afterwards
             ,
             in
             the
             opinion
             held
             by
             the
             olde
             heretiques
             ,
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             a
             true
             bodie
             :
             because
             it
             did
             things
             aboue
             nature
             .
             The
             Ministers
             doo
             shewe
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             litle
             think
             what
             occasion
             and
             foundation
             of
             their
             errour
             ,
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             had
             presented
             vnto
             them
             ,
             had
             they
             confessed
             what
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             set
             foorth
             ,
             and
             doo
             obstinately
             defend
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             that
             it
             doth
             things
             ,
             not
             only
             aboue
             nature
             ,
             but
             also
             contrary
             to
             nature
             :
             yea
             euen
             contrary
             to
             the
             will
             and
             ordinance
             of
             God.
             And
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             such
             an
             opinion
             should
             be
             a
             great
             proofe
             for
             Marcion
             and
             other
             heretiques
             ,
             which
             haue
             denied
             the
             true
             humanitie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             if
             they
             should
             confesse
             by
             the
             Doctors
             example
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             cōtrary
             to
             the
             truth
             ,
             nature
             ,
             and
             essence
             of
             a
             body
             )
             may
             be
             ,
             at
             one
             self-same
             time
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             or
             in
             one selfe
             same
             place
             with
             an
             other
             body
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             they
             alledge
             of
             
               Iustin
               Martir
            
             :
             The
             Ministers
             do
             answer
             ,
             that
             the
             booke
             by
             them
             alledged
             ,
             is
             falsly
             attributed
             to
             him
             .
             For
             it
             there
             maketh
             mention
             of
             Origen
             (
             to
             wit
             in
             the
             the
             82.
             question
             )
             althogh
             that
             Origen
             was
             more
             then
             100.
             yeares
             after
             him
             .
             And
             touching
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             whereof
             there
             is
             mentiō
             made
             in
             the
             place
             by
             them
             produced
             ,
             They
             answer
             ,
             that
             the
             Euangelist
             reciteth
             clearly
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             a
             great
             Earthquake
             ,
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             rose
             again
             ;
             and
             that
             the
             Angel
             did
             rowle
             away
             the
             stone
             ,
             which
             closed
             
             the
             Sepulchre
             .
             Whervnto
             agreeth
             the
             saying
             of
             Leo
             ,
             the
             first
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             writing
             to
             the
             Bishops
             of
             Palestine
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             :
             That
             Iesus
             Christ
             rose
             againe
             ,
             the
             stone
             which
             couered
             the
             Sepulchre
             being
             rowled
             away
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             place
             alledged
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             writings
             of
             S.
             Hillary
             ;
             one
             word
             there
             is
             ,
             shall
             serue
             them
             for
             an
             answer
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             that
             this
             holy
             Doctor
             expresly
             saith
             :
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             to
             whō
             all
             things
             are
             open
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             expounded
             the
             said
             sentence
             )
             or
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             expound
             it
             ,
             that
             he
             maketh
             way
             euery
             where
             ,
             by
             his
             diuine
             power
             )
             entred
             ,
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             .
             For
             thereby
             also
             he
             giueth
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             house
             where
             his
             Disciples
             were
             ,
             he
             made
             himselfe
             way
             &
             opening
             .
             And
             by
             his
             writing
             can
             nought
             else
             be
             cōcluded
             ,
             but
             that
             his
             entry
             was
             myraculous
             .
             Concerning
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             of
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             vpon
             S.
             Luke
             :
             No
             more
             can
             they
             inferre
             thereof
             ,
             then
             S.
             Hillary
             hath
             said
             .
             And
             they
             cannot
             conclude
             ,
             neither
             of
             the
             one
             nor
             the
             other
             ,
             but
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             entered
             within
             the
             house
             ,
             by
             a
             diuine
             and
             miraculous
             power
             .
          
           
             For
             that
             which
             they
             alledge
             of
             S.
             
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             ,
             touching
             the
             virgin
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             came
             forth
             of
             her
             wombe
             ,
             her
             virginitie
             &
             integritie
             no
             way
             thereby
             corrupted
             nor
             defiled
             :
             yea
             &
             that
             she
             did
             remain
             a
             virgin
             before
             &
             after
             her
             child
             birth
             :
             The
             Ministers
             do
             beleeue
             ,
             confesse
             ,
             and
             teach
             the
             same
             .
             And
             yeeld
             a
             reason
             thereof
             by
             the
             scripture
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             she
             neuer
             had
             knowne
             man.
             But
             if
             thence
             they
             will
             infer
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             birth
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             
               Nula
               intercesserit
               apertio
               vteri
            
             :
             The
             wombe
             was
             not
             opened
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             say
             :
             that
             such
             a
             conclusiō
             ▪
             should
             be
             against
             the
             expresse
             text
             of
             the
             scripture
             ;
             and
             of
             that
             said
             in
             S.
             Luke
             to
             that
             purpose
             :
             
               Omne
               masculinum
               ad
               aperiens
               vuluam
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Euery
             male
             that
             first
             openeth
             the
             wombe
             ,
             &c.
             
             Ioyned
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             many
             auncient
             authors
             haue
             written
             &
             approued
             it
             .
             as
             Origen
             vpō
             S.
             
               Luke
               :
               Tertullian
               de
               carne
               Christi
               :
            
             S.
             Ierom
             in
             his
             first
             
               Tome
               ,
               Ad
               Eustochiū
            
             .
             Where
             in
             expresse
             termes
             he
             saith
             :
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             came
             bloody
             forth
             of
             the
             virgins
             belly
             .
             S.
             Ambrose
             vpon
             S.
             Luke
             .
             Wherby
             it
             may
             appeare
             ,
             that
             the
             virgin
             was
             truly
             a
             virgin
             ,
             and
             truly
             a
             mother
             .
          
           
           
             To
             the
             authoritie
             which
             they
             bring
             of
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             The
             Ministers
             alledge
             no
             other
             thing
             for
             answere
             ,
             then
             that
             which
             himselfe
             hath
             said
             .
             To
             wit
             :
             That
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             came
             where
             his
             Disciples
             were
             ,
             the
             creature
             obeyed
             his
             Creator
             .
          
           
             What
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             of
             S.
             Cyril
             ,
             serueth
             nothing
             to
             the
             confirmation
             of
             their
             purpose
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             heresie
             in
             Iouinian
             ,
             iustly
             reproued
             by
             Saint
             Augustine
             :
             who
             to
             auoyd
             the
             error
             of
             the
             Manichees
             ,
             fel
             into
             an
             other
             :
             namely
             ,
             that
             the
             virgin
             in
             her
             child-birth
             remained
             not
             a
             virgin
             .
             The
             Ministers
             say
             :
             that
             it
             was
             not
             necessary
             that
             Iouinian
             (
             to
             auoid
             the
             error
             of
             the
             Manichees
             )
             should
             cal
             in
             doubt
             the
             virginitie
             of
             Mary
             :
             forasmuch
             as
             the
             foundiō
             of
             the
             same
             virginitie
             ,
             is
             vpon
             this
             ,
             that
             she
             was
             neuer
             knowne
             of
             man.
             
          
           
             Touching
             the
             conclusion
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             would
             draw
             from
             the
             authorities
             aboue
             said
             ,
             and
             apply
             them
             to
             their
             purpose
             (
             which
             was
             )
             that
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             self-same
             instāt
             ,
             or
             that
             two
             bodies
             may
             be
             in
             one
             self-same
             place
             togither
             :
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             altogither
             impertinēt
             .
             And
             that
             neither
             by
             the
             places
             they
             alledged
             ,
             nor
             any
             others
             that
             they
             can
             gather
             ,
             can
             they
             any
             way
             inferre
             the
             same
             .
             Adding
             further
             ,
             that
             it
             shall
             neuer
             be
             found
             in
             any
             good
             Author
             .
             By
             meanes
             wherof
             ,
             they
             cōclude
             against
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             their
             foundatiō
             is
             nothing
             .
             And
             that
             they
             wil
             falsly
             authorise
             their
             error
             by
             the
             name
             &
             title
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             for
             fault
             of
             good
             vnderstanding
             ,
             and
             taking
             the
             terme
             [
             piercing
             ]
             which
             some
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             haue
             vsed
             ;
             and
             signifieth
             not
             a
             a
             confusion
             ,
             and
             mingling
             togither
             of
             diuers
             bodies
             ,
             occupying
             one selfe
             same
             place
             :
             but
             only
             the
             yeelding
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             made
             ,
             to
             giue
             the
             other
             passage
             .
             As
             we
             see
             ,
             and
             haue
             experience
             ,
             that
             the
             aire
             giueth
             place
             to
             a
             man
             that
             walketh
             ,
             and
             birds
             that
             flye
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             for
             conclusion
             say
             :
             that
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             maintaine
             ,
             and
             propose
             by
             their
             answere
             ,
             doth
             not
             derogate
             ,
             nor
             any
             way
             diminish
             the
             greatnes
             ,
             glory
             ,
             and
             power
             of
             God
             :
             but
             doth
             establish
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             much
             more
             aduance
             it
             ,
             then
             such
             prodigious
             absurdities
             ,
             (
             as
             those
             are
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             set
             foorth
             ,
             and
             will
             perswade
             :
             without
             any
             reason
             or
             probable
             meanes
             )
             woulde
             doo
             .
             For
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             all
             whatsoeuer
             happened
             ,
             both
             
             in
             the
             entry
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             into
             the
             house
             where
             his
             disciples
             were
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             going
             out
             as
             wel
             of
             the
             virgins
             wombe
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             there
             was
             the
             myraculous
             &
             diuine
             power
             of
             God.
             But
             they
             denie
             ,
             that
             thereby
             nothing
             happened
             ,
             which
             was
             impossible
             ,
             and
             contained
             any
             contradiction
             .
          
           
             What
             they
             alledge
             of
             
               Caluin
               &
               Beza
            
             are
             friuolous
             things
             :
             and
             proposed
             more
             to
             slaunder
             and
             contradict
             ,
             then
             to
             search
             out
             and
             make
             manifest
             the
             truth
             .
          
           
             Where
             as
             they
             say
             that
             all
             antiquitie
             ,
             with
             one
             consent
             do
             vnderstand
             by
             the
             terme
             
               Aphantos
               ap'aut●n
            
             ;
             That
             Iesus
             Christ
             made
             himselfe
             invisible
             to
             his
             Disciples
             ,
             abiding
             in
             their
             presence
             .
             The
             Ministers
             for
             their
             answer
             ,
             are
             content
             to
             alledge
             vnto
             them
             ,
             one
             onely
             authoritie
             of
             S.
             Ambrose
             vpon
             S.
             Luke
             :
             who
             expounding
             these
             words
             ,
             saith
             :
             That
             hee
             retired
             from
             them
             .
             And
             an
             other
             of
             
               Nicholas
               de
               Lyra
            
             ,
             which
             saith
             vpon
             this
             place
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             done
             by
             the
             agilitie
             of
             his
             glorious
             body
             ,
             which
             can
             suddenly
             vanish
             away
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             they
             alledge
             of
             the
             piercing
             the
             heauens
             ,
             when
             Iesus
             Christ
             ascended
             thither
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             answer
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             very
             like
             they
             claue
             a
             sunder
             ,
             and
             were
             opened
             ;
             a
             when
             at
             the
             Baptisme
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Doue
             descended
             vpon
             him
             :
             And
             when
             as
             also
             S.
             Stephen
             was
             stoned
             .
          
           
             Touching
             that
             which
             they
             reproue
             in
             the
             first
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             in
             the
             12
             ▪
             chap.
             of
             the
             Acts
             ,
             there
             is
             made
             no
             mention
             of
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             prison
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             admonish
             them
             to
             read
             diligently
             the
             text
             of
             the
             said
             place
             .
             And
             there
             they
             shal
             find
             ,
             that
             whē
             they
             had
             passed
             the
             first
             &
             2.
             watch
             ,
             the
             vtter
             gate
             of
             the
             prisō
             (
             which
             was
             of
             Irō
             )
             did
             opē
             of
             it
             own
             accord
             ,
             to
             make
             the
             Angel
             &
             Peter
             passage
             .
          
           
             Whereas
             the
             Doctors
             reply
             vpon
             the
             answer
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             the
             argument
             of
             the
             Camell
             formerly
             proposed
             by
             them
             in
             their
             first
             answer
             :
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             their
             said
             answer
             ,
             against
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             But
             that
             they
             deceiue
             themselues
             :
             referring
             to
             the
             Camell
             ,
             whereof
             hee
             had
             formerly
             made
             mention
             :
             that
             which
             ought
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             sauing
             and
             conuersion
             of
             the
             rich
             man
             only
             .
             For
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             saying
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             
             is
             impossible
             to
             men
             ,
             is
             possible
             with
             God
             :
             nought
             else
             pretendeth
             ,
             but
             to
             answere
             the
             question
             which
             the
             Disciples
             had
             propounded
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             who
             could
             be
             saued
             .
             Answering
             wherevnto
             ,
             hee
             said
             :
             that
             it
             was
             indeed
             impossible
             to
             men
             :
             who
             of
             themselues
             are
             inclined
             to
             trust
             in
             their
             riches
             .
             But
             to
             God
             it
             was
             possible
             ,
             which
             could
             pull
             backe
             or
             withdraw
             their
             hearts
             from
             that
             vaine
             confidence
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             argument
             which
             they
             will
             build
             vpon
             the
             presence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             (
             whereof
             they
             wil
             inferre
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             in
             diuers
             places
             )
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             the
             antecedent
             ,
             &
             denie
             the
             consequence
             .
             For
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             by
             faith
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             spiritually
             present
             to
             all
             the
             faithfull
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             Whence
             neuerthelesse
             must
             not
             be
             inferred
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             there
             locally
             ,
             definitiuely
             ,
             no●
             corporally
             .
             And
             wheras
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             imaginable
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             avow
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             these
             which
             are
             not
             taught
             and
             enlightned
             by
             the
             spirit
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             haue
             no
             other
             imagination
             ,
             then
             that
             which
             their
             natural
             facultie
             doth
             furnish
             them
             withall
             .
             But
             they
             that
             beeing
             illuminate
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             haue
             a
             true
             and
             liuely
             faith
             in
             their
             hearts
             :
             it
             is
             no
             more
             impossible
             to
             represent
             vnto
             them
             Iesus
             Christ
             crucified
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             then
             it
             was
             to
             the
             Galathians
             to
             represent
             and
             propose
             him
             vnto
             them
             ,
             as
             present
             and
             visible
             ,
             at
             the
             preaching
             of
             S.
             Paul
             :
             and
             to
             those
             likewise
             of
             whom
             Saint
             Ciprian
             maketh
             mention
             in
             his
             Sermon
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             That
             in
             celebrating
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             embrace
             the
             Crosse
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             sucke
             his
             bloud
             ,
             and
             fasten
             their
             tongues
             within
             his
             wounds
             .
             All
             which
             things
             are
             done
             by
             a
             liuely
             contemplation
             ,
             and
             apprehension
             of
             faith
             :
             which
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             the
             ground
             of
             things
             hoped
             for
             ,
             and
             an
             euidence
             of
             those
             things
             which
             are
             not
             seene
             :
             as
             S.
             Paul
             doth
             define
             it
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             thing
             conioyned
             with
             the
             signes
             and
             Sacraments
             :
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             ,
             that
             the
             outward
             signes
             are
             neuer
             without
             their
             effect
             toward
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             who
             cannot
             be
             partakers
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             distributed
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             participate
             therwithall
             ,
             of
             the
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             crucified
             for
             their
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             
             of
             his
             bloud
             shead
             to
             ratifie
             the
             new
             couenant
             which
             God
             made
             with
             his
             people
             .
             But
             if
             the
             Doctors
             will
             inferre
             thereof
             a
             corporall
             presence
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             will
             denie
             it
             .
             And
             their
             reason
             is
             ,
             because
             such
             a
             presence
             was
             not
             required
             among
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             :
             who
             left
             not
             for
             all
             that
             ,
             to
             eate
             one
             selfe-same
             spirituall
             foode
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             faithfull
             at
             this
             day
             :
             as
             it
             shal
             be
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             more
             amply
             declared
             when
             the
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             shall
             please
             to
             command
             conference
             of
             this
             matter
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             (
             slaundering
             the
             Ministers
             )
             do
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             attribute
             more
             to
             themselues
             ,
             and
             to
             humane
             power
             ,
             then
             they
             do
             attribute
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             when
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             by
             faith
             they
             make
             present
             ,
             the
             things
             which
             be
             absent
             ;
             seeing
             that
             God
             (
             according
             to
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Ministers
             )
             cannot
             make
             one
             selfe-same
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             .
             The
             Ministers
             doo
             answere
             ,
             that
             such
             antitheses
             be
             foolish
             ,
             and
             vnfit
             for
             the
             purpose
             :
             and
             that
             there
             is
             much
             more
             great
             apparance
             that
             the
             Doctors
             do
             presume
             more
             of
             their
             power
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             other
             Priests
             of
             the
             Romane
             Church
             ,
             then
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             for
             God
             created
             not
             by
             his
             word
             ,
             but
             the
             heauens
             ,
             the
             earth
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             creatures
             therein
             contained
             .
             And
             they
             in
             their
             consecration
             ,
             doo
             attribute
             vnto
             themselues
             ,
             the
             power
             to
             create
             their
             Creator
             :
             as
             is
             contained
             in
             their
             breuiarie
             ,
             where
             the
             Priest
             saith
             :
             
               Qui
               creauit
               me
               ,
               creatur
               mediante
               me
               .
            
             He
             that
             created
             me
             ,
             is
             created
             my
             meanes
             of
             mee
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             much
             maruell
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             call
             the
             vertue
             of
             faith
             ,
             a
             humane
             power
             ,
             seeing
             the
             great
             and
             admirable
             effects
             thereof
             proposed
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             in
             so
             many
             examples
             of
             the
             scripture
             ;
             chiefly
             in
             the
             eleuenth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             :
             where
             Saint
             Paul
             saith
             :
             That
             the
             Saints
             ,
             by
             faith
             ,
             haue
             subdued
             kingdomes
             ,
             &c.
             
             All
             which
             things
             surmount
             not
             onely
             the
             vertue
             ,
             but
             also
             the
             capacitie
             of
             humane
             vnderstanding
             .
          
           
             In
             that
             immediately
             following
             this
             article
             ,
             there
             is
             but
             repetitions
             in
             the
             reply
             of
             the
             Doctors
             :
             and
             many
             vnprofitable
             and
             superfluous
             wordes
             :
             and
             little
             or
             nothing
             
             of
             that
             ,
             should
             be
             necessary
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             And
             as
             they
             haue
             answered
             them
             particularly
             to
             euery
             point
             which
             they
             repeate
             ,
             they
             send
             them
             now
             backe
             to
             the
             former
             answeres
             :
             and
             pray
             them
             henceforth
             not
             to
             serue
             them
             twise
             with
             one
             messe
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Aultar
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             :
             The
             Ministers
             neither
             receiue
             ,
             nor
             any
             way
             approue
             ,
             that
             their
             Masse
             (
             which
             they
             pretend
             to
             bee
             a
             Sacrament
             )
             is
             a
             Sacrament
             :
             and
             much
             lesse
             a
             sacrifice
             ,
             by
             which
             remission
             of
             finnes
             may
             bee
             any
             way
             obtained
             .
             Yea
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             both
             their
             Priest
             and
             pretended
             sacrifice
             ,
             with
             all
             the
             things
             thereof
             depending
             ,
             are
             blasphemies
             ,
             and
             impieties
             :
             by
             which
             GOD
             is
             dishonoured
             ,
             all
             the
             benefite
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             buried
             ,
             and
             nought
             esteemed
             :
             and
             the
             Church
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             seduced
             and
             abused
             ;
             as
             by
             the
             pursuite
             of
             the
             Conference
             shall
             plainely
             appeare
             .
             And
             also
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             no
             way
             corrupt
             either
             the
             sence
             ,
             or
             the
             words
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             vsed
             in
             the
             institution
             of
             his
             holy
             Supper
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Thursday
                 the
                 18.
                 of
                 Iuly
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aboue
                 said
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             reply
             or
             obiection
             of
             the
             Doctors
             against
             the
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             touching
             the
             Article
             of
             the
             Omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             on
             Satterday
             the
             20.
             of
             Iuly
             .
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             cosequence
             ,
             God
             cannot
             by
             his
             omnipotencie
             ,
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             he
             is
             not
             therefore
             omnipotent
             :
             is
             so
             good
             and
             strong
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             (
             without
             wrapping
             ,
             and
             more
             and
             more
             drowning
             themselues
             in
             execrable
             blasphemies
             ,
             to
             the
             great
             griefe
             and
             horror
             of
             the
             Doctors
             )
             can
             no
             way
             denie
             the
             same
             :
             And
             besides
             
             the
             two
             blasphemies
             maintained
             by
             the
             Ministers
             in
             their
             former
             answers
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             impossible
             for
             God
             to
             make
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             two
             places
             :
             and
             that
             it
             was
             impossible
             for
             him
             to
             will
             the
             same
             )
             in
             the
             first
             article
             of
             theyr
             last
             answere
             ,
             they
             adde
             foure
             or
             fiue
             other
             blasphemies
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             doo
             flow
             yet
             many
             others
             :
             besides
             the
             absurdities
             ,
             falshoods
             ,
             and
             impostures
             they
             vse
             to
             the
             said
             Doctors
             .
             And
             first
             they
             set
             forth
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             do
             a
             thing
             which
             derogateth
             the
             order
             which
             he
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             bee
             to
             establish
             mutabilitie
             ,
             and
             change
             in
             the
             Councell
             of
             God
             ,
             did
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             hee
             can
             do
             any
             thing
             against
             the
             said
             order
             which
             he
             hath
             put
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             thirdly
             ,
             that
             were
             it
             so
             ,
             there
             should
             bee
             contradiction
             in
             his
             will
             :
             whereby
             it
             would
             followe
             ,
             that
             hee
             should
             be
             a
             lyar
             .
             And
             for
             the
             fourth
             blasphemie
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             his
             will
             :
             and
             that
             his
             weaknesse
             ,
             is
             his
             vnwillingnesse
             .
             And
             for
             the
             fift
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             pretend
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             willed
             to
             make
             a
             body
             ,
             which
             at
             one selfe
             instant
             hath
             beene
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             before
             they
             beleeue
             that
             God
             could
             doo
             it
             :
             otherwise
             they
             intend
             to
             inferre
             that
             hee
             had
             not
             power
             ,
             and
             could
             not
             do
             it
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Ministers
             will
             nought
             acknowledge
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             so
             much
             thereof
             ,
             as
             hee
             hath
             shewed
             by
             effect
             .
             And
             to
             that
             purpose
             they
             alledge
             Tertullian
             .
             All
             which
             blasphemies
             be
             drawne
             out
             of
             the
             proper
             words
             of
             the
             Ministers
             first
             article
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             first
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             make
             a
             thing
             which
             derogateth
             the
             order
             he
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             :
             it
             is
             very
             apparant
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemie
             by
             the
             holy
             scripture
             :
             which
             in
             infinite
             places
             maketh
             mention
             of
             the
             workes
             of
             God
             aboue
             nature
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             call
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             in
             proper
             termes
             teacheth
             that
             God
             can
             do
             infinite
             things
             ,
             aboue
             the
             order
             by
             him
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Namely
             ,
             that
             Lots
             wife
             was
             turned
             into
             a
             pillar
             of
             salte
             :
             that
             a
             barren
             woman
             in
             her
             old
             age
             ,
             hauing
             an
             old
             husband
             ,
             brought
             forth
             a
             childe
             :
             that
             a
             withered
             Rodde
             budded
             :
             that
             an
             Asse
             spake
             :
             that
             the
             sonne
             stayed
             and
             went
             backe
             :
             and
             other
             more
             then
             innumerable
             
             examples
             ,
             contained
             in
             the
             old
             Testament
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             new
             ,
             that
             a
             virgin
             brought
             forth
             a
             child
             .
             That
             a
             body
             walked
             vpō
             the
             water
             ,
             &
             mounted
             into
             heauen
             .
             And
             generally
             all
             the
             myracles
             that
             Christ
             and
             his
             Apostles
             did
             aboue
             nature
             ,
             which
             is
             contrary
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             of
             this
             blasphemie
             ensueth
             an
             other
             :
             that
             God
             since
             hee
             established
             his
             order
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             hath
             not
             done
             ,
             nor
             could
             ,
             nor
             can
             do
             any
             myracle
             .
          
           
             Now
             to
             proue
             that
             the
             scripture
             teacheth
             clearely
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             do
             contrary
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             it
             is
             written
             in
             the
             50.
             of
             Esay
             :
             Is
             my
             hand
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             my
             power
             )
             so
             shortned
             ,
             that
             it
             cannot
             helpe
             ?
             or
             haue
             I
             no
             power
             to
             deliuer
             ?
             Behold
             at
             my
             rebuke
             I
             drie
             the
             sea
             :
             I
             make
             the
             flouds
             desart
             :
             Their
             fish
             rotteth
             for
             want
             of
             water
             ,
             and
             dyeth
             for
             thirst
             .
             I
             cloathe
             the
             heauens
             with
             darknesse
             ,
             &
             make
             a
             sacke
             their
             couering
             .
             And
             more
             expresly
             in
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             by
             S.
             Iohn
             :
             That
             God
             can
             of
             stones
             raise
             vp
             children
             to
             Abraham
             .
             Which
             place
             ,
             although
             it
             may
             be
             expounded
             allegorically
             :
             yet
             hath
             S.
             Iohn
             willed
             in
             the
             litterall
             sence
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             possible
             to
             God.
             And
             the
             diue
             did
             know
             and
             confesse
             ,
             that
             if
             Iesus
             Christ
             were
             the
             true
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             he
             could
             chaunge
             the
             stones
             into
             bread
             .
             Which
             is
             neuerthelesse
             contrary
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             it
             must
             be
             noted
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             more
             impossibilitie
             that
             the
             bread
             should
             bee
             chaunged
             into
             flesh
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             then
             a
             stone
             into
             bread
             .
             And
             therefore
             they
             which
             denie
             this
             last
             ,
             done
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             do
             shewe
             to
             beleeue
             lesse
             the
             almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             then
             the
             diuels
             .
          
           
             The
             confutation
             of
             the
             second
             blasphemie
             ,
             dependeth
             on
             the
             confutation
             of
             the
             first
             .
             For
             although
             God
             ,
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             hath
             done
             many
             myracles
             (
             as
             hath
             beene
             before
             recyted
             )
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             there
             is
             no
             mutabilitie
             ,
             nor
             chaunge
             in
             his
             counsaile
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             third
             blasphemie
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             if
             God
             did
             any
             thing
             contrary
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             
             there
             should
             be
             contradiction
             in
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             he
             should
             therfore
             be
             a
             lyar
             .
             The
             Doctors
             obiect
             ,
             that
             it
             would
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             will
             of
             God
             should
             be
             such
             ,
             neuer
             to
             will
             any
             thing
             contrary
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             that
             God
             should
             haue
             purposed
             and
             declared
             by
             his
             word
             ,
             his
             will
             to
             be
             such
             .
             For
             otherwise
             can
             they
             not
             know
             what
             the
             will
             of
             God
             shuld
             be
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             do
             not
             ,
             nor
             can
             they
             make
             it
             appeare
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             will
             of
             God
             to
             be
             such
             ,
             that
             he
             will
             not
             do
             any
             thing
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             it
             behoueth
             the
             said
             Ministers
             to
             teach
             of
             such
             a
             wil
             of
             God
             ,
             before
             they
             conclude
             that
             God
             made
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             (
             or
             other
             thing
             )
             against
             the
             order
             of
             nature
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             he
             should
             be
             a
             lyar
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             fourth
             blasphemie
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             that
             his
             weaknesse
             is
             his
             vnwillingnes
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             sence
             which
             the
             Ministers
             giue
             it
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             if
             God
             cannot
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             he
             will
             )
             it
             is
             an
             heresie
             of
             the
             heretikes
             called
             Monarchians
             ,
             in
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             .
             Against
             whom
             ,
             Tertulliā
             wrote
             ,
             in
             his
             booke
             
               Aduersus
               Praxeā
            
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             renewed
             by
             
               Peter
               Abaillardus
            
             .
             And
             since
             cōtinued
             by
             one
             called
             Wickliffe
             :
             who
             measured
             the
             power
             of
             God
             according
             to
             his
             will.
             Which
             is
             against
             the
             expresse
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             often
             declareth
             many
             things
             possible
             to
             God
             ,
             that
             notwithstanding
             he
             wil
             not
             do
             ,
             as
             by
             that
             which
             is
             written
             in
             the
             2.
             of
             Wisedome
             appeareth
             :
             where
             mention
             is
             made
             ,
             that
             God
             could
             send
             vpon
             the
             children
             of
             Israel
             ,
             many
             kinds
             of
             affliction
             ,
             to
             chasten
             thē
             ,
             but
             he
             would
             not
             do
             it
             ,
             hauing
             disposed
             all
             things
             ,
             by
             number
             ,
             waight
             &
             measure
             .
             And
             that
             he
             could
             destroy
             those
             which
             had
             offended
             ,
             but
             that
             he
             would
             not
             ,
             vsing
             mercie
             towards
             thē
             .
             And
             in
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             our
             Lord
             said
             to
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             Thinkest
             thou
             that
             I
             could
             not
             now
             pray
             my
             Father
             ,
             and
             he
             would
             send
             me
             more
             then
             12.
             
             Legions
             of
             Angels
             ?
             And
             notwithstanding
             he
             would
             not
             pray
             for
             that
             purpose
             .
             And
             his
             Father
             would
             not
             send
             them
             ,
             although
             he
             had
             power
             to
             do
             it
             to
             the
             person
             of
             his
             sonne
             .
             And
             Iesus
             Christ
             himself
             could
             haue
             letted
             his
             enemies
             frō
             taking
             away
             his
             life
             ,
             but
             he
             would
             not
             .
             And
             the
             Father
             (
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             )
             
             by
             his
             power
             could
             haue
             saued
             him
             frō
             corporall
             death
             .
             But
             neuerthelesse
             hee
             would
             not
             do
             the
             one
             ,
             nor
             the
             other
             .
             Notwithstanding
             the
             Ministers
             might
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             preordained
             :
             yet
             the
             scripture
             saith
             expresly
             ,
             that
             he
             could
             do
             it
             ,
             although
             it
             had
             bin
             preordained
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             authoritie
             of
             Tertullian
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             are
             glad
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             produce
             it
             ,
             because
             it
             maketh
             wholy
             for
             the
             truth
             ,
             against
             the
             blasphemy
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             haue
             omitted
             many
             words
             and
             sentences
             of
             the
             said
             Tertullian
             ,
             which
             serued
             to
             the
             confutation
             of
             their
             error
             :
             as
             by
             the
             text
             here
             inserted
             ,
             may
             be
             easily
             iudged
             .
             
               Nihil
               Deo
               difficile
               .
               Quis
               hoc
               nesciat
               ?
               Et
               impossibilia
               apud
               seculum
               ,
               possibilia
               apud
               deū
               .
               Quis
               ignorat
               ?
               Et
               stulta
               mūdi
               elegit
               Deus
               ,
               vt
               confundat
               sapientia
               .
               Ergo
               inquiūt
               haeretici
               (
               Monarchiani
               scilicet
               )
               difficile
               non
               fuit
               deo
               ipsū
               se
               &
               patrem
               &
               Filiū
               facere
               ,
               aduersus
               traditam
               formā
               rebus
               humanis
               .
               Nam
               &
               Aerilē
               parere
               contra
               naturam
               ,
               difficile
               deo
               non
               fuit
               ,
               sicut
               nec
               virginē
               planè
               nichil
               Deo
               difficile
               .
               Sed
               sitā
               abrupte
               in
               praesumptiombus
               nostris
               hac
               sententia
               vtamur
               ,
               quid
               vis
               de
               Deo
               confingere
               poterimus
               quasi
               fecerit
               ,
               quia
               facere
               potuerit
               .
               Non
               autem
               quia
               omnia
               potest
               facere
               ,
               idioque
               credendū
               est
               illū
               fecisse
               etiā
               quod
               non
               fecerit
               :
               sed
               an
               fecerit
               requirendū
               .
               Potuit
               (
               ita
               saluus
               sum
               )
               Deus
               pennis
               hominē
               ad
               volandū
               instruxisse
               (
               quod
               &
               miluis
               praestitit
               )
               non
               tamen
               quia
               potuit
               ,
               statim
               &
               fecit
               ,
               potuit
               &
               praxeam
               &
               omnes
               pariter
               haeriticos
               statim
               extinxisse
               ,
               non
               tamē
               quia
               potuit
               ,
               extinxit
               .
               Oportebat
               enim
               miluos
               esse
               &
               haereticos
               :
               oportebat
               &
               patrem
               crucifigi
               .
               Hac
               ratione
               erit
               aliquid
               &
               deo
               dificile
               ,
               id
               scilicet
               quod
               non
               fecerit
               :
               non
               quia
               potuerit
               ,
               sed
               quia
               noluerit
               .
               Etenim
               posse
               ,
               velle
               est
               ,
               &
               non
               posse
               ,
               nolle
               .
            
             Nothing
             is
             vnpossible
             to
             God
             :
             who
             knoweth
             not
             this
             ?
             And
             things
             vnpossible
             to
             mē
             ,
             are
             possible
             to
             God
             :
             who
             is
             ignorant
             hereof
             ?
             And
             God
             hath
             chosen
             the
             foolish
             things
             of
             the
             world
             to
             confound
             the
             wise
             .
             Therefore
             say
             the
             heretikes
             (
             namely
             the
             Monarchians
             )
             it
             was
             not
             hard
             for
             God
             himself
             to
             make
             both
             the
             Father
             and
             the
             sonne
             ,
             against
             the
             prescribed
             forme
             in
             humane
             things
             .
             For
             the
             barren
             to
             bring
             foorth
             against
             nature
             :
             as
             also
             a
             Virgin
             ,
             was
             nothing
             hard
             vnto
             God.
             Truly
             for
             God
             there
             is
             nothing
             too
             hard
             .
          
           
             But
             if
             in
             our
             presumption
             we
             so
             abruptly
             vse
             this
             sentence
             ,
             
             wee
             may
             faigne
             euerie
             thing
             to
             be
             of
             God
             :
             as
             though
             hee
             will
             do
             ,
             because
             he
             can
             doo
             .
             We
             must
             not
             beleeue
             ,
             because
             hee
             can
             doo
             all
             things
             ,
             that
             therefore
             hee
             hath
             done
             what
             he
             hath
             not
             done
             :
             but
             wee
             must
             seeke
             if
             hee
             haue
             done
             it
             .
             God
             could
             (
             I
             am
             sure
             )
             haue
             formed
             man
             to
             flye
             with
             wings
             ,
             (
             as
             he
             hath
             appointed
             the
             kytes
             )
             he
             hath
             not
             forthwith
             done
             it
             because
             he
             could
             .
             He
             could
             presently
             cut
             off
             both
             Praxea
             ,
             and
             likewise
             all
             heretikes
             together
             :
             yet
             hath
             he
             not
             therefore
             ,
             because
             he
             could
             .
             For
             it
             behoued
             there
             should
             be
             both
             kytes
             and
             heretikes
             :
             It
             behoued
             also
             the
             Father
             to
             be
             crucified
             .
             By
             this
             reason
             shall
             something
             be
             too
             hard
             for
             God
             ,
             namely
             that
             which
             he
             will
             not
             do
             :
             not
             because
             hee
             cannot
             ,
             but
             because
             he
             will
             not
             .
             For
             to
             be
             able
             ,
             is
             to
             will
             :
             and
             not
             to
             be
             able
             ,
             is
             not
             to
             will.
             By
             which
             text
             it
             is
             easily
             seene
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             Tertullian
             ,
             God
             can
             do
             many
             things
             which
             he
             will
             not
             do
             :
             as
             he
             can
             make
             a
             man
             to
             flye
             ,
             and
             doth
             it
             not
             :
             destroy
             heretikes
             ;
             neuerthelesse
             he
             destroyeth
             them
             not
             ,
             because
             he
             will
             not
             ,
             all
             that
             he
             may
             doo
             .
          
           
             And
             touching
             the
             conclusion
             which
             the
             Ministers
             draw
             from
             the
             said
             place
             of
             Tertullian
             ,
             (
             to
             wit
             )
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             his
             will
             :
             and
             his
             weakenesse
             is
             likewise
             his
             vnwillingnesse
             :
             The
             Ministers
             shewe
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             not
             well
             examined
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             that
             place
             .
             For
             Tertullian
             of
             his
             owne
             iudgement
             saith
             it
             not
             ;
             (
             so
             should
             he
             haue
             concluded
             against
             what
             hee
             had
             said
             before
             )
             but
             hee
             inferreth
             the
             same
             against
             the
             Monarchian
             heretikes
             ,
             which
             said
             :
             That
             what
             God
             could
             ,
             he
             would
             do
             ,
             and
             it
             was
             done
             .
             And
             for
             this
             reason
             Tertullian
             concludeth
             against
             them
             :
             that
             it
             behoued
             whatsoeuer
             God
             had
             not
             done
             ,
             was
             to
             him
             hard
             and
             impossible
             .
             So
             that
             (
             after
             these
             heretikes
             )
             it
             was
             all
             one
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             and
             to
             haue
             power
             to
             do
             it
             .
             And
             not
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             as
             much
             as
             to
             be
             impossible
             to
             God.
             And
             hereof
             inferreth
             Tertullian
             ,
             would
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             ,
             and
             the
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             act
             of
             God
             ,
             should
             be
             all
             one
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             that
             a
             thing
             not
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             and
             to
             be
             impossible
             for
             God
             to
             do
             it
             ,
             should
             be
             all
             one
             :
             and
             so
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             his
             wil
             ,
             all
             one
             .
             And
             his
             weaknesse
             ,
             &
             his
             vnwillingnesse
             be
             likewise
             all
             one
             .
             Which
             
             Tertullian
             concludeth
             for
             an
             absurd
             thing
             ,
             proceeding
             from
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             said
             Monarchians
             heretikes
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             his
             owne
             iudgement
             ,
             which
             was
             altogether
             contrarie
             .
             Wherein
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             is
             like
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Monarchian
             heretikes
             ,
             refuted
             by
             Tertullian
             .
             And
             that
             the
             Ministers
             maintaine
             such
             an
             opinion
             ,
             it
             is
             euident
             by
             that
             which
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             fift
             blasphemie
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             for
             conclusion
             against
             the
             said
             blasphemies
             ,
             do
             shewe
             that
             God
             can
             do
             much
             more
             then
             he
             will
             do
             ,
             and
             then
             he
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             order
             of
             the
             world
             .
             For
             otherwise
             ,
             other
             blasphemies
             would
             yet
             ensue
             :
             namely
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             should
             not
             be
             infinite
             ,
             but
             limited
             .
             Also
             that
             all
             things
             of
             necessitie
             should
             bee
             done
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             because
             God
             could
             not
             but
             maintaine
             the
             established
             order
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Which
             Caluin
             himselfe
             detesteth
             ,
             saying
             :
             That
             God
             of
             his
             omnipotencie
             ,
             changeth
             and
             altereth
             the
             order
             established
             (
             as
             seemeth
             best
             vnto
             him
             )
             and
             that
             otherwise
             to
             thinke
             ,
             were
             to
             limit
             his
             power
             and
             prouidence
             .
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             say
             in
             their
             said
             former
             article
             ,
             that
             the
             auncient
             Doctors
             of
             the
             Church
             haue
             denied
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             it
             is
             a
             manifest
             falshood
             ,
             and
             they
             wrong
             them
             greatly
             .
             For
             denie
             it
             they
             doo
             not
             ,
             but
             interpret
             the
             scripture
             ,
             which
             seemeth
             to
             denie
             it
             :
             and
             giue
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             how
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             taken
             .
             So
             that
             ,
             so
             farre
             off
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             scripture
             well
             vnderstood
             ,
             exception
             may
             bee
             giuen
             against
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ;
             that
             contrariwise
             the
             same
             is
             confirmed
             :
             as
             saith
             Saint
             Augustine
             in
             the
             fift
             booke
             ,
             and
             tenth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Citie
             of
             God.
             The
             power
             of
             God
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             is
             nothing
             diminished
             ,
             although
             it
             bee
             said
             ,
             that
             hee
             cannot
             die
             ,
             nor
             bee
             deceiued
             :
             for
             such
             things
             he
             cannot
             do
             :
             because
             ,
             that
             could
             he
             do
             them
             ,
             his
             power
             should
             thereby
             be
             lessened
             .
             And
             concludeth
             ,
             that
             such
             things
             which
             be
             of
             infirmitie
             he
             cannot
             do
             ,
             beccause
             he
             is
             almightie
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             first
             article
             ,
             vse
             deceit
             towards
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             affirme
             theyr
             difference
             
             to
             be
             ,
             because
             the
             Doctors
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             is
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             God
             can
             so
             cause
             it
             to
             bee
             :
             and
             that
             the
             Ministers
             on
             the
             other
             part
             hold
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God
             to
             do
             it
             ,
             because
             hee
             will
             not
             doo
             it
             .
             The
             Doctors
             doo
             shewe
             ,
             that
             they
             (
             for
             their
             part
             )
             neuer
             so
             concluded
             for
             truth
             ,
             that
             one
             true
             body
             was
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             because
             God
             could
             so
             cause
             it
             :
             but
             that
             the
             question
             was
             onely
             to
             knowe
             ,
             whether
             God
             could
             doo
             it
             ,
             to
             come
             afterwards
             by
             order
             ,
             to
             proue
             by
             scripture
             that
             hee
             would
             doo
             it
             .
             And
             they
             haue
             alreadie
             heretofore
             cyted
             the
             scripture
             of
             the
             Supper
             and
             Ascention
             .
             And
             further
             added
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Caluin
             touching
             the
             said
             Supper
             :
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             the
             will
             of
             God
             is
             ,
             to
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             (
             as
             indeed
             it
             is
             )
             according
             to
             the
             expresse
             word
             of
             God.
             Moreouer
             ,
             to
             this
             selfe-same
             end
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             produced
             the
             scriptures
             of
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             of
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Lord
             :
             and
             of
             the
             resurrection
             through
             the
             stone
             :
             which
             are
             made
             like
             :
             and
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             to
             that
             of
             a
             body
             in
             many
             places
             .
             The
             Ministers
             on
             the
             contrary
             part
             ,
             to
             denie
             the
             wil
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             depraue
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             (
             which
             declareth
             the
             will
             of
             God
             to
             be
             such
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             be
             in
             two
             places
             )
             alledge
             nothing
             more
             instantly
             ,
             then
             the
             impossibilitie
             for
             God
             to
             doo
             this
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             that
             all
             the
             world
             may
             vnderstand
             the
             present
             difference
             ,
             betweene
             the
             Doctors
             and
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             declare
             ,
             that
             no
             other
             difference
             there
             hath
             beene
             hitherto
             touching
             this
             article
             ,
             then
             to
             know
             whether
             it
             be
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             or
             no.
             
          
           
             And
             for
             the
             second
             article
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             not
             to
             the
             purpose
             :
             for
             the
             obiection
             was
             not
             ,
             whether
             quantitie
             were
             an
             accident
             of
             a
             Mathematicall
             body
             ,
             
               Aut
               de
               praedicamento
               quantitatis
            
             ,
             as
             speaketh
             the
             Philosophers
             )
             but
             to
             know
             whether
             it
             were
             of
             the
             essence
             and
             of
             necessitie
             to
             the
             quantitie
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             to
             be
             circumscript
             ,
             and
             in
             one
             piace
             inclosed
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             by
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             ,
             he
             speaketh
             expresly
             according
             to
             the
             
             proprieties
             of
             the
             diuine
             and
             humane
             natures
             .
             And
             wel
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             diuine
             ,
             is
             in
             all
             places
             ,
             but
             not
             the
             humane
             :
             because
             of
             it
             naturall
             proprietie
             ,
             it
             requireth
             a
             place
             certaine
             .
             And
             of
             this
             make
             the
             Doctors
             no
             doubt
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             said
             naturall
             proprietie
             .
             But
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             aboue
             nature
             ,
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             he
             cannot
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             without
             place
             ,
             proportionable
             to
             it
             greatnesse
             ,
             Which
             S.
             Augustine
             speaking
             ,
             
               de
               Ianuis
               clausis
            
             :
             not
             hauing
             regard
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             things
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             plainly
             confesseth
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             would
             desire
             the
             Ministers
             to
             alledge
             this
             Epistle
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             against
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Caluin
             ,
             and
             his
             Ministers
             ,
             for
             the
             descent
             of
             the
             soule
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             into
             hell
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             they
             alledge
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             place
             of
             bodies
             ,
             against
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             touching
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             3.
             article
             the
             Ministers
             are
             deceiued
             .
             For
             after
             the
             sayings
             of
             the
             Philosophers
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             the
             naturall
             reason
             of
             a
             body
             (
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             follow
             )
             
               Locus
               est
               superficies
               Corporis
               continentis
            
             .
             Place
             is
             the
             ouermost
             part
             of
             a
             containing
             body
             .
             Wherfore
             it
             should
             behoue
             ,
             that
             were
             the
             high
             and
             last
             heauen
             circumscript
             of
             place
             ,
             there
             should
             be
             a
             body
             aboue
             the
             high
             and
             first
             heauen
             ,
             
               A
               quo
               primum
               Caelum
               contineretur
               .
               Et
               sic
               in
               infinitum
               .
            
             Of
             which
             the
             first
             heauen
             should
             be
             cōtained
             .
             And
             so
             infinit
             .
             And
             moreouer
             the
             Ministers
             answer
             not
             to
             the
             other
             obiectiōs
             made
             thē
             vpō
             this
             article
             .
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             passages
             of
             scripture
             ,
             which
             they
             alledge
             to
             proue
             that
             there
             are
             toomthes
             &
             places
             aboue
             all
             the
             heauens
             ,
             they
             captiously
             conclude
             ,
             and
             〈◊〉
             with
             doubtfulnesse
             of
             the
             name
             of
             place
             .
             For
             in
             all
             their
             〈◊〉
             of
             the
             dimensions
             of
             bodies
             (
             which
             they
             haue
             said
             〈◊〉
             to
             require
             roomth
             and
             place
             equall
             and
             〈…〉
             their
             bignesse
             )
             it
             is
             meete
             they
             vnderstand
             〈…〉
             roomthes
             and
             places
             ,
             euen
             as
             the
             dimensions
             and
             of
             〈◊〉
             do
             require
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             And
             now
             ,
             when
             they
             speake
             of
             place●
             〈…〉
             meet
             they
             vnderstand
             thē
             ,
             others
             then
             〈…〉
             be
             not
             such
             roomthes
             &
             places
             ,
             as
             these
             wherein
             〈…〉
             
             now
             are
             :
             but
             incomprehensible
             and
             vnimaginable
             places
             ,
             where
             bodies
             and
             spirits
             indifferently
             are
             ,
             without
             distinction
             for
             their
             greatnesse
             ,
             of
             certaine
             spaces
             and
             places
             corporall
             .
             And
             in
             such
             places
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             rule
             is
             false
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             cannot
             be
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             if
             it
             bee
             not
             as
             spacious
             ,
             as
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             the
             body
             .
             Moreouer
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             manner
             of
             heretikes
             ,
             to
             interpret
             the
             scriptures
             spiritually
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             litterally
             to
             bee
             taken
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             to
             expound
             according
             to
             the
             letter
             ,
             that
             which
             spiritually
             and
             by
             figure
             ought
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             .
             As
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             expound
             the
             house
             of
             Cod
             in
             the
             other
             world
             ,
             litterally
             and
             corporally
             ,
             wherein
             there
             are
             spaces
             ,
             and
             corporall
             habitations
             ,
             diuers
             and
             seperate
             one
             from
             an
             other
             :
             albeit
             it
             ought
             to
             bee
             spiritually
             vnderstood
             ,
             for
             the
             diuersitie
             of
             degrees
             of
             blessednesse
             .
          
           
             The
             said
             Doctors
             cannot
             omit
             ,
             a
             manifest
             contradiction
             of
             the
             Ministers
             in
             this
             selfe-same
             article
             :
             wherein
             they
             pre●end
             ,
             that
             the
             bodies
             and
             soules
             of
             the
             blessed
             ,
             are
             lodged
             aboue
             all
             the
             heauens
             .
             And
             yet
             they
             place
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             within
             the
             heauen
             .
          
           
             And
             touching
             the
             alledged
             article
             ,
             condemned
             by
             the
             facultie
             of
             diuinitie
             at
             Paris
             :
             the
             Doctors
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             ordinarily
             alledge
             authorities
             ,
             pared
             ,
             or
             euilly
             applied
             :
             For
             the
             Article
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Paris
             ,
             hauing
             called
             the
             Facultie
             ,
             condemned
             all
             those
             ,
             which
             would
             place
             two
             distinct
             heauens
             :
             one
             for
             the
             Angels
             ,
             the
             other
             for
             the
             soules
             of
             men
             .
             Which
             nothing
             pertaineth
             to
             the
             present
             question
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             in
             the
             fourth
             article
             do
             charge
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             who
             neuer
             attribute
             the
             proprietie
             of
             God
             to
             any
             creature
             :
             but
             haue
             often
             heretofore
             said
             ,
             that
             to
             bee
             euerie
             where
             ,
             and
             incircumscript
             ,
             was
             not
             naturall
             to
             any
             creatures
             ,
             but
             to
             God
             alone
             .
             And
             the
             Authors
             by
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             (
             as
             Saint
             
               Basil
               ,
               Didimus
            
             ,
             and
             Vigilius
             ,
             speake
             no
             otherwise
             thē
             of
             the
             proprietie
             of
             nature
             ,
             to
             be
             euery
             where
             ,
             or
             not
             .
             And
             yet
             they
             neuer
             denie
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             in
             Gods
             power
             
             to
             cause
             one
             creature
             or
             body
             ,
             aboue
             it
             nature
             ,
             to
             be
             in
             two
             ,
             or
             many
             places
             :
             but
             (
             as
             aforesaid
             )
             when
             they
             come
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             many
             of
             the
             olde
             authors
             confesse
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             possible
             with
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             hath
             done
             the
             same
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             the
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             is
             therefore
             to
             no
             purpose
             .
             For
             the
             whole
             contention
             is
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             naturall
             proprieties
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             in
             the
             fift
             article
             haue
             not
             well
             conceiued
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             Doctors
             :
             who
             alledge
             ,
             that
             the
             Angels
             are
             naturally
             circumscript
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             bodies
             :
             and
             hereby
             would
             inferre
             ,
             that
             the
             circumscription
             of
             place
             simply
             depended
             not
             as
             of
             the
             sole
             and
             essentiall
             cause
             of
             the
             dimensions
             of
             a
             body
             :
             as
             by
             all
             their
             said
             reasons
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             pretend
             .
             Albeit
             the
             Doctors
             are
             not
             ignorant
             that
             to
             put
             difference
             betweene
             the
             corporall
             and
             spirituall
             creatures
             ,
             they
             haue
             accustomed
             to
             distinguish
             in
             schooles
             ,
             that
             the
             Angels
             
               Sunt
               diffinitiue
               in
               loco
            
             ,
             and
             the
             bodies
             Circumscriptiue
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             sixt
             article
             to
             satisfie
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             who
             made
             instance
             they
             should
             produce
             one
             onely
             place
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             :
             where
             it
             was
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             in
             Gods
             power
             ,
             to
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             .
             The
             Ministers
             for
             all
             the
             testimonies
             they
             could
             haue
             ,
             do
             falsly
             alledge
             a
             place
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             (
             as
             it
             is
             cyted
             in
             
               Gratian
               De
               consecra
               :
               distinct
            
             .
             2.
             
             
               C.
               prima
               quidem
            
             )
             that
             the
             said
             Saint
             Augustine
             hath
             written
             ,
             that
             it
             behoued
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             to
             be
             in
             one
             place
             :
             wherevnto
             say
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             so
             couched
             in
             the
             proper
             text
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             the
             30.
             tract
             vpon
             Saint
             Iohn
             .
             For
             such
             is
             the
             tenour
             in
             all
             the
             auncient
             copies
             of
             S.
             
               Augustine
               :
               Corpus
               domini
               ,
               in
               quo
               resurrexit
               ,
               vno
               loco
               esse
               potest
               ,
               veritas
               eius
               vbique
               diffusa
               est
               .
            
             The
             body
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             in
             which
             he
             rose
             againe
             ,
             may
             be
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             his
             truth
             is
             shead
             into
             euerie
             place
             .
             Where
             is
             not
             this
             word
             
               [
               Oportet
            
             ]
             as
             the
             Ministers
             cyte
             it
             ,
             hauing
             taken
             the
             same
             out
             of
             Gratian.
             And
             that
             men
             may
             knowe
             there
             is
             no
             great
             trust
             to
             be
             giuen
             to
             the
             fragments
             of
             Gratian
             ,
             without
             recourse
             to
             the
             copies
             of
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             in
             the
             tytle
             
             of
             Canon
             ,
             these
             words
             are
             there
             extracted
             out
             of
             the
             exposition
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             vpon
             the
             54
             Psalme
             .
             From
             whence
             hee
             draweth
             the
             onely
             beginning
             of
             his
             Canon
             :
             and
             yet
             doth
             he
             not
             truly
             cyte
             it
             .
             The
             ●est
             of
             the
             said
             Canon
             ,
             is
             taken
             from
             diuers
             passages
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             .
             And
             although
             there
             should
             bee
             Oportat
             .
             S.
             Augustine
             speaketh
             after
             his
             wonted
             manner
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             proprietie
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             opposing
             the
             diuinitie
             to
             the
             humanitie
             :
             without
             touching
             the
             operation
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             .
             Whereof
             when
             he
             maketh
             mention
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             speaketh
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             he
             plainly
             affirmeth
             ,
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             ;
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             As
             the
             Doctors
             hope
             in
             their
             resolution
             to
             deduce
             as
             well
             out
             of
             him
             ,
             as
             other
             auncients
             also
             .
          
           
             The
             8.
             artide
             containeth
             many
             errors
             ,
             against
             Philosophie
             and
             truth
             .
             First
             ,
             because
             the
             Ministers
             make
             no
             distinction
             betweene
             the
             body
             they
             cab
             Mathematicall
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             hauing
             dimension
             of
             breadth
             ,
             length
             ,
             and
             height
             )
             and
             the
             Phisicall
             or
             naturall
             body
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             which
             is
             composed
             of
             a
             substantiall
             forme
             and
             matter
             :
             by
             the
             vnion
             whereof
             ,
             it
             is
             made
             a
             naturall
             &
             substantiall
             body
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             although
             the
             body
             should
             bee
             without
             quantitie
             ,
             yet
             should
             it
             differ
             from
             our
             soules
             seperated
             ,
             which
             bee
             not
             materiall
             substances
             :
             and
             consequently
             should
             it
             also
             differ
             from
             the
             Angells
             and
             spirits
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             by
             the
             conclusion
             of
             this
             article
             ,
             doo
             manifestly
             declare
             ,
             that
             they
             acknowledge
             not
             any
             substantiall
             body
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             although
             God
             might
             seperate
             the
             dimensiōs
             from
             a
             substance
             ,
             without
             corrupting
             the
             same
             ,
             that
             such
             substance
             should
             remaine
             spiritually
             ,
             as
             the
             Angels
             ,
             they
             are
             deceiued
             .
             For
             such
             substance
             should
             not
             remaine
             immateriall
             ,
             as
             are
             our
             soules
             ,
             and
             the
             Angels
             which
             be
             not
             capable
             of
             dimensions
             :
             and
             therefore
             should
             it
             yet
             bee
             different
             from
             Angels
             and
             our
             soules
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             ninth
             article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             For
             the
             Doctors
             say
             not
             ,
             that
             the
             massinesse
             and
             waight
             bee
             essentiall
             in
             a
             body
             ,
             but
             to
             presse
             downeward
             ,
             is
             essentiall
             to
             the
             sadnesse
             and
             waight
             of
             a
             
             body
             .
             And
             by
             their
             obiection
             they
             demaunded
             to
             knowe
             ,
             whether
             an
             earthly
             and
             massy
             body
             ,
             abiding
             in
             it
             substance
             and
             natural
             waight
             ,
             might
             not
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             be
             hanged
             in
             the
             ayre
             ,
             without
             falling
             downward
             ,
             albeit
             it
             were
             against
             it
             nature
             and
             inclination
             ,
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             for
             answere
             to
             many
             articles
             which
             concerne
             the
             act
             of
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             and
             the
             passages
             of
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             and
             auncient
             Authors
             produced
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             (
             to
             proue
             that
             it
             was
             in
             Gods
             power
             to
             cause
             two
             bodies
             to
             bee
             in
             one
             onely
             place
             :
             and
             contrariwise
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             it
             was
             in
             the
             same
             power
             ,
             to
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             two
             places
             )
             .
             First
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             wrong
             ,
             to
             denie
             this
             consequence
             .
             Two
             bodies
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             may
             be
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             .
             Then
             on
             the
             contrarie
             part
             ,
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             by
             the
             selfe-same
             power
             .
             For
             as
             great
             repugnancie
             there
             is
             to
             Gods
             established
             order
             ,
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             other
             :
             and
             as
             great
             contradiction
             in
             nature
             ,
             founded
             vppon
             one
             selfe-same
             cause
             and
             reason
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             in
             the
             limitation
             ,
             and
             circumscription
             of
             a
             body
             .
             Which
             as
             it
             is
             naturall
             to
             be
             in
             place
             ,
             so
             is
             it
             naturall
             for
             it
             ,
             to
             bee
             in
             place
             proportioned
             and
             answerable
             to
             it
             measures
             .
             And
             if
             for
             the
             number
             of
             diuers
             places
             where
             a
             body
             should
             bee
             ,
             one
             may
             inferre
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             no
             more
             bee
             a
             body
             (
             as
             implying
             contradiction
             )
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             ,
             according
             to
             one
             onely
             place
             ,
             where
             many
             bodies
             should
             bee
             ,
             may
             also
             bee
             inferred
             ,
             that
             they
             should
             no
             more
             be
             many
             bodies
             :
             or
             that
             many
             bodies
             should
             be
             one
             .
             Which
             would
             imply
             the
             contradiction
             as
             the
             former
             .
          
           
             And
             where
             the
             Ministers
             denie
             the
             antecedent
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             may
             bee
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             to
             proue
             it
             ,
             haue
             produced
             the
             passages
             of
             scripture
             ,
             of
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             the
             birth
             of
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             of
             the
             Virgin
             :
             the
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             :
             the
             passage
             of
             a
             Camell
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             and
             the
             piercing
             of
             the
             heauens
             made
             by
             Christ
             in
             his
             ascention
             .
          
           
             And
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Ministers
             denie
             these
             actes
             ,
             
             contained
             expresly
             in
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             and
             expounded
             by
             the
             auncient
             Christians
             ,
             and
             depraue
             the
             same
             at
             their
             pleasure
             .
             The
             Doctors
             estsoones
             vpō
             the
             texts
             of
             scripture
             do
             say
             as
             followeth
             .
             First
             as
             touching
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             Saint
             Iohn
             saith
             :
             That
             Iesus
             came
             ,
             meaning
             into
             the
             place
             where
             his
             Disciples
             were
             .
             But
             hee
             came
             not
             there
             without
             entering
             thereinto
             .
             For
             to
             bee
             found
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             them
             without
             entring
             ,
             there
             should
             bee
             a
             much
             greater
             myracle
             ,
             then
             that
             hee
             entred
             there
             simply
             .
             Secondly
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             
               Cum
               fores
               essent
               clausa
            
             ,
             or
             
               Ianuis
               clausis
            
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             that
             hee
             there
             entered
             ,
             the
             doores
             beeing
             shut
             .
             And
             there
             is
             no
             apparance
             that
             the
             scripture
             maketh
             mention
             of
             doores
             ,
             rather
             then
             an
             other
             place
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             to
             shewe
             the
             place
             by
             which
             hee
             entred
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             it
             is
             added
             not
             in
             vaine
             ,
             that
             the
             doores
             were
             shut
             ,
             without
             saying
             that
             any
             opening
             was
             myraculously
             made
             .
             For
             it
             is
             alwaies
             said
             ,
             
               Quod
               venit
               Ianuis
               clausis
            
             .
             That
             hee
             came
             the
             doores
             beeing
             shut
             .
             And
             were
             it
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             doores
             had
             bin
             opened
             by
             diuine
             power
             ,
             this
             should
             be
             false
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             entred
             ,
             
               Ianuis
               clausis
            
             ,
             for
             hee
             should
             haue
             entered
             
               Ianuis
               apertis
            
             ,
             howsoeuer
             they
             had
             bene
             opened
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             the
             common
             consent
             of
             all
             the
             Auncientes
             haue
             bene
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             entered
             therein
             by
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             set
             forth
             foure
             foundations
             ,
             drawne
             from
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             .
             The
             first
             is
             ,
             that
             all
             expresly
             confesse
             the
             myracle
             of
             such
             an
             entrie
             to
             haue
             bene
             wrought
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             The
             second
             is
             ,
             that
             such
             myracle
             was
             there
             wrought
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             aboue
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             .
             The
             third
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Fathers
             especially
             iudge
             ,
             that
             herein
             consisteth
             the
             myracle
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             pas●ed
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             and
             that
             so
             it
             was
             with
             an
             other
             body
             .
             And
             for
             the
             fourth
             ground
             ,
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             by
             reason
             of
             such
             entring
             ,
             supposed
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             not
             a
             true
             body
             ,
             but
             a
             spirit
             ,
             or
             vaine
             vision
             :
             which
             the
             Ministers
             lightly
             passe
             ouer
             ,
             without
             any
             answere
             .
             Now
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             if
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             will
             haue
             it
             )
             an
             opening
             was
             made
             of
             
             the
             doores
             ,
             or
             any
             other
             part
             of
             the
             house
             ,
             to
             giue
             entrie
             to
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             then
             the
             myracle
             did
             not
             consist
             in
             the
             said
             body
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             doores
             ,
             or
             other
             part
             of
             the
             house
             ,
             which
             was
             open
             :
             and
             nothing
             had
             beene
             there
             against
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             our
             Lorde
             :
             for
             it
             is
             not
             repugnant
             to
             any
             bodie
             whatsoeuer
             ,
             to
             enter
             by
             an
             opening
             made
             by
             myracle
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             .
          
           
             Bee
             it
             ,
             that
             Iustine
             was
             not
             Author
             of
             the
             questions
             against
             the
             Gentiles
             ;
             yet
             can
             they
             not
             deny
             ,
             but
             they
             are
             of
             some
             auncient
             Christian
             ,
             of
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             attributed
             them
             to
             him
             ,
             in
             whose
             name
             they
             are
             intituled
             .
             And
             so
             much
             there
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             said
             Iustine
             in
             the
             place
             alledged
             ,
             layeth
             the
             myracle
             to
             haue
             bene
             done
             in
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             which
             (
             being
             grosse
             and
             thick
             )
             entered
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ;
             contrary
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             bodie
             .
             And
             therefore
             the
             Apostles
             supposed
             it
             a
             vision
             :
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             entrie
             made
             without
             opening
             ,
             as
             spirites
             doo
             wontedly
             enter
             .
             Let
             the
             text
             be
             seene
             .
          
           
             S.
             Hillary
             saith
             not
             only
             ,
             that
             he
             there
             entered
             in
             what
             sort
             soeuer
             it
             were
             ,
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             will
             wrest
             his
             authoritie
             )
             but
             as
             if
             he
             had
             now
             to
             deale
             with
             the
             said
             Ministers
             ,
             hee
             repulseth
             &
             mocketh
             at
             all
             their
             euasions
             and
             subtilties
             ,
             which
             vpon
             this
             act
             they
             imagined
             .
             Nothing
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             gaue
             place
             ,
             to
             open
             to
             such
             a
             bodie
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             lost
             nothing
             of
             it
             substance
             :
             nor
             by
             it
             entry
             was
             ought
             diminished
             .
             He
             addeth
             :
             That
             the
             doores
             and
             clefts
             were
             shut
             ,
             and
             fast
             barred
             .
             And
             in
             this
             neuerthelesse
             lyeth
             the
             myracle
             ,
             that
             the
             true
             naturall
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             contrary
             to
             nature
             ,
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             entered
             into
             a
             house
             ,
             close
             and
             couert
             ,
             without
             any
             opening
             :
             wherein
             hee
             plainly
             sheweth
             ,
             that
             the
             myracle
             consisteth
             in
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             And
             for
             this
             let
             the
             text
             be
             viewed
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             wish
             to
             be
             well
             examined
             by
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             S.
             Ambrose
             in
             the
             place
             cyted
             saith
             :
             That
             S.
             Thomas
             was
             abashed
             ,
             seeing
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             enter
             ,
             
               Per
               in
               via
               septa
               corporibus
               .
               Et
               quod
               natura
               corporea
               per
               impenitrabile
               corpus
               
               sese
               infuderit
               inuisibili
               aditu
               .
            
             Through
             closures
             impassable
             for
             bodies
             :
             And
             that
             the
             corporeall
             nature
             powred
             it selfe
             by
             an
             inuisible
             meane
             through
             an
             impenitrable
             bodie
             .
          
           
             S.
             Chrisostome
             
               in
               the
               Homely
               of
               S.
            
             Iohn
             Baptist
             ,
             
               and
               in
               his
               Cōmentaries
               vpon
               the
               Gospell
               of
               S.
            
             Iohn
             ,
             
               expresly
               saith
            
             :
             Qui
             intrauit
             per
             ostia
             clausa
             ,
             non
             erat
             phantasma
             ,
             non
             erat
             spiritus
             ,
             vere
             corpus
             erat
             .
             Quid
             enim
             dicit
             ?
             Respicite
             &
             videte
             :
             quia
             spiritus
             carnem
             &
             ossa
             non
             habet
             ,
             quae
             me
             habere
             videtis
             .
             Habebat
             carnes
             ,
             habebat
             &
             ossa
             ,
             &
             clausa
             erant
             omnia
             .
             Quomodo
             clausis
             octijs
             intrauerunt
             ossa
             &
             caro
             ?
             Clausa
             sunt
             omnia
             &
             intrat
             ,
             quē
             intrantem
             non
             vidimus
             .
             Nescis
             quomodo
             factum
             sit
             ,
             &
             das
             hoc
             potentiae
             Dei.
             
          
           
             He
             that
             entred
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             was
             not
             a
             vain
             vision
             ,
             was
             not
             a
             spirit
             ,
             it
             was
             truly
             a
             bodie
             .
             For
             what
             saith
             he
             ?
             Behold
             and
             see
             :
             For
             a
             spirit
             hath
             not
             flesh
             and
             bones
             ,
             as
             you
             see
             me
             haue
             .
             Hee
             had
             flesh
             ,
             hee
             had
             also
             bones
             ,
             and
             all
             thinges
             were
             shut
             .
             How
             entered
             bones
             and
             flesh
             ,
             the
             doores
             being
             shut
             ?
             All
             thinges
             are
             shut
             ,
             and
             hee
             entereth
             whome
             wee
             see
             not
             entering
             .
             How
             it
             is
             done
             thou
             knowest
             not
             ,
             and
             attributeth
             this
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Where
             S.
             Chrisostome
             without
             difficultie
             ,
             as
             doth
             also
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             acknowledgeth
             the
             myracle
             to
             haue
             bin
             wrought
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ;
             in
             that
             hee
             passed
             through
             the
             shut
             doores
             ,
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             S.
             Ierome
             in
             the
             places
             quoted
             by
             the
             Doctors
             manifestly
             writeth
             :
             that
             the
             body
             pierced
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             euen
             as
             the
             Poets
             recount
             that
             the
             fight
             of
             Linceus
             pierced
             the
             walls
             ,
             to
             see
             through
             without
             opening
             .
             S.
             Ierome
             then
             reasoned
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             bodie
             ,
             which
             the
             Bishop
             of
             Ierusalem
             (
             infected
             with
             the
             heresie
             of
             Origen
             )
             held
             not
             to
             bee
             truly
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             after
             his
             resurrection
             :
             because
             contrary
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             bodie
             ,
             he
             had
             passed
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             wherein
             Saint
             Ierome
             (
             as
             the
             other
             Auncients
             )
             declareth
             :
             that
             it
             nothing
             derogateth
             from
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             bodie
             :
             because
             it
             proceeded
             from
             a
             supernaturall
             power
             .
          
           
             And
             in
             the
             first
             Booke
             against
             Iouinian
             hee
             saieth
             as
             
             much
             :
             where
             he
             vseth
             these
             words
             :
             Iesus
             entered
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             .
             
               Quod
               humanorum
               corporum
               natura
               non
               patitur
               .
            
             Which
             thing
             ,
             the
             nature
             of
             humane
             bodies
             admitteth
             not
             .
             So
             that
             with
             others
             ,
             he
             placeth
             the
             myracle
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             three
             places
             (
             at
             the
             least
             )
             maketh
             expresse
             mention
             ,
             that
             this
             body
             passed
             through
             the
             shut
             doores
             :
             and
             that
             this
             was
             done
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             aboue
             the
             nature
             of
             bodies
             :
             and
             that
             therefore
             heretikes
             ought
             not
             to
             denie
             the
             true
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             besides
             the
             passages
             
               De
               agone
               Christiano
            
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Epistle
             
               Ad
               volusianum
            
             ,
             alreadie
             alledged
             in
             the
             booke
             
               De
               Ciuitate
               Dei
            
             ,
             he
             saith
             so
             also
             .
          
           
             Epiphanius
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             ,
             vpon
             the
             20.
             
             Heresie
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             2.
             booke
             ,
             vpon
             the
             64.
             
             Heresie
             ,
             against
             the
             Origenists
             ,
             declareth
             that
             it
             is
             but
             a
             spirituall
             body
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             which
             looseth
             nothing
             of
             it
             corporall
             substance
             :
             but
             changeth
             &
             getteth
             new
             qualities
             and
             spirituall
             perfections
             ,
             and
             meete
             for
             spirites
             :
             as
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             walles
             without
             opening
             .
             And
             giueth
             example
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             pierced
             and
             passed
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             after
             his
             resurrection
             .
             And
             euen
             so
             iudgeth
             (
             as
             others
             do
             )
             the
             myracle
             to
             haue
             bene
             wrought
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             and
             that
             because
             he
             pierced
             the
             shut
             doores
             ,
             as
             a
             spirit
             ,
             albeit
             hee
             were
             a
             true
             body
             .
          
           
             
               Cirillus
               Alexandrinus
            
             determineth
             also
             (
             as
             the
             others
             )
             this
             myracle
             to
             haue
             hapned
             in
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             ;
             which
             by
             the
             like
             myracle
             ,
             walked
             vpon
             the
             waters
             ,
             against
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ;
             and
             reproueth
             all
             them
             ,
             which
             ought
             suspected
             by
             this
             deed
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             not
             naturall
             .
          
           
             By
             all
             these
             authorities
             ,
             the
             foure
             grounds
             proposed
             ,
             are
             true
             .
             And
             therefore
             to
             corrupt
             the
             intention
             and
             faith
             of
             so
             many
             Auncientes
             and
             learned
             Christians
             ,
             to
             bring
             in
             a
             confusion
             of
             new
             Interpretations
             ,
             is
             ouer-great
             impudencie
             .
             For
             besides
             the
             diuersitie
             of
             Caluin
             and
             Beza
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             to
             that
             ende
             produce
             two
             others
             :
             
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Angell
             opened
             the
             doore
             :
             as
             though
             Iesus
             had
             not
             power
             himselfe
             to
             open
             it
             ,
             or
             else
             had
             need
             of
             opening
             .
             And
             the
             other
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             opening
             was
             made
             which
             way
             he
             pleased
             .
             And
             by
             such
             diuersities
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             sufficiently
             declare
             ,
             that
             they
             know
             not
             where
             to
             rest
             .
             And
             (
             which
             is
             worse
             )
             they
             could
             not
             alledge
             one
             only
             auncient
             Father
             ,
             for
             author
             of
             their
             fictions
             ,
             or
             that
             is
             contrary
             to
             all
             the
             others
             ,
             from
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             .
             And
             to
             alledge
             ,
             that
             the
             Iron
             gate
             (
             in
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
             opened
             to
             S.
             Peter
             of
             it
             own
             accord
             ,
             serueth
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             :
             For
             the
             Doctors
             neuer
             denied
             the
             same
             :
             but
             haue
             well
             saide
             ,
             that
             the
             scripture
             spake
             not
             of
             the
             gates
             of
             the
             prison
             :
             and
             if
             at
             the
             entry
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             the
             doores
             had
             beene
             so
             opened
             ,
             the
             Euangelist
             had
             as
             easily
             said
             it
             ,
             as
             he
             said
             they
             were
             shut
             ;
             and
             as
             S.
             Luke
             saith
             ,
             that
             the
             Iron
             gate
             was
             opened
             of
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             There
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             peruerse
             spirits
             ,
             which
             doubted
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             were
             not
             of
             opinion
             touching
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             doores
             ,
             with
             other
             Christians
             .
             And
             although
             they
             thought
             to
             helpe
             and
             aide
             themselues
             herewith
             ,
             to
             support
             their
             heresies
             (
             as
             of
             all
             the
             other
             myracles
             hapned
             to
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lorde
             aboue
             nature
             )
             the
             Fathers
             neuerthelesse
             haue
             not
             denied
             this
             ,
             nor
             others
             semblable
             acts
             :
             for
             feare
             to
             giue
             heretikes
             occasion
             of
             error
             .
             But
             haue
             declared
             and
             distinguished
             what
             was
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             said
             bodie
             ,
             and
             what
             came
             vnto
             it
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             And
             the
             Christians
             (
             for
             heresies
             )
             neuer
             abandoned
             the
             truth
             :
             albeit
             heretikes
             thereby
             haue
             sometimes
             abused
             the
             same
             .
             Sith
             then
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             passed
             through
             the
             doores
             without
             opening
             ;
             sure
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             haue
             bene
             ,
             and
             may
             be
             in
             one selfe
             same
             place
             .
             And
             hereby
             haue
             the
             Doctors
             well
             proued
             their
             proposition
             :
             which
             without
             scripture
             ,
             or
             testimony
             of
             any
             Father
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             deny
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             Birth
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             without
             fraction
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             many
             of
             the
             Auncients
             produced
             for
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             doores
             ,
             haue
             also
             held
             ,
             that
             myracle
             to
             haue
             bene
             wrought
             in
             the
             bodie
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             
             not
             in
             the
             bodie
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             but
             in
             as
             much
             as
             she
             remained
             in
             her
             purenesse
             ,
             without
             fracture
             or
             opening
             .
             And
             for
             their
             reason
             ,
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             alledged
             the
             scripture
             :
             
               Exce
               virgo
               concipiet
               &
               pariet
            
             .
             Behold
             a
             virgin
             shall
             conceaue
             and
             bring
             forth
             .
             And
             out
             of
             Ezechiel
             :
             
               Porta
               haec
               clausa
               erit
            
             .
             This
             gate
             shall
             be
             shut
             .
             As
             reciceth
             S.
             Ambrose
             in
             the
             80.
             
             Epistle
             ,
             where
             a
             Councell
             is
             conteined
             ,
             wherein
             S.
             Ambrose
             was
             present
             :
             which
             determined
             against
             Iouinian
             and
             other
             heretikes
             ,
             that
             the
             virginitie
             and
             puritie
             remained
             in
             her
             child
             ▪
             birth
             ,
             to
             the
             mother
             of
             God.
             Which
             thing
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             the
             place
             alledged
             by
             the
             Doctors
             in
             the
             first
             booke
             ,
             and
             2.
             
             Chapter
             against
             Iulian
             ,
             repeateth
             .
             And
             where
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             virgin
             had
             not
             lost
             her
             virginitie
             ,
             when
             our
             Lorde
             was
             borne
             as
             other
             men
             :
             in
             that
             they
             are
             condemned
             of
             heresie
             by
             the
             Fathers
             :
             which
             declare
             Iouinian
             to
             derogate
             her
             virginitie
             ,
             for
             the
             like
             opinion
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             hold
             .
             Of
             whom
             the
             Doctors
             would
             willingly
             demaund
             ,
             what
             myracle
             they
             acknowledge
             in
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             touching
             his
             bodie
             ,
             and
             the
             virginitie
             of
             his
             mother
             ,
             if
             he
             departed
             from
             her
             ,
             as
             other
             childrē
             from
             their
             mothers
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             write
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             that
             which
             they
             alledge
             of
             
               Tertullian
               ,
               Origen
            
             ,
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             and
             S.
             Ierome
             ;
             the
             Doctors
             say
             :
             that
             
               Tertullian
               &
               Origen
            
             held
             such
             an
             heresie
             ,
             and
             many
             others
             ,
             which
             were
             reproued
             before
             Iouinian
             .
             And
             for
             this
             ,
             were
             condemned
             with
             him
             and
             his
             consorts
             .
             And
             for
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             it
             is
             euident
             ,
             that
             he
             beleeued
             the
             contrary
             ;
             as
             well
             by
             the
             Councell
             where
             he
             was
             present
             :
             as
             by
             that
             which
             he
             wrote
             in
             the
             booke
             
               De
               Institutione
               Virginis
            
             .
             And
             therefore
             ,
             where
             hee
             saith
             :
             that
             
               Christus
               vuluam
               aperuerit
            
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             interpreted
             ,
             not
             that
             it
             was
             by
             rupture
             or
             fraction
             ,
             but
             by
             effect
             of
             generation
             ,
             and
             production
             of
             his
             true
             bodie
             ,
             out
             of
             the
             wombe
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             by
             myracle
             and
             supernaturall
             power
             .
             So
             that
             ,
             as
             the
             conception
             was
             myraculous
             ,
             so
             was
             his
             birth
             :
             
               Et
               aperire
               vuluam
            
             ,
             is
             a
             phrase
             and
             maner
             of
             speaking
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             to
             call
             and
             nominate
             the
             first
             borne
             :
             howsoeuer
             he
             had
             power
             to
             be
             borne
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             he
             speaketh
             nothing
             of
             the
             fracture
             ,
             but
             only
             that
             the
             bodie
             islued
             out
             
             bloodie
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             in
             the
             wombe
             of
             his
             mother
             :
             and
             to
             bee
             bloodie
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             necessitie
             of
             fracture
             of
             the
             mother
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             for
             conclusion
             of
             this
             article
             ,
             would
             willingly
             demaund
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             whether
             they
             hold
             for
             an
             article
             of
             faith
             ,
             the
             virginitie
             of
             the
             mother
             after
             the
             child-birth
             :
             &
             whether
             they
             could
             proue
             the
             same
             by
             the
             expresse
             and
             vnreproueable
             word
             of
             God
             written
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             Beza
             when
             hee
             pleaseth
             ,
             maketh
             doubt
             of
             these
             two
             points
             :
             and
             that
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             religion
             among
             the
             articles
             of
             faith
             ,
             of
             his
             diuers
             imprinted
             confessions
             ,
             recyteth
             sometimes
             the
             virginitie
             of
             the
             mother
             of
             God
             after
             her
             child-birth
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             omitteth
             the
             same
             .
             And
             in
             some
             confessions
             inserteth
             not
             that
             Iesus
             was
             borne
             of
             the
             Virgin
             Marie
             ,
             but
             onely
             that
             hee
             issued
             of
             the
             seede
             of
             Danid
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             employ
             for
             the
             resurrection
             ,
             and
             issuing
             out
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             through
             the
             stone
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             authorities
             alledged
             by
             them
             vpon
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             as
             the
             whole
             lecture
             of
             the
             foresaid
             authorities
             ,
             with
             
               Gregorie
               Nazianzene
            
             ,
             in
             his
             tragedie
             of
             the
             passion
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             will
             witnesse
             :
             which
             conioyneth
             (
             as
             do
             many
             other
             Auncients
             )
             these
             three
             myracles
             happened
             into
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Sauiour
             aboue
             nature
             :
             namely
             the
             birth
             without
             fracture
             of
             the
             Virgin
             :
             the
             resurrection
             through
             the
             stone
             :
             and
             the
             entrance
             by
             the
             closed
             doores
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             adde
             ,
             that
             Caluin
             and
             Beza
             make
             conscience
             to
             say
             as
             doo
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             arose
             not
             ,
             the
             Sepulchre
             beeing
             shut
             and
             closed
             :
             and
             rather
             had
             the
             said
             Caluin
             and
             Beza
             fall
             into
             friuolous
             abfurdities
             ,
             and
             ridicclous
             expositions
             here
             afore
             alledged
             ,
             then
             yeeld
             to
             the
             opinion
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
             Because
             there
             is
             more
             appearance
             in
             the
             text
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             risen
             before
             the
             stone
             was
             rowled
             away
             by
             the
             Angell
             :
             as
             therein
             agree
             the
             most
             part
             of
             auncient
             Christians
             .
             And
             by
             this
             meane
             also
             is
             there
             occasion
             giuen
             ,
             more
             easily
             to
             beleeue
             the
             resurrection
             of
             our
             Sauiour
             ,
             then
             if
             the
             stone
             had
             beene
             taken
             away
             before
             the
             resurrection
             .
             For
             one
             might
             more
             
             easily
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             had
             bene
             transported
             and
             not
             risen
             againe
             .
             And
             the
             text
             saith
             not
             ,
             that
             the
             Angell
             rowled
             away
             the
             stone
             before
             the
             resurrection
             ,
             or
             when
             Iesus
             arose
             ,
             but
             rather
             afterwards
             :
             as
             there
             is
             great
             apparance
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             in
             reason
             ,
             and
             all
             antiquitie
             .
          
           
             Pope
             Leo
             is
             euilly
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             which
             well
             knowe
             to
             conceale
             what
             is
             written
             in
             the
             Epistle
             by
             them
             cyted
             ,
             touching
             the
             closed
             doores
             .
             And
             they
             euilly
             alledge
             that
             of
             the
             resurrection
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             said
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             arose
             after
             the
             stone
             was
             rowled
             from
             the
             Sepulchre
             .
             But
             well
             is
             it
             said
             against
             the
             Fantasmatiques
             ,
             that
             the
             substance
             put
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             rested
             in
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             and
             that
             which
             arose
             the
             third
             day
             (
             the
             stone
             of
             the
             graue
             beeing
             rowled
             away
             )
             is
             the
             true
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             By
             which
             words
             ,
             Pope
             Leo
             meaneth
             not
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             was
             not
             risen
             ,
             before
             the
             stone
             was
             remoued
             :
             but
             onely
             sheweth
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             risen
             againe
             ;
             was
             a
             true
             ,
             and
             not
             a
             phantastike
             body
             :
             of
             whose
             resurrection
             it
             appeared
             by
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             graue
             .
             And
             such
             is
             the
             common
             interpretation
             of
             old
             Authors
             touching
             the
             remouing
             of
             the
             stone
             .
          
           
             For
             conclusion
             of
             all
             these
             auncient
             testimonies
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             are
             abashed
             that
             the
             Ministers
             (
             seeing
             them
             so
             manifest
             ,
             and
             themselues
             conuinced
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             only
             cause
             two
             bodies
             to
             bee
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             ,
             but
             that
             hee
             hath
             also
             done
             the
             same
             )
             dare
             slaunderouslye
             depraue
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             them
             ,
             which
             euerie
             man
             of
             good
             and
             sound
             iudgement
             ,
             can
             by
             the
             onely
             reading
             finde
             out
             .
          
           
             Notwithstanding
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reasons
             taken
             from
             such
             and
             so
             euident
             testimonies
             ,
             be
             impertinent
             .
             So
             that
             wiah
             like
             libertie
             (
             common
             to
             heretikes
             )
             they
             feare
             not
             ,
             without
             any
             text
             of
             scripture
             ,
             or
             any
             place
             of
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             to
             interpret
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             to
             pierce
             one
             an
             other
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             one
             body
             to
             giue
             place
             to
             the
             other
             .
          
           
           
             Of
             which
             false
             and
             licencious
             interpretation
             ,
             the
             common
             phrase
             of
             speech
             among
             Philosophers
             themselues
             doth
             condemne
             them
             .
             And
             the
             feat
             example
             brought
             of
             them
             which
             walke
             through
             the
             aire
             beating
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             of
             Birdes
             when
             they
             flye
             ,
             is
             ouer
             subtill
             .
             And
             whereas
             they
             boast
             in
             the
             said
             article
             ,
             that
             in
             denying
             that
             two
             bodies
             may
             be
             in
             one
             place
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             one
             bodie
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             they
             aduance
             and
             magnifie
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             As
             true
             is
             that
             ,
             as
             when
             in
             all
             their
             other
             errors
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             resist
             the
             truth
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             blaspheme
             him
             ,
             they
             euer
             boast
             to
             aduance
             the
             glorie
             of
             God.
             And
             the
             Ministers
             must
             paint
             and
             couer
             their
             filthinesse
             and
             deformitie
             ,
             with
             some
             colour
             of
             speech
             ,
             to
             blinde
             the
             simple
             and
             ignorant
             .
          
           
             Good
             reason
             also
             haue
             the
             Ministers
             not
             to
             excuse
             the
             interpretations
             of
             Caluin
             and
             Beza
             ,
             as
             too
             too
             friuolous
             and
             ridiculous
             :
             and
             preferre
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             their
             owne
             interpretation
             ,
             though
             more
             ridiculous
             then
             those
             of
             their
             Maisters
             :
             wherein
             appeareth
             the
             concorde
             betweene
             the
             Maisters
             and
             Disciples
             ;
             all
             vsing
             one
             foundation
             of
             their
             religion
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             trust
             alwayes
             to
             their
             owne
             particular
             and
             priuate
             interpretation
             ,
             and
             inspiration
             :
             and
             to
             preferre
             the
             same
             to
             all
             others
             .
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             bodie
             of
             our
             Lord
             was
             not
             inuisible
             to
             the
             Disciples
             ,
             of
             whō
             mention
             is
             made
             in
             the
             24.
             of
             Luke
             :
             but
             that
             his
             bodie
             only
             being
             nimble
             ,
             he
             suddainly
             withdrew
             himselfe
             :
             the
             Doctors
             obiect
             ,
             that
             the
             suddaine
             departing
             (
             whereof
             speaketh
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             and
             
               Lyra
               ,
            
             )
             maketh
             not
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             bodie
             was
             inuisible
             :
             as
             signifieth
             the
             Greeke
             word
             Aphantos
             :
             which
             signifieth
             ,
             not
             a
             suddaine
             departure
             ,
             but
             an
             incapacitie
             to
             be
             seene
             and
             knowne
             .
             And
             so
             the
             text
             of
             the
             scripture
             is
             plainly
             for
             the
             Doctors
             .
             Ioyned
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             that
             when
             the
             olde
             and
             late
             Diuines
             wil
             giue
             examples
             that
             Iesus
             was
             made
             inuisible
             ,
             they
             ordinarily
             alledge
             this
             passage
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             also
             who
             boast
             ,
             that
             they
             rest
             vpon
             nothing
             ,
             but
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             (
             for
             exposition
             of
             scripture
             )
             bring
             their
             dreames
             ,
             aboue
             their
             owne
             perswasion
             ;
             as
             touching
             the
             closed
             doores
             appeareth
             .
             And
             with
             like
             libertie
             
             vse
             they
             to
             expound
             the
             text
             of
             Saint
             Paul
             ,
             which
             expresly
             maintaineth
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             pierced
             the
             heauens
             .
             And
             it
             is
             likely
             (
             say
             they
             )
             that
             the
             heauens
             claue
             a
             sunder
             ,
             and
             were
             opened
             .
             And
             if
             one
             demaund
             ,
             whence
             they
             learned
             such
             an
             interpretation
             ,
             they
             answere
             ,
             from
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             founded
             vpon
             their
             inward
             inspiration
             :
             by
             which
             ,
             they
             appropriate
             that
             which
             is
             written
             in
             Saint
             Mathew
             ;
             that
             heauens
             were
             opened
             when
             the
             Doue
             descended
             vpon
             our
             Lord.
             As
             though
             all
             the
             heauens
             were
             clest
             asunder
             ,
             and
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             had
             not
             power
             to
             descend
             without
             the
             opening
             of
             them
             :
             not
             nothing
             that
             the
             scripture
             in
             many
             places
             taketh
             heauen
             for
             the
             ayre
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             that
             they
             alledge
             of
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             who
             when
             he
             was
             stoned
             ,
             sawe
             the
             heauens
             open
             ,
             more
             meete
             it
             were
             for
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             interpret
             such
             visions
             ,
             to
             bee
             made
             in
             spirit
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             great
             likelyhood
             :
             else
             should
             it
             behoue
             to
             confesse
             two
             myracles
             :
             the
             one
             in
             the
             diuision
             of
             the
             heauens
             :
             the
             other
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             the
             sight
             of
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             not
             onely
             pierced
             vnto
             ,
             but
             also
             aboue
             the
             heauens
             :
             where
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             ,
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             bee
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             whom
             Saint
             Stephen
             sawe
             ,
             which
             is
             against
             the
             order
             of
             God
             established
             in
             the
             wold
             :
             whereby
             it
             is
             necessarie
             that
             there
             be
             a
             certaine
             distance
             betweene
             the
             eye
             seeing
             ,
             and
             the
             thing
             which
             is
             seene
             .
             And
             no
             lesse
             hard
             is
             it
             ,
             that
             such
             thing
             bee
             done
             ,
             then
             that
             two
             bodies
             should
             pierce
             one
             an
             other
             .
             Nor
             must
             they
             forget
             that
             the
             scriptures
             oftentimes
             in
             spirituall
             apparitions
             and
             visions
             ,
             vseth
             this
             phrase
             of
             speech
             ,
             that
             the
             heauens
             were
             opened
             :
             and
             yet
             in
             such
             case
             was
             there
             but
             a
             spirituall
             vision
             ,
             and
             likewise
             but
             a
             spirituall
             opening
             .
             And
             euen
             as
             the
             Ministers
             will
             take
             the
             rigour
             of
             the
             word
             [
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             heauens
             ]
             :
             so
             should
             they
             not
             thinke
             it
             straunge
             if
             the
             Doctors
             with
             like
             rigour
             ,
             take
             [
             the
             piercing
             of
             the
             heauens
             ]
             especially
             in
             the
             article
             of
             the
             Ascention
             :
             where
             the
             question
             is
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             had
             alreadie
             pierced
             more
             impenitrable
             bodies
             then
             the
             heauens
             .
          
           
           
             And
             the
             Doctors
             to
             auoyd
             tediousnesse
             ,
             referre
             themselues
             to
             more
             ample
             debating
             this
             point
             [
             of
             the
             piercing
             of
             the
             heauen
             ]
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             28.
             article
             ,
             where
             the
             Ministers
             against
             expresse
             scripture
             ,
             do
             obstinately
             defend
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             by
             his
             power
             ,
             make
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             the
             Doctors
             cannot
             sufficiently
             ma●uel
             ,
             either
             at
             the
             blindnesse
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             which
             seeme
             to
             see
             nothing
             at
             noone-day
             :
             or
             at
             their
             obstinacie
             and
             boldnesse
             .
             And
             that
             the
             Ministers
             vnderstand
             not
             their
             fault
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             cannot
             thinke
             ,
             but
             that
             impugning
             the
             truth
             ,
             well
             knowne
             to
             themselues
             ,
             they
             sinne
             against
             their
             owne
             conscience
             .
             And
             God
             suffereth
             that
             (
             it
             seemeth
             )
             to
             happen
             vnto
             them
             ,
             in
             this
             so
             manifest
             a
             place
             and
             text
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             by
             this
             article
             ,
             one
             may
             perceiue
             how
             much
             more
             bold
             they
             are
             ,
             to
             giue
             false
             sences
             ,
             to
             scriptures
             more
             obscure
             then
             this
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             sayings
             of
             the
             auncient
             Christians
             which
             make
             against
             them
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             the
             great
             wrong
             may
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             ,
             in
             denying
             that
             our
             Lord
             can
             cause
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             the
             Doctors
             do
             obiect
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             be
             impossible
             with
             God
             to
             saue
             a
             rich
             man
             :
             vsing
             such
             argument
             ,
             taken
             from
             the
             text
             of
             the
             Gospell
             .
             More
             impossible
             or
             hard
             is
             it
             for
             God
             to
             saue
             a
             rich
             man
             ,
             then
             to
             make
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             But
             God
             by
             his
             omnipotencie
             cannot
             make
             (
             after
             the
             Ministers
             )
             a
             Camell
             or
             Cable
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             Therefore
             God
             by
             his
             omnipotencie
             cannot
             cause
             a
             rich
             man
             to
             be
             saued
             ,
             and
             enter
             into
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             .
             The
             Maior
             is
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             The
             Minor
             is
             confessed
             by
             the
             Ministers
             :
             and
             the
             consequence
             is
             necessarie
             .
             And
             according
             to
             all
             Philosophie
             ,
             hee
             that
             cannot
             doo
             a
             more
             easie
             thing
             ,
             cannot
             doo
             a
             thing
             more
             hard
             .
             So
             also
             without
             contradiction
             haue
             the
             Auncients
             expounded
             the
             present
             scripture
             :
             as
             doth
             Origen
             in
             the
             Homily
             vpon
             this
             place
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             it
             is
             possible
             for
             a
             Camell
             to
             enter
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             yet
             not
             
             possible
             with
             men
             ,
             but
             with
             God.
             And
             the
             manner
             how
             such
             thing
             may
             bee
             done
             ,
             is
             knowne
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             his
             sonne
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             him
             to
             whom
             hee
             shall
             reueale
             it
             .
          
           
             Semblably
             Saint
             Augustine
             in
             the
             first
             and
             fift
             Chapter
             of
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             spirite
             and
             letter
             ,
             thus
             speaketh
             to
             Marcellinus
             ,
             whom
             hee
             wrote
             vnto
             :
             It
             seemeth
             to
             thee
             absurd
             ,
             when
             I
             say
             vnto
             thee
             ,
             that
             a
             man
             may
             bee
             without
             sinne
             :
             albeit
             that
             (
             Christ
             excepted
             )
             such
             a
             one
             is
             not
             founde
             .
             Should
             it
             seeme
             absurd
             vnto
             thee
             ,
             that
             a
             thing
             may
             bee
             done
             ,
             whereof
             no
             example
             can
             bee
             shewed
             ?
             Seeing
             thou
             doubtest
             not
             (
             as
             I
             thinke
             )
             but
             it
             neuer
             happened
             that
             a
             Camell
             passed
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             And
             yet
             is
             it
             saide
             ,
             that
             with
             God
             such
             thing
             is
             possible
             .
          
           
             By
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             vnto
             the
             29.
             article
             ,
             may
             easily
             bee
             seene
             ,
             that
             they
             deceiue
             and
             abuse
             their
             Disciples
             ,
             making
             them
             beleeue
             by
             faire
             words
             and
             writings
             ,
             that
             they
             really
             receiue
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             the
             true
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             same
             which
             issued
             from
             the
             belly
             of
             the
             Virgin
             ,
             and
             was
             fastned
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             for
             the
             restauration
             of
             mankind
             .
             And
             wil
             make
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             they
             who
             place
             not
             with
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             (
             as
             they
             call
             it
             )
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             but
             some
             spirituall
             effect
             onely
             (
             as
             are
             the
             redemption
             ,
             righteousnesse
             ,
             sanctification
             ,
             life
             eternall
             ,
             and
             other
             gifts
             ,
             and
             benefites
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             bringeth
             to
             his
             elect
             )
             diminish
             the
             excellencie
             and
             dignitie
             of
             the
             same
             Sacrament
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             be
             Zuinglians
             .
             But
             that
             besides
             such
             spirituall
             effects
             ,
             one
             must
             beleeue
             that
             hee
             receiueth
             truly
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
          
           
             They
             hold
             neuerthelesse
             an
             other
             opinion
             .
             For
             when
             they
             are
             pressed
             with
             arguments
             ,
             and
             cannot
             defend
             such
             an
             imaginarie
             and
             phantastike
             presence
             ,
             they
             confesse
             by
             their
             writings
             ,
             they
             are
             become
             Zuinglians
             ,
             and
             returne
             to
             the
             spirituall
             presence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             besides
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             they
             receiue
             a
             certaine
             spirituall
             effect
             ,
             and
             not
             really
             
             the
             body
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             in
             the
             present
             answere
             :
             which
             thing
             they
             make
             manifest
             ,
             by
             that
             they
             cyte
             of
             the
             Apostle
             S.
             Paul
             :
             by
             which
             citation
             may
             bee
             gathered
             ,
             what
             is
             their
             opinion
             concerning
             the
             Supper
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             not
             really
             ,
             but
             by
             spirituall
             effect
             onely
             in
             the
             hearts
             of
             the
             faithfull
             .
             For
             the
             Galathians
             by
             the
             hearing
             of
             S.
             Pauls
             preaching
             ,
             receiued
             not
             really
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             crucified
             ,
             but
             had
             onely
             an
             imagination
             of
             the
             Crosse
             and
             passion
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             receiued
             onely
             the
             fruite
             of
             their
             faith
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             by
             this
             meanes
             they
             were
             iustified
             and
             sanctified
             before
             God
             :
             also
             the
             allegation
             which
             the
             Ministers
             make
             of
             S.
             Ciprian
             ,
             tendeth
             to
             this
             ende
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             in
             the
             Supper
             are
             receiued
             some
             spirituall
             effects
             onely
             :
             which
             neuerthelesse
             by
             these
             words
             ,
             to
             embrace
             the
             Crosse
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             to
             sucke
             his
             bloud
             ,
             &c.
             be
             allegorically
             signified
             .
             Wherein
             they
             denie
             (
             against
             the
             intent
             of
             S.
             Ciprian
             in
             the
             Sermon
             of
             the
             Supper
             )
             the
             reall
             prefence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             The
             Doctors
             confesse
             that
             the
             argument
             they
             haue
             made
             ,
             is
             addressed
             to
             Caluinists
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             Zuinglians
             .
             And
             they
             supposed
             that
             the
             Ministers
             would
             not
             otherwise
             haue
             thought
             of
             this
             Sacrament
             ,
             then
             
               Caluin
               ,
               Beza
            
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             Ministers
             ,
             renowmed
             to
             be
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Caluinist
             Church
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             reformed
             .
          
           
             An
             other
             maner
             of
             speech
             vsed
             they
             ,
             which
             exhibited
             the
             confession
             touching
             that
             Sacrament
             ,
             to
             the
             Bishops
             at
             Poissy
             ,
             who
             freely
             confessed
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             bee
             really
             present
             in
             that
             Sacrament
             :
             which
             the
             Ministers
             in
             conference
             with
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             do
             now
             denie
             .
             And
             hereby
             the
             Ministers
             in
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             of
             Caluenists
             ,
             become
             Almanists
             .
             Wherewithall
             ,
             they
             that
             maintaine
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             reformed
             ,
             will
             not
             be
             greatly
             pleased
             :
             seeing
             their
             principall
             pillars
             (
             for
             not
             being
             able
             to
             answere
             an
             argument
             obiected
             by
             the
             Doctors
             )
             do
             leaue
             them
             in
             the
             businesse
             :
             considering
             that
             in
             the
             answer
             they
             say
             themselues
             to
             be
             so
             much
             enlightned
             with
             the
             holy
             spirit
             ,
             which
             maketh
             them
             vnderstand
             &
             know
             all
             things
             .
          
           
           
             Concerninig
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             they
             doo
             openly
             declare
             what
             their
             present
             opinion
             is
             ,
             touching
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             by
             saying
             that
             the
             faithfull
             receiue
             no
             more
             in
             this
             time
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             then
             did
             the
             Fathers
             before
             ,
             and
             vnder
             the
             lawe
             :
             But
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Fathers
             receiued
             not
             really
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             as
             then
             was
             not
             made
             .
             Therefore
             the
             conclusion
             must
             follow
             ,
             that
             vnder
             the
             Gospell
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             not
             really
             receiued
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             call
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             31.
             article
             they
             answere
             not
             :
             as
             also
             they
             neuer
             could
             answere
             the
             same
             :
             and
             they
             must
             necessarily
             confesse
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             power
             of
             their
             faith
             ,
             they
             do
             that
             which
             implyeth
             contradiction
             .
             For
             they
             maintaine
             one
             thing
             to
             be
             present
             ,
             and
             not
             present
             ,
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             time
             and
             place
             .
             And
             their
             spirituall
             (
             or
             rather
             phantasticke
             )
             presence
             ,
             maketh
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
             For
             (
             according
             to
             their
             doctrine
             )
             the
             body
             cannot
             be
             present
             but
             with
             it
             measures
             ,
             locally
             ,
             difinitiuely
             ,
             and
             corporally
             :
             otherwise
             the
             body
             should
             be
             wholly
             abrogate
             and
             corrupted
             .
             And
             the
             maner
             of
             it
             beeing
             there
             spiritually
             ,
             would
             not
             make
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             is
             not
             there
             :
             or
             otherwise
             they
             falsly
             say
             it
             is
             present
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             abuse
             the
             world
             .
             Wherefore
             it
             is
             necessarie
             ,
             if
             the
             body
             be
             there
             (
             yea
             spiritually
             )
             and
             their
             doctrine
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             be
             true
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             be
             corporally
             ,
             difinitiuely
             ,
             and
             locally
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             is
             absent
             according
             to
             their
             confession
             :
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             there
             present
             .
             And
             to
             conclude
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             there
             ,
             and
             not
             there
             .
             And
             for
             the
             full
             solution
             ,
             (
             without
             entering
             into
             the
             principall
             of
             the
             Argument
             )
             they
             suppose
             to
             escape
             ,
             by
             obiecting
             to
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             some
             words
             of
             the
             breuiarie
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             not
             yet
             seene
             .
             The
             Ministers
             (
             they
             thinke
             )
             haue
             found
             them
             in
             some
             breuiarie
             of
             Monkes
             ,
             and
             remember
             when
             they
             were
             in
             the
             Couent
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             so
             accustomed
             to
             sing
             and
             say
             .
             But
             although
             such
             things
             were
             found
             in
             the
             breuiaries
             ,
             
             vsed
             in
             the
             Romane
             Church
             ,
             such
             maner
             of
             speech
             might
             be
             defended
             ,
             in
             the
             sence
             which
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             giuen
             ,
             whē
             they
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Apostles
             
               Conficiūt
               corpus
               Christi
            
             :
             do
             make
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             ,
             as
             the
             scripture
             it selfe
             saith
             :
             that
             they
             baptise
             ,
             forgiue
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             saue
             those
             whom
             they
             conuerted
             :
             which
             is
             meant
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             of
             God.
             Who
             of
             his
             owne
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             as
             Maister
             ,
             baptiseth
             ,
             forgiueth
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             iustifieth
             the
             faithfull
             persons
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             do
             maruell
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             call
             faith
             a
             humane
             vertue
             ,
             (
             the
             great
             and
             maruellous
             effects
             it
             worketh
             considered
             )
             :
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             no
             great
             cause
             to
             maruell
             thereat
             :
             seeing
             that
             euerie
             worke
             ,
             in
             as
             much
             as
             it
             is
             in
             man
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             therein
             worketh
             together
             with
             God
             ,
             is
             iudged
             and
             reputed
             humane
             .
             Also
             the
             scripture
             calleth
             the
             faith
             of
             man
             ,
             the
             worke
             of
             man.
             The
             Doctors
             shewe
             vnto
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             after
             their
             wonted
             maner
             ,
             they
             dwell
             alwaies
             on
             small
             things
             ,
             and
             leaue
             that
             which
             is
             principall
             in
             the
             matter
             :
             being
             ignorant
             (
             or
             dissembling
             ignorance
             )
             where
             lyeth
             the
             difficultie
             of
             that
             is
             handled
             .
             As
             they
             do
             in
             their
             answere
             vpon
             the
             argument
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             :
             whereby
             they
             obiect
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             by
             their
             faith
             (
             call
             they
             it
             diuine
             or
             humane
             )
             may
             doo
             more
             then
             God
             can
             do
             :
             wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             (
             without
             touching
             the
             point
             )
             do
             answere
             with
             songs
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             32.
             article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             lightly
             passe
             ouer
             many
             obiectious
             made
             them
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
             Whether
             there
             bee
             superfluitie
             ,
             or
             repetition
             in
             them
             ,
             or
             whether
             they
             be
             impertinent
             ,
             let
             the
             reader
             iudge
             .
             But
             for
             this
             cause
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             cease
             ,
             to
             require
             eftsoones
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             bring
             some
             passage
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             to
             ground
             that
             God
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             seeing
             that
             this
             consequence
             is
             ouerfoolish
             and
             ridiculous
             :
             
               God
               cannot
               lye
            
             .
             Therefore
             can
             he
             not
             make
             one
             bodie
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             .
             For
             so
             should
             they
             make
             their
             assumption
             .
             Now
             God
             hath
             said
             and
             ordained
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             cannot
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             therefore
             can
             he
             not
             make
             it
             so
             to
             be
             .
             But
             neuer
             will
             they
             instruct
             by
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Assumption
             or
             Minor
             Proposition
             :
             
             the
             contrarie
             whereof
             hath
             bene
             sufficiently
             verified
             by
             many
             testimonies
             of
             the
             scripture
             .
             The
             Doctors
             also
             require
             the
             Ministers
             to
             produce
             some
             Father
             ,
             yea
             some
             man
             ,
             euer
             reputed
             Catholique
             ,
             which
             hath
             dared
             to
             pronounce
             ,
             that
             God
             could
             not
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             .
             For
             full
             answere
             ,
             the
             said
             Ministers
             can
             bring
             forth
             none
             which
             euer
             hath
             vsed
             such
             a
             speech
             ,
             except
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             but
             by
             them
             falsly
             alledged
             ,
             both
             touching
             the
             letter
             ,
             &
             the
             sence
             of
             the
             letter
             .
             The
             Doctors
             will
             not
             cease
             to
             beate
             both
             into
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             also
             all
             persons
             ;
             that
             there
             is
             no
             place
             of
             scripture
             found
             ,
             nor
             booke
             of
             any
             auncient
             Father
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             last
             article
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             resolued
             to
             shewe
             by
             the
             pure
             and
             expresse
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             expounded
             by
             common
             consent
             of
             all
             antiquitie
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             did
             institute
             the
             Sacrament
             and
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Aultar
             ,
             and
             will
             teach
             the
             effect
             and
             vertue
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             institution
             and
             ordinance
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             And
             will
             make
             it
             also
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             polluted
             and
             defiled
             the
             Sacrament
             by
             Iesus
             Christ
             instiruted
             .
             And
             that
             the
             Supper
             which
             the
             Ministers
             maintaine
             ,
             is
             no
             way
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             but
             a
             prophanation
             of
             holy
             things
             ,
             containing
             execrable
             blasphemie
             :
             whereof
             the
             whole
             world
             ought
             to
             haue
             horror
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Sunday
                 ,
                 the
                 12.
                 of
                 Iuly
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aforesaid
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             to
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             sent
             to
             them
             by
             my
             Lord
             the
             Duke
             of
             Neuers
             ,
             the
             22.
             day
             of
             Iuly
             ,
             about
             fiue
             of
             the
             Clocke
             in
             the
             enening
             .
             Anno.
             1560.
             
          
           
             THe
             Ministers
             ,
             before
             they
             answere
             particularly
             to
             the
             obiections
             and
             slaunders
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             seeing
             that
             each
             way
             ,
             and
             causelesse
             ,
             they
             taxe
             them
             for
             blasphemers
             :
             haue
             aduised
             to
             tell
             them
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             theyr
             answere
             ,
             that
             to
             bee
             wronged
             
             by
             them
             ,
             they
             hold
             it
             not
             so
             great
             an
             iniurie
             ,
             nor
             themselues
             the
             more
             blasphemers
             ,
             for
             being
             so
             holden
             and
             reputed
             by
             them
             :
             no
             more
             then
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             because
             he
             was
             
             so
             pronounced
             by
             Caiphas
             the
             high
             Priest
             ,
             and
             S.
             St●phen
             ,
             to
             whom
             the
             like
             crime
             was
             imputed
             by
             the
             enemies
             of
             
             truth
             :
             And
             Naboth
             who
             was
             likewise
             accused
             to
             haue
             blasphemed
             God
             and
             the
             king
             ,
             albeit
             he
             was
             innocent
             .
             For
             it
             is
             the
             manner
             of
             all
             them
             which
             hate
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             the
             light
             ,
             to
             blaspheme
             that
             which
             they
             vnderstand
             not
             (
             as
             thereof
             
             write
             S.
             Peter
             and
             S.
             Iude
             )
             and
             to
             giue
             the
             raines
             sometimes
             to
             their
             furie
             :
             so
             that
             they
             shamelesly
             denie
             things
             most
             apparant
             ,
             and
             confesse
             others
             concerning
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             bee
             straunge
             and
             absurd
             .
             Which
             thing
             is
             seene
             to
             haue
             befallen
             the
             Doctors
             about
             the
             Ministers
             :
             whom
             they
             neither
             can
             heare
             attentiuely
             ,
             nor
             iudge
             of
             rightly
             .
             And
             the
             full
             end
             of
             their
             purpose
             (
             it
             seemeth
             )
             is
             ,
             to
             contradict
             them
             indifferently
             in
             all
             things
             ,
             and
             to
             say
             without
             any
             examination
             or
             iudgement
             ,
             that
             whatsoeuer
             they
             produce
             ,
             is
             blasphemy
             and
             lies
             .
             For
             the
             Ministers
             speaking
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             they
             haue
             learned
             thereof
             ,
             and
             is
             contained
             in
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             haue
             euer
             said
             ,
             that
             God
             is
             almightie
             ,
             in
             as
             much
             as
             he
             can
             do
             (
             without
             any
             exception
             )
             whatsoeuer
             he
             will
             :
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             power
             in
             heauen
             nor
             in
             earth
             ,
             which
             is
             able
             to
             let
             ,
             alter
             ,
             or
             in
             any
             maner
             or
             wise
             hinder
             the
             full
             effect
             and
             perfect
             execution
             of
             his
             eternall
             &
             vnchangeable
             counsailes
             .
             But
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             that
             his
             omnipotencie
             must
             not
             be
             stretched
             without
             any
             discretion
             or
             distinction
             ,
             to
             all
             the
             things
             generally
             which
             men
             can
             conceiue
             ,
             or
             in
             their
             foolish
             phantasies
             imagine
             :
             but
             to
             those
             onely
             ,
             which
             neither
             are
             ,
             nor
             can
             be
             contrarie
             to
             his
             iustice
             ,
             to
             his
             goodnesse
             ,
             to
             his
             wisedome
             :
             nor
             consequently
             to
             his
             holy
             and
             eternall
             will
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             truth
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             and
             euer
             shal
             be
             ,
             to
             doo
             all
             things
             well
             and
             wisely
             ,
             with
             number
             ,
             waight
             ,
             and
             measure
             :
             and
             without
             that
             there
             is
             any
             inequitie
             ,
             disorder
             ,
             or
             contradiction
             in
             whatsoeuer
             he
             doth
             .
             All
             which
             things
             being
             well
             vnderstood
             and
             considered
             ,
             will
             discharge
             the
             Ministers
             among
             all
             good
             and
             iust
             people
             ,
             from
             the
             s●aunders
             
             which
             the
             Doctors
             impose
             vpon
             them
             ,
             and
             fal●ly
             published
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             odious
             to
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             stirre
             vp
             publike
             hate
             against
             them
             .
             Wherefore
             ,
             to
             make
             their
             slaunders
             more
             like
             to
             truth
             :
             by
             adding
             and
             diminishing
             ,
             they
             change
             and
             alter
             almost
             the
             whole
             meaning
             of
             the
             Ministers
             :
             well
             knowing
             ,
             that
             otherwise
             they
             could
             neuer
             haue
             meane
             to
             ground
             their
             slaunders
             ,
             nor
             to
             giue
             any
             colour
             or
             likelihood
             therevnto
             :
             which
             thing
             shall
             now
             appeare
             by
             the
             deduction
             and
             particular
             confutation
             of
             the
             pretended
             blasphemies
             ,
             obiected
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             by
             the
             said
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             First
             the
             Doctors
             accuse
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             measured
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             things
             onely
             which
             bee
             agreeable
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             derogate
             either
             to
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             his
             truth
             ,
             his
             nature
             :
             nor
             to
             the
             order
             which
             hee
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             to
             verifie
             their
             accusation
             and
             slaunder
             ,
             they
             breake
             in
             two
             this
             whole
             sentence
             ,
             and
             take
             thereof
             but
             the
             last
             part
             onely
             ,
             the
             which
             they
             haue
             seperated
             from
             those
             going
             before
             ,
             wherewith
             it
             was
             conioyned
             expresly
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ;
             the
             more
             clearely
             to
             expound
             and
             shewe
             ,
             how
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ought
             to
             be
             knowne
             ,
             beleeued
             ,
             and
             adored
             of
             all
             the
             world
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             they
             haue
             not
             taken
             ,
             nor
             vnderstood
             the
             word
             
               [
               Order
            
             ]
             as
             doo
             the
             Ministers
             .
             Whereby
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             willed
             to
             signifie
             the
             estate
             and
             disposition
             ,
             which
             God
             by
             his
             prouidence
             ,
             and
             eternall
             ,
             and
             vnchangeable
             will
             ,
             hath
             established
             ,
             conserueth
             ,
             and
             entertaineth
             in
             all
             things
             :
             rightly
             to
             gouerne
             ,
             and
             let
             that
             no
             confusion
             happen
             in
             his
             workes
             ,
             euen
             as
             S.
             Augustine
             hath
             defined
             it
             in
             his
             bookes
             
               De
               Ordine
            
             :
             and
             hee
             himselfe
             hath
             vsed
             the
             same
             in
             the
             fift
             booke
             of
             his
             confessions
             .
             Which
             the
             Doctors
             not
             vnderstanding
             ,
             haue
             reduced
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             thereof
             said
             ,
             to
             the
             ordinarie
             and
             wonted
             course
             of
             nature
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             mouing
             of
             creatures
             which
             bee
             in
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             And
             to
             giue
             exception
             to
             the
             doctrine
             aforesaid
             ,
             they
             obiect
             the
             myracles
             which
             God
             doth
             aboue
             nature
             :
             and
             thereof
             inferre
             ,
             that
             God
             doth
             ,
             and
             can
             doo
             many
             things
             
             against
             the
             order
             by
             him
             established
             and
             decreed
             .
          
           
             Whervnto
             the
             Ministers
             answer
             ;
             that
             myracles
             ,
             albeit
             they
             be
             done
             beyond
             &
             aboue
             the
             ordinary
             course
             of
             nature
             ,
             yet
             are
             they
             not
             done
             against
             the
             order
             aforesaid
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             all
             things
             reduced
             to
             the
             prouidence
             ,
             and
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             are
             well
             done
             and
             ordained
             ,
             although
             that
             the
             reason
             and
             order
             therein
             ,
             be
             oftentimes
             vnknowne
             to
             men
             :
             which
             
             Salomon
             wrote
             saying
             :
             God
             maketh
             all
             things
             good
             in
             their
             season
             .
             Wherevnto
             may
             be
             also
             applied
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             read
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             Sentences
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             .
             Sent.
             283.
             and
             284.
             
             God
             who
             is
             the
             Creator
             and
             conseruer
             of
             nature
             ,
             doth
             nothing
             in
             his
             myracles
             which
             are
             against
             nature
             .
             And
             it
             followeth
             not
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             is
             new
             to
             custome
             ,
             is
             contrary
             and
             repugnant
             to
             reason
             ,
             &c.
             
             If
             the
             Doctors
             will
             know
             more
             thereof
             ,
             let
             them
             reade
             the
             two
             bookes
             of
             Order
             ;
             which
             this
             holy
             man
             composed
             :
             and
             that
             which
             he
             wrote
             concerning
             myracles
             ,
             in
             the
             fift
             and
             sixt
             Chapter
             of
             his
             third
             booke
             of
             the
             Trinitie
             .
             This
             answere
             shall
             serue
             for
             confutation
             of
             two
             other
             pretended
             blasphemies
             ,
             which
             follow
             in
             the
             obiection
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             fourth
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             for
             answer
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             will
             of
             God
             (
             after
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Diuines
             )
             may
             in
             two
             sorts
             be
             cōsidered
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             according
             to
             that
             which
             by
             words
             ,
             signes
             ,
             and
             effects
             ,
             is
             declared
             to
             men
             :
             and
             according
             to
             that
             which
             is
             reteined
             &
             hidden
             in
             himselfe
             .
             The
             one
             is
             called
             the
             will
             knowne
             by
             signes
             :
             and
             the
             other
             the
             will
             of
             the
             good
             pleasure
             of
             God.
             For
             the
             first
             consideration
             the
             Ministers
             do
             confesse
             (
             as
             heeretofore
             they
             haue
             to
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             God
             can
             do
             many
             things
             ,
             which
             he
             will
             not
             do
             .
             But
             as
             touching
             the
             other
             ,
             they
             say
             :
             that
             it
             is
             equall
             to
             his
             power
             :
             as
             is
             also
             his
             power
             (
             in
             this
             respect
             )
             equall
             to
             his
             will.
             According
             to
             which
             consideration
             ,
             the
             sentence
             of
             Tertullian
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Monarchians
             ill
             applied
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             and
             expounded
             :
             As
             all
             those
             may
             iudge
             ,
             which
             attentiuely
             shall
             read
             the
             passage
             by
             the
             Ministers
             produced
             .
             Who
             to
             answer
             one
             slaunder
             of
             the
             said
             Doctors
             ,
             which
             accuse
             them
             to
             haue
             wronged
             the
             auncient
             
             Fathers
             ,
             in
             saying
             that
             they
             excepted
             some
             causes
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             Cod
             :
             are
             yet
             constrained
             here
             to
             repeate
             ,
             that
             which
             Theodoret
             saith
             thereof
             in
             the
             3.
             
             Dialogues
             who
             writeth
             as
             followeth
             .
             It
             must
             not
             be
             said
             without
             any
             determination
             ,
             that
             all
             things
             are
             possible
             to
             God.
             For
             who
             so
             absolutely
             saith
             this
             ,
             comprehendeth
             all
             things
             ,
             as
             well
             good
             as
             bad
             ,
             which
             no
             way
             ought
             to
             be
             attributed
             to
             God
             :
             whereby
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             this
             good
             author
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             before
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             haue
             not
             indifferently
             submitted
             all
             things
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             but
             excepted
             from
             the
             same
             ,
             whatsoeuer
             is
             contrary
             to
             his
             will
             and
             essence
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             briefe
             ,
             but
             one
             meane
             there
             is
             to
             appease
             the
             difference
             between
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             say
             that
             it
             is
             impossible
             for
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             and
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             which
             affirme
             the
             cōtrary
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             (
             without
             taking
             so
             long
             circuit
             )
             loosing
             so
             many
             words
             ,
             and
             alledging
             so
             many
             superfluous
             things
             ,
             do
             proue
             briefly
             by
             one
             only
             passage
             of
             scripture
             ,
             that
             God
             willeth
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Whether
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             well
             or
             euilly
             alledged
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             to
             proue
             that
             a
             body
             cannot
             be
             without
             place
             and
             measures
             :
             and
             also
             whether
             they
             haue
             well
             or
             euilly
             said
             and
             defended
             ,
             that
             quantitie
             is
             essentiall
             to
             a
             body
             ,
             and
             not
             accidentall
             (
             as
             hold
             the
             Doctors
             )
             they
             leaue
             the
             iudgement
             to
             the
             Readers
             of
             the
             Actes
             of
             this
             Conference
             .
          
           
             Touching
             that
             which
             followeth
             in
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Doctors
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             place
             aboue
             the
             heauens
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             not
             therein
             comprised
             nor
             conteined
             ,
             that
             bodies
             and
             spirites
             bee
             indifferently
             there
             ,
             without
             any
             distinction
             or
             distance
             of
             place
             :
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             touching
             all
             these
             points
             ,
             they
             rather
             beleeue
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             expresse
             word
             of
             God
             (
             by
             them
             alledged
             )
             then
             all
             the
             subtilties
             &
             sophistries
             of
             vaine
             Philosophie
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             or
             others
             can
             propose
             .
             Ioyned
             herevnto
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             expresly
             cōteined
             &
             taught
             in
             one
             of
             the
             articles
             of
             our
             faith
             :
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ;
             
               Frō
               whence
               he
               shall
               come
               to
               iudge
               the
               quick
               &
               the
               dead
               .
            
             
             Wherevpon
             must
             bee
             noted
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             
               [
               Vnde
            
             ]
             an
             Aduerbe
             signifying
             place
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             4.
             and
             5.
             articles
             ,
             to
             know
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             ought
             imposed
             vpon
             the
             Doctors
             which
             is
             not
             true
             ,
             they
             send
             backe
             the
             readers
             to
             the
             precedent
             conference
             .
             And
             also
             to
             know
             in
             what
             sence
             ,
             and
             to
             what
             end
             ,
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             haue
             bene
             alledged
             by
             the
             said
             Ministers
             ;
             which
             they
             may
             easily
             perceiue
             by
             the
             reading
             ,
             and
             diligent
             obseruation
             of
             the
             passages
             and
             sentences
             of
             the
             said
             Fathers
             there
             inserted
             .
          
           
             For
             the
             6.
             article
             ,
             wherein
             the
             Doctors
             had
             rather
             confesse
             their
             Canons
             to
             be
             false
             ,
             then
             (
             accusing
             their
             authoritie
             )
             to
             auouch
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             a
             true
             dody
             ,
             and
             that
             to
             be
             such
             ,
             it
             ought
             necessarily
             to
             bee
             in
             one
             certaine
             place
             :
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             obseruation
             of
             the
             place
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             (
             whence
             the
             said
             Canon
             is
             taken
             )
             it
             is
             easie
             to
             iudge
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             
               [
               Oportet
            
             ]
             is
             there
             much
             more
             conuenient
             ,
             then
             that
             of
             
               [
               Potest
               ]
            
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             8.
             article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             a
             substance
             is
             not
             without
             quantitie
             ,
             and
             whiles
             it
             is
             such
             ,
             and
             so
             remaineth
             ,
             it
             cannot
             any
             waies
             be
             a
             body
             .
             And
             the
             reason
             is
             ,
             because
             that
             of
             the
             substance
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             the
             quantitie
             ,
             are
             two
             diuers
             predicaments
             :
             vnder
             which
             ,
             one
             selfe-same
             thing
             ,
             for
             one
             selfesame
             respect
             ,
             cannot
             be
             any
             way
             comprised
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             Iesus
             Christ
             alledged
             no
             other
             reason
             to
             shewe
             that
             his
             body
             was
             not
             a
             spirit
             ,
             but
             that
             hee
             had
             members
             and
             parts
             ,
             which
             in
             respect
             of
             their
             measures
             ,
             might
             bee
             handled
             and
             touched
             .
             Whence
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             without
             this
             ,
             a
             substance
             cannot
             be
             a
             body
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             difference
             which
             by
             the
             Doctors
             opinion
             should
             remaine
             betweene
             our
             soules
             and
             our
             bodies
             exempted
             from
             quantitie
             ,
             (
             if
             that
             were
             possible
             )
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             although
             they
             were
             substances
             both
             in
             number
             and
             different
             ,
             they
             should
             neuerthelesse
             be
             like
             ,
             as
             touching
             the
             kinde
             :
             and
             that
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             should
             be
             contained
             vnder
             the
             kinde
             of
             an
             incorporeall
             substance
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             passe
             ouer
             the
             9.
             article
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             but
             a
             
             repetition
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             haue
             largely
             answered
             what
             the
             Doctors
             there
             repeate
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             10.
             article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             consequence
             whereof
             is
             the
             question
             ,
             cannot
             bee
             otherwise
             defended
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             rule
             which
             saith
             :
             that
             of
             one
             absurditie
             may
             all
             things
             be
             inferred
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             they
             complaine
             of
             time
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             make
             them
             loose
             ,
             by
             reading
             so
             many
             things
             wherevnto
             they
             haue
             alreadie
             answered
             ,
             and
             which
             it
             seemeth
             they
             repeate
             not
             for
             any
             other
             ende
             ,
             then
             to
             fill
             vp
             paper
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             men
             thinke
             they
             say
             something
             .
          
           
             For
             first
             the
             Euangelist
             saith
             not
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             )
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             entered
             by
             the
             shut
             doores
             :
             but
             onely
             that
             he
             came
             ,
             the
             gates
             beeing
             shut
             .
             So
             that
             he
             speaketh
             nothing
             there
             of
             the
             maner
             of
             his
             entry
             ,
             nor
             how
             the
             doores
             were
             opened
             ,
             or
             other
             place
             about
             the
             house
             by
             the
             which
             he
             entered
             .
             And
             all
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             cannot
             be
             grounded
             neither
             vpon
             the
             scripture
             ,
             nor
             vpon
             any
             authoritie
             of
             all
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             by
             them
             alledged
             :
             which
             bee
             more
             against
             them
             ,
             then
             with
             them
             .
             And
             for
             conclusiō
             ,
             they
             haue
             no
             other
             foundation
             of
             their
             saying
             ,
             then
             their
             owne
             coniectures
             and
             imaginations
             ,
             and
             the
             false
             interpretations
             which
             they
             giue
             to
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Fathers
             .
             To
             the
             faith
             wherof
             they
             would
             gladly
             constraine
             &
             subiect
             the
             Church
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             hauing
             laid
             that
             foundation
             ,
             they
             might
             afterwards
             build
             therevpon
             ,
             all
             the
             absurdities
             and
             errors
             they
             shall
             delight
             in
             touching
             the
             same
             .
             And
             where
             they
             presuppose
             when
             Christ
             entered
             the
             shut
             doores
             ,
             walked
             vpon
             the
             waters
             ,
             and
             went
             out
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             :
             that
             such
             myracles
             were
             done
             rather
             in
             the
             person
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             other
             things
             .
             Iustine
             writeth
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             saying
             :
             that
             without
             any
             change
             happened
             ,
             either
             in
             his
             body
             ,
             or
             in
             that
             of
             S.
             Peter
             ,
             he
             made
             by
             his
             diuine
             power
             the
             Sea
             against
             nature
             ,
             to
             serue
             him
             to
             walke
             .
             As
             also
             S.
             Hillary
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             saith
             :
             That
             by
             his
             power
             hee
             made
             all
             things
             passeable
             .
             Wherevnto
             likewise
             agreeth
             S.
             
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             ,
             attributing
             all
             that
             to
             diuine
             power
             ,
             and
             freely
             confessing
             that
             hee
             
             knew
             not
             the
             maner
             and
             the
             fashion
             thereof
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             are
             much
             abashed
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             are
             so
             presumptuous
             to
             determine
             a
             thing
             which
             by
             the
             scripture
             and
             Fathers
             hath
             bene
             left
             vndecided
             :
             and
             wherein
             (
             as
             S.
             Hillary
             saith
             wisely
             )
             sence
             and
             words
             do
             faile
             ,
             &
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             deed
             ,
             exceedeth
             the
             capacitie
             of
             humane
             reason
             .
             How
             dare
             then
             the
             Doctors
             so
             boldly
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             passed
             through
             the
             doores
             ;
             that
             there
             was
             penitration
             of
             dimensions
             ;
             that
             two
             bodies
             were
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             ?
             Seeing
             that
             of
             all
             that
             ,
             neither
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             nor
             in
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             one
             onely
             sillable
             :
             and
             that
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             the
             Fathers
             do
             confesse
             ,
             that
             their
             vnderstanding
             and
             sence
             were
             too
             feeble
             to
             comprehend
             or
             declare
             the
             reason
             of
             such
             a
             my
             sterie
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             birth
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             repose
             themselues
             vpon
             the
             scripture
             ,
             which
             saith
             clearly
             ,
             that
             the
             Virgin
             was
             with
             childe
             ,
             that
             she
             brought
             forth
             ,
             that
             shee
             gaue
             sucke
             ,
             and
             that
             
               Apertaest
               vulua
            
             ,
             the
             wombe
             is
             opened
             in
             the
             child-birth
             .
             They
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             doth
             nought
             derogate
             nor
             preiudice
             her
             virginitie
             and
             purenesse
             ,
             which
             consisteth
             in
             this
             point
             onely
             ,
             that
             shee
             knew
             not
             ,
             not
             was
             knowne
             of
             any
             man
             ,
             Moreouer
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             in
             beleeuing
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             follow
             the
             scripture
             :
             and
             consequently
             they
             cannot
             erre
             ,
             nor
             bee
             heretikes
             :
             nor
             they
             likewise
             which
             subiect
             and
             subdue
             their
             sence
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             as
             in
             this
             haue
             done
             the
             Fathers
             which
             are
             by
             them
             alledged
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             following
             article
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             touching
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             resurrection
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             there
             is
             nothing
             but
             coniectures
             ,
             slaunders
             ,
             &
             repetitions
             ,
             troublesome
             and
             superfluous
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             by
             their
             former
             answeres
             haue
             largely
             satisfied
             .
          
           
             All
             that
             which
             afterwards
             followeth
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             are
             but
             iniuries
             and
             scoffes
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             reasons
             and
             arguments
             :
             which
             is
             the
             last
             recourse
             of
             contentious
             spirits
             :
             who
             seeing
             themselues
             destitute
             of
             reason
             ,
             and
             vnable
             to
             giue
             place
             to
             the
             truth
             ,
             defend
             themselues
             by
             clamours
             
             and
             slaunders
             .
          
           
             Some
             reason
             should
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             for
             that
             which
             they
             say
             concerning
             the
             word
             Aphantos
             ,
             if
             there
             followed
             Autois
             :
             but
             that
             which
             the
             Euangelist
             saith
             Ap'auton
             ,
             sheweth
             clearely
             ,
             that
             the
             interpretation
             of
             the
             said
             place
             ,
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             S.
             Ambrose
             ,
             (
             where
             vnto
             the
             Ministers
             agree
             )
             is
             better
             then
             that
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             heauens
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             (
             vsing
             the
             language
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             which
             saith
             clearely
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             baptisme
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             heauens
             were
             clouen
             asunder
             ,
             and
             then
             opned
             ,
             when
             S.
             Stephen
             was
             stoned
             )
             they
             cannot
             faile
             .
             And
             to
             apply
             to
             the
             ayre
             the
             signification
             of
             heauen
             ,
             is
             a
             humane
             imagination
             .
             This
             also
             seemeth
             ,
             should
             diminish
             the
             Maiestie
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             who
             is
             lifted
             vp
             aboue
             all
             the
             heauens
             ,
             to
             establish
             so
             lowe
             as
             the
             ayre
             ,
             the
             Throne
             of
             his
             Maiestie
             .
             And
             there
             is
             no
             likelyhood
             in
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             touching
             the
             being
             of
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             ;
             and
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             say
             of
             the
             sight
             of
             Stephen
             ,
             which
             extended
             euen
             to
             the
             heauens
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             one
             is
             a
             myracle
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             in
             nature
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             a
             wonder
             against
             nature
             ,
             and
             the
             will
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             in
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             do
             falsly
             impute
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             affirmed
             ,
             it
             was
             a
             thing
             impossible
             for
             God
             to
             make
             a
             Camell
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             for
             they
             neuer
             touched
             this
             point
             in
             theyr
             former
             answeres
             ,
             but
             that
             part
             of
             the
             sentence
             onely
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             spoken
             of
             rich
             men
             .
             Now
             to
             answere
             too
             ,
             and
             resolue
             their
             obiections
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             euen
             as
             God
             can
             saue
             a
             rich
             man
             ,
             by
             chaunging
             him
             ,
             and
             emptying
             his
             heart
             of
             so
             much
             vaine
             trust
             and
             presumption
             ,
             as
             is
             therein
             ,
             and
             whereof
             beeing
             grosse
             and
             filled
             ,
             hee
             is
             vncapeable
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             heauen
             :
             so
             to
             him
             it
             is
             also
             easie
             ,
             to
             make
             a
             Camell
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             hauing
             circumcised
             and
             pared
             off
             the
             grossenesse
             thereof
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             which
             might
             hinder
             the
             same
             to
             passe
             .
             ******
          
           
           
             First
             ,
             that
             the
             Supper
             which
             is
             celebrated
             in
             the
             reformed
             Church
             ,
             is
             the
             true
             institution
             and
             ordinance
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Afterwards
             ,
             that
             the
             end
             for
             which
             it
             was
             instituted
             ,
             is
             to
             assure
             the
             faithfull
             of
             the
             true
             participation
             which
             they
             haue
             in
             the
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             crucified
             for
             their
             saluation
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             bloud
             shead
             for
             the
             remission
             of
             their
             sinnes
             ;
             and
             for
             the
             confirmation
             of
             the
             new
             couenant
             ,
             which
             God
             hath
             made
             with
             his
             people
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             necessarie
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             abide
             in
             their
             proper
             substance
             ,
             and
             that
             after
             consecration
             :
             otherwise
             they
             cannot
             be
             Sacraments
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Christ
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             vnbeleeuers
             presenting
             themselues
             at
             the
             Supper
             ,
             by
             meanes
             of
             their
             vnbeliefe
             ,
             can
             there
             no
             other
             thing
             receiue
             ,
             then
             the
             outward
             signes
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             that
             to
             their
             iudgement
             and
             condemnation
             .
          
           
             
             The
             Ministers
             on
             the
             other
             side
             propose
             vnto
             them
             touching
             the
             Masse
             ,
             that
             such
             as
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             now
             celebrated
             in
             the
             Romance
             Church
             ,
             it
             is
             nothing
             but
             a
             humane
             inuention
             and
             tradition
             .
          
           
             
             Also
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             corruption
             and
             prophanation
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             holy
             Supper
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             true
             and
             lawfull
             vse
             thereof
             .
          
           
             
             Also
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             an
             abuse
             of
             the
             Priesthood
             of
             Popish
             Priests
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             Priesthood
             in
             the
             new
             Testament
             ordained
             ,
             to
             get
             and
             obtaine
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ;
             nor
             also
             to
             make
             intercession
             ,
             and
             by
             prayers
             and
             merits
             to
             obtaine
             the
             fauour
             of
             God
             ,
             then
             the
             onely
             Priesthood
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             
             They
             say
             moreouer
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             blasphemie
             and
             sacriledge
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Romish
             Priests
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             oblation
             ,
             then
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             once
             made
             with
             his
             body
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ;
             by
             which
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             could
             be
             appeased
             ,
             his
             iustice
             satisfied
             ,
             sinners
             reconciled
             to
             God
             ,
             sinnes
             pardoned
             ,
             and
             the
             hand-writing
             of
             
             eternall
             death
             cancelled
             and
             abolished
             .
          
           
             Also
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             seperation
             of
             the
             Priest
             in
             the
             
             Masse
             ,
             from
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             is
             an
             abolishment
             of
             the
             Communion
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             and
             consequently
             damnable
             before
             God.
             
          
           
             And
             to
             be
             briefe
             ,
             the
             adoration
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             
             (
             be
             it
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             or
             out
             of
             the
             Masse
             )
             is
             an
             intollerable
             Idolatrie
             .
          
           
             Two
             points
             yet
             remaine
             in
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Ministers
             will
             admonish
             them
             .
             The
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             said
             Ministers
             haue
             neuer
             found
             in
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             
             that
             faith
             is
             a
             humane
             worke
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             is
             the
             worke
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             a
             gift
             which
             hee
             bestoweth
             vpon
             his
             elect
             .
             The
             other
             point
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             confesse
             they
             cannot
             bring
             forth
             one
             auncient
             Author
             ,
             which
             hath
             said
             in
             expresse
             termes
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             could
             not
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             for
             so
             much
             as
             the
             contrarie
             thereof
             seemed
             so
             absurd
             and
             straunge
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             so
             much
             against
             the
             reason
             and
             faith
             which
             all
             faithfull
             people
             ought
             to
             haue
             ,
             that
             they
             neuer
             thought
             such
             an
             opinion
             had
             found
             place
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             any
             man
             that
             was
             called
             a
             Christian
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             to
             ende
             this
             answere
             ,
             say
             that
             it
             will
             much
             more
             please
             them
             ,
             to
             handle
             the
             questions
             aforesaid
             ,
             then
             to
             dispute
             of
             the
             opening
             of
             doores
             ,
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             heauens
             ;
             as
             to
             their
             great
             griefe
             ,
             they
             haue
             done
             these
             dayes
             passed
             :
             and
             that
             for
             two
             reasons
             .
             The
             one
             ,
             because
             that
             the
             decyding
             and
             resolution
             of
             such
             questions
             ,
             cannot
             bee
             drawne
             nor
             gathered
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             .
             And
             the
             second
             ,
             because
             it
             cannot
             much
             serue
             either
             to
             the
             aduancement
             of
             the
             honour
             and
             glorie
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             the
             edification
             and
             instruction
             of
             his
             Church
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Thursday
                 the
                 25.
                 day
                 of
                 Iuly
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aforesaid
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             The
             Doctors
             reply
             to
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             sent
             vnto
             them
             by
             my
             Lord
             the
             Duke
             of
             Neuers
             ,
             the
             25.
             day
             of
             Iuly
             ,
             about
             8.
             of
             the
             clocke
             in
             the
             euening
             ,
             the
             yeare
             ,
             1566.
             
          
           
             WHere
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             doo
             great
             wrong
             to
             call
             them
             blasphemers
             ,
             seeing
             thereof
             they
             are
             innocent
             ,
             as
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             and
             Naboth
             ,
             to
             whome
             men
             falsly
             imputed
             such
             like
             crime
             .
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             therein
             doo
             imitate
             the
             good
             personages
             ,
             the
             Donatists
             :
             who
             still
             complained
             of
             the
             great
             iniuries
             and
             slaunders
             which
             they
             endured
             (
             said
             they
             )
             of
             the
             Catholikes
             ;
             and
             yet
             men
             know
             by
             the
             histories
             how
             it
             was
             ,
             and
             how
             much
             they
             were
             like
             to
             Christ
             ,
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             and
             Naboth
             :
             as
             may
             also
             be
             knowne
             the
             conformitie
             of
             the
             said
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             such
             holy
             examples
             .
             As
             much
             might
             the
             Anabaptists
             say
             to
             them
             of
             the
             Church
             called
             reformed
             ,
             when
             they
             call
             them
             heretikes
             .
             And
             as
             much
             might
             and
             did
             Seruetus
             say
             ,
             who
             for
             his
             blasphemies
             was
             burned
             at
             Geneua
             :
             reputing
             himselfe
             happie
             to
             be
             iudged
             by
             Caluin
             a
             blasphemer
             ,
             and
             to
             suffer
             for
             his
             doctrine
             ,
             the
             paines
             of
             death
             .
             We
             must
             not
             therfore
             beleeue
             that
             the
             Ministers
             are
             not
             blasphemers
             ,
             because
             more
             boldly
             then
             all
             other
             heretikes
             ,
             they
             reiect
             the
             name
             of
             blasphemer
             :
             but
             meet
             it
             is
             to
             examine
             whether
             their
             doctrine
             importeth
             blasphemie
             or
             not
             .
             Now
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             blasphemie
             worthy
             of
             more
             great
             execration
             ,
             then
             to
             denie
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             and
             no
             lesse
             it
             is
             then
             simply
             to
             denie
             that
             there
             is
             a
             God.
             So
             that
             such
             deniall
             importes
             an
             Atheisme
             .
             For
             to
             take
             from
             God
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             proper
             to
             his
             nature
             ,
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             there
             is
             no
             God.
             As
             it
             well
             pleaseth
             S.
             Basil
             ,
             writing
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Homilies
             ,
             intituled
             ,
             
               That
               God
               is
               not
               the
               Author
               of
               euill
               .
            
             That
             it
             is
             no
             lesse
             blasphemie
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             is
             author
             of
             euill
             ,
             then
             to
             say
             that
             God
             is
             not
             God.
             In
             so
             much
             as
             to
             take
             away
             from
             God
             
             his
             goodnesse
             ,
             which
             to
             him
             is
             naturall
             ,
             is
             wholy
             to
             take
             away
             his
             diuinitie
             .
             The
             like
             also
             may
             be
             said
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             that
             whosoeuer
             denieth
             or
             diminisheth
             the
             same
             ,
             he
             denieth
             also
             his
             diuinitie
             .
          
           
             The
             question
             then
             is
             ,
             to
             knowe
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             will
             abolish
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             not
             in
             proper
             termes
             (
             for
             they
             seeme
             to
             confesse
             it
             )
             but
             in
             affirming
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             measured
             according
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             so
             that
             he
             cannot
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             he
             will
             :
             and
             other
             like
             propositions
             contained
             in
             the
             precedent
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
             Whether
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             proued
             such
             propositions
             to
             containe
             blasphemies
             or
             no
             ,
             they
             refer
             them
             therin
             to
             euery
             man
             of
             sound
             iudgement
             ,
             who
             shal
             be
             any
             thing
             conuersant
             in
             holy
             scriptures
             ,
             and
             the
             bookes
             of
             auncient
             Christians
             :
             which
             shall
             also
             be
             knowne
             by
             the
             Ministers
             friuolous
             answeres
             in
             their
             last
             writing
             to
             the
             Doctors
             obiections
             .
             Who
             nothing
             maruel
             that
             the
             Ministers
             are
             deceiued
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             seeing
             they
             erre
             in
             the
             foundation
             ,
             and
             know
             not
             wherein
             it
             lyeth
             ,
             and
             why
             God
             is
             called
             almightie
             .
             For
             they
             haue
             learned
             of
             the
             scripture
             (
             say
             they
             )
             that
             God
             is
             almightie
             ,
             because
             hee
             can
             doo
             whatsoeuer
             he
             will
             doo
             :
             and
             that
             nothing
             can
             resist
             him
             ,
             which
             is
             rather
             as
             a
             signe
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             But
             it
             is
             not
             that
             (
             vnder
             correction
             )
             wherein
             it
             consisteth
             ;
             for
             knowledge
             whereof
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             considered
             according
             to
             it
             obiect
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             things
             possible
             to
             be
             done
             :
             so
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             possible
             which
             God
             cannot
             do
             .
             Now
             all
             without
             any
             exception
             ,
             is
             esteemed
             possible
             ,
             wherein
             is
             found
             no
             contradiction
             to
             be
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             :
             and
             that
             commeth
             not
             by
             default
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             (
             which
             can
             do
             all
             things
             )
             but
             of
             the
             repugnancie
             of
             the
             thing
             which
             cannot
             be
             .
             Which
             the
             Ministers
             from
             the
             beginning
             had
             well
             said
             in
             euery
             answere
             :
             but
             for
             that
             they
             had
             answered
             vpon
             some
             Interrogatories
             that
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             must
             bee
             measured
             by
             his
             will
             ,
             supposing
             to
             salue
             that
             error
             ,
             they
             are
             plunged
             in
             many
             other
             errors
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             (
             for
             not
             consessing
             to
             haue
             erred
             )
             they
             cannot
             rid
             themselues
             ,
             without
             falling
             into
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             absurdities
             .
          
           
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             deceiue
             themselues
             when
             they
             will
             limit
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             not
             extend
             it
             to
             all
             things
             generally
             ,
             that
             humane
             spirit
             can
             conceiue
             or
             imagine
             .
             For
             contrariwise
             ,
             it
             is
             doubtlesse
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             great
             aboue
             all
             conceit
             ,
             and
             imagination
             of
             the
             humane
             spirit
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             infinite
             and
             incomprehensible
             ,
             as
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             :
             God
             can
             do
             more
             then
             we
             demaund
             or
             vnderstand
             .
             And
             where
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             onely
             can
             doo
             all
             things
             which
             are
             not
             contrarie
             to
             his
             iustice
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             goodnesse
             ,
             and
             truth
             ,
             and
             therefore
             cannot
             doo
             generally
             all
             things
             .
             It
             hath
             alreadie
             beene
             shewed
             them
             ,
             that
             to
             bee
             able
             to
             doo
             things
             contrarie
             to
             the
             iustice
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             goodnesse
             ,
             and
             truth
             of
             God
             ,
             was
             not
             power
             ,
             but
             weakenesse
             .
             And
             by
             the
             selfe-same
             reason
             (
             as
             saith
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             in
             the
             place
             by
             the
             Doctors
             in
             theyr
             former
             obiection
             alledged
             )
             that
             he
             cannot
             do
             such
             things
             ,
             it
             is
             an
             argument
             of
             his
             omnipotencie
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             restraint
             thereof
             .
          
           
             And
             where
             the
             Ministers
             inferre
             ,
             that
             because
             God
             cannot
             do
             such
             things
             ,
             he
             can
             (
             by
             consequence
             )
             do
             nothing
             ;
             which
             is
             contrarie
             to
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             eternall
             will
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             and
             euer
             shall
             be
             ,
             to
             doo
             all
             things
             well
             and
             wisely
             ,
             with
             number
             ,
             waight
             ,
             and
             measure
             ,
             and
             without
             that
             there
             is
             any
             iniustice
             or
             contradiction
             in
             all
             that
             which
             he
             doth
             .
             Men
             may
             see
             how
             the
             Ministers
             disguise
             the
             matter
             in
             controuersie
             ,
             concealing
             haue
             couched
             in
             their
             former
             writing
             ,
             touching
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             against
             which
             (
             said
             they
             )
             God
             could
             doo
             nothing
             :
             and
             the
             other
             words
             of
             blasphemie
             ,
             whereof
             the
             Doctors
             rebuked
             them
             ,
             and
             which
             they
             durst
             not
             insert
             in
             their
             last
             answere
             ,
             because
             their
             conscience
             accused
             them
             ,
             and
             made
             them
             know
             ,
             that
             such
             affirmations
             could
             not
             be
             maintained
             ;
             and
             from
             which
             ,
             they
             cannot
             escape
             ,
             but
             in
             denying
             to
             haue
             written
             them
             ,
             and
             in
             accusing
             the
             Doctors
             of
             slaunder
             :
             as
             if
             by
             adding
             or
             diminishing
             ,
             they
             had
             altered
             and
             chaunged
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
             To
             be
             purged
             of
             which
             crime
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             pray
             ,
             that
             recourse
             be
             had
             to
             their
             last
             obiection
             ,
             where
             these
             words
             are
             inserted
             in
             the
             first
             article
             .
          
           
           
             The
             which
             blasphemies
             are
             drawne
             out
             of
             the
             proper
             words
             of
             the
             Ministers
             first
             article
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             referre
             them
             to
             the
             conference
             may
             bee
             made
             of
             their
             last
             writing
             ,
             with
             that
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
             So
             that
             if
             it
             bee
             found
             (
             as
             certainly
             it
             shall
             be
             found
             )
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             faithfully
             cyted
             the
             proper
             words
             of
             the
             Ministers
             writing
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             will
             not
             auouch
             ;
             it
             shall
             be
             knowne
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             hitherto
             maintained
             blasphemous
             propositions
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Doctors
             therein
             haue
             no
             way
             wronged
             them
             :
             hauing
             pardoned
             their
             persons
             ,
             being
             content
             (
             of
             the
             doctrine
             )
             to
             say
             their
             simple
             opinion
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             to
             shewe
             that
             they
             haue
             iust
             cause
             to
             accuse
             the
             Doctors
             of
             slaunder
             ,
             say
             first
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             broken
             in
             two
             their
             proposition
             :
             which
             was
             such
             ,
             that
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             measured
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             things
             onely
             which
             be
             agreeable
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             be
             not
             derogate
             either
             to
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             truth
             ,
             nature
             ,
             or
             to
             the
             order
             which
             he
             hath
             willed
             to
             establish
             in
             the
             world
             :
             and
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             not
             taken
             but
             the
             last
             part
             onely
             .
             Who
             for
             their
             purgation
             ,
             say
             that
             they
             haue
             alwaies
             considered
             what
             was
             put
             in
             difference
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             God
             could
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             .
             And
             to
             examine
             the
             truth
             of
             this
             question
             ,
             before
             they
             put
             it
             in
             writing
             ,
             they
             haue
             reduced
             the
             whole
             to
             euery
             part
             of
             the
             Ministers
             proposition
             ,
             and
             haue
             thus
             reasoned
             .
             God
             can
             do
             all
             things
             which
             are
             agreeable
             to
             his
             will
             :
             the
             which
             is
             knowne
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             hold
             )
             when
             there
             is
             nothing
             that
             derogateth
             ,
             either
             to
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             his
             truth
             ,
             his
             nature
             ,
             or
             the
             order
             by
             him
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Now
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             derogateth
             not
             from
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God.
             For
             God
             should
             therefore
             not
             leaue
             to
             be
             wise
             .
             Also
             it
             derogateth
             not
             from
             his
             truth
             :
             for
             he
             hath
             neuer
             said
             ,
             that
             he
             could
             not
             do
             it
             :
             nor
             from
             his
             nature
             .
             For
             although
             he
             should
             do
             it
             ,
             hee
             should
             not
             cease
             to
             be
             God.
             If
             then
             there
             be
             any
             repugnancie
             ,
             it
             should
             be
             ,
             because
             it
             should
             derogate
             from
             the
             order
             by
             God
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Which
             was
             the
             cause
             that
             they
             stayed
             not
             but
             on
             the
             last
             article
             .
             The
             Ministers
             also
             would
             
             not
             say
             as
             the
             Doctors
             suppose
             )
             that
             to
             be
             able
             to
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             was
             a
             thing
             repugnant
             ,
             either
             to
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             truth
             ,
             or
             nature
             of
             God
             :
             if
             not
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             thinke
             it
             to
             repugne
             the
             order
             by
             God
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Ioyned
             heerevnto
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             hauing
             put
             this
             proposition
             aboue
             said
             ,
             for
             a
             rule
             to
             knowe
             what
             God
             can
             doo
             ;
             when
             they
             would
             apply
             this
             rule
             to
             the
             matter
             in
             controuersie
             ,
             then
             should
             they
             thus
             say
             :
             To
             which
             things
             ,
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             put
             foorth
             (
             namely
             that
             one
             body
             ,
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             may
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             )
             repugneth
             .
             But
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             only
             sayd
             &
             written
             ,
             to
             which
             ,
             (
             that
             is
             to
             say
             )
             order
             &c.
             
             For
             such
             relatiue
             cannot
             agree
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             next
             antecedent
             .
             Wherein
             is
             clearly
             seene
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             runne
             into
             the
             cryme
             of
             slaunder
             ,
             which
             they
             falsly
             obiect
             to
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             And
             whereas
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             take
             not
             the
             terme
             of
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             in
             the
             lyke
             sence
             ,
             as
             they
             vnderstand
             it
             :
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             taken
             the
             terme
             according
             to
             the
             vnderstanding
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             therof
             giuen
             :
             euen
             as
             they
             haue
             knowne
             by
             their
             words
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             heretofore
             vsed
             .
             For
             when
             the
             questiō
             was
             to
             set
             forth
             some
             myracle
             done
             by
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             against
             ,
             or
             aboue
             the
             nature
             of
             things
             created
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             had
             alwayes
             recourse
             to
             the
             common
             order
             of
             nature
             .
             As
             when
             speech
             hath
             bene
             of
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             of
             the
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Sepulchre
             ,
             of
             the
             wombe
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             and
             of
             one
             body
             in
             diuers
             places
             ;
             No
             other
             reason
             to
             contradict
             it
             haue
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             was
             all
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             touching
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             :
             which
             cannot
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             common
             order
             which
             is
             seene
             in
             nature
             .
             Therefore
             the
             Doctors
             (
             so
             taking
             the
             same
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             sufficiently
             declared
             in
             their
             former
             answeres
             ,
             against
             the
             order
             of
             nature
             ▪
             )
             haue
             well
             inferred
             against
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             God
             could
             not
             then
             do
             a
             myracle
             ,
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             The
             Doctors
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             obserued
             not
             this
             difference
             ,
             aboue
             or
             against
             nature
             :
             as
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             
             Tertullian
             here
             before
             alledged
             ,
             appeareth
             :
             Where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             God
             against
             nature
             ,
             can
             make
             a
             man
             flye
             as
             well
             as
             a
             byrd
             .
             But
             they
             will
             not
             stay
             vppon
             the
             rygor
             of
             wordes
             ,
             but
             apply
             themselues
             to
             the
             Ministers
             with
             whome
             they
             conferre
             .
             Who
             call
             it
             a
             worke
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             foras
             much
             as
             it
             withstansteth
             the
             common
             dispositiō
             and
             proprieties
             of
             bodies
             .
             And
             by
             such
             reason
             (
             say
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             all
             other
             myracles
             ought
             also
             to
             be
             esteemed
             against
             the
             order
             in
             the
             world
             established
             :
             because
             they
             be
             against
             the
             common
             disposition
             and
             proprietie
             of
             nature
             .
          
           
             And
             yet
             following
             the
             vnderstanding
             which
             the
             Ministers
             now
             giue
             of
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             for
             the
             estate
             and
             disposition
             which
             God
             hath
             established
             ,
             conserueth
             and
             maintaineth
             all
             things
             ,
             by
             his
             prouidence
             and
             eternall
             and
             immutable
             will
             ,
             to
             gouerne
             all
             things
             rightly
             ,
             and
             hinder
             any
             confusion
             to
             happen
             to
             his
             workes
             .
             Here
             againe
             do
             the
             Ministers
             commit
             a
             new
             blasphemy
             against
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             GOD
             :
             for
             hee
             can
             wholly
             chaunge
             ,
             vnchaunge
             ,
             and
             destroy
             such
             order
             as
             hee
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             (
             albeit
             hee
             will
             neuer
             do
             the
             same
             )
             and
             make
             a
             new
             world
             more
             perfect
             then
             this
             .
             And
             were
             it
             so
             ,
             that
             hee
             could
             do
             nothing
             against
             this
             order
             ,
             his
             power
             should
             be
             stinted
             and
             limitted
             .
             For
             hee
             could
             not
             do
             but
             certaine
             effects
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             order
             which
             hee
             had
             established
             in
             the
             worlde
             .
             Which
             should
             not
             happen
             by
             the
             repugnancie
             of
             the
             nature
             of
             Creatures
             :
             but
             in
             as
             much
             as
             God
             himselfe
             should
             bee
             tyed
             .
             And
             so
             (
             against
             the
             scripture
             )
             should
             his
             hand
             be
             shortened
             ,
             and
             his
             power
             forced
             and
             limitted
             :
             From
             which
             blasphemy
             ,
             infinite
             others
             issue
             ,
             as
             the
             Doctors
             when
             occasion
             shall
             serue
             ,
             haue
             purposed
             to
             shewe
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             2.
             &
             third
             blasphemies
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             noted
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             by
             the
             new
             interpretation
             of
             the
             order
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             in
             one
             word
             they
             haue
             fully
             answered
             .
             Which
             (
             to
             dissolue
             the
             argumēts
             produced
             by
             the
             Doctors
             )
             commeth
             nothing
             to
             the
             purpose
             .
          
           
           
             And
             the
             Ministers
             passe
             ouer
             the
             alledged
             places
             of
             scriptures
             ,
             which
             declare
             the
             blasphemie
             ,
             and
             dissemble
             the
             contradiction
             of
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             of
             Caluin
             ,
             touching
             the
             prouidence
             of
             God
             ,
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             not
             to
             the
             Doctors
             obiectiō
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             third
             blasphemie
             flow
             many
             others
             ;
             least
             in
             confessing
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             might
             heape
             blasphemie
             vpon
             blasphemie
             ,
             and
             make
             their
             doctrine
             by
             this
             meane
             ,
             odious
             toall
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             fourth
             blasphemie
             ,
             vse
             the
             Ministers
             a
             distinction
             of
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             may
             two
             wayes
             bee
             considered
             .
             The
             first
             is
             called
             the
             will
             knowne
             by
             signes
             :
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             will
             of
             good
             pleasure
             .
             The
             Ministers
             confesse
             ,
             that
             according
             to
             the
             first
             ,
             God
             can
             doo
             more
             then
             he
             will
             ;
             and
             not
             according
             to
             the
             second
             ,
             which
             is
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             equall
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             &
             is
             hidden
             and
             vnknowne
             to
             men
             .
             The
             which
             distinction
             if
             it
             ought
             to
             haue
             place
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             obiect
             ,
             that
             the
             foundation
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             wherevpon
             they
             stay
             the
             pretended
             truth
             of
             this
             proposition
             :
             God
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             is
             wholly
             destroyed
             .
             For
             the
             Ministers
             will
             haue
             the
             power
             of
             God
             to
             be
             measured
             according
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             not
             according
             to
             the
             second
             ,
             which
             is
             hidden
             vnto
             men
             .
             It
             behoueth
             then
             ,
             that
             this
             be
             taken
             according
             to
             the
             first
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             they
             confesse
             that
             God
             can
             do
             more
             then
             he
             will
             do
             .
             Whereof
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             the
             rule
             by
             them
             giuen
             to
             measure
             Gods
             power
             ,
             is
             false
             .
             For
             it
             cannot
             be
             measured
             by
             his
             will
             ,
             seeing
             he
             can
             do
             more
             then
             he
             will.
             
          
           
             Moreouer
             the
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             should
             not
             require
             thē
             to
             proue
             that
             God
             hath
             willed
             that
             one
             body
             should
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             to
             declare
             that
             he
             could
             do
             it
             .
             For
             the
             Doctors
             might
             obiect
             ,
             that
             to
             teach
             that
             God
             may
             doo
             something
             ,
             it
             needeth
             not
             to
             proue
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             formerly
             willed
             it
             .
             For
             (
             according
             to
             the
             Ministers
             confession
             )
             God
             can
             do
             more
             then
             he
             will.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             adde
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             will
             of
             God
             appeareth
             not
             to
             vs
             ,
             but
             by
             signes
             ,
             words
             ,
             and
             effects
             :
             and
             that
             the
             
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             prouidence
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             agree
             )
             is
             hidden
             vnto
             men
             :
             that
             the
             Ministers
             cannot
             affirme
             ,
             and
             shewe
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             established
             such
             order
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             may
             not
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             For
             meete
             it
             were
             they
             should
             teach
             such
             an
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             declaration
             of
             his
             will.
             Oft
             times
             haue
             the
             Ministers
             bene
             required
             ,
             to
             bring
             one
             onely
             place
             of
             scripture
             ,
             where
             such
             a
             will
             of
             God
             is
             manifest
             :
             and
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             hee
             cannot
             make
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             place
             of
             Tertullian
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             for
             vnderstanding
             thereof
             ,
             refer
             themselues
             to
             euery
             man
             of
             sound
             iudgement
             :
             and
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             ill
             to
             the
             purpose
             alledged
             Theodoret
             :
             and
             it
             maketh
             more
             against
             them
             ,
             then
             with
             them
             .
             For
             when
             he
             writeth
             that
             it
             must
             not
             be
             indeterminately
             said
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             do
             all
             things
             ,
             comprehending
             therein
             good
             and
             euill
             ;
             in
             that
             he
             maketh
             no
             restraint
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             doth
             amplifie
             the
             same
             :
             in
             so
             much
             ,
             that
             not
             to
             be
             able
             to
             do
             euil
             things
             ,
             is
             both
             a
             vertue
             and
             power
             ,
             as
             before
             hath
             beene
             largely
             declared
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             do
             instant
             the
             Doctors
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             willed
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             two
             places
             :
             the
             Doctors
             answere
             ,
             that
             these
             are
             two
             different
             questions
             ,
             whether
             God
             can
             do
             it
             :
             or
             whether
             he
             hath
             willed
             it
             .
             And
             when
             it
             shall
             be
             confessed
             (
             as
             it
             ought
             to
             bee
             of
             all
             Christians
             )
             that
             the
             power
             is
             in
             God
             ,
             very
             easie
             shall
             it
             be
             to
             shewe
             the
             will
             ,
             by
             the
             word
             ,
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Ascention
             :
             which
             they
             of
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             religion
             haue
             accustomed
             to
             depraue
             ,
             and
             disswade
             men
             from
             ,
             by
             the
             impossibilitie
             which
             they
             faigne
             to
             bee
             in
             God
             ,
             to
             put
             one
             body
             in
             two
             places
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Doctors
             leaue
             it
             to
             the
             readers
             iudgement
             ,
             whether
             S.
             Augustine
             haue
             bene
             cyted
             by
             the
             Ministers
             to
             the
             purpose
             or
             no.
             And
             to
             that
             which
             concerneth
             whether
             ihe
             quantitie
             be
             essentiall
             to
             a
             body
             ,
             or
             not
             :
             the
             Doctors
             (
             speaking
             of
             a
             body
             as
             doth
             Philosophers
             ,
             namely
             ,
             
               In
               predicamento
               
               quantitatis
            
             )
             haue
             neuer
             doubted
             but
             it
             is
             essentiall
             .
             But
             the
             difficultie
             is
             to
             know
             ,
             whether
             to
             be
             circumscript
             in
             a
             place
             certaine
             ,
             be
             essentiall
             to
             a
             body
             ?
             And
             the
             Doctors
             suppose
             they
             haue
             sufficiently
             proued
             that
             it
             is
             not
             essentiall
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             is
             an
             accident
             naturall
             to
             a
             body
             .
             And
             they
             verifie
             their
             saying
             ,
             by
             the
             definition
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             wherein
             all
             essentiall
             reason
             is
             comprised
             :
             and
             such
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             a
             body
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             firme
             quantitie
             of
             three
             dimensions
             ,
             length
             ,
             breadth
             ,
             and
             deepenesse
             :
             where
             no
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             circumscription
             of
             place
             in
             the
             saide
             definition
             .
          
           
             What
             pertaineth
             to
             the
             question
             concerning
             places
             aboue
             the
             heauen
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             (
             as
             they
             are
             wont
             )
             do
             lightly
             passe
             ouer
             .
             And
             for
             want
             of
             good
             answere
             ,
             they
             wrong
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             calling
             them
             Sophisters
             .
             And
             that
             which
             they
             bring
             to
             confirme
             that
             our
             Lord
             is
             in
             one
             place
             aboue
             the
             heauen
             ,
             is
             ouer
             friuolous
             .
             For
             by
             the
             same
             reason
             might
             one
             conclude
             ,
             that
             the
             diuinitie
             is
             circumscript
             .
             And
             Aduerbes
             signifying
             place
             ,
             shall
             be
             found
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             when
             it
             speaketh
             of
             the
             diuinitie
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             when
             it
             speaketh
             of
             the
             humanitie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             impute
             to
             the
             Doctors
             that
             they
             confesse
             their
             Canons
             to
             be
             false
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             manifest
             slaunder
             .
             For
             the
             Doctors
             acknoweldge
             not
             any
             Canons
             ,
             but
             in
             as
             much
             as
             they
             are
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Councels
             ,
             &
             other
             bookes
             authenticke
             :
             and
             not
             according
             as
             they
             are
             extracted
             of
             any
             particular
             person
             :
             as
             is
             the
             polinge
             of
             Gratian
             :
             wherevnto
             they
             giue
             no
             credit
             ,
             but
             as
             much
             as
             that
             which
             hee
             cyteth
             deserueth
             .
          
           
             For
             resolution
             of
             the
             8.
             article
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             send
             the
             Ministers
             to
             the
             schoole
             of
             Philosophers
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             in
             a
             predicament
             of
             substance
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             kind
             of
             substance
             :
             and
             in
             a
             predicament
             of
             quantitie
             ,
             an
             other
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             kinde
             of
             quantitie
             .
             And
             to
             learne
             them
             also
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             which
             is
             of
             quantitie
             ,
             is
             accidentall
             (
             and
             not
             essentiall
             )
             to
             a
             body
             of
             predicament
             of
             substance
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             erre
             against
             all
             Philosophie
             ,
             
             calling
             a
             materiall
             substance
             ,
             incorporall
             .
             But
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             rest
             vppon
             such
             things
             ,
             and
             are
             much
             grieued
             that
             they
             haue
             not
             to
             do
             with
             people
             better
             grounded
             in
             Ppilosophie
             .
             For
             that
             ,
             being
             such
             ,
             they
             could
             better
             touch
             the
             reason
             then
             the
             Ministers
             do
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             doo
             maintaine
             the
             consequence
             of
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             placle
             ,
             to
             infer
             it
             for
             necessarie
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             for
             there
             is
             like
             reason
             ,
             and
             like
             inconuenience
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             other
             .
             And
             therefore
             if
             the
             one
             be
             to
             be
             done
             ,
             the
             other
             is
             possible
             :
             and
             so
             they
             referre
             it
             to
             the
             readers
             iudgements
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             complaine
             of
             the
             time
             they
             haue
             lost
             in
             reading
             the
             reasons
             ,
             arguments
             ,
             and
             allegations
             ,
             touching
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             and
             other
             articles
             .
             The
             Doctors
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             matter
             in
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             no
             cause
             to
             complaine
             of
             ouer-great
             prolixitie
             ,
             for
             feare
             of
             loosing
             time
             .
             And
             that
             there
             is
             matter
             sufficient
             to
             spend
             the
             time
             withall
             ,
             would
             they
             with
             patience
             (
             bringing
             with
             them
             good
             will
             ,
             and
             all
             passion
             excluded
             )
             examine
             the
             testimonies
             of
             the
             Auncients
             ,
             and
             reasons
             drawne
             from
             the
             same
             .
             But
             the
             Doctors
             do
             wel
             proue
             ,
             that
             when
             there
             is
             any
             thing
             which
             presseth
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             then
             set
             they
             a
             good
             face
             on
             the
             matter
             ,
             and
             make
             semblance
             to
             haue
             right
             on
             their
             side
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             are
             much
             amazed
             ,
             how
             the
             Ministers
             are
             so
             bold
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             Iustin
             and
             all
             the
             Auncients
             haue
             not
             placed
             the
             myracle
             of
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             doores
             ,
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             seeing
             that
             Iustin
             expresly
             proposeth
             the
             question
             ,
             how
             it
             is
             possible
             that
             a
             thicke
             bodie
             is
             not
             hindered
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             .
             In
             the
             answere
             of
             which
             question
             ,
             they
             conclude
             the
             same
             :
             that
             for
             as
             much
             as
             such
             myracle
             was
             done
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             Apostles
             esteemed
             it
             was
             not
             a
             true
             bodie
             ,
             but
             a
             spirite
             :
             as
             if
             the
             bodie
             had
             beene
             transformed
             into
             a
             spirite
             :
             which
             Iustin
             saith
             did
             not
             happen
             :
             but
             that
             without
             any
             chaunge
             of
             nature
             ,
             such
             an
             operation
             ,
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             closed
             doore
             ,
             was
             giuen
             to
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             by
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             
             and
             Iustin
             saith
             not
             ,
             that
             any
             myracle
             was
             wrought
             in
             the
             sea
             ,
             when
             Iesus
             walked
             therevpon
             :
             but
             that
             by
             the
             almightinesse
             which
             was
             in
             him
             ,
             he
             made
             it
             walkeable
             ,
             without
             any
             chaunge
             of
             the
             nature
             ,
             either
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             sea
             :
             although
             that
             the
             myracle
             were
             in
             his
             body
             ,
             which
             against
             it
             nature
             so
             walked
             .
             It
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             alledge
             out
             of
             S.
             Hillary
             ,
             that
             the
             power
             of
             God
             made
             passage
             to
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord.
             For
             he
             saith
             not
             that
             onely
             ;
             but
             addeth
             the
             manner
             of
             the
             deed
             ▪
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             passed
             without
             change
             or
             diminishing
             of
             it
             nature
             ,
             and
             without
             hauing
             any
             opening
             .
             But
             that
             by
             the
             operation
             of
             the
             almightinesse
             ,
             he
             passed
             notwithstanding
             ,
             which
             wrought
             in
             his
             body
             ,
             piercing
             the
             shut
             and
             closed
             places
             :
             
               Nihil
               (
               inquit
               )
               cessit
               ex
               solido
               parietum
               :
            
             nothing
             ceased
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             of
             the
             firmnesse
             of
             the
             walles
             :
             and
             other
             like
             words
             which
             he
             bringeth
             :
             of
             which
             can
             no
             other
             thing
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             a
             piercing
             of
             many
             bodies
             .
             S.
             Chrisostome
             expresly
             disputeth
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             which
             against
             it
             nature
             passed
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             ,
             as
             through
             the
             wombe
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             without
             fraction
             .
             And
             he
             saith
             not
             simply
             that
             hee
             knoweth
             not
             wherein
             the
             worke
             consisted
             (
             for
             he
             describeth
             it
             )
             but
             he
             amplifieth
             the
             power
             of
             the
             worke
             :
             and
             saith
             ,
             that
             he
             cannot
             comprehend
             the
             reason
             and
             greatnesse
             thereof
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             proceeded
             from
             the
             power
             of
             the
             incomprehensible
             Cod.
             Concerning
             this
             whole
             point
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             refer
             them
             to
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             bookes
             ,
             without
             more
             debating
             thereof
             against
             the
             Ministers
             :
             who
             think
             alwayes
             to
             abuse
             the
             ignorance
             of
             those
             which
             beleeue
             thē
             ,
             denying
             or
             affirming
             what
             they
             thinke
             good
             .
             And
             it
             troubleth
             and
             grieueth
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             constrained
             to
             repeate
             the
             former
             reasons
             so
             familiarly
             ,
             and
             clearly
             deducted
             :
             But
             the
             Ministers
             euasions
             so
             often
             repeated
             ,
             enforce
             thē
             eftsoones
             to
             inculeate
             that
             ,
             which
             of
             these
             articles
             ought
             to
             be
             beleeued
             by
             the
             common
             consent
             of
             the
             Fathers
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             are
             abashed
             at
             the
             maner
             of
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             :
             who
             without
             regard
             of
             that
             hath
             bene
             obiected
             to
             them
             ,
             say
             what
             they
             please
             ,
             without
             answering
             to
             the
             arguments
             
             of
             the
             matter
             proposed
             :
             As
             they
             do
             in
             the
             article
             of
             the
             byrth
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             In
             the
             deductiō
             wherof
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             brought
             many
             testimonies
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             which
             hold
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             (
             as
             he
             was
             also
             there
             conceaued
             )
             myracuculously
             issued
             from
             the
             wombe
             of
             his
             mother
             :
             And
             that
             the
             said
             Fathers
             did
             witnesse
             ,
             such
             byrth
             to
             haue
             bin
             made
             without
             any
             fraction
             in
             the
             body
             of
             the
             virgin
             ,
             and
             condemned
             of
             heresie
             all
             those
             which
             held
             the
             contrary
             .
             Which
             thing
             the
             Ministers
             will
             yet
             maintain
             ,
             and
             for
             full
             answere
             ,
             affirme
             the
             same
             :
             relying
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             vpon
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             not
             daring
             to
             say
             openly
             ,
             that
             to
             cleaue
             to
             their
             proper
             sence
             ,
             they
             reiect
             the
             determination
             of
             the
             ancient
             &
             primitiue
             Church
             .
             Which
             is
             very
             cleare
             notwithstanding
             by
             their
             answere
             to
             this
             article
             :
             wherein
             they
             falsly
             cyte
             the
             scripture
             ,
             as
             though
             it
             contained
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             byrth
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             
               Aperta
               fuerit
               vulua
               virginis
            
             :
             The
             wombe
             of
             the
             virgin
             was
             opened
             .
             And
             where
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             such
             an
             opening
             repugneth
             not
             the
             corporall
             virginitie
             ,
             (
             whereof
             is
             the
             question
             )
             they
             belye
             the
             resolution
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             which
             haue
             determined
             of
             that
             deed
             .
          
           
             Whether
             in
             the
             Article
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             there
             be
             but
             coniectures
             ,
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Doctors
             obiection
             will
             witnesse
             .
             The
             which
             they
             may
             see
             ,
             that
             desire
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             do
             complaine
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             article
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             do
             wrong
             and
             scoffe
             them
             ;
             the
             Doctors
             doubt
             not
             ,
             but
             the
             Ministers
             are
             sore
             troubled
             ,
             that
             their
             subtilties
             and
             maner
             of
             dealing
             are
             discouered
             :
             the
             which
             ,
             did
             men
             well
             vnderstand
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             suffer
             themselues
             so
             easily
             (
             as
             heeretofore
             )
             to
             be
             deceiued
             .
          
           
             The
             solution
             which
             the
             Ministers
             pretend
             to
             giue
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             not
             
               Aphantos
               autois
            
             ,
             but
             Ap'auton
             is
             impertinent
             .
             For
             howsoeuer
             it
             was
             ,
             our
             Lord
             was
             inuisible
             to
             his
             Disciples
             ,
             were
             it
             by
             suddaine
             vanishing
             ,
             or
             otherwise
             ;
             the
             which
             vanishing
             ,
             in
             a
             body
             present
             to
             perfect
             sight
             ,
             cannot
             be
             done
             ,
             except
             the
             body
             be
             made
             to
             them
             inuisible
             .
             And
             howsoeuer
             
             it
             be
             ,
             the
             Greeke
             Text
             beareth
             inuisible
             and
             vnapparant
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             article
             of
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             heauens
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             as
             they
             are
             wont
             ,
             answere
             not
             to
             the
             purpose
             :
             For
             it
             is
             not
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             heauens
             were
             clouen
             asunder
             ,
             or
             opened
             ,
             when
             he
             ascended
             thither
             :
             as
             at
             the
             baptisme
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             is
             spoken
             of
             the
             vision
             of
             S.
             Stephen
             .
             But
             the
             scripture
             saith
             expresly
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             pierced
             the
             Heauens
             ,
             and
             not
             that
             the
             Heauens
             were
             opened
             vnto
             him
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             cannot
             forbeare
             to
             slaunder
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             in
             deprauing
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             their
             writings
             :
             as
             is
             seene
             in
             this
             present
             answere
             ,
             where
             the
             Ministers
             faineto
             haue
             vnderstood
             ,
             in
             that
             place
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             mencioning
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             haue
             pierced
             the
             Heauens
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             by
             the
             name
             of
             Heauen
             ,
             will
             haue
             the
             ayre
             to
             be
             signified
             :
             which
             the
             Doctors
             neuer
             thought
             :
             but
             haue
             oft
             times
             sayd
             ,
             that
             when
             it
             mencioneth
             the
             opening
             of
             the
             Heauens
             ,
             by
             the
             Heauens
             it
             vnderstandeth
             the
             aire
             :
             which
             so
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             applyed
             ,
             when
             our
             Lorde
             is
             sayd
             to
             haue
             pierced
             the
             Heauens
             .
          
           
             By
             such
             manner
             of
             answere
             do
             the
             Ministers
             thinke
             ,
             to
             cause
             the
             force
             of
             the
             Doctors
             reason
             to
             be
             forgotten
             .
             Who
             said
             thus
             :
             If
             when
             it
             is
             said
             in
             the
             scripture
             that
             the
             Heauens
             were
             opened
             ,
             the
             words
             ought
             strictly
             to
             be
             taken
             ,
             and
             truly
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             that
             the
             heauens
             were
             opened
             :
             It
             likewise
             behoueth
             ,
             when
             the
             scripture
             saith
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             pierced
             the
             Heauens
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             [
             pierced
             ]
             be
             taken
             in
             it
             proper
             signification
             and
             strictly
             :
             which
             thing
             directly
             repugneth
             the
             diuision
             or
             opening
             ,
             as
             things
             opposed
             one
             to
             another
             .
             To
             which
             reason
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             answere
             giuen
             ,
             more
             then
             ordinarily
             is
             to
             the
             other
             arguments
             of
             the
             said
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             differēce
             which
             the
             Ministers
             put
             ,
             between
             the
             sight
             of
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             which
             stretched
             euen
             to
             the
             height
             of
             Heauen
             ,
             and
             the
             being
             of
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             :
             and
             that
             the
             one
             is
             a
             myracle
             in
             nature
             :
             and
             the
             other
             a
             wonder
             against
             nature
             ,
             and
             the
             will
             of
             GOD.
             The
             Ministers
             (
             good
             Secretaries
             of
             Gods
             Counsaile
             
             and
             will
             )
             should
             do
             much
             ,
             if
             they
             could
             teach
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             willed
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             cannot
             will
             the
             other
             :
             and
             then
             shall
             there
             bee
             reason
             for
             their
             saying
             ,
             to
             shewe
             the
             difference
             they
             haue
             assigned
             betweene
             these
             two
             .
          
           
             The
             inconstancie
             of
             the
             Ministers
             is
             knowne
             in
             the
             article
             where
             the
             Camell
             is
             mentioned
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             God
             can
             cause
             him
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             For
             in
             the
             Ministers
             first
             answere
             ,
             made
             without
             any
             distinction
             ,
             haue
             they
             answered
             ,
             that
             to
             make
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             was
             a
             thing
             impossible
             with
             God.
             And
             in
             the
             second
             answere
             do
             they
             alledge
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             (
             in
             saying
             ,
             that
             what
             was
             impossible
             with
             men
             ,
             was
             possible
             with
             God
             )
             no
             other
             thing
             pretended
             ,
             but
             to
             answere
             the
             question
             which
             his
             Disciples
             had
             proposed
             :
             namely
             ,
             who
             could
             be
             saued
             :
             answering
             wherevnto
             ,
             he
             said
             :
             that
             it
             was
             impossible
             with
             men
             :
             and
             that
             such
             sentence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             saluation
             and
             conuersion
             of
             rich
             men
             onely
             :
             which
             exclusiue
             speech
             (
             when
             the
             Ministers
             affirme
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             saying
             ,
             that
             what
             is
             impossible
             to
             man
             ,
             is
             possible
             with
             God
             ;
             must
             not
             be
             vnderstood
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             saluation
             of
             the
             rich
             )
             clearely
             sheweth
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             intent
             was
             to
             say
             by
             their
             answere
             ,
             that
             our
             Lord
             ment
             not
             to
             comprehend
             vnder
             this
             proposition
             ;
             [
             That
             which
             is
             impossible
             with
             men
             ,
             is
             possible
             with
             God
             ]
             :
             the
             possibilitie
             to
             make
             a
             Camell
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             As
             if
             this
             proposition
             were
             not
             to
             be
             generally
             vnderstood
             ,
             whereof
             our
             Lord
             inferreth
             this
             particular
             .
             It
             is
             possible
             with
             God
             to
             saue
             a
             rich
             man.
             And
             hee
             himselfe
             by
             expresse
             words
             speaketh
             generally
             :
             
               Omnia
               apud
               Deum
               possibilia
               snnt
            
             .
             With
             God
             are
             all
             things
             possible
             .
             The
             Doctors
             desire
             ,
             that
             they
             which
             can
             read
             this
             present
             writing
             ,
             would
             note
             the
             starting
             holes
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             wontedly
             auouch
             ,
             and
             denie
             the
             errors
             they
             maintaine
             ,
             when
             they
             are
             thereof
             by
             the
             trueth
             conuinced
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             Ministers
             (
             not
             daring
             to
             persist
             in
             defence
             ,
             that
             
             God
             cannot
             cause
             a
             Camell
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             )
             haue
             inuented
             a
             very
             foolish
             interpretation
             ,
             in
             confessing
             that
             God
             can
             do
             it
             ,
             but
             that
             the
             meanes
             should
             be
             in
             this
             ,
             that
             God
             might
             pare
             off
             and
             diminish
             the
             grossenesse
             of
             a
             Camell
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             things
             which
             might
             hinder
             it
             passage
             there
             .
             But
             that
             glose
             the
             Text
             cannot
             brooke
             :
             For
             our
             Lord
             speaketh
             of
             a
             thing
             wholy
             impossible
             to
             men
             :
             which
             should
             not
             be
             .
             For
             although
             to
             make
             and
             bring
             forth
             a
             Camell
             of
             so
             little
             stature
             and
             bignesse
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             passe
             thorow
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             were
             a
             thing
             impossible
             with
             man
             ,
             yet
             if
             God
             brought
             forth
             such
             a
             one
             ,
             or
             if
             he
             did
             so
             much
             diminish
             the
             greatnesse
             and
             grossenesse
             of
             a
             Camell
             ,
             and
             that
             man
             might
             hold
             the
             same
             ,
             he
             might
             well
             cause
             it
             to
             passe
             .
             But
             the
             question
             is
             not
             of
             the
             production
             of
             a
             Camell
             ,
             or
             of
             making
             him
             great
             or
             small
             ;
             but
             of
             causing
             him
             to
             passe
             .
             The
             which
             (
             were
             hee
             so
             little
             )
             should
             not
             be
             a
             myracle
             as
             touching
             the
             passage
             ,
             but
             onely
             touching
             the
             production
             of
             such
             a
             liuing
             Creature
             ,
             or
             the
             chaunging
             of
             his
             quantitie
             .
             Also
             in
             taking
             this
             name
             Camelus
             ,
             for
             a
             Cable
             (
             as
             Caluin
             thought
             best
             )
             the
             absurditie
             of
             this
             new
             exposition
             shall
             better
             appeare
             .
             For
             well
             may
             man
             so
             much
             lessen
             a
             Cable
             ,
             by
             the
             detraction
             of
             it
             matter
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             ende
             he
             may
             make
             it
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             Moreouer
             it
             should
             be
             easie
             for
             a
             man
             to
             make
             a
             needle
             ,
             whose
             eye
             should
             be
             so
             large
             ,
             that
             a
             Cable
             ,
             (
             yea
             a
             Camell
             )
             might
             passe
             there
             through
             .
             But
             the
             scripture
             speaketh
             of
             things
             impossible
             with
             man
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             are
             in
             their
             owne
             nature
             .
             Therefore
             as
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             must
             be
             taken
             in
             it
             little
             and
             straight
             quantitie
             :
             so
             also
             must
             a
             Camell
             or
             Cable
             ,
             be
             taken
             in
             it
             naturall
             grossenesse
             .
             And
             neuer
             were
             the
             Auncients
             so
             subtill
             ,
             to
             in
             t
             uent
             such
             ingenious
             interpretations
             ,
             as
             one
             could
             not
             reade
             without
             laughter
             .
             But
             the
             Ministers
             cannot
             escape
             with
             this
             goodly
             exposition
             ,
             that
             one
             seeth
             not
             clearly
             ,
             they
             deny
             the
             power
             of
             God
             can
             stretch
             so
             farre
             ,
             that
             it
             can
             make
             a
             Camel
             in
             his
             crookednesse
             and
             thicknesse
             ,
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             but
             only
             when
             hee
             shall
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             be
             brought
             into
             quantitie
             proportionable
             to
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             
             needle
             ,
             which
             is
             against
             the
             expresse
             Text
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             against
             the
             expositiō
             of
             auncient
             interpreters
             :
             although
             that
             besides
             the
             litterall
             sence
             ,
             the
             Camel
             be
             sometimes
             allegorically
             expounded
             by
             them
             .
             But
             the
             allegorical
             exposition
             of
             that
             place
             ,
             taketh
             not
             away
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             litteral
             sēce
             ,
             no
             more
             then
             the
             acts
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             cease
             to
             be
             true
             acts
             ,
             albeit
             the
             interpreters
             expound
             them
             allegorically
             .
             Wherin
             the
             Ministers
             are
             deceiued
             ,
             supposing
             ,
             because
             they
             haue
             read
             in
             S.
             Ierome
             some
             interpretation
             besides
             the
             litteral
             ,
             that
             
             the
             comparison
             which
             our
             Lord
             in
             this
             behalf
             hath
             vsed
             ,
             was
             a
             parable
             ,
             which
             is
             false
             .
             For
             a
             true
             argument
             it
             is
             which
             our
             Lord
             deduceth
             ,
             to
             shewe
             his
             power
             to
             saue
             a
             rich
             man
             :
             because
             this
             is
             a
             thing
             more
             hard
             ,
             thē
             to
             cause
             a
             Camel
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             to
             conclude
             vpon
             this
             article
             ,
             do
             eftsoones
             shew
             vnto
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             deniall
             of
             the
             stretching
             forth
             of
             Gods
             almightinesse
             ,
             many
             other
             absurdities
             ,
             which
             cannot
             otherwise
             be
             termed
             then
             blasphemies
             ,
             do
             follow
             .
             Namely
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             cannot
             be
             in
             one
             place
             by
             the
             almightinesse
             of
             God
             :
             that
             GOD
             cannot
             make
             a
             bodie
             without
             circumscription
             of
             place
             :
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             entered
             not
             ,
             nor
             could
             enter
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             arose
             not
             ,
             nor
             could
             a●●●e
             ,
             without
             the
             stone
             were
             rowled
             from
             the
             graue
             :
             that
             hee
             went
             not
             ,
             nor
             could
             goe
             out
             of
             the
             Virgines
             wombe
             ,
             without
             fraction
             in
             the
             bodie
             of
             his
             mother
             :
             that
             hee
             pearced
             not
             ,
             nor
             could
             pearce
             the
             heauens
             ,
             without
             opening
             of
             them
             :
             that
             he
             made
             not
             ,
             nor
             could
             make
             a
             bodie
             (
             no
             not
             his
             owne
             )
             inuisible
             :
             that
             he
             could
             not
             cause
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             retaining
             it
             grossenesse
             ,
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             Which
             things
             do
             follow
             the
             deniall
             of
             his
             almightinesse
             ,
             and
             is
             an
             execrable
             blasphemie
             ,
             and
             very
             Atheisme
             .
             Behold
             the
             enormious
             absurdities
             which
             they
             are
             constrained
             to
             confesse
             ,
             that
             denie
             the
             real
             presence
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacramēt
             of
             the
             Aultar
             ;
             which
             the
             Doctors
             pray
             to
             be
             well
             considered
             by
             the
             readers
             of
             this
             present
             writing
             .
          
           
             Concerning
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             make
             question
             of
             
             in
             the
             last
             article
             of
             their
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             call
             faith
             a
             humane
             worke
             ,
             seeing
             that
             it
             is
             of
             God
             :
             they
             ought
             no
             more
             to
             wonder
             thereat
             ,
             then
             infinit
             other
             truthes
             ,
             which
             seemeth
             straunge
             to
             them
             because
             their
             doctrine
             is
             founded
             on
             the
             grounds
             of
             error
             :
             among
             which
             ,
             one
             of
             the
             principall
             is
             ;
             That
             man
             hath
             not
             free
             will
             :
             that
             man
             to
             thinke
             well
             ,
             will
             well
             ,
             and
             doo
             well
             ,
             worketh
             not
             together
             with
             God
             :
             against
             many
             places
             of
             scripture
             which
             setteth
             downe
             man
             co-working
             with
             God
             :
             and
             for
             his
             faith
             and
             workes
             ,
             hath
             of
             him
             reward
             and
             recompence
             .
             The
             which
             ,
             without
             wandring
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             shall
             more
             aptly
             be
             handled
             in
             an
             other
             place
             .
             The
             Doctors
             like
             well
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             confesse
             that
             the
             anciēt
             Fathers
             haue
             neuer
             said
             ,
             God
             could
             not
             cause
             one
             bodie
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             which
             thing
             is
             true
             .
             But
             the
             reason
             which
             they
             yeeld
             ,
             why
             they
             haue
             not
             so
             sayd
             ,
             is
             of
             the
             Ministers
             owne
             forge
             and
             inuention
             .
             It
             remaineth
             ,
             that
             they
             shewe
             vs
             so
             much
             by
             the
             testimony
             of
             the
             Scripture
             concerning
             the
             same
             :
             For
             no
             more
             is
             it
             therein
             found
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Fathers
             .
             Whereof
             the
             said
             Ministers
             haue
             bene
             oft
             admonished
             ,
             who
             say
             they
             build
             all
             their
             doctrine
             vpon
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Had
             the
             Ministers
             in
             the
             beginning
             confessed
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Omnipotencie
             ,
             or
             else
             had
             they
             said
             ,
             that
             they
             acknowledged
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             could
             cause
             his
             body
             to
             be
             aboue
             ,
             and
             here
             belowe
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             really
             and
             truly
             ,
             if
             he
             so
             would
             :
             than
             had
             it
             bene
             needlesse
             to
             handle
             these
             former
             questions
             ,
             which
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             are
             not
             of
             small
             consequence
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             esteeme
             them
             .
             Which
             thing
             appeareth
             by
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             who
             haue
             diligently
             handled
             these
             places
             ,
             and
             strengthened
             themselues
             therewith
             against
             heretiques
             :
             But
             because
             the
             Ministers
             would
             not
             agree
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             in
             diuers
             places
             ;
             And
             that
             if
             the
             Doctors
             had
             begunne
             to
             declare
             his
             will
             to
             haue
             bene
             such
             ,
             that
             he
             had
             ordained
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             should
             be
             in
             Heauen
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             The
             Ministers
             might
             haue
             sayd
             (
             as
             they
             of
             theyr
             sect
             doo
             say
             )
             that
             God
             hath
             not
             willed
             
             it
             ,
             because
             he
             could
             not
             .
             The
             Doctors
             had
             rather
             first
             intreate
             of
             the
             Almightinesse
             ,
             then
             of
             the
             will.
             And
             seeing
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Omnipotencie
             hath
             bene
             sufficitntly
             tossed
             ,
             they
             are
             determined
             to
             prooue
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             willed
             and
             ordained
             ,
             that
             his
             bodie
             should
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             In
             the
             probation
             of
             which
             thing
             ,
             when
             they
             haue
             vnderstood
             the
             Ministers
             opinion
             ,
             of
             that
             they
             holde
             in
             theyr
             Churches
             touching
             that
             matter
             ,
             they
             will
             enter
             into
             the
             former
             Conference
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             theyr
             trauell
             be
             not
             in
             vaine
             .
             For
             that
             they
             follow
             not
             (
             it
             seemeth
             to
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             which
             Caluin
             and
             Beza
             holde
             concerning
             the
             same
             .
             For
             which
             cause
             (
             say
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             the
             Ministers
             abuse
             the
             people
             :
             fayning
             to
             teach
             that
             ,
             which
             in
             the
             reformed
             Church
             they
             haue
             wontedly
             done
             :
             and
             yet
             their
             answere
             addressed
             to
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             sheweth
             the
             contrary
             .
          
           
             In
             that
             the
             Ministers
             repute
             themselues
             happie
             ,
             to
             endure
             such
             reproaches
             ,
             to
             be
             esteemed
             seducers
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             let
             them
             remember
             ,
             that
             all
             sects
             may
             say
             as
             much
             therof
             as
             they
             :
             whether
             by
             right
             or
             wrong
             ,
             it
             wil
             appeare
             by
             examination
             of
             their
             doctrine
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Doctors
             resolution
             touching
             the
             article
             of
             the
             Almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             foure
             questions
             by
             them
             propounded
             to
             the
             Ministers
             :
             which
             serue
             to
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             and
             blood
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
          
           
             EVery
             man
             which
             can
             patiently
             cōsider
             by
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             beginning
             at
             Abraham
             ,
             the
             Father
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             vnto
             the
             last
             writing
             of
             the
             Apostles
             :
             shall
             finde
             ,
             that
             the
             well
             spring
             of
             all
             infidelitie
             hath
             ordinarily
             beene
             ,
             to
             haue
             regarde
             to
             the
             proprietie
             of
             creatures
             ,
             and
             common
             order
             of
             nature
             ,
             to
             contradict
             ,
             doubt
             of
             ,
             and
             distrust
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             For
             which
             reason
             ,
             Tertullian
             and
             other
             former
             Christians
             sayd
             well
             :
             that
             Phylosophers
             ,
             and
             they
             that
             stayed
             vpon
             things
             naturall
             ,
             were
             the
             Fathers
             of
             Hereticques
             :
             because
             the
             contemplation
             of
             Nature
             ,
             engendered
             almost
             
             all
             heresies
             :
             On
             the
             contrary
             side
             ,
             shall
             one
             perceiue
             the
             almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             be
             proposed
             by
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             as
             a
             sharpe
             sword
             ,
             cutting
             in
             peeces
             all
             arguments
             which
             might
             come
             of
             naturall
             reasons
             :
             for
             a
             certaine
             and
             finall
             resolution
             to
             beleeue
             whatsoeuer
             is
             couched
             &
             borne
             by
             the
             said
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             albeit
             impossible
             &
             incomprehensible
             to
             euery
             creature
             :
             and
             faith
             to
             be
             staied
             on
             that
             same
             power
             in
             all
             doubts
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             offered
             or
             proposed
             .
          
           
             All
             the
             difficultie
             which
             Abraham
             made
             vppon
             the
             promises
             of
             God
             to
             him
             ,
             did
             proceed
             of
             certaine
             impossibilities
             of
             nature
             ,
             which
             he
             sawe
             in
             himselfe
             and
             in
             his
             wife
             .
             And
             it
             seemeth
             hee
             had
             alwayes
             regard
             therevnto
             ,
             vntill
             God
             vsed
             his
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             said
             vnto
             him
             :
             I
             am
             God
             all
             sufficient
             .
             Is
             any
             thing
             hard
             to
             the
             Lord
             ?
             After
             this
             rebuke
             and
             remonstrance
             of
             God
             ,
             Abraham
             did
             then
             forget
             all
             consideration
             of
             the
             proprieties
             of
             his
             nature
             ,
             and
             laid
             hold
             on
             this
             shield
             of
             faith
             :
             which
             is
             to
             knowe
             ,
             and
             to
             bee
             fully
             perswaded
             ,
             that
             God
             is
             almightie
             ,
             to
             whom
             nothing
             is
             hard
             or
             impossible
             .
             And
             after
             that
             ,
             when
             question
             was
             of
             killing
             his
             onely
             sonne
             ;
             albeit
             hee
             had
             great
             apparance
             of
             contradiction
             in
             nature
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             had
             beene
             giuen
             him
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             seed
             of
             that
             sonne
             should
             hee
             proceed
             ,
             which
             should
             giue
             blessing
             to
             all
             Nations
             ,
             and
             notwithstanding
             hee
             must
             kill
             him
             before
             hee
             had
             any
             lynage
             of
             his
             bodie
             issued
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             hee
             made
             not
             protestation
             ,
             opposing
             that
             contradiction
             of
             nature
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             word
             of
             GOD
             ,
             to
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             had
             beene
             said
             and
             promised
             vnto
             him
             was
             impossible
             :
             but
             hee
             had
             recourse
             to
             the
             stay
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             faithfull
             (
             saieth
             Saint
             Paul
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             )
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             esteeming
             that
             God
             had
             the
             meane
             to
             make
             true
             both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             :
             namely
             ,
             to
             cause
             his
             sonne
             to
             die
             ,
             and
             rise
             againe
             ,
             to
             drawe
             from
             him
             afterwards
             lynage
             and
             posteritie
             :
             although
             as
             yet
             there
             had
             beene
             no
             example
             of
             the
             resurrection
             .
          
           
             Likewise
             the
             consideration
             of
             creatures
             ,
             and
             the
             order
             
             of
             nature
             which
             Moses
             sawe
             before
             him
             ,
             made
             him
             fall
             into
             Infidelitie
             .
             And
             God
             shewed
             him
             his
             fault
             ,
             in
             that
             he
             would
             deny
             him
             the
             power
             ,
             long
             time
             with
             flesh
             to
             nourish
             his
             people
             :
             because
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             wildernes
             did
             not
             afford
             it
             :
             and
             did
             admonish
             him
             to
             lift
             vp
             his
             spirit
             to
             the
             omnipotency
             against
             nature
             ,
             and
             there
             to
             assure
             his
             faith
             .
             Moses
             said
             :
             
               Sixe
               hundred
               thousand
               people
               there
               are
               ,
               among
               whom
               I
               am
               :
               and
               thou
               saist
               ,
               I
               will
               giue
               them
               flesh
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               eate
               therof
               a
               month
               long
               :
               Shall
               the
               sheepe
               and
               beeues
               be
               slaine
               to
               find
               them
               ?
               Either
               shall
               all
               the
               fish
               of
               the
               sea
               be
               gathered
               together
               for
               them
               to
               suffice
               them
               ?
            
             God
             answered
             
               Moses
               ,
               Is
               the
               hand
               of
               the
               Lord
               shortnea
               ?
               thou
               shalt
               now
               see
               whether
               my
               word
               shall
               come
               to
               passe
               ,
               or
               no.
            
             In
             like
             maner
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             one
             shall
             reade
             in
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             that
             the
             people
             ,
             or
             other
             particular
             persons
             ,
             fell
             into
             vnbeliefe
             or
             distrust
             of
             Gods
             helpe
             and
             succor
             ,
             he
             shall
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             cause
             hath
             ordinarily
             bene
             ,
             for
             staying
             vpon
             the
             nature
             and
             disposition
             of
             humane
             things
             :
             without
             sufficient
             apprehension
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             to
             confirme
             them
             ,
             that
             this
             power
             was
             set
             before
             their
             eyes
             :
             diuers
             examples
             therof
             haue
             heretofore
             bene
             brought
             out
             of
             Esay
             and
             Ieremy
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             the
             Virgin
             hauing
             regard
             to
             the
             naturall
             maner
             of
             conceauing
             ,
             seemed
             to
             doubt
             of
             the
             mean
             of
             her
             conception
             .
             And
             she
             said
             :
             
               How
               shall
               this
               thing
               be
               ,
               seeing
               I
               know
               not
               man
               ?
            
             And
             the
             Angell
             answering
             ,
             sayd
             vnto
             her
             :
             
               Nothing
               shall
               bee
               impossible
               with
               God.
            
             Drawing
             her
             backe
             from
             the
             cogitations
             of
             naturall
             proprieties
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             roote
             of
             Infidelitie
             ,
             and
             exhorting
             her
             to
             thinke
             vpon
             the
             Almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             chiefe
             stone
             and
             rocke
             ,
             wherevpon
             true
             Religion
             is
             builded
             .
          
           
             Which
             thing
             considered
             :
             The
             Doctors
             for
             their
             resolution
             of
             this
             conference
             with
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             do
             say
             :
             that
             with
             good
             right
             hath
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             very
             expresly
             obtained
             the
             first
             place
             ,
             among
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Apostles
             Creed
             :
             as
             being
             that
             ,
             by
             which
             all
             the
             other
             articles
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             the
             workes
             of
             God
             aboue
             nature
             ,
             are
             belieued
             and
             maintained
             ,
             against
             all
             contradiction
             and
             repugnancy
             of
             nature
             ,
             or
             reason
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             pretended
             or
             alledged
             :
             And
             without
             the
             
             which
             ,
             any
             article
             of
             faith
             ,
             or
             any
             the
             workes
             of
             God
             surpassing
             nature
             ,
             and
             contained
             in
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             could
             not
             be
             defended
             and
             maintained
             ,
             against
             the
             assaults
             of
             malice
             ,
             and
             depriuation
             of
             humane
             spirit
             :
             which
             alwayes
             tendeth
             to
             infidelitie
             ,
             and
             disobedience
             towards
             his
             God
             :
             and
             from
             his
             byrth
             is
             prompt
             and
             subtil
             to
             depraue
             and
             slaunder
             his
             word
             and
             commandement
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             (
             say
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             so
             much
             the
             more
             ought
             euery
             Christian
             to
             inforce
             himself
             ,
             to
             hold
             and
             keep
             that
             article
             entire
             ,
             without
             suffring
             any
             to
             make
             any
             exceptiō
             therof
             ,
             or
             to
             restrain
             it
             at
             his
             pleasure
             ,
             vnder
             any
             pretexts
             of
             (
             I
             know
             not
             what
             )
             repugnancies
             of
             creatures
             ;
             which
             humane
             spirit
             proposeth
             ,
             for
             want
             of
             vnderstanding
             and
             comprehending
             the
             greatnesse
             of
             God.
             For
             the
             scriptures
             do
             euer
             present
             vnto
             vs
             this
             omnipotēcy
             generally
             without
             any
             restraint
             ,
             in
             regard
             of
             creatures
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             workes
             of
             God.
             And
             teacheth
             vs
             ,
             that
             the
             creatures
             is
             in
             his
             hands
             ,
             as
             the
             clayin
             the
             hand
             of
             the
             Potter
             ,
             to
             receiue
             such
             change
             and
             forme
             ,
             as
             shall
             seeme
             good
             vnto
             him
             :
             without
             that
             
             they
             can
             say
             ,
             Why
             hast
             thou
             made
             or
             chaunged
             mee
             thus
             !
             Such
             similitude
             and
             words
             the
             Prophet
             
               Esay
               ,
               Ieremy
            
             ,
             and
             S.
             Paul
             do
             vse
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             say
             :
             that
             men
             must
             yet
             lesse
             be
             lycensed
             to
             limit
             and
             bound
             the
             foresayd
             power
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             contradictions
             which
             in
             theyr
             writings
             they
             imagine
             of
             the
             nature
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             or
             eternall
             will
             of
             God
             :
             Seeing
             that
             the
             scripture
             saith
             plainly
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             more
             then
             wee
             vnderstand
             ,
             and
             mocketh
             at
             them
             which
             will
             entermeddle
             with
             the
             nature
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             eternall
             will
             of
             God
             :
             as
             though
             they
             had
             bene
             of
             counsell
             with
             him
             to
             know
             thereby
             the
             decisions
             and
             ordinances
             ,
             more
             then
             his
             owne
             word
             pronounceth
             thereof
             .
             And
             S.
             Paule
             in
             the
             end
             constraineth
             with
             himselfe
             euery
             spirit
             created
             ,
             to
             cry
             out
             ,
             confessing
             his
             ignorance
             of
             the
             power
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             
             and
             workes
             of
             God
             :
             
               Oh
               the
               deepnesse
               of
               the
               riches
               ,
               wisedome
               ,
               and
               knowledge
               of
               God
               ,
               how
               incomprehensible
               are
               his
               iudgements
               ,
               and
               his
               wayes
               past
               finding
               out
               .
               For
               who
               is
               he
               that
               hath
               knowne
               the
               minde
               of
               the
               Lord
               ?
               Or
               who
               hath
               bene
               his
               Counsailor
               ?
            
             And
             
             an
             excellent
             saying
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             vpō
             this
             point
             is
             to
             be
             noted
             ,
             who
             in
             an
             Epistle
             Advolusianum
             saith
             :
             We
             confesse
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             something
             ,
             the
             which
             in
             searching
             ,
             wee
             cannot
             finde
             .
             As
             if
             hee
             would
             say
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             if
             God
             can
             doo
             something
             ,
             albeit
             in
             our
             naturall
             iudgement
             wee
             thinke
             it
             impossible
             :
             wee
             esteeme
             it
             neuerthelesse
             that
             it
             is
             possible
             :
             but
             that
             the
             capacitie
             of
             our
             spirit
             cannot
             comprehend
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             asso
             ,
             that
             by
             such
             libertie
             and
             meanes
             that
             any
             will
             exempt
             what
             hee
             liketh
             from
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             vnder
             colour
             of
             some
             impossibilities
             of
             nature
             ,
             or
             of
             repugnancie
             ,
             after
             his
             owne
             iudgement
             ,
             to
             the
             nature
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             will
             of
             God
             :
             each
             one
             will
             studie
             to
             faine
             the
             like
             ,
             in
             all
             matters
             of
             faith
             :
             wherein
             such
             causes
             may
             bee
             easily
             inuented
             ,
             and
             well
             disguised
             .
             And
             that
             it
             is
             so
             ,
             from
             the
             first
             article
             of
             the
             Creed
             vnto
             the
             last
             ,
             let
             all
             the
             heresies
             which
             haue
             bene
             there
             contradicted
             ,
             be
             from
             time
             to
             time
             obserued
             ,
             and
             it
             will
             appeare
             ,
             that
             all
             haue
             held
             this
             way
             and
             method
             ,
             to
             fight
             against
             euery
             article
             of
             faith
             ,
             as
             impossible
             to
             God
             :
             respecting
             the
             impossibilitie
             of
             the
             worke
             according
             to
             nature
             ,
             and
             some
             pretended
             inconueniences
             ,
             against
             the
             nature
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             will
             ,
             and
             glorie
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             employ
             to
             this
             effect
             ,
             the
             two
             first
             bookes
             of
             Tertullian
             :
             one
             whereof
             is
             ,
             of
             the
             incarnation
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             against
             the
             Marcionists
             of
             the
             resurrection
             of
             the
             flesh
             :
             In
             which
             the
             Christian
             reader
             shall
             perceiue
             the
             like
             arguments
             of
             those
             Marcionists
             ,
             endeuouring
             to
             exempt
             from
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             incarnation
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             and
             the
             resurrectiō
             of
             the
             flesh
             .
          
           
             Then
             to
             conclude
             this
             point
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             do
             forewarne
             euery
             Christian
             ,
             that
             they
             adde
             not
             ought
             to
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             which
             speake
             alwaies
             without
             any
             limitation
             of
             the
             power
             of
             GOD
             towards
             the
             creatures
             :
             and
             to
             the
             ende
             ,
             to
             praise
             the
             infinite
             power
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             eternall
             will
             of
             our
             Creator
             and
             Redeemer
             :
             and
             to
             the
             end
             to
             preserue
             the
             closet
             of
             Gods
             secrets
             from
             euery
             shamelesse
             and
             impudent
             person
             ,
             which
             of
             his
             own
             folly
             wil
             make
             a
             law
             ,
             not
             only
             to
             mē
             ,
             
             
             of
             heretikes
             .
             
               Credendo
               non
               credunt
            
             .
             To
             wit
             ,
             that
             in
             beleeuing
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             ,
             they
             beleeue
             it
             not
             .
             For
             after
             they
             haue
             said
             that
             no
             exception
             is
             to
             be
             put
             vnto
             it
             ,
             on
             the
             other
             side
             they
             returne
             to
             declare
             ,
             that
             it
             ought
             not
             bee
             extended
             to
             euery
             thing
             ,
             which
             humane
             spi●
             t
             can
             conceiue
             .
             And
             indeed
             ,
             they
             will
             not
             apply
             vnto
             it
             ,
             but
             what
             seemeth
             good
             vnto
             them
             :
             and
             shrowd
             themselues
             with
             the
             nature
             ,
             wisdome
             ,
             and
             eternall
             will
             of
             God
             :
             which
             to
             them
             are
             vnknowne
             ,
             and
             incomprehensible
             ,
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Omnipotencie
             .
             The
             Doctors
             therefore
             do
             admonish
             all
             men
             to
             beware
             of
             beeing
             abused
             with
             the
             words
             of
             Caluin
             and
             his
             Ministers
             :
             but
             to
             regard
             the
             works
             which
             they
             denie
             to
             be
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             The
             Doctors
             haue
             proposed
             to
             them
             these
             foure
             questions
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             God
             can
             make
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             and
             (
             contrariwise
             )
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             place
             :
             whether
             hee
             can
             lodge
             one
             body
             in
             a
             lesse
             space
             then
             the
             greatnesse
             thereof
             :
             and
             whether
             he
             can
             make
             it
             invisible
             .
             And
             such
             questions
             haue
             beene
             specially
             chosen
             :
             because
             the
             principall
             arguments
             of
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             Religion
             against
             the
             true
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             are
             founded
             vpon
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             beleeue
             simply
             (
             as
             all
             other
             things
             )
             that
             the
             foure
             questions
             are
             possible
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             haue
             proued
             the
             same
             by
             the
             infinitenesse
             of
             his
             power
             ,
             by
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             which
             attribute
             vnto
             him
             all
             power
             without
             exception
             ,
             ouer
             the
             creatures
             :
             and
             by
             written
             examples
             and
             straunge
             my
             racles
             wrought
             vpon
             their
             bodies
             ,
             against
             the
             nature
             of
             them
             .
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             ,
             saith
             :
             
               To
               the
               end
               wee
               may
               beleeue
               ,
               that
               our
               God
               is
               more
               mightie
               then
               all
               lawe
               and
               nature
               of
               all
               bodies
               :
            
             And
             addeth
             :
             
               that
               they
               knowe
               God
               amisse
               who
               thinke
               that
               is
               not
               in
               his
               power
               ,
               which
               they
               in
               their
               braine
               cannot
               comprehend
               .
            
             From
             whence
             it
             commeth
             (
             as
             saith
             S.
             Cyrill
             )
             that
             such
             wicked
             spirits
             doo
             reiect
             and
             condemne
             all
             things
             as
             impossible
             ,
             because
             they
             themselues
             do
             not
             vnderstand
             them
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             the
             Doctors
             suppose
             they
             haue
             sufficiently
             shewed
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             expresse
             scripture
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             expositions
             
             thereof
             ,
             taken
             from
             auncient
             Christians
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             onely
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God
             to
             make
             two
             bodies
             in
             one
             place
             ,
             and
             one
             body
             without
             place
             equall
             to
             it
             greatnesse
             ,
             but
             that
             alreadie
             it
             was
             truly
             done
             in
             the
             birth
             of
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             in
             his
             resurrection
             :
             in
             the
             entrie
             through
             the
             closed
             doores
             :
             and
             in
             the
             ascention
             aboue
             all
             the
             heauens
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             shewed
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             like
             and
             semblable
             repugnancie
             in
             these
             deeds
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             other
             :
             that
             is
             ,
             of
             one
             body
             in
             two
             places
             :
             which
             is
             not
             exempted
             by
             the
             scripture
             ,
             from
             the
             power
             nor
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             more
             then
             the
             others
             ,
             to
             iudge
             it
             impossible
             to
             bee
             done
             :
             and
             that
             there
             was
             neuer
             Christian
             before
             our
             time
             ,
             which
             dared
             to
             affirme
             that
             thing
             to
             be
             impossible
             ,
             ●nd
             out
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             although
             occasion
             was
             often
             offered
             to
             say
             it
             ,
             had
             they
             any
             way
             thought
             it
             impossible
             :
             as
             the
             Ministers
             of
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             Religion
             do
             pretend
             .
             Contrariwife
             ,
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             auncient
             authors
             of
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             ,
             haue
             held
             it
             expresly
             to
             be
             in
             Gods
             power
             to
             place
             one
             creature
             in
             many
             places
             :
             as
             held
             Saint
             Ierome
             against
             the
             heretike
             Vigillantius
             ,
             that
             the
             soules
             of
             the
             Saints
             might
             be
             present
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             with
             the
             immaculate
             Lambe
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             And
             the
             question
             was
             ,
             whether
             the
             said
             soules
             ,
             and
             spirits
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             were
             sometimes
             present
             in
             the
             Churches
             where
             their
             Sepulchres
             and
             monuments
             were
             .
             And
             so
             much
             thereof
             holdeth
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             the
             16
             ▪
             Chap.
             of
             the
             booke
             which
             he
             wrote
             of
             the
             due
             care
             of
             the
             dead
             :
             where
             he
             writeth
             ,
             that
             soules
             by
             the
             power
             of
             their
             owne
             nature
             ,
             cannot
             be
             here
             belowe
             ,
             and
             in
             heauen
             ,
             or
             in
             many
             places
             :
             but
             that
             it
             may
             be
             done
             by
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             and
             will
             not
             resolue
             whether
             they
             vnderstand
             our
             affaires
             by
             such
             a
             presence
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             or
             by
             the
             reuelation
             of
             Angels
             ,
             or
             other
             meanes
             by
             the
             power
             and
             grace
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Also
             it
             is
             certain
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             of
             the
             Church
             haue
             acknowledged
             and
             maintained
             ,
             that
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             was
             in
             many
             places
             by
             the
             almightie
             power
             of
             God.
             As
             doth
             S.
             Ambrose
             vpon
             the
             tenth
             of
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             :
             and
             Saint
             
             Chrisostome
             in
             his
             17.
             
             Homily
             vpon
             the
             same
             Epistle
             .
             Where
             both
             two
             as
             it
             were
             in
             like
             words
             do
             write
             ,
             that
             although
             in
             many
             places
             there
             are
             many
             actions
             and
             oblations
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             neuerthelesse
             (
             hauing
             regard
             to
             the
             thing
             which
             is
             offered
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             true
             lambe
             and
             body
             of
             Christ
             Iesus
             )
             that
             this
             sacrifice
             in
             many
             places
             offered
             is
             but
             one
             ,
             for
             so
             much
             as
             it
             is
             but
             one
             selfe-same
             thing
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             the
             true
             lambe
             ,
             and
             the
             true
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             is
             but
             one
             ,
             and
             abideth
             whole
             in
             all
             places
             where
             it
             is
             offered
             .
             They
             adde
             also
             ,
             that
             the
             oblations
             of
             him
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             is
             not
             an
             iteration
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Crosse
             :
             but
             in
             commemoration
             of
             him
             .
             So
             that
             in
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             they
             acknowledge
             and
             distinguish
             two
             points
             .
             The
             one
             which
             concerneth
             the
             realtie
             of
             the
             thing
             offered
             :
             and
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             this
             is
             the
             true
             lambe
             ,
             and
             true
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             which
             then
             remaining
             intierly
             one
             ,
             is
             neuerthelesse
             in
             many
             places
             .
             And
             the
             other
             concerneth
             the
             action
             and
             oblation
             of
             such
             thing
             by
             the
             Priest
             ,
             which
             is
             no
             iteration
             ,
             nor
             like
             action
             or
             oblation
             as
             that
             of
             the
             Crosse
             :
             but
             diuerse
             ,
             in
             remembrance
             notwithstanding
             of
             that
             was
             made
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             .
             S.
             Chrisostome
             in
             the
             third
             booke
             of
             Priesthood
             ,
             cryeth
             out
             saying
             :
             Oh
             myracle
             and
             power
             of
             God!
             He
             which
             sitteth
             on
             high
             at
             the
             right
             hand
             of
             his
             Father
             ,
             is
             held
             betweene
             the
             hands
             of
             each
             one
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             S.
             Augustine
             vpon
             the
             33.
             
             Psalme
             sheweth
             ,
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             was
             in
             two
             places
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             in
             it
             visible
             place
             among
             his
             Apostles
             ;
             and
             neuerthelesse
             betweene
             his
             owne
             hands
             .
             So
             that
             he
             himselfe
             did
             beare
             himselfe
             .
             And
             before
             he
             concludeth
             the
             same
             ,
             Saint
             Augustine
             debateth
             how
             it
             was
             possible
             that
             one
             person
             should
             beare
             his
             body
             betweene
             his
             hands
             .
             And
             after
             he
             had
             shewed
             that
             it
             was
             impossible
             for
             Dauid
             ,
             and
             cuerie
             creature
             ,
             he
             descended
             at
             last
             ,
             to
             the
             diuine
             power
             which
             was
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             by
             the
             which
             ,
             to
             him
             alone
             among
             all
             men
             ,
             such
             myracle
             was
             possible
             .
             And
             to
             the
             ende
             that
             men
             should
             not
             depraue
             ,
             nor
             wrest
             the
             meaning
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             (
             because
             there
             is
             something
             which
             after
             a
             sort
             is
             carried
             as
             though
             it
             diminished
             the
             truth
             )
             let
             them
             
             note
             that
             the
             purpose
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             is
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             Iesus
             by
             his
             almightinesse
             did
             carrie
             himselfe
             ,
             which
             to
             any
             creature
             was
             impossible
             .
             Now
             had
             he
             onely
             in
             the
             Supper
             borne
             betweene
             his
             hands
             the
             figure
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             and
             signe
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             and
             not
             his
             true
             and
             reall
             body
             ,
             hee
             should
             haue
             done
             nothing
             ,
             but
             what
             the
             least
             man
             might
             do
             .
             For
             each
             man
             can
             carrie
             betwixt
             his
             hands
             ,
             the
             figure
             ,
             Image
             ,
             signe
             or
             Sacrament
             of
             his
             body
             ,
             or
             sticke
             it
             in
             his
             hat
             ,
             without
             myracle
             or
             supernaturall
             power
             .
             It
             be
             houeth
             then
             ,
             that
             the
             certaine
             maner
             which
             S.
             Augustine
             vseth
             ,
             doth
             nothing
             diminish
             the
             truth
             :
             and
             this
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             betweene
             his
             hands
             he
             was
             inuisible
             ,
             and
             in
             a
             supernaturall
             maner
             of
             being
             ;
             reall
             neuerthelesse
             and
             true
             .
             S.
             Basil
             in
             his
             Liturgie
             with
             the
             others
             ,
             auoucheth
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             be
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             almightinesse
             notwithstanding
             to
             bee
             present
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             although
             the
             Ministers
             to
             proue
             it
             impossible
             for
             one
             body
             ,
             or
             one
             other
             creature
             ,
             to
             be
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             do
             chiefly
             build
             vpon
             S.
             Basil
             :
             but
             the
             said
             S.
             Basil
             ,
             in
             the
             place
             by
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             ,
             doth
             expresly
             protest
             ,
             not
             to
             speake
             but
             according
             to
             the
             naturall
             proprietie
             .
             And
             in
             his
             Liturgie
             he
             declareth
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             onely
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God
             to
             cause
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             be
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             Aultar
             ;
             but
             that
             it
             is
             so
             truly
             done
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             to
             end
             this
             question
             of
             one
             body
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             say
             :
             that
             such
             matter
             is
             not
             onely
             in
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             must
             so
             be
             beleeued
             to
             bee
             done
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             that
             God
             be
             not
             found
             a
             lyar
             and
             deceiuer
             in
             his
             word
             :
             whereby
             Iesus
             affirmed
             to
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             he
             gaue
             with
             his
             hands
             ,
             was
             his
             true
             body
             ,
             deliuered
             for
             vs.
             This
             is
             an
             argument
             which
             Tertullian
             in
             his
             booke
             of
             the
             Resurrection
             maketh
             ,
             after
             hee
             had
             disputed
             against
             them
             which
             denied
             the
             same
             to
             be
             possible
             with
             God.
             And
             it
             seemeth
             they
             then
             said
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             formerly
             said
             )
             that
             there
             was
             something
             by
             the
             scriture
             impossible
             with
             God
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             he
             could
             not
             lye
             ,
             nor
             deceiue
             :
             and
             that
             thereof
             they
             tooke
             occasion
             to
             goe
             further
             ,
             and
             to
             dispute
             that
             the
             resurrection
             was
             to
             him
             also
             impossible
             .
             So
             
             that
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             because
             God
             cannot
             lye
             ,
             haue
             endeuouted
             ●o
             inferre
             ,
             that
             to
             put
             one
             body
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             was
             impossible
             for
             him
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             to
             lye
             and
             deceiue
             .
             Tertullian
             in
             the
             end
             accordeth
             with
             the
             Marcionists
             ,
             and
             saith
             :
             Rather
             had
             I
             confesse
             that
             God
             cannot
             deceiue
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             is
             onely
             weake
             and
             impotent
             in
             deceit
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             thereby
             hee
             seeme
             not
             to
             haue
             taught
             and
             spoken
             one
             way
             ,
             and
             to
             haue
             otherwise
             disposed
             of
             the
             deed
             contained
             in
             his
             word
             .
             Then
             if
             hee
             cannot
             (
             concludeth
             Tertullian
             )
             deceiue
             and
             abuse
             ,
             the
             resurrection
             must
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             carried
             in
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ,
             least
             deceit
             be
             found
             in
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             also
             ,
             they
             willingly
             confesse
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             lye
             ,
             nor
             deceiue
             :
             and
             that
             it
             must
             therefore
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             that
             so
             he
             hath
             willed
             and
             ordained
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             and
             not
             otherwise
             ,
             as
             his
             word
             soundeth
             and
             beareth
             .
             Now
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             his
             word
             plainly
             and
             expresly
             beareth
             ,
             that
             he
             affirmeth
             that
             what
             hee
             gaue
             with
             his
             hands
             to
             his
             Apostles
             to
             eat
             ,
             was
             his
             body
             ,
             deliuered
             for
             vs
             :
             we
             must
             therefore
             beleeue
             that
             his
             word
             saith
             not
             otherwise
             then
             his
             will
             is
             ,
             least
             he
             be
             esteemed
             a
             lyar
             .
             And
             that
             as
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
               :
               This
               is
               my
               bloud
               :
            
             that
             it
             is
             so
             indeed
             .
             The
             which
             the
             Doctors
             (
             by
             Gods
             assistance
             )
             will
             declare
             in
             the
             next
             Conference
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             he
             hath
             not
             onely
             power
             to
             establish
             his
             body
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             :
             but
             also
             that
             he
             hath
             willed
             it
             ,
             and
             so
             hath
             done
             it
             .
          
        
         
           
             Artictles
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctosr
             for
             the
             next
             Conference
             ,
             and
             others
             following
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             order
             of
             the
             said
             Articles
             .
          
           
             ALthough
             ,
             following
             the
             order
             of
             Conference
             touching
             the
             Apostles
             Creed
             ,
             they
             ought
             secondly
             to
             entreate
             of
             an
             other
             article
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Conference
             not
             onely
             accorded
             ,
             but
             demaunded
             :
             offering
             the
             imprinted
             Articles
             of
             their
             confession
             ,
             bearing
             date
             the
             1564.
             yeare
             ,
             from
             the
             first
             vnto
             the
             last
             ,
             to
             
             be
             examined
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
             )
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             seeing
             it
             will
             not
             be
             much
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             after
             they
             haue
             intreated
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             (
             which
             extendeth
             to
             bee
             powerfull
             to
             cause
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             be
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             )
             in
             continuing
             that
             matter
             ,
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             probation
             of
             his
             will
             :
             they
             are
             content
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             he
             hath
             not
             power
             onely
             ,
             but
             that
             also
             he
             hath
             wil
             :
             and
             are
             consequently
             determined
             to
             refute
             all
             the
             blasphemies
             and
             heresies
             contained
             in
             their
             Supper
             ,
             which
             are
             called
             reformed
             :
             to
             the
             end
             also
             they
             be
             not
             deemed
             to
             flye
             the
             list
             ,
             touching
             the
             Supper
             and
             the
             Masse
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             reproached
             them
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             they
             protest
             ,
             that
             their
             meaning
             is
             ,
             after
             the
             conclusion
             of
             this
             matter
             ,
             and
             resolution
             giuen
             ,
             to
             returne
             to
             examine
             the
             wonderfull
             errors
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             which
             in
             number
             are
             many
             against
             the
             other
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             :
             which
             thing
             the
             Ministers
             (
             vnwilling
             that
             the
             Doctors
             should
             pursue
             the
             order
             begun
             ,
             do
             greatly
             feare
             ,
             as
             one
             may
             see
             ,
             and
             iudge
             :
             foreseeing
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             next
             Conference
             ,
             an
             other
             blasphemie
             would
             be
             shewed
             them
             ,
             which
             the
             Church
             (
             calling
             it selfe
             Reformed
             )
             against
             the
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             ,
             after
             Caluins
             doctrine
             )
             maintaineth
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             God
             worketh
             in
             the
             reprobate
             ,
             the
             euill
             and
             sinne
             they
             commit
             :
             which
             is
             an
             execrable
             Atheisme
             ,
             and
             no
             lesse
             then
             the
             deniall
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             And
             they
             that
             can
             read
             these
             Conferences
             (
             continuing
             to
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             discussion
             of
             the
             Ministers
             errors
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             religiō
             against
             all
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Creed
             )
             shall
             bee
             likewise
             abashed
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             absurdities
             and
             blasphemies
             issuing
             from
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             An
             other
             point
             there
             is
             yet
             ,
             which
             inuiteth
             the
             Ministers
             to
             demaund
             tractation
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             the
             whole
             matter
             alreadie
             squared
             ,
             by
             many
             of
             their
             Sect
             ,
             who
             haue
             written
             of
             the
             same
             :
             And
             chiefly
             the
             great
             booke
             of
             
               Peter
               Martir
            
             will
             not
             faile
             them
             .
             Wherby
             they
             shal
             be
             furnished
             with
             I
             know
             not
             what
             infamous
             obiectiōs
             ,
             &
             of
             some
             passages
             of
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             broken
             &
             depraued
             ,
             or
             euilly
             applied
             ,
             to
             impugne
             in
             shew
             ,
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             body
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             
             But
             for
             defence
             of
             all
             other
             their
             errors
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             are
             meanely
             armed
             :
             and
             their
             conscience
             doth
             sufficiently
             witnesse
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             scripture
             ,
             decision
             of
             generall
             Councells
             ,
             and
             common
             accord
             of
             the
             writings
             of
             all
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             (
             no
             apparance
             to
             the
             contrary
             )
             they
             are
             conuinced
             and
             condemned
             of
             their
             errors
             against
             the
             said
             Creed
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             examination
             of
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             do
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             prophane
             eating
             and
             drinking
             ,
             not
             differing
             from
             common
             eating
             and
             drinking
             ,
             but
             in
             that
             it
             is
             worse
             :
             that
             they
             abuse
             the
             holy
             institution
             of
             the
             Supper
             of
             Iesus
             ,
             and
             pollute
             and
             defile
             such
             their
             banket
             with
             all
             impietie
             ,
             &
             blasphemie
             .
             They
             also
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             do
             great
             iniurie
             to
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             falsly
             to
             attribute
             to
             such
             ,
             their
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             banket
             ,
             the
             name
             of
             Sacrament
             .
             And
             to
             the
             end
             that
             the
             proofe
             thereof
             be
             more
             cleare
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             demaund
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             whether
             they
             receiue
             one
             common
             doctrine
             ,
             receiued
             not
             only
             in
             the
             Church
             Catholique
             ,
             but
             also
             almost
             in
             all
             Sects
             which
             are
             seperated
             from
             it
             :
             That
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             confection
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             ,
             there
             be
             two
             essentiall
             and
             necessarie
             things
             :
             the
             matter
             (
             or
             element
             )
             and
             the
             word
             ?
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             what
             word
             ,
             with
             the
             Element
             ,
             is
             necessary
             to
             make
             a
             Sacrament
             :
             and
             namely
             ,
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             call
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             and
             whether
             it
             behoueth
             to
             vse
             certaine
             words
             or
             no
             ?
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             whether
             the
             word
             haue
             some
             power
             or
             effectuall
             working
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ?
             &
             what
             ,
             &
             whether
             it
             worke
             vpon
             something
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ?
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             whether
             by
             the
             same
             word
             ,
             consecration
             bee
             made
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             or
             no
             ?
          
           
             Fiftly
             ,
             whether
             by
             the
             word
             consecration
             ,
             be
             not
             made
             of
             the
             matter
             ?
             to
             wit
             ,
             how
             the
             same
             consecration
             is
             made
             ?
             and
             by
             what
             vertue
             the
             same
             is
             made
             ?
          
           
             Sixtly
             ,
             whether
             besides
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             the
             spirituall
             graces
             and
             benefites
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             the
             true
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             their
             proper
             substance
             ,
             and
             
             not
             in
             spirituall
             effect
             onely
             ,
             be
             really
             receiued
             in
             the
             Supper
             ?
             And
             the
             Doctors
             do
             demand
             vpon
             this
             article
             ,
             a
             plaine
             confession
             of
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             They
             demaund
             further
             ,
             whether
             in
             receiuing
             the
             bread
             ,
             before
             taking
             of
             the
             wine
             ,
             they
             receiue
             not
             by
             the
             eating
             of
             the
             bread
             ,
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             or
             the
             body
             onely
             .
             Briefly
             ,
             whether
             they
             admit
             that
             which
             Diuines
             call
             a
             Concomitance
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             They
             demaund
             also
             ,
             whether
             the
             Supper
             (
             ouer
             and
             besides
             the
             assurance
             which
             it
             giueth
             them
             of
             the
             participation
             they
             haue
             in
             the
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             for
             their
             redemption
             )
             doth
             worke
             in
             them
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ?
          
           
             Lastly
             they
             demaund
             ,
             whether
             one
             receiueth
             any
             thing
             by
             the
             Supper
             ,
             which
             he
             could
             not
             receiue
             without
             the
             Supper
             ?
             or
             whether
             without
             paine
             taking
             to
             go
             the
             Supper
             ,
             or
             beeing
             present
             thereat
             ,
             one
             may
             as
             well
             receiue
             the
             bodie
             and
             graces
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             as
             if
             hee
             were
             present
             at
             the
             Supper
             ?
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             will
             afterwards
             debate
             the
             other
             articles
             ,
             contained
             in
             the
             Ministers
             last
             writing
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             precedent
             demaunds
             ought
             to
             be
             first
             examined
             ,
             as
             grounds
             of
             other
             articles
             proposed
             by
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             after
             the
             confutation
             of
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             the
             confirmation
             of
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             by
             order
             ,
             and
             without
             confusion
             ,
             will
             clearly
             teach
             by
             the
             pure
             and
             expresse
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             the
             Masse
             was
             instituted
             and
             said
             by
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             commaunded
             his
             Apostles
             to
             say
             it
             :
             which
             thing
             ,
             then
             following
             the
             ordinance
             of
             their
             Maister
             ,
             they
             afterwards
             performed
             .
          
           
             That
             the
             Masse
             is
             a
             true
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             lawe
             Euangelique
             .
          
           
             That
             they
             which
             reiect
             the
             Masse
             ,
             and
             admit
             in
             the
             Church
             no
             externall
             sacrifice
             ,
             nor
             Priesthood
             ,
             are
             without
             the
             true
             lawe
             ,
             without
             true
             Religion
             ,
             and
             therein
             worse
             then
             Idolaters
             themselues
             .
          
           
           
             That
             the
             Masse
             auaileth
             to
             obtaine
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             fauour
             ,
             and
             grace
             of
             God
             :
             and
             that
             it
             auaileth
             both
             for
             the
             quicke
             and
             the
             dead
             .
          
           
             That
             it
             is
             not
             an
             abuse
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             if
             the
             Priest
             in
             the
             Masse
             do
             communicate
             alone
             ,
             when
             they
             that
             are
             present
             will
             not
             communicate
             .
          
           
             That
             they
             commit
             an
             horrible
             blasphemie
             ,
             which
             call
             the
             adoration
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             adoration
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             falsly
             call
             such
             worship
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             Idolatrie
             .
          
           
             To
             be
             short
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             at
             this
             day
             ordained
             and
             celebrated
             ,
             which
             in
             it selfe
             is
             not
             good
             ,
             and
             holy
             ,
             and
             agreeable
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             do
             admonish
             the
             Ministers
             to
             answere
             to
             the
             demaunds
             here
             aboue
             written
             ,
             to
             purpose
             ,
             plainely
             ,
             and
             by
             order
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Sunday
                 ,
                 28.
                 of
                 Iuly
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aforesaid
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             to
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             sent
             to
             thē
             by
             my
             Lord
             de
             Niuernois
             ,
             the
             28.
             day
             of
             Iuly
             ,
             about
             seuen
             of
             the
             clocke
             in
             the
             euening
             ,
             in
             the
             1566.
             yeare
             .
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             reproach
             the
             Ministers
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             their
             writing
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             former
             complaint
             against
             thē
             ,
             they
             immitate
             the
             Donatists
             :
             wherein
             they
             verifie
             that
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             heretofore
             haue
             oftentimes
             shewed
             them
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             most
             part
             of
             their
             writings
             are
             imployed
             in
             repetitions
             ,
             iniuries
             ,
             scoffes
             ,
             and
             inuectiues
             ,
             rather
             then
             in
             good
             arguments
             and
             reasons
             :
             And
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             example
             of
             the
             Donatists
             is
             much
             more
             proper
             to
             bee
             applyed
             to
             them
             ,
             then
             to
             the
             Ministers
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Donatists
             would
             restraine
             the
             name
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             (
             which
             vniuersally
             comprehendeth
             all
             the
             elect
             and
             faithfull
             ,
             that
             are
             ,
             and
             euer
             were
             )
             :
             and
             
             attribute
             the
             same
             to
             the
             sole
             company
             of
             them
             which
             follow
             their
             customes
             and
             errors
             :
             as
             the
             Doctors
             at
             this
             day
             approue
             not
             others
             for
             the
             Catholike
             and
             vniuersall
             Church
             ,
             then
             they
             which
             follow
             the
             traditions
             and
             abuses
             of
             the
             Romane
             Church
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Donatists
             did
             persecute
             them
             which
             were
             contrarie
             to
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             and
             vsed
             violence
             and
             all
             crueltie
             against
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             could
             deuise
             :
             as
             Saint
             Augustine
             in
             many
             places
             doth
             recyte
             .
             Now
             what
             in
             time
             past
             hath
             bene
             the
             rage
             and
             furie
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             as
             of
             their
             complices
             ,
             Priests
             ,
             and
             hypocriticall
             Monkes
             ,
             against
             poore
             Christians
             ,
             each
             one
             knoweth
             .
             And
             there
             is
             not
             he
             ,
             which
             knoweth
             not
             now
             ,
             both
             by
             their
             Sermons
             ,
             writings
             ,
             and
             conferences
             ,
             what
             is
             their
             hate
             and
             spight
             against
             the
             children
             and
             seruants
             of
             God
             :
             and
             what
             pleasure
             should
             they
             haue
             to
             roote
             them
             out
             ,
             were
             theyr
             power
             answerable
             to
             their
             will
             :
             whereby
             one
             may
             iudge
             ,
             whether
             they
             or
             the
             Ministers
             come
             nearer
             to
             the
             likenesse
             and
             example
             of
             the
             Donatists
             .
          
           
             And
             whereas
             the
             Doctors
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             cease
             not
             to
             bee
             blasphemers
             ,
             because
             they
             reiect
             and
             detest
             the
             name
             thereof
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             also
             leaue
             not
             to
             be
             false
             accusers
             ,
             because
             they
             disauow
             ,
             and
             denie
             the
             name
             .
             And
             that
             the
             effects
             do
             shewe
             of
             the
             one
             side
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             to
             whom
             such
             crimes
             and
             names
             may
             appertaine
             ,
             and
             be
             attributed
             .
          
           
             And
             touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             in
             the
             same
             article
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             against
             the
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             impute
             vnto
             him
             ,
             that
             hee
             is
             the
             author
             of
             vice
             ,
             and
             of
             sinne
             .
             The
             Ministers
             confesse
             it
             :
             and
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             also
             against
             his
             truth
             ,
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             with
             him
             there
             is
             yea
             ,
             and
             nay
             :
             as
             doo
             they
             ,
             which
             vnder
             a
             colour
             and
             false
             pretext
             to
             establish
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             GGD
             ,
             doo
             propose
             ,
             that
             hee
             can
             cause
             one
             bodie
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             .
          
           
             Touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             afterwards
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             erre
             in
             the
             grounds
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             :
             
             for
             as
             much
             as
             they
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             he
             was
             almightie
             ,
             because
             he
             doth
             whatsoeuer
             hee
             will
             :
             and
             that
             nothing
             can
             hinder
             ,
             or
             with-hold
             the
             execution
             of
             his
             counsailes
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             therein
             they
             haue
             followed
             Saint
             Augustines
             definition
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             in
             the
             96.
             
             Chapter
             of
             his
             Enchiridion
             :
             where
             word
             for
             word
             hee
             thus
             saith
             :
             For
             other
             cause
             is
             hee
             not
             truly
             called
             omnipotent
             :
             but
             for
             as
             much
             as
             hee
             can
             do
             all
             whatsoeuer
             hee
             will
             :
             and
             that
             the
             effect
             of
             the
             will
             of
             the
             Almightie
             ,
             is
             not
             hindered
             by
             the
             will
             and
             effect
             of
             any
             creature
             .
          
           
             In
             that
             they
             consequently
             impute
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ought
             not
             to
             bee
             generally
             extended
             to
             all
             things
             which
             men
             may
             conceiue
             and
             imagine
             in
             their
             mindes
             .
             The
             Ministers
             say
             (
             vnder
             the
             Doctors
             correction
             )
             that
             they
             said
             not
             so
             :
             but
             that
             the
             almightinesse
             of
             God
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             extended
             without
             any
             discretion
             or
             distinction
             ,
             to
             all
             things
             generally
             ,
             which
             men
             in
             their
             foolish
             phantasies
             might
             forge
             or
             imagine
             .
             Wherein
             to
             each
             one
             it
             may
             eftsoones
             appeare
             ,
             how
             they
             curtall
             and
             falsifie
             the
             Ministers
             words
             and
             sentences
             ,
             to
             haue
             meanes
             and
             colour
             for
             their
             slaunder
             .
          
           
             Afterwards
             ,
             where
             they
             affirme
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             to
             say
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             nothing
             against
             order
             :
             the
             Ministers
             on
             the
             contrary
             part
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             to
             thinke
             and
             say
             that
             hee
             can
             doo
             ought
             which
             is
             not
             well
             ordered
             ,
             is
             to
             blaspheme
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             eternall
             prouidence
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             pretend
             in
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             is
             not
             a
             thing
             derogatorie
             to
             the
             truth
             of
             God.
             The
             Ministers
             doo
             maintaine
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             be
             derogate
             both
             to
             his
             truth
             ;
             for
             as
             much
             as
             there
             should
             be
             in
             him
             ,
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             yea
             and
             nay
             :
             and
             to
             his
             wisedome
             ,
             for
             as
             much
             as
             in
             his
             words
             there
             should
             be
             disorder
             and
             confusion
             :
             and
             by
             consequence
             to
             his
             almightinesse
             ,
             because
             in
             his
             deeds
             there
             should
             be
             imperfection
             .
          
           
             And
             they
             further
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             not
             be
             onely
             against
             
             the
             disposition
             and
             ordinary
             course
             of
             nature
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             faigne
             to
             haue
             thought
             and
             vnderstood
             )
             but
             also
             against
             the
             eternall
             and
             vnchangeable
             will
             of
             our
             God.
             
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             to
             proue
             that
             God
             can
             do
             something
             against
             order
             ,
             do
             propose
             that
             he
             can
             chaunge
             and
             alter
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             The
             Ministers
             confesse
             the
             same
             :
             but
             they
             denie
             that
             in
             so
             dooing
             he
             should
             do
             any
             thing
             which
             were
             disordered
             .
             As
             (
             for
             example
             )
             all
             faithfull
             and
             Christian
             men
             doo
             beleeue
             ,
             beleeue
             ,
             that
             God
             will
             renew
             at
             the
             last
             the
             estate
             of
             the
             whole
             world
             :
             wherein
             there
             is
             nothing
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             which
             is
             not
             well
             ordained
             ,
             perfect
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             points
             accomplished
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             in
             the
             following
             article
             ,
             confound
             the
             distinction
             proposed
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             in
             their
             answere
             betweene
             the
             will
             of
             God
             manifested
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             hath
             hidden
             in
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             is
             equall
             to
             his
             power
             :
             as
             the
             Ministers
             before
             haue
             at
             large
             declared
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             do
             falsly
             presuppose
             touching
             the
             reuealed
             will
             of
             God
             ;
             taking
             that
             generally
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             graunted
             in
             some
             particulars
             onely
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             more
             in
             ceraine
             things
             ,
             then
             he
             hath
             declared
             to
             will
             :
             which
             none
             doubteth
             .
             As
             saith
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             perfect
             Iustice
             ,
             that
             he
             cannot
             make
             a
             man
             to
             be
             perfect
             in
             this
             world
             ,
             and
             sanctifie
             him
             in
             such
             sort
             ,
             that
             there
             remaine
             no
             more
             in
             him
             any
             infirmitie
             or
             imperfection
             ;
             although
             hee
             hath
             neuer
             declared
             vnto
             vs
             by
             his
             word
             ,
             that
             hee
             would
             do
             it
             :
             but
             contrariwise
             ,
             that
             the
             flesh
             in
             all
             the
             regenerate
             will
             alwaies
             refist
             the
             spirit
             :
             so
             that
             all
             the
             time
             of
             their
             liues
             ,
             they
             shall
             be
             in
             many
             points
             imperfect
             .
             But
             albeit
             in
             that
             ,
             and
             some
             other
             like
             cases
             ,
             God
             can
             do
             more
             then
             his
             will
             declareth
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             manifested
             to
             vs
             in
             his
             word
             :
             yet
             neuerthelesse
             can
             it
             not
             be
             said
             but
             that
             there
             be
             other
             cases
             ,
             wherein
             God
             hath
             reuealed
             his
             will
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             against
             which
             he
             can
             do
             or
             ordaine
             nothing
             .
          
           
             
             As
             (
             for
             example
             )
             hee
             hath
             declared
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             that
             hee
             is
             one
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             immutable
             ,
             incomprehensible
             ,
             wholly
             good
             ,
             wholly
             iust
             ,
             wholly
             perfect
             ,
             and
             wholly
             true
             :
             Against
             all
             
             
             which
             things
             ,
             (
             which
             to
             vs
             are
             manifested
             and
             clearly
             proposed
             in
             his
             word
             )
             impossible
             it
             is
             for
             him
             ,
             euer
             to
             thinke
             ,
             say
             ,
             do
             ,
             or
             ordaine
             .
          
           
             Now
             the
             thing
             proposed
             and
             debated
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             touching
             the
             being
             of
             one
             body
             ,
             at
             one
             instant
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             is
             comprised
             in
             that
             ranke
             ,
             beeing
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             contrarie
             to
             the
             truth
             of
             God.
             Which
             shall
             serue
             for
             answere
             to
             the
             Doctors
             slaunders
             ,
             and
             to
             all
             that
             they
             haue
             proposed
             in
             this
             article
             .
             Likewise
             in
             an
             other
             following
             article
             ,
             where
             they
             say
             that
             God
             not
             onely
             can
             ,
             but
             will
             also
             cause
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             occupie
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             time
             .
             That
             shall
             be
             yet
             more
             impossible
             for
             them
             to
             proue
             ,
             then
             the
             power
             aforesaid
             ,
             for
             which
             they
             haue
             hitherto
             so
             much
             trauelled
             in
             vaine
             .
          
           
             In
             their
             definition
             of
             one
             bodye
             in
             the
             Article
             following
             ,
             they
             contradict
             themselues
             ,
             when
             they
             say
             that
             the
             measures
             are
             essentiall
             vnto
             it
             :
             and
             that
             it
             may
             neuerthelesse
             bee
             incircumscript
             :
             for
             if
             it
             bee
             needfull
             that
             the
             dimensions
             whereof
             it
             is
             composed
             ,
             bee
             finite
             ;
             of
             necessitie
             it
             followeth
             therevpon
             ,
             that
             then
             it
             is
             finite
             ,
             limited
             ,
             and
             circumscript
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             which
             they
             afterwards
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             reason
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             taken
             of
             the
             Creed
             ,
             and
             alledged
             to
             proue
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             in
             heauen
             in
             a
             place
             certaine
             ,
             is
             friuolous
             .
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ;
             that
             the
             Doctors
             shewe
             therein
             what
             reuerence
             they
             beare
             to
             the
             word
             of
             GOD
             ,
             and
             his
             spirite
             ,
             who
             hath
             reuealed
             the
             same
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             which
             declare
             them
             vnto
             vs.
             
          
           
             To
             iustifie
             Gracian
             and
             the
             Canon
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             alledge
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             proue
             that
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             must
             necessarily
             be
             in
             a
             place
             certaine
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             bring
             yet
             for
             more
             ample
             confirmation
             ,
             the
             4.
             booke
             and
             10.
             distinction
             of
             the
             Maister
             of
             the
             Sentences
             :
             who
             recyting
             the
             selfe-same
             passage
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             vseth
             the
             verbe
             
               [
               Oportet
            
             ]
             and
             not
             
               [
               Potest
               ]
            
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             that
             of
             Iustine
             which
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             ,
             
             to
             proue
             the
             myracles
             which
             were
             then
             done
             ;
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             appeared
             in
             the
             middest
             of
             his
             Disciples
             ,
             the
             gates
             being
             shut
             :
             and
             that
             hee
             walked
             vpon
             the
             waters
             ,
             were
             done
             in
             his
             person
             .
             The
             Ministers
             are
             amazed
             how
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             yet
             repeate
             the
             same
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             said
             Iustine
             (
             as
             they
             haue
             before
             beene
             answered
             )
             expresly
             saith
             :
             that
             when
             the
             said
             myracles
             were
             done
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             chaunge
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             which
             thing
             ,
             had
             the
             myracles
             bene
             done
             in
             his
             person
             ,
             had
             bene
             necessarie
             .
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             (
             as
             they
             haue
             done
             often
             )
             that
             the
             cause
             of
             the
             said
             myracles
             ,
             and
             the
             diuine
             power
             whence
             they
             proceeded
             ,
             abode
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             As
             when
             hee
             healed
             the
             diseased
             which
             touched
             him
             :
             and
             did
             the
             other
             myracles
             recyted
             in
             the
             Euangelicall
             Histories
             :
             the
             which
             were
             done
             by
             him
             ,
             but
             not
             in
             him
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             person
             of
             them
             that
             we●●
             healed
             .
             And
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             betweene
             such
             myracles
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             his
             transfiguration
             ,
             and
             resurrection
             ,
             which
             were
             wrought
             by
             his
             onely
             power
             ,
             and
             in
             his
             proper
             person
             .
          
           
             Vpon
             the
             importunate
             repetition
             which
             the
             Doctors
             make
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             meanes
             of
             the
             birth
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             word
             Aphantos
             :
             The
             Ministers
             for
             sparing
             of
             time
             ,
             and
             not
             troubling
             the
             readers
             ,
             send
             them
             back
             to
             their
             former
             answeres
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             much
             maruel
             that
             the
             Doctors
             to
             proue
             their
             pretended
             penetration
             of
             two
             bodies
             ,
             and
             of
             their
             measures
             ,
             wil
             ground
             their
             proofe
             and
             principal
             argument
             vpon
             the
             proper
             signification
             of
             the
             terme
             
               [
               Penetrer
               ]
            
             .
             For
             be
             it
             so
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             by
             this
             French
             word
             interpret
             the
             Greeke
             word
             Dierchestas
             ,
             or
             the
             Latine
             word
             Penetrare
             .
             It
             shall
             bee
             euer
             impossible
             to
             proue
             their
             pretence
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             also
             in
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             Chap.
             12.
             10.
             
             It
             is
             said
             of
             the
             Angell
             and
             S.
             Peter
             that
             they
             passed
             the
             first
             and
             second
             watch
             .
             And
             in
             S.
             Luke
             .
             4.
             30.
             
             But
             they
             passed
             through
             the
             middest
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             departed
             .
             And
             in
             S.
             Io.
             4.
             4.
             
             Now
             it
             behoued
             him
             to
             passe
             by
             Samaria
             .
          
           
             In
             all
             which
             passages
             the
             Doctors
             shall
             not
             find
             ,
             that
             the
             
             word
             Dierchestai
             (
             in
             the
             said
             passages
             alledged
             )
             can
             bee
             any
             way
             applied
             to
             the
             penetration
             of
             dimensions
             .
             And
             no
             more
             shall
             they
             proue
             that
             the
             word
             
               [
               Penetrare
            
             ]
             which
             the
             old
             Translator
             hath
             vsed
             in
             the
             2.
             
             Tymo
             .
             3.
             can
             be
             reduced
             to
             their
             said
             penetration
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             ought
             not
             to
             hold
             it
             more
             straunge
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             ascending
             into
             heauen
             in
             his
             finite
             and
             limited
             body
             ,
             an
             opening
             were
             made
             for
             his
             entrance
             therin
             :
             then
             when
             he
             descendeth
             betweene
             the
             hands
             of
             the
             Priests
             singing
             their
             Masses
             :
             For
             then
             (
             as
             saith
             S.
             Gregorie
             )
             the
             heauens
             do
             open
             to
             giue
             him
             passage
             .
             Although
             after
             their
             imagination
             ,
             his
             body
             is
             then
             seperated
             from
             it
             measures
             and
             dimensions
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             should
             haue
             contented
             themselues
             with
             the
             Ministers
             answer
             vpon
             the
             similitude
             &
             word
             [
             Camell
             ]
             .
             For
             first
             ,
             they
             can
             no
             wayes
             proue
             ,
             that
             that
             saying
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             vpon
             the
             end
             of
             that
             speech
             ,
             ought
             else-where
             to
             be
             applied
             ,
             then
             to
             the
             nearest
             member
             of
             the
             same
             :
             where
             speech
             is
             made
             of
             the
             conu●sion
             and
             sauing
             of
             a
             rich
             man.
             For
             the
             Pronowne
             demonstratiue
             
               [
               Hoc
            
             ]
             doth
             clearly
             shewe
             it
             :
             Afterwards
             ,
             although
             that
             the
             generall
             proposition
             in
             the
             end
             and
             conclusion
             of
             the
             said
             sentence
             (
             where
             it
             is
             said
             that
             all
             things
             are
             possible
             to
             God
             )
             extendeth
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             will
             haue
             it
             )
             to
             the
             Camell
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             rich
             man
             :
             yet
             rightly
             to
             apply
             the
             two
             patts
             of
             the
             comparison
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             change
             is
             necessary
             for
             the
             rich
             man
             to
             be
             saued
             :
             so
             is
             it
             also
             for
             the
             body
             of
             the
             Camel
             ,
             to
             cause
             it
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             Howsoeuer
             that
             might
             in
             some
             sort
             be
             done
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             shal
             not
             proue
             ,
             nor
             euer
             thence
             conclude
             ,
             that
             two
             bodies
             can
             the
             one
             pierce
             the
             other
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Doctors
             by
             their
             thrisestrong
             &
             powerfull
             arguments
             haue
             not
             bene
             able
             to
             conclude
             any
             of
             all
             their
             absurdities
             ,
             nor
             by
             force
             of
             their
             reasons
             to
             constraine
             the
             Ministers
             to
             confesse
             the
             same
             :
             they
             do
             nought
             else
             but
             exclaime
             ,
             Blasphemy
             ,
             Blasphemy
             ;
             which
             is
             the
             last
             recourse
             of
             all
             persons
             ,
             who
             despite
             and
             gnash
             the
             teeth
             against
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             them
             that
             maintain
             it
             ,
             when
             they
             
             cannot
             ouercome
             them
             .
             Would
             the
             Ministers
             subscribe
             to
             the
             errors
             end
             abuses
             of
             the
             said
             Doctors
             ,
             they
             should
             bee
             good
             and
             Catholike
             people
             :
             but
             because
             they
             gainsay
             and
             reproue
             them
             ,
             they
             be
             (
             in
             their
             opinion
             )
             heretikes
             ,
             seducers
             ,
             blasphemers
             ,
             and
             Atheists
             :
             and
             in
             so
             great
             horror
             doo
             the
             Doctors
             hold
             them
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             maruel
             they
             pull
             not
             (
             like
             Caiphas
             )
             their
             horned
             caps
             and
             hoods
             in
             peeces
             ,
             in
             detestation
             of
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             proposed
             and
             defended
             by
             the
             said
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             condemned
             as
             blasphemy
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             haue
             dissembled
             the
             passage
             of
             the
             scripture
             alledged
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             proue
             that
             faith
             is
             a
             worke
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             he
             bringeth
             forth
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             when
             he
             will
             worke
             his
             regeneration
             :
             and
             incidently
             speake
             of
             free
             will
             ,
             and
             the
             merit
             of
             workes
             .
             Wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             are
             well
             resolued
             to
             answere
             ;
             and
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             maintaine
             the
             truth
             of
             these
             two
             points
             ,
             against
             the
             enemies
             of
             his
             glorie
             ,
             when
             they
             shall
             be
             proposed
             to
             be
             debated
             and
             discussed
             .
             And
             for
             the
             ioy
             which
             they
             receiue
             (
             say
             they
             )
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             confessed
             ,
             they
             haue
             not
             read
             in
             any
             auncient
             Author
             and
             expresse
             termes
             ,
             that
             God
             cannot
             cause
             one
             selfe-same
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             they
             haue
             no
             great
             cause
             thereof
             to
             reioyce
             :
             for
             albeit
             the
             said
             Fathers
             haue
             not
             in
             expresse
             termes
             said
             it
             :
             yet
             in
             termes
             equiualent
             ,
             in
             infinite
             places
             haue
             they
             said
             and
             written
             the
             same
             .
          
        
         
           
             A
             short
             Resolution
             of
             all
             the
             Answeres
             and
             discourse
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             made
             vpon
             the
             matter
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             in
             the
             Conference
             which
             they
             haue
             had
             with
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             THe
             craft
             and
             subtiltie
             of
             Sathan
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             world
             hath
             alwayes
             beene
             ,
             to
             transforme
             himfelfe
             into
             an
             Angell
             of
             light
             ,
             and
             to
             search
             some
             faire
             pretext
             ,
             to
             shrowd
             and
             disguise
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             vnder
             that
             shadowe
             ,
             to
             insinuate
             himselfe
             into
             the
             Church
             of
             GOD
             ,
             and
             there
             to
             broach
             his
             lyes
             and
             trumperies
             .
          
           
           
             As
             we
             all
             see
             ,
             that
             vnder
             pretence
             to
             honour
             God
             ,
             he
             hath
             established
             all
             the
             Idolatrie
             which
             hath
             euer
             beene
             in
             the
             worlde
             :
             referring
             the
             adoration
             of
             Images
             ,
             the
             Inuocation
             and
             intercession
             of
             Saintes
             ,
             the
             worshipping
             of
             Reliques
             ,
             and
             other
             lyke
             impieties
             to
             the
             honour
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             perswading
             the
             ignorant
             that
             all
             that
             was
             done
             to
             aduance
             the
             same
             .
             Lykewise
             vnder
             pretext
             of
             his
             seruice
             ,
             hath
             he
             brought
             in
             all
             the
             traditions
             and
             inuentions
             of
             men
             ,
             and
             chaunged
             with
             the
             time
             ,
             the
             true
             and
             lawfull
             seruice
             of
             God
             (
             which
             consisteth
             in
             the
             obedience
             of
             his
             holy
             will
             ,
             declared
             vnto
             vs
             in
             his
             lawe
             and
             word
             )
             into
             the
             obseruation
             of
             theyr
             commaundements
             ,
             and
             theyr
             inuented
             ceremonies
             .
             Vnder
             shadowe
             and
             colour
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             ordained
             by
             God
             ,
             for
             the
             confirmation
             ,
             exercise
             and
             nourishing
             of
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             there
             hath
             crept
             in
             the
             Masse
             :
             which
             is
             not
             only
             the
             ruine
             and
             totall
             subuersion
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             but
             also
             an
             abolishment
             of
             all
             the
             benefite
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             and
             consequently
             of
             the
             faith
             and
             all
             true
             Religion
             .
             Vnder
             colour
             and
             shadowe
             of
             holinesse
             ,
             and
             of
             chaste
             ,
             shamefaste
             ,
             and
             honest
             conuersation
             ,
             which
             is
             chiefly
             required
             in
             the
             Ministers
             and
             Pastors
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             he
             hath
             established
             single
             life
             ,
             and
             taken
             away
             from
             them
             the
             libertie
             of
             marriage
             :
             which
             hath
             bene
             the
             occasion
             of
             all
             filthinesse
             ,
             and
             of
             infamous
             ,
             stinking
             ,
             and
             execrable
             whoredomes
             and
             luxuritie
             ,
             which
             is
             seene
             in
             the
             Papacie
             .
             Vnder
             the
             shadowe
             of
             prayers
             ,
             which
             men
             are
             commaunded
             to
             make
             one
             for
             an
             other
             :
             and
             of
             Charitie
             ,
             whereby
             we
             are
             bound
             to
             succour
             all
             the
             needie
             poore
             :
             hath
             hee
             brought
             in
             all
             the
             suffrages
             which
             men
             sing
             for
             the
             dead
             ,
             the
             merites
             and
             workes
             of
             supererogation
             ,
             and
             other
             lyke
             abhominations
             .
             Vnder
             colour
             of
             the
             Saboth
             ,
             which
             God
             had
             chosen
             and
             deputed
             to
             the
             sanctification
             of
             his
             holy
             name
             ,
             to
             the
             contemplation
             of
             his
             workes
             ,
             in
             the
             remembrance
             and
             preaching
             of
             his
             benefites
             and
             fauours
             .
             He
             hath
             set
             forth
             an
             infinite
             number
             of
             prophane
             Feastes
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             name
             of
             God
             is
             blasphemed
             ,
             his
             ordinance
             despised
             ,
             his
             couenant
             violated
             .
             But
             who
             can
             recount
             the
             wickednesse
             and
             abhominations
             
             which
             are
             committed
             in
             these
             dayes
             ?
             Vnder
             pretext
             of
             the
             keyes
             and
             discipline
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             the
             administration
             and
             vse
             whereof
             was
             giuen
             to
             the
             Ministers
             lawfully
             called
             ,
             for
             a
             meane
             to
             conserue
             the
             doctrine
             in
             it
             puritie
             ,
             and
             keepe
             and
             entertaine
             good
             order
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             the
             slaunders
             which
             by
             the
             insolencie
             of
             some
             might
             happen
             :
             hath
             hee
             established
             a
             tyrannie
             ,
             whence
             is
             proceeded
             the
             whole
             dissipation
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             corruption
             of
             all
             estates
             :
             and
             the
             diminishing
             of
             the
             lawfull
             authoritie
             which
             God
             hath
             giuen
             to
             Kings
             ,
             Princes
             ,
             and
             Magistrates
             .
             Some
             whereof
             ,
             haue
             bene
             wholly
             spoyled
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             theyr
             goods
             ,
             as
             dignities
             ,
             by
             the
             Pope
             ,
             and
             the
             Bishops
             :
             and
             others
             so
             weakened
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             in
             many
             places
             constrained
             to
             bowe
             the
             necke
             ,
             and
             submit
             themselues
             to
             theyr
             yoake
             and
             puissance
             .
             To
             be
             short
             ,
             this
             may
             be
             noted
             and
             obserued
             in
             all
             the
             purposes
             and
             actions
             of
             the
             diuell
             :
             that
             as
             he
             is
             a
             Serpent
             ,
             so
             hath
             hee
             alwayes
             ramped
             ,
             and
             secretly
             crept
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             vnder
             the
             leaues
             and
             appearance
             of
             some
             pietie
             ,
             into
             the
             house
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             place
             therein
             ,
             his
             pretended
             disorder
             ,
             confusion
             and
             ruine
             .
             And
             we
             see
             ,
             that
             now
             continuing
             and
             following
             his
             wonted
             practises
             ,
             hee
             setteth
             foorth
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             (
             which
             to
             all
             the
             world
             is
             a
             plausible
             and
             fauourable
             tytle
             )
             to
             the
             ende
             ,
             that
             vnder
             the
             lustre
             and
             brightnesse
             of
             such
             an
             occasion
             ,
             hee
             might
             dazell
             the
             eyes
             of
             the
             ignorant
             ,
             and
             hold
             them
             still
             in
             the
             opinion
             and
             perswasion
             of
             theyr
             errorus
             ;
             which
             haue
             no
             foundation
             in
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             The
             Ministers
             beseech
             the
             Readers
             ,
             and
             all
             those
             that
             haue
             the
             feare
             of
             God
             ,
             or
             any
             zeale
             of
             his
             honour
             ,
             to
             be
             wise
             ,
             and
             attentiue
             ,
             to
             weigh
             and
             discouer
             the
             sayd
             subtilties
             and
             practises
             of
             the
             Diuell
             :
             and
             not
             to
             beleeue
             all
             spirites
             before
             they
             haue
             well
             sounded
             and
             tryed
             them
             :
             and
             that
             they
             also
             approue
             not
             all
             the
             things
             ,
             which
             vnder
             the
             name
             of
             God
             ,
             may
             be
             proposed
             vnto
             them
             ;
             and
             which
             at
             the
             first
             ,
             may
             seeme
             to
             tende
             and
             appertaine
             to
             his
             honour
             and
             glorie
             :
             but
             that
             they
             remember
             the
             Apostles
             admonition
             ,
             to
             try
             the
             spirites
             :
             
             and
             that
             they
             verie
             carefully
             regarde
             the
             ende
             ,
             
             and
             scope
             of
             those
             ,
             which
             propose
             vnto
             them
             such
             doctrine
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             any
             thing
             wherin
             heed
             must
             be
             taken
             of
             such
             cosonages
             and
             fraudes
             ,
             which
             are
             layd
             to
             surprise
             the
             simple
             ;
             it
             is
             needfull
             ,
             chiefly
             in
             this
             matter
             of
             the
             Omnipotency
             of
             God
             :
             whereof
             is
             the
             present
             question
             .
             For
             the
             Ministers
             do
             confesse
             ,
             that
             it
             ought
             to
             be
             knowne
             ,
             beleeued
             ,
             and
             vniuersally
             adored
             of
             all
             creatures
             ,
             in
             heauen
             and
             in
             earth
             .
             Moreouer
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             the
             faithfull
             cannot
             haue
             a
             better
             foundation
             ,
             nor
             better
             rampert
             to
             leane
             vnto
             ,
             and
             sustaine
             themselues
             against
             all
             the
             endeuours
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             diuel
             ,
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             their
             other
             enemies
             :
             as
             also
             (
             to
             be
             short
             )
             of
             all
             the
             temptations
             wherewith
             they
             might
             bee
             assayled
             and
             befieged
             .
          
           
             This
             Omnipotency
             (
             they
             confesse
             )
             is
             the
             hinge
             of
             the
             axeltree
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             wherevpon
             the
             world
             ,
             with
             all
             it
             parts
             is
             turned
             and
             sustained
             .
             They
             confesse
             moreouer
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             Omnipotency
             is
             not
             only
             venerable
             to
             the
             Angels
             ,
             and
             blessed
             spirits
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             elect
             and
             Saints
             vpon
             earth
             :
             but
             also
             terrible
             to
             the
             reprobates
             and
             diuels
             in
             hell
             .
             So
             that
             the
             one
             doth
             willingly
             embrace
             and
             submit
             themselues
             vnto
             it
             :
             and
             the
             others
             are
             constrained
             to
             bow
             vnder
             it
             ,
             and
             yeeld
             vnto
             and
             obey
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             infinite
             ,
             and
             of
             incomprehensible
             greatnesse
             ,
             to
             all
             creatures
             ,
             as
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             goodnesse
             ,
             Iustice
             ,
             truth
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             vertues
             and
             proprieties
             of
             our
             God.
             
          
           
             This
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             beleeue
             and
             confesse
             of
             the
             Omnipotency
             of
             God
             :
             and
             that
             which
             they
             thinke
             ,
             all
             Christians
             ought
             thereof
             to
             beleeue
             and
             hold
             .
             Now
             to
             make
             good
             vse
             of
             this
             Almightinesse
             ,
             and
             to
             apply
             it
             as
             is
             meete
             :
             we
             must
             iudge
             thereof
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             will
             :
             and
             of
             his
             will
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             word
             :
             So
             that
             we
             ought
             not
             to
             attribute
             indifferently
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             ,
             all
             things
             good
             and
             euill
             ,
             ordered
             and
             disordered
             ,
             agreeable
             and
             contrary
             to
             his
             nature
             ,
             false
             and
             true
             :
             But
             to
             well
             rule
             and
             order
             the
             thoughts
             and
             cogitations
             of
             Gods
             Omnipotencie
             ,
             presenting
             themselues
             in
             our
             hearts
             :
             we
             must
             (
             for
             our
             part
             )
             measure
             the
             same
             according
             
             to
             his
             holy
             will
             :
             and
             beleeue
             that
             it
             cannot
             be
             limitted
             ,
             letted
             nor
             hindred
             by
             any
             other
             will
             or
             power
             ,
             which
             wil
             or
             may
             be
             opposite
             vnto
             it
             .
             Which
             thing
             S.
             Augustine
             well
             teacheth
             in
             many
             places
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             fift
             booke
             and
             10.
             
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Cittie
             of
             God
             :
             where
             speaking
             of
             God
             ,
             hee
             saith
             :
             That
             he
             is
             called
             almightie
             :
             because
             he
             doth
             all
             whatsoeuer
             he
             will
             ,
             and
             suffereth
             nothing
             if
             he
             will
             it
             not
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             seuenth
             Chapter
             of
             the
             21.
             booke
             .
             For
             no
             other
             reason
             but
             this
             onely
             ,
             is
             he
             called
             Almightie
             :
             that
             he
             can
             do
             all
             whatsoeuer
             he
             will
             doo
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             first
             Chapter
             of
             the
             booke
             
               De
               Symbolo
               ad
               Catec
            
             :
             Our
             God
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             doth
             all
             that
             which
             he
             will
             do
             :
             and
             that
             is
             his
             Almightinesse
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             119.
             
             Sermon
             
               De
               tempore
            
             ;
             He
             is
             Almightie
             ,
             to
             do
             all
             things
             that
             he
             will
             do
             ,
             and
             ordaineth
             to
             be
             done
             .
             These
             sentences
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             lyke
             ,
             found
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             that
             good
             Father
             ,
             and
             other
             Auncients
             ,
             do
             clearly
             teach
             vs
             ,
             the
             maner
             how
             we
             may
             well
             make
             profit
             of
             the
             faith
             we
             haue
             of
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             :
             That
             is
             in
             bringing
             vs
             backe
             to
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             iudging
             of
             his
             will
             ,
             by
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             the
             false
             imaginations
             which
             therof
             we
             may
             conceiue
             in
             our
             minds
             :
             or
             that
             others
             would
             propose
             vnto
             vs
             :
             As
             did
             Sathan
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             whom
             he
             would
             haue
             induced
             to
             cast
             downe
             himselfe
             headlong
             ,
             vnder
             a
             vaine
             trust
             of
             helpe
             from
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             Euen
             so
             also
             ,
             the
             Monarchians
             ,
             who
             vnder
             colour
             and
             pretext
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             ,
             which
             of
             some
             myracles
             they
             gathered
             ,
             would
             proue
             and
             establish
             their
             heresies
             ,
             and
             take
             away
             the
             personall
             distinction
             which
             is
             betweene
             the
             Father
             and
             the
             sonne
             ,
             saying
             :
             That
             God
             being
             Almightie
             ,
             could
             therefore
             make
             himselfe
             Father
             and
             sonne
             together
             .
             Of
             the
             Anabaptists
             in
             these
             last
             times
             ,
             is
             it
             also
             found
             ,
             that
             for
             a
             vaine
             assurance
             ,
             which
             they
             put
             in
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             ,
             hoping
             he
             could
             nourish
             them
             ,
             as
             he
             did
             the
             byrds
             ,
             would
             not
             labour
             .
          
           
             Many
             such
             lyke
             more
             great
             inconueniences
             may
             happen
             to
             all
             those
             ,
             that
             hauing
             such
             wandering
             and
             stragling
             thoughts
             of
             the
             Omnipotency
             of
             God
             ,
             wil
             not
             restraine
             nor
             reduce
             them
             to
             his
             will.
             And
             this
             we
             see
             is
             besalue
             the
             Doctors
             :
             
             who
             willing
             to
             apprehend
             and
             measure
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             by
             their
             owne
             imaginations
             ,
             rather
             then
             by
             his
             will
             and
             word
             ,
             are
             (
             as
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             )
             become
             vaine
             in
             their
             imagination
             ,
             and
             their
             foolish
             heart
             is
             filled
             with
             darknesse
             .
             And
             willing
             to
             behold
             the
             Maiestie
             of
             God
             out
             of
             the
             limits
             and
             bounds
             which
             hee
             had
             shewed
             them
             in
             his
             word
             ,
             haue
             bene
             intrapped
             and
             ouerwhelmed
             of
             his
             glorie
             .
             And
             that
             is
             befalne
             them
             ,
             which
             in
             their
             resolution
             ,
             they
             themselues
             haue
             touched
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             for
             not
             hauing
             taken
             the
             word
             of
             God
             for
             their
             guide
             ,
             nor
             followed
             the
             steppes
             and
             pathes
             of
             his
             holy
             spirit
             ,
             they
             do
             erre
             from
             the
             faith
             :
             which
             (
             contrarie
             to
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             thinke
             )
             is
             not
             destroyed
             nor
             ouerthrowne
             by
             the
             consideration
             of
             the
             creatures
             and
             workes
             of
             God
             (
             which
             are
             as
             a
             myrror
             of
             his
             glorie
             and
             diuinitie
             )
             :
             but
             in
             as
             much
             as
             by
             them
             wee
             were
             turned
             away
             from
             the
             promises
             of
             God
             :
             by
             the
             which
             we
             are
             assured
             of
             his
             will
             ,
             and
             almightinesse
             ;
             which
             doth
             warrant
             and
             assure
             vs
             of
             the
             effects
             ,
             and
             accomplishment
             of
             this
             holy
             will.
             Which
             may
             bee
             seene
             and
             clearly
             obserued
             in
             them
             that
             were
             sent
             by
             Moyses
             to
             espie
             out
             and
             know
             the
             Land
             of
             the
             Cananites
             .
             Two
             of
             which
             ,
             (
             namely
             Iosua
             and
             Caleb
             )
             could
             neuer
             be
             withdrawne
             from
             the
             trust
             they
             had
             in
             theyr
             God.
             For
             as
             much
             as
             turning
             their
             mindes
             from
             the
             consideration
             of
             all
             things
             which
             could
             make
             them
             doubt
             thereof
             ,
             (
             as
             of
             the
             Fortresse
             and
             munition
             of
             Cities
             ,
             the
             number
             ,
             force
             ,
             weapons
             ,
             and
             experience
             of
             the
             countrie
             Inhabitants
             )
             they
             stayed
             their
             minds
             in
             the
             sole
             consideration
             of
             the
             promises
             which
             God
             had
             made
             vnto
             thē
             .
             Cōtrariwise
             ,
             the
             others
             forgetting
             the
             same
             promises
             ,
             &
             nought
             cōsidering
             ,
             but
             that
             which
             they
             saw
             before
             their
             eyes
             ,
             they
             fell
             ,
             and
             caused
             all
             the
             people
             to
             fall
             with
             them
             ,
             into
             that
             cursed
             and
             damnable
             infidelitie
             ▪
             for
             which
             they
             were
             so
             grieueuously
             punished
             in
             the
             wildernesse
             ,
             and
             excluded
             from
             enterance
             therevnto
             ,
             and
             enioying
             of
             that
             thing
             ,
             which
             God
             had
             promised
             to
             theyr
             Fathers
             .
             And
             in
             the
             example
             of
             Abrahā
             ,
             whose
             faith
             abode
             firme
             and
             stable
             ,
             by
             the
             consideration
             chiefly
             of
             the
             promise
             and
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             S.
             Paul
             declareth
             .
             So
             that
             the
             consideration
             
             of
             Gods
             Almightinesse
             ,
             came
             after
             ,
             to
             maintaine
             &
             second
             that
             which
             he
             had
             of
             the
             promise
             .
             One
             may
             see
             by
             these
             examples
             ,
             what
             daunger
             there
             is
             ,
             to
             depart
             and
             draw
             backe
             ,
             although
             neuer
             so
             litle
             ,
             from
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             by
             which
             we
             are
             guided
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             his
             will.
             And
             by
             the
             knowledge
             of
             his
             will
             ,
             conducted
             to
             the
             consideration
             and
             iudgement
             ,
             which
             we
             ought
             to
             make
             and
             haue
             of
             his
             Almightinesse
             .
          
           
             For
             want
             whereof
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             are
             fallen
             into
             errors
             and
             raylings
             ,
             which
             they
             propose
             to
             the
             Ministers
             by
             their
             writing
             and
             conclusion
             of
             their
             resolution
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             :
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             may
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             :
             which
             is
             against
             the
             faith
             we
             ought
             to
             haue
             ,
             and
             constantly
             retaine
             of
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             prouidence
             ,
             and
             euerlasting
             truth
             of
             our
             God
             :
             and
             against
             that
             likewise
             ,
             which
             wee
             ought
             to
             haue
             and
             keepe
             of
             our
             Lords
             true
             humanitie
             .
          
           
             And
             that
             which
             they
             first
             alledge
             of
             S.
             Ierome
             against
             Vigilantius
             ,
             nought
             serueth
             for
             the
             proofe
             and
             confirmation
             of
             their
             error
             .
             Where
             no
             other
             thing
             he
             saith
             :
             but
             that
             the
             soules
             of
             the
             Saints
             are
             not
             inclosed
             in
             a
             certaine
             prison
             (
             as
             dreamed
             Vigilantius
             )
             but
             do
             follow
             the
             Lambe
             whithersoeuer
             he
             goeth
             .
             Nor
             that
             which
             they
             alledge
             of
             Saint
             Augustine
             in
             the
             booke
             which
             he
             made
             of
             the
             pure
             care
             of
             the
             dead
             .
             For
             in
             that
             booke
             hee
             himselfe
             confesseth
             ,
             that
             he
             is
             incertaine
             of
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             propose
             ,
             and
             are
             assured
             .
             And
             nomore
             doo
             the
             three
             authorities
             they
             alledge
             ,
             of
             Saint
             
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             ,
             Saint
             Ambrose
             ,
             and
             Saint
             Augustine
             :
             whose
             sentences
             ought
             to
             be
             taken
             ,
             and
             vnder
             stood
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             and
             not
             of
             the
             thing
             signified
             by
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             As
             in
             the
             next
             conference
             the
             Ministers
             well
             hope
             to
             shew
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             do
             much
             maruel
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             so
             draw
             backe
             ,
             and
             will
             not
             (
             but
             vnwillingly
             )
             enter
             into
             conference
             for
             defence
             of
             their
             Masse
             :
             and
             to
             gainsay
             the
             Supper
             celebrated
             in
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             .
             For
             seeing
             they
             hold
             it
             for
             the
             principall
             foundation
             of
             theyr
             Religion
             :
             and
             propose
             the
             same
             for
             a
             meane
             of
             saluation
             to
             the
             whole
             
             world
             :
             (
             That
             they
             be
             not
             seene
             seducers
             ,
             nor
             ouer
             credulous
             to
             beleeue
             or
             teach
             an
             incertaine
             and
             vnassured
             thing
             )
             :
             they
             should
             alwayes
             be
             prouided
             and
             furnished
             with
             reasons
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             they
             might
             approue
             ,
             and
             readily
             defend
             that
             which
             they
             beleeue
             and
             say
             :
             and
             might
             conuince
             them
             also
             ,
             that
             would
             deny
             the
             same
             :
             But
             in
             this
             ,
             it
             appeareth
             to
             proceed
             of
             of
             an
             euill
             conscience
             ,
             which
             being
             timerous
             and
             fearefull
             ,
             flyeth
             alwaies
             the
             combat
             ,
             and
             the
             light
             .
             It
             is
             long
             time
             since
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             importuned
             them
             to
             enter
             into
             the
             deciding
             and
             conference
             of
             these
             two
             points
             ,
             and
             to
             bring
             them
             thervnto
             ,
             they
             haue
             proposed
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             the
             end
             for
             which
             the
             conference
             was
             appointed
             :
             which
             Madame
             
               de
               Buillon
            
             ,
             (
             in
             whose
             fauour
             it
             was
             made
             )
             once
             or
             twise
             hath
             publikely
             required
             :
             and
             that
             they
             also
             had
             often
             protested
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             not
             for
             other
             ende
             assembled
             with
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             then
             to
             satisfie
             therein
             the
             said
             Lady
             of
             Buillon
             :
             and
             not
             to
             be
             examined
             by
             them
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             falsly
             pretend
             .
             For
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             no
             desire
             to
             be
             examined
             of
             such
             Doctors
             ,
             being
             Priests
             :
             Ioyned
             ,
             that
             to
             be
             taught
             in
             the
             points
             of
             religion
             ,
             and
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             choose
             such
             Maisters
             ,
             nor
             repaire
             vnto
             them
             ,
             and
             frequent
             theyr
             schooles
             for
             that
             purpose
             .
             And
             yet
             notwithstanding
             all
             the
             foresayd
             remonstrances
             often
             made
             and
             repeated
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             alwayes
             vntill
             now
             ,
             deferred
             to
             conferre
             of
             the
             foresaid
             points
             :
             awayting
             (
             as
             it
             is
             likely
             )
             that
             some
             occasion
             should
             be
             offered
             ,
             to
             breake
             off
             ,
             and
             determine
             the
             sayd
             conference
             ,
             before
             they
             had
             begunne
             to
             speak
             thereof
             .
             Albeit
             ,
             had
             they
             any
             zeale
             to
             th●
             honour
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             edification
             of
             his
             Church
             ,
             they
             should
             by
             all
             meanes
             haue
             procured
             that
             the
             sayd
             two
             points
             should
             haue
             beene
             fully
             cleared
             and
             resolued
             :
             be
             it
             that
             they
             would
             confirme
             and
             strengthen
             them
             of
             their
             part
             :
             or
             withdraw
             (
             as
             they
             pretend
             )
             those
             of
             our
             side
             from
             their
             errors
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             much
             needfull
             hereafter
             to
             dispute
             of
             the
             Saints
             ,
             of
             Purgatory
             ,
             Pilgrigrimages
             ,
             and
             other
             like
             points
             :
             In
             regard
             of
             which
             ,
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             world
             is
             at
             this
             day
             cleared
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             ought
             chiefly
             to
             insist
             
             vpon
             these
             two
             points
             ,
             and
             to
             endeuour
             (
             with
             them
             )
             to
             make
             them
             cleare
             and
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             each
             one
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             vse
             Sophistries
             and
             cauils
             to
             make
             them
             obscure
             ,
             and
             retaine
             thereby
             the
             simple
             in
             their
             ignorance
             :
             as
             the
             Doctors
             endeuour
             to
             do
             .
             Who
             (
             hauing
             left
             of
             set
             purpose
             the
             Theses
             &
             Articles
             proposed
             to
             them
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             with
             order
             &
             good
             methode
             in
             their
             last
             answeres
             )
             do
             confusedly
             propose
             certaine
             questions
             culled
             out
             of
             their
             schoole
             diuinitie
             :
             euer
             more
             and
             more
             to
             fold
             vp
             this
             matter
             :
             And
             in
             so
             doing
             they
             withstand
             (
             as
             euer
             hitherto
             they
             haue
             done
             )
             what
             so
             ,
             and
             so
             often
             they
             haue
             protested
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             examine
             the
             confession
             of
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             :
             whereof
             notwithstanding
             ,
             they
             haue
             not
             handled
             one
             only
             point
             in
             all
             the
             conference
             .
             Wherein
             they
             haue
             shewed
             ,
             and
             yet
             plainly
             do
             shewe
             ,
             the
             distrust
             they
             haue
             to
             be
             able
             to
             withstand
             so
             cleare
             and
             apparant
             trueth
             ;
             as
             that
             which
             is
             proposed
             in
             the
             saide
             confession
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answeres
             to
             the
             Preface
             of
             the
             Doctors
             Questions
             .
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             ,
             before
             they
             propose
             their
             Questions
             ,
             in
             their
             Preface
             do
             call
             the
             Supper
             celebrated
             in
             the
             refor-Churches
             ,
             a
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             banquet
             .
             And
             in
             so
             saying
             ,
             they
             neither
             shame
             ,
             nor
             feare
             ,
             first
             to
             blaspheme
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             who
             instituted
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             is
             the
             authour
             therof
             :
             and
             then
             to
             condemne
             the
             Apostles
             of
             Impietie
             ,
             which
             so
             haue
             celebrated
             and
             taught
             it
             :
             together
             with
             all
             the
             auncient
             Churches
             which
             followed
             and
             obserued
             (
             whiles
             it
             reremained
             in
             it
             puritie
             )
             the
             forme
             and
             maner
             which
             the
             Euangelists
             and
             Apostles
             had
             taught
             ,
             and
             left
             by
             their
             writings
             .
             But
             the
             Ministers
             would
             willingly
             demaund
             of
             the
             Lordes
             our
             Maisters
             ,
             that
             they
             particularly
             note
             vnto
             them
             ,
             wherein
             they
             can
             violate
             the
             institution
             &
             ordinance
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             leaue
             his
             example
             ,
             and
             that
             of
             his
             Apostles
             in
             the
             celebration
             of
             the
             Supper
             ?
             For
             when
             they
             will
             celebrate
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             first
             assemble
             the
             whole
             Church
             together
             :
             as
             
             Iesus
             Christ
             did
             his
             Apostles
             and
             Disciples
             :
             where
             after
             their
             publike
             confession
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             vnderstandingly
             made
             in
             the
             name
             of
             all
             ,
             they
             make
             a
             Sermon
             to
             the
             people
             :
             wherein
             according
             to
             the
             grace
             and
             power
             which
             God
             hath
             giuen
             them
             ,
             they
             declare
             the
             causes
             ,
             and
             occasions
             ,
             the
             end
             ,
             the
             vse
             ,
             the
             points
             and
             effects
             of
             the
             holy
             Supper
             :
             to
             lift
             vp
             the
             hearts
             of
             the
             people
             to
             the
             consideration
             of
             the
             incomprehensible
             loue
             which
             the
             Father
             hath
             shewed
             towards
             his
             Church
             ,
             when
             in
             fauour
             thereof
             ,
             and
             for
             the
             saluation
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             he
             hath
             not
             spared
             his
             owne
             sonne
             ,
             but
             exposed
             him
             to
             a
             cruell
             and
             cursed
             death
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             each
             one
             calling
             to
             minde
             so
             great
             a
             grace
             and
             mercie
             ,
             be
             kindled
             and
             inflamed
             in
             the
             loue
             of
             God
             :
             and
             tremble
             at
             the
             ingratitudes
             and
             rebellious
             offences
             and
             sinnes
             which
             he
             hath
             committed
             against
             his
             Maiestie
             :
             and
             that
             with
             the
             sorrow
             and
             displeasure
             he
             hath
             for
             the
             same
             ,
             he
             cast
             himselfe
             betweene
             the
             armes
             of
             his
             sonne
             ,
             stretched
             out
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             to
             haue
             thereof
             a
             generall
             and
             full
             abolition
             .
             And
             that
             euen
             so
             ,
             with
             such
             a
             faith
             and
             repentance
             hee
             be
             prepared
             to
             present
             himselfe
             worthily
             at
             the
             table
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             to
             receiue
             the
             good
             things
             which
             are
             there
             administred
             .
             The
             Sermon
             ended
             ,
             the
             Minister
             recyteth
             with
             an
             high
             and
             audible
             voyce
             ,
             and
             his
             face
             turned
             towards
             the
             people
             ,
             the
             words
             of
             the
             institution
             and
             ordinance
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             together
             with
             a
             briefe
             and
             short
             declaration
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             That
             done
             ,
             he
             denounceth
             to
             all
             those
             ,
             not
             fully
             instructed
             and
             Catechised
             ,
             that
             they
             depart
             :
             and
             to
             all
             them
             which
             are
             excommunicated
             ,
             or
             attainted
             with
             some
             sinnes
             or
             scandalous
             crimes
             (
             whereof
             they
             haue
             made
             no
             satisfaction
             to
             the
             Church
             )
             that
             they
             abstaine
             therefrom
             ,
             and
             pollute
             not
             the
             table
             of
             the
             Lord.
             After
             that
             ,
             the
             Minister
             goeth
             to
             the
             table
             :
             where
             hauing
             taken
             the
             bread
             ,
             and
             giuen
             thankes
             to
             God
             ,
             he
             breaketh
             it
             ,
             and
             giueth
             it
             to
             the
             people
             there
             assembled
             .
             And
             also
             presently
             the
             Cup
             to
             all
             them
             that
             communicate
             :
             which
             being
             ended
             ,
             he
             giueth
             thankes
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             dismisseth
             the
             people
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ministers
             ,
             following
             in
             all
             these
             things
             the
             example
             and
             rule
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             giuen
             them
             ,
             cannot
             imagine
             wherevpon
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             grounded
             that
             their
             saying
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             calling
             it
             a
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             banquet
             .
             And
             they
             cannot
             perceiue
             ,
             what
             they
             could
             or
             would
             reproue
             in
             all
             theyr
             action
             :
             vnlesse
             peraduenture
             they
             will
             taxe
             them
             for
             not
             hauing
             
               Aulbes
               ,
               stoles
               ,
               fanets
               ,
               Crosses
               ,
               holy
               water
               ,
               banners
               ,
               Chisibles
               ,
               tunicles
               ,
               lights
               ,
               Incense
               ,
               belles
               ,
               singing
               in
               a
               straunge
               and
               vnknowne
               language
               ,
               Musicke
               ,
               and
               Organes
               ,
               holy
               napkins
               ,
               Aultars
               ,
            
             Clearkes
             to
             answere
             :
             
               Et
               cum
               spiritu
               tuo
            
             ,
             nor
             words
             addressed
             to
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             (
             which
             haue
             no
             eares
             )
             after
             the
             maner
             of
             Inchanters
             ,
             nor
             the
             Crosse
             &
             signes
             ,
             nor
             any
             eleuation
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             to
             be
             adored
             :
             nor
             other
             like
             aperies
             of
             mans
             inuentiō
             ,
             and
             drawne
             part
             from
             Iudaisme
             ,
             and
             part
             from
             Paganisme
             .
             The
             obseruation
             of
             which
             things
             the
             Ministers
             would
             make
             great
             conscience
             of
             :
             because
             they
             be
             but
             Idolatries
             and
             superstitions
             ,
             whereby
             the
             puritie
             &
             integritie
             of
             Christian
             Religion
             ,
             is
             wholly
             wasted
             and
             corrupted
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answeres
             to
             the
             questions
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             touching
             the
             Supper
             .
          
           
             FOr
             answere
             to
             the
             first
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ;
             that
             the
             Sacrament
             in
             perfection
             considered
             ,
             consisteth
             in
             three
             things
             .
             One
             whereof
             is
             the
             Element
             ,
             which
             Ireneus
             calleth
             a
             thing
             earthy
             :
             the
             other
             ,
             the
             thing
             signified
             ;
             called
             by
             the
             same
             author
             ,
             a
             thing
             heauenly
             .
             And
             the
             third
             is
             the
             word
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             earthy
             thing
             is
             deputed
             to
             signifie
             the
             heauenly
             ,
             and
             assureth
             them
             of
             the
             exhibition
             thereof
             ,
             that
             with
             faith
             do
             present
             themselues
             to
             receiue
             it
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             second
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ;
             that
             the
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             contained
             in
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             declared
             by
             his
             Minister
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             commandement
             ,
             is
             this
             word
             word
             necessary
             with
             the
             E●ment
             ,
             to
             constitute
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             and
             not
             the
             onely
             lowe
             and
             secret
             
             pronunciation
             of
             certaine
             vnkowne
             words
             ,
             addressed
             to
             the
             elements
             ,
             nor
             any
             vertue
             which
             is
             hidden
             in
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             third
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             word
             aforesaid
             the
             signes
             bee
             chaunged
             ,
             not
             as
             touching
             the
             nature
             :
             or
             as
             touching
             the
             substance
             :
             but
             as
             touching
             the
             vse
             onely
             :
             and
             that
             only
             during
             the
             action
             ,
             whervnto
             they
             serue
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             fourth
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             which
             before
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Supper
             were
             common
             ,
             are
             consecrated
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             deputed
             by
             the
             said
             word
             and
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             declared
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             a
             holy
             and
             sacred
             vse
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             represent
             and
             exhibit
             the
             things
             by
             them
             signified
             .
          
           
             The
             answere
             to
             the
             fourth
             question
             sufficeth
             for
             the
             fift
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             sixt
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             faithfull
             receiue
             not
             onely
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             the
             gifts
             and
             graces
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             (
             as
             his
             tighteousnesse
             ,
             life
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             fruites
             of
             his
             sacrifice
             )
             but
             that
             they
             also
             receiue
             and
             possesse
             himselfe
             :
             and
             are
             made
             one
             with
             him
             ,
             no
             lesse
             truly
             and
             straightly
             ,
             then
             the
             members
             are
             conioyned
             to
             the
             head
             .
             And
             they
             say
             moreouer
             ,
             that
             this
             coniunction
             is
             the
             spring
             and
             meane
             of
             all
             the
             benefites
             ,
             which
             flowe
             from
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             by
             him
             into
             vs
             :
             but
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             this
             reception
             must
             bee
             wholly
             attributed
             to
             the
             free
             operation
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             which
             maketh
             vs
             fit
             and
             capable
             to
             knowe
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             with
             all
             his
             vertues
             and
             properties
             :
             and
             in
             knowing
             him
             ,
             to
             trust
             in
             him
             :
             and
             in
             reposing
             our
             trust
             in
             him
             ,
             to
             possesse
             and
             wholly
             enioy
             him
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             seuenth
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             reiect
             and
             reproue
             the
             word
             Concomitance
             ,
             and
             more
             also
             the
             thing
             thereby
             signified
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             that
             hath
             beene
             the
             cause
             ,
             for
             which
             the
             common
             people
             hath
             bene
             depriued
             and
             excluded
             from
             one
             of
             the
             essentiall
             parts
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             namely
             ,
             from
             the
             participation
             of
             the
             Cuppe
             .
             And
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             an
             attempt
             against
             the
             
             diuine
             Maiestie
             ,
             to
             seperate
             what
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             hath
             ioyned
             together
             :
             and
             to
             deny
             to
             some
             of
             his
             members
             ,
             that
             which
             he
             hath
             willed
             and
             commaunded
             to
             be
             common
             to
             all
             .
             Ioyned
             ,
             that
             the
             reason
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             requireth
             it
             :
             which
             was
             instituted
             for
             our
             spirituall
             nourishment
             .
             The
             which
             (
             as
             doth
             the
             corporall
             )
             consisteth
             in
             drinke
             &
             meate
             .
             To
             the
             ende
             then
             ,
             that
             there
             be
             some
             correspondency
             betweene
             them
             two
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             ,
             that
             as
             we
             are
             fed
             with
             the
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             crucified
             :
             So
             be
             we
             also
             watered
             with
             his
             blood
             shead
             ,
             for
             the
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             .
             To
             be
             short
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             Supper
             was
             chiefly
             instituted
             to
             shewe
             foorth
             the
             Lords
             death
             :
             and
             that
             in
             his
             death
             ,
             his
             blood
             was
             seperated
             from
             his
             bodie
             :
             Meete
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             be
             there
             administred
             ,
             to
             represent
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             and
             more
             clearly
             to
             propose
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             all
             the
             mistery
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             eight
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             acknowledge
             no
             other
             cause
             ,
             nor
             meane
             of
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             then
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             blood
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             faith
             ;
             whereby
             the
             effect
             of
             Gods
             grace
             ,
             and
             the
             fruit
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             are
             applied
             vnto
             vs.
             
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             ninth
             question
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             say
             :
             that
             the
             faithfull
             comming
             to
             the
             Supper
             ,
             do
             not
             come
             thither
             to
             receiue
             there
             a
             new
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             with
             whom
             they
             had
             not
             bene
             formerly
             conioyned
             :
             nor
             a
             new
             righteousnes
             ,
             which
             had
             not
             bene
             communicated
             vnto
             them
             .
             And
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             if
             some
             one
             did
             present
             himselfe
             there
             without
             faith
             ,
             (
             for
             want
             whereof
             he
             should
             not
             be
             vnited
             ,
             incorporated
             and
             engraffed
             into
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             to
             bee
             partaker
             of
             his
             righteousnes
             ,
             life
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             his
             gifts
             and
             blessings
             )
             :
             that
             the
             holy
             Supper
             in
             that
             case
             ,
             should
             be
             as
             vnprofitable
             to
             him
             ,
             as
             is
             meate
             vnptofitable
             to
             a
             dead
             man.
             But
             ,
             if
             liuing
             by
             the
             meanes
             aforesayd
             (
             namely
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             blood
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             faith
             )
             he
             present
             himselfe
             there
             in
             such
             an
             estate
             :
             that
             then
             the
             graces
             of
             God
             be
             multiplied
             ,
             increased
             ,
             and
             more
             and
             more
             confirmed
             in
             him
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             Circumcision
             ,
             brought
             not
             vnto
             Abraham
             a
             new
             
             righteousnesse
             :
             but
             sealed
             and
             ratified
             that
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             promise
             was
             communicated
             before
             vnto
             him
             .
             Which
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             knowing
             in
             what
             degree
             of
             vertue
             they
             bee
             ,
             yet
             ought
             they
             not
             to
             contemne
             the
             holy
             Supper
             ,
             nor
             any
             way
             to
             abstaine
             from
             it
             ,
             when
             occasion
             and
             meanes
             serue
             them
             to
             be
             there
             :
             Considering
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             be
             so
             promoted
             nor
             aduaunced
             in
             the
             knowledge
             and
             feare
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             faith
             of
             his
             promises
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             not
             yet
             growe
             and
             profit
             (
             in
             what
             estate
             soeuer
             they
             be
             )
             by
             the
             meanes
             which
             God
             hath
             therefore
             left
             and
             ordained
             in
             his
             Church
             .
             And
             impossible
             it
             is
             ,
             for
             a
             man
             hauing
             true
             faith
             in
             his
             heart
             ,
             to
             do
             otherwise
             ;
             seeing
             hee
             hath
             the
             commoditie
             thereof
             :
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             nature
             of
             faith
             is
             not
             to
             apprehend
             the
             promises
             of
             God
             onely
             :
             but
             also
             to
             engender
             ,
             and
             bring
             forth
             in
             the
             heart
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             a
             will
             to
             obey
             him
             ,
             and
             keep
             his
             commaundements
             and
             ordinances
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             first
             Article
             which
             the
             Doctors
             propose
             touching
             their
             Masse
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             :
             that
             the
             Doctors
             do
             openly
             blaspheme
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             to
             authorise
             with
             his
             name
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             example
             ,
             such
             an
             abhomination
             .
             And
             that
             they
             also
             mocke
             the
             Church
             &
             the
             world
             ,
             in
             preaching
             and
             writing
             such
             Impieties
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             second
             Article
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             :
             that
             there
             is
             in
             the
             Church
             no
             other
             sacrifice
             ,
             by
             which
             men
             are
             reconciled
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             which
             maketh
             him
             mercifull
             and
             fauourable
             towards
             them
             (
             by
             appeasing
             his
             wrath
             )
             then
             that
             onely
             and
             alone
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             once
             offered
             vpō
             the
             Crosse
             to
             his
             Father
             .
             The
             vertue
             wherof
             being
             eternall
             ,
             to
             sanctifie
             all
             beleeuers
             ,
             and
             to
             obtain
             vnto
             them
             for
             euer
             ,
             remission
             and
             abolishment
             of
             sinnes
             :
             there
             is
             no
             need
             of
             any
             other
             ,
             nor
             that
             which
             he
             hath
             once
             offered
             ,
             be
             euer
             reiterate
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             third
             Article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             :
             that
             they
             which
             approue
             the
             Masse
             ,
             and
             other
             Priesthood
             ,
             then
             that
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ;
             and
             wil
             establish
             for
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             an
             other
             sacrifice
             ,
             then
             that
             he
             himselfe
             ,
             with
             his
             body
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             offered
             ,
             are
             Antichrists
             :
             and
             abolish
             (
             as
             much
             
             as
             in
             them
             lyeth
             )
             all
             the
             vertue
             and
             fruite
             of
             the
             death
             &
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             fourth
             Article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             alledge
             ,
             what
             S.
             Paul
             writeth
             ,
             to
             wit
             :
             
               That
               where
               remission
               is
            
             ,
             
             
               there
               is
               no
               more
               offering
               for
               sinne
               .
            
             Now
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             remission
             hath
             bene
             obtained
             for
             vs
             :
             as
             by
             infinit
             passages
             of
             scripture
             appeareth
             .
             It
             followeth
             then
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             more
             oblation
             for
             sin
             ,
             neither
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             nor
             out
             of
             the
             Masse
             .
             And
             if
             there
             be
             none
             for
             the
             liuing
             ,
             lesse
             is
             there
             for
             the
             dead
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             fift
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             the
             Communion
             is
             of
             the
             essence
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             as
             S.
             Paul
             sheweth
             in
             the
             first
             of
             the
             Corinthians
             ,
             10.
             and
             11.
             
             Chapters
             .
             And
             as
             it
             is
             carried
             by
             the
             Cannon
             it selfe
             ,
             and
             other
             things
             about
             the
             Masse
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             sixt
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             three
             things
             :
             First
             ,
             that
             the
             Popish
             Masse
             is
             no
             Sacrament
             :
             then
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             not
             there
             .
             And
             therof
             conclude
             ,
             that
             then
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             there
             remaining
             ,
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             adored
             :
             which
             being
             creatures
             cannot
             be
             adored
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             which
             adore
             them
             be
             Idolators
             .
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             seuenth
             and
             last
             Article
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             contrary
             to
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             not
             any
             thing
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             which
             is
             not
             either
             directly
             ,
             or
             indirectly
             contrary
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             for
             conclusion
             admonish
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             &
             entreat
             them
             ,
             not
             to
             depart
             (
             as
             they
             haue
             formerly
             done
             )
             out
             of
             the
             bounds
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             now
             proposed
             for
             disputation
             .
             To
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             these
             two
             points
             which
             are
             now
             in
             debate
             betweene
             them
             ,
             may
             be
             wholly
             and
             perfectly
             decyded
             ,
             to
             the
             content
             and
             edification
             of
             them
             that
             shall
             reade
             the
             Acts
             of
             this
             conference
             .
          
           
             
               
                 Tuesday
                 the
                 30.
                 of
                 Iuly
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aforesaid
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             A
             briefe
             Reply
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             against
             the
             last
             Answer
             of
             the
             Ministers
             to
             them
             ,
             sent
             by
             my
             Lord
             the
             Duke
             de
             Niuernois
             ,
             the
             first
             of
             August
             ,
             about
             seuen
             or
             eight
             of
             the
             clocke
             in
             the
             euening
             .
             1566.
             
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             ,
             after
             their
             resolution
             giuen
             vpon
             the
             Artice
             of
             Gods
             Omnipotency
             ,
             were
             not
             determined
             to
             returne
             any
             more
             therevnto
             :
             as
             hauing
             sufficiently
             handled
             that
             matter
             .
             But
             the
             horrour
             they
             haue
             of
             the
             new
             blasphemies
             ,
             contained
             in
             the
             last
             writing
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             hath
             incyted
             them
             (
             contrary
             to
             their
             purpose
             )
             although
             not
             to
             reply
             ,
             at
             the
             least
             to
             admonish
             the
             Ministers
             and
             the
             reader
             of
             this
             present
             Conference
             ,
             of
             the
             said
             execrable
             blasphemies
             :
             which
             they
             are
             constrained
             to
             confesse
             ,
             that
             will
             not
             acknowledge
             the
             Reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Aultar
             :
             but
             dare
             therby
             deny
             the
             power
             of
             God
             himself
             .
             The
             consideration
             wherof
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             hope
             )
             wil
             not
             only
             cōfirme
             the
             Catholikes
             in
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             said
             article
             :
             but
             also
             (
             by
             Gods
             assistance
             )
             wil
             bring
             back
             many
             which
             are
             strayed
             ,
             separating
             themselues
             from
             the
             Church
             Catholike
             :
             whē
             they
             shall
             vnderstand
             the
             detestable
             errors
             &
             blasphemies
             which
             do
             follow
             the
             contradiction
             of
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             our
             Lord
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             Which
             also
             should
             serue
             for
             the
             conuersion
             of
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             :
             would
             they
             without
             passiō
             examine
             the
             reasons
             &
             acts
             which
             haue
             bene
             proposed
             vnto
             them
             ,
             touching
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             and
             sincerely
             iudge
             therof
             :
             as
             resisting
             the
             holy
             spirit
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             acknowledging
             their
             errors
             ,
             they
             are
             turned
             to
             all
             maner
             of
             reproach
             and
             iniury
             against
             them
             ,
             which
             of
             good
             will
             would
             admonish
             them
             ;
             and
             haue
             taxed
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             tended
             not
             but
             to
             roote
             them
             out
             .
             Which
             thing
             the
             Doctors
             neuer
             minded
             :
             and
             desire
             not
             but
             the
             saluation
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             &
             of
             all
             those
             that
             are
             seperated
             from
             the
             true
             Catholike
             Church
             .
             
             Of
             which
             ,
             their
             preachings
             shall
             beare
             witnesse
             :
             wherein
             they
             ordinarily
             exhort
             the
             people
             to
             pray
             vnto
             God
             for
             them
             .
             True
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             they
             require
             the
             extirpatiō
             of
             the
             kingdome
             of
             Sathan
             ▪
             and
             the
             rooting
             out
             of
             all
             heresies
             and
             peruerse
             doctrine
             ,
             rather
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             Gods
             word
             ,
             then
             by
             all
             other
             meanes
             .
             And
             they
             wonder
             why
             the
             Ministers
             are
             so
             pricked
             against
             them
             in
             their
             two
             last
             answeres
             :
             seeing
             they
             haue
             giuen
             them
             no
             occasion
             thereof
             ,
             but
             haue
             taken
             it
             lightly
             ,
             for
             no
             other
             reason
             ,
             but
             because
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             written
             ,
             that
             many
             propositions
             set
             forth
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             contained
             blasphemies
             ,
             which
             they
             should
             content
             themselues
             to
             denie
             ,
             or
             to
             proue
             that
             there
             are
             none
             ,
             and
             leaue
             the
             iudgement
             thereof
             to
             the
             readers
             :
             without
             entering
             into
             such
             hotte
             coller
             ,
             seeing
             they
             professe
             to
             bee
             so
             much
             mortified
             ,
             patient
             ,
             and
             modest
             ,
             that
             albeit
             one
             should
             reproach
             them
             ,
             they
             would
             not
             reproach
             againe
             .
             They
             should
             also
             well
             remember
             the
             faire
             tytles
             with
             which
             they
             honour
             the
             Catholique
             doctrine
             :
             as
             with
             the
             name
             of
             superstition
             ,
             Idolatrie
             ,
             impietie
             ,
             abhomination
             ,
             and
             many
             other
             like
             :
             yea
             not
             sparing
             the
             persons
             :
             calling
             the
             Popes
             ,
             Bishops
             ,
             &
             Priests
             ,
             Antichrists
             ,
             &
             Ministers
             of
             Sathan
             :
             against
             which
             reproaches
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             content
             themselues
             to
             shewe
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             when
             occasion
             serueth
             ,
             that
             such
             tytles
             agree
             neither
             with
             the
             persons
             ,
             nor
             yet
             the
             doctrine
             by
             them
             preached
             .
             Now
             although
             that
             the
             Ministers
             and
             their
             furie
             deserue
             a
             sharpe
             reply
             ,
             yet
             to
             mittigate
             their
             so
             inflamed
             hearts
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             answere
             to
             the
             iniuries
             which
             touch
             their
             persons
             and
             estates
             :
             referring
             the
             whole
             to
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             vnpassionate
             readers
             :
             and
             will
             only
             touch
             the
             points
             which
             concerne
             the
             doctrine
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             great
             wrong
             to
             the
             Doctors
             and
             their
             like
             ,
             in
             comparing
             them
             to
             Donatists
             ,
             and
             falsly
             to
             impute
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             tie
             the
             Church
             in
             a
             certaine
             place
             ,
             (
             as
             did
             the
             Donatists
             )
             which
             placed
             it
             onely
             in
             Affrike
             .
             For
             it
             is
             manifest
             to
             all
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             know
             not
             ,
             nor
             confesse
             any
             other
             Church
             ,
             then
             the
             Catholique
             :
             which
             (
             as
             it
             name
             importeth
             )
             hath
             bene
             visible
             since
             the
             Apostles
             time
             ,
             and
             
             hath
             her
             spreading
             through
             the
             world
             ,
             in
             what
             region
             ,
             country
             ,
             or
             place
             soeuer
             ,
             the
             faithfull
             beleeuing
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             are
             .
             Although
             they
             reuerence
             the
             Church
             of
             Rome
             ,
             as
             chiefe
             and
             principall
             among
             others
             :
             as
             
               Ireneus
               ,
               Tertullian
            
             ,
             S.
             Ciprian
             ,
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             and
             other
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             haue
             giuen
             it
             this
             honour
             ,
             to
             confesse
             it
             to
             be
             principall
             and
             mother
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             of
             other
             Churches
             ;
             with
             more
             iust
             reason
             ,
             may
             such
             obiection
             be
             retorted
             against
             the
             Ministers
             :
             who
             cannot
             say
             their
             Church
             to
             be
             Catholike
             :
             hauing
             taken
             it
             beginning
             in
             our
             time
             ,
             seene
             &
             known
             at
             Geneua
             ,
             founded
             vpō
             the
             priuate
             opinion
             of
             one
             man
             :
             without
             that
             in
             former
             time
             one
             could
             shewe
             such
             opinion
             to
             haue
             beene
             holden
             in
             any
             Nation
             whatsoeuer
             .
             Which
             thing
             shall
             be
             handled
             in
             it
             order
             ,
             when
             they
             shall
             examine
             the
             errors
             by
             the
             Ministers
             maintained
             against
             this
             Article
             ;
             
               I
               beleeue
               the
               holy
               Catholique
               Church
               .
            
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             should
             not
             haue
             alledged
             the
             violence
             ,
             crueltie
             ,
             and
             furie
             of
             the
             Donatists
             ,
             against
             the
             Catholiques
             :
             for
             such
             example
             doth
             condemne
             them
             ,
             and
             their
             like
             .
             But
             because
             it
             doth
             not
             but
             bring
             fresh
             to
             memorie
             the
             passed
             euils
             ,
             which
             Fraunce
             hath
             endured
             by
             the
             instigation
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             for
             feare
             to
             incyte
             them
             further
             to
             say
             new
             iniuries
             :
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             dwell
             long
             vpon
             this
             matter
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             they
             shewe
             vnto
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             the
             Donatists
             reproached
             the
             Catholiques
             ,
             that
             they
             endured
             persecution
             by
             them
             ,
             and
             that
             to
             roote
             them
             out
             ,
             they
             sollicited
             the
             Emperours
             and
             Magistrates
             euen
             as
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             blame
             the
             Doctors
             .
             Who
             confesse
             :
             first
             to
             desire
             the
             conuersion
             of
             all
             Sects
             ,
             and
             in
             case
             they
             will
             not
             come
             to
             repentance
             ,
             that
             the
             Magistrates
             by
             good
             and
             holy
             lawes
             may
             execute
             such
             punishment
             therefore
             ,
             as
             God
             bee
             not
             so
             outragiously
             blasphemed
             ,
             and
             the
             people
             grieued
             .
             And
             therein
             they
             follow
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             expressed
             in
             an
             Epistle
             ,
             sent
             
               Advincentin
               contra
               Donatistas
            
             .
             Where
             he
             confesseth
             ,
             that
             the
             Catholiques
             did
             persecute
             the
             Donatists
             :
             and
             that
             contrariwise
             the
             Donatists
             also
             afflicted
             the
             Catholiques
             :
             but
             that
             the
             persecutions
             were
             different
             .
             That
             those
             of
             the
             Catholiques
             
             were
             not
             executed
             but
             by
             the
             Magistrate
             ,
             and
             came
             of
             charitie
             ,
             to
             roote
             out
             the
             euill
             ,
             which
             hindred
             the
             peace
             and
             tranquilitie
             publike
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             the
             persecution
             by
             the
             Donatists
             ,
             was
             made
             without
             authoritie
             of
             the
             Magistrate
             ,
             and
             proceeded
             of
             malice
             :
             which
             pretended
             but
             mischiefe
             and
             ruine
             :
             and
             S.
             Augustine
             declareth
             that
             the
             first
             was
             good
             ,
             and
             of
             God
             :
             and
             the
             second
             wicked
             ,
             and
             by
             inspiration
             of
             Sathan
             .
             And
             to
             this
             purpose
             he
             bringeth
             many
             excellent
             examples
             of
             holy
             scripture
             .
          
           
             This
             hath
             bene
             somewhat
             largely
             handled
             ,
             to
             purge
             the
             Doctors
             of
             the
             slaunder
             imposed
             on
             them
             by
             the
             Ministers
             :
             where
             they
             reproach
             them
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             preachings
             ,
             writings
             ,
             and
             conferences
             ,
             they
             search
             but
             onely
             to
             roote
             out
             the
             Ministers
             :
             whom
             they
             haue
             alwayes
             persecuted
             .
             And
             they
             interpret
             the
             same
             as
             therefore
             proceeding
             from
             a
             particular
             hate
             of
             the
             Doctors
             against
             them
             :
             and
             not
             of
             charitie
             ,
             and
             zeale
             of
             truth
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             conuersion
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             as
             of
             those
             which
             are
             seduced
             and
             abused
             by
             them
             .
             The
             Doctors
             therein
             call
             God
             to
             witnesse
             ,
             and
             doo
             protest
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             and
             pray
             the
             Ministers
             to
             beleeue
             them
             ,
             attending
             therevpon
             the
             iudgement
             of
             God
             ,
             who
             is
             the
             onely
             searcher
             of
             the
             hearts
             and
             affections
             of
             men
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             Article
             where
             the
             Ministers
             say
             that
             God
             is
             almightie
             ,
             because
             he
             can
             do
             whatsoeuer
             he
             will
             ,
             had
             they
             listed
             to
             read
             the
             writings
             of
             Saint
             Thomas
             (
             whose
             doctrine
             they
             disdaine
             )
             well
             had
             they
             knowne
             ,
             that
             this
             reason
             is
             no
             reason
             .
             Because
             the
             Angels
             ,
             and
             they
             which
             are
             blessed
             ,
             conforming
             themselues
             alwayes
             to
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             can
             doo
             all
             things
             that
             they
             will
             doo
             :
             and
             there
             is
             no
             creature
             which
             can
             hinder
             the
             effect
             of
             theyr
             will
             ,
             and
             yet
             are
             they
             not
             almightie
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             saying
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             in
             taking
             it
             so
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             take
             it
             ;
             The
             reason
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             is
             ouer-weake
             and
             false
             .
             But
             to
             haue
             the
             true
             vnderstanding
             of
             this
             sentence
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             to
             consider
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             difference
             betweene
             the
             actuall
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             power
             of
             will.
             
          
           
           
             For
             God
             can
             wil
             many
             things
             which
             he
             willeth
             not
             ,
             nor
             euer
             will.
             And
             euen
             so
             can
             he
             will
             more
             then
             he
             actually
             willeth
             :
             whereby
             they
             ought
             rather
             to
             measure
             his
             omnipotencie
             ,
             then
             to
             measure
             it
             according
             to
             his
             actuall
             will.
             And
             thus
             must
             be
             interpreted
             the
             text
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             that
             the
             almightinesse
             extendeth
             to
             all
             things
             which
             he
             can
             will
             ,
             and
             not
             according
             to
             that
             he
             actually
             willeth
             .
             And
             S.
             Augustine
             is
             cyted
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             being
             destitute
             of
             testimonie
             of
             scripture
             ,
             albeit
             they
             vaunted
             in
             their
             former
             answere
             ,
             to
             haue
             learned
             this
             reason
             by
             the
             scriptures
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             by
             slaunder
             doo
             falsly
             taxe
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             to
             haue
             cut
             off
             some
             words
             of
             theyr
             last
             writing
             :
             which
             will
             not
             be
             found
             to
             bee
             true
             .
             For
             the
             text
             of
             the
             Doctors
             beareth
             these
             words
             .
             It
             is
             not
             to
             bee
             doubted
             ,
             but
             that
             aboue
             all
             conceit
             and
             imagination
             of
             humane
             spirit
             ,
             the
             power
             of
             God
             is
             great
             ,
             infinite
             ,
             and
             incomprehensible
             .
             Where
             it
             clearly
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             speake
             generally
             of
             all
             conceit
             and
             imagination
             ,
             without
             any
             exception
             thereof
             ,
             be
             it
             of
             wisedome
             or
             folly
             .
             Therfore
             was
             it
             not
             needfull
             to
             expresse
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             seeing
             that
             the
             Doctors
             spake
             generally
             .
             And
             that
             which
             goeth
             before
             doth
             shewe
             the
             same
             :
             as
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             cyted
             it
             :
             where
             it
             is
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             reproued
             the
             said
             Ministers
             ,
             because
             they
             gaue
             some
             restraint
             and
             limitation
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             For
             as
             much
             as
             they
             would
             not
             stretch
             it
             generally
             to
             all
             the
             things
             which
             men
             can
             conceiue
             ,
             and
             in
             their
             mindes
             imagine
             .
             Where
             the
             words
             generally
             ,
             and
             all
             things
             do
             sufficiently
             declare
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             willed
             to
             comprehend
             end
             the
             foolish
             phantasies
             and
             imaginations
             themselues
             ,
             which
             men
             may
             apprehend
             according
             to
             humane
             iudgement
             ,
             and
             haue
             willed
             to
             cut
             off
             nothing
             from
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Ministers
             :
             who
             peraduenture
             haue
             thought
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             would
             not
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             all
             that
             which
             a
             foolish
             braine
             can
             imagine
             :
             as
             fearing
             they
             would
             inferre
             against
             them
             ,
             that
             God
             then
             should
             commit
             some
             folly
             .
             Which
             would
             not
             follow
             :
             For
             albeit
             that
             some
             things
             be
             esteemed
             follyes
             in
             the
             iudgement
             of
             
             men
             ,
             neuerthelesse
             seeing
             they
             be
             in
             themselues
             possible
             ,
             they
             may
             bee
             done
             of
             God
             ;
             but
             wisely
             ,
             although
             humane
             sence
             do
             iudge
             the
             contrary
             :
             euen
             as
             in
             many
             iudgements
             man
             is
             deceiued
             :
             esteeming
             that
             folly
             ,
             which
             (
             as
             saith
             Saint
             Paul
             )
             is
             wisedome
             to
             wards
             God.
             The
             Doctors
             then
             say
             ,
             that
             
             all
             things
             imaginable
             to
             man
             ,
             are
             without
             exception
             to
             bee
             done
             as
             touching
             God
             :
             the
             things
             excepted
             ,
             which
             imply
             contradiction
             to
             be
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             .
             Which
             cannot
             be
             done
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             repugnancie
             comming
             on
             their
             part
             ,
             and
             not
             by
             default
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             The
             Doctors
             pray
             them
             that
             shall
             bee
             able
             to
             reade
             these
             Conferences
             ,
             to
             note
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             are
             alwaies
             found
             false
             accusers
             ,
             whē
             they
             taxe
             the
             Doctors
             with
             slaunder
             :
             as
             in
             the
             former
             writing
             they
             remaine
             thereof
             conuinced
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             shall
             finde
             themselues
             also
             false
             accusers
             in
             the
             article
             following
             :
             there
             where
             they
             cut
             off
             the
             saying
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             and
             falsly
             impute
             vnto
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             written
             ,
             God
             can
             do
             something
             against
             order
             .
             The
             Doctors
             haue
             well
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             could
             do
             nothing
             against
             the
             order
             by
             him
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             Where
             appeareth
             the
             slaunder
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             haue
             clipped
             the
             sentence
             ,
             and
             taken
             away
             these
             words
             
               [
               Established
               in
               the
               world
               ]
               .
            
             In
             that
             they
             inferre
             ,
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             doo
             a
             thing
             which
             is
             not
             well
             ordained
             .
             It
             is
             doublesse
             ,
             but
             to
             doo
             some
             matter
             against
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             importeth
             not
             some
             thing
             disordered
             :
             but
             onely
             a
             mutation
             and
             chaunge
             of
             order
             ,
             without
             any
             disorder
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             in
             their
             article
             following
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             haue
             in
             great
             execration
             the
             blasphemies
             contained
             in
             the
             next
             article
             .
             Of
             which
             the
             first
             is
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             derogatorie
             to
             the
             truth
             of
             God
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             in
             God
             there
             should
             bee
             yea
             and
             nay
             .
             So
             that
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             should
             not
             be
             true
             ,
             if
             hee
             caused
             one
             body
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             And
             yet
             teach
             they
             not
             ,
             nor
             can
             teach
             ,
             that
             God
             hath
             euer
             said
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             could
             not
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
             It
             impugneth
             
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God
             :
             because
             that
             in
             his
             workes
             ther●
             should
             be
             disorder
             and
             confusion
             .
             Wherin
             they
             likewise
             confesse
             ,
             that
             God
             should
             not
             be
             wise
             ,
             if
             he
             caused
             one
             body
             at
             one
             instant
             ,
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             is
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             thing
             repugneth
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             For
             in
             such
             a
             worke
             there
             should
             be
             imperfection
             .
             So
             that
             ,
             so
             farre
             off
             is
             it
             (
             after
             the
             Ministers
             opinion
             )
             that
             God
             in
             so
             dooing
             should
             bee
             almightie
             ;
             that
             contrariwise
             he
             should
             be
             imperfect
             and
             weake
             .
          
           
             The
             fourth
             is
             ,
             that
             were
             such
             a
             thing
             done
             ,
             it
             should
             bee
             against
             the
             eternall
             and
             vnchangeable
             will
             of
             God
             :
             and
             therefore
             God
             should
             bee
             mutable
             :
             which
             blasphemies
             doo
             necessarily
             disgorge
             a
             manifest
             Atheisme
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             God
             should
             not
             bee
             God
             ,
             if
             hee
             made
             one
             bodie
             to
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             :
             For
             God
             cannot
             be
             but
             true
             ,
             wise
             ,
             almightie
             ,
             and
             vnchangeable
             :
             which
             blasphemies
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             content
             themselues
             to
             quote
             and
             marke
             onely
             :
             and
             to
             admonish
             what
             simple
             stuffe
             issueth
             from
             the
             doctrine
             of
             them
             ,
             which
             denie
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             without
             dwelling
             vpon
             further
             confutation
             of
             them
             :
             as
             beeing
             too
             manifest
             ,
             and
             hauing
             regard
             to
             that
             which
             Ireneus
             saith
             :
             that
             some
             heresies
             there
             be
             :
             which
             to
             discouer
             ,
             is
             to
             refute
             them
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             do
             they
             gainesay
             that
             which
             so
             often
             they
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             God
             could
             not
             cause
             one
             bodie
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             because
             it
             repugneth
             the
             order
             which
             he
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             .
             As
             if
             God
             could
             not
             do
             otherwise
             ,
             then
             according
             to
             the
             order
             alreadie
             by
             him
             established
             .
             In
             the
             present
             article
             they
             confesse
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             change
             and
             vnchange
             the
             said
             order
             .
             From
             which
             confession
             the
             Doctors
             drawe
             such
             an
             argument
             :
             God
             can
             chaunge
             and
             alter
             the
             order
             which
             hee
             hath
             established
             in
             the
             world
             :
             and
             that
             without
             preiudice
             to
             his
             truth
             ,
             wisdome
             ,
             power
             ,
             and
             vnchangeable
             will.
             Therefore
             can
             he
             chaunge
             the
             order
             ,
             by
             which
             he
             hath
             established
             (
             as
             the
             Ministers
             wil
             say
             )
             that
             one
             body
             shuld
             be
             but
             in
             one
             place
             ;
             &
             cause
             contrariwise
             ,
             
             (
             the
             order
             being
             chaunged
             )
             that
             one
             body
             shall
             bee
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             without
             that
             the
             same
             is
             any
             way
             derogatorie
             to
             his
             truth
             ,
             wisedome
             ,
             power
             ,
             and
             will.
             And
             that
             by
             consequence
             ,
             God
             of
             his
             omnipotencie
             can
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             article
             of
             the
             distinction
             of
             the
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             confound
             the
             whole
             :
             vnderstanding
             nothing
             in
             the
             said
             distinction
             ,
             no
             more
             then
             in
             that
             which
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             two
             places
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             ranke
             of
             things
             which
             God
             hath
             declared
             by
             his
             word
             ,
             against
             the
             which
             he
             can
             do
             nothing
             .
             The
             question
             is
             first
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             reduced
             to
             his
             power
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             his
             essence
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             which
             he
             is
             in
             himselfe
             :
             as
             to
             be
             one
             ,
             wise
             ,
             good
             :
             which
             things
             belong
             not
             to
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             ,
             but
             of
             the
             essence
             in
             himselfe
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             what
             reason
             is
             there
             to
             confer
             the
             being
             of
             one
             body
             in
             one
             place
             :
             or
             to
             know
             whether
             God
             can
             cause
             it
             to
             be
             in
             two
             or
             many
             places
             :
             with
             the
             essence
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             one
             ,
             incomprehensible
             ,
             &c.
             seeing
             that
             such
             things
             of
             number
             ,
             pertaine
             to
             the
             essence
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             power
             to
             make
             one
             body
             in
             many
             places
             ,
             doth
             nothing
             properly
             belong
             vnto
             it
             ,
             and
             is
             not
             referred
             vnto
             the
             same
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             God
             by
             his
             word
             haih
             declared
             his
             will
             ,
             because
             he
             was
             one
             :
             which
             nothing
             serueth
             to
             the
             present
             matter
             .
             But
             (
             pardoning
             the
             Ministers
             such
             follies
             )
             how
             dare
             they
             cōpare
             with
             the
             matter
             of
             Gods
             essence
             ,
             that
             which
             is
             in
             question
             of
             the
             being
             of
             one
             body
             in
             one
             ,
             or
             in
             diuers
             places
             ?
             seeing
             God
             hath
             neuer
             said
             that
             he
             could
             not
             do
             it
             :
             as
             he
             hath
             manifestly
             shewed
             all
             the
             other
             perfectiōs
             ,
             which
             pertaine
             to
             the
             diuine
             essence
             .
             Wherby
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             it
             sufficeth
             the
             Ministers
             to
             fill
             vp
             paper
             ,
             without
             founding
             their
             saying
             vpon
             solid
             reason
             .
          
           
             For
             as
             much
             as
             they
             repute
             it
             slaunder
             ,
             when
             one
             cutteth
             off
             some
             of
             their
             words
             ,
             albeit
             the
             full
             sence
             abide
             :
             the
             Doctors
             do
             wonder
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             not
             feared
             the
             like
             obiections
             to
             them
             .
             But
             they
             are
             so
             accustomed
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             beware
             thereof
             .
             As
             in
             the
             article
             where
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             definitiō
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             they
             passe
             
             that
             ouer
             in
             silence
             ,
             which
             giueth
             solution
             to
             theyr
             difficultie
             .
             The
             Doctors
             haue
             defined
             a
             bodie
             to
             be
             a
             kind
             of
             firme
             quantitie
             ,
             of
             three
             dimensions
             ,
             length
             ,
             breadth
             ,
             and
             deepenesse
             :
             which
             definition
             comprehendeth
             the
             whole
             essence
             of
             one
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             the
             predicament
             of
             quantitie
             :
             and
             no
             mention
             is
             any
             way
             made
             of
             the
             circumscription
             of
             place
             .
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             by
             their
             definition
             ,
             doo
             limit
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             therefore
             it
             is
             circumscript
             .
             But
             they
             haue
             maliciously
             omitted
             (
             as
             it
             is
             to
             bee
             supposed
             )
             this
             little
             word
             
               [
               place
               ]
            
             .
             For
             the
             question
             is
             not
             ,
             whether
             a
             body
             be
             lymited
             ,
             or
             no
             ,
             seeing
             that
             no
             man
             doth
             call
             it
             infinite
             .
             But
             the
             question
             is
             ,
             whether
             it
             bee
             essentially
             circumscript
             of
             place
             ,
             so
             that
             it
             cannot
             bee
             a
             body
             ,
             if
             it
             bee
             not
             in
             place
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Ministers
             could
             not
             answere
             to
             the
             argument
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             they
             haue
             cut
             off
             that
             which
             annoyed
             them
             .
          
           
             The
             foure
             next
             articles
             deserue
             no
             new
             reply
             :
             and
             therefore
             the
             Doctors
             send
             backe
             the
             readers
             to
             that
             which
             heretofore
             hath
             bene
             said
             .
             They
             onely
             admonish
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             great
             matter
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             hold
             ,
             that
             a
             myracle
             could
             not
             bee
             done
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             without
             chaunge
             of
             his
             nature
             :
             and
             such
             an
             opinion
             do
             they
             impose
             vpon
             Instine
             ,
             who
             hath
             said
             and
             maintained
             (
             with
             the
             other
             Auncients
             )
             that
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             passed
             through
             the
             doores
             without
             chaunge
             of
             nature
             ,
             albeit
             that
             the
             operation
             of
             the
             myracle
             ,
             was
             wrought
             in
             the
             nature
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             without
             changing
             the
             same
             :
             but
             in
             giuing
             it
             a
             spirituall
             qualitie
             and
             perfection
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             subtiltie
             ,
             aboue
             the
             natural
             qualities
             of
             a
             body
             .
          
           
             With
             like
             boldnesse
             ,
             call
             the
             Ministers
             the
             scripture
             of
             the
             Camells
             passage
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             a
             parable
             and
             similitude
             :
             as
             they
             doo
             that
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             all
             others
             which
             withstand
             their
             errors
             .
             And
             the
             better
             to
             escape
             ,
             they
             say
             that
             God
             saueth
             not
             ,
             but
             changeth
             and
             conuerteth
             the
             rich
             man
             :
             and
             so
             cannot
             make
             a
             Camell
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             without
             diminishing
             and
             changing
             of
             his
             grossenesse
             .
             But
             the
             Ministers
             will
             not
             consider
             ,
             
             that
             when
             our
             Lord
             spake
             of
             the
             rich
             man
             his
             entrie
             into
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             ,
             he
             put
             not
             the
             difficultie
             in
             the
             entring
             of
             the
             kingdome
             properly
             ,
             but
             in
             the
             conuersion
             of
             the
             rich
             man
             :
             by
             which
             ,
             hee
             should
             obtaine
             the
             entrie
             and
             possession
             of
             heauen
             .
             Therefore
             when
             our
             Lord
             saith
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             more
             easie
             for
             God
             ,
             to
             cause
             a
             Camell
             (
             or
             Cable
             )
             to
             enter
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             ,
             then
             a
             rich
             man
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             :
             hee
             intendeth
             to
             compare
             the
             conuersion
             of
             a
             rich
             man
             (
             which
             is
             vnpossible
             with
             men
             )
             to
             the
             passage
             of
             a
             Camell
             abiding
             in
             his
             grossenesse
             :
             otherwise
             ,
             there
             should
             bee
             no
             apparance
             of
             difficultie
             :
             and
             our
             Lord
             would
             not
             haue
             saide
             ,
             that
             such
             a
             thing
             had
             beene
             impossible
             to
             men
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             moreouer
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             not
             produced
             this
             place
             ,
             to
             proue
             and
             inferre
             properly
             the
             penitration
             of
             dimensions
             :
             but
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             God
             can
             make
             a
             body
             to
             occupie
             place
             ,
             not
             proportionable
             to
             it
             greatnesse
             :
             which
             is
             as
             well
             contrarie
             to
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             grosse
             and
             thicke
             body
             ,
             as
             that
             one
             body
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             .
          
           
             Where
             the
             Ministers
             do
             boast
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             not
             constrained
             to
             confesse
             any
             thing
             of
             Gods
             workes
             ,
             alledged
             by
             the
             Doctors
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             it
             followeth
             not
             that
             the
             Doctors
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             it
             followeth
             not
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             brought
             forth
             vaine
             reasons
             to
             constraine
             and
             conuince
             them
             .
             And
             for
             the
             same
             referre
             them
             to
             the
             Acts
             of
             the
             Conference
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             knowledge
             ,
             whether
             God
             could
             do
             such
             myracles
             alledged
             ,
             aboue
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             cannot
             escape
             whatsoeuer
             euasion
             they
             pretend
             ,
             vnconuinced
             (
             if
             not
             openly
             ,
             yet
             silently
             at
             least
             )
             to
             haue
             denied
             ,
             as
             well
             the
             power
             as
             the
             deed
             :
             For
             ,
             affirming
             that
             God
             canot
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             because
             it
             repugneth
             the
             order
             by
             him
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             and
             his
             wisdome
             and
             wil
             ,
             which
             disposeth
             all
             by
             good
             order
             ;
             and
             that
             it
             was
             against
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             body
             :
             albeit
             as
             much
             may
             bee
             said
             thereof
             ,
             as
             may
             truly
             bee
             said
             of
             all
             the
             other
             things
             ▪
             mentioned
             touching
             one
             body
             :
             and
             that
             there
             are
             like
             reasons
             :
             in
             confessing
             the
             one
             ,
             they
             must
             necessarily
             confesse
             all
             the
             others
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             the
             like
             reason
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ministers
             vnable
             to
             giue
             any
             difference
             ,
             and
             shewe
             why
             God
             cannot
             do
             the
             one
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             can
             doo
             the
             others
             ,
             haue
             silently
             consented
             thervnto
             .
             And
             although
             they
             would
             neuer
             confesse
             the
             debt
             ,
             and
             yeeled
             themselues
             vanquished
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             boast
             ,
             it
             is
             no
             maruell
             :
             for
             it
             is
             the
             nature
             of
             heretikes
             ,
             to
             be
             obstinate
             ,
             and
             resist
             the
             truth
             ,
             what
             reasons
             soeuer
             are
             proposed
             vnto
             them
             .
             The
             Scribes
             and
             Pharisies
             neuer
             confessed
             to
             be
             ouercome
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             albeit
             his
             arguments
             were
             vnreproueable
             .
             And
             albeit
             they
             that
             withstood
             S.
             Stephen
             ,
             had
             nothing
             to
             answere
             ,
             yet
             left
             they
             not
             to
             resist
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             which
             spake
             by
             him
             :
             as
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             resist
             the
             same
             spirit
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             in
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             concerning
             myracles
             done
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             aboue
             nature
             .
             Which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             repugne
             ,
             by
             I
             know
             not
             what
             vaine
             and
             friuolous
             starting
             holes
             .
             S.
             Ierome
             speaketh
             well
             to
             this
             purpose
             ,
             
               Haeretici
               conuinci
               possunt
               ,
               non
               persuaderi
               .
            
             Heretikes
             may
             bee
             conuinced
             ,
             not
             perswaded
             .
             And
             Tertullian
             writeth
             :
             
               Duritia
               baeretica
               vincenda
               est
               ,
               non
               suadenda
               .
            
             Hereticall
             obduration
             is
             to
             be
             vanquished
             ,
             not
             perswaded
             .
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             iniuries
             which
             the
             Ministers
             in
             this
             behalfe
             do
             multiply
             against
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             in
             that
             doo
             they
             imitate
             all
             the
             aduersaries
             of
             truth
             ,
             and
             giue
             testimony
             of
             the
             disquiet
             which
             such
             manner
             of
             people
             endure
             in
             theyr
             mindes
             ,
             when
             their
             errors
             are
             shewed
             them
             .
             Of
             whom
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             pittie
             and
             compassion
             ,
             &
             pray
             God
             to
             restore
             thē
             to
             their
             right
             sences
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             they
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             conuersion
             of
             an
             heretike
             ,
             is
             one
             of
             the
             matters
             reserued
             to
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             In
             vaine
             doo
             the
             Ministers
             labour
             to
             produce
             store
             of
             Greeke
             ,
             to
             shewe
             that
             
               Penetrare
               Caelos
            
             ,
             dooth
             not
             signifie
             to
             passe
             the
             heauens
             without
             opening
             :
             because
             the
             Verbe
             
               [
               Dierchestai
            
             ]
             is
             found
             ,
             for
             passing
             where
             there
             is
             an
             opening
             .
             But
             the
             Doctors
             neuer
             said
             ,
             that
             
               [
               Penetrare
            
             ]
             or
             
               [
               Dierchesthai
            
             ]
             may
             not
             be
             applied
             to
             open
             places
             :
             or
             that
             one
             pearceth
             in
             opening
             of
             them
             :
             for
             well
             do
             they
             know
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             met
             with
             in
             all
             Authors
             .
          
           
           
             They
             haue
             well
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             would
             inferre
             a
             reall
             opening
             of
             the
             heauen
             ,
             by
             the
             rigor
             and
             proprietie
             of
             the
             verbe
             Aperire
             :
             So
             might
             they
             also
             inferre
             ,
             that
             the
             heauens
             were
             shut
             in
             the
             ascention
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             by
             the
             verbes
             Dierchesthai
             ,
             and
             Penetrare
             ,
             which
             strictly
             do
             signifie
             ,
             to
             pearce
             or
             passe
             through
             ,
             without
             that
             of
             it selfe
             it
             importeth
             an
             opening
             :
             albeit
             a
             man
             may
             vse
             the
             same
             where
             there
             is
             an
             open
             passage
             .
             But
             by
             the
             rigour
             of
             theyr
             signification
             can
             they
             not
             necessarily
             inferre
             an
             opening
             ,
             if
             the
             opening
             bee
             not
             shewed
             from
             some
             other
             place
             ,
             by
             some
             word
             ,
             or
             euident
             condition
             of
             the
             thing
             pierced
             :
             as
             it
             is
             in
             the
             texts
             by
             the
             Ministers
             alledged
             .
             Now
             in
             the
             ascention
             these
             words
             
               [
               Dierchesthas
               ]
            
             ,
             and
             
               [
               Penetrare
               ]
            
             ,
             are
             put
             for
             to
             pierce
             :
             and
             no
             word
             is
             there
             added
             ,
             which
             importeth
             a
             division
             of
             the
             heauens
             .
             The
             condition
             of
             which
             ,
             nor
             the
             state
             of
             the
             glorified
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             doo
             not
             constraine
             that
             one
             necessarily
             vnderstand
             an
             opening
             to
             haue
             beene
             made
             ,
             to
             suffer
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             to
             enter
             .
             Therefore
             did
             the
             Doctors
             wel
             reason
             of
             the
             rigor
             of
             
               [
               Penetrare
               :
            
             ]
             as
             the
             Ministers
             did
             of
             the
             rigour
             of
             
               [
               Aperire
               :
            
             ]
             which
             more
             often
             is
             found
             in
             the
             scripture
             without
             signification
             of
             the
             reall
             opening
             of
             the
             heauens
             ,
             then
             
               [
               Penetrare
            
             ]
             is
             found
             in
             the
             scripture
             to
             signifie
             a
             diuision
             and
             actuall
             cutting
             of
             the
             heauens
             .
             For
             
               Aperire
               Caelos
            
             ,
             is
             often
             found
             for
             imaginary
             and
             spirituall
             opening
             ;
             and
             hardly
             is
             
               Penetrare
               Caelos
            
             euer
             found
             for
             actuall
             diuision
             of
             the
             heauens
             .
             And
             therefore
             had
             the
             Doctors
             better
             reason
             to
             conclude
             ,
             by
             the
             rigour
             of
             the
             verbe
             Dierchesthai
             ,
             or
             Penetrare
             ,
             (
             to
             pierce
             without
             actuall
             diuision
             of
             the
             heauens
             )
             then
             the
             Ministers
             had
             to
             inferre
             the
             opening
             of
             them
             by
             the
             verbe
             Aperire
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             in
             the
             last
             article
             obiect
             to
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             passed
             ouer
             some
             places
             of
             scripture
             ,
             by
             which
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             faith
             is
             the
             worke
             of
             God
             ,
             whervnto
             (
             say
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             in
             some
             one
             of
             their
             writings
             they
             haue
             expresly
             confessed
             ,
             that
             faith
             ,
             in
             as
             much
             as
             it
             is
             a
             gift
             of
             God
             ,
             it
             is
             a
             worke
             of
             God
             :
             but
             in
             as
             much
             as
             he
             that
             beleeueth
             worketh
             together
             with
             God
             ,
             in
             beleeuing
             (
             for
             
               Nemo
               credit
               ,
               nisivolēs
            
             ,
             
             no
             man
             beleeueth
             vnlesse
             he
             be
             willing
             )
             it
             is
             a
             humane
             work
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             repugnāt
             one
             self-same
             work
             ,
             for
             diuers
             causes
             to
             be
             a
             worke
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             a
             worke
             of
             man.
             And
             where
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             haue
             said
             (
             if
             not
             in
             proper
             ,
             yet
             in
             equiualent
             termes
             )
             that
             God
             could
             not
             cause
             one
             body
             to
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             :
             that
             is
             false
             .
             And
             the
             Ministers
             neuer
             haue
             ,
             nor
             can
             shewe
             the
             same
             :
             and
             contradict
             their
             last
             writing
             .
             For
             bringing
             the
             reason
             ,
             why
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             not
             expresly
             said
             it
             :
             It
             was
             (
             said
             they
             )
             because
             they
             neuer
             thought
             that
             such
             an
             absurditie
             would
             euer
             fall
             into
             the
             braine
             of
             man.
             Which
             reason
             ought
             to
             haue
             place
             ,
             for
             the
             saying
             in
             termes
             equiualent
             ,
             as
             in
             expresse
             termes
             ,
             sith
             one
             selfe-same
             thing
             is
             signified
             as
             well
             by
             the
             one
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             rest
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             neuer
             answer
             to
             the
             principall
             point
             ,
             whereof
             they
             haue
             bene
             so
             often
             admonished
             :
             and
             they
             efsoones
             admonish
             them
             ,
             should
             they
             a
             thousand
             times
             call
             this
             saying
             a
             repetition
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             required
             to
             bring
             scripture
             ,
             to
             proue
             that
             it
             repugneth
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             truth
             ,
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             omnipotencie
             ,
             and
             vnchangeable
             will
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             two
             places
             :
             which
             thing
             they
             cannot
             do
             :
             but
             they
             will
             answere
             ,
             as
             they
             are
             accustomed
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             nothing
             .
             Wherein
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             their
             doctrine
             is
             not
             founded
             vpon
             Gods
             word
             ,
             but
             vpon
             their
             owne
             opinion
             ,
             or
             particular
             inspiration
             ,
             which
             cannot
             be
             but
             of
             Sathan
             .
             For
             it
             cannot
             be
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             which
             is
             against
             the
             common
             consent
             of
             the
             Church
             vniuersall
             .
             And
             vpon
             the
             same
             are
             also
             founded
             ,
             the
             other
             articles
             of
             their
             religion
             :
             albeit
             they
             disguise
             them
             ,
             and
             promise
             Gods
             word
             to
             euery
             purpose
             .
          
        
         
           
             A
             short
             Aduertisement
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             vpon
             the
             Ministers
             Resolution
             ,
             touching
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             THe
             Doctors
             are
             astonied
             at
             the
             fashiō
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             in
             their
             words
             and
             writings
             .
             For
             they
             themselues
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Conference
             ,
             haue
             neuer
             had
             patience
             
             to
             prosecute
             &
             conclude
             one
             onely
             point
             ,
             without
             mingling
             other
             things
             therewithall
             ,
             impertinent
             to
             the
             matter
             in
             question
             :
             as
             shal
             appeare
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             acts
             .
             And
             before
             their
             resolution
             made
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             they
             haue
             heaped
             vp
             all
             the
             articles
             which
             they
             could
             remember
             ,
             and
             throwne
             one
             vpon
             an
             other
             without
             cause
             or
             reason
             .
             Although
             the
             Doctors
             at
             their
             request
             ,
             had
             proposed
             the
             Articles
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             And
             after
             dispute
             of
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             (
             to
             make
             present
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             )
             to
             come
             orderly
             to
             shewe
             and
             proue
             ,
             that
             the
             will
             of
             God
             hath
             bene
             such
             ,
             and
             that
             there
             it
             is
             .
             But
             the
             Doctors
             well
             vnderstand
             the
             good
             custome
             of
             all
             them
             of
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             religion
             :
             which
             is
             ,
             to
             spet
             in
             the
             eyes
             of
             Christians
             ,
             all
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Religion
             ,
             and
             theyr
             inuented
             filthinesse
             ,
             all
             on
             one
             threed
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             nought
             bee
             determined
             ,
             that
             all
             abide
             in
             confusion
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Serpent
             glide
             awaye
             ,
             hauing
             cast
             his
             venome
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             by
             obseruation
             of
             the
             Ministers
             answeres
             ,
             it
             shall
             bee
             seene
             and
             knowne
             ,
             that
             they
             neuer
             stay
             vpon
             any
             certaine
             and
             the
             same
             answere
             ,
             but
             rather
             of
             an
             act
             alledged
             out
             of
             the
             scripture
             :
             where
             of
             euery
             question
             ,
             they
             haue
             giuen
             therevnto
             diuers
             impertinent
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             vnsufferable
             answeres
             .
             Of
             which
             the
             Doctors
             do
             admonish
             them
             that
             can
             read
             these
             Conferences
             ,
             and
             pray
             them
             to
             haue
             regard
             to
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             thereof
             referre
             them
             to
             their
             iudgement
             .
          
           
             Furthermore
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             admonish
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             ,
             or
             ought
             to
             knowe
             ,
             that
             all
             Sects
             of
             our
             times
             doo
             cast
             before
             the
             eyes
             of
             those
             whom
             they
             will
             abuse
             ,
             the
             same
             beadroll
             of
             Articles
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             in
             theyr
             Resolution
             haue
             gathered
             together
             ,
             to
             get
             audience
             against
             the
             Church
             Catholique
             ,
             and
             to
             bring
             in
             theyr
             heresies
             and
             errors
             ,
             vnder
             the
             name
             of
             the
             glorie
             of
             GOD.
             Whereof
             they
             boaste
             to
             bee
             defenders
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Ministers
             .
             And
             therefore
             are
             they
             not
             so
             acceptable
             in
             theyr
             opinions
             and
             conclusions
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             can
             
             pretend
             any
             right
             ,
             to
             exalt
             the
             power
             and
             glorie
             of
             God
             ,
             by
             such
             mingling
             and
             confounding
             of
             all
             matters
             together
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             the
             Doctors
             shewe
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             with
             better
             reason
             retort
             against
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             conclusiō
             which
             they
             pretend
             to
             inferre
             ,
             of
             the
             subtiltie
             and
             craft
             of
             Sathan
             :
             which
             is
             (
             as
             they
             write
             )
             that
             Sathan
             vnder
             faire
             shewe
             of
             pietie
             ,
             glideth
             like
             a
             Serpent
             into
             the
             Church
             of
             GOD
             ,
             to
             put
             therein
             disorder
             and
             confusion
             :
             and
             in
             the
             end
             to
             assaile
             God
             himselfe
             .
             The
             Doctors
             do
             pray
             each
             one
             to
             consider
             in
             himselfe
             ,
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             purpose
             be
             not
             such
             by
             their
             deductions
             ,
             and
             generally
             by
             the
             principall
             points
             of
             theyr
             doctrine
             .
             For
             vnder
             faire
             pretext
             to
             roote
             out
             some
             abuses
             and
             errors
             against
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             which
             they
             falsly
             studie
             to
             perswade
             the
             world
             to
             bee
             in
             the
             Church
             Catholique
             :
             And
             vnder
             the
             shadow
             to
             preach
             ,
             that
             they
             seeke
             the
             aduancement
             of
             the
             name
             of
             the
             same
             Lord
             ,
             they
             goe
             about
             to
             spoile
             God
             of
             all
             his
             proprieties
             and
             perfection
             ,
             albeit
             they
             no
             more
             declare
             it
             ,
             then
             Sathan
             told
             his
             meaning
             to
             the
             first
             man.
             
          
           
             Furthermore
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             abase
             the
             merit
             and
             efficacie
             of
             the
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             open
             a
             doore
             by
             their
             doctrine
             to
             all
             vices
             and
             sinnes
             .
             Be
             it
             so
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             repeate
             what
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             held
             ,
             concerning
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             because
             they
             shall
             fill
             their
             writings
             therewithall
             .
             But
             so
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             goodly
             resolution
             (
             although
             they
             suite
             it
             with
             seemely
             words
             )
             that
             God
             cannot
             (
             after
             them
             )
             but
             so
             much
             as
             they
             please
             to
             receiue
             of
             his
             wisdome
             and
             will
             :
             which
             they
             disguise
             after
             their
             owne
             sence
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             found
             declared
             in
             the
             scripture
             .
             Against
             the
             goodnesse
             of
             God
             they
             hold
             that
             he
             is
             the
             author
             and
             worker
             of
             euill
             ,
             and
             of
             sinne
             .
             Against
             his
             mercie
             they
             teach
             ,
             that
             he
             neuer
             pardoneth
             ,
             nor
             will
             pardon
             a
             man
             which
             shall
             maliciously
             oppose
             himselfe
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             the
             truth
             :
             or
             which
             shall
             resist
             the
             same
             .
             Against
             the
             merit
             of
             the
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             passion
             of
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             in
             proper
             termes
             haue
             they
             written
             ,
             that
             had
             Iesus
             Christ
             onely
             dyed
             
             by
             the
             sorrowes
             of
             corporall
             death
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             sheading
             of
             his
             whole
             bloud
             ,
             he
             had
             nought
             done
             ,
             nor
             profited
             for
             our
             redemption
             :
             if
             beeing
             on
             the
             Crosse
             hee
             had
             not
             endured
             in
             his
             soule
             ,
             the
             paines
             of
             the
             damned
             before
             his
             death
             :
             and
             other
             horrible
             blasphemies
             contained
             in
             the
             atticle
             of
             the
             discent
             into
             hell
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             also
             instruct
             their
             adherents
             ,
             that
             murther
             ,
             adultery
             ,
             robbery
             ,
             theft
             ,
             and
             euery
             crime
             whatsoeuer
             ,
             is
             but
             a
             veniall
             sinne
             to
             one
             predestinate
             ,
             who
             is
             neuer
             (
             say
             they
             )
             out
             of
             the
             fauour
             of
             God
             ,
             what
             thing
             soeuer
             he
             commit
             :
             and
             do
             assure
             their
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             theyr
             Church
             to
             beleeue
             firmly
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             in
             grace
             ,
             and
             predestinate
             ,
             which
             is
             in
             plaine
             termes
             (
             albeit
             the
             Ministers
             will
             otherwise
             excuse
             thē
             )
             to
             giue
             leaue
             and
             license
             to
             commit
             all
             wickednesse
             ,
             and
             other
             articles
             which
             the
             Doctors
             will
             verifie
             ,
             where
             the
             matter
             shall
             require
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Ministers
             denie
             these
             points
             to
             be
             in
             their
             writings
             ,
             and
             published
             in
             their
             Sect
             ,
             the
             places
             of
             Caluins
             bookes
             which
             the
             Doctors
             noted
             in
             the
             Margin
             ,
             wil
             testifie
             the
             same
             .
             To
             be
             briefe
             ,
             behold
             the
             glory
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             sonne
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             wherevnto
             tend
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             by
             the
             rooting
             out
             of
             the
             pretended
             impieties
             ,
             mentioned
             in
             many
             articles
             of
             their
             last
             resolution
             .
             For
             briefe
             answere
             wherevnto
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             say
             ,
             that
             some
             things
             by
             slaunder
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             are
             falsly
             imputed
             to
             the
             Catholique
             Church
             :
             that
             others
             are
             expressed
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             :
             and
             others
             drawne
             from
             the
             same
             ,
             and
             confirmed
             by
             the
             traditions
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             the
             vniuersall
             consent
             of
             the
             first
             Christian
             church
             :
             the
             deceits
             excepted
             which
             the
             Ministers
             adde
             in
             euery
             article
             .
             And
             so
             shall
             it
             bee
             shewed
             and
             proued
             at
             the
             least
             in
             time
             and
             place
             ,
             if
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             patience
             to
             handle
             in
             it
             ranke
             euery
             difficultiie
             :
             but
             if
             to
             make
             their
             doctrine
             confused
             ,
             they
             persist
             to
             mingle
             all
             together
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             do
             protest
             to
             mocke
             therat
             without
             answere
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             in
             generall
             ,
             doo
             rightly
             attribute
             to
             the
             power
             of
             God
             :
             and
             say
             well
             ,
             that
             the
             certaine
             knowledge
             thereof
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             taken
             by
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             which
             hath
             bene
             alwaies
             auouched
             to
             them
             by
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
           
             Very
             well
             say
             they
             also
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             infinite
             and
             incomprehensible
             .
             But
             when
             they
             come
             to
             particularities
             ,
             and
             to
             shew
             wherein
             the
             omnipotencie
             lieth
             and
             consisteth
             ,
             then
             forget
             they
             holy
             scriptures
             ,
             and
             without
             them
             do
             measure
             the
             same
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             wisdome
             and
             eternall
             wil
             of
             God
             :
             &
             according
             to
             the
             order
             established
             in
             the
             world
             :
             and
             as
             though
             they
             remembred
             no
             more
             that
             such
             power
             were
             infinit
             ,
             they
             tie
             it
             to
             the
             conditiō
             ,
             proprietie
             ,
             &
             natural
             order
             of
             creatures
             :
             As
             though
             to
             make
             something
             against
             ,
             or
             aboue
             the
             order
             ,
             condition
             ,
             &
             natural
             proprietie
             of
             the
             creatures
             ,
             were
             a
             thing
             repugnant
             to
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             nature
             ,
             and
             wil
             of
             God.
             Behold
             the
             short
             resolutiō
             which
             the
             Doctors
             can
             gather
             of
             the
             Ministers
             opinion
             ,
             touching
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God
             :
             which
             shall
             appeare
             by
             their
             writings
             and
             answeres
             giuen
             to
             the
             said
             Doctors
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             which
             they
             produce
             for
             them
             ,
             he
             hath
             bene
             answered
             heretofore
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             refer
             them
             to
             their
             writings
             ,
             cōcerning
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             do
             falsly
             tax
             thē
             to
             hold
             ,
             as
             a
             sufficient
             argument
             (
             to
             infer
             some
             matter
             to
             be
             done
             of
             God
             )
             to
             shewe
             that
             he
             hath
             power
             to
             do
             it
             .
             The
             resolutions
             and
             obiections
             of
             the
             Doctors
             do
             plainly
             containe
             the
             contrarie
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             are
             also
             falsly
             accused
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             had
             affirmed
             the
             faith
             wholly
             contrary
             to
             nature
             .
             Who
             haue
             onely
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             contradiction
             ordinarily
             made
             to
             faith
             ,
             founded
             vpon
             the
             word
             ,
             commeth
             from
             the
             consideration
             of
             naturall
             things
             ,
             against
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             Concerning
             Abrahā
             ,
             the
             scripture
             in
             Genesis
             alwaies
             proposeth
             ,
             that
             he
             &
             his
             wife
             made
             some
             difficultie
             touching
             the
             promise
             of
             God.
             And
             cōsidered
             
               Corpus
               suū
               emortuū
               ,
               &
               mortuā
               vuluā
               Sarae
               .
            
             His
             owne
             dead
             body
             ,
             &
             the
             dead
             wombe
             of
             Sarah
             :
             vntil
             he
             heard
             the
             assurance
             of
             the
             omnipotēcie
             .
             And
             S.
             Paul
             sufficiently
             declareth
             the
             speech
             of
             Abraham
             ,
             from
             his
             first
             vocation
             ,
             vntil
             after
             such
             assurance
             ,
             without
             putting
             distinction
             in
             the
             Historie
             ,
             of
             that
             which
             was
             before
             ,
             or
             after
             such
             assurance
             :
             as
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Apostle
             saith
             ,
             that
             he
             cōsidered
             not
             
               Corpus
               suū
               emortuū
            
             ,
             his
             owne
             dead
             body
             ,
             but
             rested
             vpon
             the
             assurance
             of
             the
             almightinesse
             ,
             &
             of
             the
             promise
             made
             vnto
             him
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Doctors
             say
             :
             they
             haue
             better
             concluded
             according
             to
             the
             faith
             ,
             we
             ought
             to
             haue
             of
             the
             power
             of
             God
             (
             to
             make
             one
             bodie
             in
             diuers
             places
             )
             then
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             done
             :
             which
             haue
             not
             any
             word
             of
             God
             to
             settle
             theyr
             faith
             vpō
             ,
             &
             to
             beleeue
             that
             God
             could
             not
             do
             it
             ,
             or
             that
             it
             repugneth
             the
             wisedome
             ,
             prouidence
             ,
             and
             eternall
             vertue
             ,
             or
             the
             humanitie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             yea
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             simple
             bodie
             only
             .
             But
             concerning
             all
             that
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             do
             trust
             in
             their
             owne
             presumption
             ,
             and
             particular
             reuelation
             ,
             without
             one
             onely
             passage
             of
             scripture
             ,
             wherevpon
             they
             might
             stay
             theyr
             opinion
             .
             Contrariwise
             ,
             haue
             the
             Doctors
             founded
             their
             faith
             (
             not
             on
             the
             power
             of
             God
             onely
             ,
             to
             make
             one
             body
             in
             diuers
             places
             ,
             but
             to
             beleeue
             the
             deed
             ,
             and
             that
             God
             hath
             so
             willed
             )
             on
             the
             holy
             scripture
             :
             as
             in
             theyr
             Resolution
             is
             contained
             :
             with
             the
             passages
             of
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             which
             they
             to
             this
             end
             haue
             alledged
             .
             Which
             are
             so
             plaine
             ,
             that
             the
             Ministers
             cannot
             iustly
             but
             affirme
             the
             same
             .
             And
             their
             starting
             holes
             shall
             be
             cōuinced
             by
             the
             simple
             reading
             of
             the
             bookes
             .
          
           
             For
             all
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Ministers
             resolution
             (
             where
             are
             mightie
             iniuries
             ,
             Impostures
             ,
             and
             slanders
             against
             the
             Doctors
             )
             they
             answere
             nothing
             :
             hauing
             regard
             to
             the
             Ministers
             manner
             of
             dealing
             .
             And
             the
             Doctors
             also
             do
             well
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             it
             should
             be
             lost
             labour
             to
             teach
             the
             Ministers
             :
             who
             more
             esteem
             their
             owne
             particular
             reuelation
             ,
             for
             their
             whole
             instruction
             ,
             then
             all
             the
             doctrine
             and
             remonstrance
             of
             the
             Church
             vniuersall
             ,
             and
             all
             Christians
             together
             .
             And
             freely
             do
             the
             Doctors
             pardon
             all
             the
             iniuries
             they
             haue
             done
             them
             ,
             as
             people
             voyd
             of
             sound
             sence
             ,
             and
             without
             iudgement
             :
             which
             thing
             they
             declare
             ,
             by
             theyr
             maner
             of
             dealing
             .
          
        
         
           
             An
             obiection
             of
             the
             Supper
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             against
             the
             answere
             of
             the
             Ministers
             .
          
           
             WHy
             the
             Doctors
             in
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             conferences
             haue
             not
             touched
             the
             Article
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             it
             sufficiently
             appeareth
             by
             the
             first
             dayes
             Acts.
             And
             a
             deceit
             it
             is
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             done
             ,
             in
             taxing
             them
             
             to
             haue
             recoyled
             from
             entering
             into
             that
             matter
             .
             For
             it
             shall
             be
             proued
             ,
             as
             well
             by
             the
             offers
             which
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             often
             made
             ,
             to
             confer
             by
             word
             for
             quicker
             dispatch
             of
             the
             said
             matter
             :
             and
             then
             at
             more
             leisure
             to
             put
             it
             in
             writing
             (
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             refused
             )
             :
             as
             also
             by
             the
             first
             obiections
             ,
             which
             the
             Doctors
             proposed
             touching
             the
             article
             of
             Gods
             omnipotencie
             :
             wherby
             they
             touched
             the
             foundations
             ,
             vpon
             which
             are
             builded
             the
             errors
             of
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             religion
             against
             the
             reall
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             .
             And
             shall
             moreouer
             be
             verified
             ,
             in
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             obiected
             to
             the
             Ministers
             some
             arguments
             against
             their
             Supper
             ,
             to
             make
             them
             enter
             into
             the
             same
             .
             Vnto
             which
             they
             haue
             nothing
             answered
             :
             or
             so
             impertinently
             (
             at
             the
             least
             )
             as
             one
             may
             iudge
             by
             the
             reading
             of
             their
             answere
             ,
             that
             they
             fled
             the
             Lists
             :
             as
             yet
             also
             they
             do
             ,
             by
             their
             last
             writing
             :
             hiding
             as
             much
             as
             they
             possibly
             can
             ,
             what
             they
             thinke
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             albeit
             they
             haue
             bene
             admonished
             to
             answere
             therevnto
             plainely
             and
             to
             purpose
             .
             Whether
             the
             Doctors
             or
             the
             Ministers
             retyre
             ,
             shall
             bee
             seene
             by
             effect
             :
             For
             albeit
             the
             Ministers
             will
             not
             answer
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             will
             not
             leaue
             to
             aduise
             them
             thereof
             ,
             and
             to
             manifest
             to
             all
             the
             world
             ,
             the
             intollerable
             errors
             which
             bee
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Ministers
             :
             Who
             beeing
             demaunded
             ,
             dare
             not
             confesse
             and
             auouch
             by
             writing
             ,
             what
             hath
             beene
             written
             by
             the
             inuenters
             of
             theyr
             Supper
             .
          
           
             Now
             to
             begin
             to
             speake
             thereof
             ,
             the
             Ministrrs
             do
             maintaine
             it
             to
             be
             celebrated
             according
             to
             the
             ordinances
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             after
             the
             fashion
             which
             the
             Apostles
             vsed
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             whiles
             it
             flourished
             ,
             and
             abode
             in
             it
             puritie
             .
             Wherevpon
             the
             Doctors
             demaund
             ,
             how
             long
             the
             Ministers
             esteeme
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Supper
             to
             abide
             in
             it
             puritie
             ?
             And
             whether
             the
             Church
             were
             not
             then
             as
             pure
             in
             the
             doctrine
             of
             all
             the
             other
             articles
             ,
             as
             of
             this
             ?
             Furthermore
             ,
             whether
             since
             that
             time
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             some
             place
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             where
             the
             true
             doctrine
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             of
             other
             Articles
             ,
             haue
             beene
             retained
             
             and
             conserued
             :
             and
             whether
             such
             doctrine
             hath
             euer
             continued
             without
             interruption
             ?
             and
             in
             what
             place
             ?
             and
             by
             whom
             hath
             it
             bene
             preached
             and
             set
             forth
             ,
             and
             from
             age
             to
             age
             ?
             The
             Doctors
             desire
             the
             Ministers
             to
             make
             declaration
             thereof
             ,
             for
             that
             it
             much
             importeth
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             before
             Caluin
             put
             forth
             his
             Catechisme
             ,
             there
             was
             no
             memorie
             ,
             that
             such
             doctrine
             as
             he
             taught
             ,
             had
             bene
             held
             in
             any
             Region
             ;
             and
             the
             Supper
             was
             not
             celebrated
             after
             the
             fashion
             and
             maner
             as
             it
             is
             celebrated
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             called
             Reformed
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             would
             willingly
             cheare
             vp
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             who
             are
             much
             disquieted
             in
             their
             writing
             ,
             because
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             their
             Supper
             differeth
             not
             from
             a
             common
             banquet
             ,
             except
             in
             that
             it
             is
             worse
             :
             as
             being
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             .
          
           
             To
             meete
             wherwithall
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             made
             a
             great
             narration
             of
             the
             whole
             action
             of
             their
             Supper
             :
             and
             by
             faire
             shewes
             ,
             which
             haue
             a
             forme
             of
             all
             godlinesse
             ,
             they
             endeuour
             to
             make
             it
             very
             commendable
             ,
             and
             to
             couer
             a
             new
             nothing
             betweene
             two
             platters
             .
             And
             contrariwise
             ,
             that
             they
             may
             tread
             vnder
             foote
             and
             abase
             the
             thrise
             ▪
             precious
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             by
             renting
             in
             peeces
             some
             shewe
             of
             him
             :
             as
             if
             they
             were
             vsed
             without
             reason
             or
             signification
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             vnderstand
             not
             ,
             or
             make
             semblance
             not
             to
             vnderstand
             .
             But
             things
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             prised
             and
             esteemed
             by
             their
             shewes
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             their
             value
             ,
             nature
             ,
             and
             truth
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             should
             foresee
             ,
             that
             all
             the
             Sects
             which
             bee
             now
             in
             the
             world
             against
             the
             Church
             Catholique
             ,
             for
             the
             act
             of
             the
             holy
             Sacrament
             ,
             doo
             vse
             at
             the
             least
             ,
             as
             faire
             shewe
             as
             they
             .
             And
             were
             they
             thereof
             asked
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             any
             which
             would
             not
             enforce
             himselfe
             ,
             to
             proue
             ,
             that
             it
             approacheth
             nearer
             to
             Iesus
             Christ
             and
             his
             Apostles
             ,
             and
             the
             Primitiue
             Church
             ,
             then
             the
             pretended
             reformed
             Religion
             dooth
             .
             Concerning
             all
             which
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             referre
             them
             to
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Lutherans
             ,
             Zuinglianists
             ,
             Anabaptists
             ,
             Trinitaries
             ,
             Maister
             Alasco
             ,
             and
             such
             like
             .
          
           
           
             For
             vnreasonable
             it
             is
             by
             such
             faire
             deceits
             ,
             to
             preferre
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             other
             Sects
             :
             &
             to
             iudge
             it
             good
             ,
             holy
             ,
             vnpolluted
             ,
             and
             according
             to
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             but
             to
             repute
             it
             rather
             polluted
             ,
             and
             defiled
             with
             impietie
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             it
             cloaketh
             a
             lye
             in
             stead
             of
             truth
             ,
             and
             giueth
             the
             shewe
             of
             pietie
             ,
             to
             impietie
             and
             falshood
             .
          
           
             Also
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             not
             dispraised
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             for
             the
             praises
             therein
             giuen
             to
             God
             ,
             or
             for
             the
             confession
             they
             there
             make
             of
             their
             sinnes
             :
             or
             the
             preaching
             (
             if
             it
             contained
             the
             truth
             )
             ,
             or
             for
             other
             preparation
             .
             But
             therefore
             did
             they
             say
             it
             was
             detestable
             ,
             because
             ,
             against
             the
             ordinance
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             it
             contained
             not
             ,
             but
             common
             bread
             and
             wine
             :
             and
             yet
             that
             they
             attributed
             vnto
             it
             some
             spirituall
             effect
             ,
             and
             other
             faire
             pretext
             of
             godlinesse
             .
             The
             which
             is
             an
             abhominable
             thing
             ,
             and
             inuentiō
             of
             Sathan
             ,
             who
             endeuoureth
             by
             such
             maner
             of
             Supper
             ,
             to
             abolish
             and
             extinguish
             the
             true
             Supper
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             institution
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             to
             depriue
             the
             faithfull
             of
             the
             fruite
             ,
             and
             veritie
             of
             the
             same
             Supper
             :
             in
             causing
             them
             to
             giue
             common
             bread
             onely
             ,
             instead
             of
             the
             body
             and
             blood
             of
             our
             sauiour
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             The
             Doctors
             could
             as
             well
             recyte
             the
             euill
             shewes
             ,
             as
             the
             Ministers
             do
             recyte
             the
             good
             ,
             which
             be
             in
             their
             Supper
             :
             as
             the
             secrets
             ,
             the
             new
             enterprises
             practised
             vnder
             colour
             and
             shadow
             of
             assemblies
             made
             in
             their
             said
             Supper
             .
             But
             to
             the
             ende
             the
             Ministers
             reproach
             not
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             that
             Priests
             spake
             of
             armes
             ,
             of
             contributions
             ,
             &c.
             they
             passe
             it
             ouer
             with
             silence
             ,
             and
             referre
             them
             to
             the
             thing
             it self
             :
             and
             wil
             content
             themselues
             to
             declare
             some
             causes
             ,
             whereby
             they
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             truth
             in
             the
             same
             Supper
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             institution
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             which
             are
             such
             as
             follow
             .
          
           
             That
             in
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             theyr
             like
             ,
             no
             consecration
             can
             be
             made
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             bread
             &
             wine
             which
             are
             there
             proposed
             .
             And
             that
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             there
             is
             not
             in
             the
             same
             matter
             any
             change
             made
             ,
             be
             it
             before
             ,
             or
             in
             ,
             or
             after
             the
             vse
             .
             And
             by
             consequence
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             such
             a
             Supper
             ,
             cannot
             be
             but
             common
             .
             That
             no
             consideratiō
             
             is
             made
             in
             their
             Supper
             :
             hereby
             appeareth
             ,
             first
             ,
             that
             it
             belongeth
             not
             to
             all
             persons
             ,
             to
             consecrate
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             but
             onely
             to
             those
             that
             by
             imposition
             of
             the
             Pastors
             and
             Bishops
             hands
             ,
             are
             lawfully
             ordained
             according
             to
             the
             succession
             from
             the
             Apostles
             time
             ,
             euen
             vnto
             vs.
             Now
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             most
             part
             of
             the
             Ministers
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             called
             Reformed
             ,
             be
             not
             ordained
             by
             the
             laying
             on
             of
             the
             Pastors
             hands
             ,
             who
             haue
             the
             power
             by
             succession
             frō
             one
             to
             an
             other
             since
             the
             Apostles
             .
             Whereof
             we
             must
             conclude
             ,
             that
             such
             Ministers
             vsurping
             the
             office
             which
             pertaineth
             not
             to
             them
             ,
             cannot
             make
             any
             consecration
             ,
             and
             giue
             not
             by
             consequence
             but
             common
             bread
             and
             wine
             .
             Which
             article
             shall
             be
             spoken
             of
             ,
             when
             we
             shall
             entreat
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             and
             Priesthood
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             to
             make
             consecration
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             it
             sufficeth
             not
             that
             the
             person
             be
             fit
             to
             consecrate
             the
             matter
             :
             but
             also
             it
             is
             necessary
             ,
             that
             the
             lawfull
             Minister
             by
             a
             certaine
             meane
             ,
             do
             make
             the
             consecration
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             by
             blessing
             ,
             and
             pronouncing
             of
             certaine
             words
             ouer
             the
             matter
             proposed
             ;
             euen
             as
             Iesus
             Christ
             hath
             first
             obserued
             it
             .
             And
             because
             the
             Ministers
             (
             albeit
             they
             were
             lawfully
             ordained
             ,
             and
             that
             they
             had
             authoritie
             and
             power
             to
             consecrate
             )
             vse
             not
             the
             blessing
             and
             pronuntiation
             of
             certaine
             words
             ouer
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             (
             withstanding
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             first
             did
             ,
             and
             then
             ordained
             to
             his
             Apostles
             and
             their
             successors
             so
             to
             doo
             )
             they
             cannot
             take
             any
             consecration
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             that
             in
             them
             any
             chaunge
             happeneth
             .
             Whereof
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             they
             differ
             not
             from
             common
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             and
             that
             such
             a
             feast
             and
             banquet
             is
             but
             common
             .
             And
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             to
             attribute
             vnto
             it
             ,
             the
             name
             of
             Christs
             Supper
             .
             Behold
             ,
             why
             partly
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             is
             a
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             banquet
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             admonish
             the
             Ministers
             to
             answere
             to
             purpose
             and
             plainely
             ,
             to
             the
             demaunds
             by
             them
             proposed
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             not
             done
             :
             which
             is
             the
             cause
             that
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             least
             they
             should
             trauell
             in
             vaine
             ,
             haue
             not
             yet
             willed
             to
             impugne
             their
             answere
             :
             summoning
             them
             eftsoones
             to
             
             answere
             what
             is
             proposed
             to
             them
             ,
             without
             drawing
             backe
             from
             the
             Conference
             ,
             which
             (
             they
             say
             )
             they
             affect
             so
             greatly
             .
             The
             first
             demaunde
             was
             generall
             for
             all
             the
             Sacraments
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             did
             beleeue
             ,
             that
             two
             things
             were
             essentiall
             and
             necessary
             ,
             to
             the
             confection
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             namely
             ,
             the
             matter
             ,
             or
             element
             ,
             and
             the
             word
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             Sacrament
             in
             it
             perfection
             considered
             ,
             consisteth
             in
             three
             things
             ,
             &c.
             
             They
             speake
             indeterminately
             :
             so
             that
             one
             cannot
             iudge
             ,
             whether
             they
             vnderstand
             theyr
             saying
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             which
             they
             call
             the
             Supper
             onely
             :
             or
             generally
             of
             all
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             demaunded
             .
             Although
             because
             they
             alledge
             Ireneus
             ,
             one
             may
             coniecture
             ,
             that
             they
             meant
             but
             of
             the
             Sament
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
          
           
             Moreouer
             it
             behoueth
             to
             note
             ,
             that
             which
             they
             adde
             (
             in
             it
             perfection
             considered
             )
             :
             to
             haue
             alwaies
             a
             starting
             hole
             ,
             when
             speech
             shall
             be
             made
             of
             the
             essence
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             The
             Doctors
             require
             that
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             to
             the
             question
             proposed
             generally
             of
             all
             the
             Sacraments
             .
             For
             there
             is
             lyke
             reason
             as
             touching
             the
             essence
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             in
             generall
             .
             And
             that
             they
             openly
             declare
             what
             things
             be
             essentiall
             ,
             and
             necessary
             to
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             to
             be
             made
             a
             Sacrament
             :
             without
             speaking
             for
             the
             present
             of
             the
             perfection
             of
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             containing
             the
             essence
             and
             spirituall
             fruites
             ,
             which
             be
             not
             of
             the
             essence
             of
             the
             Sacracrament
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             second
             demaund
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             no
             more
             pertinently
             then
             to
             the
             first
             .
             And
             namely
             where
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             demaunded
             ,
             whether
             it
             behooued
             to
             vse
             certaine
             words
             for
             the
             confection
             of
             a
             Sacrament
             :
             and
             what
             word
             was
             necessary
             for
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
             The
             Ministers
             haue
             sayd
             ,
             that
             the
             lowe
             and
             secret
             speaking
             of
             certaine
             words
             ,
             addressed
             to
             the
             elements
             ,
             was
             not
             the
             word
             necessary
             to
             the
             confection
             of
             a
             Sacrament
             .
             But
             they
             demaunded
             not
             ,
             whether
             it
             behooued
             to
             pronounce
             that
             word
             ,
             with
             a
             lowe
             ,
             or
             high
             voyce
             :
             but
             the
             Interrogatory
             
             was
             ,
             whether
             there
             be
             any
             words
             necessary
             to
             make
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             that
             one
             ought
             to
             pronounce
             ouer
             the
             matter
             ,
             or
             in
             administring
             the
             matter
             :
             and
             that
             they
             might
             be
             such
             words
             for
             the
             Supper
             .
             And
             it
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             ordinance
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             declared
             ,
             is
             the
             word
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             :
             but
             it
             behoueth
             to
             answere
             ,
             in
             what
             words
             consisteth
             that
             word
             ,
             and
             when
             it
             must
             be
             pronounced
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             sixt
             and
             principall
             demaund
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             not
             clearly
             ,
             and
             to
             purpose
             :
             but
             make
             a
             captious
             answere
             :
             by
             which
             one
             may
             conceiue
             what
             is
             their
             opinion
             of
             the
             presence
             &
             participatiō
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             And
             so
             temper
             they
             their
             saying
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             Zuinglian
             ,
             nor
             Almanists
             ,
             which
             confesseth
             not
             thereof
             as
             much
             ,
             or
             more
             then
             they
             :
             To
             wit
             ,
             that
             they
             are
             conioyned
             to
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             &
             that
             they
             possesse
             him
             in
             the
             power
             of
             their
             faith
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             operation
             of
             his
             holy
             spirite
             ,
             to
             be
             made
             flesh
             of
             his
             flesh
             ,
             and
             bones
             of
             his
             bones
             ,
             &c.
             
             But
             this
             is
             farre
             off
             from
             the
             demaund
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             whether
             the
             faithfull
             in
             the
             Supper
             receiue
             into
             theyr
             soules
             ,
             besides
             all
             the
             graces
             spirituall
             (
             among
             which
             is
             the
             communication
             with
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             )
             his
             true
             bodie
             and
             blood
             ,
             really
             ,
             truly
             ,
             and
             substantially
             ?
             And
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             in
             the
             Supper
             make
             not
             distinction
             of
             the
             substance
             contained
             and
             perceiued
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             with
             the
             fruites
             thereof
             proceeding
             ?
             And
             for
             more
             breuitie
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             demaund
             ,
             whether
             the
             Ministers
             do
             receiue
             ,
             and
             approoue
             ,
             that
             which
             Caluin
             hath
             written
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             of
             that
             they
             receiue
             thereof
             in
             his
             
               Catechisme
               ,
               Institution
            
             ,
             and
             other
             bookes
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             seauenth
             demaund
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             not
             vnderstood
             what
             hath
             beene
             proposed
             to
             them
             ,
             touching
             the
             Concomitance
             :
             For
             they
             haue
             taken
             it
             ,
             as
             if
             one
             demaunded
             ,
             whether
             it
             were
             lawfull
             to
             receiue
             the
             Sacrament
             vnder
             one
             onely
             kinde
             or
             no.
             Whiche
             was
             not
             as
             then
             put
             in
             question
             .
             But
             suche
             a
             difficultie
             was
             proposed
             to
             them
             :
             namely
             ,
             whether
             in
             theyr
             Supper
             ,
             
             when
             one
             hath
             receiued
             the
             bread
             ,
             before
             hee
             receiue
             the
             wine
             ,
             he
             do
             participate
             of
             the
             true
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             without
             hee
             be
             partaker
             of
             his
             bloud
             ,
             vntill
             hee
             haue
             taken
             the
             wine
             :
             or
             hauing
             eaten
             the
             bread
             ,
             whether
             he
             hath
             receiued
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             ,
             before
             he
             take
             the
             Cup
             ?
             To
             which
             demaunds
             ,
             to
             auoyd
             vaine
             blotting
             of
             paper
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             admonish
             the
             Ministers
             to
             answere
             ,
             without
             wandering
             ,
             and
             to
             render
             open
             confession
             of
             their
             faith
             .
             And
             that
             the
             Doctors
             may
             knowe
             ,
             what
             doctrine
             they
             ought
             to
             impugne
             or
             approue
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             articles
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             the
             Doctors
             reserue
             them
             to
             their
             proper
             place
             :
             which
             is
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             After
             it
             shal
             be
             knowne
             and
             proued
             that
             they
             be
             present
             in
             the
             Supper
             and
             holy
             Sacrament
             .
          
           
             
               
                 The
                 fourth
                 of
                 August
                 ,
                 the
                 yeare
                 aboue
                 said
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             to
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             sent
             vnto
             them
             by
             my
             Lord
             the
             Duke
             de
             Niuernois
             ,
             the
             morning
             ,
             being
             7.
             of
             August
             .
             1566.
             
          
           
             THe
             Ministers
             leauing
             aside
             whatsoeuer
             is
             superfluous
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             purpose
             in
             the
             writing
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             as
             be
             theyr
             repetitions
             and
             rehea●salls
             :
             dissembling
             also
             their
             iniuries
             and
             accustomed
             scoffings
             ,
             (
             by
             which
             they
             much
             more
             proue
             the
             hate
             they
             beare
             to
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             then
             the
             questions
             by
             them
             propounded
             )
             will
             onely
             stay
             on
             the
             points
             which
             seeme
             to
             require
             some
             answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             first
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             taxed
             not
             the
             Doctors
             to
             haue
             restrained
             the
             Church
             in
             a
             certaine
             place
             ,
             but
             to
             a
             certaine
             company
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             traditions
             giuen
             ,
             followed
             ,
             and
             by
             the
             same
             approued
             .
             And
             they
             magnifie
             God
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             doo
             now
             acknowledge
             the
             Catholique
             Church
             to
             
             stretch
             through
             the
             world
             :
             and
             that
             it
             is
             not
             inclosed
             in
             the
             boundes
             and
             limits
             of
             the
             authoritie
             ,
             and
             traditions
             of
             the
             Romane
             Church
             :
             which
             the
             Ministers
             confesse
             to
             haue
             beene
             then
             much
             esteemed
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             when
             errours
             ,
             abuses
             ,
             and
             vices
             ,
             did
             not
             as
             yet
             there
             abounde
             ,
             as
             since
             they
             doo
             .
             But
             now
             that
             all
             things
             almost
             are
             there
             corrupted
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             manners
             ,
             as
             in
             doctrine
             :
             and
             that
             nothing
             is
             there
             more
             odious
             ,
             then
             the
             word
             ,
             the
             light
             ,
             the
             trueth
             ,
             and
             the
             power
             of
             God.
             The
             Ministers
             do
             say
             :
             that
             as
             the
             state
             of
             the
             same
             Church
             hath
             beene
             chaunged
             ,
             so
             ought
             to
             bee
             also
             the
             esteeme
             and
             reputation
             in
             which
             it
             hath
             beene
             :
             adding
             therevnto
             ,
             that
             in
             whatsoeuer
             degree
             of
             honor
             she
             hath
             bene
             formerly
             lifted
             ,
             she
             hath
             not
             neuerthelesse
             beene
             esteemed
             by
             the
             Fathers
             for
             the
             vniuersall
             Church
             ,
             nor
             her
             Bishop
             for
             vniuersall
             Bishop
             :
             As
             by
             that
             which
             Saint
             Ierome
             wrote
             thereof
             to
             Euagrius
             :
             and
             by
             that
             which
             concerning
             the
             same
             ,
             was
             determined
             in
             one
             of
             the
             
             Councells
             of
             Carthage
             ,
             appeareth
             .
          
           
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             reformed
             Church
             in
             France
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             doo
             not
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             the
             vniuersall
             and
             Catholique
             Church
             ,
             but
             only
             a
             member
             of
             the
             same
             :
             And
             that
             it
             hath
             it
             foundation
             ,
             not
             vpon
             the
             opiniō
             or
             authoritie
             of
             men
             :
             but
             vpon
             the
             doctrine
             &
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             &
             Apostles
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             as
             touching
             the
             protestations
             of
             Charitie
             and
             zeale
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Doctors
             feare
             to
             bee
             forced
             vnto
             Inuectiues
             and
             pursuites
             which
             they
             make
             against
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             other
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             by
             the
             example
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             of
             Saint
             Augustine
             ,
             and
             other
             Bishops
             ,
             which
             in
             time
             past
             solicited
             the
             Magistrates
             against
             the
             Donatists
             :
             theyr
             proceedings
             and
             fashion
             which
             they
             haue
             ,
             and
             still
             doo
             vse
             towards
             the
             sayd
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             faithfull
             ,
             do
             euidently
             declare
             ,
             that
             with
             false
             tokens
             they
             shrowd
             themselues
             by
             these
             examples
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Catholiques
             ,
             whome
             they
             alledge
             ,
             exhorted
             the
             Magistrate
             to
             vse
             all
             moderation
             and
             mildn●sse
             towards
             the
             Donatists
             and
             other
             heretiques
             ;
             and
             to
             assay
             all
             meanes
             to
             reduce
             them
             ,
             before
             they
             came
             to
             the
             rygor
             of
             paines
             and
             iudgement
             .
             And
             further
             ,
             they
             endeuoured
             
             to
             containe
             and
             represse
             the
             fury
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             theyr
             open
             violence
             vpon
             them
             .
             Whereas
             they
             contrariwise
             ,
             doo
             stirre
             vp
             against
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             the
             people
             and
             Magistrates
             ,
             by
             slaunder
             and
             false
             imputations
             ▪
             and
             by
             all
             other
             fashions
             &
             meanes
             they
             can
             inuent
             for
             this
             purpose
             .
          
           
             Touching
             the
             Omnipotencie
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             the
             definition
             thereof
             ,
             which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             proposed
             ,
             drawne
             and
             extracted
             out
             of
             the
             bookes
             of
             Saint
             Augustine
             :
             the
             Doctors
             in
             theyr
             last
             writing
             ,
             produce
             no
             new
             thing
             ,
             to
             cause
             them
             leaue
             the
             ●ame
             .
             For
             that
             they
             alledge
             of
             the
             Angels
             ,
             which
             can
             do
             whatsoeuer
             they
             will
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             meanes
             should
             be
             almightie
             as
             well
             as
             God
             (
             if
             the
             abouesayd
             definition
             of
             his
             Omnipotencie
             had
             place
             )
             is
             an
             example
             from
             the
             purpose
             ,
             and
             which
             cannot
             prooue
             that
             there
             is
             in
             the
             Angels
             any
             such
             power
             ,
             as
             in
             God.
             For
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             theyr
             will
             and
             power
             dependeth
             elsewhere
             ,
             and
             that
             God
             ruleth
             ouer
             them
             ,
             to
             chaunge
             ,
             suspend
             and
             hinder
             them
             as
             he
             pleaseth
             ,
             and
             as
             he
             can
             do
             in
             all
             other
             creatures
             .
             Which
             none
             can
             say
             of
             God
             ,
             without
             blasphemy
             .
             Howsoeuer
             it
             be
             ,
             If
             the
             Doctors
             will
             reproue
             the
             definition
             of
             Gods
             Omnipotency
             proposed
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             they
             deale
             not
             with
             them
             ,
             but
             with
             S.
             Augustine
             :
             For
             as
             much
             as
             the
             said
             definitiō
             was
             word
             for
             word
             copied
             out
             of
             his
             writings
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             do
             maruell
             ,
             that
             after
             they
             had
             so
             amply
             declared
             to
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             what
             they
             thought
             of
             Gods
             Omnipotencie
             ,
             and
             shewed
             ,
             that
             it
             stretched
             not
             indifferently
             to
             all
             things
             which
             men
             in
             theyr
             foolish
             phantasies
             ,
             may
             conceiue
             or
             imagine
             :
             the
             Doctors
             will
             eftsoones
             harpe
             on
             that
             string
             ,
             alledging
             that
             God
             can
             do
             wisely
             ,
             what
             fooles
             do
             foolishly
             imagine
             .
             For
             manifest
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             fooles
             can
             imagine
             many
             things
             which
             are
             impossible
             to
             God.
             As
             for
             example
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             God.
             Psal
             .
             14.
             and
             53.
             
             That
             hee
             is
             corporeall
             ,
             as
             thought
             the
             Anthropomorphites
             .
             That
             the
             world
             is
             eternall
             :
             as
             thought
             the
             Peripatetiques
             .
             That
             there
             was
             two
             beginnings
             :
             as
             taught
             the
             Manichees
             .
             All
             which
             thinges
             ,
             can
             no
             way
             without
             blasphemie
             be
             attributed
             to
             
             the
             Omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             But
             that
             which
             more
             contenteth
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             is
             ,
             that
             our
             Maisters
             ,
             after
             so
             long
             and
             sharpe
             combat
             in
             this
             Article
             ,
             and
             so
             of●en
             crying
             blasphemie
             ,
             when
             the
             sayd
             Ministers
             proposed
             the
             truth
             thereof
             ,
             are
             constrayned
             in
             the
             end
             to
             accord
             with
             them
             ,
             and
             follow
             the
             interpretation
             and
             restraint
             which
             the
             Ministers
             themselues
             had
             giuen
             touching
             the
             Omnipotency
             of
             God
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             by
             a
             sentence
             of
             theyr
             last
             writing
             ,
             whereof
             the
             words
             are
             such
             .
             The
             Doctors
             say
             :
             That
             all
             things
             imaginable
             to
             man
             ,
             are
             possible
             to
             be
             done
             with
             God
             ,
             without
             any
             exception
             :
             but
             of
             those
             things
             which
             imply
             contradiction
             ,
             to
             be
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             be
             .
             What
             reason
             then
             is
             there
             ,
             that
             for
             the
             things
             (
             whereof
             the
             Ministers
             and
             Doctors
             agree
             ,
             that
             they
             ought
             to
             be
             excepted
             out
             of
             Gods
             omnipotency
             )
             the
             Ministers
             in
             excepting
             them
             ,
             be
             held
             for
             blasphemers
             ,
             &
             not
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             which
             say
             &
             confesse
             the
             selfe-same
             thing
             ?
             Now
             this
             proposition
             that
             a
             naturall
             body
             (
             yea
             that
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             )
             is
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             ,
             is
             in
             the
             ranke
             of
             things
             which
             imply
             contradictiō
             :
             as
             it
             hath
             bin
             already
             sufficiently
             proued
             .
             Therfore
             the
             Ministers
             cōclude
             ,
             that
             the
             omnipotency
             of
             God
             cannot
             be
             referred
             &
             extended
             thervnto
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             doo
             afterwards
             charge
             the
             Ministers
             with
             foure
             horrible
             blasphemies
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             grounding
             themselues
             vpon
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             in
             defending
             that
             one
             body
             could
             not
             be
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             )
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             repugned
             the
             truth
             ,
             wisdome
             ,
             and
             omnipotency
             of
             God.
             Which
             thing
             ,
             the
             said
             Doctors
             finde
             so
             straunge
             ,
             and
             farre
             from
             reason
             ,
             that
             they
             would
             not
             vouchsafe
             to
             staie
             to
             refute
             it
             :
             thinking
             it
             was
             vnworthie
             of
             answere
             ,
             and
             that
             it
             sufficed
             to
             haue
             recyted
             the
             same
             .
             Wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ▪
             that
             it
             is
             a
             very
             easie
             and
             readie
             meane
             ,
             to
             rid
             them
             speedily
             of
             all
             the
             difficulties
             wherein
             they
             finde
             themselues
             wrapped
             ,
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             blasphemy
             ,
             and
             vnworthie
             of
             answere
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             yet
             make
             instance
             to
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             and
             say
             :
             that
             it
             behooueth
             them
             to
             shewe
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             that
             one
             bodie
             cannot
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             .
             
             Wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             ef●soones
             answer
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             for
             the
             Doctors
             to
             proue
             the
             contrary
             by
             one
             text
             of
             scripture
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             may
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             instant
             :
             seeing
             that
             they
             are
             proponents
             in
             this
             Conference
             ,
             &
             the
             Ministers
             respondents
             :
             and
             that
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             they
             haue
             heretofore
             shewed
             them
             by
             liuely
             reasons
             ,
             drawne
             from
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             the
             essentiall
             proprieties
             of
             God
             ,
             frō
             .
             the
             nature
             of
             bodies
             ,
             and
             the
             authorities
             of
             Fathers
             :
             that
             the
             thing
             in
             question
             was
             wholly
             impossible
             .
          
           
             And
             touching
             the
             argument
             which
             they
             thus
             make
             ,
             God
             can
             change
             the
             order
             which
             he
             hath
             established
             in
             nature
             .
             Therfore
             can
             he
             also
             cause
             that
             one
             body
             at
             one
             instant
             be
             in
             many
             places
             .
             The
             Ministers
             denie
             the
             consequence
             ,
             and
             yeeld
             reason
             therof
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             such
             a
             matter
             should
             not
             onely
             change
             the
             order
             ,
             but
             should
             wrap
             vp
             also
             a
             contradiction
             :
             the
             which
             ,
             by
             the
             confessiō
             of
             the
             Doctors
             themselues
             ,
             is
             excepted
             out
             the
             omnipotencie
             of
             God.
             The
             Doctors
             in
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             do
             but
             reproach
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             for
             they
             confound
             and
             obscure
             what
             had
             bene
             clearly
             proposed
             by
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             in
             their
             last
             writing
             .
             By
             means
             wherof
             ,
             let
             them
             make
             (
             if
             they
             will
             )
             more
             large
             an
             answer
             ,
             and
             expound
             themselues
             better
             .
             Where
             the
             Doctors
             accuse
             the
             Ministers
             to
             haue
             maliciously
             concealed
             the
             word
             
               [
               place
            
             ]
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             circumscription
             of
             a
             measured
             body
             :
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             not
             needfull
             to
             adde
             that
             word
             expresly
             there
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             there
             is
             no
             man
             so
             ignorant
             ,
             who
             (
             hauing
             vnderstood
             that
             a
             body
             is
             circumscript
             )
             but
             doth
             presently
             inferre
             ,
             that
             then
             it
             is
             comprised
             in
             a
             place
             certaine
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             Camell
             ,
             if
             they
             be
             not
             contented
             with
             that
             alreadie
             said
             thereof
             ,
             then
             let
             them
             reade
             what
             Saint
             Ierome
             hath
             thereof
             written
             ,
             in
             his
             first
             booke
             against
             the
             Pelagians
             :
             who
             expounding
             the
             words
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             saith
             as
             followeth
             .
             In
             this
             hath
             the
             Lord
             not
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             be
             done
             :
             but
             hath
             compared
             one
             impossibilitie
             with
             an
             other
             .
             For
             as
             a
             Camell
             cannot
             enter
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             :
             so
             the
             rich
             shall
             not
             enter
             into
             the
             Kingdome
             of
             heauen
             .
             Now
             if
             thou
             canst
             shewe
             that
             the
             rich
             
             man
             there
             entereth
             ,
             it
             will
             also
             follow
             ,
             that
             the
             Camell
             may
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
             And
             alledge
             not
             vnto
             me
             Abraham
             ,
             and
             the
             others
             ,
             which
             we
             read
             in
             the
             old
             Testament
             to
             haue
             bene
             rich
             ,
             and
             which
             being
             such
             ,
             were
             entered
             into
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             ,
             because
             they
             (
             well
             vsing
             their
             riches
             ,
             and
             imploying
             them
             to
             good
             workes
             )
             haue
             by
             that
             meane
             ceased
             to
             be
             rich
             .
             Behold
             what
             S.
             Ierome
             writeth
             .
             Thē
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             necessary
             (
             after
             the
             saying
             of
             S.
             Ierome
             )
             that
             for
             the
             saluation
             of
             the
             rich
             man
             ,
             there
             be
             a
             mutation
             and
             changing
             in
             his
             heart
             ;
             yea
             and
             that
             hee
             cease
             to
             be
             rich
             ,
             to
             the
             end
             hee
             may
             enter
             into
             the
             kingdome
             of
             heauen
             :
             so
             also
             it
             behoueth
             ,
             that
             there
             be
             a
             chaunge
             in
             the
             Camell
             ,
             and
             that
             hee
             cease
             to
             be
             such
             :
             that
             he
             may
             be
             made
             to
             passe
             through
             the
             eye
             of
             a
             needle
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             article
             following
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             they
             may
             discerne
             the
             light
             from
             darknesse
             ,
             and
             falshood
             from
             truth
             .
             Which
             is
             the
             cause
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             approue
             ,
             neither
             the
             arguments
             ,
             nor
             conclusions
             of
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             touching
             the
             being
             of
             one
             body
             in
             many
             places
             at
             one
             instant
             :
             being
             well
             assured
             by
             good
             and
             certaine
             testimonies
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             that
             all
             whatsoeuer
             the
             Doctors
             will
             proue
             ,
             not
             else-where
             proceedeth
             ,
             then
             from
             the
             spirit
             of
             error
             and
             falshood
             .
             Which
             wil
             retaine
             by
             that
             meane
             ,
             the
             impietie
             and
             Idolatrie
             ,
             which
             hee
             hath
             formerly
             established
             in
             the
             world
             ,
             to
             the
             ruine
             almost
             of
             all
             Christendome
             .
          
           
             As
             touching
             the
             verbe
             
               [
               Dierchesthai
            
             ]
             the
             Doctors
             finde
             themselues
             much
             hindred
             to
             saue
             their
             penetration
             :
             which
             they
             can
             no
             way
             found
             vpon
             the
             proper
             signification
             of
             that
             word
             :
             as
             hath
             bene
             shewed
             them
             by
             the
             passages
             produced
             vnto
             them
             ,
             not
             vpon
             any
             authoritie
             of
             the
             scripture
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             (
             to
             proue
             that
             faith
             commeth
             in
             part
             of
             our selues
             ,
             &
             not
             wholy
             of
             God
             )
             that
             
               Nemo
               credit
               nisivolēs
            
             ,
             (
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             none
             beleeueth
             but
             willingly
             )
             the
             Ministers
             answer
             :
             that
             (
             vnder
             our
             Maisters
             correction
             )
             it
             is
             nought
             to
             the
             purpose
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             this
             will
             and
             consent
             is
             of
             God
             :
             who
             worketh
             in
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             both
             the
             will
             and
             the
             deed
             .
             Which
             thing
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             one
             of
             his
             Epistles
             ,
             verie
             
             well
             teacheth
             ,
             where
             he
             saith
             :
             That
             when
             God
             calleth
             men
             to
             saluation
             ,
             he
             findeth
             not
             in
             them
             any
             good
             will
             at
             all
             :
             but
             that
             he
             worketh
             and
             createth
             it
             in
             their
             hearts
             ,
             if
             he
             wil
             finde
             it
             there
             .
             And
             that
             of
             S.
             Paul
             which
             the
             Doctors
             alledge
             ,
             that
             we
             are
             coworkers
             with
             God
             ,
             serueth
             nothing
             for
             their
             purpose
             :
             For
             the
             Apostle
             speaketh
             not
             there
             but
             of
             the
             Ministery
             .
             And
             meant
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             what
             hee
             writeth
             therof
             more
             clearly
             in
             the
             2.
             to
             the
             Corinths
             ,
             in
             these
             words
             :
             
             We
             are
             Embassadors
             for
             Christ
             :
             as
             if
             God
             exhorted
             by
             vs.
             And
             touching
             that
             which
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             none
             of
             all
             the
             auncient
             Doctors
             euer
             taught
             ,
             that
             one
             body
             could
             not
             be
             in
             diuers
             places
             at
             one
             selfe-same
             time
             :
             The
             Ministers
             say
             yea
             .
             As
             they
             haue
             shewed
             in
             their
             former
             writings
             ,
             where
             the
             passages
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             ,
             
               Ad
               Dardanum
            
             :
             and
             in
             the
             30.
             tract
             vpon
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             and
             others
             haue
             bene
             alledged
             .
          
           
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             not
             but
             to
             two
             points
             onely
             ,
             of
             all
             that
             the
             Doctors
             haue
             touched
             in
             theyr
             aduertisement
             .
             The
             first
             is
             ,
             that
             theyr
             Sermons
             ,
             theyr
             writings
             ,
             theyr
             discipline
             obserued
             in
             theyr
             Churches
             ,
             the
             censures
             which
             they
             passe
             for
             scandalous
             offences
             therein
             committed
             ,
             the
             care
             which
             they
             ,
             and
             the
             Superintendents
             haue
             ,
             to
             discouer
             ,
             reprooue
             and
             correct
             them
             :
             the
             paine
             which
             they
             take
             to
             reforme
             whatsoeuer
             is
             disordered
             ,
             and
             the
             publique
             prayers
             ,
             which
             in
             all
             places
             they
             make
             to
             these
             endes
             :
             defend
             them
             with
             all
             good
             people
             :
             and
             iustifie
             them
             against
             the
             slanders
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
             The
             second
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             in
             theyr
             sayd
             aduertisement
             are
             deceiued
             ,
             in
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             ,
             that
             Abraham
             doubted
             of
             the
             promise
             .
             Which
             is
             wholy
             contrary
             to
             that
             which
             the
             Apostle
             in
             the
             4.
             of
             the
             Romanes
             thereof
             writeth
             .
             Where
             ,
             in
             these
             proper
             termes
             he
             saith
             :
             And
             he
             nothign
             doubted
             of
             the
             promise
             of
             God
             through
             vnbeliefe
             ,
             but
             was
             strengthened
             in
             the
             faith
             ,
             and
             gaue
             glorie
             vnto
             God.
             
          
           
             For
             answere
             to
             the
             Doctors
             last
             Obiection
             ,
             made
             (
             as
             they
             say
             )
             agaynst
             the
             answere
             giuen
             by
             the
             Ministers
             to
             theyr
             former
             Question
             ,
             vppon
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Supper
             ▪
             Although
             the
             sayd
             Doctors
             ,
             do
             faigne
             not
             any
             way
             
             to
             affect
             delaie
             in
             the
             Conference
             and
             Dispute
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Masse
             :
             yet
             can
             they
             not
             perswade
             any
             person
             of
             any
             iudgement
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             not
             hetherto
             retyred
             ,
             and
             doo
             yet
             drawe
             backe
             from
             entering
             thereinto
             .
             For
             notwithstanding
             some
             requests
             presented
             by
             Madame
             
               de
               Buillon
            
             and
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             some
             declaration
             which
             my
             Lorde
             the
             Duke
             of
             Niuernois
             hath
             made
             therevppon
             ,
             of
             his
             will
             and
             desire
             to
             bring
             them
             therevnto
             :
             yet
             by
             all
             the
             meanes
             aboue-sayd
             ,
             hath
             it
             not
             beene
             possible
             to
             obtaine
             of
             them
             ,
             that
             (
             all
             other
             thinges
             set
             apart
             )
             they
             would
             in
             good
             earnest
             ,
             conferre
             with
             the
             Ministers
             of
             the
             two
             points
             aforesaid
             .
          
           
             Which
             thing
             the
             Ministers
             perceiuing
             ,
             and
             not
             desiring
             to
             depart
             from
             them
             ,
             without
             conference
             first
             had
             therof
             :
             haue
             often
             protested
             to
             dispute
             no
             more
             with
             them
             ,
             till
             these
             two
             Articles
             were
             first
             decyded
             and
             resolued
             .
             And
             to
             this
             ende
             proposed
             certaine
             Theses
             by
             order
             and
             good
             methode
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             one
             as
             of
             the
             other
             :
             to
             the
             ende
             they
             should
             well
             aduise
             what
             in
             the
             sayd
             Theses
             ,
             they
             would
             gainsay
             and
             withstand
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             hauing
             dissembled
             the
             same
             ,
             in
             stead
             of
             pursuing
             of
             them
             ,
             doo
             propose
             other
             friuolous
             and
             vnprofitable
             questions
             ,
             taken
             and
             drawne
             from
             theyr
             Schoole
             diuinitie
             .
          
           
             And
             although
             the
             Ministers
             had
             iust
             occasion
             to
             grieue
             ,
             that
             theyr
             Theses
             were
             omitted
             by
             the
             Doctors
             :
             neuerthelesse
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             they
             should
             haue
             no
             more
             shadowe
             nor
             colour
             of
             delaie
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             also
             answered
             to
             their
             last
             questions
             .
             But
             now
             in
             stead
             of
             following
             theyr
             Answeres
             ,
             and
             impugning
             of
             them
             ,
             if
             any
             way
             they
             could
             :
             they
             propose
             againe
             newe
             questions
             ,
             no
             lesse
             absurd
             and
             friuolous
             then
             the
             former
             .
             Whereby
             each
             one
             may
             euidently
             knowe
             theyr
             hypocrisie
             and
             dissimulation
             .
             And
             that
             pretending
             a
             willingnesse
             to
             conferre
             of
             the
             two
             foresaide
             pointes
             ,
             they
             doo
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             ,
             what
             in
             them
             possiblie
             lyeth
             ,
             to
             drawe
             them
             from
             the
             Conference
             thereof
             :
             to
             the
             ende
             ,
             it
             may
             breake
             off
             ,
             before
             that
             
             this
             matter
             be
             cleared
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             for
             conclusion
             ,
             and
             resolution
             of
             all
             the
             Conference
             ,
             determine
             by
             Gods
             grace
             ,
             to
             couch
             briefly
             by
             writing
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             clearest
             manner
             they
             can
             ,
             all
             what
             God
             hath
             taught
             them
             concerning
             the
             same
             ;
             and
             what
             they
             haue
             learned
             thereof
             by
             his
             word
             :
             as
             well
             to
             satisfie
             the
             debt
             and
             bond
             which
             they
             haue
             to
             God
             ,
             and
             his
             honour
             ,
             to
             obey
             my
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             ,
             and
             Madame
             
               de
               Buillon
            
             :
             as
             lastly
             ,
             for
             the
             contentment
             and
             edification
             of
             the
             whole
             Church
             .
          
        
         
           
             The
             Conclusion
             and
             resolution
             of
             the
             points
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             containing
             a
             declaration
             of
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             beleeue
             concerning
             the
             same
             :
             and
             teache
             thereof
             in
             their
             Church
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             THe
             end
             and
             chiefe
             felicitie
             of
             men
             ,
             is
             to
             
             be
             conioyned
             with
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             abide
             in
             him
             :
             For
             as
             much
             as
             it
             is
             the
             only
             meane
             by
             which
             all
             their
             desires
             can
             be
             contented
             and
             satisfied
             :
             and
             by
             the
             which
             also
             ,
             their
             mindes
             and
             hearts
             can
             be
             plainly
             freed
             and
             deliuered
             ,
             from
             the
             hard
             and
             cruel
             bondage
             of
             sinne
             ,
             and
             of
             all
             the
             passions
             ,
             greedie
             desires
             ,
             feares
             &
             distrusts
             ,
             which
             do
             assaile
             
             them
             .
             Which
             was
             the
             cause
             ,
             why
             S.
             Paul
             placeth
             perfect
             beatitude
             ,
             and
             entire
             repose
             of
             the
             blessed
             in
             this
             :
             that
             God
             
             is
             all
             in
             all
             in
             them
             .
             But
             for
             as
             much
             as
             men
             be
             naturally
             corrupt
             and
             wicked
             ,
             and
             contrariwise
             God
             in
             all
             perfection
             ,
             is
             pure
             and
             holy
             :
             the
             difficultie
             is
             to
             knowe
             and
             choose
             the
             meane
             ,
             by
             which
             they
             may
             approach
             vnto
             him
             .
             Seeing
             that
             there
             is
             no
             societie
             betweene
             light
             and
             darknesse
             ,
             nor
             any
             communion
             betweene
             righteousnesse
             and
             vnrighteousnesse
             .
             In
             them
             cannot
             this
             meane
             bee
             found
             :
             by
             reason
             ,
             that
             of
             themselues
             they
             are
             wholly
             vnable
             ,
             and
             vncaple
             to
             relieue
             themselues
             from
             the
             miserie
             and
             curse
             ,
             into
             which
             they
             be
             cast
             headlong
             .
          
           
             So
             that
             ,
             beeing
             blinde
             of
             vnderstanding
             ,
             they
             cannot
             
             know
             their
             owne
             good
             :
             nor
             seeke
             it
             ,
             being
             rebels
             and
             heart-hardened
             :
             and
             therefore
             of
             necessitie
             must
             they
             goe
             out
             of
             themselues
             ,
             and
             seeke
             the
             aboue
             said
             meane
             in
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             who
             was
             giuen
             them
             of
             the
             Father
             ,
             to
             bee
             their
             righteousnesse
             ,
             
             wisedome
             ,
             sanctification
             ,
             redemption
             ,
             way
             ,
             life
             ,
             and
             truth
             .
             Then
             resteth
             it
             now
             to
             knowe
             ,
             how
             they
             may
             bee
             vnited
             and
             conioyned
             with
             him
             .
             The
             Apostle
             dooth
             teach
             vs
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             is
             done
             by
             faith
             ,
             by
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             dwelleth
             in
             our
             hearts
             ,
             and
             abideth
             in
             vs
             :
             so
             
             that
             hee
             and
             wee
             are
             made
             one
             ,
             and
             hee
             and
             his
             Father
             are
             one
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             there
             are
             two
             principall
             causes
             of
             this
             faith
             ,
             the
             one
             outward
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             inward
             .
             The
             inward
             is
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             ,
             who
             is
             called
             the
             spirit
             of
             faith
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             he
             is
             
             the
             Author
             thereof
             ,
             and
             createth
             and
             bringeth
             it
             forth
             in
             the
             harts
             of
             men
             :
             mollifying
             and
             disposing
             them
             to
             receiue
             with
             all
             obedience
             ,
             the
             word
             and
             promise
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             is
             preached
             vnto
             them
             by
             the
             faithfull
             stewards
             ,
             and
             Ministers
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             
             Which
             word
             ,
             is
             the
             outward
             cause
             of
             faith
             .
             And
             as
             the
             same
             faith
             groweth
             ,
             and
             riseth
             by
             degrees
             ,
             euen
             so
             doth
             the
             vnion
             which
             we
             haue
             with
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             by
             his
             meanes
             with
             God
             :
             vntill
             (
             as
             saith
             S.
             Paul
             )
             wee
             all
             meete
             together
             in
             
             the
             vnitie
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             knowledge
             of
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             vnto
             a
             perfect
             man
             ,
             and
             vnto
             the
             measure
             of
             the
             age
             of
             the
             fulnesse
             of
             Christ
             .
          
           
             The
             increase
             of
             faith
             is
             wrought
             by
             the
             working
             and
             power
             of
             the
             holy
             spirite
             ,
             who
             was
             the
             first
             beginning
             and
             author
             thereof
             :
             and
             afterwards
             ,
             by
             the
             continuance
             of
             the
             word
             purely
             preached
             and
             denounced
             :
             and
             finally
             by
             the
             lawfull
             vse
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             ,
             ordained
             as
             seales
             for
             the
             certaintie
             and
             confirmation
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             assurance
             wee
             haue
             of
             the
             foresaid
             coniunction
             with
             God
             through
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             participation
             of
             all
             the
             good
             things
             ,
             grauntes
             ,
             gifts
             ,
             graces
             ,
             and
             blessings
             ,
             which
             by
             his
             fauour
             are
             purchased
             and
             gotten
             for
             vs.
             As
             of
             the
             remission
             of
             sinne
             ,
             of
             our
             regeneration
             ,
             of
             the
             mortification
             of
             the
             flesh
             ,
             and
             the
             lusts
             
             thereof
             .
             To
             signifie
             which
             things
             ,
             and
             more
             amply
             assure
             vs
             of
             the
             exhibition
             and
             enioying
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             Baptisme
             was
             ordained
             of
             God
             :
             to
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             water
             which
             is
             powred
             vpon
             our
             bodies
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             promise
             of
             God
             which
             is
             therevnto
             added
             ,
             we
             may
             behold
             (
             as
             it
             were
             with
             our
             eies
             )
             the
             inuisible
             grace
             which
             God
             vouchsafeth
             vs
             ,
             to
             wash
             and
             cleanse
             vs
             from
             our
             spirituall
             filthinesse
             ,
             and
             to
             fanctifie
             vs
             ,
             and
             make
             vs
             new
             creatures
             :
             As
             also
             to
             further
             assure
             vs
             alwayes
             of
             life
             eternall
             ,
             and
             make
             vs
             growe
             in
             the
             hope
             wee
             haue
             thereof
             ,
             by
             the
             participation
             of
             the
             flesh
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             crucified
             for
             our
             redemption
             ,
             and
             of
             his
             bloud
             ,
             shead
             for
             remission
             of
             our
             sinnes
             :
             the
             bread
             and
             the
             wine
             are
             distributed
             vnto
             vs
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             by
             the
             ordinance
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
          
           
             But
             as
             the
             Ministers
             acknowledge
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             vnion
             ,
             and
             sacramentall
             coniunction
             betweene
             the
             outward
             signe
             ,
             and
             thing
             thereby
             signified
             :
             so
             (
             say
             they
             )
             on
             the
             other
             side
             ,
             that
             betweene
             them
             two
             ,
             there
             is
             such
             a
             distinction
             ,
             that
             the
             one
             ought
             neuer
             to
             be
             confounded
             with
             the
             other
             :
             nor
             the
             spirituall
             thing
             in
             such
             sort
             fastened
             to
             the
             corporall
             ,
             (
             which
             representeth
             the
             same
             )
             that
             the
             one
             without
             the
             other
             ,
             cannot
             be
             receiued
             :
             or
             that
             the
             two
             by
             necessitie
             bee
             alwayes
             inseperably
             conioyned
             together
             .
             Whereof
             it
             followeth
             ,
             that
             they
             erre
             ,
             which
             will
             haue
             the
             bread
             in
             the
             Supper
             to
             bee
             chaunged
             into
             the
             substance
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             Iesus
             :
             And
             they
             likewise
             which
             will
             haue
             him
             to
             be
             conioyned
             ,
             and
             corporally
             vnited
             therevnto
             .
             So
             that
             whosoeuer
             receiueth
             and
             taketh
             the
             signes
             ,
             (
             bee
             hee
             faithfull
             ,
             or
             vnfaithfull
             )
             taketh
             and
             receiueth
             forthwith
             the
             thing
             by
             them
             signified
             .
             Which
             error
             ,
             with
             the
             most
             part
             of
             others
             happening
             in
             this
             matter
             ,
             proceedeth
             of
             not
             well
             comprehending
             nor
             conceiuing
             what
             it
             is
             to
             eate
             the
             body
             ,
             and
             drinke
             the
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             Which
             thing
             ought
             not
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             ,
             in
             sort
             as
             corporall
             meates
             are
             taken
             and
             eaten
             ,
             but
             after
             a
             spirituall
             manner
             onely
             :
             as
             is
             declared
             in
             the
             sixt
             of
             Saint
             Iohn
             :
             which
             in
             this
             consisteth
             ;
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             dwelleth
             in
             vs
             ,
             and
             we
             in
             him
             :
             
             and
             is
             done
             by
             the
             faith
             we
             haue
             in
             him
             :
             as
             teacheth
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             the
             25.
             tract
             vpon
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             saying
             :
             
               Why
               preparest
               thou
               the
               belly
               ,
               and
               the
               tooth
               ?
               beleeue
               ,
               and
               thou
               hast
               eaten
               .
            
             And
             in
             the
             third
             booke
             and
             16.
             
             Chapter
             
               de
               Doctrina
               Christiana
            
             :
             where
             he
             saith
             as
             followeth
             :
             
               When
               Iesus
               Christ
               saith
               :
               except
               yee
               eate
               the
               flesh
               of
               the
               sonne
               of
               man
               ,
               and
               drinke
               his
               bloud
               ,
               ye
               haue
               no
               life
               in
               you
               .
            
             It
             seemeth
             that
             hee
             commaundeth
             to
             commit
             some
             great
             offence
             .
             It
             is
             therefore
             a
             figure
             ,
             wherby
             we
             ought
             to
             vnderstand
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             behoueth
             to
             communicate
             with
             the
             passion
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
             and
             to
             retaine
             in
             our
             memorie
             ,
             that
             his
             flesh
             was
             crucified
             and
             wounded
             for
             vs.
             
          
           
             The
             eating
             then
             of
             the
             flesh
             and
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             a
             straight
             coniunction
             and
             vnion
             wee
             haue
             with
             him
             :
             which
             is
             made
             by
             the
             faith
             wee
             adde
             to
             his
             promises
             .
             Euen
             as
             by
             the
             mutuall
             promises
             made
             and
             receiued
             betweene
             man
             and
             woman
             ,
             the
             marriage
             is
             concluded
             ,
             and
             setled
             betweene
             them
             .
             And
             although
             being
             so
             conioyned
             ,
             they
             be
             sometimes
             by
             some
             occasion
             seperated
             ,
             and
             remoued
             the
             one
             from
             the
             other
             ,
             as
             touching
             their
             bodies
             ,
             yet
             for
             all
             that
             ,
             do
             they
             not
             leaue
             to
             be
             one
             flesh
             ,
             and
             one
             body
             ,
             by
             meanes
             of
             the
             societie
             and
             matrimoniall
             familiaritie
             which
             is
             betweene
             them
             .
             In
             like
             case
             ,
             albeit
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             with
             whom
             wee
             are
             conioyned
             and
             vnited
             by
             the
             faith
             and
             trust
             which
             wee
             haue
             in
             him
             ,
             and
             his
             promises
             )
             bee
             as
             touching
             his
             bodie
             ,
             resident
             in
             heauen
             ,
             wee
             yet
             abiding
             vppon
             the
             earth
             ;
             and
             that
             by
             meanes
             thereof
             ,
             there
             is
             great
             distance
             and
             space
             betweene
             him
             and
             vs
             ,
             as
             touching
             his
             bodie
             :
             that
             neuerthelesse
             hindereth
             vs
             not
             ,
             to
             bee
             flesh
             of
             his
             flesh
             ,
             and
             bones
             of
             his
             bones
             :
             that
             hee
             is
             not
             our
             head
             ,
             and
             wee
             his
             members
             :
             that
             hee
             is
             not
             our
             husband
             ,
             and
             wee
             his
             spowse
             :
             that
             wee
             bee
             not
             of
             one selfe
             same
             body
             :
             that
             wee
             bee
             not
             engrafted
             into
             him
             ,
             that
             wee
             be
             not
             cloathed
             with
             him
             :
             that
             wee
             abide
             not
             in
             him
             ,
             as
             the
             boughes
             and
             buddes
             in
             the
             Vine
             .
             And
             there
             is
             neither
             distance
             of
             times
             ,
             nor
             places
             whatsoeuer
             it
             be
             :
             there
             is
             no
             difference
             of
             times
             ,
             which
             can
             hinder
             such
             a
             
             coniunction
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             faithfull
             eate
             truly
             his
             flesh
             ,
             and
             his
             bloud
             .
             For
             as
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             albeit
             they
             were
             two
             or
             three
             thousand
             yeares
             before
             Iesus
             Christ
             dyed
             ,
             yet
             left
             they
             not
             to
             communicate
             in
             his
             flesh
             crucified
             ,
             and
             to
             eate
             the
             same
             spirituall
             meate
             which
             we
             eate
             ,
             and
             to
             drinke
             the
             same
             spirituall
             drinke
             which
             wee
             drinke
             .
             The
             faithfull
             also
             which
             are
             come
             twelue
             or
             fifteene
             hundred
             yeares
             after
             ,
             leaue
             not
             ,
             what
             place
             soeuer
             they
             be
             in
             ,
             to
             participate
             (
             as
             did
             the
             Fathers
             )
             in
             the
             same
             meate
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             same
             drinke
             ,
             which
             they
             haue
             done
             .
             And
             no
             other
             difference
             there
             is
             betweene
             the
             eating
             of
             the
             Fathers
             which
             were
             before
             the
             comming
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             them
             that
             haue
             followed
             him
             ,
             but
             the
             reason
             of
             more
             or
             lesse
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             in
             the
             one
             ,
             more
             ample
             and
             expresse
             declaration
             of
             the
             good
             will
             of
             God
             towards
             vs
             ,
             then
             in
             the
             other
             .
             Whence
             must
             be
             concluded
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             world
             vnto
             the
             end
             ,
             there
             neuer
             was
             ,
             nor
             shall
             be
             other
             coniunction
             betweene
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             and
             his
             Church
             ,
             then
             spirituall
             :
             that
             is
             to
             fay
             ,
             wrought
             by
             the
             spirit
             of
             God.
             For
             euen
             as
             there
             is
             but
             one
             faith
             in
             the
             Fathers
             and
             in
             vs
             ,
             which
             respecteth
             alwayes
             on
             the
             one
             part
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             so
             are
             we
             not
             also
             otherwise
             conioyned
             with
             him
             ,
             then
             they
             haue
             bene
             .
             As
             then
             it
             is
             so
             ,
             that
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             had
             no
             other
             societie
             nor
             communion
             then
             spirituall
             :
             It
             followeth
             thereof
             ,
             that
             we
             also
             are
             not
             ,
             nor
             can
             be
             otherwise
             ,
             then
             spiritually
             cōioyned
             with
             him
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             it
             is
             not
             said
             ,
             that
             wee
             and
             the
             Fathers
             are
             not
             flesh
             of
             his
             flesh
             ,
             and
             bones
             of
             his
             bones
             :
             and
             that
             all
             together
             ,
             doo
             not
             partake
             as
             well
             in
             his
             humanitie
             ,
             as
             in
             his
             diuinitie
             .
             But
             that
             which
             wee
             say
             is
             :
             that
             all
             this
             participation
             which
             wee
             haue
             in
             him
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             operation
             &
             vertue
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             :
             which
             thing
             ,
             Christ
             Iesus
             in
             S.
             Iohn
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             meane
             of
             this
             coniunction
             ,
             teacheth
             clearly
             ,
             when
             he
             saith
             :
             The
             
             
               things
               which
               I
               speake
               vnto
               you
               ,
               are
               spirit
               and
               life
               .
            
             And
             S.
             Paul
             also
             ,
             when
             hee
             saith
             :
             
               Our
               fathers
               did
               eate
               the
               same
               spirituall
               meate
               ,
               and
               dranke
               the
               same
               spirituall
               drinke
               .
            
             Now
             when
             wee
             speake
             of
             this
             spirituall
             eating
             ,
             common
             to
             vs
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             
             Fathers
             :
             it
             must
             not
             therfore
             be
             thought
             ,
             that
             we
             reiect
             the
             holy
             Supper
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             or
             any
             way
             thinke
             that
             the
             same
             vse
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             is
             superfluous
             :
             no
             more
             then
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             water
             in
             Baptisme
             .
             For
             our
             Lord
             knowing
             the
             blockishnesse
             of
             our
             vnderstandings
             ,
             and
             the
             infirmitie
             and
             weakenesse
             of
             our
             hearts
             ,
             and
             through
             the
             pittie
             he
             hath
             of
             vs
             ,
             willing
             to
             helpe
             and
             remedie
             the
             same
             :
             hath
             not
             contented
             to
             haue
             left
             vs
             the
             ministerie
             of
             his
             word
             ,
             to
             assure
             vs
             of
             the
             participation
             which
             we
             haue
             in
             his
             flesh
             ,
             &
             in
             his
             bloud
             ,
             and
             in
             all
             the
             good
             things
             thereon
             depending
             :
             but
             hath
             also
             willed
             to
             adde
             therevnto
             ,
             the
             signes
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             as
             seales
             to
             his
             word
             ,
             to
             seale
             in
             our
             hearts
             ,
             by
             the
             vse
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             the
             faith
             we
             haue
             of
             the
             foresaid
             coniunction
             by
             his
             word
             .
             So
             that
             it
             sufficed
             him
             not
             to
             haue
             contracted
             a
             couenant
             with
             Abraham
             ,
             by
             the
             word
             and
             promise
             which
             he
             made
             vnto
             him
             :
             but
             added
             moreouer
             therevnto
             the
             signe
             of
             Circumcision
             ,
             as
             a
             seale
             ,
             for
             more
             ample
             confirmation
             and
             assurance
             of
             the
             said
             couenant
             .
          
           
             To
             the
             end
             then
             ,
             that
             each
             one
             may
             vnderstand
             what
             is
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             and
             what
             the
             Ministers
             do
             thereof
             beleeue
             and
             teach
             :
             it
             is
             meete
             to
             consider
             and
             acknowledge
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             three
             things
             .
             First
             the
             ordinance
             of
             the
             Lord
             contained
             in
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             declared
             by
             his
             Ministerie
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             commaundement
             :
             by
             which
             this
             holy
             cerimony
             hath
             bene
             ordained
             and
             established
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             for
             the
             edification
             and
             entertaining
             of
             the
             members
             thereof
             :
             which
             thing
             must
             bee
             diligently
             obserued
             ,
             to
             haue
             it
             in
             that
             honour
             and
             reuerence
             as
             appertaineth
             ;
             and
             not
             to
             place
             it
             in
             the
             ranke
             of
             other
             cerimonies
             ,
             which
             haue
             no
             foundation
             nor
             reason
             to
             authorise
             them
             ,
             but
             the
             onely
             will
             and
             tradition
             of
             men
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             heed
             must
             be
             taken
             ,
             that
             by
             the
             institution
             ,
             and
             ordinance
             ,
             whereof
             we
             make
             mention
             ,
             we
             vnderstand
             not
             ,
             a
             certaine
             pronuntiation
             of
             words
             ,
             or
             any
             vertue
             which
             is
             hidden
             in
             the
             same
             :
             as
             do
             the
             Priests
             of
             the
             Romane
             Church
             :
             who
             by
             ignorance
             and
             superstitious
             opinion
             which
             they
             haue
             ,
             thinke
             to
             haue
             consecrated
             ,
             and
             transubstantiated
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             by
             the
             vertue
             
             of
             fiue
             words
             :
             
               Hoc
               est
               enim
               Corpus
               meum
            
             .
             For
             this
             is
             my
             body
             ,
             breathed
             and
             pronounced
             ouer
             the
             Elements
             .
             Wherein
             they
             are
             greatly
             deceiued
             and
             abused
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             word
             which
             is
             the
             formall
             cause
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             is
             not
             a
             word
             simply
             said
             and
             vttered
             ,
             but
             a
             declaration
             of
             the
             institution
             and
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             made
             by
             the
             Minister
             ,
             according
             to
             his
             commaundement
             :
             and
             a
             preaching
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             fruite
             thereof
             :
             by
             which
             ,
             the
             hearts
             of
             the
             hearers
             are
             lifted
             vp
             vnto
             the
             contemplation
             ,
             and
             meditation
             of
             his
             benefite
             ,
             and
             their
             faith
             stirred
             vp
             and
             inflamed
             in
             his
             loue
             :
             and
             where
             the
             same
             shall
             not
             thus
             be
             done
             ,
             it
             must
             not
             be
             thought
             ,
             that
             the
             Elements
             be
             Sacraments
             .
             As
             S.
             Augustine
             in
             the
             80.
             
             Tract
             vpon
             Saint
             Iohn
             ,
             in
             these
             termes
             teacheth
             :
             Whence
             commeth
             this
             vertue
             to
             the
             water
             ,
             that
             in
             touching
             the
             body
             ,
             it
             washeth
             the
             heart
             ,
             sauing
             that
             it
             is
             done
             by
             the
             word
             :
             not
             because
             it
             is
             pronounced
             ,
             but
             because
             it
             is
             beleeued
             ?
          
           
             This
             word
             is
             the
             word
             of
             the
             faith
             which
             wee
             preach
             .
             
             This
             (
             saith
             the
             Apostle
             )
             to
             wit
             :
             
               If
               we
               confesse
               with
               our
               mouth
               ,
               that
               Iesus
               is
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               beleeue
               in
               our
               heart
               ,
               that
               God
               raised
               him
               from
               the
               dead
               ,
               wee
               shall
               be
               saued
               .
            
             And
             continuing
             his
             speech
             ,
             hee
             addeth
             in
             the
             end
             these
             proper
             words
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             
               This
               word
               of
               faith
               which
               wee
               preach
               ,
            
             is
             that
             (
             doubtlesse
             )
             by
             which
             baptisme
             is
             consecrated
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             it
             might
             wash
             vs.
             
          
           
             Of
             this
             ,
             as
             before
             ,
             do
             the
             Ministers
             inferre
             two
             things
             .
             The
             one
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             word
             of
             consecration
             is
             not
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             a
             simple
             pronuntiation
             ,
             but
             a
             publike
             and
             manifest
             declaration
             of
             the
             institution
             and
             ordinance
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             whole
             mysterie
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             The
             other
             ,
             that
             the
             signes
             and
             Elements
             consecrated
             ,
             are
             not
             chaunged
             as
             touching
             their
             nature
             and
             substance
             :
             but
             onely
             as
             touching
             the
             vse
             and
             signification
             :
             and
             that
             onely
             ,
             during
             the
             action
             wherein
             they
             doo
             serue
             .
             For
             to
             consecrate
             the
             signes
             (
             as
             the
             water
             in
             Baptisme
             ,
             and
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Supper
             )
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             to
             depute
             and
             make
             them
             serue
             to
             
             an
             holy
             and
             sacred
             vse
             ,
             by
             the
             publike
             declaration
             of
             the
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             made
             to
             this
             ende
             :
             and
             not
             to
             chaunge
             them
             as
             touching
             theyr
             nature
             and
             substance
             .
             The
             which
             (
             vanishing
             away
             ,
             and
             beeing
             abolished
             )
             there
             should
             remaine
             no
             more
             of
             the
             signe
             ,
             nor
             (
             consequently
             )
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             .
             Euen
             so
             then
             ,
             as
             the
             water
             in
             baptisme
             ,
             after
             consecration
             ,
             abideth
             water
             ,
             without
             that
             the
             nature
             or
             substance
             thereof
             in
             ought
             chaungeth
             or
             altereth
             :
             So
             also
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             remaine
             as
             touching
             theyr
             substance
             ,
             such
             after
             consecration
             ,
             as
             they
             were
             before
             :
             else
             should
             there
             not
             bee
             Analogie
             ,
             nor
             mutuall
             agreement
             betweene
             the
             signe
             ,
             and
             the
             thing
             signified
             .
             For
             what
             comparison
             or
             conformitie
             is
             there
             betweene
             the
             accidents
             of
             bread
             ,
             and
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ?
             Seeing
             that
             the
             accidents
             of
             bread
             ,
             as
             the
             whitenesse
             and
             roundnesse
             ,
             destitute
             of
             theyr
             substance
             ,
             (
             as
             the
             Sophisters
             doo
             falsly
             imagine
             )
             could
             not
             nourish
             ,
             nor
             sustaine
             the
             bodie
             :
             and
             by
             that
             meane
             ,
             should
             not
             be
             proper
             to
             signifie
             ,
             that
             the
             flesh
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             doo
             nourish
             and
             sustaine
             our
             soules
             .
          
           
             This
             then
             must
             bee
             holden
             for
             a
             thing
             resolued
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             the
             wine
             abide
             in
             their
             substance
             :
             which
             thing
             is
             clearely
             prooued
             by
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             speaking
             of
             that
             hee
             giuen
             his
             Disciples
             to
             drinke
             in
             the
             Supper
             )
             calleth
             it
             ,
             namely
             :
             fruite
             of
             the
             Vine
             .
             Which
             cannot
             
             bee
             applyed
             to
             accidents
             ,
             but
             ought
             necessarily
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             of
             wine
             in
             it
             proper
             substance
             .
             Also
             
             by
             that
             which
             Saint
             Paul
             saith
             :
             calling
             the
             Elements
             of
             the
             Supper
             three
             seuerall
             times
             bread
             and
             wine
             :
             yea
             after
             they
             haue
             beene
             consecrated
             .
             Also
             by
             that
             which
             hee
             sayeth
             else-where
             :
             
               Wee
               which
               are
               many
               ,
               are
               one
               bread
            
             
             
               and
               one
               body
               :
               for
               as
               much
               as
               wee
               are
               all
               partakers
               of
               one
               selfe-same
               bread
               .
            
             For
             there
             hee
             will
             teach
             vs
             by
             the
             comparison
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             hee
             proposeth
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             that
             as
             it
             is
             composed
             of
             many
             graines
             ,
             so
             pasted
             and
             mingled
             together
             ,
             that
             one
             cannot
             distinguish
             nor
             seperate
             one
             from
             an
             other
             :
             So
             also
             ought
             all
             the
             faithfull
             in
             the
             
             Church
             to
             be
             so
             conioyned
             and
             vnited
             together
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             body
             ,
             that
             it
             seemeth
             and
             appeareth
             ,
             they
             are
             members
             one
             of
             an
             other
             .
             Now
             very
             foolish
             and
             from
             the
             purpose
             should
             this
             comparison
             be
             ,
             if
             the
             bread
             which
             we
             eate
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             vpon
             which
             this
             comparison
             is
             founded
             ,
             were
             not
             true
             bread
             .
             Also
             by
             that
             which
             Gelacius
             Bishop
             of
             Rome
             ,
             writing
             against
             Eutiches
             saith
             :
             The
             Sacraments
             (
             saith
             he
             )
             which
             we
             take
             ,
             is
             a
             thing
             diuine
             :
             and
             neuerthelesse
             doth
             it
             not
             cease
             to
             bee
             substance
             and
             nature
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             .
             Also
             by
             that
             which
             writeth
             Theodoret
             in
             his
             first
             Dialogue
             ,
             and
             in
             these
             proper
             termes
             :
             
               The
               Lord
               hath
               honoured
               with
               the
               name
               of
               his
               body
               and
               of
               his
               bloud
               ,
               the
               visible
               signes
               which
               doo
               represent
               them
               :
               neuerthelesse
               without
               changing
               the
               nature
               of
               them
               ,
               but
               onely
               adding
               grace
               to
               nature
               .
            
             The
             same
             Author
             in
             the
             second
             Dialogue
             ,
             speaking
             likewise
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             which
             are
             distributed
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             saith
             as
             followeth
             :
             
               After
               sanctification
               these
               misticall
               signes
               depart
               not
               from
               their
               nature
               :
               for
               they
               abide
               in
               their
               proper
               substance
               ,
               forme
               ,
               and
               figure
               .
               By
               meanes
               whereof
               ,
               one
               seeth
               and
               handleth
               them
               after
               consecration
               ,
               nor
               more
               nor
               lesse
               then
               he
               did
               before
               .
            
             Also
             by
             that
             which
             saith
             S.
             
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             ,
             writing
             to
             the
             Monke
             Cesarius
             ,
             whose
             words
             are
             such
             .
             
               In
               the
               Supper
               we
               call
               that
               which
               is
               presented
               bread
               ,
               before
               it
               be
               sanctified
               :
               and
               after
               sanctification
               thereof
               ,
               by
               the
               diuine
               grace
               ,
               and
               meane
               of
               the
               Minister
               ,
               it
               hath
               no
               more
               the
               name
               bread
               ,
               but
               of
               the
               body
               of
               the
               Lord
               :
               neuerthelesse
               ,
               the
               nature
               of
               the
               bread
               is
               there
               still
               remaining
               .
            
          
           
             By
             the
             passages
             aforesaid
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             auntient
             Doctors
             ,
             and
             others
             ,
             which
             might
             be
             yet
             alledged
             for
             this
             purpose
             ,
             it
             appeareth
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             the
             Supper
             abide
             alwayes
             (
             as
             hath
             bene
             said
             )
             in
             their
             proper
             nature
             and
             substance
             ,
             as
             well
             after
             consecration
             ,
             as
             before
             .
             And
             it
             must
             not
             be
             doubted
             ,
             that
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             auncient
             Church
             hath
             not
             euer
             bene
             such
             :
             and
             that
             transubstantiation
             was
             not
             setled
             nor
             holden
             in
             the
             Romane
             Church
             for
             an
             Article
             of
             faith
             ,
             vntill
             the
             time
             of
             Innocent
             the
             third
             .
          
           
             To
             gainesay
             and
             reiect
             whatsoeuer
             hath
             bene
             said
             touching
             
             the
             nature
             and
             substance
             of
             signes
             ,
             which
             remaine
             after
             consecration
             ,
             the
             aduersaries
             of
             this
             doctrine
             do
             ordinarily
             alledge
             ,
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             saith
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             bread
             in
             the
             institution
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             
               Take
               eate
               ,
               this
               is
               my
               body
               :
            
             And
             resting
             vpon
             the
             naturall
             ,
             and
             proper
             signification
             of
             the
             words
             ,
             they
             obstinately
             defend
             ,
             that
             the
             substance
             of
             bread
             vanisheth
             in
             the
             consecratiō
             :
             and
             that
             there
             remaineth
             no
             other
             substance
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             The
             reason
             thereof
             is
             ,
             because
             they
             obserue
             not
             the
             figures
             and
             maner
             of
             speaking
             ;
             which
             be
             ordinarie
             and
             vsuall
             in
             the
             holy
             scripture
             ,
             alwayes
             ,
             and
             as
             often
             as
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Saments
             is
             questionable
             .
             For
             then
             the
             name
             of
             the
             things
             signified
             ,
             is
             ordinarily
             attributed
             to
             the
             signes
             ,
             which
             do
             signifie
             and
             represent
             them
             :
             as
             the
             name
             of
             a
             couenant
             is
             attributed
             
             to
             Circumcision
             :
             because
             it
             was
             deputed
             to
             signifie
             and
             confirme
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             
             The
             Lambe
             ,
             for
             like
             reason
             ,
             is
             called
             the
             Passeouer
             :
             and
             Baptisme
             ,
             the
             washing
             of
             regeneration
             :
             not
             because
             they
             bee
             like
             and
             semblable
             things
             ,
             as
             the
             signes
             and
             mysteries
             signified
             by
             them
             :
             but
             for
             the
             conformitie
             that
             is
             betweene
             them
             ,
             the
             signes
             (
             as
             saith
             Saint
             Augustine
             )
             take
             oftentimes
             
             the
             name
             of
             the
             things
             which
             they
             represent
             .
             The
             error
             then
             commeth
             ,
             because
             they
             take
             and
             vnderstand
             the
             fashions
             and
             maners
             of
             figuratiue
             speeches
             ,
             as
             if
             they
             were
             proper
             and
             naturall
             .
          
           
             Now
             that
             this
             kinde
             of
             speaking
             :
             
               Take
               yee
               ,
               and
               eate
               yee
               ,
               This
               is
               my
               body
               ,
            
             is
             figuratiue
             ,
             it
             appeareth
             by
             that
             which
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             addeth
             after
             the
             Cup
             ,
             saying
             :
             
               This
               Cup
               is
               the
               new
               Testament
               in
               my
               bloud
               ,
               which
               is
               shead
               for
               you
               .
            
             Where
             he
             calleth
             the
             
               Cup
               ,
               Testament
               ,
               and
               new
               Couenant
               in
               his
               bloud
               .
            
             Wherein
             it
             behoueth
             necessarily
             to
             confesse
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             a
             figure
             ,
             and
             that
             without
             the
             same
             ,
             they
             cannot
             well
             vnderstand
             ,
             nor
             fitly
             interpret
             the
             said
             passages
             :
             For
             it
             is
             a
             thing
             manifest
             ,
             that
             a
             couenant
             (
             which
             is
             a
             contract
             and
             bargaine
             betweene
             parties
             ,
             made
             and
             conceiued
             vnder
             a
             certaine
             promise
             and
             word
             )
             is
             not
             wine
             .
             And
             neuerthelesse
             it
             is
             so
             called
             by
             figure
             :
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             wine
             which
             is
             distributed
             
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             as
             the
             seale
             ,
             by
             which
             the
             said
             couenant
             is
             sealed
             ,
             and
             the
             faith
             thereof
             confirmed
             .
             By
             such
             ,
             and
             like
             manner
             ,
             this
             sentence
             
               [
               This
               is
               my
               body
            
             ]
             which
             is
             as
             much
             to
             say
             ,
             as
             this
             is
             the
             new
             Testament
             in
             my
             body
             ,
             which
             is
             giuen
             for
             you
             ,
             must
             bevnderstood
             and
             expounded
             .
             For
             as
             by
             the
             effusion
             of
             his
             bloud
             ,
             the
             new
             Testament
             was
             confirmed
             :
             so
             was
             it
             also
             by
             the
             death
             of
             his
             body
             .
             And
             a
             better
             Interpreter
             of
             the
             words
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             then
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             ,
             must
             not
             bee
             sought
             for
             .
             For
             certaine
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             what
             he
             hath
             said
             of
             the
             Cup
             ,
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             glasse
             ,
             &
             cleare
             and
             familiar
             exposition
             of
             that
             he
             had
             more
             briefly
             and
             obscurely
             said
             of
             the
             bread
             .
             This
             also
             is
             proued
             by
             that
             which
             S.
             
             Paul
             saith
             :
             
               The
               bread
               which
               we
               breake
               ,
               is
               it
               not
               the
               Communion
               of
               the
               body
               of
               Christ
               ?
            
             which
             is
             a
             manner
             of
             figuratiue
             speech
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             (
             to
             speake
             and
             vnderstand
             properly
             )
             the
             bread
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             corporeall
             and
             materiall
             thing
             ,
             is
             not
             the
             Communion
             which
             we
             haue
             in
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             spirituall
             and
             inuisible
             thing
             .
             And
             neuerthelesse
             it
             is
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             signe
             thereof
             ,
             to
             represent
             it
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             and
             to
             assure
             vs
             of
             the
             same
             .
             As
             commonly
             we
             cal
             the
             signed
             and
             sealed
             Letter
             ,
             which
             containeth
             the
             declaration
             of
             the
             last
             will
             of
             a
             man
             ,
             his
             Testament
             :
             although
             it
             be
             not
             his
             Testament
             ,
             but
             is
             properly
             the
             declaration
             ,
             which
             he
             hath
             verbally
             made
             of
             his
             said
             will.
             But
             it
             is
             so
             called
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             the
             instrument
             and
             testimonie
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Now
             ,
             as
             the
             scripture
             and
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             as
             well
             to
             recommend
             and
             aduance
             the
             dignitie
             of
             the
             signes
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             therby
             the
             contempt
             of
             them
             :
             as
             for
             the
             agreement
             and
             likenesse
             which
             is
             betweene
             the
             signes
             ,
             &
             the
             thing
             signified
             ,
             haue
             sometimes
             attributed
             the
             name
             of
             the
             same
             things
             signified
             ,
             to
             the
             signes
             which
             represent
             them
             :
             and
             speaking
             of
             signes
             ,
             haue
             vsed
             figuratiue
             speeches
             .
             At
             some
             other
             times
             also
             haue
             they
             spoken
             of
             them
             properly
             ,
             to
             take
             away
             all
             occasion
             of
             abuse
             thereof
             ,
             and
             to
             hinder
             that
             in
             taking
             the
             signes
             without
             any
             distinction
             ,
             for
             the
             things
             by
             them
             signified
             ,
             men
             should
             attribute
             to
             them
             the
             effects
             ,
             which
             appertaine
             not
             but
             to
             the
             things
             onely
             which
             they
             signifie
             .
             
             Of
             these
             two
             diuers
             reasons
             ,
             &
             maners
             of
             speaking
             ,
             examples
             there
             are
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             .
             Of
             the
             first
             ,
             we
             haue
             an
             example
             in
             Circumcision
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             called
             by
             figure
             a
             
               Couenant
               .
               Gen.
            
             17.
             13.
             
             And
             of
             the
             secōd
             ,
             is
             there
             likewise
             an
             example
             in
             the
             11.
             verse
             of
             the
             same
             Chapter
             :
             where
             Circumcision
             is
             properly
             called
             a
             signe
             of
             the
             Couenant
             .
             Another
             example
             there
             is
             ,
             of
             the
             first
             maner
             of
             speaking
             which
             is
             figuratiue
             ,
             in
             Exodus
             12.
             11.
             where
             the
             Lambe
             is
             called
             the
             Passeo-uer
             of
             the
             Lord.
             And
             of
             th●
             second
             maner
             of
             speaking
             which
             is
             proper
             ,
             the
             example
             i●
             in
             the
             same
             Chapter
             &
             3.
             verse
             ,
             where
             the
             blood
             of
             the
             lambe
             is
             named
             a
             signe
             .
             In
             like
             manner
             and
             sort
             ,
             when
             in
             the
             scripture
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             sometimes
             is
             it
             there
             spoken
             of
             bread
             by
             figure
             .
             As
             when
             it
             is
             called
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             or
             the
             Communion
             of
             the
             bodie
             ,
             as
             before
             hath
             bene
             sayd
             :
             and
             sometimes
             is
             it
             also
             taken
             properly
             ,
             as
             
             when
             it
             sayd
             :
             
               Whosoeuer
               shall
               eate
               of
               this
               bread
               .
            
             Also
             ,
             
               Let
               euery
               man
               then
               prooue
               himselfe
               ,
               and
               so
               eate
               of
               this
               bread
               .
            
             The
             like
             diuersitie
             in
             two
             manners
             of
             speaking
             ,
             is
             oftentimes
             founde
             among
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             For
             sometimes
             they
             speake
             of
             bread
             by
             figure
             ,
             calling
             it
             the
             bodie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             As
             Saint
             Ciprian
             ,
             when
             
             hee
             saith
             :
             that
             the
             bodie
             of
             the
             Lorde
             is
             taken
             with
             filthie
             hands
             ,
             and
             his
             blood
             drunke
             with
             a
             prophane
             and
             polluted
             mouth
             .
             And
             when
             hee
             saith
             elsewhere
             that
             we
             sucke
             his
             blood
             ,
             and
             fasten
             our
             tongues
             in
             the
             woundes
             of
             our
             Redeemer
             .
             And
             S.
             Ierome
             ,
             when
             he
             saith
             :
             that
             Euxuperius
             Bishop
             of
             Tholoze
             ,
             bare
             the
             bodie
             of
             our
             Lord
             in
             a
             little
             
               Oziar
               Pannyer
            
             ,
             and
             his
             blood
             in
             a
             Glasse
             .
             Saint
             Chrisostome
             also
             ,
             when
             he
             writeth
             :
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             doth
             not
             only
             suffer
             himselfe
             to
             be
             seene
             ,
             but
             also
             to
             be
             touched
             and
             eaten
             :
             and
             that
             the
             toothe
             be
             fastened
             in
             his
             fleshe
             ,
             and
             touched
             with
             the
             tongue
             .
             And
             Saint
             Augustine
             :
             With
             what
             care
             take
             we
             heede
             ,
             when
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             administred
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             that
             nothing
             thereof
             fall
             from
             our
             hands
             to
             the
             earth
             .
          
           
             All
             which
             ,
             with
             theyr
             semblable
             Sentences
             ,
             are
             figuratiue
             :
             
             and
             there
             is
             no
             doubt
             ,
             but
             to
             well
             and
             fitly
             interpret
             them
             ,
             they
             that
             read
             them
             ought
             to
             bee
             taught
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             the
             name
             of
             the
             thing
             signified
             ,
             is
             applyed
             to
             the
             signes
             which
             doo
             signifie
             the
             same
             :
             which
             thing
             may
             easily
             bee
             gathered
             out
             of
             other
             sentences
             ,
             and
             passages
             of
             the
             said
             Auncients
             :
             where
             speaking
             properly
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             distributed
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             they
             call
             them
             signes
             
             and
             figures
             .
             As
             Tertullian
             :
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             tooke
             bread
             ,
             gaue
             it
             to
             his
             Disciples
             ▪
             and
             made
             his
             body
             :
             when
             hee
             saith
             :
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
            
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             figure
             of
             my
             body
             .
             And
             Ciprian
             :
             by
             the
             wine
             ,
             is
             shewed
             the
             bloud
             of
             Christ
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             Sermon
             which
             hee
             made
             of
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Lord
             :
             
               As
               often
               as
               we
               do
               this
               ,
               wee
               whet
               not
               the
               teeth
               to
               byte
               ,
               but
               wee
               breake
               and
               distribute
               the
               holy
               bread
               in
               true
               faith
               :
            
             By
             the
             which
             wee
             distinguish
             the
             diuine
             and
             humane
             matter
             .
             Also
             in
             the
             Sermon
             hee
             made
             
               de
               Chrismate
            
             ;
             The
             Lord
             hath
             giuen
             with
             his
             owne
             hands
             bread
             and
             wine
             vpon
             the
             table
             ,
             on
             which
             hee
             made
             his
             last
             meale
             with
             his
             Disciples
             :
             but
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             hee
             gaue
             vnto
             the
             souldiers
             ,
             his
             body
             to
             be
             wounded
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             hee
             might
             so
             much
             the
             more
             deepely
             imprint
             the
             truth
             in
             his
             Disciples
             :
             and
             that
             they
             should
             expound
             to
             the
             people
             ,
             how
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             were
             his
             body
             and
             bloud
             :
             and
             how
             the
             Sacrament
             agreeeth
             with
             the
             thing
             ,
             for
             the
             which
             it
             was
             instituted
             .
             And
             also
             how
             a
             Sacrament
             is
             made
             of
             two
             things
             ,
             and
             therefore
             is
             named
             with
             two
             names
             ,
             and
             one
             selfe-same
             name
             is
             giuen
             to
             that
             which
             signifieth
             ,
             and
             to
             that
             which
             is
             signified
             .
             
             And
             Saint
             Basile
             :
             Wee
             propose
             the
             figures
             and
             patternes
             of
             the
             sacred
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             And
             Saint
             Augustine
             :
             The
             Lord
             feared
             not
             to
             say
             :
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
            
             :
             when
             hee
             gaue
             the
             signe
             of
             his
             body
             .
             Also
             the
             Lord
             receiued
             Iudas
             to
             his
             Supper
             ,
             wherein
             hee
             commended
             and
             gaue
             to
             his
             Disciples
             the
             figure
             of
             his
             bodie
             .
             And
             
             Saint
             Ierome
             :
             After
             hee
             had
             eaten
             the
             Pascall
             Lambe
             with
             his
             Disciples
             ,
             he
             tooke
             bread
             ,
             which
             strengtheneth
             the
             heart
             of
             man
             ,
             and
             passed
             to
             the
             true
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Passeouer
             .
          
           
           
             To
             the
             ende
             that
             as
             Melchisedecke
             had
             done
             before
             in
             his
             figure
             ,
             he
             should
             also
             represent
             there
             his
             true
             body
             .
             S.
             Ambrose
             :
             
             This
             Sacrament
             is
             a
             figure
             of
             the
             true
             body
             and
             bloud
             of
             our
             Lord
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             Chrisostome
             :
             He
             hath
             prepared
             this
             table
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             he
             might
             shewe
             vs
             daily
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             in
             mysterie
             and
             similitude
             of
             the
             bodie
             and
             bloud
             of
             Christ
             .
             And
             sometimes
             it
             happeneth
             ,
             that
             one
             Doctor
             in
             this
             matter
             expoundeth
             an
             other
             .
             As
             one
             may
             perceiue
             it
             in
             the
             conference
             of
             two
             passages
             :
             the
             one
             of
             S.
             Augustine
             alreadie
             alledged
             :
             and
             the
             other
             of
             Tertullian
             ,
             in
             the
             booke
             
               De
               Corona
               militis
            
             :
             where
             hee
             saith
             :
             Wee
             very
             hardly
             suffer
             any
             thing
             of
             our
             bread
             and
             wine
             to
             fall
             vpon
             the
             ground
             .
             And
             in
             stead
             of
             that
             which
             S.
             Augustine
             saith
             to
             the
             same
             purpose
             ,
             he
             saith
             :
             (
             as
             hath
             before
             bene
             recyted
             )
             we
             carefully
             regard
             ,
             that
             nothing
             of
             the
             body
             of
             our
             Lord
             ,
             fall
             vpon
             the
             ground
             .
          
           
             Now
             as
             in
             diuers
             passages
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             (
             as
             hath
             bin
             declared
             )
             haue
             vsed
             the
             two
             foresaid
             maners
             ,
             speaking
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             now
             by
             figure
             ,
             now
             simply
             and
             properly
             :
             so
             it
             is
             sometimes
             found
             ,
             that
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             these
             two
             manners
             of
             speaking
             haue
             beene
             vsurped
             in
             their
             writings
             .
             As
             in
             a
             Canon
             of
             the
             Councell
             of
             Niece
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             :
             
               It
               was
               thus
               concluded
               of
               the
               table
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               mysterie
               which
               is
               therevpon
               :
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               of
               the
               worthy
               body
               and
               bloud
               of
               Iesus
               Christ.
            
             At
             the
             table
             of
             the
             Lord
             ,
             we
             ought
             not
             to
             abide
             
               tyed
               here
               below
               to
               the
               bread
               and
               wine
               ,
               which
               bee
               there
               proposed
               :
               but
               to
               lift
               vp
               our
               hearts
               on
               high
               by
               faith
               ,
               and
               meditate
               ,
               that
               on
               this
               holy
               table
               ,
               is
               proposed
               vnto
               vs
               ,
               the
               Lambe
               of
               God
               ,
               which
               taketh
               vpon
               him
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               world
               ;
               which
               is
               sacrificed
               of
               the
               Priests
               ,
               and
               not
               slaine
               .
               And
               in
               communicating
               truly
               with
               his
               precious
               body
               and
               bloud
               ,
               we
               ought
               to
               beleeue
               that
               these
               things
               be
               signes
               of
               our
               resurrection
               .
            
             Whence
             we
             may
             see
             ,
             how
             the
             Fathers
             in
             one
             selfe-same
             place
             ,
             haue
             spoken
             properly
             ,
             calling
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             the
             signes
             and
             Elements
             ,
             which
             be
             presented
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             and
             also
             by
             figure
             ,
             naming
             the
             same
             signes
             ,
             the
             Lambe
             of
             God
             ,
             which
             taketh
             vppon
             him
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
           
             By
             that
             which
             is
             said
             ,
             touching
             the
             said
             two
             manners
             of
             speaking
             ,
             they
             which
             read
             the
             scripture
             ,
             and
             auncient
             Authors
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             admonished
             ,
             carefully
             to
             regard
             ,
             that
             for
             default
             of
             well
             distinguishing
             the
             places
             ,
             where
             the
             said
             speeches
             are
             vsurped
             ,
             they
             do
             not
             confound
             them
             :
             taking
             that
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             by
             figure
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             spoken
             properly
             :
             and
             that
             which
             is
             said
             properly
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             vnderstood
             by
             figure
             .
             And
             it
             behoueth
             them
             alwayes
             to
             remember
             in
             the
             reading
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             auncient
             Fathers
             ,
             what
             S.
             Augustine
             hath
             written
             in
             his
             booke
             
               De
               doctrina
               Christiana
            
             .
             We
             must
             beware
             (
             saith
             hee
             )
             that
             we
             take
             not
             a
             figuratiue
             speech
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             letter
             :
             For
             herevnto
             must
             that
             bee
             referred
             which
             the
             Apostle
             saieth
             :
             
               The
               letter
               killeth
               :
               and
               the
               spirit
               giueth
               life
               .
            
             So
             that
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             which
             is
             spoken
             by
             figure
             ,
             as
             if
             it
             were
             spoken
             properly
             ,
             is
             fleshly
             wisedome
             .
             And
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Chapter
             he
             hath
             one
             memorable
             sentence
             :
             namely
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             miserable
             bondage
             of
             the
             soule
             ,
             to
             take
             the
             signes
             ,
             for
             the
             things
             signified
             :
             and
             not
             to
             be
             able
             to
             lift
             vp
             the
             eye
             of
             the
             spirit
             aboue
             the
             corporall
             creature
             ,
             to
             draw
             eternall
             life
             .
          
           
             To
             come
             to
             the
             third
             part
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             spirituall
             and
             heauenly
             thing
             ,
             represented
             &
             proposed
             there
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             Elements
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             whole
             action
             :
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             Iesus
             Christ
             crucified
             ,
             and
             offered
             on
             the
             Crosse
             to
             God
             his
             Father
             ,
             for
             the
             whole
             and
             perfect
             expiation
             ,
             and
             satisfaction
             of
             all
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             world
             .
             And
             that
             to
             make
             vs
             enioy
             the
             fruite
             of
             this
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             to
             apply
             vnto
             our selues
             the
             righteousnesse
             ,
             forgiuenesse
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             life
             ,
             the
             grace
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             all
             other
             fauours
             and
             blessings
             ,
             which
             by
             the
             same
             sacrifice
             ,
             haue
             bene
             purchased
             and
             obtained
             for
             vs
             :
             the
             word
             and
             Sacraments
             haue
             bene
             left
             and
             ordained
             for
             vs
             ,
             chiefly
             that
             of
             the
             Supper
             :
             wherein
             ,
             as
             in
             a
             picture
             ,
             we
             behold
             Iesus
             Christ
             suffering
             for
             vs
             ,
             the
             paines
             and
             sorrowes
             of
             death
             ,
             paying
             our
             debts
             ,
             cancelling
             and
             adnulling
             the
             hand-writing
             which
             was
             contrarie
             to
             vs
             :
             bearing
             vpon
             him
             our
             malediction
             ,
             to
             free
             vs
             from
             the
             same
             :
             and
             by
             his
             obedience
             reconciling
             vs
             to
             God
             his
             Father
             ,
             and
             appeasing
             
             his
             wrath
             towards
             vs.
             All
             which
             things
             are
             represented
             and
             assured
             vnto
             vs
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             when
             with
             a
             true
             faith
             we
             present
             our selues
             there
             ,
             to
             celebrate
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             Supper
             then
             was
             not
             ordained
             to
             be
             a
             propitiatorie
             sacrifice
             (
             as
             the
             Doctors
             do
             teach
             ,
             and
             as
             they
             falsly
             beleeue
             in
             the
             Romane
             Church
             )
             but
             to
             be
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             to
             the
             ende
             to
             renue
             and
             alwayes
             conserue
             the
             memorie
             which
             wee
             ought
             constantly
             to
             retaine
             of
             the
             death
             and
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christe
             .
             Now
             ,
             betweene
             a
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             there
             is
             great
             difference
             .
             For
             as
             much
             as
             in
             a
             sacrifice
             ,
             we
             present
             our
             oblations
             vnto
             God
             :
             and
             in
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             God
             contrariwise
             offereth
             and
             communicateth
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             his
             graces
             and
             gifts
             .
             Also
             in
             a
             sacrifice
             for
             sinne
             ,
             there
             is
             the
             death
             and
             effusion
             of
             the
             bloud
             of
             the
             Host
             and
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             not
             in
             a
             Sacrament
             :
             but
             the
             onely
             perception
             and
             applycation
             of
             the
             fruite
             and
             effects
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             .
             In
             the
             Supper
             then
             ,
             Iesus
             Christe
             is
             not
             againe
             sacrificed
             :
             but
             the
             fruites
             of
             his
             obedience
             ,
             and
             merite
             of
             his
             sacrifice
             are
             there
             distributed
             and
             receiued
             by
             the
             faithfull
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             reasons
             aforesaid
             ,
             do
             the
             Ministers
             conclude
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             blasphemy
             and
             sacriledge
             ,
             to
             call
             the
             bread
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             of
             a
             Romish
             Priest
             ,
             a
             wholsome
             host
             .
             And
             if
             for
             proofe
             therof
             ,
             they
             wold
             alledge
             the
             Fathers
             ,
             in
             whose
             writings
             is
             found
             ,
             that
             they
             call
             sometimes
             the
             Supper
             an
             oblation
             and
             sacrifice
             :
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             first
             it
             nought
             appertaineth
             to
             the
             Masse
             of
             the
             Priests
             :
             between
             which
             &
             the
             Supper
             ,
             there
             is
             no
             agreement
             .
             And
             afterwards
             ,
             that
             what
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             said
             ,
             they
             neuer
             vnderstood
             it
             of
             the
             propitiatory
             sacrifice
             :
             by
             which
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             is
             gotten
             and
             obtained
             .
             And
             they
             haue
             neuer
             beleeued
             nor
             thought
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             any
             other
             sacrifice
             to
             appease
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             obtaine
             reconciliation
             and
             agreement
             betweene
             him
             and
             men
             ,
             then
             the
             onely
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             made
             by
             him
             alone
             ,
             one
             onely
             time
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             .
             Three
             things
             then
             in
             briefe
             ,
             doo
             the
             Ministers
             say
             :
             first
             ,
             that
             there
             neither
             is
             ,
             nor
             can
             be
             other
             sacrificer
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             ,
             then
             Christ
             Iesus
             .
          
           
           
             The
             reasons
             are
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             none
             but
             he
             ,
             of
             whom
             it
             hath
             bene
             said
             :
             
               Thou
               art
               a
               Priest
               for
               euer
               ,
               after
               the
               order
               of
               Melchisedeck
               .
            
             Also
             there
             is
             none
             but
             he
             ,
             to
             whom
             may
             agree
             ,
             and
             be
             fitly
             applyed
             the
             conditions
             and
             essentiall
             qualities
             of
             a
             sacrificer
             ,
             and
             the
             sacrifice
             :
             Which
             are
             ,
             that
             the
             Priest
             be
             holy
             ,
             innocent
             ,
             without
             spot
             ,
             seperated
             from
             sinners
             ,
             and
             made
             higher
             then
             the
             heauens
             :
             which
             needed
             not
             to
             offer
             daily
             sacrifices
             ,
             first
             for
             his
             owne
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             then
             for
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             people
             .
             Also
             there
             is
             none
             but
             he
             ,
             which
             is
             ,
             nor
             could
             bee
             Mediator
             betweene
             God
             and
             men
             :
             which
             could
             satisfie
             the
             diuine
             iustice
             :
             which
             is
             capable
             to
             beare
             and
             sustaine
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             :
             which
             could
             tame
             and
             conquer
             death
             :
             which
             by
             his
             death
             ,
             and
             proper
             bloud
             ,
             could
             worke
             the
             confirmation
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             :
             and
             which
             (
             to
             bee
             briefe
             )
             could
             in
             fauour
             and
             contemplation
             of
             his
             merits
             and
             dignitie
             ,
             obtaine
             of
             God
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             graces
             needfull
             for
             them
             which
             trust
             in
             him
             ,
             and
             instantly
             desire
             him
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             the
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             other
             sacrifice
             for
             sinne
             ,
             but
             that
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             That
             he
             is
             the
             onely
             Lambe
             which
             beareth
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             world
             :
             that
             there
             is
             nothing
             but
             his
             bloud
             ,
             whereby
             our
             filthinesse
             is
             washed
             :
             To
             bee
             short
             ,
             that
             God
             taketh
             pleasure
             in
             no
             other
             sacrifice
             nor
             oblation
             :
             and
             that
             hee
             requireth
             no
             other
             burnt
             sacrifice
             nor
             offering
             for
             sinne
             .
             And
             that
             therefore
             Iesus
             Christe
             (
             as
             it
             is
             written
             of
             him
             in
             the
             rolle
             of
             the
             lawe
             )
             is
             come
             ,
             to
             doo
             and
             accomplish
             the
             will
             of
             God
             his
             Father
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             they
             say
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             one
             onely
             ,
             and
             once
             offered
             by
             himselfe
             :
             without
             that
             it
             was
             euer
             needfull
             afterwardes
             to
             repeate
             and
             reiterate
             the
             same
             ,
             considering
             the
             perfection
             and
             vertue
             thereof
             ,
             by
             which
             sinne
             is
             abolished
             ,
             and
             absolute
             and
             eternall
             sanctification
             obtained
             to
             all
             the
             elect
             :
             as
             it
             appeareth
             in
             the
             9.
             and
             10.
             of
             the
             Hebrewes
             .
             By
             meanes
             whereof
             ,
             no
             lesse
             blasphemy
             it
             is
             ,
             nor
             a
             thing
             lesse
             contrarie
             to
             the
             doctrine
             and
             meaning
             of
             the
             Apostle
             ,
             to
             approue
             the
             repetition
             and
             reiteration
             
             of
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             then
             the
             pluralitie
             of
             sacrifices
             for
             sinne
             .
             And
             if
             the
             Doctors
             would
             (
             as
             they
             wontedly
             haue
             )
             to
             disguise
             and
             colour
             such
             an
             abuse
             ,
             shewe
             forth
             their
             distinction
             betweene
             the
             propitiatory
             and
             applicatory
             sacrifice
             ,
             saying
             ▪
             that
             the
             Priests
             pretend
             not
             in
             their
             Masses
             to
             sacrifice
             Iesus
             Christ
             for
             other
             end
             ,
             then
             to
             apply
             the
             merite
             of
             his
             death
             to
             those
             ,
             for
             whom
             they
             celebrate
             the
             same
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             in
             so
             dooing
             ,
             they
             should
             attribute
             vnto
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             more
             then
             they
             do
             :
             because
             all
             the
             fruite
             of
             his
             sacrifice
             commeth
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             by
             the
             application
             thereof
             .
             As
             healing
             commeth
             not
             so
             much
             by
             the
             confection
             and
             preparation
             of
             the
             medicine
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             application
             of
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             Furthermore
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             would
             willingly
             demaund
             of
             our
             Maisters
             ,
             by
             what
             meane
             the
             benefite
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             was
             applied
             to
             the
             Fathers
             before
             his
             comming
             ,
             seeing
             that
             as
             then
             they
             did
             sing
             no
             Masses
             ?
             Well
             seeth
             euerie
             man
             of
             any
             spirite
             or
             iudgement
             ,
             that
             such
             distinctions
             are
             friuolous
             ,
             and
             onely
             inuented
             to
             obscure
             the
             truth
             ,
             and
             dazell
             the
             eyes
             of
             the
             simple
             and
             ignorant
             .
             For
             Iesus
             Christ
             who
             hath
             offered
             the
             sacrifice
             ,
             is
             hee
             himselfe
             ,
             which
             applyeth
             the
             same
             vnto
             vs
             ,
             by
             his
             spirite
             ,
             his
             word
             ,
             and
             his
             Sacraments
             .
          
           
             To
             returne
             then
             to
             their
             former
             speech
             ,
             and
             declare
             why
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             called
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             action
             thereof
             a
             sacrifice
             .
             It
             behoueth
             to
             note
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             many
             sorts
             of
             sacrifices
             in
             the
             Supper
             :
             As
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             a
             contrite
             
             heart
             ,
             offered
             by
             publike
             confession
             of
             sinnes
             which
             there
             is
             made
             .
             After
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             our
             body
             ,
             there
             offered
             
             by
             publike
             prayer
             ,
             which
             followeth
             the
             said
             confession
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             the
             sacrifice
             of
             praise
             there
             offered
             ,
             when
             they
             sing
             Psalmes
             after
             the
             confession
             and
             prayer
             .
             After
             commeth
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             (
             which
             is
             called
             a
             sacrifice
             ,
             Rom.
             15.
             )
             :
             then
             the
             confession
             and
             prayers
             ended
             ,
             the
             Minister
             presenteth
             himselfe
             to
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             preach
             vnto
             them
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             The
             Almes
             (
             which
             
             is
             an
             other
             kinde
             of
             sacrifice
             )
             was
             heretofore
             brought
             
             forth
             in
             the
             Supper
             by
             the
             faithfull
             :
             which
             would
             therby
             testifie
             ,
             not
             only
             their
             remembrance
             of
             the
             graces
             &
             benefites
             of
             God
             :
             but
             also
             their
             loue
             &
             desire
             they
             had
             to
             relieue
             the
             necessities
             of
             their
             poore
             neighbors
             .
             Besides
             all
             these
             Sacrifices
             ,
             there
             are
             yet
             in
             the
             Supper
             two
             particular
             sacrifices
             ,
             wherof
             mention
             is
             made
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Fathers
             .
             The
             bread
             and
             the
             wine
             which
             were
             chosen
             and
             taken
             of
             the
             Almes
             ,
             brought
             thither
             for
             the
             poore
             ,
             and
             were
             consecrated
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             deputed
             and
             appointed
             to
             the
             holy
             and
             sacred
             vse
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
             The
             other
             is
             the
             memorie
             of
             the
             death
             and
             sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             celebrated
             and
             repeated
             in
             all
             the
             action
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
             The
             which
             ,
             for
             this
             reason
             is
             called
             a
             
             Sacrifice
             by
             
               S.
               Iohn
               Chrisostome
            
             ,
             vpon
             the
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             when
             he
             saith
             :
             
               We
               make
               not
               euery
               day
               other
               Sacrifice
               ,
               then
               that
               of
               Iesus
               Christ.
            
             But
             rather
             (
             saith
             he
             correcting
             himselfe
             )
             we
             make
             the
             memorie
             of
             that
             Sacrifice
             .
             
               S.
               Ambrose
            
             calleth
             it
             the
             memorie
             of
             our
             redemption
             :
             To
             the
             end
             ,
             that
             we
             remembring
             our
             Redeemer
             ,
             may
             obtaine
             of
             him
             increase
             of
             his
             graces
             in
             vs.
             
               S.
               Augustine
            
             yet
             proposeth
             it
             more
             clearly
             ,
             vnder
             a
             comparison
             which
             he
             bringeth
             of
             the
             dayes
             of
             the
             passion
             ,
             and
             resurrection
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             which
             he
             thus
             
             applieth
             :
             when
             the
             Feast
             of
             Easter
             approacheth
             ,
             we
             vse
             oft
             times
             this
             maner
             of
             speech
             :
             To
             morrow
             ,
             or
             within
             two
             daies
             ,
             we
             haue
             the
             passion
             or
             resurrection
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             .
             That
             cannot
             properly
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             day
             wherein
             Iesus
             Christ
             suffered
             death
             (
             which
             is
             long
             since
             passed
             )
             :
             but
             onely
             of
             the
             memorie
             of
             his
             death
             ,
             which
             is
             solempnized
             and
             celebrated
             ,
             as
             this
             day
             ,
             euery
             yeare
             .
             A
             little
             after
             ,
             to
             appropriate
             his
             comparison
             ,
             he
             addeth
             :
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             hath
             not
             he
             bene
             one
             only
             time
             offered
             in
             himselfe
             ?
             And
             neuerthelesse
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             not
             only
             on
             Easter
             day
             ,
             but
             euery
             day
             also
             ,
             is
             hee
             offered
             to
             the
             people
             .
             Also
             elsewhere
             :
             
             The
             flesh
             and
             blood
             of
             this
             Sacrifice
             ,
             were
             before
             the
             comming
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             promised
             by
             the
             figures
             of
             Sacrifices
             .
             In
             the
             passion
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             they
             were
             giuen
             and
             offered
             in
             trueth
             :
             And
             after
             the
             Ascention
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             into
             Heauen
             ,
             they
             are
             celebrated
             by
             
             the
             Sacrament
             of
             remembrance
             .
             Of
             these
             and
             many
             other
             like
             passages
             ,
             one
             may
             deduct
             ,
             that
             the
             Fathers
             haue
             often
             called
             the
             Supper
             a
             Sacrifice
             :
             by
             reason
             that
             in
             the
             same
             ,
             the
             memory
             of
             the
             Sacrifice
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             is
             renued
             and
             celebrated
             .
          
           
             The
             name
             of
             Sacrifice
             ,
             is
             by
             the
             Auncients
             often
             also
             applied
             to
             the
             Almes
             ,
             which
             the
             faithfull
             brought
             forth
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             As
             by
             
               Iustin
               Martyr
            
             in
             the
             second
             Apologie
             :
             by
             S.
             Augustin
             in
             the
             20.
             chap.
             of
             the
             20.
             book
             
               Cotra
               Faust
            
             :
             by
             S.
             Ciprian
             in
             the
             booke
             
               de
               Elimosina
            
             :
             by
             S.
             
               Iohn
               Chrysostome
               ,
               Hom.
            
             46.
             vpon
             S.
             Mathew
             .
             Which
             thing
             may
             also
             be
             verified
             by
             the
             Canō
             of
             the
             Masse
             it selfe
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             said
             :
             We
             offer
             to
             thy
             maiestie
             part
             of
             thy
             gifts
             &
             benefits
             :
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             referred
             to
             the
             Almes
             of
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             which
             the
             Minister
             in
             the
             name
             of
             the
             whole
             Church
             offered
             to
             God.
             They
             haue
             sometimes
             also
             called
             the
             praiers
             there
             made
             ,
             Sacrifices
             .
             As
             S.
             Ciprian
             vpon
             the
             Lords
             Prayer
             .
             And
             Eusebius
             in
             the
             7.
             of
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             History
             .
             Tertullian
             in
             the
             3.
             booke
             against
             Marcion
             :
             where
             ,
             alledging
             that
             written
             in
             Malachy
             ,
             [
             of
             the
             cleane
             offering
             ]
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             made
             vnto
             God
             ,
             from
             the
             rysing
             of
             the
             Sunne
             ,
             to
             the
             going
             downe
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             saith
             :
             that
             ought
             to
             be
             vnderstood
             of
             the
             Hymnes
             and
             praises
             of
             God.
             Which
             
               S.
               Ierome
            
             (
             expounding
             the
             passage
             aforesaid
             )
             doth
             also
             confirme
             .
          
           
             For
             conclusion
             of
             this
             matter
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             say
             :
             that
             all
             the
             passages
             of
             the
             bookes
             of
             the
             Fathers
             :
             wherin
             mention
             is
             made
             of
             Sacrifice
             ,
             in
             the
             speech
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             referred
             to
             one
             of
             these
             kinds
             aforesaid
             .
             And
             that
             it
             shal
             neuer
             be
             found
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             said
             or
             written
             ,
             or
             yet
             euer
             haue
             thought
             ,
             that
             there
             was
             any
             other
             sacrifice
             *
             propiciatory
             ,
             then
             that
             alone
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             his
             owne
             body
             once
             offered
             vpō
             the
             Crosse
             for
             our
             redemptiō
             .
             And
             that
             by
             means
             therof
             ,
             it
             is
             certain
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Christiā
             church
             ,
             he
             ought
             to
             be
             acknowledged
             ,
             the
             priest
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             .
             And
             as
             touching
             the
             other
             sacrifices
             ,
             namely
             :
             of
             a
             Contrite
             heart
             :
             of
             the
             Mortification
             of
             the
             fleshe
             :
             of
             
             Praises
             and
             Almes
             :
             and
             of
             the
             shewing
             forth
             ,
             and
             memorie
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             :
             they
             say
             ,
             that
             it
             generally
             belongeth
             to
             all
             the
             Church
             to
             offer
             them
             :
             And
             that
             there
             is
             no
             faithfull
             ,
             nor
             any
             member
             in
             the
             whole
             bodie
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             in
             this
             respect
             ,
             is
             not
             a
             Priest
             .
             As
             saith
             S.
             Peter
             in
             the
             2.
             
             Chapter
             of
             his
             first
             Epistle
             .
             And
             S.
             Iohn
             in
             the
             first
             Chapter
             of
             the
             Apocalips
             .
             And
             that
             we
             ought
             for
             this
             cause
             ,
             to
             offer
             in
             the
             Supper
             such
             Sacrifices
             vnto
             God
             :
             As
             appeareth
             by
             the
             same
             Cannon
             of
             theyr
             Masse
             ,
             by
             them
             euilly
             vnderstood
             ,
             and
             applied
             to
             the
             Sacrifice
             ,
             which
             they
             pretend
             to
             make
             of
             the
             body
             &
             blood
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ;
             where
             it
             is
             said
             :
             For
             the
             which
             ,
             we
             offer
             vnto
             thee
             :
             or
             who
             offer
             vnto
             thee
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Our
             saying
             of
             the
             Sacrifice
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             common
             to
             all
             the
             Church
             ,
             to
             offer
             vnto
             God
             ,
             Sacrifice
             of
             praise
             :
             ought
             not
             to
             be
             slaunderously
             interpreted
             :
             as
             if
             we
             would
             confound
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             Ministery
             ,
             with
             the
             sayd
             Priesthood
             ;
             and
             by
             that
             meanes
             ,
             ouerthrow
             and
             disturbe
             the
             order
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             attributing
             to
             each
             one
             ,
             authoritie
             and
             power
             to
             gouerne
             the
             same
             .
             For
             we
             know
             well
             ,
             that
             the
             callings
             be
             different
             among
             the
             people
             of
             God
             :
             And
             that
             it
             is
             needfull
             ,
             there
             be
             in
             the
             Church
             ,
             Pastors
             ,
             and
             Doctors
             ,
             and
             other
             Ministers
             (
             as
             Deacons
             and
             Elders
             )
             to
             well
             guide
             and
             edifie
             the
             same
             :
             as
             well
             by
             the
             daily
             preaching
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             as
             by
             the
             carefull
             and
             diligent
             execution
             of
             other
             things
             which
             concerne
             their
             charges
             .
             But
             it
             behooueth
             notwithstanding
             ,
             to
             distinguish
             such
             callings
             which
             be
             particular
             ,
             from
             the
             Priesthood
             aforesaid
             :
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             generall
             ,
             and
             common
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             to
             the
             whole
             Church
             .
          
           
             It
             shall
             now
             be
             easie
             for
             all
             them
             ,
             which
             will
             diligently
             obserue
             the
             things
             here
             before
             discouered
             ,
             and
             shewed
             
             forth
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             and
             iudge
             ,
             that
             the
             Masse
             ,
             such
             as
             is
             now
             celebrated
             in
             the
             Romane
             Church
             ,
             is
             a
             whole
             corruption
             and
             ouerthrowing
             of
             the
             institution
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             made
             ,
             and
             left
             in
             his
             Church
             .
             So
             that
             it
             should
             be
             now
             impossible
             to
             
             acknowledge
             therein
             ,
             one
             onely
             trace
             or
             marke
             of
             it
             first
             ordinance
             .
             For
             of
             a
             Sacrament
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             left
             in
             his
             
             Church
             ,
             to
             edifie
             and
             entertaine
             the
             same
             in
             a
             present
             memorie
             of
             his
             death
             ,
             haue
             they
             made
             a
             sacrifice
             ;
             whereby
             the
             remembrance
             of
             that
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             hath
             bin
             wholly
             buried
             and
             interred
             .
             And
             herein
             is
             there
             a
             maruellous
             thing
             ,
             and
             worthy
             to
             be
             well
             marked
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             appertaineth
             not
             but
             to
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             
             onely
             ,
             and
             was
             impossible
             for
             any
             other
             but
             him
             to
             do
             :
             as
             to
             sacrifice
             for
             sin
             ,
             to
             reconcile
             men
             vnto
             God
             ,
             to
             appease
             his
             wrath
             towards
             them
             ,
             and
             to
             make
             intercession
             ,
             to
             obtaine
             for
             them
             his
             fauour
             and
             aide
             ;
             the
             Priests
             do
             attribute
             to
             themselues
             .
             And
             that
             which
             to
             them
             was
             lawfull
             ,
             and
             commaunded
             ,
             and
             also
             possible
             and
             easie
             to
             do
             :
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             to
             solemnize
             the
             memorie
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             &
             in
             taking
             and
             breaking
             ,
             distributing
             and
             eating
             of
             the
             bread
             ,
             and
             drinking
             the
             wine
             ,
             to
             shewe
             forth
             his
             death
             :
             they
             haue
             wholly
             cast
             aside
             .
             So
             that
             one
             may
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Priests
             do
             
             nothing
             of
             all
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             did
             ,
             and
             commaunded
             to
             be
             done
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             And
             that
             which
             he
             did
             vpon
             the
             Crosse
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             neuer
             commaunded
             man
             to
             do
             ,
             the
             Priests
             dare
             enterprise
             ,
             and
             will
             do
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             The
             errors
             and
             abuse
             ,
             as
             well
             of
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             as
             of
             the
             Priesthood
             ,
             and
             expiatorie
             sacrifice
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             repetition
             ,
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             which
             be
             the
             principall
             parts
             ,
             and
             as
             it
             were
             the
             foundations
             of
             the
             Masse
             ,
             haue
             bene
             heretofore
             confuted
             ,
             and
             sufficiently
             conuinced
             by
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             and
             by
             the
             reasons
             which
             haue
             bene
             alledged
             in
             the
             declaration
             of
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Supper
             .
             And
             nothing
             more
             remaineth
             to
             cast
             downe
             this
             Idoll
             ,
             but
             to
             shewe
             ,
             that
             that
             which
             is
             in
             the
             Masse
             ,
             (
             besides
             the
             abuses
             aforesaid
             )
             is
             not
             better
             ,
             nor
             better
             founded
             vpon
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             For
             the
             adoration
             which
             there
             is
             made
             of
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             ,
             is
             an
             Idolatrie
             ,
             condemned
             and
             accursed
             of
             God.
             And
             it
             is
             not
             like
             ,
             that
             Iesus
             Christ
             (
             instituting
             the
             Supper
             )
             would
             not
             haue
             ordained
             it
             ,
             that
             S.
             Paul
             (
             recyting
             this
             institution
             ,
             as
             he
             had
             receiued
             it
             of
             the
             Lord
             )
             would
             not
             haue
             taught
             it
             :
             
             and
             that
             the
             auncient
             Church
             would
             haue
             omitted
             the
             same
             ,
             had
             it
             bene
             a
             thing
             wherein
             God
             had
             bene
             any
             way
             honoured
             .
          
           
             Afterward
             ,
             the
             seperation
             of
             the
             Priest
             from
             the
             people
             ,
             is
             directly
             contrary
             to
             the
             Article
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             of
             the
             Communion
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             and
             to
             the
             ende
             ,
             for
             which
             the
             Supper
             was
             ordained
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             confirme
             and
             entertaine
             due
             societie
             among
             the
             faithfull
             ,
             and
             to
             binde
             them
             alwayes
             more
             straightly
             one
             to
             an
             other
             .
             And
             none
             can
             say
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             is
             an
             intollerable
             presumption
             ,
             and
             a
             manifest
             contempt
             and
             disdaine
             of
             the
             residue
             of
             Gods
             people
             .
             And
             a
             plaine
             mockery
             is
             that
             which
             the
             Doctos
             alledge
             to
             excuse
             and
             couer
             such
             a
             sacriledge
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             Masse
             of
             the
             Priests
             ceaseth
             not
             to
             bee
             good
             ,
             when
             those
             that
             are
             there
             present
             will
             not
             comunicate
             .
             For
             first
             it
             is
             forbidden
             them
             to
             eate
             alone
             in
             the
             Supper
             .
             And
             a
             Supper
             it
             is
             not
             ,
             where
             there
             is
             not
             a
             Communion
             :
             as
             Saint
             Paul
             teacheth
             ,
             reproouing
             the
             Corinthians
             ,
             because
             they
             departed
             one
             from
             an
             other
             in
             
             the
             celebration
             of
             their
             Supper
             .
             When
             (
             sayth
             he
             )
             
               yee
               come
               together
               therefore
               into
               one
               place
               ,
               this
               is
               not
               to
               eate
               the
               Supper
               of
               the
               Lord
               :
               For
               euery
               man
               ,
               when
               they
               should
               eate
               ,
               taketh
               his
               owne
               supper
               afore
               .
            
             And
             teaching
             in
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             Chapter
             ,
             the
             forme
             which
             they
             ought
             to
             hold
             ,
             hee
             sayth
             vnto
             them
             :
             
               Wherefore
               my
               bretheren
               ,
               when
               yee
               come
               together
               to
               eate
               ,
               tarry
               one
               for
               another
               .
            
             Furthermore
             ,
             oft
             times
             it
             happeneth
             ,
             that
             there
             are
             not
             in
             their
             Masse
             ,
             but
             the
             Priest
             and
             the
             little
             Clarke
             ,
             which
             answereth
             him
             :
             whom
             they
             will
             not
             receiue
             to
             communicate
             with
             them
             .
             Also
             ,
             how
             can
             they
             excuse
             the
             Masses
             which
             are
             sung
             in
             Monasteries
             :
             where
             the
             people
             are
             forbidden
             to
             communicate
             with
             the
             Monkes
             ,
             which
             celebrate
             the
             same
             ▪
             Moreouer
             ,
             it
             is
             ordinarily
             seene
             in
             great
             Parishes
             of
             this
             Cittie
             of
             Paris
             ,
             and
             else-where
             ,
             euen
             vppon
             the
             dayes
             that
             the
             people
             Communicate
             ;
             that
             they
             are
             seperated
             from
             the
             Priests
             ,
             who
             do
             their
             businesse
             apart
             ,
             and
             wil
             not
             vouchsafe
             to
             feed
             &
             communicate
             with
             them
             
             vpon
             one
             table
             .
             Also
             ,
             what
             communion
             is
             there
             betweene
             the
             Priests
             and
             the
             people
             ,
             seeing
             that
             in
             stead
             of
             breaking
             in
             the
             assembly
             ,
             one
             selfe-same
             bread
             ,
             (
             to
             the
             end
             that
             all
             the
             partakers
             thereof
             ,
             should
             bee
             by
             that
             meane
             conioyned
             and
             more
             straightly
             closed
             in
             one
             body
             )
             each
             one
             hath
             his
             owne
             particular
             :
             the
             Priest
             ,
             one
             more
             great
             ,
             and
             the
             people
             ,
             one
             lesse
             ?
             Seeing
             also
             that
             the
             Cup
             is
             not
             any
             way
             distributed
             to
             them
             ?
             Furthermore
             ,
             what
             dutie
             do
             the
             Priests
             ,
             to
             inuite
             and
             exhort
             the
             people
             ,
             to
             communicate
             with
             them
             ?
             yea
             the
             Bishops
             themselues
             ?
             who
             would
             at
             this
             day
             repute
             it
             great
             shame
             to
             communicate
             with
             crafts-men
             ,
             and
             other
             inferior
             people
             .
          
           
             
               To
               conclude
               ,
               had
               the
               Doctors
               well
               noted
               the
               custome
               of
               the
               Fathers
               ,
               which
               caused
               the
            
             Cathecumenians
             ,
             &
             
               others
               there
               (
               not
               prepared
               to
               communicate
               )
               to
               depart
               the
               place
               where
               the
               Communion
               was
               celebrated
               :
               and
               that
               likewise
               which
               S.
            
             Iohn
             Chrisostome
             
               saith
               thereof
               :
               they
               would
               shame
               to
               defend
               such
               an
               abuse
               &
               impietie
               ,
               as
               is
               that
               of
               their
               Masse
               .
               And
               that
               the
               people
               may
               not
               bee
               ignorant
               of
               that
               ,
               which
               these
            
             
             
               holy
               Doctors
               therof
               saith
               ,
               we
               will
               translate
               the
               same
               ,
               word
               for
               word
               .
            
             It
             is
             in
             vaine
             that
             the
             daily
             sacrifice
             is
             made
             :
             It
             is
             in
             vaine
             that
             we
             abide
             at
             the
             Aultar
             ;
             there
             is
             no
             person
             which
             there
             communicateth
             .
             I
             say
             not
             this
             to
             the
             end
             that
             yee
             communicate
             in
             any
             sort
             soeuer
             ;
             but
             that
             ye
             yeeld
             your selues
             worthy
             thereof
             :
             Art
             thou
             not
             worthy
             to
             communicate
             ?
             so
             art
             thou
             not
             worthy
             to
             pray
             .
             
               Also
               a
               litle
               after
            
             :
             If
             some
             one
             were
             called
             to
             a
             banquet
             ,
             should
             wash
             his
             hands
             ,
             and
             sitting
             at
             the
             table
             ,
             should
             not
             eate
             ,
             nor
             taste
             ought
             of
             the
             meates
             which
             should
             there
             be
             serued
             :
             should
             he
             not
             dishonour
             and
             wrong
             him
             that
             inuited
             him
             ?
             had
             it
             not
             bin
             better
             he
             had
             not
             come
             there
             ?
             Euen
             so
             it
             is
             with
             thee
             .
             Thou
             art
             come
             ,
             thou
             hast
             sung
             the
             Psalme
             with
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             people
             :
             thou
             hast
             confessed
             that
             thou
             wast
             of
             the
             number
             of
             the
             worthy
             ,
             in
             not
             departing
             with
             them
             which
             are
             vnworthy
             .
             How
             then
             abidest
             thou
             ,
             and
             doost
             not
             perticipate
             of
             the
             table
             of
             the
             Lord
             ?
             Thou
             sayest
             I
             am
             vnworthy
             .
             I
             answere
             thee
             ,
             that
             thou
             art
             so
             :
             whereby
             also
             vnworthy
             of
             the
             Communion
             of
             prayers
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             the
             gobbets
             and
             offalls
             of
             Gospels
             and
             Epistles
             ,
             
             the
             Symbole
             ,
             praier
             ,
             &
             other
             peeces
             of
             the
             scripture
             ,
             brought
             all
             confused
             ,
             and
             not
             hanging
             together
             ,
             said
             and
             proposed
             to
             the
             people
             in
             an
             vnknowne
             language
             (
             against
             the
             expresse
             commaundement
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             without
             any
             edification
             of
             the
             congregation
             )
             is
             no
             other
             thing
             ,
             then
             a
             vaine
             vsurpation
             of
             the
             name
             of
             God
             ,
             against
             the
             expresse
             prohibition
             which
             he
             hath
             made
             thereof
             .
             And
             such
             robes
             are
             too
             straight
             and
             short
             ,
             to
             couer
             the
             shame
             and
             filthinesse
             of
             the
             Masse
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             what
             an
             execrable
             abuse
             is
             it
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             Masse
             serueth
             to
             obtaine
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ;
             not
             onely
             for
             the
             quicke
             ,
             but
             also
             for
             the
             dead
             ?
             And
             that
             the
             Priests
             (
             passing
             yet
             further
             ,
             not
             to
             forget
             ,
             or
             leaue
             any
             blasphemy
             behind
             )
             do
             diuide
             their
             hoste
             into
             three
             parts
             :
             faigning
             one
             part
             to
             be
             for
             them
             in
             heauen
             :
             an
             other
             for
             them
             which
             are
             on
             earth
             :
             and
             the
             third
             for
             them
             in
             Purgatorie
             .
             For
             the
             Sacrament
             which
             is
             not
             ordained
             but
             for
             confirmation
             of
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             word
             :
             extendeth
             not
             further
             then
             the
             Ministerie
             ,
             nor
             the
             Ministerie
             further
             then
             this
             life
             .
             As
             then
             it
             is
             so
             ,
             that
             they
             which
             are
             in
             heauen
             ,
             and
             they
             likewise
             whom
             they
             faine
             to
             be
             in
             Purgatorie
             ,
             are
             dead
             and
             departed
             from
             
             this
             world
             :
             we
             must
             necessarily
             conclude
             ,
             that
             as
             the
             word
             cannot
             be
             preached
             to
             them
             ,
             so
             also
             the
             Sacraments
             cannot
             be
             administred
             to
             them
             .
             And
             if
             they
             be
             not
             administred
             to
             them
             ,
             that
             they
             can
             profit
             them
             nothing
             .
          
           
             The
             end
             of
             the
             Resolution
             .
          
        
         
           
             Answeres
             to
             the
             last
             obiections
             proposed
             by
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             touching
             the
             Supper
             .
          
           
             THe
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             many
             things
             there
             are
             in
             the
             said
             obiections
             ,
             impertinent
             to
             the
             matter
             in
             question
             :
             as
             that
             they
             demaund
             ,
             how
             long
             the
             doctrine
             abode
             in
             it
             puritie
             ,
             touching
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             the
             other
             articles
             of
             Religion
             .
             Wherevnto
             they
             answere
             ,
             that
             from
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Apostles
             themsemselues
             ,
             there
             were
             heretikes
             and
             Antichrists
             :
             as
             
               Ebion
               ,
               Cerinthus
               ,
               Simon
               Magus
               ,
            
             the
             Samaritanes
             ,
             
             and
             others
             :
             who
             by
             their
             errors
             ▪
             and
             heresies
             ,
             went
             then
             about
             to
             peruert
             the
             Aposto
             lique
             Churches
             ,
             and
             corrupt
             the
             pure
             doctrine
             which
             was
             therein
             .
             Wherevntothe
             Apostles
             ,
             by
             all
             possible
             wayes
             ,
             did
             manfully
             oppose
             themselues
             :
             reuoking
             and
             euer
             reducing
             all
             things
             to
             their
             first
             institution
             ,
             and
             foundation
             of
             the
             pure
             word
             of
             God
             :
             as
             we
             see
             ,
             did
             S.
             Paul
             towards
             the
             C●rinthians
             ,
             and
             Galathians
             :
             whose
             Churches
             ,
             although
             he
             had
             well
             planted
             and
             watered
             ,
             were
             neuerthelesse
             corrupred
             in
             his
             life
             time
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             manners
             ,
             as
             in
             doctrine
             .
             And
             to
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             demaund
             ,
             how
             long
             after
             the
             decease
             of
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             continued
             the
             puritie
             of
             the
             doctrine
             and
             Religion
             in
             the
             Church
             of
             God
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             Article
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             as
             in
             others
             :
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             so
             long
             time
             it
             there
             continued
             ,
             as
             the
             word
             of
             God
             was
             followed
             and
             preached
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             say
             afterwards
             ,
             (
             traducing
             the
             Supper
             celebrated
             in
             the
             reformed
             Church
             )
             that
             the
             Ministers
             abuse
             those
             that
             are
             there
             present
             ,
             nought
             else
             giuing
             them
             ,
             but
             nothing
             betweene
             two
             dishes
             :
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             :
             that
             this
             blason
             much
             better
             fitteth
             the
             Doctors
             ,
             then
             them
             ,
             because
             they
             present
             not
             to
             them
             whom
             they
             haue
             summoned
             to
             their
             Masses
             ,
             but
             accidēts
             of
             indiuisible
             waues
             ,
             and
             the
             sight
             onely
             of
             the
             formes
             of
             bread
             and
             wine
             to
             feed
             them
             withall
             .
          
           
             A
             litle
             after
             do
             they
             call
             their
             sacrifice
             of
             the
             Masse
             most
             precious
             :
             whervpon
             the
             Ministers
             grant
             that
             they
             haue
             reason
             so
             to
             exault
             it
             :
             &
             to
             attribute
             thervnto
             ,
             so
             precious
             and
             magnificall
             a
             tytle
             ,
             for
             the
             great
             reuenewes
             and
             riches
             ,
             which
             this
             precious
             sacrifice
             hath
             brought
             vnto
             them
             :
             wherof
             may
             well
             be
             said
             ,
             that
             it
             hath
             bene
             vnto
             them
             a
             fleece
             ,
             and
             golden
             Myne
             ,
             more
             abundant
             then
             euer
             was
             that
             of
             Iason
             ;
             or
             all
             the
             Mynes
             of
             the
             East
             .
             In
             as
             much
             as
             they
             haue
             made
             the
             world
             beleeue
             (
             and
             chiefly
             the
             founders
             of
             Abbayes
             ,
             Priories
             ,
             and
             other
             benifices
             )
             that
             their
             sacrifices
             ,
             were
             vaileable
             to
             them
             for
             the
             redemption
             ,
             remedie
             ,
             and
             health
             of
             theyr
             soules
             .
             Afterwards
             ,
             without
             all
             shame
             do
             the
             Doctors
             call
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Lord
             detestable
             ,
             because
             there
             is
             nought
             
             therein
             offred
             (
             say
             they
             )
             but
             common
             bread
             &
             wine
             .
             Whervnto
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             in
             their
             Supper
             is
             truly
             presented
             bread
             and
             wine
             to
             the
             people
             ;
             which
             after
             consecration
             ,
             abide
             in
             their
             substance
             ,
             as
             before
             :
             but
             they
             denie
             that
             therfore
             the
             said
             bread
             and
             wine
             be
             common
             :
             by
             reason
             (
             as
             heretofore
             hath
             bene
             amply
             declared
             to
             the
             Doctors
             )
             that
             by
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             and
             recytall
             of
             the
             ordinance
             of
             God
             ,
             both
             the
             one
             and
             the
             other
             is
             changed
             (
             as
             is
             said
             )
             touching
             the
             vse
             ,
             but
             not
             touching
             the
             nature
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             wherein
             the
             Doctors
             do
             charge
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             to
             make
             insurrections
             ,
             conuenticles
             ,
             coniurations
             ,
             conspiracies
             ,
             and
             secret
             practises
             against
             the
             state
             of
             their
             Prince
             ,
             vnder
             colour
             &
             pretext
             of
             their
             Supper
             ;
             the
             Ministers
             answer
             ,
             that
             the
             same
             was
             not
             to
             impugne
             their
             doctrine
             ,
             but
             rather
             shamelesly
             to
             despight
             and
             slaunder
             them
             .
             And
             that
             the
             fidelitie
             of
             those
             of
             the
             reformed
             religion
             ,
             hath
             bene
             knowne
             and
             proued
             ,
             to
             the
             expense
             of
             their
             bloud
             ,
             and
             losse
             of
             their
             liues
             .
             So
             that
             the
             King
             and
             his
             Councell
             ,
             by
             his
             Edict
             ,
             hath
             declared
             them
             to
             haue
             bene
             very
             faithfull
             and
             well
             affected
             subiects
             to
             his
             Maiestie
             .
             And
             wee
             must
             not
             maruell
             if
             the
             Doctors
             thus
             slaunder
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             ;
             for
             as
             much
             as
             the
             Christians
             in
             all
             times
             haue
             bin
             accused
             of
             like
             crimes
             ,
             by
             the
             enemies
             of
             the
             truth
             .
             As
             it
             appeareth
             by
             the
             Apologie
             of
             Tertullian
             ,
             &
             the
             booke
             of
             S.
             
               Augustine
               ,
               de
               Ci●itate
               Dei
            
             :
             by
             the
             Tract
             of
             Saint
             Ciprian
             against
             Demetrius
             :
             and
             by
             the
             booke
             of
             Arnobius
             ,
             which
             he
             wrote
             against
             the
             Gentiles
             .
          
           
             But
             the
             Ministers
             much
             maruell
             ,
             how
             the
             Doctors
             are
             so
             ill
             aduised
             ,
             to
             alledge
             the
             suppers
             celebrated
             in
             the
             reformed
             Churches
             ,
             to
             verifie
             their
             accusations
             ;
             seeing
             that
             the
             same
             at
             this
             day
             ,
             being
             throughout
             publikely
             done
             ,
             in
             the
             eyes
             and
             presence
             of
             them
             that
             will
             behold
             them
             :
             there
             is
             nothing
             therein
             hidden
             ,
             and
             whereof
             each
             one
             (
             if
             he
             will
             )
             may
             not
             easily
             be
             informed
             .
             But
             this
             is
             the
             zeale
             and
             great
             charitie
             of
             my
             Lords
             our
             maisters
             (
             whereof
             they
             haue
             heretofore
             protested
             ,
             &
             that
             by
             inuocatiō
             of
             Gods
             name
             )
             which
             so
             transporteth
             them
             to
             slaunder
             ,
             without
             shame
             or
             shewe
             ,
             those
             whose
             iustice
             in
             that
             matter
             ,
             shall
             answere
             for
             them
             before
             God
             and
             men
             .
          
           
           
             Touching
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             ●●erwards
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Supper
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             no
             consecration
             is
             made
             ,
             of
             the
             matter
             of
             bread
             &
             wine
             ,
             which
             be
             there
             proposed
             .
             The
             Ministers
             do
             confesse
             ,
             that
             the
             bread
             and
             wine
             which
             be
             truly
             in
             their
             Supper
             ,
             are
             not
             consecrated
             in
             sort
             as
             the
             Doctors
             pretend
             to
             consecrate
             them
             in
             their
             Masse
             :
             For
             so
             they
             approue
             not
             such
             a
             consecration
             .
             But
             yet
             do
             they
             maintaine
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             in
             their
             Supper
             ,
             consecration
             of
             the
             matters
             aforesaid
             ,
             in
             sort
             ,
             as
             they
             in
             their
             articles
             ,
             and
             resolution
             haue
             heretofore
             very
             largely
             declared
             .
          
           
             The
             Doctors
             for
             proofe
             and
             confirmation
             of
             that
             aforesaid
             ,
             do
             adde
             ,
             that
             it
             belongeth
             not
             to
             all
             persons
             indifferently
             to
             consecrate
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             Sacraments
             ;
             but
             to
             them
             onely
             ,
             which
             are
             ordained
             by
             the
             laying
             on
             of
             hands
             of
             the
             Romane
             Bishops
             :
             wherevnto
             the
             Ministers
             for
             answer
             ,
             say
             ,
             that
             the
             first
             point
             ,
             they
             confesse
             :
             and
             also
             (
             as
             else-where
             they
             haue
             said
             )
             that
             calling
             is
             necessarie
             to
             such
             a
             purpose
             .
             But
             they
             denie
             vnto
             the
             Doctors
             notwithstanding
             ,
             that
             this
             calling
             is
             the
             imposition
             which
             they
             pretend
             :
             and
             the
             Ministers
             assure
             themselues
             ,
             that
             their
             calling
             is
             more
             lawful
             ,
             and
             better
             founded
             ,
             then
             is
             that
             of
             the
             Doctors
             .
          
           
             Whereas
             the
             Doctors
             propose
             in
             the
             article
             following
             ▪
             that
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             not
             answered
             them
             clearly
             enough
             to
             their
             liking
             ,
             touching
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             word
             required
             for
             the
             consecration
             of
             the
             matter
             ,
             which
             therein
             is
             .
             The
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             there
             is
             no
             doubtfulnesse
             ,
             obscuritie
             ,
             nor
             any
             inuolution
             in
             their
             writings
             ,
             sauing
             that
             which
             the
             Doctors
             will
             finde
             therein
             :
             the
             iudgement
             whereof
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             referre
             to
             the
             vpright
             readers
             .
             And
             yet
             they
             hold
             it
             not
             more
             straunge
             that
             the
             Doctors
             finde
             their
             writings
             obscure
             ,
             then
             did
             Saint
             Paul
             ,
             that
             his
             Gospell
             was
             hidden
             and
             couert
             ,
             to
             them
             which
             perished
             .
             And
             in
             whome
             the
             God
             of
             this
             world
             had
             blinded
             the
             mindes
             .
          
           
             To
             that
             of
             the
             presence
             of
             the
             body
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             for
             which
             the
             Doctors
             require
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ,
             a
             more
             large
             declaration
             ,
             then
             that
             they
             haue
             giuen
             in
             theyr
             former
             answere
             .
          
           
           
             The
             Ministers
             say
             ,
             that
             they
             haue
             the●evnto
             clearly
             answered
             ,
             albeit
             the
             Doctor●
             bee
             not
             satisfied
             with
             their
             〈◊〉
             whereat
             they
             nothing
             wonder
             ,
             knowing
             well
             it
             is
             not
             theyr
             custome
             to
             be
             contented
             if
             one
             yeeld
             not
             to
             them
             what
             they
             demaund
             ,
             and
             desire
             .
             Which
             the
             Ministers
             haue
             not
             determined
             to
             do
             ,
             much
             lesse
             to
             exceed
             in
             their
             answer
             the
             limits
             and
             bounds
             of
             the
             scripture
             ▪
             be
             it
             in
             this
             article
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             or
             in
             others
             :
             but
             rather
             to
             follow
             ,
             as
             neare
             as
             possibly
             they
             can
             ,
             the
             phrase
             and
             maner
             of
             speaking
             of
             the
             same
             .
             By
             means
             whereof
             ,
             for
             full
             answere
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             acknowledge
             no
             other
             eating
             of
             the
             flesh
             and
             bloud
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             ,
             bee
             it
             in
             the
             Supper
             ,
             or
             out
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             sauing
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             declareth
             in
             the
             sixt
             Chapter
             of
             Saint
             
               Iohn
               .
               Whosoeuer
               eateth
               my
               flesh
               ,
               and
               drinketh
               my
               bloud
               ,
               hath
               eternall
               life
               .
            
             Also
             ,
             
               He
               that
               eateth
               my
               flesh
               ,
               and
               drinketh
               my
               bloud
               ,
               dwe●leth
               in
               me
               ,
               and
               I
               in
               him
               .
            
             Also
             :
             
               As
               the
               liuing
               Father
               hath
               sent
               me
               so
               liue
               I
               by
               the
               Father
               ▪
               And
               he
               that
               eateth
               me
               ,
               euen
               he
               shall
               liue
               by
               me
               .
            
          
           
             To
             the
             last
             Article
             ,
             which
             is
             of
             Concomitance
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             answere
             ,
             that
             the
             demaund
             of
             the
             Doctors
             was
             not
             so
             hard
             but
             that
             they
             had
             well
             conceiued
             it
             .
             But
             they
             dissembled
             the
             same
             ,
             because
             they
             would
             not
             loose
             time
             to
             speake
             and
             write
             of
             such
             dreames
             .
             And
             they
             well
             thought
             that
             the
             Doctors
             were
             subtill
             inough
             ,
             to
             vnderstand
             that
             in
             their
             denying
             Transubstantiation
             ,
             it
             was
             not
             to
             pro●e
             their
             Concomitance
             .
             Now
             for
             their
             satisfaction
             ,
             they
             adde
             ,
             that
             they
             will
             know
             no
             more
             then
             that
             which
             Iesus
             Christ
             himselfe
             hath
             taught
             in
             his
             word
             .
             That
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             that
             in
             the
             Supper
             to
             participate
             in
             his
             flesh
             crucified
             ,
             and
             bloud
             shead
             for
             the
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             it
             behoueth
             to
             take
             and
             eate
             the
             bread
             ,
             &
             drinke
             the
             wine
             which
             be
             administred
             ,
             without
             any
             way
             diuiding
             or
             seperating
             the
             same
             .
             Which
             thing
             is
             also
             forbidden
             by
             the
             Canons
             ,
             
               De
               Consecr
               .
               Dist
            
             .
             2.
             
             
               C.
               Cū
               omne
               Crimen
            
             .
          
           
             
               Finished
               on
               
                 Wednesday
                 the
                 14.
                 of
                 August
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 yeare
                 aforesaid
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             This
             writing
             being
             sent
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             went
             shortly
             after
             towards
             my
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             ,
             to
             shew
             vnto
             him
             ,
             that
             they
             for
             theyr
             part
             ,
             had
             largely
             treated
             of
             this
             matter
             :
             but
             they
             well
             perceiued
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctors
             by
             theyr
             friuolous
             and
             impertinent
             questions
             ,
             hitherto
             sought
             not
             ,
             but
             to
             passe
             away
             the
             time
             ,
             without
             ought
             doing
             in
             the
             decyding
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Masse
             .
             And
             albeit
             they
             fayned
             ▪
             that
             such
             demaunds
             did
             serue
             for
             a
             preparatiue
             to
             this
             dispute
             :
             yet
             was
             it
             to
             no
             other
             end
             ,
             but
             not
             to
             enter
             thereinto
             at
             all
             :
             and
             to
             hold
             things
             in
             suspence
             ,
             vntill
             length
             of
             time
             should
             begin
             to
             be
             troublesome
             :
             and
             by
             that
             meane
             ,
             all
             should
             break
             off
             .
             That
             his
             lyking
             might
             be
             to
             make
             the
             Doctors
             vnderstand
             ,
             that
             without
             turning
             this
             or
             that
             way
             ,
             they
             should
             come
             to
             end
             the
             difference
             :
             refuting
             that
             which
             the
             Ministers
             had
             maintained
             of
             the
             Supper
             ,
             and
             supporting
             that
             which
             they
             had
             condemned
             in
             theyr
             Masse
             .
             Which
             thing
             he
             promised
             them
             to
             do
             .
             Of
             which
             promise
             ,
             began
             the
             Ministers
             to
             hope
             thence
             forward
             for
             some
             profitable
             matter
             ,
             and
             seruing
             to
             the
             edification
             of
             the
             Readers
             ,
             and
             rooting
             out
             of
             the
             greatest
             abuse
             and
             error
             that
             is
             in
             the
             Romane
             Church
             .
             Neuerthelesse
             ,
             shortly
             after
             was
             it
             bruted
             through
             the
             Citie
             ,
             that
             Doctor
             Vigor
             was
             fallen
             into
             a
             very
             daungerous
             disease
             ,
             and
             wherof
             was
             no
             hope
             he
             should
             hast●ly
             recouer
             :
             which
             made
             the
             Ministers
             feare
             ,
             that
             they
             were
             frustrate
             of
             theyr
             hope
             .
             And
             yet
             more
             did
             they
             feare
             ,
             when
             they
             vnderstood
             ,
             that
             the
             Doctor
             
               de
               Sainctes
            
             ,
             was
             the
             same
             time
             departed
             from
             Paris
             ,
             and
             gone
             towards
             Monsieur
             the
             Cardinal
             of
             Lorraine
             .
             For
             they
             could
             not
             otherwise
             presume
             ,
             but
             that
             they
             shuld
             make
             a
             long
             and
             vnprofitable
             aboad
             at
             Paris
             :
             not
             hauing
             wherewithall
             to
             imploy
             theyr
             time
             .
             Considering
             ▪
             they
             were
             not
             there
             but
             by
             accident
             :
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             
               de
               Spina
            
             was
             come
             thither
             ,
             to
             passe
             further
             ,
             and
             make
             a
             voyage
             into
             Aniou
             and
             the
             other
             ,
             who
             was
             Minister
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             Orleance
             ,
             was
             lately
             come
             forth
             of
             prison
             ,
             where
             he
             had
             beene
             brought
             ,
             in
             the
             Moneth
             of
             Iune
             next
             precedent
             ,
             vpon
             a
             false
             accusation
             ,
             suborned
             against
             him
             by
             the
             enemies
             of
             Gods
             Church
             ,
             which
             charged
             him
             to
             be
             author
             of
             a
             pernicious
             and
             wicked
             
             booke
             ,
             written
             against
             the
             obedience
             ,
             due
             to
             Kings
             and
             Princes
             .
             Therefore
             was
             it
             very
             hurtfull
             for
             him
             to
             so●ourn●
             so
             long
             a
             time
             ,
             in
             a
             Citie
             ,
             whither
             hee
             came
             against
             his
             lyking
             .
          
           
             For
             these
             causes
             ,
             they
             purposed
             to
             returne
             towards
             my
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             ,
             to
             shew
             vnto
             him
             ,
             the
             things
             aforesaid
             :
             and
             tell
             him
             ,
             that
             
               De
               Sainctes
            
             (
             who
             might
             haue
             stayed
             and
             ioyned
             some
             other
             with
             him
             in
             the
             stead
             of
             Vigor
             )
             was
             departed
             thence
             ,
             without
             making
             it
             knowne
             when
             his
             returne
             would
             be
             :
             that
             it
             was
             not
             reason
             ,
             they
             should
             stay
             there
             ,
             being
             incertaine
             of
             that
             which
             they
             had
             to
             doo
             :
             and
             considering
             that
             their
             Churches
             had
             need
             of
             them
             ,
             to
             execute
             therin
             their
             charges
             :
             and
             that
             they
             desired
             the
             same
             .
             Notwithstanding
             ,
             in
             the
             end
             they
             found
             it
             better
             to
             suffer
             an
             inconuenience
             ,
             and
             to
             abide
             there
             ,
             vntill
             my
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             departed
             from
             Paris
             :
             as
             in
             the
             end
             of
             the
             Moneth
             of
             August
             he
             should
             goe
             to
             his
             owne
             land
             called
             Co●lomiers
             .
             For
             seeing
             the
             Doctors
             were
             then
             absent
             ,
             (
             the
             Lord
             of
             Neuers
             being
             departed
             )
             the
             Ministers
             could
             doo
             nothing
             :
             not
             hauing
             whom
             to
             write
             vnto
             ,
             nor
             with
             whom
             to
             conferre
             .
          
           
             These
             remonstances
             being
             liked
             by
             the
             said
             Lord
             ,
             hee
             gaue
             them
             leaue
             to
             depart
             by
             writing
             ,
             signed
             ,
             
               Lodouico
               de
               Gonzague
            
             :
             and
             below
             ,
             Varin
             :
             Secretarie
             .
             Dated
             26.
             of
             August
             :
             wherein
             were
             declared
             the
             occasions
             ,
             here
             before
             touched
             ,
             and
             remōstrance
             of
             the
             Ministers
             ▪
             with
             promise
             made
             by
             the
             said
             Lord
             ,
             to
             cause
             the
             answeres
             which
             the
             Doctors
             would
             make
             ,
             to
             be
             brought
             vnto
             them
             .
             And
             that
             by
             the
             meane
             of
             
               Monsieur
               de
               Buci
            
             ,
             S.
             George
             ,
             who
             was
             charged
             with
             this
             businesse
             .
             Also
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             promised
             to
             be
             readie
             ,
             were
             it
             to
             returne
             to
             Paris
             :
             or
             else
             to
             answere
             from
             the
             place
             where
             they
             should
             be
             ,
             as
             often
             as
             the
             Doctors
             should
             write
             .
          
           
             These
             things
             thus
             done
             and
             passed
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             returned
             presently
             after
             ;
             supposing
             to
             haue
             some
             speedie
             newes
             from
             the
             Doctors
             .
             But
             they
             haue
             attended
             ,
             and
             yet
             do
             attend
             ,
             without
             that
             there
             hath
             bene
             any
             appearance
             thereof
             .
             And
             they
             vnderstood
             nothing
             of
             that
             matter
             ,
             sauing
             that
             many
             seuerall
             writings
             were
             afterwardes
             cryed
             and
             solde
             
             through
             the
             Citie
             of
             Paris
             .
             In
             the
             tytles
             whereof
             ,
             some
             found
             meane
             to
             enterlace
             the
             word
             
               [
               Conference
               ]
            
             ,
             to
             make
             shewe
             vnto
             the
             world
             ,
             that
             it
             was
             something
             ,
             touching
             the
             former
             disputations
             .
             And
             such
             a
             subtiltie
             indeed
             was
             not
             without
             great
             profit
             to
             the
             Printers
             .
             So
             great
             desire
             had
             men
             to
             know
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             thing
             .
             For
             contentation
             of
             whom
             ,
             we
             haue
             thought
             meet
             ,
             to
             bring
             to
             light
             what
             was
             done
             concerning
             the
             same
             :
             reseruing
             to
             another
             time
             ,
             to
             publish
             what
             the
             Doctors
             (
             when
             they
             shall
             do
             it
             )
             shall
             write
             against
             it
             :
             and
             what
             the
             Ministers
             also
             will
             there
             vnto
             answere
             ,
             if
             they
             can
             recouer
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             meane
             time
             shall
             each
             one
             be
             admonished
             to
             make
             profit
             of
             that
             which
             is
             here
             contained
             .
             And
             to
             pray
             the
             Father
             of
             lights
             ,
             to
             shead
             more
             &
             more
             the
             brightnesse
             of
             his
             spirit
             vpon
             his
             Church
             ,
             to
             the
             true
             vnderstanding
             of
             his
             holy
             word
             :
             for
             the
             restauration
             ,
             and
             aduancement
             of
             the
             spirituall
             kingdome
             of
             Iesus
             Christ
             his
             sonne
             ,
             our
             Lord.
             So
             be
             it
             ,
             the
             8.
             of
             Nouember
             ,
             1566.
             
          
           
             FINIS
             .
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
           A
           briefe
           Table
           of
           the
           titles
           of
           the
           Acts
           of
           the
           Disputation
           .
        
         
           THe
           Preface
           containing
           the
           occasions
           of
           the
           Dispute
           following
           .
        
         
           The
           first
           day
           of
           the
           Disputation
           ,
           which
           was
           Tuesday
           the
           9.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           1566.
           touching
           the
           assurance
           one
           ought
           to
           haue
           of
           the
           word
           of
           God
           :
           and
           of
           the
           meane
           to
           knowe
           what
           is
           the
           word
           of
           God
           :
           and
           to
           discerne
           betweene
           the
           bookes
           of
           the
           Bible
           :
           to
           call
           the
           one
           Canonicall
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Apocripha
           .
        
         
           The
           second
           day
           ,
           being
           Wednesday
           ,
           the
           10.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           touching
           the
           same
           matter
           :
           with
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           concluding
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           by
           the
           authoritie
           of
           the
           Church
           ,
           that
           the
           holy
           scripture
           is
           knowne
           to
           be
           the
           word
           of
           God
           :
           And
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Ministers
           to
           the
           contrary
           :
           That
           it
           is
           the
           spirite
           of
           God
           which
           sealeth
           and
           imprinteth
           the
           assurance
           thereof
           in
           the
           harts
           of
           the
           elect
           .
        
         
           The
           third
           day
           ,
           being
           Thursday
           ,
           the
           11.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           containing
           the
           demaunds
           and
           answeres
           vpon
           the
           Creede
           of
           the
           Apostles
           :
           and
           why
           it
           is
           so
           called
           .
        
         
           The
           fourth
           day
           ,
           being
           Friday
           ,
           the
           12.
           of
           Iuly
           :
           comprehending
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Doctors
           :
           concluding
           ,
           that
           it
           is
           by
           the
           tradition
           of
           the
           Church
           ▪
           that
           one
           is
           assured
           of
           the
           Creed
           of
           the
           Apostles
           :
           And
           that
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           tending
           to
           this
           :
           that
           it
           is
           knowne
           by
           the
           conformitie
           which
           it
           hath
           with
           the
           holy
           scriptures
           .
        
         
           The
           fift
           day
           ,
           being
           M●nday
           ,
           the
           15.
           of
           Iuly
           :
           where
           is
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           disputation
           of
           Gods
           Omnipotencie
           :
           vnder
           the
           couert
           whereof
           the
           Doctors
           do
           ground
           foure
           points
           ,
           contained
           in
           the
           63.
           
           Page
           .
           On
           this
           Omnipotencie
           ,
           and
           the
           points
           aboue
           said
           ,
           the
           disputes
           following
           :
           as
           well
           by
           word
           as
           by
           writing
           ,
           were
           continued
           .
        
         
           The
           sixt
           day
           of
           the
           Dispute
           ,
           Tuesday
           the
           16.
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
         
           The
           Ministers
           answere
           to
           the
           obiections
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           〈◊〉
           Tuesday
           the
           16.
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           The
           reply
           or
           obiection
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           against
           the
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           touching
           the
           article
           of
           Gods
           omnipotencie
           ,
           on
           Satterday
           the
           20.
           of
           Iuly
           .
        
         
           The
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           to
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           sent
           to
           them
           ,
           by
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           the
           22.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           about
           fiue
           of
           the
           clocke
           in
           the
           euening
           ▪
           the
           yeare
           ,
           1566.
           
        
         
           The
           reply
           of
           the
           Doctors
           to
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           sent
           to
           them
           by
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           the
           25.
           day
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           about
           8
           of
           the
           clocke
           in
           the
           euening
           ,
           the
           yeare
           ,
           1566.
           
        
         
           The
           Resolution
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           touching
           the
           article
           of
           the
           Almightinesse
           of
           God
           :
           in
           respect
           of
           the
           foure
           questions
           proposed
           by
           them
           to
           the
           Ministers
           .
           Which
           serue
           to
           the
           vnderstanding
           of
           the
           reall
           presence
           of
           the
           body
           and
           bloud
           of
           Iesus
           Christ
           in
           the
           holy
           Sacrament
           .
        
         
           The
           articles
           proposed
           by
           the
           Doctors
           for
           the
           next
           ,
           and
           other
           conferences
           following
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           order
           of
           the
           said
           articles
           .
        
         
           The
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           to
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           sent
           to
           them
           by
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Neuers
           ,
           the
           28.
           of
           Iuly
           ,
           about
           seuen
           of
           the
           clocke
           in
           the
           euening
           ,
           the
           yeare
           ,
           1566.
           
        
         
           A
           briefe
           resolution
           of
           all
           the
           answeres
           and
           discourses
           which
           the
           Ministers
           haue
           made
           vpon
           the
           matter
           of
           Gods
           omnipotencie
           ,
           in
           the
           conference
           which
           they
           haue
           had
           with
           the
           Doctors
           .
        
         
           The
           answeres
           to
           the
           preface
           of
           the
           Doctors
           questions
           .
        
         
           The
           answeres
           to
           the
           questions
           proposed
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           touching
           the
           Supper
           .
        
         
           A
           briefe
           reply
           of
           the
           Doctors
           against
           the
           last
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           sent
           to
           them
           by
           my
           Lord
           the
           Duke
           of
           Niuernois
           ,
           the
           first
           of
           August
           ,
           at
           7.
           of
           the
           clocke
           in
           the
           euening
           .
           Anno.
           1566.
           
        
         
           A
           briefe
           aduertisement
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           vpon
           the
           resolution
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           touching
           the
           omnipotencie
           of
           God.
           
        
         
           The
           obiection
           of
           the
           Supper
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           against
           the
           answeres
           of
           the
           Ministers
           .
        
         
           The
           answere
           of
           the
           Ministers
           ,
           to
           the
           writing
           of
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           and
           to
           them
           sent
           by
           my
           Lord
           of
           Niuernois
           ,
           Wednesday
           morning
           ,
           the
           7.
           of
           August
           .
           Anno.
           1566.
           
        
         
         
           The
           conclusion
           and
           resolution
           of
           the
           points
           ,
           as
           well
           of
           the
           Supper
           ,
           as
           of
           the
           Masse
           ,
           containing
           the
           declaration
           of
           that
           which
           the
           Ministers
           beleeue
           ,
           and
           teach
           in
           their
           Churches
           ,
           by
           the
           word
           of
           God
           ,
           concerning
           the
           same
           .
        
         
           Answeres
           to
           the
           last
           obiections
           ,
           proposed
           by
           the
           Doctors
           ,
           touching
           the
           Supper
           .
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           Errata
           .
        
         
           Page
           a
           ▪
           line
           20.
           
           For
           some
           others
           ,
           reade
           any
           other
           ▪
           Pa.
           6.
           li●
           1.
           next
           after
           prayers
           ,
           read
           therof
           .
           Pa.
           26.
           lin
           .
           7.
           for
           therfore
           ,
           there
           .
           Pa.
           35.
           li.
           vlt.
           for
           a
           it
           appeareth
           ,
           as
           it
           appeareth
           Pa.
           39.
           li.
           20
           ▪
           for
           O●d
           ,
           God.
           Pa.
           48.
           lin
           .
           31.
           
           Or
           whether
           there
           any
           ,
           Or
           whether
           there
           be
           any
           .
           Pa.
           70.
           li.
           13.
           
           After
           it
           may
           be
           ,
           put
           in
           [
           only
           ]
           Pa.
           71
           li.
           11.
           but
           those
           ,
           then
           those
           .
           P.
           73.
           li.
           2.
           put
           out
           not
           .
           Pa.
           74
           li.
           3.
           
           Angelius
           ,
           Angelus
           ,
           Pa.
           74
           li
           29
           Hypostali
           ,
           Hypostasy
           ,
           pa.
           78.
           li.
           33.
           antecent
           ,
           antecedent
           ,
           pa.
           80
           li
           37
           without
           place
           ,
           with
           place
           .
           pa.
           83.
           li.
           29.
           diuers
           vertues
           ,
           a
           diuers
           vertue
           .
           pa.
           84.
           l.
           30
           ▪
           within
           ,
           [
           with
           him
           ]
           p.
           85.
           li.
           36.
           
           Pamachiuns
           ,
           Pamachius
           .
           p.
           86.
           li.
           27.
           
           Cirell
           ,
           Cyril
           .
           pa.
           87.
           in
           margine
           ,
           Sect
           39.
           
           Sect.
           29.
           pa.
           88.
           li
           17.
           read
           in
           the
           margin
           .
           Hebr.
           4.
           14.
           pa.
           89.
           li
           22.
           put
           out
           is
           .
           pa.
           91.
           li.
           29.
           spiritualtie
           ,
           spiritualitie
           ▪
           pa.
           92.
           li.
           16.
           
           Theodoret
           ,
           Theodor.
           pa.
           92.
           li.
           21.
           things
           better
           cleared
           ,
           and
           things
           better
           cleared
           .
           pa.
           94.
           li.
           2.
           summoning
           ,
           ●ytation
           ,
           li.
           5.
           these
           words
           [
           they
           said
           to
           be
           done
           ]
           should
           be
           in
           the
           margine
           ,
           and
           not
           in
           the
           text
           .
           pa.
           103.
           
           Lin.
           25.
           the
           terme
           piercing
           ,
           the
           terme
           of
           piercing
           ,
           pa.
           105.
           
           Li.
           16.
           these
           ,
           those
           ,
           pa.
           110.
           
           Li.
           11.
           that
           God
           made
           one
           ,
           that
           if
           God
           made
           one
           ,
           pa.
           111.
           
           Li.
           15.
           
           Aerilem
           ,
           sterilem
           .
           pa
           114.
           
           Lin.
           33.
           speaketh
           ,
           speake
           .
           Ead.
           Lin.
           36.
           p●ace
           ,
           place
           .
           pa.
           115.
           
           Lin.
           33
           ,
           dimensions
           and
           of
           bodies
           ,
           dimentions
           of
           bodies
           pa.
           116
           Lin.
           12.
           
           Cod
           ,
           God
           ,
           pa.
           119
           Lin
           28
           ,
           the
           contradiction
           ,
           the
           like
           contradiction
           ,
           pa.
           120
           Lin
           10
           clausa
           ,
           clausae
           .
           pa.
           121
           Lin
           24.
           
           Imagined
           ,
           Imagine
           ,
           pa.
           122.
           
           Li.
           10.
           octijs
           ,
           ostijs
           ,
           pa.
           126
           Li.
           22.
           into
           ,
           in
           ,
           pa.
           127
           Lin
           ,
           11
           ,
           Fantasmatiques
           ▪
           Fantastiques
           ,
           Lin
           1●
           wicith
           ,
           with
           ,
           pa.
           129
           ,
           Lin
           7
           ,
           that
           heauens
           ,
           that
           the
           heauens
           ,
           pa.
           136
           L.
           34
           ,
           inequitie
           ,
           iniquitie
           .
           pa.
           139.
           
           L.
           1
           ,
           of
           ,
           for
           ,
           pa.
           140.
           
           Lin
           33.
           number
           &
           different
           ,
           number
           &
           fashion
           different
           ,
           pa
           151.
           
           Line
           7
           withstansteth
           ,
           withstandeth
           ,
           pa.
           155.
           lin
           7.
           placle
           ,
           place
           ,
           pa.
           156.
           
           Line
           24
           ,
           Cod
           ,
           God
           ,
           pa.
           16●
           .
           Line
           4
           ,
           depriuation
           ,
           deprauation
           ,
           pa.
           173
           ,
           Line
           34
           ,
           scriture
           ,
           scripture
           ,
           pa.
           180
           ,
           Lin
           34
           ,
           words
           ,
           workes
           ,
           pa.
           183
           ,
           Lin
           34
           ,
           but
           they
           ,
           but
           he
           ,
           pa.
           191
           ,
           Lin
           23
           ,
           pure
           care
           ,
           due
           care
           ,
           pa.
           195
           ,
           Lin
           7
           ,
           fanets
           ,
           fanels
           ,
           Lin
           2●
           ,
           imperfection
           ,
           in
           it
           perfection
           ,
           pa.
           196
           ,
           Lin
           25
           ,
           reception
           ,
           receiuing
           ,
           pa
           ,
           200
           ,
           Line
           6
           ,
           Artice
           ,
           Article
           ,
           pa
           ,
           202
           ,
           Line
           34
           ,
           vincentin
           ,
           vincentium
           ,
           pa.
           207
           ,
           Line
           31
           ,
           vpon
           solid
           reason
           ,
           vpon
           any
           solid
           reason
           ,
           pa.
           209
           ,
           Line
           33
           ,
           Albeit
           ,
           if
           ,
           pa
           ,
           219
           ,
           Line
           22.
           they
           ,
           read
           it
           ,
           pa
           ,
           220
           ,
           Line
           26
           ,
           spake
           ,
           speake
           ,
           pa
           ,
           2●2
           ,
           Marg
           :
           Psal
           ,
           37
           ,
           ●3
           ,
           Marg.
           1
           Cor
           :
           13
           ,
           1
           Cor
           :
           15
           ,
           pa.
           233
           Line
           10
           ,
           and
           he
           ,
           as
           he
           ,
           pa
           ▪
           237
           Line
           12
           ,
           hath
           as
           seales
           ,
           hath
           put
           as
           seales
           ,
           pa.
           240
           Line
           24
           for
           the
           name
           bread
           ,
           reade
           the
           name
           of
           bread
           .
           Pa.
           250.
           
           Margin
           ,
           right
           vnder
           Cap.
           10.
           reade
           Hom.
           17.
           
        
      
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A14408-e1260
           
             Rom.
             12.
             6.
             
          
           
             Esa
             .
             59.
             21.
             
          
           
             Deut.
             18.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             89.
             1.
             
             Ioh.
             22.
             27.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             5.
             23.
             1.
             
             Ioh.
             2.
             23.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             14.
             9.
             
          
           
             Matth.
             21
             27.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             I.
             22.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             5.
             2
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Tim.
             3.
             15.
             
          
           
             Psal
             .
             30
             ,
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14408-e3570
           
             Ezech.
             13
             
          
           
             Heb.
             13.
             
          
           
             I.
             Cor.
             1.
             10
             
          
           
             Rom.
             10.
             
          
           
             Inter
             diuinorum
             voluminum
             anotantur
             Historia●
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14408-e4700
           
             Rom.
             10.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             5.
             24.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14408-e5880
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             15.
             
          
           
             Luk.
             24.
             
          
           
             Heb.
             11.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14408-e6690
           
             Iohn
             .
             8.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Tim.
             1.
             
          
           
             Heb.
             6.
             
          
           
             Ier.
             32.
             
          
           
             Act.
             12.
             
             Act.
             5.
             
          
           
             Tit.
             1.
             
          
           
             Act.
             3.
             21.
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A14408-e7910
           
             Ioh.
             20.
             19.
             
          
           
             The
             4.
             booke
             .
             cap.
             17.
             sect
             .
             39
          
           
             Ioh.
             14.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             12.
             26.
             
          
           
             Act.
             7.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             King.
             21.
             
          
           
             1
             ▪
             Pet.
             2.
             
          
           
             Ecclesi
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             Iohn
             ,
             6.
             
             Ephes
             .
             1.
             
          
           
             Li.
             de
             vera
             Circoncisione
             ad
             finem
             .
          
           
             Esay
             45.
             
             Iere.
             18.
             
             Rom.
             9.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             11.
             
          
           
             Things
             impossible
             with
             God.
             yet
             in
             these
             
          
           
             impossibilities
             is
             his
             omnipotencie
             established
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Ioh.
             4.
             1.
             
          
           
             Hebr.
             10.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             5.
             
          
           
             Cone
             .
             3.
             
             C.
             26.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Cor.
             5.
             
          
           
             Psal
             .
             37.
             28.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             13
             ▪
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Cor.
             6.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             1.
             
             Iohn
             .
             14.
             
             Ephes
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             Iohn
             .
             17.
             
          
           
             2.
             
             Cor.
             4.
             13.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             10.
             
          
           
             Ephes
             .
             4.
             
          
           
             Ioh.
             6.
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             10.
             9.
             
          
           
             Math.
             26.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             21.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             
          
           
             Gen.
             17.
             
             Exod.
             12.
             
          
           
             Tit.
             3.
             
          
           
             Epist.
             23.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             11.
             
          
           
             
               Sermon
               :
               de
               Caen●
               dom
               .
            
             
               Epist
               .
               ad
               Rustic
               .
               Hom.
               6.
               ad
               pop
               .
               Antioch
               .
            
             
               Hom.
               45.
               in
               Iohn
               .
               Hom.
               27.
               in
               1.
               
               Cor.
               Hom.
               de
               Encaenijs
               .
               5
               Hom.
               26.
               
            
          
           
             Lib.
             4.
             
             Cont.
             Marcion
             .
             Lib.
             2.
             
             Epist
             .
             3.
             
          
           
             In
             liturg
             su●
             Psa
             .
             3.
             &
             cont
             Adamant
             .
             ca.
             20.
             
          
           
             Chap.
             26.
             in
             Math.
             
          
           
             Lib.
             4.
             de
             sacram
             .
             Chap.
             5.
             in
             Psa
             .
             22.
             
          
           
             Ps
             .
             51.
             
          
           
             Rom.
             12.
             
          
           
             Phil.
             4.
             
             Heb.
             13.
             
          
           
             Chap.
             10.
             
          
           
             Epist
             23.
             
          
           
             Contra
             Faust
             lib.
             20.
             cap.
             21.
             
          
           
             *
             
               Iesus
               Christ
               the
               onely
               sacrifice
               propiciatory
               of
               the
               new
               Testament
               .
            
             
               The
               Sacramēt
               improperly
               termed
               a
               Sacrifice
               ;
               ●y
               reason
               of
               the
               cōcurrence
               of
               these
               5.
               
               Christiā
               Sacrifices
               therin
               :
               namely
               :
               Contrit●ō
               ,
               Mortification
               ,
               Praises
               ,
               Almes
               &
               celebration
               of
               the
               memory
               of
               Christ
               .
               Euery
               member
               of
               Christs
               Church
               a
               Priest
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Masse
             is
             a
             corruption
             and
             ruine
             of
             Christs
             institution
             in
             his
             Supper
             .
          
           
             The
             ende
             of
             Christs
             institution
             in
             the
             Sacrament
             ,
             abolished
             by
             the
             Masse
             .
          
           
             The
             Priest
             in
             the
             Masse
             most
             impiously
             vsurpeth
             the
             proper
             offices
             of
             Christ
             himselfe
             .
          
           
             What
             Christ
             in
             celebration
             of
             his
             Supper
             hath
             cōmanded
             ,
             that
             the
             Popish
             Priests
             in
             their
             Masse
             neglect
             :
             and
             what
             Christ
             hath
             not
             commaunded
             ,
             and
             is
             impossible
             for
             any
             but
             himself
             to
             do
             ,
             dare
             they
             attempt
             to
             do
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             11.
             20.
             21.
             
          
           
             In
             Epist
             .
             ad
             Ephes
             .
             Serm.
             3.
             
          
           
             An
             excellent
             note
             to
             proue
             the
             Masse
             a
             shifting
             forgery